Cengage Coordinate Geometry (1) - Compressed

Contents
Contents
——
Preface
Preface Linked Comprehension
Linked Comprehension Type
Type 1.31
Matrix Match
Matrix Match Type
Type 1.31
1.1. Coordinate System
Coordinate System 1.1-1.34
Numerical Value
Numerical Value Type
Type 1.32
Introduction
Introduction 1.1 Archives
Archives 1.33
Rectangular (or Cartesian)
Rectangular (or Cartesian) Coordinate System
Coordinate System 1.1
Answers Key
Answers Key 1.33
Transformation of Axes
Transformation of Axes 1.2
Concept Application Exercise ] 1 2. Straight Lines
Straight Lines 2.1-2.42
Concept Application Exercise 1.1 1.4
Distance Formula
Distance Formula and and Area
Area of
of Polygon
Polygon 1.4 Equation of
Equation of Line
Line inin Different
Different Forms
Forms 2.1
Dista nce Formu
Distance Formula la 1.4 Equation
Equation of
of Line
Line in
in Point-Slope
Point-Slope Form
Form 2.1
Area of
Area of aa Polygon 1.6 Equation of
Equation of Line
Line Passing
Passing Through
Through Two
Two Points
Points
Polygon
Conce pt Appli cation Exercise
Concept Application Exercise 1.2
1 2 1.8 (Two Points
(Two Points Form)
Form) 2.3
Section Formula
Section Formula 1.9 Equation of
Equation of Line
Line in Intercept
in Intercept Form
Form 2.5
Internal Division
Internal Division 1.9 Equation of Line
Equation of Line in Normal Form
in Normal Form 2.7
External Division
External Division 1.9 Concept Application
Concept Application Exercise
Exercise 2.1
2 | 2.8
Coordinates ofof Different
Different Centres
Centres of
of Triangle
Tnangle 110 Equation ofof Straight
Straight Line
Coordinates 1.10 Equation Line in
in Symmetric
Symmetric form
form
Centr oid
Centroid 1.10
1.10 (Parametr ic or
(Parametric Distance form)
or Distance form) 2.9
Circu mcentre 111 Concept
Circumcentre 1.11 Application Exercise
Concept Application Exercise 22.22 2.11
Ortho centre
Orthocentre 1.12
1.12 Distance
Distance of
of aa Point
Point from
from aa Line
Line 2.11
Incent re
Incentre 1.13
1.13
Concept
Concept Applicat ion Exercise
Application Exercise 22.33 2.14
Excentres of
Excen tres of Trian gle
Triangle 1.14
1.14
Position
Position of
of aa Point
Point w.r.t.
w.r.t. aa Line
Line
of aa Line
Slope of
Slope 2.15
Line 115
1.15
Conce pt Appli cation Exerc Division
Division of
of Plane
Plane by
by Line
Line 2.17
Concept Application ise |1.3
Exercise 3 ETS
ty
1.15
Slope of Line Joinin Given
g Given Two
Two Points Concept
Concept Applicat ion Exercise
Application Exrercise 22.4
4
Slope of Line Joining Points 1 1.16
16 2.19
oOo
Loy
yg
Slope of Line Havin g Given Equat
Slope of Line Having Given Equation ion 1.16 Imag e of
Image ofaa Point
Point inin aa Line
Line and
and Equa
Equation
1.16 tion
Angle
Angle betwe en Two
between Two Lines
Lines 1.17
1.17 of Angle Bisectors
of Angle Bisectors
2.19
Conce pt Appli cation Exerc ise | 1.4
4 Foot
Foot ofofPer pendicular Dra
1.19 Perpendicular wn from
Drawn from aa Poin
Point
t onon
Polar a a Line
Line and
PolarCoord inates and Ima ge ofofPoin
Image t ina Line
Point in Line
Coordinates 1.19
1.19
a 2.19
Coord inate Conve
Coordinate rsion
Conversion 1.20 Equ ations ofofBis
Equations ectors ofof the
Bisectors the AAngles between
1.20 ngle s between
Conce pt Appli cation Exerc ise 1.5 the Line
the s
Lines
Concept Application Exercise 1.5 1.2]
1.21 2.21
Locus Bis ector Con
Bisector taining the
anditsitsEquat
Locusand ion
Equation 1.21
1.21 Containing the Giv en Poi
Given Point
nt 2.21
Finding Equation
Finding EquationofofLocus
LocusbybyEliminat ion ofof
Elimination Con cep t
ConceptApp lication Exe
Application Exercise
rcise 2 2.5
§ 2.24
Given
GivenVariable
Variable 1.23
1.23 Con currency ofofThr
Concurrency ee Lines and
Three Lines andFam ily
Family
Concept
ConceptApplication
ApplicationExercise
Exercise1.6
1.6 I 1.23
23 ofofStr aight Lin
Straight es
Lines
2.24
Solved
SolvedExamples 124 Con currency ofofThr
Concurrency Three Lines
ee Lin
Examples 1.24 es 2.24
Exercises Fam ily ofofLin
Family Lines
es
Exercises 1.27
1.27 2.25
Single
SingleCorrect
CorrectAnswer
AnswerType Con cept App
Concept lication Exe
Iype 127
1.27 rcise 2.62.6 2.2
Muluple
MultipleCorrect
CorrectAnswers
AnswersType
Type / 1.30
30 Sol ved Exa
Solved mples
Examples
2.2
iv iv Content s
Contents - aes _ -
Maxi mum and
Maximum andMini mum Dista
Minimum nce ofofa aPoint
Distance Point
2.32
Exercises
Exercises fromthe
from theCircl e
Circle
2.32
2.32 andCircl
Lineand e 4.13
Single Correct Answer Type
Single Correct Answer Type Inter section ofofLine
Intersection Circle
Answers Type 2 2.36
36 th ofofTang to Circl
ent to Circle e 4.14
CorrectAnswers
MultipleCorrect
Multiple
Type Leng
Length Tangent
2.38
2 38 4.15
Linked Comprehension Type Secant
Secant of
of Circl e
Circle
Match Tipe
MatrixMatch
Matrny Type 239
2.39
Equa tion ofofChor
Equation Chordd ofofCircl e Bisec
Circle ted atat
Bisected
4.16
2.40
V'alue Type
Numerical Value
Numerical Type zal) Give n Point
Given Point
4.18
2.41
2.41 Conc ept Appli cation Exerc
Application ise 4 4.3
Exercise 3
Archives
Archives Concept 4.18
Answers Ke\
Ker
2.42
2.42 Tange nt and
Tangent and Norm al toto Circl
Normal e
Circle
Answers 4.19
Equat ion ofofTange
Equation nt toto Circl
Tangent e atat a aGiven
Circle Given Point
Point
3.1-3.10
3.1-3.10
onon the
the Circl e
3.3. Pair of Straight Lines
Pair of Straight Lines Circle
4.19
Straight Lines
Pair ofofStraight Lines 3.1
3.1 Equat ion ofofTange
Equation nt toto Circl
Tangent e Havin
Circle Havingg Given
Given Slope
Slope 4.20
Equation ofofPair
Equation
Equat ion ofofTange nts toto Circl e Draw n from
Equation ofof
General Equation the Second Degree inin
the Second Degree
Equation Tangents Circle Drawn from
General al Point 42)
Two Vanables
Variables 3.1
3.1 Extern
External Point 4.21
Two 42
32.
3.2 Equati
Equation ofTangen
Pair of
on ofof Pair ts
Tangents
Exercise Sf 4.22
Concept ApplicationExercise
Concept Application
3.1
Chord of ofContac t 423
3:3
3.3 Chord Contact 4.23
Homogeneous Equation
Second-Degree Homogeneous
Second-Degree Equation 433
34 Direct
Director or Circle
Circle 4.23
between Pair
Angle between
Angle
of Straight Lines
Pair of Straight Lines 3.4
424
Normal
Normal to
to Circle
Circle 4.24
of Angle
Pair of
Equation ofof Pair of Given
Bisectors of
Angle Bisectors Given
Equation ation Exerci se 44.44 425
Straight Lines
3.4 Conce
Conceptpt Applic
Application Exercise 4.25
Pair of 425
Homogenization of of Second Degree Equation
Second Degree Equation 35
3.5 Differ ent Cases
Different Two Circle
of Two
Cases of s
Circles 4.25
Homogenization s 425
3:
3.5 Radica
Radical Axis of
l Axis Two Circle
of Two Circles 4.25
Concept Applicaton Exercise
Concept Application 2
Exercise 33.2
Radica
Radical Axes of
l Axes Three Circle
of Three s Taken
Circles Two atat aa
Taken Two
3.6
3.6 426
Sohved Examples
Solved Examples Time and
Time Radical Centre
and Radical Centre 4.26
38
3.8 Disjoint Circle s 426
Exercises
Exercises Two
Two Disjoint Circles 4.26
Correct Answer Type 38
3.8 Circles Touch
Two Circles Externally
ing Externally 427
Single Correct
Single Answer Type Two Touching 4.27
Type
Vultiple Correct Answers Type
Multiple Correct Answers 39
3.9 Two Circles
Two Internally
Touching Internally
Circles Touching +28
4.28
Tvpe 3.9
3.9 Circles
Intersecting Circles 429
Linked Comprehension
Linked Comprehension Type Two Intersecting
Two 4.29
Type
Value Type
Numerical Value
Numerical 310
3.10 One Contained in
Circle Contained
One Circle the Other
in the Circle
Other Circle
Touching
without Touching 432
4.32
Answers
Answers Key
Kev 310
3.10 without
4 5
Exercise 4.5
Application Exercise 433
Concept Application
Concept 4.33
4. Circle
Circle 4.14.54
4.1-4.54
Family of
Family Circles
of Circles 433
435
Definition 41
4.1 Application Exercise
Concept Application 4 6
Exercise 4.6 Sy
4.35
Definition Concept
Equation
Equation of Circle in
of Circle Form
Centre-Radius Form
in Centre-Radius 4]
4.1
Solved Examples
Solved Examples 433
4.35
Equation of
Equation Circle Touching
of Circle or Both
One or
Touching One the
Both the Exercises
Exercises
$40
4.40
44
4.4 +40
Coordinate Axes
Coordinate Axes Correct Answer
Single Correct
Single Type
Answer Type 4.40
General
General Form
Form of Equation of
of Equation Circle
of Circle 4$§
4.5
Multiple Correct Answers
Multiple Correct Type
Answers Type f80
4.46
Equation of
Equation of Circle
Circle Passing through Three
Passing through Points
Three Points 47
4.7 Comprehens
Linked ion Type
Type +4
447
41 48 Matrix Match Type +50

4.50
Concept Exercise 4.1
Applicanon Exercise
Concept Application 4.8 Matrix Match Type
Type
Value Type
Numerical Value 43i
451
Some More
Some More Forms
Forms of
of Equation Circle
of Circle
Equation of 4.8
4.8 Numerical
#i
4.5
Equation
Equation of Circle Having
of Circle Points
End Points
Given End
Having Given Archives
Archives
of Chord
of Chord which
which Subtends
Subtends Given
Given Angle
Angle atat the
the Answers Key
Answers Key 43?
4.53
Circumference
Circumference 48
4.8
Points 5.1-5.48
5.1-548
Equation
Equation of
of Circle
Circle Having
Having Given kend Points
Given End 5. Parabola
Parabola
49 -
5.1
of Diameter
of Diameter 4.9 Conic Section:
Conic Introduction
Section: Introduction
Equation
Equation of Form
Parametric Form
Circle inin Parametric
of Circle 4.10 Locus of
Section asas Locus Point
of aa Point :
5.1
4.10 Conte Section
Conic
Equation
Equation of Circle Circumscribing
of Circle Triangle
Circumscribing Triangle Equation of
Standard Equation
Standard Parabola
of Parabola
5.2
411 54
and Quadrilateral
and Quadrilateral 4.11 Chord of
Equation of Chord Bisected atat
Parabola Bisected
of Parabola
Equation of 5. Z ‘
Concept Application 4.2
Exercise 4.2 4/2
4.12 Given Point
Given Point
Parabola 5.55 .
4.12 on
Positi ofa Point with
of a Point Respect toto a a Parabola
with Respect
Geometry with Circle
Geometry with Circle 4.12 Position
5.5
Position Circle 4.12 Parametric Form Parabola
of Parabola
Form of
Position of
of Point
Point w.r.t.
wrt Circle 4.12 Parametric
|
seep oo Contents
Contents v V
Con cept Applicanan Exe
Concept Application rcise § 5.1
Exercise ] S56
5.6 Equation Chord ofofEllipse
Equation ofofChord Bisected atat
Ellipse Bisected
Other
Oth er For
Forms
ms ofofPar
Parabola
abola Given
Given Point
Point 69
$7
5.7 6.9
Equation of Parabola Having
nuaien of Parabola Having Axis
Axis Parallel
Parallel toto v-Axis
x-Axis 575.7 Concept Applicat
ion Exercise 2 69
6.9
Equation
quation ofofParabola
Parabola Having Axis Parallel
Having Axis Parallel toto v-Axis Parametr ic Form
Form ofofEllipse 610
Equation ofofPara
y-Axis 5 5.77 Parametric Ellipse 6.10
Equation bola with
Parabola with Give n Focu
Given Focuss Some Importan
Some t Properti
Important es ofof Ellipse
Properties Ellipse 613
6.13
and
and Dire
Directrix
ctrix 510
5.10 Chord ofof Ellipse
Equation ofofChord
Equation Ellipse 614
6.14
Concep t Applica
tion Exercis e 5.262 Concept Applicat Exercise 66.3
ion Exercise 3 614
SZ.
5.12 Concept Application 6.14
Focal
Focal Chord
Chord and
and tts
its Propert ies
Properties $12
5.12 Tangent toto Ellipse
Tangent Ellipse 614
6.14
Concep
Conceptt Applica tion Exercis
Application Evercise AA Line and anan Ellipse
Line and 614
e §5.3
3 S14
5.14 Ellipse 6.14
Equation of Tangent Ellipse Having
Equation of Tangent toto Ellipse Given Slope
Having Given 15
Slope 66.15
Tangen
Tangentt toto Parabol
Parabolaa 5.14
5.14
Equatio n ofof Tangen
Tangent at a Given
Ellipse ata
t toto Ellipse Given
Intersection of aa Line
Intersection of Line and
and aa Parabol
Parabolaa 5.14 Equation
Point
Point on
on ttit 616
6.16
Equatio
Equation n ofof Tangen
Tangent to Standard Parabola
t to Standard Parabola 5.14
Point 6 18
Equation of Tangent
Equation of from External
Ellipse from
Tangent toto Ellipse External Point 6.18
Equatio
Equation n ofof Tangen
Tangentt toto any
any Parabol
Parabola
a 5.17
Tangents from External Point
from External 18
Point 46.18
Equation of Pair
Equation of of Tangents
Pair of
Equatio
Equationn ofof Pair
Pair ofof Tangen
Tangents
ts 5.18 619
Director
Director Circle
Circle 6.19
Equatio
Equationn of
of Chord of Contact
Chord of Contact 5.19
Chord
Chord ofof Contact
Contact 419
6.19
Concept
Concep Application
t Applica e 55.44
Exercise
tion Exercis 5.20 Properties
Properties of
of Tangent
Tangent §6.21
2]
Propert
Properties of Tangen
ies of Tangentt 5.20
Concept Application
Concept 4
Exercise 66.4
Application Exercise §6.23
23
Locus
Locus of
ofPoint
Point of
of Intersection
Intersection of
of Tangent
Tangent
Normal
Normal toto Ellipse
Ellipse §6.23
23
under Different
under Different Conditions
Conditions 5.22
Equation Normal to
Equation ofof Normal Ellipse atat aa Given
to Ellipse Given
Concept
Concept Application
4pplication Exercise
Exercise 55.5
5 5.23 Point on
Point on itit 6 23
6.23
5.23 Equation of
Equation Normal to
of Normal with Given
Ellipse with
to Ellipse Slope
Given Slope 624
6.24
Normal
Normal to
to Parabola
Parabola
from aa Point Lying on
not Lying 25
onitit = 55.25 Important Property Normal
of Normal
Property of 66.25
25
Normal to
Normal Parabola from
to Parabola Point not Important
Conorma
Conormall Points
Points 66.26
26
5 6 5.27
5.27 Concept Application

Concept 6 5
Exercise 6.5
Application Exercise 5 26
6.26
Properties of
Properties of Normal
Normal
Examples
Solved Examples 62°
6.27
Conormal Point
Conormal Point and
and its
its Properties
Properties 5.29 Solved
Concept Applicati on Exercise

Application 57
Exercise 5.7 5.31 Exercises
Exercises 6.30
Concept
5.31 Single Correct
Single Correct Answer
Answer Type
Tvpe 6.30
Soh ed Examples
Solved Examples
S.37
Multiple Correct
Answers Type
Tvpe 6.33
Exercises
Exercises
ension
Linked Compreh
Linked Comprehension TypeT\ pe 6.34
Correct Answer
Single Correct
Single Type
Answer Type 5.37
Matrix Match
Matrix Match Type
Type 36
Mulnple Correct Type
Answers Type 5.41
Numerical Value
Type 6.37
Linked Type
Comprehension Type
5.43
5.44 Archives
Archives 6.37
Matrix Match
Matrix Match Type
Type
5.45 Answers Key
Answers Ke\' 6.40
Numerical Value
Type
5.45
Archives
Archives 7. Hyperbola
Hyperbola 7.1-7.42
5.47
Answers key
Answers Key Definition
Definition 7.1
Concept Application Exercise 7.1 7 1
6. Ellipse 6.1-6.40
6.1-6.40
Ellipse Equation of
Equation of Hyperbola
Hyperbola and
and Its
Its Properties
Properties
6.)
6.1
Standard Equation
Equation of
of Hyperbola
Hyperbola 73
Definition
Definition Standard 7.3
6 1
Exercise 6.1 63
6.3 Hyperbola Having
Having Axes
Axes Parallel
Parallel toto Coordinate
Coordinate Axes
Axes 7.77.7
Concept Application Hyperbola
Equation Ellipse inin Different
of Ellipse Forms
Different Forms 6.3
6.3 Equation of
Equation of Hyperbola
Hyperbola Referred
Referred toto
Equation of
Standard Equation of F:Jlipse
Standard Equation of Ellipse 63
6.3 Two Perpendicular Lines as
Two Perpendicular Lines as Axes
Aves 7.9
Equation Having
Ellipse Having
of Ellipse Parallel toto
Axes Parallel
Axes Division of Plane by
Division of Plane by Hyperbola
Hyperbola 7.9
Equation of
Coordinate Axes
Coordinate Axes 66
6.6 Important Property
Important Property of
of Focal
Focal Chord
Chord 7.10
Equation of an
Equation of Ellipse Referred
an Ellipse 1 wo
Referred toto Two I:quation ofof Chord
Equation Chord of
of Hyperbola
Elyperbola Bisected
Bisected
67
6.7
Perpendicular Lines
Perpendicular Lines as Axes
as Axes atat Given
Given Point
Point 7.10
6.7
6.7
Area of
Area Ellipse
of Ellipse Parametric
Parametric FormForm of
of Hyperbola
Hyperbola 7.11
Position of Point w.r.t.
of aa Point Ellipse
w.r.t Ellipse 6.8
6.8 Important Property
Position Important Property ofof Auxiliary
Auxiliary Circle
Circle 7.11
Chord 6.8
6.8
Equation of
Important Property of Focal Chord
Important Property of Focal Equation of Chord
Chord of
of Hyperbola
Hyperbola 7.12
vivi Contents
Contents
713 Concept Application
Concept 7.6
Exercise 7.6
Concept Application 7 2
Exrercise 7.2 7.13 ?7.28
28
Examples
Solved Examples 15
Tangent to
to Hyperbola LA
7.13 Solved
Tangent Hyperbola 1.28
7.13 Exercises 74)
A Line
A Line and
and aa Hyperbola
Hyperbola 7.13 Exercises
7.32
Type
Answer Type
Correct Answer
Single Correct 7)
Equation of Tangent to
Equation of Tangent Hyperbola Having
to Hyperbola Having Single
7.32
7.14 Multiple Correct
Answers Type
Type 1 16
Given
Given Slope
Slope 7.14 7.36
on itif
Point on
at aa Point 7.15 Type
Comprehension Type
Linked Comprehension 139
Equation
Equation of to Hyperbola
Tangent to
of Tangent Hyperbola at 7.15 Linked 7.37
not Type
Match Type
Matrix Match 734
Tangents toto Hyperbola
Tangents Point not
from aa Point
Hyperbola from Matrix
7.38
7.16
7.16 Numerical Value Type
Value Type 134
Lying
Lying on it and
on it and Chord
Chord of
of Contact
Contact Numerical 7.39
Director
Director Circle
Circle 717
7.17 Archives
Archives 7 4h
7.40
of Tangent
Properties of Hyperbola
Tangent toto Hyperbola 7.18
7.18
Key 74)
Properties Answers Key
Answers 7.42
Concept Application
Exercise 7.3
7 3 718
7.18
Concept oe
Solutions
Solutions S.1-S.174
Asymptotes of
Asymptotes Hyperbola (Tangent
of Hyperbola Infinity)
at Infinity)
(Tangent at 7.19
.19
Chapter | S|
Properties of
Properties of Asymptotes
Asymptotes 7.20
7.20 Chapter S.I
Chapter 22 S19
Concept 4pplication
Exercise 7.4
7 4 721
7.21 Chapter S.19
Chapter 33
Chapter 547
Normal to
Normal to Hyperbola
Hyperbola Ezz
7.22 S.47
722 Chapter 44 $53
Equation of Normal
Equation of Normal to at aa
Hyperbola at
to Hyperbola Point it
on it
Point on 7.22 Chapter S.53
Equation of
Equation of Normal
Normal to
to Hyperbola
Hyperbola Having
Having Chapter 55
Chapter 5 89
S.89
Grven Slope
Given Slope 7.22
7.22 Chapter 66
Chapter S 124
S.124
Important Property
Important Property of
of Normal
Normal 724
7.24 Chapter 77
Chapter § 152
S.152
Concept Application
Exercise 7.5
7 5 7.25
7.25 \ppendin 1:
Appendix
Hyperbola Having
Hyperbola Having Asymptotes
Asymptotes as
as Coordinate
Coordinate Axes
Axes 725
7.25 Chapterwise Solved
Chapterwise Selved January
January 2019
2019 JEE
JEE Main
Muir
Sets)
(Adi Sets)
Questions (AJI EA a
Tangent and
Tangent and Normal
Normal to
to Hyperbola
Hyperbola 7.26
7.26 Questions A.1-A.4
Coordinate System
ee
INTROD UCTION When the axes WON and YOY are not at right angles, they are
-
The coordination ofalgebia and geometry IS Coordinate geometry said to he oblique axes.
When point P(r, v) 1s reflected in x-axis its image 15 Q(x, -)
Historically . coordinates were intoduced to help geometry And
so well did they do this job that the \ ery identity of geometry was and when tt 1s reflected in y-axis its image 1s R(x, V)
changed The word * geometry” today generally means
coordinate v
? ¢
geometry * Ay, x)
R(-x, v) P(x. 4) | z
In coordinate geometry, all the Properhes of geometrical *
figures are studied with the help of algebraic equations : .
The 2 re
object of cordate geometry 1s to use some known facts about | >
ns
acurve in order to obtain its equation and then deduce other Vis
2 $1 ——_——* v
properties of the cure from the equation so obtained For this
purpose. We require | Ax, v) |
a coordinate system There are various i e y’
BPE oF Coordinate systems present in two cimiensiOnsi. 6:8, The equation of angle bisector of first and third quadrants
rectangula r, oblique. polar. triangular system, ete Here. we will
Se
a
only discuss rectangular coordinaa"te system
c in detail , isv =x The image of point P(x, ¥) when it 1s : reflected in the ~line
8 P (2.9)
"=v 1s Oly, x), 1e , coordinates are interchanged
RECTANGULAR (OR CARTESIAN) Translation of Point
COORDINATE SYSTEM
Let VOX and )'O} be two fixed straight hnes When a point or figure on a coordi plane
nat
is moved
e
at right angle by
sliding it to the right, left, up or down, the
movement 1s called
YONV1s called .-axis or horizontal
avis. or YOY ts called V-aX1s
\erucal axis and the point of intersection a translation Following are the coordinates
of both the axes 1 e,O of new pomt-« ben
1s called the origin. Two axes divide the plane potnt P(x, y) 1s translated
into four regions, Translation of k umits to the right
called quadrants Name of the quadrant and sign of coordinates — (x + A.)
't 1) are shown in the following figures Translation of units to the left. > (x ~ . 1)
) Translation of k units up > OQ
y Translation of k units down A)
(VB)
« J ,! i YY . P(x y) ILLUSTRATION
v
i as 1.1
ve ve \
| - Find the number of integral points
—__—-_____,
7) x ol (both the coordinates
ay
=<
4
— - ——
should be integer) exactly in the interio
—»/)Y a
I r of the tangle with

IV (y vertices (0, 0) (0, 21) and (21, 0)
(x, 3) rf ty
ty Ms |
Sol. }"
vy aa
(ay (b) 0,21)B
Ore i Ce 25
Consider point P(x,y) in first quadrant t = a
From any point ?, a line
's drawn parallel to OY The directed line OM B
= x and MP = y.
Here, OM Is abscissa and MP 45 ordinate
abscissa OMY and the ordinate of the point P- The
MP logether written as (x,
ae Coordinate y) are
s of point /, Here, (x, y)
1s an ordered pair of
€al numbers yx and y, which
determime the position of
ieee x and y can be negative point P.
or positive depending upon the
sly a mM which the point P(x, ¥)
hes, tts distance from x-axis
nd that from Y-axis 1S |x}, z _—_—— nn, |
mce YOY is Perpendicular la
to YOY, this system 20 EEO)
's called rectangular (or orthogonal) coordinateof
Te
we
y!
Coordinate Geometry = , 3
square OACB = 20 x 20 = 400
a_i
Tc | number of points within the
. (2,19).
line 4B which are (1, 20)
mere are 20 points on the
Th oa n : |
(20, 1) Coordinates of S are (- ae
AABC = 400 — 20 — 3%
Pomts within AOAB and
380
380 199
hin AO.AB =
By symmetry, points wit %
“~ TRANSEORMATION OF AXES
As stated carlicr, coordinate systems are essential for
ILLUSTRATION 1.2 equations of curves using the methods of analytic ge
‘Omet
ormations
The point (4, 1) undergoes the follow ing three transf use the method of coordinate geometry, the axes are ,
Placed at g
successi\ ely * convenient position with respect to the curve under co NSideration
If the curve (parabola, ellipse, hyperbola, ete ) 1s not situa
(i) Reflection about the line v= 1
conveniently with respect to the axes, the coordinate ee
(1) Translation through a distanee 2 units along the positive
should be changed to place the curve at a convenient and farethe
direction of 1-anis
location and orientation. The process of making this Change |,
(in) Rotation through an angle of 2/4 about the origin in the
counter clockwise direction called transformation of coordinates There are basically tw,
Find the final position of the point types of transformations, shifting of origin (translation of axes)
and rotation of axes
Sol. Reflecnion of P(4. 1) about the hne v = 1 1s O(1, 4). Shifting of Origin/Translation of Axes
On translanon of Q(1. 4) through a distance of 2 units along
The shifting (translation) of the coordinate axes 1s done withoyt
positive direction of \-axis. the pomt moves to R(] + 2, 4) or rotation so that each axis remains parallel to its original position,
R(3. 4) Let point P has coordinates (x, }) in omginal coordinates
On rotation about ongin through an angle of 7/4, the point R takes system 1.e. in xy-coordinate system. If the axes are translated a
the position S such that OR = OS = 5 distance /1 to the right and a distance & upward. the ongin takes
new position as O(h, k). Here coordinates (A. &) are with respect
6- to original coordinate system Let the new axes define the plane
as X¥-coordinate system The coordinate of pomt P are nox
S «
a Pio!
(X, Y) = (x —h, y — k) with respect to YY-coordinate system.
\
4-
QW *
4) Samed
R(3. 4)
s
a}
3- + 1-h—|
Pers)
- ‘
x
ai1-k
_4
le *P(4, 1)
(ako +
3s 2 YY D) | FS F 4 § & + Ae k
oO —— _¥ |
Thuis V¥=. hand Y=, k

From the figure
ww
cos @ and sin @ me or equivalently

5
Wl
From trigonometric concepts v= Nthands =Y+A

coordinates of pomt S$ are The coordinates (0, 0) of the old origin referred to the new
nN f axes are (A, A), :
seorl 4= 4 6 y Skin
In| af 4)| Ifthe equation of the curve with respect to original coondmel:
system is f(t, ) 0, then its equation with respect [0 age
Now, Seos{ % + 6] is coordinate system will be f(b Aya + A) = 0, re 10 equate”
5{ con Cos ain x smn 0]
4 4 AXvv) Ovreplawe vy by vt dandy by y+ &
1 4 ILLUSTRATION 1.3
: {55 o v2 5] J2 At what point should the origin be shifted if the coordinates
and of a point (4, 5) become (-3, 9)?
7= +0]
ssn s{sin a= cos 0-4 sin Geos ™ |
4 4 Sol. Let (h, &) be the point to which the origin 1s shifted. The?
v =4,y= 5, X= -3, Y= 9
stem _ 1 3
—_ x =X+handy= Vek Coordinate Sy
or =-3+thand5=9+; i -coor
anticlockw to form new XY
or h=7andk=-4 system nabeal nigin of point P with respec tto new
Let aneus find the coordinates
aoe
Hence, the origin must be shifted to (7, 4) coordinate system
¥:
ILLUSTRATION 1.4 ¥
fa‘ns
If the origin is shifted to the Point (1.
-2) without the rotati
of the axes, what do the fol! Owing equati on
ons become?
(i) B+ - 4a + 4y=0 : it
(ii) he - 4+ 4r4+8=0 yo*
Sn:
a |e
Sol. 0 _x
a) Substituting
equation a+
me * Landy - ) + (- 2)= Y-2 in the a a
~4y + 4) = 0. we get
UV? 1+) - 27-404 14 4(r~2)=0
ho , a
OF LA ts 6
qi) Substituting v= V+) and y= y 2 in the equation
vat Ah ~S=0. we get In the figure,
(= 2Y -4(V+ 1) + 40-2) +8 =0 SR =x tan 0, OS = x sec @
or }7=4Y PS=y—x tan @
and SO=x-x sec 0
ILLUSTRATION 1.5 Now in triangle POS,
Shift the ongin to a suitable point so that the equatio SQ X-xsec@
n sin 9= — = ——
v + 4) + 8x - 2 = 0 will not contain a term in y and PS y-xtan@
the
constant term
in @ sin> 6 _—
= jy — Yr
Sel Let the ongin be shifted to (. 4) Then. ad BeecetbeatD cos@ cos@
vr=X¥-handi=)-4
Subsututing x = .’- A andi = Y ~ Ain the equation 17 + 4y + 8y = yvsn@+x
‘1-sin?
las
@ )|
-2=0, we get ‘ cos @
(¥—ky ~ 4(Y~ ky = 8 + hy - 2 =0 > X=ycos @+) sin 8 id)
Or (4 Dy ~ BX th’ 4k + Bh 2) =0
For this equation to be free from the term containing Yand the Also, cos @= Eg = —
PS \.-xtan8@
constant term. we must have => Y=-ysin @-vecos 0 2
4k + 8h-2=0
4-2k=O~ and k From (1) and (2),
or k=-2andh= 3 = \= Yeos @- }yain@
Hence the ongin is shifted at the point (3/4, -2) v—Vsin 0+ Yoos @
The conversion of coordinates from one s¥stem to other
ILLUSTRATION 1.6 system can be represented as follows
The equation of a curve referred to the new axes, which are
—_ | Y
paralle! to original axes, and origin as (4, 5) 1s X° 4 Y° = 36, \
Find the equation referred to the original axes. \ cos @ sino

- 4.
) sin @
Sol. With the given notation, we have cos 0
RSA FHS
or X=x 4.Y y 5 ILLUSTRATION 1.7
Therefore, the required equation 15 The axes are rotated through anan
(x4 +(y Sy' 56 gle ott Jinthe anticlockwis
direction with Fespect to (0, 0), e
or e+ -be ly 5S 0 kin d the coordinates of point
(4,2) (wre old coordmate syste
which 1s the equation referred to the original axes r Nn) in the new coordinates
system.
BO, Mere, (4, ))
Rotation of Axes about Origin (4, 2)
and O WW}
Another type of transformation of axes 1s rotation of axes VY veos 4 ysin @
Consider point P(x, y) m original coordinate system ie,
xy-coordinate system. Let these axes be rotated by an angle @ in t n
= tos + 2sin =
EXERCISE | ,
Coordinate Ge
omety
CONCEPT APPLICATION
1.4
j, What 1s the minimum area of a triangle with Ntegra
l
vertices?
@+1' cos 6 segment join
= he 2, What is length of the projection of line
dak x-a xis . g
4
—4dsm Zp1 oe Deas
points (2, 3) and (7, 5) on
= 3
h following transform ati ons
3. Point P(-2, 3) goes throug In
succession.
(i) reflection in line y=
right
(1) translation of 4 units to the
(ii) translation of 5 units up
ILLUSTRATION 1 8
1 of axes is (iv) reflection in y-axis
err ed to a given systen on of the point.
The equati on of a cur ve ref Find the coordinates of final positi
atiionon | if the axes are rotated
beet+ 3oy7'= 10: Find its equ 45°.
3x742 + Juv 4, Find the equation to which the
equation
an angle of
about the ongin through x’ + Txv- 27 + 17x 26¥- 60 =0
the point (2, -3),|
Sol. We have 1s transformed if the origin 1s shifted to
axts
yorecos e- ) sin @ the axes remamung parallel to the original
\ Without rotating the orginal coordinate axes, to which
Wil 5
= Leos 4s" - } sina?= point should origin be transferred, so that the equation
vty? -4x + 6y — 7 = 018 changed to an equation which |
@+ } cos 0
\ sin contains no term of first degree?
"
Given the equation 4x7 + 2v3 xy t 2 = 1. Through what | |

o
ah
il
4
‘sh
ro
=
pe
pt
Qa
So
at
=cA]
ll
angle should the axes be rotated so that the term xy 15

removed from the transformed equation?
es _, SN SWERS sais
1. 1/2 sq. units 2. 5 units 3. (-7, 3)

4, X°+7X¥-2Y-4=0 5. (2,-3) 6. 16, 223
——— _——_— carey
ee
or 2-9 = Ss
JLLUSTRATION 1.9 DISTANCE FORMULA AND AREA
If @ is an angle by which axes are rotated about origin and
OF POLYGON
equation ar ~ 2hxy ~— bi = 0 does not contain xy term in the DISTANCE FORMULA
2h The distance between two points P(x. +) and Q(x». ¥:) 5
new system. then prove that tan 20=
a-b given by
PQ= ( tery ‘s +(¥2- 1 ‘ig
Soh Clearlh. hz 0
Rotating the axes through an angle @ we have Distance of (a, 1) from origin = dX + a
x= Xcos 6- Ysin@ y
3 = Xsin @~ ¥cos 6. OO,.¥3)

3
fit.) = a ~ 2hg + by?
a(X cos @— ¥sin 6) + 2HX cos 6— Y sin @)
i]
1 (X sin 9+ Ycos @) + b(Xsin 6+ Y cos Oy

(a cos’ 6 ~ 2h cos O sin A+ b sin? 8) X
+2 [(b — a) cos Osin 6 + h (cos? @~ sin’@)] XY
+(asin? @ 2hcos Osin B+ bcos* @) Y
= F(X, Y) (say)
Now, in FLX, Y), we require that the coefficsent of the XY-term
5 Zero.
2[(b — a) cos Osin 0+ h (cos? 6 sin’ Of 0
> (a~b) sin 2@= 2h cos 26 Note:
2h * Distance between points (x,, 0) and (x2, 0) is ai a
> tan 20=
a-b * Distance between points (0, y,) and (0, 2) 'S lyr = 920
OO
1.5
Coordinate System
ILLUSTRATION 1.109
Using distance formula, prove the
Ap
in ABC. AB’ + AC? =2 (4p? + BD ollonius’ theorem that is
D*), where D is the or
point of BC. middle Radius = au units
Sol. Let point B and C lie on the \ “ants ILLUSTRATION 1.12

such that BD = DE;
where D(0, 0) 1s midpoint of BC
Let point 4 be (x, 1), Two points O(0, 0) and A(3, V3 ) with another point P form
an equilateral triangle. Find the coordinates of P.
Sol. xy)
AC \)
7? e
O(0, 0) — = +++ A(3, V3)
y ' Let the coordinates of P be (x, y).

$5 Cate OP = AP
BD=k. So, point B is (— k, 0) and
point Cs (k, 0) or = OP’ = AP
Now. AB? +AC = (e+ ky + (y- OY +k? + 7-0) Garay?
12 =(x- 3) +(Qy- v3
=x +h + Qxk +49 +x? Pile axk
+ y" => 3x+ V3y=6
= 2x7 +2)° +2
3
=A?
xe2-d
+)" +k’)
And 24D" + BD*) = 2[(x
= or
Oy +
+k)
0? + I] M
Therefore, 4B? + 4(@°= 2(4D* + BD"
)
ILLUSTRATION 1.1171
Find the coordinates of the circumcenter of the triangle whose => vy - (3 y-6=0
vertices are A(5, —-1), B(-1. 5), and C(6, 6). Find its radius => (vy - 2V3 (vt V¥3)=0
also.
=> r= 23 or ~¥3
“Sol. — A($.-1) From (1), when y=2V73.x=0and
when } = ml ax =3
R Hence, the coordinates of P are:
gO(x,Vv) (0, 2 V3) 01 (3, -V3)

2 © &. ILLUSTRATION 1.13
B(-1.5) > 16.8) If the coordinates of any two points Q, and Q, are
(x), 3,) and (44, 3), respectively, then prove that
Let the eucumeenter be O(x, y) Then
OQ * OQ, cos(Z0,0Q,) = Vy23 + V2, Where O 1s the ongin.
(OA) =(OBY= (OC) = (Radius) PR (1)
Sol. a
or (x - 5)" +(y+1/= (x+1)? +(y- 5)
= (x- 6) +(y- 6) O.(\3.14)
Taking first two relations, we get ,
we sy + (yt lW=(x+ Ivy t(y- 5) O14.%))
or =y (2)
Taking ins two relations, we get

(x + IP +Q- 5)? = (x- 6)" ip oy ———
D
et —
—————___~-»
or (xt 1)? + (x- 5) = (x- 69 4 (x- 6) [From (2)]
or 2x2 - 8x + 26 = 2x - 24x +72
or xe In 40010), using cosine rule, we
get
or Circumcenter = (23/8, oes) i0,y - (0Q,)° * (OQ, Y -0Q,.00, cos(Z0,0Q,)
or R=(x- 5+ (yt 1) = (OA) © (a, ay + (Vy Os
-(B-T +R] = 02,

=(x} + y? ) +(x} + y3)
~200,.00,, cos(Z0,0
OQ, cos (Z0,0Q,) = AT Q,)
V)
coordinate Geometry
| (BM AL) (ML) + 5 (AL + CN) (LN)
GicLUBTRATION,1
A
MW
day as 4
we a PS,
PRO . a ]
R(x , .v) are thr ee points such that - ~(BM+¢
ae 6 5) and
of AROP 1s 7 sq. unit.
Find the number 2 N) (Mj
a a and the area
ng
of such points R.
5 +p)(x) — 42)+ 5 + Y3) G3 —x,) a
i
and Q as end points ]
Sol. Clearly, R les on the circle with P
of diameter - 2 U2 *Y)ixy- 5
[xy (2 — V3) + Xo a V1) + 23 OY - yQ))
vir
= = [(xpy2 — X2¥1) + Cavs — Xa) + Cry, ~ x1y,)]
Nile
(3, 1)P* If the pomts A, B and C are plotted in the two-dimensional
plane and the three points are taken in the anticlockwise sense
then the area calculated of the triangle ABC will be positive while
if the points are taken in clockwise sense then the area Calculated
will be negative. But, 1f the points are taken arbitrarily, then the
area calculated may be positive or negative, the numerical Value
being the same im all the cases. To avoid this sign problem, we
Now, PO= \ (6-3 +(5-1" =5
put modulus sign on area.
». Radius,
r= 2.5
If three points 4, B and C are collinear, then the area of triangle
1 will be zero.
Now. area of mangle POR = > RM PQ =7 (Given)
Area can also be found using determinant method. The
_ 14 s determinant of order 2 1s defined as
= RM= = = 2.8,
which 1s not possible as RM cannot be more than radius ay a2

= Gy 1422 — 41242
Hence. no such tnangle 1s possible. 42, 422
The determinant of order 3 1s defined as
a | ay a3
AREA OF A POLYGON Gp: yy 3 83
a 21 a 22 Q,)/23 =a 11 ay ay — a>Ie 1 ss
Area of Triangle
43, 432 33
The area of a tangle the coordinates of whose vertices are
i)
(x .1,). (x5. 3) and (x3. ¥3) 18 given by + ay3 1
Q3, 32
5 MV2—¥3)™ X9(¥3 — ¥\) + 30) — ¥2)| = 1 (4990,3 ~ 4y343y) — Ay3 (431433 — 423931)
Proof: Let ABC be a tnangle whose vertices are A(x,, yj), + Q) 3,437 — @x283;)
B(x. 32) and C(x3, ¥3)-
In the above figure, area of triangle 4BC can be put in the
form of determinant of order 3 as
yx» yy |
A(x,yi)
yyy I
on |
f _ C(x; 4)
(x.,. ¥,)Bi - , Here, we consider absolute value of above determinant as ares
1S positive.
Area of n-sided Polygon

| noo. __,, ae) (ta tak
The . area of . polygon whose vertices are (4). Pps (2 2) Ce 3
Oo M L N
--+ (X,, ¥,,) taken in cyclic order is given by
Draw AL, BM and CN perpendiculars from A, B and C,
_ | 5 ean yl
respectively, on the x-axis.
~ FHOry a) | gry vary) tne FAME
Clearly, ABML, ALNC and BMNC are all trapeziums. Stair Method to Find Area of Polygon
We have, Let the given 1 points (4,, 3%), (hoy Ya)s -e2> ne Yh ) be in cycle
: nts one
Area of AABC = Area of trapezium ABML order on coordinate plane. Write the coordinates of pol i hich
below the another and repeat the coordinates at the bottom
+ Area of trapezium ALNC
were taken at the top. Multiply values at the start an
— Area of trapezium BMNC the arrows,
1.7
Coordinate Syste™__—
ILLUSTRATION 1 18
_k +1, 2k) and
(
For what value of k are the points (k, 2 - 2k),
(-4 — k, 6 - 2k) collinear?
Sol. Let the three gi ven p points be
4 2 “4k 0. 2 - 2k),
= hs
(x),1) 6-2
(x3,.'3) = 6
xy, y
B= (ap. 9) = (K+ 1,24), and C=

hn
t
xy Xy,
0, 1€.,
If thegiven points are collinear, then A=
Product of downward arrow 1s taken with Positive sign and ~ y) = 0
X10’) — V3) +2203 yy) tO
product of upward arrow ts taken with negative sign, - 2k - 2 + 210
Thus, area of polygon or 2k — 6 + 2k) + (-k + 16
0
4+ (4 — ky(2 - 2k - 2k) =
[{Qr2 — AsV) + (Xgpy = xy) + or (4k - 6) —4(k - 1) + (4 + KAR - 2) = 0

Nil
» +(yy, - X\)',)}|
or | 4k 6k - 4k +444 + 14k - 8 =0
ILLUSTRATION 1.15 or 8K" + 4k - 4 = 0
or =. 2° +k -1=0
Find the area of a triangle having vertices A(3, 2), B(11, 8), 1) =0
and C(8, 12). or = (2k 1)(kK+
k = 2 or —l
Le,
Sol. Let 4 = (x), ¥)) = (3, 2), B(x, yy) = (11, 8), and C = coincident. Hence, & = -1.
But for ¢ = 1/2, the first two points are
(x3. 13) = (8, 12) Then
ILLUSTRATION 1.19
Area of AABC
2 HAiQ2 = V3) #204 - 14) +3407) — YD) 4) and (5, —2),
l The coordinates of two points 4 and B are (3,
= PB and
5 3(8 - 12) + 1112-2)
+ 8 (2-8)}| respectively. Find the coordinates of points P if PA
area of APAB 1s 10 sq unit
2 |{-12 + 110
— 483}
Sol. Let the coordinates of point P be (x, ¥).
= 25 sq units
Given that PA = PB
ILLUSTRATION 1.16 or PA? = PB ;
= (x-3P +(y-4P =(x-SP +0 42/9
Prove that the area of the triangle whose vertices are (1, ¢— 2), ype l= (1)
>
(t+ 2,¢+ 2), and (t+ 3, ¢) 1s independent of 1.
Now, area of APAB = 10
Sel. Let A = (x),))) = (t,1- 2), B= (x,2) = (t+ 2, 0+ 2), and x: ¥
C= (x3,3) = (¢ + 3, A) be the vertices of the given triangle Then 1] 3 4

> = =10
Area of AABC 2/5 -2
x oy
nmlern|—
= = |{x,(v2 — 3) + 4203 — 4) F230) - yy} |

=> 6x + 2y — 26 = +20
[fde+2—a + (t+2)(t- (1-2-1
2) + (t+ 3) t+ -2)}| => 3x+y-—23=0 (2)
or 3x+y-3=0 (3)
4 — 41 = 4]sq. units
12}| =|-4 Solving (1) and (2), we get y= 7, y= 2.
ple
|{2r + 22+
Solving (1) and (3), we get x = ly=0
Clearly, the area of AABC 1s independent of ¢ Thus, the coordinates of P can be (7, 2) or (1, 0).
ILLUSTRATION 1.17
ILLUSTRATION 1.20
Find the area of the quadrilateral ABCD having vertices
If the vertices of triangle have rational coordinates,
A(1, 1), B(7,- 3), C(12, 2), and D(7, 21). that the triangle cannot be equilateral,
then prove
Sol. Here, given points are_in cyclic order. Therefore,

1 1 Sol. Let th € vertices of : triangle ABC are A(x,
y), B(x, yo)
i =a and C(x, y3).
Area = ; 12 2 ¢
% i t
7 2)
1 1 Are = | ;
ca of triangle, A 5 [xy - X4V1) + (x3 — X23)
-2 | (3+- + (252 - 14) + (7-21)
+ 36) )
(14 7 +(x a
1
Clearly, this vatue will be rational. yi—xva] (1)

= 132 sq units
a Se
7 Q in x-axis 1s O'(4, 2).

eee = RQ
1.8 Coordinate Geometty st
a’, where @ is side . |PR-RQ|= |PR—-RQ|
alo
iangle, A =
, ar ea of equilateral tr From triangular inequality,
Also
length |PR-RQO|S PO.
P, 0 and R are collinear
a= AB= +. [PR — RQ |max = PQ’, when
(2) 2 3
[(%2 741 y +(92 7 )*)
A= =
4 2
1S irrational =0
Clearly, this value a oO
ntradiction.
Thus, we have co 2 3
be equilateral.
So. triangle cannot
= 4—-12-2a+3a=0
1 wel
ILLUSTRATION => a@=8
, 0).
, 3), O(4. ~2) and R(a
Given three points P(2 nimum ILLUSTRATION 1.22
ue of aif PR+ RQ 1s mi
(1) Find the val
(n) Find the value of aif |P
R-RQ|1s maximum.
If 4{ 34.2).
-3
az ? , cl=-3.-
' Sol. find the maximum area
D(3cos 8, 2sin 8) are four points, then
(37/2, 27).
(1) Point R( a, 0) lies on \-ax1s. of quadrilateral ABCD, where @ ¢
44
r Sol. Area of quadmilateral ABC ‘D 1s maximum when
area of
34 Re. 3) ACD 1s maximum
Area of triangle ACD,
3+
“
1
+3 _/2
ay
R + REI
—_—
| 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
=—7
mil
jt
3sin@
—2+ ye
O14, -2)
3
Now, from triangular inequality, PR + RO 2 PQ - |-3V2 cos @ + 3V2 sin 6|

when
Thus, minimum value of PR + RO 1s PQ, which occurs
points P, Q and R are collinear A,(max.) = 6, when @ = ws4 (as 0 (32/2, 2)
2 3 1s a rectangle)
Maximum area is 12 sq units (as ABCD
4 -2
=>
a 0
——
0 APPLICATION EXERCISE 1-2

2 3 1. Show that the distance between the points P(a cos &
= 4-12+2a+3a=0
asin @ and O(a cos B, a sin B) 1s 2a sin
=> a=16/5
points 4, BandC
(11) 2. Ineach of the following, check how the
rs are situated
54
() A(—2, 2), B(8, 2), C(-4, -3)
44 (in) Aa, —b), B(a, b), Cla’, ab).a> |
34 Pi2. 3) (Qn) A(4, 0), B-1, -1), CGB. 5)
3. If the points (1, 1), (0, sec’ @) and (cosec” g, 0) are
4, 2) collinear, then find the values of 8
a+
whose
ends of
At 2 4. Find the area of the regular hexagon
diagonals are (2, 4) and (6, 7).
;. nits plane.
aR 0 1R 2 +— + + : ft 5. Let ABCD be a rectangle and P be any point!
Show that P42 + PC? = PB? + PD* using
10 x
A¥ 3 \4 5 6 7 8 9 coordinaté
: | geometry.
6. Find the length of altitude through 4
of the triang! e ABC.
where A = (~3, 0), B= (4, -1) and C= (5, 2).
ES
stem 1.9
Coordinate Sy
7. Find the area of the Pentago ,
B(7, 21). C(12, 2), D7. Danie eee are 4(1, 1), CXTFRNAL Division
but not betw' een
If pomt 7? hes on the line joming A and B
8. Four points .4(6, 3), B(-3, 5). Cl4. 2), and Pea then por nt 716 said to
)
be dividing AB
them, such that AP —!”
bs baad A | Ws
BPon
given in such a way that (Ateaof ADBC) are externally m the ratio mn In this case | et us find the coordinates
(Area of A4BC) > 1/2 Find, of P
_ ANSWERS }-—_——_— md ———— _—+|
2. (1) ABC 1s tnangle right angled at 4 je———— (mn +4 - =
]
Ple v)
| (11) collinear points : Alyy) Ale, Vo)
(11) ABC ts right angled isosceles AP_= om
triangle
We have BP
78J3
sq unit
e
=
BP n
6. 7. 146 sq units 8. AB m—n
- opt n
in the ratio (7 — 7)
Thus, point B divides AP internally
SECTION FORMULA
(m— n)x +nx, (m-—n)y+ my, | _
=(%. 44)
INTERNA. DIVISION (m—n)tn
(m-—n)+n
Consider two different pomts 4(4,. 1,) and B(x>, v2) in a plane
If point P(A. 1) lies on the line segment AB somewhere between — n)x +nX
(m
=> Y=
4 and B. then point P 1s satd to be dividing AB internally Now, m
iP m then point P divides 48 internally in the ratio m 1 mXy — AX,
[| one
=> LS
BP on m-—-n
Let us find the coordinates of point P mv, — MD,

a) Similarly, we get vy =
y Be. m—n
> B(x,33)
ally in the rano
nA Thus, coordinates of point P dividing 48 extern
as
»
ew ire Wns — ny mV — my \
aie” Pw) nr fare

m—-Hn Sat
we r
(x, 1,14 Hf Note:
~ )r ¥> ag Ls
-
© The coordinates of midpoint of 48 are —+
. ——
Let
>
Oo L N M
e The coordinates of point which trisects 18 are

are similar
In the figure. tnangles AHP and PKB tly Vt 2h, | or (atte: M4, Hs)
“eee 2 AH — PH x 7 3 nn
= Dp pK
erefore
BP
—
PK BK 4BCD ts a parallelogram, 1 ts
e fo show that quadrilateral
m
=
xox
=
STM suilicient to show that coordinates of miudpornts of diagonals
=> —
n x2 eS \ / ) AC and BD are the same
WwW x ;
then coordmates of pout ? dividing 48 tn
m xX .
Now, — = e [fratio — =A,
Nu
n X tame
Avty Ais ti
=> NX, — MX = NX NX |
the ratio A Lave | 2 0b, Ft
Atl Atl
MX, + NX,
> =
m+n © HA +0, then P divides (8 wternally and if A -< 0, then
P divides 4B externally,
m y- y
Also, — = a
n yo my:
ILLUSTRATION 1.23
> my, — my = ny — Ay,
my, + ny Find the coordinates of point which divides the line segments
> y=
mtn joining the points (6, 3) and (—4, 5) in the ratio 3.2 (i) internally
mx,+nx, my, tN) and (ii) externally.
Thus, the coordinates of P are
_—_—_—— , _ Le +
m+n m+n
Geometry ILLUSTRATION 1.26
1.10 Coordinate
Prove that the points (-2, -1), (1, 0), (4, 3), and (1 12
_ Sol. 4,5). .
Bi.
ts are 4(6. 3) and vertices of a parallelogram. Is it a rectangle? ) ate the
re 1n t he ratio 3. 2.
. y) divide AB internally
1) Gi
| Let ete:
point P(
Sol. Given points are in cyclic order.
u _ 4 Bi 4,5)
Pacy) Let d= (-2, -1), B= (1, 0), C= (4, 3) and D= (1, 2),
4(6. 3) Then, the coordinates of the midpoint of AC are
3(-4) +20) 305) +20) | 2 | 9 . 2)
5 —2+4 -I+3
sey (1) are | > =(1, 1)
im the ratio 3° 2, The coordinates of the midpoint of BD are

qi) Pia.) divides 4B externally
a ee a
eee) — [= : ad =(I, 1)
2 2
fea) BIAS Pa) Thus, AC and BD have the same midpoint
34-4)-2 5)-203 Hence, ABCD 1s a parallelogram.
=(6) Se H}a(24.9)
Qe >
a2
#)
1D Now, we shall see whether ABCD 1s a rectangle or not
We have _ : -
Alternatively. #P i (From the figure) AC =\{4-(-2))? + 3-(-DP = 2V13

BP 2 and = BD=\(1- 1) +(0-2) =2
6) +1) see), (Ee3 s+)
C3
Clearly, AC # BD So, ABCD 1s not a rectangle.
sakse|
Je) ~ 241 |
ILLUSTRATION 1.27
(vi) e(-24.9)
Let A,, A>, 43, -.-, 4, are ” points in a plane whose coordinates
ILLUSTRATION 1.24 are (X}, ¥))s (X25 V2), «+++ Sp» Vq)s Tespectively. A,A, is bisected
at the point P,, P,A, 1s divided in the ratio | : 2 at P,. P.A,
5) A(1. 1) and B(2. —3) are two points and D 1s a point on AB is divided in the ratio | 3 at P;, P;A; is divided in the rano
y produced towards B such that AD = 3AB. Find the coordinates 1: 4 at P, and so on until all » points are exhausted. Find the
of D. coordinates of the final point so obtained.
Sol. P, 1s midpoint of 4,4;
Sok Wehave 22-3
AB
AD 3 pisag Xy)(PAZ:
+x
tH tn)
yWo+45
Meer
AD-AB 3-1 P, divides P, 4, 1n 1:2

_ AD _3 Ny tas
2)!" +, 2
weg
alee
5
)
~ Bp 2 * |
i a P,=
2+1 2+ 1
I ij _
Yt thy Jy ths 23
4.i) BR -3) “Dixy 3 3
be ye (30202
2) 1-3) 20) Now P, divides P34, 1n 13
X.3)% | 3-2. «3-2 Jean \
(x +1. +%5) (yytistas)
§ Bley, GS ety
P\= a : > |
ILLUSTRATION 1.25 3+1 sel
Determine the ratio in which the line 3x + y — 9 = 0 divides the = (tees iharsabane
segment joining the points (), 3) and (2, 7). 4 , 4
Sol. Suppose the ling 3x +5 Proceeding in this mannet, we get
9 divides the Ime segment
joining A(1, 3) and £(2. 7) inthe ratio k | at pot C Then, the Wtitiyt. th, eeceas S84)
Ps
a *
coordinates of C are
(2k+1, Tk 3
k+l k+)
But C hes on 3x + y— 9 = 0), Therefore, COORDINATES OF DIFFERENT
3 (24+ | pw Tk SL+ | B
k+] k+] -9=()
CENTRES OF TRIANGLE
CUNTROID
Or 6K +34 7k+3-9k-9=0 triangle 1s called
or gad The point of concurrency of the medians 0 fa iangle. s
the centroid of the triangle and always lies in side the tr of th
coordinates
So, the required ratio is 3 :
4 internally us get the coordinates of centroid in terms 0 f
vertices of triangle.
stem 1.11
Coordinate Sy
——_.
“Let A(x),¥1)s Bp,¥2) and and be s

C(x ae) a the ve Ttices of a triangle
whose medians are AD, BE CIRCUMCENTRE
ntre of the circ
umscribing
. The circumcentre of a triangl e is the ce rpendicular
pol nt where ; pe eine
Pectively, the midpoints of BC, CA
So, D, E and F are, res
circle of the triangle Also, tt is the
and AB. bisectors of sides of triangle are concu: rrent. Circum of btuse
: ; the triangle and that rai
A(x,. 9)
acute angled triangle lies inside 0
triangle. Circumcentre
angled triangle lies outside the
se.
angled triangle 1s midpoint of hypotenu angle
be th e vertices of tri
Let A(x), 1), BX: ¥2) and Crs, y3)
are:
ABC. then coordinates of circumcentre
E sin 2A + x, sin2B + x; sin 2C
Bley, ¥,) OD
+
Coy, V3) sin2A +sin2B + sin2C
7 |
y, sin2A + y, sin 2B + y3 $10
De [2 +X Vo +H;
sin2A +sin2B +sim2C
2 ° 3
Proof: A(x,,.¥1)
Also, centroid (G) divides median AD 1m the ratio 2. 1.
Line joining A and the /
X> +3 , meets
Mes+2{ BE) ye 2 | circumcenter (O)
BC at E. =
G of 2C( O\2B
14+2 , 1+2
Mh
The foot
perpendicular from O on vA LAA
= [4 +¥2+%, MtMIAV; BC 1s D. Therefore, ra ee
3 3 Bx, ¥>) — DE C(x3,¥3)
Note: BE 3 BEXOP _ area of AOBE

e Centroid of triangle and that of triangle formed by midpoints EC + ECxOD Area of AOEC
of sides 1s same
e The three medians of a tnangle divide the triangle into six
equal areas ; OB x OE xsin ZBOE
e Inatmangle, the line segments connecting the midpoints of
sides are parallel} to the opposite sides and the four triangles 3 OC XOE xin ZCOE
created by these line segments are congruent and so have
equal areas
5 RXOE xsin(x~ 2C)
JeeUSTRATION 1.28 sR x OE x sin(z — 2B)

2),
If vertex A of triangle ABC 1s (3, 5) and centroid 1s (-1,
then find the midpoint of side BC. sin2C
sin2B
©SOLE Let midpoint of side BC be D. Therefore, the coordinates of D are
such that
So, AD 1s median and centroid G(-1, 2) lies on it ( x, sin2B+x,sin2C y,sin2B + y;sin2C
AG GD=2°1.
| sin2B+sin2C sin28B+sin2C
Thus, D divides AG externally in the ratio 3
De ( 3(-1) - 1G) _3(2)- 2) - ( -3, +]2

Now,
3-1 ° 3-1 sin2B+sin2C _ 2sin(B+C)cos(B-C) _ cos(B-—C)

sin2A 2sin Acos A ~ cos
ELUSTRATION 1.29 In AODE, OD = OB cos A = Ros A Also,

Let O(0, 0), P(3, 4), and Q(6, 0) be the vertices of triangle ZDOE = ZDOC — ZEOC
OPQ. Find the point & inside the triangle OPQ such that the = A-(nm- 2B)
tangles OPR, POR, OQR are of equal areas.
the =nx-B-C-x+2B
Soli, As discussed earlier, three medians of a triangle divide
=B-C
triangle into six equal areas.
So, point R must be centroid. Now,
in AODE,
Therefore, R = & s+0 sear) - (3. ‘| OE =
OD __ RcosA
cos(B-C) cos(B-C)
1.12 Coordinate Geometry
40 R cos(B-C) ORTHOCENTRE
OF Rees A cos A The point of concurrency of altitudes of a tri
cos(B-C) orthocentre of the triangle Orthocentre of ac angle I§ Cal
ute angled leq the
Thus AO _ sin2B+sm2C
lies inside the triangle and that of obtuse a
ngled trian ri Whe
outside the triangle. Orthocentre of right an
OE sin 2.4
gled trrangle |. .
vertex where right angle occurs. C
The coordinates of O are Let A(x),1), B(x), yy) and C(x; V3) be the ve
Ttices of triangle
ABC, then coordinates of orthocentre are.
yasn2B4+x,sm2C
(sin 2B +sin2C) ats = & \, sin 24
(sin 2B +sin 2C) x, tan A + x, tan B + x, tanC
(sin2B+sin2C)+sin 2.4 tan A + tanB + tanC
y, tan 4 + Vy tan B+ y, tanc:
Proof: tan A + tan B + tan¢
C
(sin 2B +sin2C) tlallag My sin2 +, sin 24 A(x, 4)
(sn 2B+sin2C) yo
(sin2B+sin2C)+sin2A
e*
f ‘0 rab E
{2 to)
(SS &
ysin2 4+a,sin2B
+1, sin 2C
ye
OT
\ sin 2.44+sn2B+sin2C
¥, sin 24+ y, sin2B+ y, sin c)

N ees T/A
sin24+sin2B+sin2C
(%,.¥)B ccosB PD Cix
ILLUSTRATION 1.30
First, we get the coordinates of point D for which we
If A(x,.¥;). B(x.) and C(x, ;) are the vertices of triangle :
requirec
a re
the ratio BD : DC.
ABC and xj ~ yj = x3 — v5a) =x;Cn+ y7.| then show that x, sin 2A In AHDB,
~ X; sin 2B ~ x; sin 2C =, sin 24 + y, sin 2B +y3s1n 2C = 0,
tan (90° — C) = - => BD=HDtanc
Xp oapeaxd i= x3 +1}. circumcentre of A4BC
Similarly, in AHDC, CD = HD tan B
Now coordinates of circumcentre are BD tanC
CD - tan B
‘x, $n 24 + x sin2B +x, sin2C
So. Ds [2 tanB+x,tanC y,tanB +; tanC |
sin 24 +sin2B+sin 2C
tan B + tanC tan B + tanC
3, sin 2A + 5 51n2B + y, sin2C
= (0, 0) To get the coordinates of orthocentre H, we need the rcv
sin2A +sin2B + sin2C AH: HD,
Therefore. x, sin 24 + x5 sin 2B + x, sin 2C We must have
=}, sin 2A + y, sin 2B + y, sin 2C = 0 AH — tanB+tanC
HD tan 4
ILLUSTRATION 1.31
sn(B+C)cosd cos 4
If AABC having vertices A(a cos 6, a sin 6,), Bla cos @,,
cosBcosCsind cos BeosC
a sin 6), and C(a cos 6, a sin 6;) 1s equilateral, then prove
Now, let us find AH and HD
that cos 6, + cos 6, + cos 6, = sin 6, + sin 8, + sin 6; =0
In AAFH,
Sol. The distance of given vertices Ala cos 9, a sin 6), 6 AF - beos {
cos (90° B)= ae = 4H= an B-
Bia cos @,, a sin 6), and Cla cos ,, a sin 3) from the origin
In AHDB, ‘
si up x
(0, 0) 1s a.
Hence, the circumcenter of the triangle 15 (0, 0). tan (9( Cy= BD aed
Also, in an equilateral triangle, the centroid coincides with the => HD (cot C) (ce cos B) = ¢ cos B snc
circumcenter. We have
th AH beos al sinc
acos@, + acos6, + acos@, 0 iD sinB ceosBoosC
3
bsin€ cos A
and @1N 8, + asin 8, + asin @, _
csinB cosBcosC
3
or
Cos 8, + cos 6+ cos 6; = sin 8, + sin @,+sin 6 =0 _ __ £08 A (Using sine rule bst aczcsind)
cos B cosC
.13
-. Coordinates of Ware: ~ ae Coordinate System _4+72
x.
(tan
B + tanC) 22!
B + x, tance ILLUSTRATION 1.34
tan B+ tanec +x, tan 4 ‘
2 andwoe
the
(tan B + tan C)+ tan 4 If the circumcentre of a triangle lies at the one
’ centroid is the middle point of the line ee ae
(a? + 1, a” + 1) and (2a, —2a), then find the ortho
(tan B + tan cy ¥2 tanB + y; tanc Sol. Circumcentre 1s O(0, 0).
(tan B + tanC)
+ tan4 Centroid G=
(a +1) inal)
5° 2
x; tan 4+x, tan B+

x; tanC + (Midpoint of given points)
tan 4 +tan B+ tancC , Points H, G and O are collinear with
HG .GO= 2.1. as H
So, using section formula, we have orthocentre
¥ tan A+», tan B+ y tanC
tan 4+ tan B+tanC a +1)? 3(a-1)? ]
+
2 2
HAC and H.4B, respectiv

ely, ILLUSTRATION 1.35
Note: Orthocentre and circumcentre of AABC are (a, b) and (c, d),
* Inatnangle other than equ respectively If the coordinates of the vertex A are (x1, Vy).
ilateral triangle, orthocent
re (H), then find the coordinates of the middle point of BC.
HG GO<2- 1 ncentre (Q) are collinear with ratio
Sol. Given are the orthocentre H(a, 6) and the circumcentre
* Ifvertices of tnangle
are (X19). (5, O(c, a)
circumcentre is (0, 0), then ¥2) and (x3, y3) and
orthocen tre Is (x, + xy + x3,
¥ ty. + V3) Ha, b) G Olc, d)
2c+a 2d+b 2c+a 2d+b

ILLUSTRATION 1 32 Centroid, G= = ?
Se Del 3 3
Find the orthocenter of the trian gle
whose vertices are (0, 0), A(x).¥))
(3, 0). and (0, 4).
Sol. This 1s a mght-angled (at the origin) triangle Theref

ore,
the orthocenter 1s (0, 0).
‘G
ILLUSTRATION 1.33
The circumcentre and centroid of a triangle are (3, 4) and B D(x)

(6, 8), respectively. If one of the vertices of the triangle 1s
Now, centroid G divides 4D 1n the ratio 2 : 1, where D 1s the
(0, 0), then what 1s the type of tnangle?
midpoint of BC
Sol. 2c+a 2x, +x,
3 3
2d+b 2y,+y,
an d 3 os3
_, 2eta=-x, _2dt+b-y,
X= 2 + ae) = 2
INCENTRE
We have vertex A(0, 0), circumcentre O(3, 4) and centroid G(6, 8). The point of concurrency of internal
angle bisectors of a triangle
Point O hes on the perpendicular bisector (OD) of side BC and is called the incentre of the triangle.
Also, it 1s the centre of the
point G lies on the median AD. circle which is inscribed in the tria
ngle and touches all the three
sides of the triangle. Thus circle 1s the large
Now, A, O and G are collinear. st circle contamed in
the triangle. Let us get the coordina
So, median AD and perpendicular bisector (OD) of BC coincide. tes of the incentre.
Let A(x,, y\), B(x, y2) and C(x;,
Thus, 4D is the perpendicular bisector of BC. ¥3) be the vertices of the
triangle ABC such that BC = a,
CA = band AB=c. Also, let AL,
Therefore, triangle ABC is isosceles. BM and CN be, respectively, the
internal bisectors of th
A, Band C.
anges
a
es of B and C are (-S, y'and (on

Geometry _ ee Therefore, the coordinat 3),
1.14 Coordinate tre /
These bise ctors
intersect at ncen respectively.
AQQ.) 1)
Then, the centroid is
TaN,
(5s +543) 4 (3 3]
M 3° 3 3°
and a= BC= \(-5- 99° +(5-3y = 10v2

P17
191=2V
(3--
‘
i
b=CA=V+ 9
oO
< 30 Caw
Qa. V 8 L
To find the coordinates

of incentre, we use angle bisector and c= AB= V1 +52 1-5) = 2N13
divides the opposite side into Then, the incenter Is
theorem. that is ‘angle bisector two
1s equal to the ratio of other
segments, the ratio of which 10/2(1) + 2V17(-5) + 2139)
sides of tangle” 10V2 + 2V17 + 2V13
+ )
BL Ba oc
6 (1) 10V (5) 1
2V17(
+2 21313)
CL AC |
hater)
10/2 + 2V17 +2V13
Sy - je Fay
b+e hte
= (Se Siete
get the ratio 47° IL
To. get the coordinates of J. we should 5J2 +17 + V13 , 5 eal tpl
(2)
In mangle 4BL a = ae 1.37
aan |: BL ILLUSTRATION
, -7), BOS, 1) and C(1, 4) If
The vertices of a triangle are A(-1
Now. B
Ic
= £
5b the internal angle bisector of 2B meets the side AC in D, then
_s BL oe find the length of AD.
opposite side in D
~ BL+LC +b
Sol. The angle bisector of 2B meets the
BL c 4(-1, -7)
~ BC ~ c+b
_ ac
= BL= me
So. from (2). we have

B~ i
Al c _crb (S,1)
7 a a ™ CLD
c+b
have
bx, +0X; by, +cy3 Using angle bisector theorem, we
.
.
as, ~(b+e)| 22 | ay +(b+e)/ “or
AD+ DC = AB. BC
AB= \(5+ 1) + (+ 7° = 10
a+(b+c) at+(b+c)
Now,
=
f
& bx, +x, ay tbyr2+ Ds
(s-l?+-4) =5
ar+hre atht+c and = BC=
1.36 (usr ce)
ILLUSTRATION
241 241
e points of two
If a vertex. of a tnangle 1 (1, |), and the middl
then find the
sides passing through it are (-2, 3) and (5, 2),
centroid and the incenter of the triangle.
“(3-3)
Let £ and F be the midpuints of AB and AC
Sok
{1- Hy ; ie
Let the coordinates of # and C be
AN
:
BD - [s -!)
(a, By and (y, 6). respectively Then
ow WE gy. EP
#/(5, 2) OF TRIANGLE
a 2 LM 2.3) EXCINTIRES
acl
rele which lies
An excirele or scribed eirele of a trringle 8350 e’s side>
Sn LP 55128 outside the trangle such that it is tangent to one of ran
gle has
2 2 the other two Every
a=-5,B=5,y=9,6=3 Ba, }) ((y,0) and tangent to the extensions of
one on each side
three distinct excircles,
eo
The centre of an excircle is Coordinate System
1 15
8. The vertices of a triangle are A(x), x; tan 0),

BOQ, %2 po oi
'S called the excentre and C(v4,.x; tan 0,), If the circumcenter of AA a hak
relative to the vertex opposite theo with the origin and (a, b) 1s the orthocente
Let A(x),.¥1)s B(x2, V>) and C(x, 4 r, sno
©OS A, + cos 0; t cos 0,
y,) be the vertices of triangle ABC a
such that BC =a,CA=b and 4p hb sin @ sin 8, + sin
are the vertices of an equilatera)
9. IF (x,.9),2= 1, 2.3,
=¢
L # le
trianggle such
such that
that (x(x, + 2)° 2 + ~ 39 = (x)2 +oe2)
The circle which touches the ?
and 4¢ | \ 1 (vy, 3 = (x, | 2) + (yy — 3)5 then find the
side BC, AB produced xy +Xy + Le]
of eet Ae
produced escnbeq
aa
is called the = | vy + Vo + Vy
circle opposite the angle 4. o], 10. The vertices of a triangle are (aif, a(t, + f))s Ey
(t
a ei:
The bisectors of the external + 1;)), and (atzt,, a(t, + ¢;)). Find the orthocenter o
angle-B and C meet at a point if triangle
which 1s the centre of the escribed
circle opposite the angle 4, ____ ss ANSWERS _
L divides BC internally in the ratio c and /; divides AL
66 3) _ (41 =| 4 vaio ym
1. 42 (S32) na oe (2
bte
externally in the ratio
a
3. (7, 9), (-3,-7), (L. 1) 5. (2, 5/3) 6. | 1. 5 |
by. +0ex, bys +c}
Ove +cV3 7. 1665 sq. unit 9. -2/3 ,
Thus, point L = [mazes
b+e , b+e 10. (-a, a(t; + ty + £3) + atytyt;)
ql ax, +ba, + CX, —ay, +hy, +cv;
an 1= = ——_—
—at+b+c -atbh+c
Similarly, we can find the coordinates of the other two SLOPE OF A LINE
excentres /, and /; opposite the vertices B and C, respectively
Slope 1s the measure of direction in which a line 1s drawn. A line
I ax, — bx, +ex, av —hy +ev, in a coordinate plane makes two angles with x-axis which are
a a-b+c a—b+e supplementary The angle made by the line with positive direction
of x-axis and measured anticlockwise 1s called inclination of the
aX, + bx, —6ay ay, + Dy Cry line The trigonometric tangent of this angle 1s called the slope or
and J,= =
7 at+b-c ath-c gradient of the line.
ay
Shae one *
CONCEPT Aie he
Slope, tan 8 > 0 ; * | Slope, tan @ <0
ee If point P(3, 2) divides the line segment AB internally in
the ratio of 3 - 2 and point Q(-2, 3) divides AB externally
in the ratio 4 3, then find the coordinates of points A a : \e ey
and B. O os x
O
2. If the points (x, —1), (3, y), (-2, 3), and (—3, —2) taken in
order are the vertices of a parallelogram, then find the
>
values of x and y If @ is the inclination of the line, then its slope is tan 0,
3. If the midpoints of the sides of a triangle are (2, 1), generally denoted by m
(-1, -3), and (4, 5), then find the coordinates of its Thus, 7 = tan @,
vertices. If @ is acute, then slope, tan @> 0.
4. The line joining A(d cos. a, b sina) and B(a cosB, a sin) If 6 1y obtuse, then slope, tan @< 0
1s produced to the point M(x, y) so that AM and BM are in Note:
the ratio b: a. Then prove that x + y tan[(a + f)/2] = 0 * The inclination of line parallel to x-axis 1s 0°. Thus,
slope
5. If the middle points of the sides ofa triangle are (—2, 3), of horizonal line is tan 0° = 0.
(4, -3), and (4, 5), then find the centroid of the triangle. The inclination of line parallel to y-axis is 90°. Thus,
slope
Of vertical line is lim tan @ = oo ,
6. Find the incentre of the triangle with vertices A (1, V3), e-90°
B(O, 0) and C(2, 0) Ilere, we are considering lhmiting value of tan
@ as tangent
function ts not defined for angle 90°.
7. fq, 4) is the centroid of a triangle and the coordinates of
The inclination
its any two vertices are (4, -8) and (—9, 7), find the area of line which 1s equally inclined to
Coordinate axes is 45° or 135°. Therefore,
of the tnangle. Slope of line is
eithe r —1 or +]
1.16 bec metry
Coordinate Geo
So p E OF LINE JOINING GIVEN Two PoINrTs S » 5-4

«33
SLOP 5 .a
A(v;,.")) and B(Y, V>)
Consider a line passing through two points -y+3
>
’
=> =2
ILLUSTRATION 1.39
Ee
Which line is having the greatest inclination with the Positivg
Y ee:= direction of the x-axis?
(\, 1) de \ aCe
nt3)sand (4,7)
(i) Line joining the poi(1,
1 1
tte) (ii) Line 3x-4 + y

3=0
Oo}
the 5
he ol.
x
‘ — A,
: (1) Slope of the line joining the points A(1, 3) and B¢4 a
F'3 4 “a
7 .
0= FSF
BC _ Ay eee
J = Re
From the figure. in tnangle 4BC, tan AC 1X) 7-%y aa (3
=
(i1) Slope of the line 3x — 4y + 3 = O15
SLOPE CE LINE HAVING GIVEN EQUATION
c=0. — _ 2.=nntf
The general equation of a straight line 1s aa + byt+
nts on the line 4 :
To get the slope of the line. we require two poi tana >tanf
b). Now,
This line meets axes at points 4(—c/a, 0) and B(0. -c/ or a>Bp
Thus, (i) 1s having the greatest inclination with the positive
direction of the x-axis
|
0.- 4B" ILLUSTRATION 1.40

If the points (2, 3), (1, 1), and (x, 3x) are collinear, then find
4(-£ 0) the value of x, using slope method.
“\ a’ wt
O 7 Sol. Given points A(2, 3), BC). 1). and C(x. 3x) are collmear
Then
Slope of AB = Slope of BC
---Q
‘ or
1-3
—_—_—=
3x-1
Slope of line
1 = Tee 2 =.5ee IW 2 xe
‘ g-!-<) b or =o 3a -1 = 2-2
(a of x=]
Coefficient of x
—— ILLUSTRATION 1.41
Coefficient of 4
x If the points (cz, 0), (6, 0), (0, c) and (0, d) are coneyelte (4. b
ote: c,d > 0), then prove that ab = ed.
e If three points 4, B and Care collinear, then
slope of AB = slope of BC = slope of AC Sol, Without loss of generality, assume that > > 4 and d>«
[so
e Iftwo lines are parallel, then their inclinations and, hence, Since ABCD 1s cyclic quadrilateral, sum of oppostte «angles
slopes are same. +"
ILLUSTRATION 1,38 (0, d)D
Determine the value of x so that the line passing through (3, 4) Sp

and (x, 5) makes an angle of 135° with the positive direction ; *
of x-axis. 4 @
| Sols, Slope of line passing through (3, 4) and (x, 5) is mau = 270° =9
Also, inclination of line 1s 135°. 3 Soelt a
—4 ~ Of A*-~ ---
tan 135° = , (a, 0) (b.0)
x-
On EEE LES LITT
ye, 199°
ZBAC+ZCDB= 0° ne Lk _ 1.17 7
Coordinate System
Let ZBAC =86
Special cases:
—_ ZCDB = 180° - @ (= inclination
of line AC)
(1) Parallel lines (ff, and /y are parallel, then 7, ~ 72
= my, SO.
Therefore. inclination of line BD 1s 270° _ g tan 8=0 or 86=0°
Slope of line AC, : then
(1) Perpendicular lines: Vf 1, and /, are perpendicular,
. My -m = |
tan @= - — tan 90° = | 21] So, I + mym, = 0 or mM
“ ) I+m ny
s—-l.
slope of BD. tan (270° - 9) = ~ 4 Thus, product of slopes of two perpendicular lines 1S sais
h If 1s the slope of one line then slope of the perpen
or cot gent i, 6 I
line is ——
get m
From (1) and (2), we

ILLUSTRATION 1.42
(tan @)(cot 6) = [- <\- “|
a
If A(-2, 1), B(2, 3) and C(-2, -4) are three points, find the
or ab= cd angle between BA and BC
Sol. Let nz, and m, be the slopes of BA and BC, respectively.
ANGLE BETWEEN TWO LINES 3-1 2_1

Then, m, = 9 ~(-2) 4° 2
Let us get the formula for the angle between two lines having
slopes m, and m7, —4i-3,: 7
Let inclinations of lines /, and /, be @, and @,, respectively mm” 2-2 4
So. m, = tan @, and m7, = tan 6, Acute angle between lines 1s
4)
-) | m3— mM,
| ts li @= tan =
1+,
71
ra
- 4 2
= tan 7 |
l+-xz
6 _ 0
4 2
ree tas 1
O 10
Q 9
= tan! is stan! >
As shown in the figure, one of the angles between lines /, and 8

his @
te
Clearly, 6, = 0+ 0, Therefore, obtuse angle between lines 1s 180° — tan™!
yal
or 6=86,-8@,
tan @= tan (6, — 8) ILLUSTRATION 1.43
tan 6, —tan8, Angle of a line with the positive direction of the x-axis is
=> tang=
1+tan@, tan, @ (@ is a cute). The line 1s rotated about some point on it in
anticlockwise direction by angle 45° and its slope becomes 3.
my — Mm
> tan @= —— Find the angle 6.
]+mm, 5
Another angle between lines 1s 8 = (180° — 8)
Sol. Originally, the slope of the line 1s tan @ = m.
tan & = tan (180° — @) Now, the slope of the line after rotation ts 3,
=-tan @=—
m, — mm
Angle between the old position and the new position of hnes is
1+mm 45°. Therefore, we have
Thus, if angle between lines 1s 6, then lan 45° =
3-m
my -—m 1+ 30
tan @=+——— Or l + 3m = 3 mM
1+mmy )| mM —m or 4m =2
If @1s acute angle between lines, then @= tan 1mm,
l
If 61s obtuse angle between lines, ol m=— =tan@
2
then @= 180° - tan"!| ~2——

Mm, —m
I+ mm
ry
4.18 Coordinate Geomet - a) (ya)
or (by ~ by) (by ~ by) = (ey
ILLUSTRATION 1 44
s. Find the slope of or [22 (2)
Let A(6, 4) and B(2, 12) be two given point a,-a Jl ay- 4
a line perpendicular to
AB. or (slope of AB) * (slope of AC) = -1
Hi."
(ay, b,),
Let mi be the slope of 4B Then, Therefore, the triangle ts right-angled at point
Sol.
}2-4 8 Hence, the circumcenter is the midpoint of (a,, hy) and (a, b
We ae ay +a, by +b, my
eee
2-6 + which ts ( 5 a |
So. the slope of a line pe rpendiculat to 4B ts
I l
iLLUSTRATION 1,46
nt
Find the orthocenter of AABC with vertices A(1, 0), B(-2
ILLUSTRATION 1.45 rt),
and C(5, 2).
Iflme 3: —n — | = O18 parallel to the line (@ + 2) ¥- +3 =0 ACO)
then find the values of a. Sol, Let the orthocenter be H(h, k).
2-1 ] ;
Sel. The slope of the line 3. - ar = O18 3a Slope o f BC = 520-2) =—7
The slope of the hne (a+ 2). -14+3=01sa+2
2-0 1 a Pe
Since the lines are parallel, we have
Slope of AC = ear 4 dai H
~ #3 ;
AH 1 BC
Slope of AH = -7 B(-2, 1) Oy
or alg 3=0
k-0O | ==
or ja- Wa-3)=0
rl
Tr —-
or e=1ora=-3 i
—Th+T=kor7h+k=7
ILLUSTRATION 1.46 Also, BH L AC

Slope of BH = -2
If 4(2. — 1) and B(6, 5) are two points, then find the ratio in
which the foot of the perpendicular from (4, 1) to AB divides it. k-] 25
or Se
h+2
5 P(4, 1)
Sel Let =
MB ]
I 3, k-1=-2h-4o0r2h+k=-3
Solving (1) and (2), we get # = 2 and k=-7
Therefore. the coordinates of Mare
Hence, the orthocenter is (2, —7)
64-2 S/,-] | |
A~-1l A441} / ILLUSTRATION 1.49
A 4 1
P\4_ 4B 4 MM B Two medians drawn from acute angles of a right angled
SA-1_, (201) (6, 5) triangles mtersect at an angle of 7/6. If the length of the
ox 47) JS-Ch] __,
hypotenuse of the triangle is 3 units, then find the area of the
64-2 _ 3 | triangle.
Arlo -
27-1 {3 Sol,
or - =-]
ey (O, by Ad
or 64-3=2-23
or L= _
ILLUSTRATION
0. 3)FEb \
\
1.47 oe
If (6, ~ by) (b; — by) +(a,- ayy la, a\) 0, then
prove that the
circumcenter of the triangle having vertices B p Cla. 0)
(a), b;), (dy, by)
($-°)
qt
and (a3, b,) 1s (224, by + by
2 2 /} In the figure, ABC is right angled triangle.
Sol. Given (by ~ by) (b, - by) + (a>
ay) (ay
Given that AC'- 3
ay) 0
So, ar + b=9
A(a,, hb)
AD and CF are two medians.
f a
a
So, D= (Z. 0| and F= (o 4
a
(» b:)8Cireumeenter ~~ “Clty, by)
2
Slope of AD = wae
a
it ae —
or eee
em__ 1.19
Coordinate Syst
supeotcr= 22 : The polar coordinates of point Pare defined as (7,
(), where rts
2a
the distance of ? from the origin (pole) and (1s the angie ofOF
2b fb
ee with positive direction of x-axis For point P. r= coy oe
tan < = —a_2a ~3ab _ 3ab
be a2 | @=tan! =,
1+a (a°+h°y| 9x2 x
We extend the definition y (9)

| _ ab of
(7,
polar
8) to
coordinates
the case in
which 1 1s negative by Q— a7)
fat 2s
=> abn 28 agreeing that the points OO O
(-7, 9) and (r, 8) lie on
the same line through
origin O and at the same
distance || from O, but (8)
on opposite sides of O.
as @ and if r < 0,
| i Le _ soning the points (x, 2x) and (3, 5) makes an
obtuse angle with the posit y . If r > 0, the pomt (r, @) lies in the same quadrant
side of the pole
Then find the values ity: Ne direction of the Y-axts then it lies in the quadrant on the opposite
From the figure, (—r, 9) 1s the same as (r, 0+ 2).
2. If the line passing through (4, 3) and (2, k) 1s parallel to
every point has only one
the line) = 2 + 3, then find the value of k, In the Cartesian coordinate system,
system each point has
3, Tnangle 4BC lies in the cartesian plane and has an area of representation, but in the polar coordinate
70 sq units The coordinates of B and C are (12, 19) and many representations For instance, the point (1, 57/4) can be
etc
(23. 20). respectively. The line containing the median to written as (1, —377/4) or (1, 1321/4) or (-1, 7/4),
y ay
the side BC has slope —S. Find the possible coordinates of
point -4
4. ABCD 1s a rhombus of side 10 units where slope ofAB 1s Sa4 3a
a
[\4
ee
4:3 and slope of 4D 1s 3/4 If coordinates of A are (0, 0),
then find the coordinates of B, C and D
(3)
5. The line joing the points 4(2, 1). and Bi3, 2) 1s
perpendicular to the line (a" ix +(a+2)y+2=0 Find the
values of a.
4 4
6. Find the angle between the line joining the points (1. —2),
(3. 2) and the line x + 21 -7=0
7)
y ay fi inp
vertices B(1, -2) and Lo
7. The orthocenter of A4BC with
C(-2. 0) 1s H(3. -1). Find the vertex A ||
8. The medians AD and BE of the triangle with vertices
a 13x u
oN = Ys =r
A(0. 6). B(O, 0) and C(a, 0) are mutually perpendicular SO O
Prove that a” = 26°
ANSWERS 4
2. -l 3. (15, 32)or (20, 7) (. 122) (1 z)
L. xe (5/2. 3) 4 4)
4. B(6, 8), C(14. 14), D(8, 6) §.,@=2,-l
6. 2 _7. (3/7,-34) ILLUSTRATION 1.50
Plot the points whose polar coordinates are given below.

POLAR COORDINATES
Let distance OP ber (i) (2, 32) (ti) (2,-27/3) (itt) (-3, 3/4)
Consider point P(x, y) in the first quadrant
and inclination of OP be 6 Sol.
ay
P(x, y)
_~, 8 (r cos 6, rin 8)
=(r 0)
wis
L Ws (2, Avr) é BE 7 .
= LA
ee on
O x
x=rcos
@and y=rsin 8
Thus, (x, y) = (r cos 6, r sin 8)
——— i
41.20 Coordinate Geometry )

Using positive r, we have
COORDINATE CONVERSION
are related to the rectangular
The polar coordmates (7% @) r= y+? =n sae ~ 5
coordinates (4.1) as follows. So, one set of polar coordinates ts (r, 0) = ( V2
3
Polar to rectangular ] Reetangular to Polar Using negative r, we have coordinates = G V2 ™4),
| \ (11) For the fourth quadrant point (x,y) = (2,3 weg)
} v=recos @ fan @- —-
“3 ), We have
pss
i ,=rsn@ tan 0=
ILLUSTRATION 1.51
= @= tan] = mitt 12.
2 2
Convert the following points from polar coordinates to the Using positive r, we have
corresponding Cartesian coordimates
= fx? + y? Sle3)? ++ (2) = /i3
(od (2. 7S) qa) (0. 2) qn) ff m/4) oxoone set of polar coordinates 15
Sol. 0, A= [vi3. -tan"! $|

a) (2. 73)20.0)
Ne have. =recos@=2 cos — = ay
and. =rsin@= 2 sin
Therefore. the point is d.v3) in the Cartesian

coordinates
_ sf tan 135
(mn) Here. v= 0-cos(z2)=0
andi =O0sin(x2)=0
So. (0. #2) 1s equivalent to (0, 0) in the Cartesian Q tan? 2 *
2
coordinates
8 5 { ] |
(un) yous epsom — | =- v13
4 \ 2
(13. -tan' 3)
2 _ 13
(73. mT — tan 3\
So. the equivalent Cartesian coordinates for the given
polar coordinates are (-1. —]) Using negative r, we have coordinates
3
ILLUSTRATION 1.52 = [-vi. 7: — tat |
2
Convert the following cartesian coordinates to corresponding ILLUSTRATION 1.53
polar coordinates using positive r and negative r
Convert Cartesian equation y = 10 into a polar equation
(1) (-1.1) (ii) (2, -3)
Sol, v= 10
SoL
or rsin @= 10
(3) For the second quadrant point (x, ») = (—1!, 1), we have
10
31
tan@=-=
ar
| = = —4 or ~ sin @
or r= 10 cosec 0
ILLUSTRATION 1.54 s
: — tangu
Express the polar equation r = 2 cos @ 1m ree
coordinates.
=f cos 6.
and ©
~
We use the formulas 77 = 7 +9”
3 ane
Sol.
Given r= 2 cos @. Therefore,
r= 2rcos @
or x + pele
or = x?7 2x + =0
1.21
system
Coordinate
wn exercise 1 3
1 +y?= l
yr -2xt
or 5
CONCEPT APPLICATIOC
jvalent
rdinates to Its equ
(x- iP+y" re |
or
the fol low ing pol ar coo
1. Convert
|LLUSTRATION 1.55 Cartesian coordinates
(1) (2. 2) (n) (J3. 2/6) to the
Convert x2 —y" =4 into a polar equation. coordinates
2. Conv ert the following Cartesia n_ siti ve r.
dinates u sing po
Sol. ye y= corresponding polar coor
(i) (-3, 4)
6)" =4 qa) (1,-!)
or (r cos ey -(rsin ap olar equation
>
Convert 2x” + 31° = 6 into nt Cartesian
1 cos°-6—7* sin’?@= 4
a) >
or in to its equivale
a
@ sec
2 2
2 @-sin°@)=4 4. Convert r = 4tan
re (COS
point on the line
or equation
r cos 20=4
>
distance of any
or 5. Find the minimum coordinates
ongin using polar
3x + 4y- 10=0 from the
1.56
[ILLUSTRATION — ANSWERS_ ae
into tts equivalent Cartesian

Convert r sin @=r cos 6+ 4
. (1) (-2, 0) any (3/2, 3/2)
equation.
—
. 7:4)
Sol: Given r sin @=rcos 0+ 4 Therefore, . 0) (V2.-7/4) or (v2
N
yext4 4/3) or (5.-2+ tan 1.43)
(i) (5.2 + tan"
ILLUSTRATION 1.57 3. 7(2 + sin’6) = 6
Convert r = cosec @ e' 9 into its equivalent Cartesian

equation.
LOCUS AND ITa varS iabEQ UATION
le point on the plane w hich moves
rcos @ The curve described by
So r=cosec Oe" P= sin 8 ed its locus.
a set of conditions 1s call
= under given condition or P(x. +) 1s a
or rsin 9= 0°? 1s a fixed point and
For example. let C(a, b) suc h a way that
plane If P moves in
variable point in the same
or y= &
P trac es out 4 curc le
7, then point
the distance CP 1s constant
whose centre 1s C and radius r
ILLUSTRATION 1 5a
the curve
the maximum distance of any point on Since CP =r, we have
Find
(v- ay +(v- BY SE.
2xy=
2 +2+y | from the origin
which ts the equation of locus of point P
ve be
of any point on the cur
Let the polar coordinates
~~
Sol.
P(r, 6).
are P( rcos 6,7 sin 8).
Then its Cartesian coordinates
Point P lies on the curve Then
+ 2Y sin @cos O= |
P cos?6+ 2° sin’@
J
or r= eT
26
cos’@ + 2sin76 + sin
If
ee
}
Let A(y,, 1) and B(xy, v3) be two fixed points ina plane.
+) +sin 20 that 4P = BP,
sin2@ P(a,v) 1s. a variable pornt in the same plane such
2 then P les on the perpendicular bisector of 4B or locus of point
_
Pus line which 1s the perpendicular bisector of 48.
}—cos20 +2 + 2sin 26
Tra.
ie
26 +2in 20
3~cos
%
Js
Now, -J5 < —cos 26 + 251n 26
"
< 3+ V5
oF 3- J5 <—cos20 +2820
pee, Bias. >)
Set. JAS
or Fie =2
°F Tmax ~ z
3-5
ILLUSTRATION 1.62
AB is a variable line sliding between the coordinate
and B hes on the axes jp
ea Cen) ied Onn Oe such a way that A lies on the x-axis
PA = b, pg Y-axis, If
P is a variable point on AB such that 4, and
or s of P.
variable point we often let AB = a + b, find the equation of the locu
To find the equation of locus of
vA
the variable point as (/7, k) at Sol, Let P(A, &) be a
/7 by 1 and & by 1, we
using given condition(s). Replacing variable point on AB such that
required equation of locus. ZOAB =0 R
a
Here, @ 15 a variable.
ILLUSTRATION 1 .59 uv % Ph. k)
From triangles ALP and PMB.
of a moving point from b
The sum of the squares of the distances we have
two fixed pomts (a. 0) and (-a, 0)
ts equal to a constant quantity k ft
(1) a: a a me .
2¢° Find the equation to tts locus
sn O= 7
moving pot and let h
(2)
Sol. Let Pus. A) be any position of the cos 9= =a
ts Then, we have
(a, 0), B(-a. 0) be the given poin have to eliminate @.
PA? + PB = 2c"
(Given) Here, @ 1s a variable. So, we
adding, we get
0 = 20° Squaring (1) and (2) and
or Uh=aF +k - 0% +h + ay + (k-
ee, |) ae ee le”
Dhe es Dke™ Jar
. 5 2 5
| ide Silt Sie Ce
1s
Hence, the locus of (A, k)
or > 5 * o]
(A. A} sx tT Fo @
Hence. the equation to locus x
xX? y?
1.60 =ghig Fl
ILLUSTRATION a b
the join of (-5, 1) and ( 3552)
Find the locus of a point. so that ILLUSTRATION
1.63
point.
subtends a nght angle at the moving R is a variable point
1) and Two points P(a, 0) and Q(—a, 0) are given.
point and let A(-5, is a positive constant
Sel Let Pik. k) be a moving above x-axis such that ZRPQ — ZROP
Bi. 2) be the given points. 2a Find the locus of the point R
From the given condition. we have
Sol. Let R=(x),.))
ZAPB = 90°
gle Hence. Also, let, ZRPM=0 and ZROM = @.
Therefore. A4PB 1s a nght-angled tnan
AB = AP- - PB | R(x,.¥)
or «(3-5 -@-1P =k SP + 1)? +(A—-3)° +(k- 29

or 68 = 2h - + 2h - 3k) + 39 yy
or 0 a ~~ 2h-3k-13=0 Es x
2x -3y-13=0 en ee
Hence. the locus of (h, k) 1s x7 +" + Q(-a, 0) OM M~ P(a,O)
ILLUSTRATION 1.61 vy
Find the locus of a point such that the sum of its distan
ce from
oy .
RM
—~ = _ Hi
il
the points (0. 2) and (0, —2) 1s 6. In ARMP, tan 0 =
MP “se y
Let Pth ky be any point on the locus and let A(0, 2) and .)
Sok ‘ (-
B(G, -2) be the given points In AROM, tan @ = BOM ee Mh
OM at,
By the given condition, we gel
= 2a (constant) Therefore.
PA ~ PB=6 But given ZRPQ ~ ZROP
or th - Of = (k-27° ~ th- Oy + (k4 2y = 0-=2a
or Vie + (k ~2y¢ 76 ‘th O) + (kd 25 or tan(@ — Pp) = tan 2
or A + (k- 29° = 36-12 Yh 4 (kt 2y th?
(k 1 2) Pr geo 2 .
1) tan@ tang faest
or -&k — 36 =-12 Yh? + (k + 2° vy Vy
or (2k + 9) = 3A? + (k + 25° ad ata

7 = tan 2a
or (2k + 9 = 9h? + (k + 2)*3 OF vy a
or 4K + 36k + 81 = 9h? + 9 + 36K 4 36 * ae, a Fx,

or 9h? + 5K? = 45 2x\y
Hence, the locus of (h, k) 15 9x7 + 5y" = 45 or 2 tt+y__| = tan2a
aqa—x,
ee ee ee 1.23
eO
Coordinate 5/2F
or a’-x +yt = 2x1), cot 2a
or MU vi + 2xiv, cot 2a = @? Here, A=
2(10 cos 8) + 3(5) -Feosiii-3
2+3
Hence, the locus of the point Ri iy i) is
v-»+2yvcot2a=q? _
al E E
2110 sin 8) + 30
ond
ara ee 2+3
(h 3th 16
FINDING EQUATION OF Locus py EL, MINATION OF 3y 717 ~ 16
Therefore, locus of Ph. kyis
GIVEN VARIABLE
In some cases, We are given coordinates of variable pomtin terms ILLUSTRATION 1.67
of some parameter (variable). To get the locus of such pomt i vertices of
If A(cos a, sing). B(sin a, _cos a). C(\. 2) are the
eliminate the parameter. For example, if we need to find the locus AABC, then as « varies, find the locus of its centroid
of variable point (cos 6. sin 8), we let 1 = cos @and y =sin @. To
establish the relation between x and vy, we elimmate fiaramricler 0. ; Sol. Let (h. k) be the centroid of the triangle Then.
which we can do here by squaring and adding. cosa+singa +]
So. required equation of locus 1s x? + y" = J. h = ———————_
3
qLLUSTRATION 1.64 sing - cosa +2

and k= 3
If the coordinates of a variable point P are (a cos 6, b sin 6),
or 3h-]=cosa+sng
where 6 is a variable quantity, then find the locus of P.
and 3k -2=sina-—cosa@
WO Let P=Qa.). According to the question, Squaring and adding, we get
x=acos@ (1) (3h - 1)? + (3k - 2) =2
v=bsiné (2) or 9(h? +) - 6h - 12k -3 =0
Squaring and adding (1) and (2), we get
> >
or 3(h? +) - 2h- 4k +1 =0
a)
= cos 6+ sin“ @
>
Therefore, the locus of the centroid 18 34> — >
2 >
a b&b
or sta =!
1. Find the locus of a point whose distance from (a. 9) 15
x -
a
equal to its distance from the 1 axis.
IcustTRATION 1.65 The coordinates of the points 4 and B are ia, 0) and
R. (-a, 0), respectively Ifa point P moves so that Pi- - PE
Find the locus of the point (P -1+1,°+¢+1),1€ = 2k, when & ts constant, then find the equauon to the
locus of the point P
Let 4(2, -3) and B (—2. 1) be the vernces of AABC. If
Le 1+ 1. +141)
(h.kys(P the centroid of the tnangle moves on the line 2x - 3: = 1.
or = h=P-trlandk=rti+ then find the locus of the vertex C
or k~h=21 QO 1a vanable point whose locus 1s 2v - 3) — 4 = 0:
k—-h corresponding to a particular position of QO, P ts the pot
or ‘=—_—_—
of section of OQ, O being the ongin, such thar OP PO
2
=3 1) Find the locus of P
or n= [EA
k-hyY (AF)
(k-h Lind the locus of the middle point of the portion of the
2 2 line veosce ty since — p which ty intercepted bemveen the
The required Jocus 1s axes, given that p remains constant
find the locus of the pomtot intersection of lines 1 cos &
x= (254) -(25* Je
Pysinee- aandvsinc-veosc Aur ina vanable)
A pomt moves such that the area ot the tangle tonned by
766
WiGernarion’ Wawith the pomts (1, Syand (3. 7) as TE sq units Then.
find the locus of the pont
The line segment joining A(5, ) 4 nd B(0 cos 8, 10 sin 8) 1s
divided internally in the ratio 2 : 3 at P. If 6 varies, then find A variable ting through port 2b2, Dy meets the axes at 4
and B bind the locus of the cicumecnter of (rangle OAB
the locus of P.
(where Os the oni)
Sol. Let point ? be (h, k). A stright line ts drawn through 3, 4) to meet the axis
x 4) ms of cand vat Fand By respectively Uf the rectangle OACB
sc — , — 7
Is Completed, then tind the locus ot C
(MOcon bam dy
(5,0)
_ 7 ee
a
— _ AC = V256+169 = V425
ANSWERS
ee
Thus, AB=AC#BC
a
1 yr - 2a +a7=0 2. 2ax +k? =0

So
4. 20+ 3y4+3=0 Therefore, triangle 1s isosceles, and 1m an 1sosceles. tri a

3. 2v+3V=9
centers are collinear "gle, ay
ee 6. eta th?
| $ Udi EXAMPLE 1.3
a i p-
ends tou
7, 6v+1 =32 or &I+V=-10 A rod of length & slides in a vertical plane, its
of the foot on
3) 64 the coordinate axes. Prove that the locus
—+-—=l ) ap ape
perpendicular from the origin to the rod 1s (P+
y+21-2n
=0 9,
| g.
va |
|
‘Sol. | (Slope of OP) (Slope of BP) ~ -|
E Solved Examples & or B B-6 SI Vv

a a-9
EXAMPLE 1.1 p< 2 (0, b)B

B P(a,B)
OF
If a. b. ¢ are the pth, gth. rth terms, respectively, of an HP, xy
show that the points (bc, p), (ca. g), and (ab, r) are collinear. and (Slope of OP)-(Slope
be D
of AP) =-I
Sol. Let the first term be 4 and the common difference Aia.oy**
=-] ; “|
of the corresponding AP or B BL
a @-a
Given pth term of HP =a
+B?
] a =
pth term of AP = — a
a
Now, a? + bak
ES
A-(p-1)D=
a (oP + PY =KoeP
(2+ yy = 222
Similarly. 4+(¢-1)D= ;
EXAMPLE 1-4 “
4-(r-1)D=- On OY 1s taken a fixed
OX and OY are two coordinate axes
Subtracting. we get ° point P(O, c) and on OX any point Q. On PQ, an equilateral
] ] triangle 1s described, its vertex R being on the right side of PO
(p-q)D=—-=
a a b Prove that the locus of R is y = V3 x-.
and ( —_ tah
)D [= _ er
Sol. This given fixed point 1s P(0, ¢).

a db ¢
Dividing. we get From given Fig ,
7
P-g hbo-ac
g-r — ac-ab (1)
RAR)
The given points are A(bc. p), B(ca, q). and C(ab, r). P(0, cK — *
g-P \ |
Slope of AB = mabe
\.60°
- q—P
[Using (1)] or a
and Slope of BC a = “7
O O i
, = i q
sf Slope of BC = Slope of AB
Therefore, 4, 8. and C are collinear h=OL=OQO+QL
= cot 8+ OR cos( 180° - 60° — 8)
EXAMPLE 1.2 =c cot 0+ PO{cos 120° cos + sin 120° sin 8}
Prove that the circumcenter, orthocenter, incenter, and centroid P. 3 ‘
of the triangle formed by the points A(—1, J), B(-9, -8), and =c col 6- a cos + —- PQ sin @
C(15, -2) are collinear, without actually finding any of them.
“=
3 ;
l
+ —— c coset @sin 4
|
Sol. The given points are A(-1, 11), B(-9, -8), and C(15, -2). =ccot @- —ccosec cos
2
¢
AB = V¥64+361 = V425
|: sin 9 = 7)
BC = V576+36 = J612
Te,
1.25
—
h= < (cot 6+ 3) or x”? a 14x'y' a Ty" _ 2 = 0
, (1) Hence, the new equation of the curve 1s

Now. A= RL = RQ sin( 180°
- 60° — g x - l4xy- Ty? -2=0
-Po| | a2 vs DE
ee
l eee an TTTRS
sin@x—+cos@x EXAMPLE 1.9000 we ekeeo hoe a 4
: 9, sin @) in the line having

Prove that the image of point P(cos
~
origin is Q(cos(a ~ 9),

=e cosec @
1,
anes Seo slope tan(o/2) and passing through
sin (@- )).
k= s+ 3 cot 6) Sol.
(2)
: :
Ehmunating cot @ from (1) and (2), we get k= V3 Ac
Therefore. the required locus 1s = fix coastradhutue P(cos 9, sin @)
EXAMPLE 1.5
If(a.1) and (XV. }) are the coordinates of the same point referred
OR
to two sets of rectangular axes with the same origin and if
wx t+ vv. Where uv and v are independent of x and y, becomes es > Ocos(& - 9). sin(a@ - 9))
V+ U). show that vw + r=U+P7 ss
M
Sol. Let the axes rotate at angle @ If (x, v) 1s the point with
respect to the old axes and (-Y. }') are the coordinates with respect
to the new axes. then
Clearly, OP = OQ = |
[1 = Vcos@—- sin of P in the line OR
Now, we have to prove that 0 is the mage
hh = V¥sin@+} cos@
which has slope tan(@/2).
=X cos O- Y sin 8) + 1{¥ sin 6+ ¥ cos 6)
Then wx-11 Triangle POQ 1s isosceles triangle
=(ucos @~ vsin 8) A + (-n sin 8+ v cos 8) Y the perpendicular
If Q 1s the image of P in line OR. then OR 1s
But given new expression 1s }-A+ UY Then.
bisector of PQ.
IN - UY=(ucos 6+ sin 6) X+ («sin 6+ vcos 8) Y
On comparing the coefficients of X and Y, we get We have to prove that ZOOM = a- 8
ucos @- sin O=V (1) ZROQ = ZPOR = 8- (a2)
(2)
and -wsin@-1 cos @=U ZOOM = ZROM - ZROQ
Squanng and adding (1) and (2). we get
en-ir=l ed
EXAMPLE 1.8 : sea
EXAMPLE 1.6
A line cuts the x-axis at A(7, 0) and the y-axis at B(O, -5). A
What does the equation 2x? + 4xy — $y? + 20x
- 22y - 14 =0 variable line PQ 1s drawn perpendicular to AB cutting the
through the point
become when referred to the rectangu lar axes x-axis at P and the y-anis at Q. If AQ and BP intersect at R, then
ned at an angle o f 45° with
(—2, -3), the new axes being incli find the locus of R
the old axes?
Sol. From the figure mn AABQ,
axes are rotated about O' by
Sel. Let 0’ be (-2. -3). Since the AP 1 BQ, PQ AB
direction, let (x’,y’) be the new
an angle 45° in the anticlockwise
axes and (x, y) be the coordinates
coordinates with respect to new e r)
with respect to the old axes Then, we have
cos 2
x=- -y' x
45° + '= -2
sin 45° +1
17,0)
x'-y'
sindst-nghcagasr=2+ | Va
y=-3+x' / “
The new equation will be
afaool( EMyleh
a E(Gg (0, -5)
= 1-3 (e)/ +20|-24 <<) Then, we have

concurrent), Elence,
BP 1 AQ (as the altitudes of triangle are
35 |-3 (2) -14=0 BR1LAR

k-0 A485
— xX ae PC, k)
“ h-7 h-O
/
Therefore, equation of the locus of Ras 447 = 71 4 Se = 0.
EXAMPLE 1.9 “eid 3h.

Two straight lines rotate about two fixed points (-a, 0) and {2
\0
(a. 0) in anticlockwise sense. If they start from their position B(-a, 0) a Ala, 0) %
of comeidence such that one rotates at a rate double the other,
then find the lecus of curve.
Putting value of tan @ from (1), we get
Sol. Let PB make angle @ and P4 make angle 26 with 1-axis.
Let P be (hb)
(1)
id k . h-a
[i=
5)
(2) =~ h+hR-2ah-3a
=0
From (2). we get
> x+y? -2ax - 3a’ =0
2tan@ k
l-tan-@ h-a
Coordinate System 1.27
~—___ Exercises Oo i
9. The polar coordinates equivalent to (-3, V3) are
. ABC is an isosceles tr
ve B(1, 3) and C(-2, =i
fe coordina
(1) (23.2) (2) (-23. |
nes the Pare
(1) (1,6) (2): { 1/2, §) eoganbe
(3) (5/6,6) (3) [vi] (4) (2v5. ==
(4) none of these
2. If two vertices of a triangle are
(1, 3) and (4, 10. Ifthe point (x) & Hx) — x,)..¥) + Hy ~ ¥;)) divides the join
area Of triangle is § Sq_ of (x),,) and (x5, y) internally, then
untts, then the angle
vertex lies in (1) 1<0 (2) O<¢- 1
1) (0. 2tan15
5
(3) ¢>1 (4) 1=1
2 -13 Il. Pand Q are points on the line joining A(—2, 5) and B(3, 1)
such that AP = PQ = OB Then, the distance of the midpoint
(3) ‘tan-!>rt 4
| 2tan 2 of PQ from the origin 1s
(4) none of these
3. Which of the following
(1) 3 (2) /37/2
sets of Points form an equilateral (3) 4
tangle” (4) 3.5
(1) (1.0). (4.0). (7, -1) 12. In triangle ABC, angle B 1s right angle and AC = 2 If
coordinates of A and B are (2, 2) and (1, 3), respectively,
(2) (0. 0). (3/2. 4/3), (4/3, 3/2)
then the length of median AD 1s
(3) (23,0). (0. 2/3). (1.1)
(4) None of these
A particle p moves from the point
oy Ga ee
13. One vertex of an equilateral triangle 1s (2. 2) and its
2
A(0, 4) to the point
(10. -4) The particle P can travel the upper
-half plane 2 2
centroid is | ~—=, —= | The length of its side 1s
i(x.1) 20} at the speed of | m/s and the lower
-half plane
(x. ¥)i ¥ SO} at the speed of 2 m/s The coordinates of a
. | 5 i)
point on the x-axis. if the sum of the squares of the travel
(1) 4v2 (2) 4V3
umes of the upper- and lower-half planes 1s minimum, are (3) 3V2 (4) sy2
(1) (1,0) (2) (2.0) 14, ABCD isa rectangle with A(-1, 2), B(3, 7) and
(3) (4,0) (4) (5,0) 4B. BC =
4.3 If P is the centre of the rectangle, then the
5.1 f distance
of P from each corner 1s equal to
lx, », I la 4 I
ey yp Wefan by (1) a
2
14
(2) svat
4
4
(3) Nal
3
41
(4) 5 Vil
al
| X3 V3 ] a, b, ] §
15. If (2, -3), (6,5) and (-2. 1) are three conse
then the two triangles with vertices (x), y,), (2. V2), cutive Vertices
of a rhombus, then its area 1s
(x,. 32) and (ay. b;), (az. by), (a3, by) are (1) 24 (2) 36 (3) 18
(1) equal in area (2) similar (4) 48
(4) none of these 16. If points 4 (3, 5) and B are equidistant
(3) congruent from H(V2, V3)
and B has rational coordinates, then
6. OPOR is 4 square and M, N are the middle points ms ite 4B =
sides PY and OR, respectively, Then the ratio of the area (V7 (2) \a-s8) +(s - Vs)
of the square to that of triangle OMN 15
(3) 34 (4) None of these
en ee
an hea 3, ; meets hh coordinate 17, Let» be the number of points having
aa 0
ration al coordinates
’ es adie Ee er on the distance af this ae ata fixed distance trom the point (0,
Phe area of triangle V3) . Then
line from the origin O is maximum (l) nw -2 (2) ns
OAB 1s equal to
(3) n<2 |
(2) 25/3 sq. units
(1) 50/3 sq. umits IB. In AABC, the sides BC
(4) 100/3 sq. units 5, C4 - 4 and AB = 3 If
(3) 20/3 sq. units A= (0,0) and the internal bisector
8. Let A = (3, -4), B= (1,2). La? 5 k
1,2k 1 J) bea of angle 4 meets BC in
12;
nimum. Then k ss D . 12= .
ntre of . AABC 1s
variable point such that PA + PB is the qi!
|. then ince
(2) 0
(1) 79 (4) none of these 22 2) B29 323) @) Gy)
(3) 7/8
Be 44
le AB C wi th ve rtices A(—1, 0),
etry
oe
27. A triang the ortho
Coordinate Geom
thocenter at H. Then,
a \ and
|
1.28
C(-3, 7/6) has its or
B
Cente
l
[5 “=3 | are vertices
of a triangle, of triangle BCH wil
l be
19. ago.0.81.0)298 (2) (1, 3)
lines AB, BC and (1) (3, -2)
cir cle for which the (4) none of these
then the ce nt re of the (3) (-1,2)
C4 are tangents 1S 10), circumcenter = (-1/3, 9,
If in triangle ABC, A= (1, the coordinates of .
28.
iW orthocenter = (11/3 , 4/3), then
1 1 @ . a midpoint of the side
opposite to A are
ie
oa)
(1) 34
(2): Oe)
\ l qty (1, -113) (1,6)
(4)
Hi | l (3) (1. -3)
(3) [> er
B are (0, 0), AB = 2, ZABe
29. In AABC , the co ordinates of
hocentre. ¢ ircumcentre e point of BC has coordinates (2. 0)
1: lf in a triangle, ort = 7/3, and the mi ddl
20. Statement mu st also triangle 1s
points, then its vertices The centroid of the
and centroid are ration al (2) (5/3, 1/N3)
be rational points (1) (1/2, ¥3/2)
are rational (4) none of these
Statement 2: If the ver
t ces of a triangle (3) (4+ V3/3, 1/3) without
circumcentre a nd orthoc
entre are the point (ab/(a — b), 0)
points. then the centroid, 30. If the origin is shifted to 2 — 2abx = 4
also rational points ;
rotation, then the equation (a ~ by + y*)
statement
statemen t 2 1s true and
(1) Statement | 1s truce. becomes
for statement 1
> ys correct explanation
state ment 2 1s true and sta
tement (1) (a- db)? +¥)- (a + b)xy + abx = a
(2) Statement | 1s true, (2) (a+) (x? + y’) = 2ab
ation for stat ement 1.
> ys NOT the correct eaplan
Statement | 1s true, statem
ent 2 1s false. 3) + y)=(" +6)
(2)
(4) Statement | 1s false. statem
ent 2 15 true. (4) (a— by (P+) = ao
nt source placed at P(2, 3)
three points P = (-sin(B — @),
~cos B), 31. Alight ray emerging from the poi
21. Consider Jt then passes through
B- a+), sin (B— 8)), is reflected at a point Q on the y-axis
O= cos(B-a), sin B). and R= (cos( es of Q are
where 0< @. 8. 0< 14 Then the point R(5, 10). The coordinat
(1) (0,3) (2) (0, 2)
(1) P. hes on the Ime segment RQ
(3) (0, 5) (4) none of these
(2) QO hes on the line segment PR
(3) R hes on the line segment OP 32. Points P(p, 0). O(g. 0). RO, p), S(O, 9) form
(1) parallelogram (2) rhombus
(4) P. Q. R are non-collinear
3) and (5, -1), the cyclic quadrilateral (4) none of these
22. Iftwo vertices of atnangle are(-2_, (3)
on the line
orthocenter lies at the origin. and the centroid 33. A rectangular billiard table has vertices at P(0, 0), O(0
. 7).
x- 3 = 7. then the third vertex hes at rts at M(3.4),
R(10, 7), and S(10, 0) Asmall billiard ball sta
nces 10
(1) (7.4) (2) (8, 14) moves ina straight line to the top of the table, bou
(3) (12.21) (4) none of these the right side of the table, and then comes to rest at M7. 1).
ht side is
The y-coordinate of the point where it hits the rig
23. The vertices of a triangle are (pq, 1/(pq)). (gr, 19r)), and (3) 3.9 (4) 4
(1) 37 (2) 3.8
(rg. ! (1p). where p. g. and r are the roots of the equation
3° - 337 + 6, - 1 = O The coordinates of its centroid are 34. ABCD 1s a square. Points E(4, 3) and F(2, 5) lie on 1B
(I) 1.2) (2) (2-1) and CD, respectively, such that EF divides the square in
n the
(3) (1.-]) (4) (2,3) two equal parts. If the coordinates of 4 are (7. 3). the
coordinates of other vertices can be
24. If the vertices of a tangle are (V5, 0), (V3, V2), and
(2, 1), then the orthocenter of the triangle 15 (1) (7, 2) (2) (7,5)
(1) (W45.0) (2) (0,0) By 1,3) (4) (-1,5)
(3) (v5 4+ V3 +2,¥/2 +15) (4) none of these Jae If one side of a rhombus has endpoints (4, 5) and (1, 0.
25. Two vertices of a triangle are (4, —3) and (-2, 5). If the then the maximum area of the rhombus 1s
orthocenter of the triangle 1s at (J, 2), then the third vertex (1) 50 sq. units (2) 25 sq. units
1s (3) 30 sq. units (4) 20 sq. units
(1) (-33, -26) (2) (33, 26)
36. Arectangle ABCD, where A = (0,0), B= (4,0). C #4 2), D?
(3) (26, 33) (4) none of these
(0, 2), undergoes the following transformations successively:
‘6. In| AABC, b if the orthocen ter 1s (1, 2) and the sente
is (0, 0), then centroid of AABC is 1. f(x,y) > OY, x)
oes
» ue 2/3) (2) (1/3, 2/3) MW. f(x, y) > (x + 3y, y)
) (2/3, 1) (4) none of these tit. Ax(x, y) > ((x—y)/2, (& + y\/2)
genet
POM
ae
ofthe moving
—
ine locus 1 1saP
~ “The final figure wil
l be 45 ey where ) e
e rot (2) xte
cy asquare (2) a rhombus - by (et
ay w |
| e ) *
(4)
Q) a rectangle (4) a parallelogram
gy rv vn
q7. 1a straight line through the origin bisects the line passing The locus Ros
46. where
through the given points (a cos @, a sin a) and (a cos 8 gts a(t
_ a(t
sin B). then the lines re a 2 i]
1= pint Yee et at
2 {
(1) are perpendicular yay=
(4)
(2) are parallel (1) geyvea
(saw
(3) have an angle between them of 27/4 (a) xerre triangle 25° £o15
a oe Mi and
(4) none of these 47, The maximum are
on the number line
3g. Let At mk = 3... be the points
= ’
(1) |
such that O4). OA». OAx are in GP, where O 1s the
48. The vertices cos 9), W
origin, and the common ratio of the GP be a
positive proper
sin 8), an d (5 sin 8, —§
5 -
of the Ime segment r 1S
Let AM, be the middle point its orthocente
fraction oe 0
44,2; Then the value of 5,” OM, 1s
equal to
(1) eye O-F~ 109
OA (OA, + OA) 2) «tMty ” I=
(3) tye Dat
5
3(04, - OAD)
(OA; oa OA)
(2)
OA
(1) 30a, + OAD) ‘ s e e e

n to *
drawn
l l
lars Me
P M _
peg P, perpendicu
OA,
(4) x 49. ”Froma pointrespectively. f MN pass
(3) 304, - OA) and y axes, ,
gram ABCD are A(3, 1), BU3, 6) P 1S
cus of
39, The vertices ofa parallelo (a, 5), then lo
passing through the origin (2) 4 4
C13. 21). and DG. 16) Ifa hne (1) xy =ax + by
allelogram into two congruent
parts, then (4) xt y= lines
divide s the par (3) xy = bx + of the
of pomt of intersection
the slope of the line 1s 50. The locus is
(4) 13/8 a +bm
qQ) 1/t2 (2) 11'8 (3) 25/8 m +b> andmy-*x*
y+ mx = Ja’
point O 1s the 27
2,+b
B are in the first quadrant, 4
49. Pots 4 and 7, and | ts| Qxrt| y
1s |, the slope of OB 1s pe app?
ongin If the slope of OA (Iyxt2 ype = 2 =O
04 = OB. then the slope
of AB 1s (44) 3
J.¢ z ee
2_-y=a-5
ae
-14 (3) -13
(4) -1/2 3) ¢ yea
dy) -15) @)
G P. Then the points ation
1. Leta. b,c beinA P and x.1.2 be in 51. Ifthe roots of the equ
bh =0(a> b)
(a, x). (b, 5) and (¢. =) wal
l be collinear if (x? -a") m* — 2x yin + yr r lines intersecting at
(2) S=pr2 gre the slopes of two perpendicula
() r=) P is
(4) x22 P(x,, ¥))- then the locus of Qe + 27 -k
(3) =e a) < +y aut bb
points
rvs 2x X37 2X2%4 7 2yay'y + 2y Jy the (4) P-v aah
42. fF DG QB) rarer th
a. Va) ATE perpendicular lines are drawn
(x). 4). (Xa. 32) (Xa, V5) 52. Through point P(-!, 4), two
Find the locus of incentre
(1) the vertices of a rec
tangle which intersect \-ax1s at Q and R.
(2) collinear
of APOR
(3) the vertices of a trapez
ium (1) tv +21-8y-17=0
(4) none of these (2) P-y? + 2v- 8y + 17=0
square ABCD lie on the
positive (3) x+y? -2v-8y-17=0
43. The vertices A and D of
tively. If the vertex C 1s
the
(4) x -y' + 8x- 2y-17=0
sides of x- and y-ax1s, respec B are ¥ and y both
point (12, 17), then the
coordinates of vertex 53, The number of integral points (x, ") (.¢.,
not
(2) (15,3) are integers) which he in the first quadrant but
(1) (14, 16)
(4) (17, 12) on the coordinate axes and also on the straight line
(3) (17, 5) 3x + 5p = 2007 ts equal to
line
B), where ap > 0, the straight
44, Through the point P(@, (3) 138 (4) 140
a . (2) We
a triangle of area S with the line 3x + y =A drawn
* 42 =| 1s drawn so as to form 54. The foot of the perpendicular on
and the y-axis
a b from the origin is C. If the line cuts theis x-
the axes. If ab > 0, then the least value of 51s
(A) none ) me peeves ees a
(1) @B 2) 2a8_~— 3) 3aB_—— (4) 9.1
,
Coordinate Geometry 7
-
. The image of P(a, b) on the line v = —x is Q and the image 3. If (-4, 0) and (1, ~1) are two vertices of a triang| © Of ate,
hes on
of Q on the line y = v 1s R. Then the midpoint of PR is 4 sq. units, then 1ts third vertex
(2) Sx ty) 12=9
(1) vex
(1) (a+ bb +a) (2) ((a + by/2, (b + 2/2) (4) x+5y + 12=g
(3) x+5v- 47-90
(3) (a-—b, b- a) (4) (0, 0)
le ABC 18 20 cm*. The coordina
The area of triang
56. If the equation of the locus of a pomt equidistant from the and those ofB are (3,0) The ytes ay
= 0, vertex A are (- 5, 9)
points (a), b,) and (ay, by) 18 (a) — ag) + (>, ~ by) 4 —y=2 The coord nates of C & are
C 1 lies on the line x ~ ¥ Ay A)
then the value of ¢ 1s
(dy 6.3) (2) 3-5) BY E57)
(1) d-aitb—b (2) Vale = b, #,, a sin 43), and (a cos 4
If (a co s O,,a sin A,). (4 COS
1, ' the vertices of an equilateral trang),
(3) Sl@ita.+ bth) (4) = =(a,+b,- a —b,) a sin @,) represent e
then
~ inscribe dimaceircle,
Consider three lines as follows cos 0, + cos 8, +
cos 4; = 9
Si? (1)
sin A; = 0
L, 5:-1+4=0 (2) sin@, + sin 6, +
tan 4; = 0
Ly 31-1 +5=0 (3) tan @, + tan @, +
A, = 9
be yak =) (4) cot@, + cot 6, + cot
enclose a triangle 4BC and the sum of Cicos £, sin8
If these lines If the points A (0, 0), B(cos @, sin a), and
the squares of the tangent to the interior angles can be are the vertices of
a ng ht-angled triangle, then
expressed in the form p/q. where p and q are relatively a-B
a-
VF (2) cos ia
prime numbers, then the value of p + q 1s
(1) 500 (2) 450 (3) 230 (4) 465
a-B _ a-Bp
sin—>5— =~
(4)
n are positive cos
Consider a point 4(m, 2), where m and
(3).
the
integers B 1s the reflection of 4 in the line y = x. C is The ends of a diagonal of a square are (2,
-3) and (-i, |,
the reflection ofC in the
reflection of B in the 1 axis, D is Another vertex of the square
can be
in they axis The area of
+ axis and EF 1s the reflection of D (2) (5/2, 1/2)
(1) (-3/2, -5/2)
the pentagon ABCDE 1s (4) none of these
(2) mm + 3n) (3) (1/2, 5/2)
(1) 2m(m + 7)
coordinates.
(3) m(2m 7 3n) (4) 2m(m + 3n) If all the vertices of a tnangle have integral
e. Slope of OB 1s then the triangle may be
&9. In the given figure. OABC 1s a rectangl
(2) equilateral
as (1) right-angled
| (3) isosceles (4) none of these
¢ 4 hes on
Ina AABC, A = (a. B), B= (1. 2), C= (2. 3), pont
of te
the line y = 2a + 3, where @ B are integers, and the area
| 3
| 4 eB
the greats
triangle 1s S such that (S} = 2 where [-] denotes
| of 4 can ®
| 25 integer function. Then the possible coordinates
a ane (V) @7-11) (2) (-6,-9)

, 15
A
(3) (2,7) (4) (3.9)
H
10. Inan acute triangle ABC, if the coordinates of orthocenter
(2) 1/3
(1) 1/4 are (4, b), of centroid G are (b, 26 - 8), and of crrcumcentel
(3) 1/2 (4) Cannot be determined C are (-4, 8), then 6 cannot be
| Muttiple Correct Answers Type UH (1) 4 (2) 8 (3) 12

Consider the points O(0, 0), 4(0, 1), and BCL, 1) 19 thes"
plane. Suppose that points C(x, 1) and D(1, y) are chosé?
(4) -12
1. If (6, -4), (3. 5), (-2, 1) are the vertices ofa parallelogram,
such that 0 < \ <1 and such that O, C, and D are collines
then the remaining vertex can be
Let the sum of the area of triangles OAC and BCD &
(1) (0,-1) (2) (7,30) G) (-1,9) (4) (-I1, -8)
denoted by S. Then which of the following 1s/are correc
Let 0=(0, 0), A =(0, 4), B= (6, 0). Let ? be a moving point (1) Minimum value of S is irrational lying 1n (1/3, 1/2).
such that the area of triangle POA 1s two times the area of
triangle POB. The locus of P will be a straight line whose (2) Minimum value of $ is irrational in (2/3, !)
S lies ®
equation can be (3) The value of x for the minimum value © f
(1) x+3y=0 (2) x+2y=0 (2/3, 1).
s lt
(3) 2x-3y=0 (4) 3y-x=0 (4) The value of x for the minimum values of 5 he
(1/3, 1/2).
12. Iwo sides OF a rhombus ABC) 31
1.31
Coordinate System
+ ‘ ‘ A are yar ‘
lito the
q Jy 1 3. the disci : - lines
So
cyft the
intersect at the point (1, 2)and the :* 41 Thombus Nhe maximum possble area of quadril ateral CDFE 1s
8 On the
then vertex can be V-UX4S " (1) 1/K (2) 1/4
(1) (0,3) (2) (0, §/2) (3) 5/k (4) 3/8
(3) (0.0) 7 The valueof (Py (PDy 1s equal to
(4) (0,5) ceBy + (PCy
13. A triangle ABC right angle dat C ha My 3 (2) 2 (3) | (4) 0
ving C4
b moves ina Way such that the anputar Po and CR
ints 4 And B slide R. Leta tine passing through point A divides the square ABCD
dong A-AXts and y-axis, re SPective
ly Then ¢ Into two parts so that the area of one portion 1S double
(1) ms ae 1-0 li Cs on
(2) aid 9 the other ‘Then the length of the portion of line inside the
(3) avt2hyvdae 6 (av by g square ts
(1) VIO/¥ (2) V193 GB) JB (4) 2/13
For Problen us 1-3 Il For Problems 9 and 10
For pomts P= (\,,1,) and Qe (43.15) of the
coordimate plane, a
Let ABC be an acute-angled triangle and AD, BE, and CF be tts
new distanee @(??. Q) ts defined by dP, Q)= |x, x rr medians, where / and Fare at (3, 4) and (1, 2), respectively The
Let O = (0, 0) and 4 = (3. 2). Consider the set of cil Pi centroid of AABC is G(3, 2).
the first quadrant which are equidistant (wath
renal the how
distance) from O and 9. The coordinates of D are
1. The set of pomts P consists of (1) (7,-4) (2) (5,0) (3) (7,4) (4) (-3.9)
(1) one straight line only 10. The height of the altitude drawn from point A is (in units)
(2) union of two line segments
(1) 4¥2 (2) 3V2 (3) 6V2 (4) 2V3
(3) union of two infinite rays
es |||
(4) umon ofa line segment of finite length and an
infinite
ray
The area of the region bounded by the locus of P and the
Nn
line 1 = 4 in the first quadrant 1s 1. O1s the origin and B 1s a point on the x-axis at a distance
(1) 2sq units (2) 4 sq. units of 2 units from the ongin Match the following lists.
(3) 6sq units (4) none of these
List 1 List I
3. The locus of point P 1s
(1) one-one and onto function | a. If AAOB 1s an equilateral tangle. p. (-1.43)
(2) many-one and onto function then the coordinates of 4 can be
(3) one-one and into function
b. If AAOB 1s isosceles such that ZOAB_ q. (-1.2 - \3)
(4) relation but not function
is 30°, then the coordinates of 4 can
For Problems 4 and 5 be
+
Consider the triangle having vertices O(0, 0), A(2, 0), and
c. If OB is one side of arhombus ofarea or. (—3. en)
B(1. V3). Also, b < minja,, a), 43, .4,} means b <a, when a, V3 units, then the other vertices of the
1s least; b < a, when ay 15 least, and so on From this, we can say
rhombus can be
bSa.b<a,, ..bSa,.
4. Let R be the region consisting of all those points P
d. If OB is a chord of circle with radius s. (1,2 - 43)
equal to OB, then the coordinates of
inside AOAB which satisfy d(?, OA) S min [d(P, OB),
point 4 on the circumference of the cir-
point to
d(P, AB)], where d denotes the distance from the cle such that AOAB 1s wosceles can be
the corresponding line. Then the area of the region Ris
(1) V3 sq units (2) (2+ V3) sq units 2. Consider the triangle whose vertices are (0, 0), (5, 12) and
(3) V3/2 sq. units (4) 1/N3 sq. units (16, 12) Match the following lists
inside
5. Let R be the region consisting of al] those points ? List I List Il
AOAB which satisfy OP < min[BP, AP]. Then the area of
the region R is a. Centro of the triangle
(1) V3 sq. units (2) I/N3 sq. units
(3) V3/2 sq. units (4) none of these b. Circumcenter of the trangle
; .
For Problems 6-8 ¢. lncenter of the triangle r.(27,-21) |
Let ABCD be a square with sides of unit length. Points / and
so that AE = AF. Let
are taken on sides AB and AD, respectively, d. Excenter opposite to vertex (5, 12) s. (7, 8)
P bea point inside the square ABCD.

3. Match the following lists Numerical Value Type
| List 1 |
|
List]
. Line AB passes through point (2, 3) and '
a. The locus of Pv 1) such that | p. No such point / >
positive v and y-axesat A(a, 0) and B(O, Bh Nters
xe Neely the
| CXISIS If the area of AAOB is 11, then the value of ape
yes $8 t1o
ut
—yviti -ort0 =S | - A point 4 divides the join of P(-S, 1) and 0(3 5)
J
| ratio A* | Then the integral value of & for whic In the
|g. Line segment
b. The lecus of PE 1) such that
| | of AABC, where B 1s (1, 5) and C45 Ch; 3h ag h the ate,
| units in magnitude 1s qual to ?
Vital esr tle |
~\\ tit +t
+0 =48 . The distance between the circumcenter
and the OTthoe
of the triangle whose vertices are (0. 9). (6 %) t
ce. The lecus of Pov 1) such *%), ang
(—4, 3) is L Then the value of Z
Vita e8. 416
5 Lis
cts
- Aman starts from the point P(-3, 4)
and reaches the pey
Q(0, 1) touching the x-axis at R(a@, 0)
ayer -on4+9=5 such that Pp. RQ nt
minimum Then |a4 = ‘s
da. The locus of Pa.) such s. Two rays - Let A(0, 1), BC, 1), C1, -1), D(-1,
0) be four Ponts
that 17 +4748)
+16
| If P 1s any other point, then P4 + PB + PC+ PD2>d. when
[d] 1s , where [ ] represents greatest integer
__
~y Vea 6949 57 | . Atriangle ABC has vertices A(5, 1), B(-1, —7), and CA. 4,
respectively. L be the line mirror Passi
ng through C and
4. Match the follow ing lists and then choose parallel to AB A light ray emanating
the correct code. from point 4 20€5
along the direction of the internal bisec
tor of angle4, which
List I meets the mirror and BC at E and dD,
respectively Then the
sum of the areas of AACE and AABC 1s
a. Distance between feet of perpendicular l
p. 0 - If the area of the triangle formed
drewn from a point (~3. 4) on both axes 1s by the points (2a, 5)
(a + b, 2h + a), and (2b, 2a) 1s 2 Sq. units,
then the area
of the triangle whose vertices are (a-
b. An equilateral triangle whose circumcent
re q.
b.a- db), (36-2.
| 4 + 3a), and Ba — b, 3b - a) will be
$43 —2y and one side 1s on ¥-axis has side
fength Z then the value of Z/V/3 15 - Lines L, and £, have slopes mand n, respe
ctively Suppose
L, makes twice as large angle with the honzontal
(measured
c. Area of the triangle formed by (xj3,), m counter clockwise from the positive \-ax1s) as does
5 L. and
(x. 1p and (3x, - 2x). 3), 244) Gn sq L, has 4 umes the slope of Ly IL, 1s not honzontal.
then
UNITS} 26 the value of the product mm equals
. If lines 2v - 3+ +6 =0 and Ay + 2) + 12 = 0 cut the
( ) 3
d. Ifthe points f 2 Oy. | -] woh
s. 4
coordinate axes m coneyelic points, then the value of ©
1 3 Is
(cos @ in & are collinear then the
10. Perpendiculars from the point P(4, 4) to the straight lines
number of values of Ge (U, 27] 15
3a + 4y45=Oand y=mx+7 meetat VY and R. respects ely
If the area of triangle POR 1s maximum, then the value ol
31 1s ,
Codes:
The value of a for which the Image of the point (aye
0
a bec d wrt. the line mirror 3. + » > 6a is the point (a + |. a)
(7) q ros p is
a _ . the ,
(2) r os pq 12. rhe maximum area of convex polygon formed by
8
(3) r p q s Joining the points 4(0, 0), B27,2 0), C18, 2), o( |5 |
(4) s r p q ‘ angle at verte x
and £(0, 2), where ¢€ R— {0} and interior
B is greater than or equal to 90° is
ere Coordinate System 1-33
[
—— chives | |
JEE MAIN ee
single Correct Answer Type
1. The lines p(p” + Iyx-4 *4=0 and( , , (1) I l
+ 1)- yu (2.5} (2) (2.-3]
(p + 1) 2q = 0 are Perpendicular to-acors
(1) no value of p mMmon line for

(2) exactly one value of p (3) [12] (4) (1.-3)
(3) 3) eexactlyy two two values
v of p 4 ‘. (JEE Main 2017)
(4) more than two values of p
(AIEEE 2009) 5. Let the orthocentre and centroid of a triangle be A(-3. 5)
2. If the line 2. +. = & passes throu and B(3, 3), respectively If C 1s the circumcentre of
this
divides the line segment
JOMing t
gh the point which tnangle, then the radius of the circle having line segment
(2.4) in the ratio 3. 2, then cau Rais UL, ‘rand AC as diameter, 1s
2929 3V5
(= (2) 5 (1) ae (2) V10
36 Mm 5
(3) a) = (AIEEE 2012) (3) 2vi0 o i (JEE Main 2018)
3, The number of points having both coordi
nates as integers
that he in the interior of the triangle with vertices (0,0), (0 6. A straight line through a fixed point (2. 3) mtersecis ine
41) and (41, 0) 1s coordinate axes at distinct points P and Q If O 1s the origin
(1) 901 Oi i and the rectangle OPROQ 1s completed, then the locus of
R
(3) 820 (4) 780 (JEE Main 2015) ° (2) 3v+2y=6
(1) 3x + 2v=6m
4, . Let Let k b € an integer such that triangle with vertices
ae:
(k. —3k). (5. k) and (-A. 2) has area 2828 sq sq units
units ThenThen the
th (JEE
GB) axrsores OS ee Main 2018)
orthocentre of this triangle 1s at the point
Answers Key
EXERCISES ll. (1), G) 12. (2). 3)
. 13. (2), (4)
ea on har 14s a 2) — Linked Comprehension Type
%@) 10. (2) 14 22 34 44 5)

63)
.
70)
,
8&6)
. , 6. (3) 7. (4) 8. (2) 9, (2) 10. (3)
11. (2) 12. (2) 13. (1) 14. (4) 15. (4)
16. (4) 17. G) «18. (4) 19. (3) 20. (4) Matrix Match Type
21. (4) 22. (4) ~—o23. (2) 24. GG) 25. 2) 1. a>p,bp,s,c >p.ndqs
26. (2) 27. (4) ~—28. (1) 2% (2) 30. (A) 2, Sb pea aT
31. (3) 32. 3) 33 (1) 34. (4) 35. 2) ; eae 8
36. (4) 37. (1) — 38. (2) — 39 (2) 40. (4)
43.) 44. (2) 45. @) Numerical Value Type
41. (2) 42. (1)
(4)
46. (3) 47. (1) 48. (4) 49. 3) 50. (2) 1. (220)
6. (375)
2. (7)
7. (8)
3. (5)
8 (2)
4. (0.6)
9 (3) 10.5. (4)
51. (2) 52. (2) «53. (I) 54 (4) 5 (A)
I. (2) 12. (54)
56. (4) 57. (4) 58. (2) 5% (3)
ARCHIVES
Multiple Correct Answers Type
4. (2), (4) JEE MAIN

3. (3), (4)
6. (1), (3), (4) Single Correct Answer Type
S. (1), (2) 40 £56
7. (1), (2) 8. (1), (3) 12) 203) 34
10. (1), (2), (3), (4) 6. (4)
9. (1),(2), BG), (4
Straight Lines
EQUATION OF LINE IN DIFFERENT

FORMS
Here, slope of Iine is zero or we can say that m = 0.
So, equation of line ts y ~y, =Oory= yy.
We know that equation of straight For any point on the line, the value of ordinate 1s yy, 1€., each
line 1s linear equation in
variables x and y The general form of equation of strai point on the fine is at distance \y,| from x-axis So, equation of
is ax + by + c= 0, ght line
where a, b. ¢ € R and at least
one of a and
locus 1s y = y,
h
1s non-zero. We have different forms of equa Let the line pass through point A(x,, »,) and be parallel to
tion of straight line
depending upon through which point/po J-aXis, Le , vertical
ints it 1s Passing and in
which direction it 1s drawn. Here, direction of line Here, slope of line 1s infinity,1e,m—> ~%,
means slope
of line. So, equation of line 1s
EQUATION pow 7
OF LINT IN PGint—SLop, rOR wi —t =XN-X% Or x-x,=0 or x=x,
Let the line having slope m pass though the point A(x), v)) oo
J 4) f*
a
(x, Pas
+X; P(x,
7
y)
or
t P(r 1)
[= |
yr |
Q.V), de \0 ttiB +— x, —Ht Alay, 1)
7
4a | tw
3 Oy ACY, 1)
1,
\
see
-1 0 —-; +
ne
ea oa
O
1}
For any point on the line, the value of abscissa ts X,, le, each
For any point P(x, 1) on the line. we have point on the line is at distance |x,| from v-axis. So, equation of
3 Sams i locus 1s x = x,
=m
P x Equation of Line Parallel or Perpendicular to the
Given
or Y-y) = mx —x,) Line
This 1s the required equation of straight line. This is the most Let the given line be ax + by +c =0
commonly used form of straight line.
If the line 1s passing through the pornt A(x,, v,) and is inclined Slope of line 1s — ‘
at an angle @ with positive x-axis, then its equation 1s
Then slope of line parallel to given line
y-y, = (tan @)(x - x,) 1s — ‘
Equation of Line Parallel to an Axis So, equation of line parallel to give
n line 1s ax + by + A=0
Let the line pass through the point A(x, y,) and be parallel to The value of A can be obtained
using some condition given
x-axis, 1.e., horizontal. in question.
,
Now, slope of the line perpen
dicular to given line is z, d
|. So, equation of line Perpendic
Peay) Aer),
. .
ular to given line is bx —

ay+A=0,
@
y, ILLUSTRATION
yy 2.1
| — Find the equation of lin

e passing through point
(2, 3) which is
(i) parallel to the X-a
xis
(ii) parallel to the y-ax
is
ee eeaeaeEe

2.2
_Goorminate > ytle= a(Y 4)
wh 1 ch iSa
1 h )
(25 ma } )
SSN
p aboe £1 the Oug
tl 1 ec li 1 ye
i =?
rallele to - y-ants sys
uat ono f
l.
) E '
i parall
“So
C
to c a n i s ‘
\-axt s is v= 3 and (it)
-= 3% Ol 5 aoe 2¥ -67 0
(1) parall el
2.2 ILLUSTRATION 2.4

ILLUSTRATION
5) which. Find the locus of a point ? which moves such that its distance
through pomt (2.
4
Find the equation of line passing

from the ine y V3.4. 7 4s the same as sts distance from
1s
4-0 -
(i) parallel to the line avd ty Qyv3. 1)
3.4 2v 4 = 6
(ii) perpendicular to the lme
1) lics on the line p ~ 3x 7
Sol, Fhe pomt v3,
Sol.
4 20 4=O015 Therefore, locus of the pomntas a straight line perpendicular to the
Equation of tine parallel to the line dy
(i)
given line passing through the given point, te ,
Mtn -A=0
If this line passes through (2, -§), then yt =— ae (x-2N5)
WV AH A= 0
A=4
ol x+ Ayal
So, equation of line is 34 + 21 + 4= 0
Alternative method: ¥ ILLUSTRATION 2.5
4
Slope of given line 34 + 2) —4= 018 —>
Consider a triangle with vertices A(1. 2). B(3. 1). and Ci-3 6)
Thus. equation of line through point (2. -5) having slope Find
(i) the equation of altitude through vertex 4
S18
- 3 (ii) the equation of median through vertex 4
r, Vt3=
. i ee
a PER: }
=}
(iii) the equation of internal angle bisector of 24.
Or Sie dye)
4 (ii) Equation of line perpendicular to the Ine 3. 4 21-4
= 01s Sal 4ft.2)
2y-31-A=0 (i) Let the altitude through 4 be 4D
Ii this line passes through (2. —5), then Now, 4D 1 BC
a2) sa =O ; «x IY. ol
A= -19 of BC = 3-1-3)
Slope 6 Oo
So. equation of line 1s 2x ~ 3) - 19 = 0. c-3
Slope of AD = -6 BG.1) D
Alternative method:
2 Therefore, the equation of altitude 4D ts
Slope of line perpendicular to the line 3x + 2 — 4 = 015 v-2=-6( - 1)
3
or 6x+y-8=0
2
Thus equauon of line through put (2. 5) having slope 3 (ii) The median through 4 passes through the midpoint of 3C
15 Now, the midpoint of BC ww EQS — 3) 2.41 - 02) oF
2 E(O, 1.2)
,~5=—(x-2)
EO bee
or = 2ry -33-19=0 Therefore, the equation of
WLUSTRATION Z.3 median dé . ay y — 2 = =="

elo)
-4)
1-0
Find the equation of the perpendicular bisector of the line ow BwetoO BALI F an
segment joining the points A(2, 3) and B(6,- 5) (iii) Let the internal bisector of 4 Meels 41,2)
the side BC inf
M0 The slope of AB 15 piven by -
Now, the pomt “divides BC in the
m eS x, 7) ratio
6-2 “
Therefore, the slope of the line perpendicular to AB 1s Ye 1 py cr 3.0)
desl Choi Jn 2
m 2
Therefore, the coordinates of fare
Let P be the midpoint of AB Then, the coordinates of 2 are
laa H~3)
(258.353) ie (4-1) ee} a(
| to
See
tos
2+ 2+1
Thus, the required line passes through 7(4, 1) and has slope 1/2. Iherefore. the slope of .fF 1s 22
So, its equation is Hence, the equation of 4F is. — 1 = 0.
Straight Lines 4-9
LLUSTRATION 2.6 l
| (h? +k)
zo!
Find the coordinates of the foot of the perpendicular drawn
in Hence, equation of locus of P 1s x° 2422
‘ + yo = c 2
fom the pomnt P(1. ~2) on the line v= 21 + 1, Also, find the
aide of Pin the line.
Sol, Giyen lineisve= 2.4).
. EQUATION OF LINE PASSING THROUGH TWO
Let Af be the foot of the perpendicular drawn trom ROA 2) on Points (TWO POINTS Form)
the ine given line
Let a line passes through points A(x, ¥,) and Bix, 42). Now,
PU, 2) consider a varsable point P(x, 1) on this line We have to find the
equation of locus of point ?
Clearly,
. vat 5
Slope of AP ~ Slope of AB
{ M BR
es i ny
—l1= = m (slope)
rk TY
é
9g => voy =o
Var yy
(x-|)
Slope of given line (4B) 1s 2 Xy — X)
“ 1 This ts the required equation of straight line

Slope of PM = ae
Also, we have
Thus. equation of Ime PM 1s Slope of BP = Slope of AB
+2=
i+tel= L.5 (tee!)1
or it2v+3=0 (2)
Solving equations (1) and (2). we get M(-1,
—1), which ts the
required foot of the perpendicular on given line
Also. if Q 1s
image ofP in the line. then 71s the midpomt of PO Equations (1) and (2) represent the same straight Ime
Therefore. coordinates of poit O are ( 3. 0) Further, since points 4. B and P are collinear. we hav
e
ILLUSTRATION 2.7 °
xX 4
Ifthe line — + — =1 movesin such a way that LL + J. a Y, V5 ]
ab a bb ¢
where c is a constant. then prove that the foot of perpendicular This 1s the equation of |ine in determinant form
from the ongin upon the straight line describes the curve We can get the equation of line using secnho
n tormula also
Since point P hes on the hne through points
xe + ra = 2
4 and Bott d: Vides
AB in some ratio say “1°
Sok
x 4 Nv+\, Avr,
Given variable line 1s — + 3 =! (1) eS at SS ~ Where
a b t+ ts parameter
t+] P
Line perpendicular to (1) and passing through the origin 15 Eliminating /, we get the Tequuved equat
ion of straight line
y
asx Sis é Sn D) ILLUSTRATION
(2) 2.8
boa
In what ratio does the line Jong the point
Now, foot of perpendicular P(A, k) from the origin upon the line s (2, 3) and (41)
divide the segment joining the points (1, 2)
(1) 1s the point of intersection of lines (1) and (2) and (4, 3)°
Sol. The equation ot the line Jomnyg the pots (2
(4, Was
—+-—-!1 (3)
= A) and
P34 ja J
and = (4)
ol vy 3 jib
oO vid SO (bP
Suppose the tine yommy (2, 3) and (4.1) divides the segment!
joming (1, 2) and (4, 3) at pomt P in the ratio
2. 1.
hen the coordinates of P are
l ] ] (4 +1 3A+ 2)
But, it is given that —=+ e a
Atl > Atl
WW
2.4 __ Coordinate Geometry
Therefore, equation of line BC 1s
Clearly, P lies on (1) Therefore.
M@+1, MAD } ‘-7=
6-7
= (x-4 )
A+] Att ©
or A=
or xriy Tl
Hence. the required ratio isA terest |
ILLUSTRATION 2.11
ILLUSTRATION 2.9
Two consecutive sides of a parallelogram are 4x + 5) =9 and
4BCD 1s a square whose vertices are 4(0. 9), BQ, 0),
Tv 4 2y 0 If the equation of one diagonal ts ly + 7, = g
C(2. 2). and (O32) The square ts rotated inthe \)-plane ’
find the equation of the other diagonal
through an angle 30° 10 the anticlockwise sense about an axis
passing though 4 perpendicular to the \)-plane Find the Sol. Let the cquations of sides 4B and AD of the parallelogram
equation of the diagonal BD of this rotated square.
ABCD be as given in (1) and (2), respectively. re,
Sok We have 4x + 5y=0 (hy
2)
B= (2 ews 30°. 2 sin 30°) = a. 1) and = 7x + 2v=0
Ds (Dan W, 2 ens 30)
=(- 1 V3) Solving (1) and (2), we have
Hence. the equation of BD 1s x=0,7=0
a) A = (0,0)
c
= a c
m5 3)
t
‘ | Ree)
Dp: 1a.
A 8
Ss
30° : H
(a
A(0.0) 4v4+5y=0—
—_—__
B
~
2
4 (2.0)
The equation of one diagonal of the parallelogram ts

lIx+ 71 =9 iS
-(J3 +1}
Clearly, 4(0, 0) does not he on the diagonal as shown m (3)
Therefore, (3) ts the equation of diagonal BD
=a/9= Dix V3)
Solving (1) and (3), we get B=(5 3,-4.3)
ie. aa 23 ges wey
Solving (2) and (3), we get D = (-2 3.7 3)
{ILLUSTRATION 2.10 Since H/ 1s the middle pomt of BD, we have
I. |
Ir 2 tnangle ABC, side 4B has the equation 2x + 3) = 29 and H=(5-5)
side AC has the equation 2 + 2) = 16 If the midpoint of BC 1s Now, the equation of diagonal 4C which passes through 4(0. 0)
(S, 6). then find the equation of BC and A(1/2, 1/2) 15
Sol. 4 O (12)
» 0 0 (12) (V Odors V0
ze~ 3) - 29
ILLUSTRATION 2.12
[fone of the sides of a square is 34 4. L2 = and the center

Ks PtS.6) CG Wha is (0, 0), then tind the equations of the diagonals of the square
Vertex © hes onthe line x + 2) 16
Sol, The diagonals of square are inclined at an angle of 48°
So, Jet point C be (16 27 4) with the sides
D(5, 6) 15 midpoint of BC Slope of the ne 3y 0 4 12 ON a4
So, point Bis (2f 6,12 ty Pet the slope of the diagonal be ve Then,
Point B lies on the ine 2x + 3p 29) OO m (444)
tan 45°
2(27-6)+ 3012 4 29 O 14 (X4)en
=> r= 5 dt Mn t{dan 3)
Hence, point B 1s (4, 7) or 443m dor -3 ort +3m=3-4m
: ; 8 Straight Lines 2.5
Therefore, the equation of AC 1s
_ m= 7 orm = 7
therefore, the equations of diagonals are 7x —)'= 0 and x + 7) =0 v+7=— (32) (-2) or 52x +89) +519 =0
ILLUSTRATION 2.15
A vertex of an equilateral triangle 1s (2, 3) and the equation of A ray of light 1s sent along the line x — 2y 3 = 0 Upon
the opposite side 1s x + y = 2. Find the equation of the other reaching the line 3x — 2v - 5 = 0, the ray 1s reflected from it
sides of the triangle.
Find the equation of the line containing the reflected ray.
Given line is A(2. 3) Sol. Incident ray 1s along the line

Sol.
x+y-2=0 (1) y—-2y-3=0 (1)
Its slope 1S 7, =-]). Mirror ts along the line
Let the slope of the line be m 3x-2y-5=0 (2)
60% 60°”
which makes an angle of 60° _N
Pee” ge In the figure, incident ray PA strikes the mirror at point A
with the line in (1) Then,
is m,—m _|-l-m Solving the incident ray and mirror line, we get 4 = (1, 1)
tan 60° = er or V3 =| =
Let the slope of AQ be m
_|lL+m L+m_
a ar eee
or a iE A
ao 8 =|"
or 1 +m =+N3(m - 1)
ve 2 -3=0 uP
gol 1 Ned
a V¥3-1 V¥3+1
: Oo
=2+73,2-\3 P ay
Therefore, the equations of other two sides of the triangle are
y-3=(
V3)2+
(x-2)
|
and =y-3=(
3) 2-
(x-2) Also, slope of LM 1s 2 and slope of P4 ts =
ILLUSTRATION 2.14 Now, incident ray and reflected ray make same angle @ with the
nurror line
A line 4x + y = 1 through the point 4(2, ~7) meets the line Let the slope of reflected ray be m
BC whose equation 1s 3x — 4y + 1 = 0 at the pot B Find the
Now, ZLAP= ZQAM=a
equation of the line AC, so that AB = AC
3
Pages 2a m- 3=
Soli: A(2, -7) 2 2
=> tan a= = =?
3 1 3
hé = = l+m—
4x +y-1=0 2 2 Ri
4 {2m -3
‘2 ——— => -=
7 |2+3m
Bo 3x-4y+1=0 Cc
2m — 3 4
Let the equation of BC be => =it—
2+ 3m 7
3x-—4y+1=0
and the equation of AB be ©
=> me _1 o52
4x+y-1=0
”) But slope of incident ray 1s
to|—
Since 4B = AC, we have

exe
ZABC = ZACB = a (say) Thus, slope of reflected ray 1s =
Slope of line BC = 3 Hence, the equation of reflected rays ts
and Slope of AB = -4 29
Let the slope of AC be m. Equating the two values of tan a, we get l= (1)
3 3_ or 29. -2v—31=0
stig |_| aol
Lia eel+qm
PQUATION Ot LINC ER INTEED chi Foray
or 419_ 3-4m
8 4+3m One of the important aspects of straight line 1s its intercepts
Or m= 32,4 Line has two intercepts’ a-intercept and y-intercept.
SE
ry _
ILLUSTRATION 2.17
2.6 Coordinate Geomet ,
fa straight line cutting off an intercept—|

————————
| 1
Find the equation 0
being equally inclined to the axes.
ee
from the y-axis and
Ole mtcreept Fd
“S| BOO.) 1 Vi
yah
Se
Sol. Since the required line
E (a, 0) h the
5 is equally inclined wit
22 Eé axcs, I makes an
~. coordinate
= _ Ma Od, ;
with 135°
ss BO, D) angle of cither 45° oF 135°
O|a— vintencpt —|
the y-axis
then a and hare So, its slope is either mm tan 45°
at f(a, 0) and B(O, b),
It the line intersects axes mple, 135°, te. Lor |
tercept, respectively For exa orm=tan
called ats y-intercept and y-n , 2) So, Itis given that ~~ Hence, the
ie *
ts ANCS at P(-3, 0) and Q(0
line 2y — 31 + © = O intersec
v-intereept is 2 equations of the lines are
yeintercept of line ts —3 and |
s @ and } on axes, then it yer-lfandy=-v
Conversely. if the line has mtereept b
.
BO. hb) and slop e of line 1s oa" ILLUSTRATION 2.18
meets the ares at A(a. 0) and
)- intercept 4 and 15
\ line having equal intercepts, cuts
the positive axes or
Find the equation of a line that has
and (4, 2).
negative aves Slope of such line is —1 perpendicular to the line yomning (2, ~3)
Slope-Intercept Form of Line Sol. Let m be the slope of the required line
line joining
For a line, let the v-intercept be ¢ and the slope be mm. Since the required line ts perpendicular to the
Line meets 1-a\is at (0. c) A(2, -3) and B(4, 2), we have
So. using point-slope form, equation of line 1s m * Slope of AB = —|
y—-c=nma-O)ory =m*c 2 3 =—]
or nl ™% a oe)
nm
This form of line 1s called slope-intercept form

or ma
Here. cis 1-intercept of the line.
This form of straight line 1s useful in expressing linear function The required line cuts-off an intercept of + on the y-axis So.c=+
as f(v) = mx 7c Hence, the equation of the required line ts
intercept Form of Line
Let x-intercept and 1-1ntercept of line be a and b, respectively
or 2x + 51 -20=0
Clearly. line meets the axes at A(a, 0) and B(0, b)
ILLUSTRATION 2.19
Slope of line = Dre = ne
as a
Find the equation of the line passing through the pot (=. 2)
So equation of line 1s and cutting off intercepts on the axes Whose sum Is 9
b
1-O=-—(x-a) Sol, The equation of a line in the intercept form ts
\ \
or es = ] —4+—eH= |
aed
This 1s the intercept form of Jine This line passes through (2, 2) Therefore,
3 Y
ILLUSTRATION 2.16 —+-21 (1)

a ,
Find the equation of the line which intersects the y-axis ata
lUisgiventhata tb Y1e,
distance of 2 units above the origin and makes an angle of 30°
with the positive direction of the x-axis. bo. «a
hrom (1) and (2), we get
|
Sol. Here,c =2andm tan 30’ 2 y
J3 t ~ =)
a Y- 4
Thus, the required equation of line 15
’
oa 9G BO
ol (a 6)a 3)=0
or y +23 =
= x-V3 Kee, a=6 ora=3
SUPAIQNL ene =
: 6 and b=9- 6 = 3, then the equation of the line 1s

aha y
‘
[fa= Sol.
X,2%=1 orxt+2y-6=0
6 3
ae ___Ple
cos @, c sin a)
ifa=3andb=9-3 = 6, then the equation of the line 1s (0, c sin @)By
ae =lor2.+yv-6=0
3 6 N?
. a7] pig
Oo A
ILLUSTRATION 2.20
(c cos @, 0)
Find the equation of the straight line that As shown in the figure, A 1s on x-axis and B 1s on y-axis
(i) makes equal intercepts on the axes and passes through AB = c (given)
the point (2, 3). Given that OAPB 1s a rectangle
(ii) passes through the point (—S, 4) and is such that the Let ZBAO=a
portion intercepted between the axes 1s divided by the OA=ccos aand OB=c sina
pointin the ratio | 2 P=(ccos & c sin @)
Equation of AB 1s
Sol.
* y
(i) Let the equation of the line be +— =]
Eat>=]
4+
ccos @ csina
ab or x sin @+ ycos @=csin acos @ (1)
Since 1t makes equal intercepts on the coordinates axes, we
Equation of PN (perpendicular from P to AB) 1s
havea=b
V-csin @=cot &(x—c cos a)
So, the equation of the line 1s
ees > x COS @ — Vy sin @= c(cos* @ — sin? @) (2
at+q=lorati=a
N ts point of intersection of (1) and (2)
The line passes through the point (2, 3) Therefore, Solving (1) and (2), we get
2+3=a x=ccos'ay=csna
or a=5 \h3 13
Xx \
Thus, the equation of the required line 1s 2 +) = 5 cos @= (2) »snag= »)
c Cc
(ii) Let the equation of the line be
ipo
Squaring and adding, we get
23 2i3
x ¥
Clearly, this line meets the coordinate axes at A(a, 0) and c Cc
B(O, b), respectively
+ yy" 23 =_ ce",
23
2i3
orx”” which is the required locus.
The coordinates of the point that divides the line joining
A(a, 0) and B(O, b) in the ratio | . 2 are
1(0) + 2(a) 1B) + ) _ (22 ; B) EQUATION OF LINE IN NORMAL Form
p2 1+2 3. 3
Let the line L be such that
It is given that the point (~5, 4) divides AB in the ratio 1 2. (i) length of the perpendicular (normal) from origin to
the line
Therefore, 2a/3 = —5 and b/3 = 4, 1.e., is p, and
15 (ii) angle which normal makes with the positive direcn
on of
a=-~> andb=12 X-axIs Is
2
A}
Hence, the equation of the required line 1s
eee ee
~ 15/2" 12 - (0, p cosec @) By.
or 8x- Sy +60=0
ILLUSTRATION 2.21 yet “Sc
— 1
Line segment AB of fixed length c slides between coordinate O (p see «x, OA ON
axes such that its ends A and B hie on the axes. If O 1s origin In the above figure, line L meets x-axis at_4 and y-axis
and rectangle OAPB 1s completed, then show that the locus at B on
positive sides,
Of the foot of the perpendicular drawn from P to AB is Also, OP is perpendicular to the line L
2; «=2 22 From the figure, x-intercept of line 1s (p sec
a ao @) and y- Intercept
Is (p Cosec @).
ener —_
—_
for normal form of th

ometry Sol. Data given in the question 1s
2.8 Coordinate Ge p € line.
rm of line 18 form 1s x cos & ty) sin a=

So, intercept fo Standard equation of normal
cy r
oo
x p= Sunits and &= 30°.
pseca pcosec a equation of the
P Thus, the required
ycosat vsina@ =
or ¥-aXIs for different given line is
rmal with positive
The angle a of no = 5
e 1s as § hown 1n the following fig\ ures. vcos 30° + y sin 30°
orientations of lin 5-e
ae
430°
V3x +y=10
~
3
or
—_— ——_——_ rt —*\
b) P 0
2,1
CONCEPT APPLICATION EXERCISE
P la :
— 0 \
the line segment

| 1. Find the equation of the right bisector of
(-1, 2)
\ joining the points (3, 4) and
are (a, by,
on —-—>} | 2. If the coordinates of the points 4, B, C, and D
then find the
OT Pp I (a’, b'), (~a, b), and (a’, -6'), respectively,
equation of the line bisecting the line segments AB and CD
triangle ABC are
| 3. If the coordinates of the vertices of
(-1, 6), (-3, -9), and (5, -8), respectively, then find the
2.22 | equation of the median through C.
ILLUSTRATION
-intercept. intercept 4. Find the equation of the line perpendicular to the line
Reduce the line 2x - 3y + 5 = 0, in slope
and normal forms Also, find the distance of
the line from ae ; = ] and passing through a point at which tt cuts the
ongin and inclination of normal to the line with x-axis. x-aX1S
of
| §, If the middle points of the sides BC. CA, and AB
Sol. Equation of given line 1s
triangle ABC are (1, 3), (5, 7), and (—5. 7), respectively.
2x-3n+5=0 then find the equation of the side 4B
or _2a,5
arr 6. Find the equations of the lines which pass through the
origin and are inclined at an angle tan'm to the hne
This 1s of the form + = mx +c. | y=mxte,
Slope of the line 1s m = tan 6 = : and )-intercept 1s c = = 7. If (-2, 6) 1s the smage of the point (4. 2) with respect to
| line L = 0, then find the equation of line Z
Here, 61s the angle of the line with positive x-ax1s
| §. Find the area bounded by the curves x + 2) = Land x=0.
Intercept form of the line 1s : + 7 = |, where x-intercept | 9, Find the equation of the straight line passing through the
[-3) 6) | imtersection of the lines . — 2 = | and x + 3y = 2 and
parallel to 3x + 4v =0
Isa=—>
5
and y-intercept 1s b = ‘s 2 10. If the foot of the perpendicular from the ongin to 3
Further to get the equation in normal form, divide both sides by straight line is at (3, —4), then find the equation of the line
| 11. A straight line through the point (2, 2) intersects the
V2? +3? =Vi3.
2x. 3y 5 | lines V3, + v = 0 and V3, - + = 0 at the points 4 and B.
So, equation of line becomes —= + = = =
¥3 JB V3 | respectively. Then find the equation of the lne 4B so that
Comparing with standard normal form x cos @ + y sin @ = p, triangle OAB 1s equilateral. |
we get | 12. Find the equation of the straight Ime passing
2 3 through the point (4, 3) and making intercepts on the
cos @= -—=—,sIn a= —=— and
v13 VI3 “ coordinate axes whose sum is ~1. |
5 13. A straight line through the point A(3, 4) Is such that '
p= Tp = Distance of line from origin
its intercept between the axis 1s bisected at 4. Find its |
Also, inclination of norma] to the line with x-axis is equation
a= 180°-sin7! 2 14. Astraight tine £ 1s perpendicular to the line 5x~ = | The
V13 area of the triangle formed by line L and the coordinate |
ILLUSTRATION 2.23 wes is 5, Find the equation of line L.
e 4x + Ty +5
| 15. One side of a rectangle lies along the lin
es the equation of the line which 1s at a perpendicular
Istance of 5 units from the origin and the angle made by
= 0. Two of its vertices are (—3, 1) and (1, 1) Find the
the equations of the other three sides.
perpendicular with the positive x-axis is 30°
‘ 2.9
Straight Lines
OF
EQUATION STRAIG HTIN_
LINE
- ne Ly = 3 ~ 2x - 6 = 0 is rotated about its pomt of (PA RAM ETRIC OR
16. . tersection with the y-axis in the clockwise direction to SYMMETRIC FORM
make it Ly such that the area formed by L,, L», the x-axis, |
and line ¥ = 5 1s 49/3 sq. units if its point of intersection DISTANCE FORM)
with v= 5 hes below the x-axis Find the equation of L). | Consider a line passing through the point P(x,,.y,) and making an
17. The diagonals AC and BD of a rhombus intersect at (5, 6). angle @ with positive x-axis.
| if A = (3, 2), then find the equation of diagonal BD. | Equation of line is
18. Find the equation of the straight line which passes through y— yy = tanO(x- y)
origin and makes angle 60° with the line x + V3 +3
the
!) ; | or
hey = .
—
POM
—— = r (say)
¥3 =0
cos@ = sin@
49. A line inte rsects thee straight lines Si5: -- » p -—— 44 == 0 and
ght lines x=x,+rcos Oandy=y, +rsin 8
3, - 4-4 = Oat: A and B, respectively. If a pot P(1, 5) . t which
| on
ard the noitit’l
ne 4B is such that 4P . PB = 2: | (internally), , ee) eee r from
is lying at distance Salthe pointeee eee
P(x,,y,) on the above line
|
even ‘ ‘ In fact, there must be two points at distance rfrom point P on
20. In the given figure. POR is an equilateral triangle and the'line
OSPT1s a square. If OT = 2V2 units, find the equation of on , saneeeeraecat Cate mcs Ooy.coren B
hnes OT. OS, SP, OR, PR, and PQ. | B CODEEINAIeS OF OEE pOInb are (7 ‘a
Ay ¢
Ys R Q
Py ) 15° L . :
Xp, (x). ¥,)P \0 + Mu

S E r
45545° 6
—¥5°asf | ase NS? RN” CN
M O O ss \8 —
O C A B
21. Two fixed points 4 and B are taken on the coordinates
axes such that OA = a and OB = b Two variable
points A’ and B’ are taken on the same axes such that In the above figure. OA =x,, AP =¥, and PO=PR=r
OA' + OB' = OA + OB. Find the locus of the point of ‘es ‘ en ie at 0 ig g @
intersection of AB" and A'B n tangle PMQ, QM = r'sin Gana P= r cos @.
22. Aregular polygon has two of its consecutive diagonals as | me OB CATER Od TEE aar mF EOS 8
the lines ¥3x + py = V3 and 2y = V3 Ponnt (1, c) 1s one of and BQ= BM+ OM= AP + OM=1,+rsin 6
its vertices. Find the equation of the sides of the polygon is QO= (x, +rcos 8, y, +r sin 8)
and also find the coordinates of the vertices. Similarly, in trrangle PVR, PN=rsin @and RV =r cos 8.
23. Find the direction in which a straight line must be drawn vs OC = OA - AC = OA - RN =, -r-cos 0
through the point (—1, 2) so that its point of intersection and CR = AN= AP ~ PN=\,-rsin @
wh the line x + y = 4 may be ata distance of 3 units from R= (a,-rcos 01, -rsin 8)
this point. This form of straight line 1s effective tool in solving geometry
ANSWERS | - related problems
l, x+y=5 2. 2ay ~ 2b'x = ab- db’
, x ya ILLUSTRATION 2.24
3. 13x + 14y +47= 0 4. " + a Bb A straight line is drawn through the point P(2, 3) and ts inclined
oie at an angle of 30° with the y-axis. Find the coordinates of nwo
§. x-y+12=0 6. y=Oy= me points on it at a distance of 4 units from P
—m
7, 3x-2y+5=0
3¢— = 8. 1/2
| Sol. Here, P(x. ;) = P(2, 3), A= 30°.
9. 3x+ 4y-5=0 10. 3x - 4y = 25 So. th : ;
2 yy _ 0, the required coordinates of pomts at distance 4 units from
IL y-2=0 1%, Gelade point
P are
~ re | (4, +r cos 6 v, + rsin 6)
13. 4x+ 3y = 24 14, x+5yt5v2=0 = (24 4 cos 30°, 3 4 sin 30°)
16. x+y=2
j= 17.29%
. 4 i 2-1 F = 0
i
18. x=0,x-V3 y=0 19, (75/17, 307/17) e | 2t4-=, 344—
Me Fp oe 23. Parallel to the x-axis
2.10eCoor dinateGeometry
a1 e
xe!
= pod =r (say)
ILLUSTRATION 2.25
on 1/J21/ V2
The line joining two points A(2, 0) and B(3, 1) is rotated about This line meets the given line 2x — 3y + 9 = 0 at point p
Ain anticlockwise direction through an angle of 15°. Find the
equation of the line in the new position. If B goes to C in the
r r
Let AP = r.Then P= eae],
a a
new position, then what will be the coordinates of C?
Sol. The slope of the line AB ts

But point P lies on the line 2x —3y + 9=0
eae ae:
r r
-0 2| |+—= -3(3+5]+9=0
m= —— =] = tan 45°
3-2
So. inchnation of line 48 with y-axis 1s 45°, r
A gag
i"
ee)
= r=2V2
(oF
ILLUSTRATION 2.27
§ 8.1)
Two adjacent vertices of a square are (1, 2) and (-2, 6) Fing
4, the other vertices.
a : A(2, 0) *
Sol. Given two adjacent ay

Now, 4B 1s rotated through an angle 15° in anticlockwise direction
vertices are A(1, 2) and c
about 4 and point B goes to C.
B(-2, 6). Then,
So. inchnation of line AC 1s 60° : (-2, 6)B,
AB=5 -D
Hence. equation of line AC is
Also, the slope of AB 1s C: 5
e200
6-2 4 5° AU, 2)
cos60° sin 60° Man AB = —2-] =-— 3 : 6.
O x
oT 3 e
Slope of AD = ri =tan 6
The coordinates of D and D’ are

AC
= AB= \(3-2)'+(1-0)" =J2
So. for point C, r =/2. (1+5cos@, 2+5sin9) =(145-, 2452]
> 5
x2 oy-0 or D(5, 5) and D’(-3, -1)
W2 «f/f72 Similarly, the coordinates of C and C’ are
= ged Ome a ye Jo NS6 (-2+Scos@, 6+5sin@) = | -2+5

or C(2, 9) and C’(-6, 3)
Therefore, C= [2+ A. %)
ILLUSTRATION 2.28
A line through the variable point 4 (k + 1, 2k) meets the lines

ILLUSTRATION 2.26 Ix
+ y—16=0, 5x-y-8=0
and x - 5y+8=0,
at B. Cand
D, respectively. Prove that AC, AB and AD are in HP.
A line through point A(1, 3) and parallel to the line x-y+1=0
meets the line 2x - 3y + 9 = 0 at point P Find distance AP Sol. Let the line passing through point 4(& + 1, 24) make an
without finding point P. angle @ with positive x-axis direction
Then equation of line is
x(k +1) y— 2k
2x- 3y 49-0 =e b> Ma, My
cos @ sin @
where AB=1r,,AC= ry, AD= ry
Be ((k+ 1) +r, cos 6, 2k +r, sin 8)

Slope of line x — y + 1 = 018 1, 1.e., tan 45° Cs ((k+ 1) +r, cos 6, 2k+ ry sin 0)
So, the equation of line through A(1, 3) and having slope | 1s
Ds ((k+ 1) +r; cos 0, 2k +r; sin 0)
x-l — y-3 Points B, C and D satisfy lines 7x + y — 16 = 0, 5x -y- 8 =0 and
cos 45° sin 45° x—5y + 8 = 0, respectively.
Straight Lines 2.11
e points in the corresponding lines, we get Area of triangle PAB

So. putting thes a
3(1- k) 1 c c c
r= 7 cos 0+sin 6’ >" 5 cos 6 — sin @ => 2 «(0 +—|--|---v
4 <( b (9, -9)
] + 0(0;
and =
i
§sin@—cos@ atlen
sj
We
2
2/h a ab
| wt _ Scos@—sin@ (Ssin@~-cos
@)
, I 3(1- k) c (1)
9(1-k) ——
+ by,a4) +¢)ax
= (ax,|(ax,
_ 1Scos @-3sin 6 +5 sin 6 - cos 8
|
91 - k) Also, area of APAB = sik PM
l4cos6+2sin@ 2
~ O=k)
Clearly. 4C, 4B and 4D are in H.-P.
sf) | a’ +h’ d (2)
2ab
co NGEPT APPLICATION Jn
From (1) and (2), we get
. Two particles start from the point (2, —1); one moves
|
c Cc 2 2
b —] = |——_ +h d
2 units along the line a + = 1 and the other moves 5 units (ax shee) | aah
along the line x — 21 = 4 If the particles move upward
w.rt. coordinate axes, then find their new positions. _ jax +by, +c|
The centre of a square 1s at the origin and one vertex 1s Ja’ +b?
4(2, 1). Find the coordinates of other vertices of the
square ILLUSTRATION 2.29
. The straight line passing through P(x,, y,) and making an
If p 1s the length of the perpendicular from the ongim to the
angle @ with x-axis intersects 4x + By +C=0inQ Find
the length PO xX ¥L
line a b obLis ies dsdeg oz Sh
1, then prove that z 2 PR
. The centroid of an equilateral tangle is (@, 0) If two
veruces of the tnangle he on x +) = 2V2 . then find all Sol. The given line 1s
the possible vertices of tnangle bx +ay-ab=0 il)
ANSWERS It is given that p 1s the length of the perpendicular from the ongin
to (1), that is,
1. (2-¥2, -14+-V2) and (2+2V5, -1+V5) py = 1O(0) + a0) ~ ab
2. (-2. -1), (-1,2) and (1. -2) Vb? +a"
Ax,+ By, +C|
4cos
a+ Bsin a@|
. (-2v2, -2V2), (V2-V6,

V2 +V6),
or p =a 4
~
l
(v2+J6, ¥2-V6)
or arr, aaa Fala
ILLUSTRATION 2.30
DISTANCE OF A POINT FROM A LINE Find the coordinates ofa point on x ++ + 3 = 0, whose distance
from x + 2y + 2=Ois V5.
The distance of a point from a line v
Sol. Putting =siny ty +3) Owe gety =-3—7¢. So, let the
'Sthe length of the perpendicular (0 ‘) BI
required point be (4, 3-2) This pomnt ts at a distance of V5 units
drawn from the point to the line.
from v + 2y + 2 = 0. Therefore,
LetL=ax+by+c=Obea & & Qe
-
lite, whose distance from the asuabs uv _— Ve b) +2? 7 i V5
PoInt P(x), y,) 1s d.

0 ( a NA
mF tis ‘|
P Line L meets the axes at or f+4=45
(cla, 0) and B(O, -<c/b). or t=1,-9
Draw a perpendicular PM from the point P to the line L. Hence, the required points are (1, —4) and (—9, 6).
2.12 Coordinate | Geomet
ry -
— a?@(1— cos*@)|
b?| -b? cos2
bh? cos’@ + a’ sin?
i
ON 2.31
ILLUSTRATI
greatest valu es of dis
tance of the point
Find the least and the 10=0 b?(b? cos’@ + a” sin’0) =p
from the line 3x — 4y+
(cos 8, sin 0), 9 € R, (b? cos’@ + a’ sin’@)
the line
s @. sin 9) from
Sol. Distance of point (co Hence, proved
3x —4y + 10= 01s | 2.33
| _ |3cos @—4sin 6 +10 ILLUSTRATION
d= |3cos @—4sin 6 +10
5 1 + - 2)° under the condition
J3? +(-4)° Find the least value of (x-
3x + 4y-2=0.
-§<3cos @-4sm6s5
of distances between the points
Now,
5<3cos@-4sin + 10<
1S Sol. (x- 1 +0'- 2)? 1s square -2=0
P lies on the line 3x + 4y
1 < Benson dsmOFTOl
<3 A(1, 2) and P(x, ¥)s where
_,
+O- 2y
Least value of (x - ly
| and the greatest distance 1s
3. (1, 2) from the line
Hence, the least distance 1s = Square of shortest distance of point
3x+4y-2=0
ILLUSTRATION 2.32 2
lengths of the perpendiculars

Prove that the product of the 25
V3? +4"
drawn from the points (Ja? — b°, 0) and (-ya? neep?s0)
2.34
@= Lis b. ILLUSTRATION
to the line a cos@ + * sin 0). (a> 0).
a b ngle with A(0, 0) and B(a,
ABC 1s an equilateral tria wn from a
The equation of the given line 1s of the perpendiculars dra
Sol. L. M, and N are the foot . If P hes
and CA, respectively
point P to the sides AB, BC, PL? >=P M PN,
s the condition
~ cos
a
+
b
sn@=1
inside the triangle and satisfie
(1) then find the locus of P.
~.
hx cos @+ ay sin @-—ab=0

or BC are, respectively, given by
r from the point ( ja = 270) to Sol. The equations of lines AC and
The length of the perpendicula y Cc
line (1) is y- ¥3.=0
- 5° + asin @ (0) — ab| yr J3(x - a) =0
1b co@sya es of the
> Let P(A, k) be the coordinat
Vb" cos’@ + a sin’0
? >
nd Now,
P =
point whose locus 1s to be fou
give n cond itio n, we
2) according to the
|b cos @ a? - —ab| a
have
Jb? cos’@ + a? sin’@ PL?>=PM PN
The length of the perpendicular from

the point (— Ja’ seh OY
g- [k—V3h| [k+V3(h-a)
2 2
(1) 1s
to line th-a)]
J3h) [k + J3
@ (0) ~ ab | 4k = (k-
- ‘bcos @ (-Ja? — b?) + asin Le,
(. P hes below bo
th the lines]
> >
P2
b> cos* 6+ a sin’@
Le. 34 +P) ~ 3ah + VBak =0
+ ab | &
jb cos @ Ja? -
WP tie —ah teV3 ke0
Je cos? + a® sin’@ uired
y) in plac e of (A, k) give s the equation of the req
+ab| Putting (x,
\bcos0 ya? -h - ab\|bcos@ ya" —b? locus as
b? cos’@ +a’ sin’ Ba id a »=0
PiP2” EGE Hae
|
V3
| b? cos’@(a? — b*)- u*b?
ILLUSTRATION 2.35
(b? cos?@ + a” sin?@) When
the coordinat e axes.
Line L has intercepts a and 6 on ngin
a’b? | ne the 0
| a*b? cos?@ — b* cos2@ - the axes are rotated through a given angle keepi
same line L has inter cepts P and q Prove the
b? cos’@ + a’ sin’@ fixed, the
lh
b\ a? cos?@ — b’ cos’@ - a’
| Jy tedck.
b? cos’@ + a” sin’@
xt+y-1=0
and
+y+2=90
xT j2-(-I)l _
re ty = 5
Hence, side length =
9
5 Sq. units.
% NY
Therefore, area of square =
qi, a b P
ILLUSTRATION 2.37
4 ww? — eee, |
( ) 0 a 4
equidistant from parallel
L Find the equation of the line which 1s
line 6y — 7 = O and 3x + 2y+6=0.
9x + s
@about origin
hown 1n the figure, aves are rotated by an angle
The equations of the given lines are
As she a
nanticlockwise direction 4 ,
Sol.
(1)
i}
epts and 9x + 6y-7=0
Lhas intercepts @ and / on onginal axes and interc
Line
gon rotated axes and 3x+2y+6=0
(2)
axes ts or 9x + 6y + 18=0
E quation of line ZL wrt original
The line parallel to the above lines 18
() (3)
a
a
axes 1s
eal 9x+6y+c=0
(2) 1s the same.
Equation of line Lw.rt rotated The distance of line (3) from lines (1) and
(2) Therefore,
ng
Pe oe |c-18| _ |o+7|
Since origin and line L are not changing their positions, distance of Verse V9? +6
ime from origin remains the same even though the axes are rotated
or c-18=-c-7
(2)
So. comparing distances of lines given by equations (1) and
from ongin, we get
0 oo 248. Therefore, the equation of the line 1s 18x + 12 — 11 = 9.

a b = |P_&
1 ] 1] ] ILLUSTRATION 2.38
Er yt
a ob Pg
If one side of the square is 2x — } + 6 = 0 and one of the
l ] ] 1 vertices is (2, 1), then find the other sides of the square.
= at
a Sa T
a b p g¢
Sol. Vertex A(2. 1) does not lie oye 3 = 9Ge0
on the line BC =2x-y+6=0 (1)
Distance between Two Parallel Lines Hence, one of the side of the square
passing through 4 is parallel to BC.
Let the two parallel lines be
Therefore, the equation of 4D 1s B
ax+by+c=0 (1)
y-1=2(x-2)
and axtby +c =0 (2)
Distance between parallel lines 1s equal to the length of the
or. 2y-y-3=0 a @« oF
Another side 4B of the square * D
perpendicular drawn from any point on line (1) te line (2).
is passing through (2, 1) and is
Consider point P(x,,y,) on line (1)
perpendicular to BC,
ax, + by, +c =0 (3)
Therefore, the equation of 4B is ‘"
, Perpendicular distance d of point ? from the line (2) 1s given
y
_ lax +by, +c"|
d or A+2y-~4=0
:
The third side ts parallel to.4B, which has equation
- d= ee] tly te=0
[From (3), ax, + by,
=-c| Now, the distance between the lines BC
ya’ +b? and AD is 95 .
-" lherefore, the distance between the
lines (3) and (4) is
Biiesnarion,2.36 le+4| 9
Two sides of a square lie on the linesx+y- | andx+y 42 J Js
= 0. What is its area?
¢=5or-13
Selig Clearly, the length of the side of the square 1s equal Theretore, the equation of the
to the third side is
‘Stance between the parallel lines. X+2y+5=O0(e CD)
or x + 2y-13=0(=CD)
ee
2.14 CoordinateGeometry
Let the slope of PB be m Now, : AS ses
re ah ee
Prove that the area of the parallelogrm contained by the m —(-4/3) 3m+4
lana=4 =
lines 4v — 3v-—a=0, 3y -4v +a = 0, 41 - 3x - 3a = 0, and 1+ m(—4/3) 3-4m
3y— 4y + 2a = 0 is (2/7)a°. 7
or m= KOrM= 44
Sol. Dd dy Ay a 0 C
Therefore, the equation of the line 1s
7
.+2=Oandy + 7- 24 (° + 2)
SB RG dy 3) 444 2a-0
\e us 6
or v+2—~Oand7r + 244 + 182-6
tay yy =O B
xe @ ILLUSTRATION 2.41
dy
A line L 1s drawn from /(4, 3) to meet the lines L, and
given by 3x + 4y + 5 = 0 and 3r * 44 + 15 ~ Gat points
4, Ri-u=0 A and B, respectively From A. a line perpendicular to Lis
tan an 8 |||
43)-(3:4) 7 drawn meeting the line L, at A, Similarly. from point B. a line
= hv =
perpendicular to L 1s drawn meeting the line £, at 8, Thus, a
1+(43)«(3/4)| 24
parallelogram AA BB, 1s formed Then find the equation of ¢
25 so that the area of the parallelogram 44, BB, ts the least
or casec O= —
7
2 Fis 3)
i-a+3, 2 Sol.
Now a= pease bea a € &
3 3 ug 4 ~Z
4
; l2a-a] _la
and a. = 5 = 3
~ 4 DO i
Area = 2(Area of A4BD) = 2{t d, 12 |
The given lines (Z, and L,) are parallel and the distance
a|)(|2a|\25 = 2a between them (BC or AD) ts (15 ~ 3) 3 = 2 uns Let 840
= cya cosec 8 | 5 | 5 3 ==
= @ So, AB = BC cosec 6 = 2 cosec @ and 44 = 4Dsec4=2
sec @ Now, the area of parallelogram 44 38 1s
ILLUSTRATION 2.40
A=AB< AA, =4sec 0 cosec @
Find the equations of straight lines passing through (—2, ~7) 8
and having an intercept of length 3 between the straight lines ~ sin 20
4x > 3) = 12 and 4x + 3y = 3. Clearly, A is the least for @= 24 Let the slope of 42 be 7 Then.
Se@L Given lines are +34

tan4S° = BR
4x-3,-12=0 (1) ‘ 1 = (394)
and 4x ~ 3) -3=0 (2) pe fed

ay ee
or 4m + 3 = (4 — 39) or m = J or
Given AB = 3 = 14 Hence, the equation of L ts
The distance between parallel v Jett? 0
lines (1) and (2).
or wey 31-0
-1273) 9 “
AL = —=
Ja? +3? ~§ CONCEPT APPLICATION EXERCISE 2-3
From AALB we get the on y-axis whose perpendicular
I. tind the points
LB AB*- AL? distance trom the linefu Ui Las 3
= 3 #1 Ge 16 2. I poand pare the distances of the origin trom the lines
25 25 Vosee ce boy cosee ec A and vy conc yoshi
- 4h
£ = 12 cos 2c, then prove that dy py Ae
5 Prove that the lengths ot the perpendicular trom the
3.
3 mom’), and un’, 2m’) to the line
tang =-— = -
poms (a, Qn), (nam
4
viat bo Oarein Ge
Also, tan @= Slope of line (1) = 4. bind the ratio in which the hing 3a 6 da & 2 = O divides the
wile
distance between 3u 4a +S Oand 3y +4 7 5 =O

7 Pe I)
s, pnd
| Nthe wncentre
; _
Of a triangle formed by the lines
; Sor 87x
wg at VSN =A, ACO
(eos eg 9 + S—
pyin—gy = = and
9 . ve OX 53)
lax
Wr, pain SJ
y cos 9 9 ax+hyr+e=9
g, Find the equations of lines parallel to 3 = 4) ~ § = 0 ala

| nit distance from it In that case,
4, Find {he equation of a straight line passi A<0
ng through the
point (-5, 4) and which cuts off an inter ax, + by, +¢
cept of V2 units <()
| petween the Imesaty4 1=Oandad p-1=0 ax, thy, +c
|
ANSWERS ax, | thy,Vy +¢ >0)
a
1, (0, Hand (0-9) 4.3.7 ax, thy, +e
s, (0.0) 6. 3v—4y~10=0or3x-4y=0 Hence, ax, +hy, +¢ and ax, +hy, +c will have same sign
Le
SUPT IT
NTE
RII OTP mee
ILLUSTRATION 2.42
LO,
pOSITION OF A POINT W.R.T. A LINE Are the points (3, 4) and (2, —6) on the same or opposite sides
of the line 3x — 4y = 8?
Let the equation of the given line be
axt+bhy +c=0 Sol. ' We have line 3x - 4y - 8 =0
(1)
Consider two points P(x), ¥)) and Q(x. V3). Let L(x, y)=3x-4y-8
None of these pomts is lying on the line L(3,.4) = 3(3) —4(4) -8 ==15
Let us find the condition for which P and Q he either on the and = L(2, -6) = 3(2) - 4(-6) -8 = 22
same side or On opposite sides of line (1). Since L(3, 4) and L(2, -6) have opposite signs. point (3. 4) and
Let lme (1) divide the segment joining the points P and Q in (2, —6) lie on opposite sides of the line.
the ratio A | at point R,
ILLUSTRATION 2.43
_ [ Axptx, Ary +3,
“At Aad Find the set of positive values of 6 for which the origin
and the point (1, 1) lie on the same side of the straight line,
Since point R lies on the line (1), we have axt+aby+1 =0,VaeER.
of BSE o f Be),
Ax, 2 +x, b Avsv2 +, ~-=() *Sol Points (0, 0) and (1, 1) he on same side of the line
ie)
axtaby+1=0,
For (0, 0),
ax, thy, +e
> Aare
ax, +by,+¢ a’°(0) + ab(0) +1 >0

Therefore, for (1, 1), we must have
Ifpoints P and Q lie on the opposite sides of line, R will divide
PQ internally. atab+1>0 VaeR
D<0
Le A P(x, 9) RN b-4<0
ae a - R ye Co
or be (-2, 2)
foo
” But b>0
ft ax + by+c=0
ee * 4 be (0, 2)
Ox, y>)
ILLUSTRATION 2.44
In that case,
If point (a’, a + 1) hes in the angle between
A>0 the line
3x-y+ 1=Oandx + 2p-5=0 containing the ongin,
then
e aie e ax, SA!
+ by, +eWe 50 find the values of a.
ax, + by, +¢
SOL!) Given lines are
ax, +by, +e
1By ¥e <0 L,=3v-y+1=0
ax, + by, +c (1)
L,=v+2y- §=0
Hence, ax, +by, +c and ax, + by, +¢ will have opposite signs (2)
P(a’,a+ 1) lies inthe angle formed by above two
If points P and Q lie on the same side of line, R will divide lines containing
&xtemally O(0, 0). Then O and P must le on the same side
w.r.t. both the lines
2.16 Coordinate Geometry In the figure, triangle OAB is formed by lines y=x,x 1 p= 4 "
Now, L,(0, 0) =|> 0
Y-AXIS.
So, we must have
Variable point (3a, a) lics on the line x = 3y forall real values of,
Lia .a+ l)>0 Oat P(3, 1).
3a —(at!)+1>0 Line v — 3v meets the line x ty — 4=
or »
P on line 3x
ol a(ja- 1)>0 Hence, point 3a, a) must lic between O and
l QO. acl
(3)
= ae (- x, 0) ufts|
LO, 0) = -5s )
the point (a, 0?)
So. we must have Determine all the values of @ for which
2x + 3y~1=0,
Lia*.a+ <0 lies inside the triangle formed by the lines
=O and 5x - 6 - 1=0.
xt 2y—3
or a+ %at+1)-5<0
w+ 2a-3<0 Given lines are
Sa)
=> (a-1)(a+3)<0
(4) L(x. v) = 2x+3y-1=0
ae (-3. 1)
From (3) and (4). L,(x, v) = 5x - 6y - 1 = 0

L(x. vy=xt2y-3= 0
ae(3
ec mul 4>. 1)
Draw these lines on coordinate axes.
y
we +
Se 6
—
| 4
ty
= 4,
If the point (a, a) is placed in between the lines |x + vy]
2 oltgs } ghee
bees = oY
then find the values of a. 29 ah”
OF V
‘Sai... We have lines. +1 —4=Qandi1-+1+4=0 i ee oO .«. c
a 7 if
Point (a. a) lies on the lines = ¥
ri"
4)
*
Point P(@, 0°) lies inside the triangle formed by these lines
Clearly, from the figure, origin and point P lie on the opposite
VEN
sides wrt. 2x + 3v—1=0
. } + 4(2.2) L,(0, 0) =-1 <0
$-2. 0) _
So, we must have
'O M(2. 0)
(-2.-2)BY
r+y-47-0
a
L\(a@, 07) = 2a+ 307-1>0
* > (3a—-I)at 1)>0
at+y,74=0
=> a<-lora> (0
4
Also, origin and point P le on the same side were line

Line ) = x intersects the given lines at A(2, 2) and B( 2. 2) vi 2p 3=0
So. 1f (g. a) lies on the line y= x between points 4 and B, we must L,0,0) - 3.0
have -2~a~2
So, we must have
La, 07) = ar ee - 30
Find the values of a for which point (3a, a) lies inside the => (2a+3\a@ 1)<0
triangle formed by the lines y = x, the x-axis and line x + y = 4, => V¥2~a~) (2)
Sols. ra Further origin and point P he on the same side weet. line
Sv oy Lt 0.
> L400) 10
erry 4 O
a”
| y 4. ‘
So, we must have
$ ¥, Lae) Se ber 1S0
vou > Ow Sail +0
wep
710La(3.0) >
>
(3a@
a. Wora>i?
|ly2Qa-1)>0
, « 3)
}):
From (1), (2) and (3), common values of aware (-3/2, -1) U (1/2,
————
ay 2x -3y-5=0
|
oN OF PLANE BY LINE
pivis!
on Cartesian plane divides it into two regions
|yne ‘ low the line). Now, we have three sets of points on
set of points 0 7°
_ - g line; set of points lying on the line,
rit a
Jane
_ line and region of points lying below the line All Pi)
ints 17.8the particular set satisfy a certain relation
yingagapove aya
av + by + c = 0 Let Lay, Vv)
the ider the straight line
cons
_—
P xtbvthete points lying on
“al the line, satisfy the equation
(ii) -3v + 4v+7>0
at bv Fe - Let L(x,y)=-3x+4y+7
L(0,0)=7>90
region of the plane
PQ. 4) So, -3x + 4y + 7 > 0 represents the half
4y + 7=0.
where origin les, i.e., above line -3x +
~ OO. 15)
Ay
*RO,, 1) ~
—_—_——_f 1 aia |
O M
ax + by+c=0
9 -3x + 4y+7=0
line
Consider the point P(x,, v,) lying in the region above the
Through this point, draw perpendicular to x-axis meeting line at
Qhry.13) and x-axis at Mf — —>X
Clearly, PM > OM
Wy V2
Let = > 0.
b> By
1
(iii) x>2orx-2>0
sy ~2?> aer¢-2=0
> ax, t+ by, +ce>a,+ by. +e Let L(x, y)=x-2

> ax, + by, +e >0 [As (x1, .¥2) les on the line} L(0,0)=0-2<0
Thus. for all the points lying in the region above the line, we have So, x — 2 > 0 represents
a-b+e>0 the half region of the 1
For point R(x), ¥3), we will find that ax, + by, +e <0 plane where origin does
Thus, for all the points lying in the region below the line, we not lie, 1.e , to the mght Oo =
havear+by +c<0. of the line x = 2
Also, we have considered b > 0 So, we must have c < 0 as the
lime 1s cutting positive x-axis
L(0,0)=c <0 (iv) y>-3ory+3>0
So, for all the points in the region of the plane w rt hne where Let L(x, y)=y +3
ongin lies, ax + by + c < 0 and for the region where origin does L(0,0)=0+3>0
dot he, ax + by +c>0 So, y + 3 > 0 represents the half region of the plane where
Similarly, for b < 0, we will find that the line divides the plane origin hes, t.e., above the line y + 3 = 0.
into two halves In one half for all the points, L(x, y) > 0 and in
av
other half for all the points, L(x, y) < 0
ILLUSTRATION 2.48
Sketch the region in which the points satisfying the following
v>-3
inequality lie,
() 2x~3y-5>0 (ii) 3x +4y+7>0
(ili) x>2 (iv) y>-3
Sol,
M &~3y-539
ILLUSTRATION
Let L(x, )=2x —3y-5 2.49
L(0,
0) = -5 <0 Sketch the region in which the
points satisfying the followin
mequalities lie. g
So, 2x - 3y 5 >0 represents the half region of the plane
Where origin does not lie, i.e , below line 2x —- 3y — 5 = 0, (i) Ik+yl<2 (ii) J2x yl >3 (iii) |x| >
ay ~
2.1 85 Coo rdinate Geomet— ry Ifx > 0, p< 0, then we
o
2.1 C
havex > yorx+y70
Sol. oA
i); Instat 2 Let L(x, y) =x + Y- [ae
acer s
x
~ 2<0 1(1,0)=1+0>0
yt +42~>Qand. 74 V- oat,
Points satisfying this
=> — .
2and Ls.) 74 4iyr
Law. ryt
10. 0) ~ aareen |) |
£,(0.0)= »~Oand lies and inequality lie above
the region where origin |
So.v 31 t+. 2 > O represents onlin lies the line x + vy ~ On
the region where
.t1—2 4 also represents fourth quadrant.
av
and one
Similarly, we have one region in second quadrant
in third quadrant
following region
Combining all the cases, we have
v
yea, 230
x+y y=r
x wn
oe ee NG
cor |G a
v
be
1 ty. nye ~~ S
eqs
Se)
\
n of the points
Thus. in general. }av + by *c¢|< dis the regio
+ ¢ = dand ax + by+ c=-d
between the lines ax + by
(ii) 21-1 >3 2.50
ILLUSTRATION
_ Gye fe 3.and2r-1>.3
— 3. b°) lies above
= 2-1 -39<0and21—-v-3>0 Find the values of 6 for which the point (2b
Lyja.sy=2a-3 +3 and L4(v.1)=2x-y-3 the line 3x — 4y -a(a—2)=0 V ae R.
L,(0. 0) = 1 > O and L,(0, 0) = -3<0
So. 2x —1 ~ 3 < 0 represents where origin does
not lie and Sot. Given line 1s 3x — 43 - ala - 2) = 0
n does wing figure
One of the possible lines 1s as shown in the follo
also repre sents the regio n where origi
2y —1 -— 3 > O
not lie. a\
4)
P(r...) )
Consider the point PQ, ¥,) lying above this line

Draw perpendicular trom point P to the V-ants meehng the lin
2 al
Q(\,, Vy) and v-ants at MV

Clearly, PAL > OM
Thus in general ax > by + ¢| > dis the region of the points Vets
which dues not le between the lines av t fy 4 cand
as- bh, 7 d > dys Avy
(iii) * - => rT (CD 1 CC
ffx.) - 0 then we have s- yore yO > wv, ale 2) ty 0 (As point Q lies on the line)
Let hor yp) 7 4
> M2663) ada 2 AMS OW eR .
1) Oy) 1 O° 0
(Putung v= 24 + 3 andy) = pe
Hence. points salistymy this mequalitty hie below the dine
r- yp Oon first quadrant volatdab oh Y-OVaER
ai Discrimunant > 0
> A Ad Ob 9) ~ 0
> 1 4h obs 950
> 2b th 8-0
> (2h Sybt 1) 70
O = be( x, nu(S.~]
<-
[bes i . . | 6. Find the values of a such that the variable point (@, tan @)
3 the region of the points P(x, y) satistying |x| + |p| < 1, lies inside the triangle whose sides are
1 2 nt
given that |x| +]y| <1. Vv we a a ee alr and yoBet,
kehave four cases. | ge ae
then we have | 7. Find the area of the region in which points satisfy
epee
yy? 9%
|
<0. v-y+tl=0
my
r+
y
1=0
| 3<hltpss.
points satisfying these | 8. Find the area of the region formed by the points satisfying
nequalities lie in triangular ~———~- 0 a Ix] 4 [yp + lv + vis 2
!
egion in first quadrant ANSWERS |
Fed by axes and line
1. Both the lines lie on the same side of point (8, -9).
‘4 ye [=Lon 0.
2. (i) points are on opposite sides of the line
similarly, we have three | (ii) points are on same side of the line
mangular regions In all other quadrants.
3. a €(-%,-2)U(0,1) 4. a € (2,4)
Thus, points satisfying given inequality lie in a square as shown
inthe following figure
| 1 a
5. 4/5 <a< 8/13 6 -~<a<—
6 3
ILLUSTRATION 2.52 7. 32 sq. units 8.> Soe units
Plot the region of the points P(x, y) satisfying 2 > max.

(kx), bit IMAGE OF A POINT IN A LINE AND
Sol. We have 2 > max {{x|, ||} EQUATION OF ANGLE BISECTORS
2 > |x| and 2 > |p| FOOT OF PERPENDICULAR DRAWN FROM A POINT
-2<y<2
we, -2<x<2and—
ON A LINE AND IMAGE OF POINT IN A LINE
Thus, common region of these inequalities is the square formed Earlier in one of the illustrations, we have discussed how to find
by lines x = +2 and py = +2 the foot of perpendicular drawn from point on a line and the
tmage of point in a line. In alternative method. we use the direct
formula for both of these.
Consider a point P(x,,1,) anda line ZL = ax — by-c=0.
Let the foot of the perpendicular from point P on the line be
M(x, y>)
Paya)
|
Seax~hy +c=0
Mas. 15)
CONCEPT APPLICATION EXERCISE 2.4 OO, \;)
1. How the lines 2x + 3y - 4 = 0 and 6x + 9y + 8 = 0 are | Slope of line L 1s <

Positioned w.r.t. point (8, -9)?
2. How the following pairs of points are placed w.r.t. the Slope of PMis ~2—1
line 3x ~ 8y - 7 = 0? X3—'
(i) (-3, -4) and (1, 2) (ii) (-1,
-1) and (3, 7) Since PM 1 L, we have
3. Find the range of a for which the points (@, 2 + @) and

(22. a 7 lie on opposite sides of the line 2x + 3y = 6.
4. If the point P(a’, a) lies in the region of acute angle

between the lines 2y = x and 4y = x, then find the values V3 = vy + aa and Mo = MY + bA
| of a, Point (x3, V2) les on the line ax + by+c=0.

If (a, 3a) is a variable point lying above the straight line a(x, + ad) + by, + bA)+c¢=0
2x + y + 4 = 0 and below the line x + 4y - 8 = 0, then find e ea oi + c
the values of a.
a+b
2,20 _Copsdinste Geomety_
Putting this value in (1), we get ILLUSTRATION 2.54
c Q)
aa LS ary oe In AABC, vertex A ts (1, 2). If the internal angle bisector
tor ofacr
a b a+b ; ; ZB is 2x —v + 10 = 0 and the perpendicular bisec
inates of foot of lg
Using this formula, we can get coord y =x, then find the equation of BC.
perpendicular drawn from port P on the line
Now, let image of point P 1n the line be Q(y, 1 4)- Sol. The image / of A tn the bisector of ZB hes on BC
So, Af will be the midpoint of PO Now, the image of A(1, 2) in the line 2x —y + 10 = 015 ie by
yl oy ends -2(2-2+10)
y) —| 4+]
D(x.
94) = D(-7 6)
Yt Wty A(\, 2) x y=0
> \ > iy ar, + by, te
a 7 bh 7 we
wy. PT 2(ax, + bv, +c)
= a ee ath
Using this formula, we can get coordinates of image of point B D c
Pin the line.
Also, C 1s the image ofA in the perpendicular bisector ofAC The
image of A(1, 2) ny = x 1s C(2, 1).
ILLUSTRATION 2.53
Hence, the equation of line BC 1s
If one of the vertices of a square is (3, 2) and one of the
diagonals is along the line 3x + 4y + 8 = 0, then find the centre 6-1
v= [= (x - 2)
of the square and other vertices. -7-2
or 5x +9 -19=0
Sol. We have square ABCD. where coordinates of 4 are (3, 2).
Clearly. point (3. 2) does not satisfy the line 3x + 4y ~ 8 = 0. ILLUSTRATION 2.55
Thus. diagonal! BD 1s along this line
Find the locus of image of the variable pornt (A~, 2A) m the
Mh. k) 1s centre of the square. which is the foot of perpendicular line mirror x ~ » + 1 = 0, where A is a parameter
from vertex A on the diagonal BD
Sol. Let the image of (A, 2A) in the me murtor x -3 ~ * =)
h-3_k-2__ (3(3)+4(2)+8) be (/, k)
3 4 7 +4?
h-2? k-2A | -A7-2A=D
iS FS ee ays B= 0 I -) 2
= > a! 3,2) B
h+1=2A
=> th, ky 2 (0, -2), |
which 1s the centre of the and k=A?+1 I2
square Mo Putting the value of A from (1) in (2), we get
41s midpoint of AC D C K-p= (A2t)
Cz=(-3 +4) 2
Now, AM = 2O)+4Q)+81
4 _ or 4y W=ary
V3? +4? This ts the required locus
MB = MD = |
ILLUSTRATION 2.56
3
Slope of BD = <= tan@, where @ 15 inclination of BD with Lines Ly; ax + by +o=Oandl, 2h +m rn=0 intense
X-axis. at point P and make an angle @ with each other Fund the
Therefore, coordinates of B and D are equation of a line different trom L, which passes through
(O41 cos, -2£1 sm@) and makes the same angle @ with L,
=(oss(-5) 2015) Sol,
(A, AYP
vb
! |
<
a x
4
‘0 Ly
O htm rn=0
te
algin
otraa ee ——
ws SS
line
ge of poi nt P(A , k) on required line in the From PM= PN, we have
figure, ma
—
rom
|
lax + yt al lar
141%
byt 5 Ol
Hine Ly >
a? +h ay +h,
2 2
} jes on such that its image
on of req uir ed lin e 1s locus of point P
eg ati line L>. 4 + hy + C2
L, hes on ax +
ee
yt
aE ))- 3 | 2 2
e L, be Q(x), a, +h" ay +h,
ima ge of point P wm lin Aah+bk+c)

Us -k __
=
xych
a ~
a a Be
b ax byt gy ax t 2byup +82 (1)
+c) ae +h? Vay +h,
Qa(ah+ bk
~~
=" aa+ eb aX : + As ++ C; a!ax ay +c
t+ by 2 (2)
°
2b( ahpbk+b+c)
ah
_ _2b(“7
+ +c)
k
|,
Jay +h?
and Yi
bisectors.
L>. These are equations of two
Now, A". Vi) lies on the line se angle bisector, we
To identify the acute angle and obtu Let the
{_ 2a(ah+ bk +c) n hls m|- GENE c) +i |+n=0 choose one of the bise ctors, say given 1n equation (1)
the given lines be o/2,
a’ +b° a +h angle between this bisector and one of
g this bisector.
line is where ais the angle between lines containin
Therefore, equation of required
2(al + mb)(ax + by +c)— (a + bie + my + n)=0 a
If tan S <1, then ats < tan 45°
EQUATIONS OF BISECTORS OF THE ANGLES <45° => a@<90°
N|R
BETWEEN THE LINES angles
+ by + 2 Hence, chosen bisector corresponds to pair of acute
Consider two lines L, = a,x + by + c, = O and Ly= azx
= 0, which intersect at point & tan >
e4
> 1, then a@ > 90°
If we get
f <
Q Then, chosen bisector 1s of pair of obtuse angles

To identify the acute angle and obtuse angle bisectors, we can
> Cc
evs 90°-%
r) M
fs,
oL, use the following shortcut method also.
\--} “Dd mi) Let the lines L, 2 a, + byy +c, =O and L,= ayx + by + Cy = 0
ee "<l be such that c, > 0 and c,> 0.

aa ~ E>
— A x D Bue i
If aja, + b,b, < 0, then
ax+ by + ¢ a,x+ brite
eae
= will be acute angle
a] .
? 7
Ja? +b)
We have a pair of acute angles, vz. ZBED and ZAEC and a bisector.
pair of obtuse angles, viz ZCEM and ZAED.
Also, we have a pair of bisectors B, for pair of acute angles If aja, + 6,5, > 0, then
and B, for pair of obtuse angles ax+ by +c aan + bay + C9
In the figure, ZBED = 0 = = =—will be acute
Ja? +4? ja: +h,”
6
ZBEP = ZPED = 5 angle bisector
Now, ZCEB = 180°-@ BISECTOR CONTAINING THE GIVEN POINT
ZCEQ = ZQEB = 90° -5 Lines L, = ayy + by + c, = O and L, = aw + by + c, = 0
divide the plane into four regions two opposite regions where
ZQEP = ZQEB + ZBEP = 90° $ ¢.2 008 expressions /\(x, v) = a,x + by +c) and AQ.) = an + by +2
2 have same sign and two opposite regions where expressions
Thus, two bisectors are always perpendicular, AiG, y) and f(x, v) have opposite signs So, angle bisector
Now, consider point P(x, y) on the bisector B,.
axt+bhyto art dbvt ey
Draw perpendiculars PM and PN on the lines L, and L. =
are congruent. 2 2 | a +h = goes through the regions
Clearly, tnangles PME and PNE Ja, +b,
where expressions /|(x, vy) and /.(\, v) have same sign and
PM=PN
avt byte, _~_ r+ by + cy>
Thus, bisector 1s locus of point which moves in the plane of lines othe: angle bisector goes
L,a an d L, such that lengths of Perpendiculars drawn 2 2
from 1t to the Ja, +b, dag? +b?
© given lines (L, and L,) are equal through the regions where these expressions have opposite signs
From the above discussion, we understand that. Hence, equation of the bisector of the angle containing the Pom
(i) if aja +h, B+c, and a,a@+ b,B + cy have same sign, then (1, 2) 1s
yx t bvt cy, agxt+ bv t+ cy 4x+3y—-6 5x+l2y+9
angle h sector = = = goes or 9x -7y-4] =9
2, po 2
va
2
+h, Va, +6,
5 7 13
through the region which contains the point (a. f). Also, in original equations, c, = —6 and c, = 9
(ii) 1f a,a+ hb, B+ c, and aya + b,B + cy have opposite signs. Thus, c, and ce) have opposite signs
axthyvec ayxthyv+cs
then angle bisector — A 2 a = == goes Hence, angle bisector containing origin 1s 7x + 9v-3 =0
Ja, +b> a; +b,”
through the region which contains the point (q@, f) ILLUSTRATION 2.58
Also. if c¢, and c, have same sign, then
The equation of bisector of two lines L, and L, are
ar + Ay + Cc;
=
ayX + byv + Ca x
is the bisector of the 2x - 16y — 5 = 0 and 64x + 8y + 35 = 0. If the line L; passes
Ja? +h; Jay? +b," through (-11, 4), then identify the equation of acute angle
pair of angles which contains origin (0, 0). bisector of L, and L,
TLLUSTRATION 2.5'7 Sol. by 9

64. -81+35=0 7 57
fi \oy
For the straight lines 4x + 3) — 6 = 0 and Sv + 127 +9 =0, find / ax “
the equation of the:
(i) bisector of the obtuse angle between them
rot \d,
(ii) bisector of the acute angle between them 7 (-11,4)
“d,
Ay
(iii) bisector of the angle which contains (1, 2)
(iv) bisector of the angle which contains (0, 0)
From the figure,
NSolzy Equations of bisectors of the angles between the given
lines are: fem
1-11) -16(4)-5| =
91 = 5.6 (1)
4x+3,p-6
: =i Sx +121 +9
ee a 4 + 256 265
J4? +37 5s p12? _ [64(-11)
54(— +8(4)
+ 35] _ 6 37 — 25
4x¢ 36 . Sxel2y-+9 ~ 6449 ~
“r 5 “SB
or 9x — 7
— 41 = 0 and 7x + 9v-3 =0 d,<d,
If a2 1s the acute angle between the line 4x + 3 — 6 = 0 and the Therefore, 2x - 16y — 5 = 0 1s acute angle bisector and
bisector 9x — 7). - 41 = 0, then 64x + 8y + 35 = 01s obtuse angle bisector
4 9 ILLUSTRATION: 2.59
a | 3 gles If x + y = 01 the angle bisector of the angle containing the
m2 | (a) *
_— 1
— =
cy at
point (1, 0), for the lines 3x + 4y + 6 = 0 and 4x + 34 - b=0,
then find the values of b.
A > 45°
or a > 90°
‘Sol.' Given lines are
Hence, 9x - 7y — 41 = 01s obtuse angle bisector. (1)
3x+4y+b=0
So, 7x + 9y — 3 = 01s acute angle bisector. (2)
Alternatively, given lines are —4x — 3y + 6 =O and 5x + 12y+9=0. and 4x+3y-b=0
Here, aa, + b,b2 = (-4)(5) + (-3)(12) <0 Equation of bisectors of lines (1) and (2) are
So, acute angle bisector 1s (3x + 4y + b) = +(4x + 3y- b)
—4x-3y+6 S5x+12y+9 For bisector x + y = 0, we have to choose negative sign
e+ 5? +12? Thus, bisector x + y = 0 goes through the region where lines

3x + 4y + b and 4x + 3y — b have opposite signs.
—4x-3y+6 5xt1l2y+9 have
or 5 Te 13 For bisector of the angle containing the point (1, 0), we must
or Ix+9y-3=0 (3(1)+ 4(0)+ 6) (4(1) + 3(0) — 5) < 0
Now, f(x.) = 4x + 3y — 6 and f(x, y) = 5x +12y+9 = (3+6)(4-b)<0
A, 2) = 4(1) + 3(2)- 6 > 0 > b>4orb<-3
FAA,
2) = 5(1) + 12(2)
+9 > 0
Sena
ATION 2.60
pLueTe 0 and rw si des ing in the first qua drant are given
' of a rhombus lying
ual sides of and isos celes triangle are 7x — + 3 = If the length of the longer
Two . _ 0, Its thir side passes throug the poin (1, -10).
h t a ay = 0 and 12x — Sy = 0.
the other two sides
diagonal 1s 12, then find the equations of
on of the third side.
ermine the equati of the rhombus
since triangle 1s isosceles, the third side 1s equally inclined lines:
Sol. OB 1s along the acute angle bisector of the given
y-3=0 Sy = 0
re lines 72 - ¥ + 3=Oandxi 3x —4) =Oand 12x
the third side ts parallel to angle bisectors of the given lines
it
The equat ion of acute angle bisector 1s

}yence.
Bisector 3x-4y — l2x-Sy
rv 1 t3=0
5 |3 ,
Ko ONE
or 9x -7Ty=0
—; - Bisector .. Slope of OB = tan@ = _¢
|.
—__ ———_ x
(1, -10) Now, OB = 12. 0)
b
Ir - 4
| | y+y-3=0
Therefore, the coordinates of B are
a) 9 84 108
(12 cos @, 12 sin8) =| { 12 Ti30 12 | = Ti30 y a0 |
Fy—-143
= aty-3 AB 1s passing through B and 1s parallel to OC
50 2 Therefore, the equation of AB 1s
or 3a+y-3=0 (1)
and 1-3:+9=0 (2)

J130 «654 130
Equation of line through (1, -10) and parallel to (1) 1s
3-1+7=0
BCs passing through B and 1s parallel to O-.
Equaton of line through (1. -10) and parallel to (2) 1s
erefore,
Theref ea 9 t
h the equation
=,
t o fBCis 1S : S: ed
i304
ee. : =
x (—
ara
i-n -31=0
$LUSTRATION 2.61 ILLUSTRATION 2.63
The vertices B and C of a tnangle 4BC hie on the lines 3y = 4x The line ax + by = | passes through the point of intersection
and y= 0. respectively. The side BC passes through the point of y = x tan @+ p sec wandx sin (30° - @) — x cos (30° — @)
(23, 2/3) If ABOC 1s a rhombus lying in first quadrant, O = p If itis inclined at 30° with 1 = (tan @) x. then prove that
being the ongin, then find the equation of the Jine BC.
ath =
Sol.
api “id ) 4p?
Sol. Given lines are

xsin @—yvcos a+ p=0 il)
and =x cos(30°— @) — vy sin(30° - a) + p=0
or x sin(60° + @) —1 cos(60" + a@) + p=0 2)
Clearly, angle between lines (1) and (2) 1s 60°
Slope of line (1) 1s tan @ which ts parallel to the line. = (tan aie.
Given that line aa + by — 1 as inelined at 30° with 1 = (tan ay
So, line aa + by + Las also inclined at 30° with line ql)
Hence, line aa + by + Las along acute angle bisector of lines
(1)
and (2).
Diagonals of rhombus are equally inclined to the sides. Now, acute angle bisector is
So, diagonals are parallel to or coincident with the angle bisectors VSN VCS OCF Pp — =v sincod" + ad
ofsides 4 caspad’ + @) +p)
or (sin & + sin(60"+ AA (eos @& + Cas(OU" + OW + Ip = 0
Equations of bisectors of sides OC and OB of rhombus are Comparing this line with av t by Lowe gel
lta) A 8 a h |
SINC § SINCOO" Fox) CONCE F eas
Cax(COO
or
x-2y=O
5
and 2x+ y=0
l +a) 2p
clearly, diagonal BC is parallel to the bisector 2x} yO 7 SUNGC + SINCO O” + or) Os :
; OO Sr = SO cos( 60°7 + a)
% equation BC 1s -}
2p
2 2 Squaring and adding, we Bel
3
yr-se— 2] a_i|
or
aed
, ‘i
= pple a
2e0s60 o
as
2x+y-2=0
4+p° 1p
Pr
24 Coordinate | Geometry
CONCEPT APPLICATION EXERCISE 2.5 = 4 ( a,b,

sa—ra,b, Je (se — oF |+e <0
- Find the equation of the bisector of the obtuse angle a,b, — arb,
between the lines 3x — 4y + 7= 0 and 12x + Sy-2=0. =5 a (b cx — byez)
~ by (Cyay — Cya;)+¢,(ayb, - ayy)=4)
The incident ray is along the line 3x — 4y — 3 = 0 and the |
4 bh
reflected ray is along the line 24x + 7) + 5 = 0. Find the
equation of mirrors.
3. If the two sides of rhombus are x + 2) + 2 = 0 and | a4 b Cy
2x + y~3=0, then find the slope of the longer diagonal. This is the required condition of concurrency of three lines
In triangle ABC, the equation of the right bisectors of the Another condition for three lines to be concurrent 15 that if
sides AB and AC are x + y = 0 and y — x = 0, respectively there exist constants A,, A, and A, not all zero such that
If A = (5, 7), then find the equation of side BC A,(a\x + by + c}) + Alanx + hay * C>) + Alayx + bay + C3) =()
5. Show that the reflection of the line ax + by + c = 0 in the then lines are concurrent. ;
line
x + y + 1 = 0158 the line bx + ay + (a+ b-c)=0,
wherea # b. ILLUSTRATION 2.64
6. Equations of two altitudes of equilateral triangle are Find the value of A, if the lines 3x — 4y — 13 = 0, 8x - ly ~ 33,
V3x
— y + 8 - 43 =0 and —J3x — » +12 + 43 =0 and 2x —3y + A = 0 are concurrent.
Find the equation of the third altitude.
Sol. The given limes are concurrent if
7. The equations of the perpendicular bisectors of the |
34 13
sides AB and AC of triangle ABC are x — + 5 = 0 and
x + 2y=0, respectively. If the point 4 is (1, —2), then find 8 -l1 -33/=0
the equation of the line BC 23 +A
8. Two sides of a rhombus ABCD are parallel to the lines or 3(-11A — 99) + 4 (8A + 66) -13 (—24 + 22) =0
y=x+2andy=7x +3 If the diagonals of the rhombus or A-7=0
intersect at the point (1, 2) and the verte 4 1s on the o1 A=-7
y-axis, then find the possible coordinates of 4
Alternative method:
ANSWERS ee The given equations are
1. 2lx+77y-101=0 3x-4y—-13=0 (1)
2. 9x + 27y + 20 =0 or 39x - 13y- 10=0 8x -— Jy - 33 =0 (2)
3. -l 4. 14y= 10r and = 2x-3y+d=0 (3)
6. y= 10 7. 14x + 23y-40=0 Solving (1) and (2), we get
x=l1landy=5
8. (0, 0) or (0, 5/2)
Thus, (11, 5) is the point of intersection of (1) and (2).
The given lines will be concurrent if they pass through a common
CONCURRENCY OF THREE LINES point, 1.e., the point of intersection of any two lines lies on the third.
AND FAMILY OF STRAIGHT LINES Therefore, (11, 5) lies on (3), i-e.,
2x 11-3 5+1=0
CONCURRENCY OF THREE LINES
or A=-7
Three lines are said to be concurrent if they pass through a
common pout, i.e., they meet at a point. Thus, if three lines are ILLUSTRATION 2.65
concurrent, then the point of intersection of two lines lies on the
third line. If the lines a,x + by + 1 = 0, ax + by + 1 = 0, and
a,x + b;y + | = 0 are concurrent, then show that the points
Let a,x+byt+c,=0 (1) (a,, 51), (a, 6), and (a3, 3) are collinear.
a,x + by +c, =0 (2)
ax t+ by +c,=0 (3) Sol. The given lines are
be three concurrent lines.
ayxt+by+1=0 ()
Then the point of intersection of lines (2) and (3) must he on axt+byyt+1=0 @)
line (1). and = ax
+ bv +1=0 @)
The coordinates of the point of intersection of (2) and (3) are If these lines are concurrent, we must have
(22 — by€, 6342 — a a, b |

a,b, — a,b," axb, — ayby a, b, l}=0
This point les on line (1). a; b; 1
Straight Lines (2.25
his he condition of the collinearity of three Port
s
ay"? => ¥ (ax, + by, +c)=0
ce, 1f the given lines are concurrent, the given points are
r=|
Hene®
SS
collinear.
oT
> ae ob, +nc=0
r=l r=]
ramity
We know OFthatLINES .
through one given point, innumerable
=> ax, txt... +x,)
+ hy, ty. +... +y,) ton =0
straight
ines can DE drawn. “(2 FX, +.. +4, J+o(2 + y+. tH \eeno
Let us get the general L, n n
equation of straight line passing
through given fixed point in (2)
Comparing (1) and (2), we find that
ierms of two particular straight p
jmnes through the same point. k ~L Xp tx + .t%, Wy typ t.. “Yn
Consider two straight lines (xy) [ :
4 n
Le ap + by + c, = 0 and
[,z ax + by + c, = 0 through This 1s the mean of given point through which variable line
fixed point P(x),1) ax + by + c= 0 passes
General equation of line through point P(x), ¥)) 18 given by From the above discussion, it 1s clear that ina triangle, line
(ax + byy + €)) + Aayx + by +,)=0,4 € R. passing through centroid 1s such that the sum of algebraic
distances from three vertices of triangle is zero.
Since a,x, + by; + c, = 0 and ayx, + bv, + ec = 0, above
equation satisfies the point P(x,, y,) for all real values of
A
ILLUSTRATION 2.66
Note:
¢ Consider variable straight line ax + by + ¢ = 0, Show that the straight lines x(a + 2b) + y(a + 34) = a + b for
where different values of a and b pass through a fixed point. Find
a,b,c ER.
For randomly chosen values of a, b and ¢, lines obtained that point.
are not necessarily concurrent. Sol. Given equation of variable line 1s
But if a, b, c are related by equation a/ + bm + cn = 0, where
Ma+t 2h) + (a+
3b)=athb
|, m, n are constants, then lines are concurrent for different
or ax 4 v—b(2x
1) + 3y—1)
+ =0
values of a, b, c which satisfy the above equation Here, (1)
only two of a, b and c can be chosen independently At least one of a and 4 will be non zero
Letaz0
al+hm
From the relation, c = —
n
So, equation (1) reduces to
Putting this value of c in the equation of line, we get
(x+y—1)+ Le 1l)=0
Pe i wo a
or xt y= 14+ AQe+ 3y~1)=0, where A= = (2)

This is the equation of family of straight lines concurrent
at point
of intersection of lines
This is the equation of family of straight lines concurrent x+y-1=0 (3)
at [42 ; and =2x+3y-1=0
(4)
non Solving (3) and (4), we get x = 2, v=-l,
* A straight line 1s such that the algebraic sum of the Hence, given variable lines pass through the fixed point (2, -1)
Perpendiculars drawn on it from any number of fixed points for all values of a and b.
'S Zero. Then the line always passes through a fixed point
which 1s mean of the given points. ILLUSTRATION 2.67
Let ax + by +c =0 be a variable straight line, where a, 5 and

Proof:
care 1", 3" and 7" terms of an increasing A.P., respectively
Let the given fixed points be (x,, ¥,).7= 1, 2,3, ...,m. Then prove that the variable Straight line always passes
through a fixed point and find that point,
Also, let the variable line be
Sol. Let the common difference of A P. be d.
ax+by+c=0 (1)
Then 6 = a+ 2dandc=a+t 6d
Given that 5 en ty Fe 0 So, given variable straight line will be

2 va’ +b° ax + (a+ 2d\y+a+6d=0
— a
Coordinate Geometry of hineg
Given lines are concurrent at point of intersection
2.26
axtyv+1)+d2vt 6)=0
or 11 +}.
ght lines concurrent at point 2x-y+1= 0 which 1s (-4,
This 1s the equation of family of strai x+y=Oand
6 = 0 which ts (2, -3)
of intersection of lines.x+1'+ 1 =0 and 2y +
We require a line through point P which ts farthest from Point
ILLUSTRATION 2.68 Q(1, -3), 1¢., line whose perpendicular distance from point p "
Prove that all the lines having sum of the intercepts on the
the greatest.
ugh
axes equal to half of the product of the intercepts pass thro We observe that perpendicular distances dj, d), d;.. of the lines
a fixed point. Also, find that fixed pomnt. L,, Ly, Ly. respectively, from point Q are less than distance
d, of the line L, from Q. Line L, is perpendicular to the Segmen
Sol. Equation of line in intercept form ts joining P and Q. Line L, 1s at greatest distance from point Q,
ae, pe ;] 5
a = 5
Slope of PQ 1s mpg = —
or by + ay = ab (1)
I+ —
3
Given that a+ b= =
2
Slope of the line £4 = Fi
2at+2hb=ah
So, equation (1) reduces to Therefore, equation of the required Jine 1s
by + av=2a+26 l ( |
yorespxts
or bi, — 2) + avy — 2) = 0. “ 3 5 3
This passes through fixed point (2, 2) for all real values of a and b or 6x - 1Sv+7=0
ILLUSTRATION 2.69 ILLUSTRATION 2.71
Find the straight line passing through the point of intersection Let the sides of a parallelogram be U = a, U= 6. V = and
of lines 2x + 3y + 5 = 0 and 5x — 2v ~ 16 = 0 and through the V=b', where U=Ix+ myt+n,V=lx+ntyt+n Show that the
point (—1, 3) using the concept of family of lines equation of the diagonal through the point of intersection of
}U Vol
Sol. The equation family of lines through the point of
U=a,V=d and U=6, V=b'isgivenby|] g@ a’ 1j\=0-
intersection of the given lines 1s
2x + 3y+5+A(Sx—2v— 16)=0 (1) b ob 1
If a member of the above family of lines passes through the point
Sol. Parallelogram 1s formed by lines U'= a. U= 6. } =a’ and
(—1. 3), then
V=b', where U=ixt+mytan,Valvtotyta
2(-1) + 3(3) + 5 + A(S(-1) — 2(3) - 16) = 0
, 4 See
or A a
9
Putting this value A in equation (1), we get the required equation
of line as
9(2x + 3y + 5) + 4(S5x- 2p - 16) =0 ral - u=b
or 2x+y-1=0
Let the required diagonal be 4C.
ILLUSTRATION 2.70 Since one end 4 of the diagonal AC passes through the pomt of
intersection of lines U-a=0O and }’—a@ =0, its equation ts given by
Consider a family of straight lines (x + y) + A(2x —y + 1) = 0.
Find the equation of the straight line belonging to this family (U-a)+AV-a)=0 ()
that is farthest from (1, -3). But the other end C of the same diagonal passes through the point
of intersection of lines U — b= 0 and J’- b’ = 0.
Sol.
er)
So, its equation 1s given by
(2)
(U—b)+p(V- b) =0
Equation (1) and (2) represents the same straight lines
jac A_ataa’
ho b+pb’
-b
= Rope [|
" ea
Putting the value of A in (1), we get
|
iable line from
ofth e distances of a var
a-b , 3. Ifthe algebratc sum and (—2, — 2) is zero, then prove |
the points (2, 0), (0, 2), d that point.
= 0
45
is
oa
a’)
fixed point. Fin
V
oti
cies
(=F)
ae
that the line passes through t he

(U-2)
5x + 3y —2+4,(3x -y —
uy Vv ! Consider the family of lines
Q Find the equation
le 0 = 0 andx-yt1+A,(2x-y-2)=
a a
both the families.
| of a straight line that belongs to
. p 6 ,2x-y + 1=0, and
5. If the straight lines x + y — 2=0
ation of diagonal at whic h point the familyy _
qs is the required equ ax ++ hy c=Oare concurrent, ¢ hen |
ero) 1s conc urrent
of Imes 2ax + 3hby to = 0 (a, b,c are nonz
t
{(LUSTRATION pM J
enithe values of non-negative real numbers
/1,, /12, 44, ky, Ka, ___ANsw
_ ANSWERS
g, such that algebraic sum of the perpendiculars drawn from Ch 2) 2. (1, 2) 3. (0,0) |
points (2, ky), (3. Kade (7. ks) Unis 4), (Ag, 5), (ty, -3) on a | 4. 5x-2y-7=0 5. ( 1/6, 5/9) |
variable line passing through (2, 1) 1s zero.
Sol. Let the equation of variable line be

atihn+c=0 (1) Bi Solved Examples i
it1s given that
tS Oe
a,thy, te EXAMPLE 2.1
=0. where (x, v,), 7 = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 are given
2 Va" +h Show that the lines 4x + p—- 9 =0,x-2yv+3=0,5x-y-6=0
points
make equal intercepts on any line of slope 2
Sol. 4 > 4
x x
a
Tal Sime J
™
> > \, The given lines are
t=) i=l 4x+y—-9=0
6 (1)
x-2y+3=0 (2)
5x~y-6=0 (3)
Now, the equation of any line having slope (gradient) 2 will be
6° 6 yH2xt+e
(+)
This ts the fixed point through which the variable (1) passes Let line (4) cuts lines (1) » (2),
(2), and
and (3) at 4. B, and C.” respecti
a 1s given that the variable line 1s passing through the point Solving (1) and (4), we get
_e
+1)
Similarly, B = (1 ws 2c 2
So l= and =! =]
and Ca (2454 5)
——— ky +hy +ky+44+5-3 _
Clearly, A is the middle point of BC.
6 6 ~ Hence, 4B = 1C
>
hy + hy + hy = and k, + ky + ks =0 EXAMPLE 2,2
Since hy, h
ky “heknt
ha. k 2
1M, Ay, 1» ky, kp,ky, ks are non-negative, h, =ahy = h, =oe 0 and ae of two sides of a triangle are 3y ~ x — 2 =0 and
chestigh he 0. The third side, which is variable,
always passes
© point (5, 1). Find the range of
CONCEPT APPLICATION EXERCIBE BE ponsa
theegvalues of the
| 2 6 slope of the third si ide, so
1, the triangle, that the origin is an interior point of
{fa and 6 are two arbitrary constants, then prove
Straight line (a — 2b)x + (a + 3b)yy that the |
+ 3a + 4h =(0) will Pass Sol.
through a fixed point. Find that point. We have two sides of triangle
viyr-2=9 as 3y — y — 2 = 0 and
2. If a, b, ¢ are im harmonic progression, then t
line (x/a) + (y/b) + (l/c) c)=0
= always he straight The third side is pas
sin & through the point
Point Find that point. LE paBsea Ah ugh a fixed | Different lines
t hrough point 4 are dra
4(5, —1),
figure. wn as Shown in the followin
g
Ui eee
1s
2.28 Coordinate Geometry Hence, the equation of AC ;
x
)
al
vip 270
i ing throy eh
.
iY) anc ithe Sati
Q of DE perpendicular to AC and pass
LY
\
wi? the origin is
hy 4A(0, h)
my iH , 0
ee hy
* or aa (2)
a(S. 1) “6
;
Solving (1) and (2), we
:.
get the coordinates of Fas ,
ty 7 a
follows
BO a.) dD Cla 0,
hy ov
Line L- through 41s parallel to the me y 31 +2 Ne = 0. which h as
ah
slope | 3
or byt ay=ah
In this case, tangle 1s net formed
Line Z, through 4 goes through ongin, which has slope —1/5.
ath |
eo eer
in this case tmangle 1s formed but origin hes on the side of the
_ ah
mangle ath
Line 1; through 4 1s such that tnangle 1s formed and origin hes
inside the mangle
_(_ah ath
E=(— +h Sp
Thus. required values of slope of line are (-1/5. 1/3)
Since F 1s the midpoint of DE. its coordinates are
EXAMPLE 2.3 ah* ah
Find the locus of the circumcenter of a tnangle whose two 2(a* + hr)’ 2(a" + hr)
sides are along the coordinate axes and the third side passes The slope of AF 1s
through the point of intersection of the lines ax + by + c= 0 and “h
&-m~+n=0 h-—f
2(a” + h7)
my,=
Sol Let the equation of the third line be ah" .
(ax~bn ~c)~ Alle +m + n)=0 a +hr)
where / 1s a parameter It meets the x-axis al (-An+< 0) and the Zhai +h )-awh fate
veaxts at BIG AN~ © -ah* ~ uh
-4E
zm ~ pb!
The rangle OAB 1s a ight-angled triangle Its circumcenter 1s the and the slope of BE 1s
mianoin of the hypotenuse Let 11 be («,8) Then, ath 0
a= - (Yas)
5, - {Anne
41> a
ms
oe
ah?
t Ir
4 >" a
and p= 4 4 | ath
am-h wh
2 N , 7
: ru ~ 2
TY
Heme 5 YU 6 _ _ ash ah tgs whe a

Yl-n Bm +n hrom (1) and (2), we have
Hence the incus of (a fyas
myn, l
a x 2us {= Zhy
or thoL BE
m- ib n> tm,
or 2546
EXAMPLE 2,5
may lun ley stan hn)
A diagonal of rhombus 48¢ ‘Dts member of both the families
EXAMPLE 2.4 of lines (voy yr Aa ry 2) = UO and (x - 1 + 2) +
Let ABC be as ina ngle with AB - 4c AQ 5) 0, one of the vertices of the rhombus 1s (3,2)
BC, £15 the foot of the per HW 1 as the midpoint of
pendicular d rawn from Do It the atea ot the thombus
AC. and ts loVs sq units, then find
Fis the midpoint of Di, remaining vertices of the rhombu the
t hen prove that Af 4x s
to BE Perpendicular
Sol. red 1-0
Sol. Let BC be taken as the
axes with the origin Dd
taken on y-axis. Le at) Leta be
BC ~ 2a. Now AB -
of B and C are (-a
AC > the n the coordinates
, 0) and (a, QO), res
pectively Let DA
the coordinates
of A are (0, = hh} hen
h).
B(3, 2)
Straight Lines 2.29
———o — —— — _
~~~ agonal is member of both the given families of line, it will or aA + Ny + abA(A +1) = BA — Ix + aA? — 1)
through the points (1, 0) and (—1, 1) which are points where
or (bx + ay + ab) — A(bx — ay — ab) =0
‘i family of lines are concurrent. which is the equation of a family of lines passing through the point
ve
uation of diagonal AC is x + 2y—1=0. of intersection of the lines bx + ay + ab = 0 and bx — ay - ab= 0,
cicatly point (3, 2) does not satisfy this diagonal. the point of intersection being (0, —b). Hence, the line EF passes
through a fixed point.
pet B= (3. 2)
perp endicular to AC,
g al BDn ofis dia
piagon gonal BD 1s 2, -y-4=0 EXAMPLE 2.7
go, equatio Let L, = 0 and L, = 0 be two fixed lines. A variable line is
. 2) . drawn through the origin to cut the two lines at R and S Pisa
Pont of intersection of diagonals AC and BD 1s of
s 5 point on the line AB such that (m + ny/OP
. D= & = *) = m/OR + n/OS. Show that the locus of P is a straight line
since O 18 midpoint of BD
passing through the point of intersection of the given lines (R,
6 _ JM
So, BD = VE =d,
S, P are on the same side of O).
Now. OD = Ve.
Sol. Let the variable > ‘
] line through O makes an
= 12V5
yrea of rhombus = am x dy (where d, 1s length of angle @ with the positive
diagonal AC) direction of the x-axis Any ¥~ 1% *% y=mx~c
d, = 10 units point on this variable line is @ —— 5
(0+rcos 8,0+/r sin 6), r, R Pia p)
This 1s the length of diagonal AC.
1.e., (r cos 6, r sin 8) ° ‘
1
Slope of AC= — > = tan @, where @1s inclination of AC with x-axis Let the fixed lines be
yrmxte, (1)
Since 0.4 = OC = 5, using parametnic form of straight line, we have
and = y= mx +c) (2)
‘9 2 Let OR = r,, OS = rz, OP = ry. So. according to the question.
s(-B}d4G]
A,C= —+5cos@, -3+5sin0 |
5 5 m*tn_m, n (3)
r3 ry 3
Since R and S le on lines (1) and (2), respectively. we have
* sin 8= m, (r, cos @) +c, (4)
3 .- 245). (24208, -2-¥5) and 4 sin @= m, (rm cos 8) + cy

Let P = (a, B). Then,
(3)
a=r,cos 0,8 =r,sin 8 (6)

EXAMPLE 2.6 From (3), (4), and (5), we have
Let ABC be a given isosceles triangle with AB = AC. Sides mtn sin@—m,cos@ = sin@-—mcos» 8
AB and AC are extended up to E and F, respectively, such that Hm Cc) ae Cs
BE « CF = AB’. Prove that the line EF always passes through or m+n=% (B- ma) + % (B- ma) {From (6)]
a fixed pont.
Hence, the locus ofP 1s
So Let ABC be the triangle having vertices (-a, 0), (0, 6), and
mtn= (¢; + roa es or + = lx
(a.0) Now.
or yr-ma-ot+h “t (v= max c3) = 0 (7)
BE ’ CF = AB’ ay
or aE = 48 = / (Let)
Clearly, the locus ofP ts a straight line passing through the point
Alo ”),
of intersection of the given lines (1) and (2)
BE _AC _
AB CF” (-a,0) /
Cao EXAMPLE 2.8 yg
Hence, the coordinates of E fe O mies Let points A, Band Clie onlinesy = 0, 2v—y» =O and y— 3x
and F are (-a(A + 1), -Ab) and BE = 0, respectively. Also, 48 passes through fixed point P(1, 0)
(a(1 + 1/A),~ b/d). The equation and BC passes through fixed point Q(0, -1).Then prove that AC
of line EF is
P
b also passes through a fixed point and find that point.
nap 2 (A 4 1)|
yrib= wae ee Sol Let the coordinates of poimts 4, B and C be (a, &), (B, 2B)
=a =) and (y, 3/), respectively.
- ys Cj
A 5
=?) [x + aA + 1)]
Points A, 8, P are collinear
l 0 1
= aan [1 +A}
a a | =0
© AD+ 1) ira tH)

4 gb=~ ata B 2p 1
eee y
between concentric Square
Thus, region R will be the region
Geo metry an
Coor
2.30 Coord
di inate
na te
2.30 ( 1)
= a-2f+ af=0 the lines x = +V2, ye + v2 and x = sq
)? = 24
+22
units , yrs av}
are collinear
formed by
requ ired area Is (4V2 )? — (2V2
Also, points B, C. Q Thus the
a -l il
p 2B \=0
y i |
= B-y+by=0
>
(2)
——
~ Be =
Putting value of Bm equation ( 1), we get @ + 2ary = 2y.
Let 4C pass through fixed point Rh. A) EXAMPLE 2.10
Since C. 4 and R are collinear,
a a | Let O (0, 0), A(2. 0) and al I, =| be the vertices of a triangle,
y dy V=0 inside AOAB
Let R be the region consisting of all those points P
jh kN which satisfy d(P, OA) S min[d(P. OB), dP, AB)], where d
to the corre spond ing line
= ina - 3y)-Ma—y) + 2ay=90 denotes the distance from the point
=> h(a 3y)-— Ma-y) + 2y-a=90 Sketch the region R and find its area
= ail - kh —1) + y-34 +k + 2)=0 for all ay Y4 1
h-k 1=Qand-3h+k+2=0
1 J | - *
Thus. .4C passes through the point (>. = | :
ba = me
ad
0 wii.0) 442.0)
‘EXAMPLE 2.9
Consider two lines L,and L, given by x - y= Oandx+v = 0, d(P, OA) < min [d(P. OB). dP. AB)]
respectively. and a moving point P(x, y) Let dP, £,), 1 = 1,22; > d(P, OA) < d(P, OB) and dP, O04) s HP. AB)
represents the distance of point P from the line L,. If point P moves When d(P, OA) = d(P, OB), P is equidistant from O4 and OB.
in a certain region R in such a way that 2 < d(P,L,) + dP, L2) <4, 1.e., P lies on angle bisector of lines O4 and OB
find the area of region R.
So, when d(P, OA) < d(P. OB), point P is nearer to O4 than te
OB, 1.€ , it hes below bisector of O14 and OB
Similarly, when d(P, OA) < d(P, AB), P 1s nearer to O4 than
_= ery
and dP. L3) PD a a +— +
AB, 1.¢., \t lies below bisector of OA and 4B
Now we have Common region satistied by these two inequalities 1s the reg1oo
vr-\
R, formed by two bisectors and OA, 1e , triangle O/4
22d P.L,)+adP, Li) <4
(1) Required area = Area of triangle O/A
or 2 Lx yt ety S4v2
Now. let us consider the four regions, namely, 2. Ry, &3, and Ry, Now, ZBOA = —
1/V3
=
l
in the Jines 1, and L, dividing the coordinate plane V3
InR,, wehavey~x,y-—x Inkt,, wehave y-x,y>—x. Similarly, -. ZBOA = 30°
in R;, we have 3 - x.y ~ —x Finally, in Ry, we have y <x, vy < -x. = ZIOA=13°
Thus, for 2,. ()) becomes = 1M= tan [S° - 2 - Jf
W2ox-ytxut y74/2 orV2-x- 2V2 |
Area of triangle Ol > OAXIM
Similarly, for &5, (1) becomes
22 Spm att po dan2-or 12 oy" 2N2
1 2x(2- V3) =? J sq. units
In R,, (1) will become 2
2N2 <y-x—-x-y<4v2 or- V2212 2Vv2
EXAMPLE 2,11 ; a
Finally, in Ry, (1) will become
meets the lines x + 3y + 2=0, 2x +7
A line through A(-5, -4) atthe
2V2 <x-y-x-y<4v2 4=0, anda - y- points B, C and D, respectively’
5 =O
of the line.
or -V2 <y<-2V2 If (1S/AB)’ + (10/ACY = (6/ADY’, find the equation
Straight Lines ree
or 4 cos’0 +9 sin’@ + 12 sin
Acos 0=0
or (2 cos 9+ 3si ay n-0
ve
or tan @= - 3
vor §-Q
Hence, the equation of the req
uired line is
"Qn 44-0 yl4- aan +S)
AA) Vt ti4 2-9
or wr y2 2x
Let Abe the inclination of lin 10
e through 4( 5. 4), or 2et3y+22 g
“this 1
equation of this line is_AtS 4g
Therefore. equati c =—— =) EXAMPLE 2,1 2
cos@ sing (1)
Any point on this line at distan
ce »: from Pomt 4(~S A rectangle PORS has jts
, -4) is given by side P Y parallel to the
(-3 +7 cos and vertices P, Q, and Son line y=
44+ r sin 8) the | INES = a, x = by
If 4B=r,.4C=r, and 4D respectively, Find the an d x= <p.
= ry. then locus of the vertex R.
Bir, cos @~ S$, r, sin @- 4) Sol. Let the coordinate of @
be (h, @) and that of 5
C(rs cos @~ §, 7,8 6 ~ Let PR and SQ intersect he (-A, By
4) each othe Tat 7
Dir; cos @-— 5, r; sin Tis the mid point of
@~ 4) SO
But B hes onx + 3p +2 Since diagonals of a,
=9 Therefore, a (hap
"CO O- 5+
S 37, sin @-12+2 rectangle bisect each
=9 other. Y
Lf
a: 1s er
_ xX Co-ordinates of Pis
or tos G3 sie —h £5. BYS
1 As P lies on y = a,ther
efore —- —
or +3 = cos 843 sin Q coordinates of P are
(—A. a).
As
C lies on 2x +; +4=0. (1) Given that PQ 1s parall
we have el to
¥= mx and slope of PQ
2(r; cos 9-5) +(r, =m
sin 6-4)+4=9
A-a
=
" “Boe10
oy aap Ae_
b+h
=m
or 49. =2 cos 6+ sin > O=at+m(b

@ +h)
Similarly. D hes Oonx-y-S5=9, (2) Also, RQ PQ = slope of RO-=
73008 O~S—r. sn
Therefore, =! m
+45 =¢ k-a@
—_ -]
° 3 Sos 6-sing 42 h~bh
=— sett)
— >)
m
aad
Or 5 = cos 6-—sin 6 From (1) and (2
). We get
Now. given that (3)
atmbt+hy=h
4 doy
(457 «(10 = (56) m
AB AC => am + ae (OF Rh) =
AD hype (A - 6)
F (C086 + 3 sin 8)? +. (2 Cos => (nr
8+ sin 6) = (cos O— gn I) mh 4 bon? + 1)
6) Therefore, locus - wr = ()
[Using (1), (2), and O F A) ts
(3)] e
(ar VA = ny + Atm + ye oda} = a
2.32 Coordinate Geometry an
Exercises
[
10. The equation of the straight line which passes tial th
Single Correct Answer Type III point (~4, 3) such that the portion of the line betwee, ‘
axes 1s divided internally by the point in the ratio 5 3 is
by lines 9x + 20y = 24
The equations of the diagonals of square formed + 96 = 0
(1) 9x — 20y (2)
.=0, y=0.1 = landy= [are (3) 20x + 9v + 53=0 (4) none of these
Q) venrvtves | Qy rear 2
A square of side a hes above the x-axis and has one y,
(3) 2=a,*41= 13 (4) v=2vta=l
at the origin The side passing through the origin Make,
The coordinates of two consecutive vertices A and B of a an angle «(0 <a ~ m4) with the positive direction of the
regular hexagon ABCDEF ave (1,0) and (2.0), respectively. x-axis. The equation of its diagonal not passing through the
The equation of the diagonal CE 1s origin 1s
(lI) Va.+1=4 (2) .+ V3"4+4=0 (1) (cos @ + sina) + x(sin&@ — Cosa)=a
Q) vtvai=4 (4) none of these (2) v(cosa + sina) + x(sina@ * cosa)=a
. If each of the points (1,, 4). (-2. y,) les on the line (3) p(cosa@ + sina) + x(cosa@ ~ sina)=a
jommng the points (2, -1) and (5, 3), then the point (4) )(cos @ - sina) — x(sin@ — cosa)=a
P(,.¥,) hes on the line
(1) 64 +1)-25=0 (2) 2x+6v+1=0
12. Let P= (-1, 0), Q= (0, 0), and R= (3, 3V3)be three point,
Then the equation of the bisector of ZPQR is
(3) 2.+31-6=0 (4) 6 +))+25=0
(1) ae (2) x- vV3y=0
The equation to the straight line passing through the
point (a cos® @, a sin’ @) and perpendicular to the line (3) V3axt+y= (4) x~(V3/2n =0
v sec @+ 1 cosec O= ais 13. The equation of a line through the point (1. 2) whose
(1) \ cos @-1 sin @=acos26 distance from the point (3, |) has the greatest value 1s
(2) ycos @+1 sin @=acos 20 (1) y= 24 (2) y=x-1
(3) vsin @+ 1 cos O=a cos 26 (3) a+2p=5 (4) 1 =3x-1
(4) none of these 14, One diagonal of a square 1s along the line 8x — 13; =0 and
. The line PQ whose equation 1s x — 1 = 2 cuts the x-axis at one of its vertex 1s (1, 2). Then the equations of the sices
P.and Qs (4,2) The line PQ 1s rotated about P through of the square passing through this vertex are
45° in the anticlockwise direction. The equation of the line (1) 7-8 +9=0, 8x + 7y- 22 =0
PQ in the new position is
(2) 9x ~ 8y + 7=0, 8x + % -26=0
(1) 1 =-V2> (2) y=2
(3) 23x - 7y —9 =0, 7x + 23y — 53 =0
(3) x=2 (4) x=-2
(4) none of these
A line moves in such a way that the sum of the Intercepts
made by it on the axes 1s always c (constant) The locus of 15. The angle between the diagonals of a quadrilateral formed
midpoint of its intercept between the axes 1s ‘ - . a} . ;
by the lines re a ee
(1) xr yp=2¢ (2) x+yp=c . ‘ a eb boa a
—~+4+2-H
he a 2; is
(3) x+y )=c (4) 2x+p=c
If the x-intercept of the line y = mx + 2 1s greater than 1/2, n t
then the gradient of the line lies in the interval
n
(1) (-],0) l (3) =3 (4) aan‘
2) | —.0
@ [2.0]
16. A line with positive rational slope, passes through the port
(3) (—», -4) (4)
( 4,0) A(6, 0) and 1s at a distance of 5 units from B(1, 3): The
The equation of a straight line on which the slope of line is
length of
perpendicular from the origin 1s four units i) 8
and the line Us =
makes an angle of 120° with the x-axis 8 8 (2)ay os
15
(1) xV¥3 +y+8=0 (2) xV¥3 p= 5
(3) xV3 -y=8 (4) x-V3p+8=0 ed w) 5
of
ABCD isa square. A = (1,2), B= (3, —4). 17. The line x + 3» — 2 = 0 bisects the angle between 4 aos
If line CD passes
through (3, 8), then the midpoint of CD Straight lines of which one has equation x ~ 7y +> ~
js
(1) (2, 6) equation of the other line is
(2) (6, 2)
(3) (2,5) (1) 3x+3y-1=0 (2) x-3y+2=0
(4) (28/5, 1/5)
(3) Sx + 5y-3=0 (4) none of these
‘
Straight Lines 2.33
18.aver A (1, 1) and AB ts any line through it cutting the 27. The condition on a and h, such that the portion of the ~
_axis at B If AC 1s perpendicular to AB and Meets the ax + by — 1 = 0 intercepted between the lines ax vy =
seals in C, then the equation of the locus
of midpoint P of and x + hy = 0 subtends a right angle at the origin. is
BC 1S
(l) a=h (2) at+h=0
(dy rere (2) aty=2 (3) a> 2h (4) 2a=b
3) atr= 2n (4)
2xn+2y=1
19. The number of possible Straight lines passing through
28. The area of the triangle formed by the lines v = ax,
(2, 3) and forming a triangle with the coordinate vty a> O.and the p-axts 15 equal to
axes,
whose area ts 12 sq units, ts
CD on a ) Pew
ss | = {2 —s ;
(1) one
(2) two
QB) three 1) a | a
(4) four
20. Two parallel lines lying in the same (3) 21 tal (4) 21l+a
quadrant make
intercepts a and b on \ and y-axes.
Tespectively, between 29.
them. The distance between the lines 15 The line ++" =} meets the v-axts at A the y-axis at B.
a b
ab and the line y = x at C such that the area of AAOT 15 turce
() Ja? +b? (2) the area of ABOC. Then the coordinates of C are
)
1
ed (4)
1 I a (2.4) a) | 373.
4 2
{>
( ja+ he 4+ a 3
ae be
. The line LZ; = 4y + 31 - 12 = 0 ontersects (4) none of these

a+ and y-axis at 4 and B. respecti the
vely A variable line
perpendicular to L, intersects the x- 30. The line x/3 + 3/4 = | meets the .- and
and the p-axis at <-axis at
Pand Q. respectively. Then the locu s of A and B, respectively. A square 4BCD 1s constructed
the circumcenter on the
of mangle 4BQ 1s line segment 4B away from the origin The
coordinates o
(1) 3x-4v+2=9 the vertex of the square farthest from the
(2) 4. -37+7=0 omgin are
(3) 6.-8y+7=0 (1) (7,3) (2) (4.7)
(4) none of these
22. A beam of light 1s sent along the (3) (6,4) (4) (3.8)
line x ~ » = }, which
after refracting from the x-axis enters 31. The area ofa parallelogram formed by
the opposite side the lines ax = -v =
by turning through 30° towards the = 01s
normal at the point of
incidence on the x-axis Then the equa
tion of the refracted
(1) ?ab) (2) 27 (ab)
Tay is (3) ¢7/2ab
none of these (4)
(1) (2-V3y-y =24.3 32. One diagonal of a square ts 3)
- 4) — 8 = O and one vertex
(2) (24N3 pop= 2455 1s (-1, 1), then the area of square
ty
(3) (2-V3)x+y=(2+ 3)
(1) ee
(4) y=(2-V3\(x-1) 50 sqOs unit 5
(<a) 7 es
35 SQ unit
23. The number of integral
values of m for which the
x-coordinate of the point of intersec
tion of the lines gy) ) 592. 54 unt (4) 35: SQ unt
3x + 4y = 9 and y = mx + 1 15 also an inte
ger Is 33. In an isosceles (rangle O48,
(1) 2 (2) 0 (3) 4 O 1s the origin and O4 = OS
(4) 1 = 6 The equation of the side ABrs
- Ifthe sum of the distances ofa point from ,- '7 0 The area
two perpendicular of triangle 1s
lines tn a plane 1s 1, then its locus 1s
(1) a square (2) acarcle (1) 2V21 @ <a
25.
(3) a Straight line (4) two intersecting lines
The equation of set of lines which are at a constant (3)
vie= =
distance i4) ~
of 2 units from the origin 1s
34, A straight line throu gh
(1) x+y+2=0 (2) x+y44=0 the ongin O Meets the
linen 4y 4 2) - Yand parallel
Wry oe oO At points P and Q,
G3) xcosa+ysina=2 (4) xcosaiyseng |
+ Fespectively Then the
point O divides the segmen
26. The the ratio t PO in
lines y = myx, y = Mx, and y myx make cqual (1) 1 2
intercepts on the line x + y = ]. Then (2) 3 4
(1) 2(1 +m) (1 + m3) (3).2 4
= (1 +m) (2 + m, + my) (H+ 3
(2) (1 +m) (1 + m3)= (1 + m,)(1 +m, + my) lhe coordinates of the toot
of the Perpendicular fro
Point (2, 3) on the m the
G3) (1+m,) hne “1+ 3yr4=O are given by
(+m) =(1 + m3) (2+ m, + m,) (1) (37/10, -1/10)
(4) 201 +m))(1 + m3)=(1+m,)(1 +m, + my) (2) (1/10. 37/10)
(3) (10/37, -10) (4) (2/3, -1/3)
2x = 1, and Q and X are ty,
2.34 Coordinate Geomet
ry
+ 2 — 10=0
46. Pisa point on the line y + such that triangle POR 1s a,
= 6
points on the line 3y + 6x
+10 =Oan 7t d
es I - ay of the triangie
36. The straight lin le with the line v= 2. The area of The length of the side
an isosceles triang equilateral triangle
form
ual to
this triangle 1s eq
iS
(2) 10/7 sq units (2) 3/N5
(1) 15/7 sq. units (1) 2/VI5
(4) none of these (4) none of these
(3) 18/7 sq units (3) 4/vS
v +) > §=0,
the sides of a triangle are ce of an equilateral triangle 1s 2x
- ,
. The equations of coo rdi nates of the 47. If the equation of bas of
and vy - 1 = 0 Then the |, 2), then the length of the sides
yort1=0. — | and the vertex 18 (
eircumeenter are the triangle is
(1) 2.1) (2) (1.2) (2) 2NI5
(47 (1-2) (1) ¥20/3
(3) (2. -2) (4) vI5/2
line y= 717 by lines 1 = 2 and (3) V8/15
If the intercept made on the
range of values of 17 1s 1s equidistant from the lines
= 61s less than §, then the 48. The locus of a point that
42 = 01s
OY (0. AD 43 HO) x typ 2v2 =Oandx+y—
(2) (43.43) (2) x+y- 372 =
(1) c+ y—-5V2 =0
(3) 434.449) (3) 2x + 2y - 32 =0 (4) 2x+2y-5V2=0
(4) none of these by the lines ax + hy+c=0,
such that the points 49. If the quadrilateral formed has
The range of @ in the interval (0, z) av t+ bv t+e¢= 0, ax + by* ce = 0. a'x + b'y > c' =O
same side of the line
(3. 4) and (sin @ cos 6) lic on the perpendicular diagonals, then Fine
1-1 -l=Q1ts (2) @C+d¢=c"+a
4 (1) RP+cebt tc”
ca OQ; d2e<—
(1) 0<0<— = a’ t+ bh? (4) none of these
4 2 (3) ate
moves so that its
spac" 50. A line segment of fixed length 2 units
(4) part of the line
(3) 0<@<z 4 4 ends are on the positive x-axis and on the
the lccus
) =10 y+ y= 0 which lies in the second quadrant Then
40. The distance of ongin from line + V3)v+-v3 of the midpoint of the line has the equa tion
measured along the line 1 = V3x+h 1s (2) rn 53° -4n -1=90
(ly) «+ sr t+4ey-1=0
ly = (2) SV2+h 3) 2 +5y-4ey-1=0 (4) 4r°- Sy 4dr - 1 =0
Ve
(3) 10 (4) 5 51. If the extremities of the base of an isosceles mangle are
41. Consider the points 4(0. 1) and B(2. 0), and P be a point the points (2a, 0) and (0, a), and the equation of one of the
on the line 4x + 3} + 9 = 0 The coordinates ofP such that sides 1s x = 2a. then the area of the triangle 1s
P4—PB is maximum are (1) Sa" sq. units (2) 5a™ 2 sq. units
(-12 8.175) (2) (—24/5, 17/5)
ff) (3) 25a°/2 sq. units (4) none of these
(3) (-65 17/5) (4) (0, -3) poems of
. 4=(-4,0), B= (4,0) Mand Vare the vanable
42. Consider the points A(3. 4) and B(7, 13) If P is a point the y-axis such that Afhes below \ and \f\ = 4 Lines 4!
on the line } = x such that PA + PB 1s minimum. then the and BN intersect at P. The locus of P ts
coordinates of P are
(1) 2vy - 16-7 =0 Q) 2un + loVw-=0
(ly 127 12/7) (2) (-24/5, 17/5)
(3) 2+ lot vr -0 4) Ar-lo-v=0
(3) (3107 34/7) (4) (0,0) » The number of triangles that the four lines + = *
aeformis ,
43. The area enclosed by 2.x + 3))) < 618 \ J yrs
ra eeeDy | ote 34 yy + andy + \=3
(1) 35q units (2) 4sq units (4) |

4 (3) 3
(3) 12 sq units (4) 24 sq units
. le line he
artabwe
Mwmb 2s
aa: moves m such a way that the
44. ABC is a variable tnangle such that A 1s (1, 2), and B and a
Cheonthelney ©: AfAisa variable) Then the locus heinonig mean of a and 6 ts 8, The least area of tangle
of the orthocenter of AAC 1s ade by the shine
made vw
line with the coordinate axes ts (a, o> 9)
(lp xt+y-O0 (Zya oy O (1) Ssq unit (2) lo sq. unit
(3) x 4y°=4 (4) cry 5
(3) 32 sq unit (4) 64 sq. unit
45. In AABC. the coordinates of the vertex 4 are (4,1), and Given AO, 0
55. > 0 Let the
linesx-p-}=Qand2x- ) Bare the uiternal hmsectons i
Slope of | Oe BO, v) with a e(0, L) andy that
‘ of the . in circle of trang le line x = | such
angles. B and C.. T hen, the radius
pe m,. Point C hes on
the slop vat a0 iste equal to my, where 0 < my <m). If me
les i BC
QQ) 4iN5 (2) 3/V5
then the ni ABC can be expressed as (1m — my) fie
(3) 6/V5 (4) 7IN5 (yt rgest possible value of f(x) is
(2) 1/2 (3) 1/4 (4) 1/8
~, tangle is formed by the lines x + y=
56. 0, x - v=0,
and Ix+my= 1 If/ and m vary 65. The point A(2, 1) is translated parallel to the an
subject to the condition
j2 +m’ = 1, then the locus of x—y=3 bya distance of 4 units. If the new position
2_ yaya its circumcenter 1s in the third quadrant, then the coordinates of A’ are
2 2
() @ =v MPP = GP 52)
Ee IQ) we - ayy a (1) (2+2V2,.1+2V2) (2) (-2 + V2,-1 — 2V2)
(3) (x +") 4x*y (4) (x = G2 4 52) (3) (2~2V2, 1 - 2v2)
Let P be (5, 3) anda point (4) none of these
57. R on y=xand Q on the
such that PQ + OR + RP x-axts be 66. One of the diagonals of a square is the portion of the
is minimum. Th en the coo
rdinates line x/2 + y/3 = 2 intercepted between the axes. Then
of Q are the
extremities of the other diagonal are
(1) (17/4,0) (2) (17,0)
(1) GE. 1)
(3) (17/2, 0) (2) (0, 0), (4, 6)
(4) none of these (3) (0,0). (-1. 1) (4) (5, 5), (4, 6)
A pair of perpendicular stray ght line
s drawn through the
origin form an isosceles triangle 67. The point P(2, 1) 1s shifted through a dista
with line 2x + 3y=6 The nce 32 units
area of triangle so formed 1s measured parallel to the line x + y= 1 1n
the direction of
36 decreasing ordinates, to reach at Q The
(1) ; image of Q with
—73 844 nit (2)
12
74
—=s respect to given line ts
un it
(1) (3,4) (2) (—3,2)
13
(3)3) sq
5 q unt 17 . (3) (0,-1) (4) none of these
(4) —sq
3 q unit
68. Let O be the origin If A(1, 0)
59, A point P(x, y) moves such tha t the and B(O, 1) and P(x, y) are
sum of its distances points such that xy > 0 and x +
from the Imes 2x — y — y< 1, then
3 =O and x +3y4+4=0 (1)
457 The P hes either inside the triangle
area bounded by locus of Ps
(in sq unit) OAB or im the third
quadrant
(1) 70 (2) 70/2 (2) P cannot he inside the tnangle
OAB
(3) 35/2 (4) 140 (3) P lies inside the triangle O.4B
60. If AD, BE and CF are the (4) P hes in the first quadrant only
altitudes of AABC whose
A is (-4, 5). The coordi vertex 69, Ina triangle ABC, the bisector
nates of points £ and s of angles Band Che along
and (—1, —4), respeotively F are (4, | )
Equation of BC 1s the Ines v= y and »=0, If
415 (1, 2), then the equation of
(1) 3x-+428y=9 line BC 1s
(2) 4v+3)+28=9
(3) 3x-4y- 28 =9 (1) 2x+y=]
(4) 1.+2r+7=0 (2) 3x-y=5
61. The vertex 4 of AABC (3) ¥“29sa
15 (3.—-1) The equations of (4) x+3, =]
BE and angle bisector CF median 70. Line ax + by + Pp = 0
are x — 4) +10 = 0 and 6x makes angle 7/4 with x cos «
-59=0, respectively Equati + 10y +y SIN @ = p, p © R’. If these
on of 4C ts line s and the line x sin g
(1) 5x+ 18y = 37 ~ ¥ COS & = 0 are concur
(2) 15x + 8) = 37 rent, then
(3) 15x - 8p = 37 (1) a@&+R =]
(4) 15x +8y+37=9 (2) a+e2=2
62. Suppose 4 and B (3) 2a? + b) =]
are two points on 2x — (4) none of these
P(1, v¥+3=0 and 71. The equation of the line
2) 1s such that P4 = PB The segment 4B is vey
n the midpoint of 4B 1s B lie on the same side
of the li
(]) (2.8) image of AB has the equ
ation
Di" 35 (l) vty=2
0 (3.3) (3)
Qj Sepa
7x-y=6
(4) none of these
72. The equation of the bis
(4) 5° § ector of the a cute ang
63, Tnangle formed lines 2x-~y+4=9 and le between the
by variable lines (a + b)x + (q— \ — 2) = lis
nd (a~ b)x + (a + byy- 2a b)y—2ab=0 (1) \+yp4+5=9
b=Oandx+y=O1s (where (2) \-v+1=0
b ER) a, (3):a~grs §
(4) none of these
(1) equilateral 73. The straight lines
(2) mght angled day + 3 byt ¢ = 0:
= 0, are concurrent Where a + b + c
(3) scalene (4) none of these at the point
64, A light ray coming along the (1) (4, 3)
line 3x + 4y = 5 gets reflected (2) (I/4, 13)
from the line ax + by= (3) (172, 1/3)
1 and goes along the line 5x — 12y= (4) none of these
Then 10, 74, If the lines ay
4 VP 10,
\typtes Ola, by ve toppes 1 = 0,
being and
64 112 distinct and different
l => —_—- = _ 14 8 concurrent, then from L) are
Ye 115° 15 ay
=—,b=--——
(B)is@ie 64
pee Frere 8
@
64
15
14
115
(=a)*(+45)+(74)-
a= 05 15)
@=—,b=-2
AE TB OF TS (1) 0
(2) 1
(3) a+ b+ ¢) (4) none of these
_,,
a
2.36 Coordinate Geometry -
75. If lines x + 2y—1=0,ax+v+3=0, aiid Be -y+2=Oare

concurrent, and S 1s the curve denoting the locus of (a, 4),
then the least distance of S from the origin 1s
. If P is a pomnt (x, ) on the line y = ~3x such that Pa
(1) 557 (2) S/INS5T the point (3, 4) are on the opposite sides of the h
(3) 5/V58 (4) 5/59 3v—4y=8, then ne
76. The straight lines x + 2y — 9 = 0, 3x + Sv — 5 = 0, and (1) «> 8/15 (2) x > 8/5
ax + by — | = 0 are concurrent, if the straight line (3) » <-8/5 (4) y<-8/15
35x — 221 + 1 = 0 passes through the point 2. If (x,y) ts a variable point on the line
y = 2x lying betwe,
(1) (a, 6) (2) (b, a) the lines 2(x + 1) + y= 0 and x + 3(y— 1) = 0, then
(3) (-a. -}) (4) none of these (1) x € (-1/2, 6/7) (2) x €(-1/2, 3/7)
(3) y € (-1, 3/7) (4) y € (-1, 6/7)
77. If the straight lines 2x + 3y — 1 = 0,x + 2y— 1 = 0, and
ax + by— 1 =0 forma tnangle with the origin as orthocenter, Let P(sin 6, cos 8), (0 < @< 22), be a point ina triangle
»
then (a, 4) 1s given by with vertices (0, 0), (V3/2, 0), and (0, V3/2) Then,
(1) (6, 4) (2) (-3, 3) (1) 0< @< n/12 (2) 52/2
< @< n/2
(3) (-8, 8) (4) (0, 7) (3) 0<0< 57/2 (4) 5W/2<O<2
4. The lines
x + 2y + 3 =0,x+
2y -7=0, and 2x-y-4
78. If —. ~2= VBye + Ve/b, where a, b. ¢ > 0, then the = 0 are the sides of a square. The equation of the remaining
Vbe side of the square can be
family of lines Vax + Vbv + Vé = 0 passes though the fixed
point given by (1) 2x-y+6=0 (2) 2x-y+8=0
(3) 2x-y-10=0 (4) 2x-1-14=0
Ch Gy) (2) (1. -2)
5. Angle made with the x-axis by a straight line drawnn through
(3) (-1,2) (4) (-1, 1) (1, 2) so that it intersects x +3 = 4 ata distance V6/3 from
79. If it 1s possible to draw a line which belongs to all the given (1. 2) is
family of lines y — 2x + 1 +A,(21- x- 1) =0, 3y-x—-6 (1) 105° (2).75° (3) 60° (4) 15°
+A,(v -— 3x + 6) =0, ax +3 —2+A,; (6x + ay — a) = 0, then 6. Given three straight lines 2x + lla — 5 = 0, 24x ~ 7y ~20
(1) a=4 (2) a=3 = 0, and 4x ~ 3y —2 =0 Then.
(1) they form a triangle
(3) a=-2 (4) a=2
(2) they are concurrent
80. If two members of family (2 + A)x + (1 + 2A)y -
(3) one line bisects the angle between the other wo
3(1 + A) =0 and line x + » = 0 make an equilateral triangle,
then the incentre of tnangle so formed 1s (4) two of them are parallel
7 | 7. A triangle 1s formed by the lines whose equations2%
1 1
Sp 2 -,-= y+ l4=e
AB. x+y-5=0,BC:a+ 7y—7=Oand CA 7x7
Q) ara a (5 6
Then
5 5° 3 4 (1) angle at 4 is acute
@ (-3 2
4 --,--
@) faa
ee Lee
(2) angle at C 1s acute
si ] (3) internal angle bisector at angle B is 31 + 6v — =O

81. The set of lines xtan' a+ ysin +2=0, where
(4) external angle bisector at angle C 1s 8&1 + Sv + 7 = 0
is) CEE
: Vvl+a’
a € (0, 1), is concurrent at 8. If the points (a°a — 1), (a? - 3a - L)), (bb - I
~ 3)(b - 1), and (c'Me - 1), (2 — 3)e — 1). whet
; =0.
M) =—l RF a, 6, c are different from 1, lie on the line /v + mv +?
then
(3) (x,2) (4) ne
noof these
(1) atbto==F
82. If sin(a + B) sin(a@ — B) = sin ¥(2 sin B+ sin Y, where
0< a, B, y < 7, then the straight line whose equation is (2) abt be + ca=4
x sin at y sin B- sin y= 0 passes through the point +
(3) abe = (orn

(1) (1,1) (2) (-J, 1)
(4) none of these (4) abe — (be + ca + ab) + 3(a+b +e) =9
(3) (.-l)
a7 a ssing through the pur
» sides of 2 rhombus OABC (lying entirely in
the first 18. The equation of a straight linee ofpa tan
1172) with the line
9, TW d
uadrant) of area equal to 2 sq. units are y = ¥/V3, (2, 3) and inclined at an angl
or a pe iien the possible coordinates of B is/ar
.
e (O being yt2x=5 15
vy=3 (2) x=2
(1)
7 Bs
the origin)
(4) 4x+3y-17=0
1) ( r+V3.1+V38) (2) 1 -V3,-1
- V3) (3) 3v+4y-18=0
culars from
e (3 +V3,3+ V3) (4) (v3 - 1, V3 - 1) 19. The equation of the lines on which the perpendi
h form
0 If (x/a) + (y/b) = 1 and (x/c) * O7a) = | intersect the axes the origin make 30° angle with the x-axis and whic
; at four concyche points and a* + c* = A” + d°, then these a triangle of area §0/V3 with the axes are
Ines can intersect at, (a,b, c,d > 0), (1) V3.1 #y—10-0 (2) V3x+y+10=0
(ay (iD (2) (1,-1) (3) 1 + V3y- 10-0 (4) x V3 -10=0
(3) (2, -2) (4) (3, 3) 20. A line 1s drawn perpendicular to line y > Sx, meeting the
11. The straight line 3v + 41 - 12 = 0 meets the coordinate axes coordinate axes at A and B If the area of triangle OAB 1s
at Aand B An equilateral triangle ABC 1s constructed The 10 sq. unit where O 15 the origin, then the sum of intercepts
possible coordinates of vertex C are of the line 1s
(1) 12 (2) -12 (3) 10 (4) -10
o 20-47}3(1-§)) 21. Ifx — 2y + 4 = 0 and 2x + y — 5 = 0 are the sides of an
(2 ) (201 + V3), 3.(1 -V3)) isosceles triangle having area 10 sq unsts, then possible
equation of the third side 1s
3)3 (20 +V3),3.0 +Y3))
o fli °P LAG)
(1) x+ 3v=-l (2) x+3y=19
(3) 3x~y=-9 (4) 3x-y=11
22. Find the value(s) of @ for which the given lines are
12, The equation of the lines passing through the point concurrent
(1, 0) and at a distance V3/2 from the origin ts axt+y-1=0,
(1) V3x+y- v3 =0 (2) r+V3y- V3 =0 ax + 3y-3=0,
(3) V3x-y-
3 =0 (4) v~V3v~-
v3 =0 3x + 2y-2=0
13. The sides of a triangle are the straight lines x + y= (1) -3 (2) -1 (3) | (4) 4
1,
7y-= x, and V3 + x = 0, Then which of the following 1s an 23. Three lines pr + gy + r= 0, gx + n> p=0.and rx pi -q
interior point of the tnangle? = 0 are concurrent if
(1) Circumcenter (2) Centroid
(3) Incenter
(1) ptg+r=0
(2) pi +g +r =prsrp-py
(4) Orthocenter 3) pt@trs 3pqr (4) none of these
14, If the straight line ax + cy = 2b, where a, b,
c > 0, makes a 24. @, and @, are the inclination of lines L, and L,.
tnangle of area 2 sq. units with the coordinate axes, respectively.
then with X-axis. If L, and L, pass through
(1) a,b, care in GP P(x;. 31). then
(2) a,-b, care in GP equations of angle bisectors of lines are
(3) a, 2b, care in GP (4) a, -2b, care in GP
15. Consider the Equation y — y, = m(x - x,)
If mand x, are
(1) 2A, PT
fixed and different lines are drawn for differ cos{ 4 rad sin{ 8% |
ent values of
y;, then
(1) the lines will pass through a fixed point
(2) za
(2) there will be a set of parallel lines
(3) all the lines intersect the line x = x;
“a5 ) of @=8) see
(4) all the lines will be parallel to the line v=x,

16, Equation(s) of the straight line(s), incl (3) Ae
ined at 30° to the X-axis
Such that the length of its (each of snl x0, cos 148)
their) line Segment(s) 2 2
between the coordinate axes is 10 units, is
(are)
(1) x+ VBy+5V3 =0 (2) x- V3y + 5V3 =0 (4) ———
A> x)
_L_. IN
(3) x+ V3y—
5V3 =0 (4) x-V3By-5V3=9 -sil 9, + 8, cos +0;
17. The line x + sy — | = 0, (m= I)x + (m? 2 a)
- Ty - 5 = 0). and
(m~2)x + (2m ~ 5)y = 0 are 25. Consider the lines £5
3y-dyt+2= Oand L,= 3y-4
(1) concurrent for three values of Now, choose the correct statem .-5=0,
m ent(s),
(2) concurrent for one value of m (1) The line \ + vt3
= 0 bisects the acute ang
(3) concurrent for no value of L, and L, containing the le between
m origin
(4) parallel for m= 3 (2) The linex—-y+ |=
0 bisects the obtuse ang
L, and L, not containing the le between
origin,
|
— a ea a
-
- =
x — 2y + | 7
ae
2.38 Coordinate Geom

etry 3. If L is concurrent with the lines
angle between 0 ay
3= 0 bise cts the obtuse +A =0, then the value of A is
3x —4y
7 (3) The Incvt rit
the origin. (2) 1
L, and L, containing (1) 2
gle between
Th e lin e v= 4 1 =O bisects the acute an (3) -4 (4) 5
(4)
ing the origin.
L, and Ly not contam For Problems 4-6
lines vt — | The equation of an altitude of an equilateral triang|
sid es of a rh om bus are parallel to the hi.
26. The onals of the
=Qand 7-1-4570
Its given that the diag V3 + — 2V3, and one of the vertices 1s (3,V3)
and one vel tex, 4 of
the rhombus s 1s
rhombus intersect at
( 1, 3)
of vertex 4 are 4. The possible number of triangle
v= > Then the coordin ates (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
lies on the line (1) |
(2) (7/18, 14/15)
(ly (WS. 1e 8) 5. Which of the following is not one of the possible Vertice ;
@ 4.125)
(4) (4/18, 8/15) of the triangle?
G)
v = 0 pass through the origin (1) (0, 0) (2) (0, 2V3)
27. Two straight lines «= 0 and
tan '(7/9) If the ratio of the (4) None of these
and the angle between them is (3) (3, -N3)
n their equations are
slope of 1 = 0 and v= 01s 9/2. the 6. Which of the following Is one of the orthocenters of the
;
(1) , 23. =Oand 31 +20 =0 triangle?
(2) (0, v3)
(2) > +3. =Oand Jv +1 =0 (1) (1, V3)
(3) (0, 2) (4) none of these
(3) 2) = 3. and 31 =.
nd
1. =3vahh = 2h For Problems 7-9
(4)
A variable line L 1s drawn through O(0, 9) to meet the lines/.
t bva = 0,
Let ue av + by + avh = 0. v 2 bv - ay andL, given by y—x— — x - 20 = Oat pomts 4 a
10 = O any d
of the
ay h € R. be two straight lines. The equations B, respectively.
kv = 0 and
bisectors of the angle formed by 4A iu — = 1 OA - 1 OB
h.u~ kav = 0. for nonzero and real k, and k, are 7. A point P 1s taken on L such that 2/OP
+ kyv=0 Then the locus ofP ts
(1) u=0 (2) ku
(1) 3x+3y=40 (2) 3x-31 -40=0
- ky =0 (4) v=0
(3) kyu
(3) 3x-3v=40 (4) 31 -3x =40
nate axes
_ Two sides of a tangle are parallel to the coordi
of the x OB.1s
If the slopes of the medians through the acute angles 8. Locus of P, if OP? = OA
tangle are 2 and m. then m= (1) (vy-xY = 100 (2) W -x) =50
(1) 12 (2).2 (3) 4 (4) 8 (3) (yx)- = 200 (4) none of these
positive di-
‘4 line which makes an acute angle @ with the
9. Locus of P, if (1/OP") = (1 OB7)~(1 O4).18
the point P(3, 4) to
rection of the x-axis 18 drawn through
(1) (v-x) = 80 (2) G - rv = 100
meet the line x = 6 at R and y = 8 at S Then, (4) none of these
(3) (v-x) = 64
(]) PR=3 sec @
For Problems 10-12
(2) PS =4cosec 6 a i
es
The line 6x + 8v = 48 intersects the coordinate ax
(3) PR ~ PS= 2(3sin@ + 4cos9) B, respectively. A line L bisects the area and the perimetef =
sin 20 triangle OAB, where O 1s the ongin
(4)
9
2 ena 16
oes | 10. The number of such lines possible ts
(PR) (PSY (1) | (2) 32
inked ompmienson ive

(3) 3 (4) more than 3
11. The slope of line Z can be
(1) (104 SV6y/10 (2) (LO Svo) tO
For Problems 1-3 (4) none of these
(3) (8 § 3V6)/L0
Let L be the inc belonging to the family of straight lines (a4 2b)
x+(a-dhy +a hb 0,a,b © BR, which is the farthest from 12. Lane
the point (2. 2). (1) does not intersect 48
1. The equation of Jine Ls (2) does not intersect OB

(2) 281414 O (3) does not intersect Of
(1) x+4v+7=0
(3) 4x vy 6=0 (4) none of these (4) can intersect all the sides
Kor Problems 13-15 “
2. Area enclosed by the line / and the coordinate axes 1s of a triangle AB
A(A, 3) and C(-2/5, —2/5) are the vertices
the equation of the internal angle bisector of ZABC 1s**"
(1) 4/3 sq. units (2) 9/2 sy units
(3) 49/8 sq. units (4) none of these
a
_——_—_—_— .
‘ uation of side BC ts Q) in which area of quadrilate

values an'whi
23. The possible range of galues ilateral
13. are, Ie+3y4 4=0
which straight line cuts off from the given triangle lie in
gy Ix 3v44=0o f vertex
0 tee
(53)
-3y-4=0
(2) (4,3)
(1) bd b (4) Ty
| i ;
B are
The coordinatcs
- (1) @i10, 17/10) (2) (17/10, 3/10) (3) (4,5) (4) (3,4)
(4) (1.1)
Q) (-5/2. 9/2) 24. The length of portion of straight line inside the triangle
AB ts may lic in the range
18. The equation of side
- (1) 3x47) = 24
[3 4)
(2) 31 +7 +24=0
(1) (2,4) (2)
(3) 13a + 7+ 8=0 (4) 131-71 +8=0
ror Problems 16-18 .
ABCD be a parallelogram whose equations for the diagonals
(3) (V2.2) (4) (V2, v3)
ri and BD are v + 2\= 3 and 2y + y= 3. respectively. For Problems 25-27
16. If length of diagonal AC 1s 4 units and the area of Consider point A(6, 30), point B(24, 6) and line AB. 4x+3y=] 14.
parallelogram 4BCD 1s 8 sq untts, then the length of other Point P(0, A) is a point on y-axis such that 0 ~ 2 ~ 38 and point
diagonal BD 1s Q(0, A) is a point on y-axis such that A ~ 38,
( 1) l 0/3
(2) 2 25. For all positions of point P, angle APB 1s maximum when
(3) 20/3 (4) none of these point P is
17. The length of side 4B is equal to (1) (0, 12) (2) (0, 15)
(1) 2V58/3 (2) 4v58/9 (3) (0, 18) (4) (0,21)
(3) 3V58/9 (4) 4V58/9 26. The maximum value of angle APB 1s
18. The length of BC 1s equal to
(1) 2V10/3
OF MF ow a 2
(2) 4V10/3
(3) 8V10/3 (4) none of these 27. For all positions of point Q, angle AQB is maximum when
For Problems 19-21 point
O ts
Consider a tnangle POR with coordinate (1) (0,54)
s of its vertices as (2) (0,58) (3) (0, 60) (4) (0.1)
P(-8. 5). O(-15, -19), and R(1. -7) The
bisector of the interior
angle of P has the equation which can be writt
~A-c=0.
en in the form ax
FMA
19. The distance between the orthocente 1. Consider the lines represented by
r and the circumcenter equation (x* ~ a meted6
of triangle POR 1s *(x—y)=0 forming atnangle Then matc
h the following lists
(1) 25/2 (2) 29/2 List I
List ll
(3) 37/2 (4) 51/2 a. Orthocenter of triangle
20. The radius of the in circle of triangle eee p. (1 6, 1 2)
POR 1s b. Circumcenter
e f
(1) 4 (2) 5 Ps SEY ———_—_______| q- (1(2 + 282)1.)

,
(3) 6 (4) 8 ¢. Centroid
ea r. (0, 1/2)
ee pe
21. The sum a+ c15 | d.@ Incente
Incenter
S. (1/2, 1 2)
(1) 129 (2) 78 Consider the triangle for
(3) 89 med by the lines
(4) none of these Vt3x+2=0, 3-2, ~S
=O.4vt+i- l4=0
For Problems 22-24 Match the following lists
:
base of an isosceles triangle measures 4 units —————-—
andits base List I
angle 1s equal to 45°. A straight line cuts List 11
the extension of the
at a point M at the angle @ and bisects the a. Values of q (0,
lateral side of the cr) hes ine
Tangl
e which 1s nearest to M side the triangle
Pe 7 3) (13/4, a)
einen SE
22. The area of quadrilateral which the -————~--
straight line cuts off b. Values of
from the given triangle ts Wee, O) hes ine
q. 43 <a< 1/2
side the triangle
(1 3+ tan @ 345 tan @ ne | -—_—_—___
} 1+ tan @ &. Values of eat (cc,
( 1+ tan @ 2) hes m- r. No value of a
side the triangle
3+ tan @ |
3) ——— = 4y)
3+ 2 tan @ -—_——_—__—
ee
22 e a. Value of if (1, @) hes out-
8) 1 - tan @ 4) 1+ tan @ s. 5/3 <@<7/2
side the triangle
a
—_— Ss ~~,
7. Consider the lines given by
3. Match the following lists: L ser 3y-5 =0
List I List II Ly: 3x-ky- 1=0
a. A straight line with negative slope passing
| p. 5v2 bet 2y"'12=0
through (1, 4) meets the coordin ate axes at A Match the following lists.
and B The minimum length of OA + OB, O
being the origin, is
a. L,, Lz, L; are concurrent if p.k=~9
b. If the point P 1s symmetric to the point) q. 3V2
Q(4, -1) with respect to the bisector of the first b. One of L,, £2, £3 15 parallel to at least one | q. k= 6/5
quadrant, then the length of PQ 1s of the other two if
c. On the portion of the straight line x + y= 2) 1 9/2 rk=5/6
c. L;, Ly, Ly form a tnangle if
between the axis a square 1s constructed away
from the origin, with this portion as one of its d. L,, L,, L; do not form a tnangle if s.k=5
sides. If d denotes the perpendicular distance : arama
of a side of this square from the origin then the Consider a AABC in which sides AB and AC are perpendy.
maximum value of dis ular tox—y-4=Oand 2x - y — 5 = 0, respectively. Verte,
d. If the parametric equation of a line 1s given by | s. 9 A 1s (-2, 3) and the circumcenter of AABC is (3/2, 5:2)
x =4+A/N2 and y = -1 + V2A, whereA ts a The equation of line in List I 1s of the form ax + by + c=9
parameter, then the intercept made by the line where a, b,c € /. Match it with the corresponding value of
on the x-axis 1s
c in List I] and then choose the correct code.
4. Match the following lists: List I | List IT
List I List II a. Equation of the perpendicular bisector of | p. -1
a. If lines 3x +y-4=0,x-2) -6=0,andAx+ p. -4 side AB |
4y +° = 0 are concurrent, then the value of A 1s _ b. Equation of the perpendicular bisector of | q. |
b. If the points (A + 1, 1), (2A + 1,3), and (2A + 2. side AC
24) are collinear, then the value of 4 1s | ¢. Equation of side AC r.—16
c. If the line x + y— 1 —| 4/2 | = 0, passing through r4
d. Equation of the median through 4 | s. 4
the intersection of r—) + 1 =O and 3x+1-$
= 0. 1s perpendicular to one of them. then the Codes:
value of A is a b oc d
(1) ros pq
d. If the ne y — x - 1 +A = 01s equidistant from s. 2
(2) s r q p
the points (1, —2) and (3, 4), then A ts
(3) q p os r
5. Match the following lists: ne |
ll
List I List I
a. Four lines x + 3y - 10 = 0,x + 3y— | p. a quadniateral
20 =0, 3x-y+5=0,and3x-y-5 which 1s neither
= 0 form a figure which 1s a parallelogram - Astraight line Z with negative slope passes through the point
nor a trapezium (8, 2) and cuts the positive coordinate axes at points P
and
b. The pomts A(1, 2), B(2, -3), | q.a parallelogram Q. The absolute minimum value of OP + OQ as L varies
C(-1, -5), and D(- 2, 4) in order where O 1s the origin, 1s
are the vertices of
. The number of values of k for which the lines (A + Dx + 8
c. The lines 7x + 3y- 33=0,3x-7y+/ ra rectangle of
19 = 0, 3x — 7y— 10, and 7x + 3y -4 = 4k and kx + (k + 3)v = 3k- L are coincident
area 10 i 1s
= 0 form a figure which is “uns - The sides of a triangle ABC lie on the lines 3x + 4 =
d. Four lines 4y — 3x -7=0, 3y-4x+ | s. a square 4x + 3y= 0, and x = 3. Let (A, k) be the center of
7 = 0, 4y — 3x - 21 =0,3y-4x4+14 the cule
inscribed in AABC. The value of (h + k) equals.
= 0 form afigure which 1s
- The absolute value of the sum of the abscissas of all the
6. Match the following lists:
points on the line x + y = 4 that lie at a unit distance from
List I List I] the line 4x + 3y ~ 10 = O15
a. The lines y = 0; y= 1, x - 6p + 4 = 0, and - Two sides of a rectangle are 3y + dv
| p. a cyclic
x + 6y~ 9 = 0 constitute a figure which
is
+5=0, 4-39 t+ 8
quadnilateral = 0 and one of its vertices is (0, 0). The area
b. The points A(a, 0), B(0, b), Cle, 0), of rectangle is
and D(0, d) q. a rhombus
are such that ac = bd and a, b, c, dare all posi-
tive. The points 4, B, Cand D always constitute - The line x = C cuts the triangle with vertic
es (0, 0), (1, 1).
and (9, 1) into two regions. For the
c. The figure formed by the four lines ax r. a Square areas of the two regiom™
tbytc=0,a#b,15 to be the same, C must be equa
l to
d. The hne pairs
x* — &x + 12 =O and)* - l4y+
- For all real values of a and b, lines (2a + 6) x + (a + 38))
S. a trape-
45 = 0 constitue a figure which 1s
Lees || *1s (6 ~ 3a) = 0 and mx + 2y + 6 = 0 are concurrent. Then”
equal to
Uy yi _———E=:::"“— — —
Straight Lines 2.41
The hne 3x + 2» = 24 meets the y-axis at A and the x-axis at ll. ‘The line y = 3x/4 meets the lines x — y+ 1 = 0 and 2x- y—5
‘ B The perpendicular bisector of AB meets the line through
= 0 at points A and B, respectively. If P on the line y = 3x/4
(0. -1) parallel to the x-axis at C. The area of triangle ABC
Satisfies the condition PA PB = 25, then the number of
1S , possible coordinates of P 1s
9, Consider a AABC whose sides AB, BC, and CA are repre- 12. In a plane there are two families of lines y = x + r, y
sented by the straight lines 2x + y = 0, x + pv = q,and x — y =-xtr,wherere {0,1,2,3,4}. The number of the squares
= 3, respectively. The point P(2, 3) 1s the orthocenter The of the diagonal of length 2 formed by these lines ts
valveol (pe @yi8__ 13. If Sa + 5b + 20¢ = 1, then the value of ¢ for which the line
Triangle ABC with AB = 13, BC = 5, and AC = 12
10. slides on axt+hyt+e
the coordinates axes with 4 and B on the positive v-axis and | = 0 always passes through a fixed point
positive y-axis respectively The locus of vertex C is 1s
a line
12x — 4 = 0 Then the value of k is
Archives
JEE MAIN
(1) y=xt+ v3 (2) V3y=x-V3
1, The line Z given by a +
,
= 1 passes through the point

(3) y= V3x-v3 is Gumvesl
(JEE Main 2013)
(13, 32) The line K is parallel to L and has the equation 6. Let a, b, c and d be non-zero numbers, If the pot of
xo intersection of the lines 4ax + 2ay + c = 0 and Shx + 2hy
co _ leneiihiiimemnes peuten nantes + d= 0 lies tn the fourth quadrant and 1s equidistant from
(1) iii (2) a the two axes, then
een 7 (1) 2bc -3ad=0 (2) 2bce ~ 3ad=0
(3) VI7 (4) Vig (AIEEE 2010) (3) 3bc — 2ad=0 (4) 3hc ~ 2ad=0
2. The lines L, * y-x=0O and L, . 2x += 0 intersect the line
(JEE Main 2014)
L;:y+2 at =O
P and Q, respectively. The bisector of the 7. Let PS be the median
acute angle between L, and L, intersects L,atR of the triangle with vertces
P(2, 2), Q(6, - 1) and R(7, 3). The equation of
Statement 1: The ratio PR - RO equals 2/2 . JS. the line
passing through (1, — 1) and parallel to PS 1s
Statement 2: In any triangle. bisector of an angle divides (1) 4x-7y—-1=0 (2) 2x-% -7=0
the triangle into two simular triangles. (3) 4x+7y+3=0 (4) 2x-9y-11=0
(1) Statement 1 is true, statement 2 1s false
(JEE Main 2014)
(2) Statement 1 is true, statement 2 1s true; statement 2 15
8. Locus of the image of the point (2. 3) in the line
the correct explanation of statement 1.
(2x - 3 +4) +k(x- 2v+3)=O,ke Rosa
(3) Statement | 1s true, statement 2 1s true, statement 2 1s (1) straight line parallel to x-axis
not the correct explanation of statement | (2) straight line parallel to -axis
(4) Statement 1 1s false, statement 2 1s true (3) circle of radius V2
(AIEEE 2011) (4) circle of radius 3
3. A line is drawn through the point (1, 2) to meet the (JEE Main 2015)
9. Two sides of a rhombus are along the lines. ¥—1 + 1 =0
coordinate axes at P and Q such that it forms a triangle and 7. -y—5=0. If its diagonals intersect at (—1, -2),
OPQ, where O is the origin If the area of the triangle OPQ then which one of the following ts a verte. of this rhombus”
is least, then the slope of the line PQ 18°
1) (3,- 3 L
Le
ay —1 (2) -4 3-8) @) E 3
4 I 10 7
(3) -2 (4) ~> (AIEEE 2012) (3) [-2.-2} (4) (-3,-9)
(JEE Main 2016)
4. The x-coordinate of the in centre of the triangle that has the
JEE ADvaNcED
coordinates of midpoints of its sides as (0, 1) (1, 1) and ( l,
0) 1s: Single Correct Answer Type
(1) 2+ v2 (2) Bald l. The locus of the orthocenter of the triangl
e formed by
(4) 1- v2. (SEE Main 2013) the lines (1 | Pr — py + pl + p) =0, (1 +
(3)
1+ V2 (1 + qg)=Oand » = 0, where p # q, Is
gx — qv +
5: A ray of light along x + V3 ye V3 gets reflected upon (1) ahyperbola (2) a parabola
reaching x-axis, the equation of the reflected ray 1° (3) an ellipse (4) a straight line
(IIT-JEE 2009)
r
Coordinate Geometry -_ (1) atb-c>0

(2) ar
2.42
18 inclined at an a+ b-c<0
2. Astraight liLne throu gh the point GB. —2) (3) a-b+c>9
(4)
If also intersects
the (JEE Advanced 2013
angle 60° to the line v3x ty =| )
y-axis, then the equation of L 1s Numerical Value Ty
pe
(1) yt Vax +2-33=0 1. For a point P in
the plane, let a\(P)
and d;(P) be "
x - y = 0 and, Q
Q2) v- V3x +2433
=0 point P from the lines
nces of the a,
dista
ely . The are a of the region R te
V3v #43 40N3 = 0 of respectiv
y =all0, points P lying in the first quadrant of the plane ay,
(3)
(IIT-JEE 2011)
(4) V3y +1-3+2V3 =0 satisfying 2 $ @\(P) + d,(P)
< 4, 1s ; d
(1, 1) and the
3. Fora >b>c > 0, the distance between (JEE Advan
+ by + c¢ = 0 and
point of intersection of the lines ax ced 2014)
by + ay + c = 015 less than 2 V2. Then
Answers Key ee
EXERCISES 5. (4)
oy Sel) a AZ)
a "
» 4) 8. (3) 9 (1) 10. (1)
32 44) §8) Mm”(2)
LQ 206)
10() 1. @) 126 ) Be 2 Mey 20.
63) 74 8&8) 94) 15, (2) 16. (3) 17, () 18. (1) 19. (1)
11., @) 12. (3) 13. (1) 14. (3)
(3)
21. (2) (2),—s
22. (2) «238, (4) 24. GB) 28. 3)
16. (2) 17. 3) «18 (1)—s19.24. 3)(1) 20. (2) 26. 27.
23. (1) 25. (3)
24.3) 22. (4)
22. (2) 28. (4) 29. (3) 30. (2) Matrix Match Type
26 () l. a>s,b7rc>p,d7q
") 32. (4) 33. (4) 34. (2) 35. (2)
6.
40. (4) 2. a>s.borc7qgd7p
rm 4 a 39, (2)
41. os ,
4) 4G) iB Uh ae a ie pee
<i) 54. (3) 55. ‘a 4.a>p.s,b>q,s;c>p,nd7s
St. (2) 52. (4) 53. (3)
58. (1)—«59. 2)—«60. (3) §, a4q.t,.s.b>p;c7q,s,d>q
56. (1) 57.) 6. a> p,s;b>p;c7q,d>p,q.r
64. (3) 65. (3)
is as,b>p,q,condp.qs
61. (2) 62. (1) 63. (4)
67. (1) 68. (1) — 69. (2) 70. (2)
66. (1)
73. (2) 74. (2) ~~ 75. G3) » G)
71. (3) 72. (2) Numerical Value Type
ig : ue e 78. (4) 79. (1) 80. (1)
5. (3)
6.. (3) ay(-2)
7. 38. ©)(91
- (91)
4)
9 (50) 10. (5):
Multiple Correct A nswers Type 11. (3) 13. (20)
1. (1), (3) 12. (9)
2. (2), (4) ARCHIVES
3. (1).(2
5. Pe2). 40. 8
- (2), (3)
(1), (2), (4) HEE MAIN
8.
, at oe
10. (1), (2), (3), (4) Single Correct Answer Type

1. (1). m ) 12. (1), (3) 1. (1) 2. (1) 3. (3) 4, (2) 5. (2)
may
3. (2), (3) 14, (1), 4(2) rs 6. (3) 7. -@2)
(2 8 GB) 9% (2)
15, (2), (3) 16.)
17. (3), (4) 18, (2).(3) lai
20. (1), (2) aa abba gil La
21, (1).0) “QO 2A 3)
23. (1.0), 22. (1), (2), (3), (4)
8. (1,2) ae a numerical Vale: T¥pe
ae nor (3), (4) 28. il) a) nei
HA) 30. (1), (2), (3), (4)
‘SP
Pair of Straight Lines

ns TEL,
41
EQUATION
OF PAIR OF STRAIGHT x+2y= 34 ¥ 116 ay 5_
LINES Therefore, the lines are

If equations of two lines are L,= ay + by +c, = 0 and
L,= ax + byv + cy = 0, then their yomt equation 1s expressed as x+2y+4=0
(ay. + Byv + C)) (aav + byv + cs) =0 This 1s the equation of pair of x+2y-1]=0
straight lines having component straight lines L, and L, 4=( 1),|
Required distance = ee
For example, the joint equation of lines 2x + + + 3 = 0 and
yy FeO (tyt 3) QQ -¥ + 4)=0 or2e —w— 7+ Lhe
-,-12=0 “7%
Conversely, 1f combined equation of two straight hnes or
equation of pair of straight lines ts 6x” + 5xy - 47 = 0, then this
equation can be reduced to (2x — y) (3. + 4) = 0. So, component IsEMERAL EQUATION OF THE SECOND DEGREE Il.
Imes are 2. —-y = O and 3a + 4y = 0. Way: VARLOBLES
Note: The most general form of a quadratic equation in variables x and

In order to find the combined equation of two lines, make the yis
RHS of each equation of straight line equal to zero and then ax” + 2hxy + by? + 2gx + 2h -c =O il}
multiply the two equations Since it 1s an equation in variables x and } . 1t must represent the
equation of a locus im a plane. It may represent a pair of straight
ILLUSTRATION 3.1 lines, circle, parabola, ellipse or hyperbola If it represents pair of
straight lines, then expression on L HS must get factonzed into
Find the equations of two straight lines whose combined two linear expressions Let us find the condition for this
equation is 6x- + Sxy'— 4° + 7x + 131-3 =0
Ifa #0, we can write equation (1) as quadratic in +
Sol. The given equation of pair of straight lines 1s ax’ + 2x (hy + g) (bv + 2n ~ c) =0
6x + Sxy- 44° + 7+ 13-3 =0 Solving for x, we get
or 6x + (Sy + 7)x — (44° - 134+ 3) = 0 -2(Iy +g) + \ te +e) —4uler- +2A -c}
Sols ing it as a quadratic in x, we get
~(5y +7) ty (Sy +7)? +24(4y" £13y +3)
2a
12 —(dv +g) + NG ~ ab)" +2 (gh-at)r +(2° ~ac}
(sy y 47) 4 V Jl21y?/ -242y +121 a
12 We must have \ as linear expresston im 1 For that. the

expression under the square root must be a perfect square of
_ -(Sy +7) +11(y -1)
some lineat expression tn y Thus, the discriminant of expression
12 (h? ~ ab) + (eh - af)v + (eae) must be zero
_ Sy —18 -l6y +4 or y-3 -4y+l
So, 4(vh af PAU uh) (eae) = 0
12° 12 2° 3 => abe + 2feh—af? by? dr =0 (2)
The two straight Innes are 2x - y + 3 ~ and 3x4 4y—1=0. This ts conditton for which equation (1) represents the pair of
straight lines
ILLUSTRATION 3.2 I:quation (2) can be put in the form of determinant as follows:
Find the distance between the pair of parallel lines a ehosoe
P+ Axy + 4 + 3x + by -4=0. hob fl=0
Sol. Given lines are g f
et 24 ae t2y)-440
a pe
ts.
st ha ve equal roo
Above equation mu
3.2 Coordinate Geometry aight Lines
Point of Intersection of P air
of Str 4f? —4bc =0
of
met hod of find ing the pom t of intersection or of =e
The elementar y ht lines and lines.
the componen t straig resents pair of straight
pair of straight lines
is getting Also, given equation rep
_ ch’ =0
solving them. nt of intersection abc + 2fgh _af’- va
also use the dire ct form ula for the poi ue of f in (2), we get
From (1), putting the val
We can
ie Eek
which is tea of ~#h) : 2fzh = hy? + ch’
h? -—ab h* -ab
the help
also be determined with ILLUSTRATION 3-6
The point of intersection can
follows:
of partial differentiation as Find the coordinates of poi
nts w here pair of lines given
keeping v constant, We get I7y — |2 =0 intersect line x =
Differentiating (I) wrt (3) equation 2x7 - 6y"+ xy-2x+
2ar + Zhv + 2g = 0
keeping x constant, we get Let the given pair of straight line
s intersect linxe =
Now. differentiating (1) witty. (4) Sol.
2hy + 2bv + 2f=0 (1, ¥).
we get the poin t of
Now, solving equations (3) and (4), Putting thts point in the given equation,
we get
intersection
(4) are not equations 2-6y?+y-2+ ITy-12=0
It should be noted that equations (3) and
> y-3y+2=0
of component straight lines.
=> (y- IQ - 2) = 0
ILLUSTRATION 3.3
> y=ly=2
Find the value of A if 2x7 + 7xy + 3y7 + 8x + I4y +A =0 Thus, required points of intersection are
(1, 1) and (1, 2).
represents a pair of straight lines
ILLUSTRATION 3.7
Sol. The equation ar +2ho+ hy + 29x + 2fv+c=0 represents represen
a pair of lines if abc + 2fgh — af" - bg - bc? = If the equation ar + 2hxy+ by ~ 2ex ~ 2fv + c =O
the pair of parallel straight lines. then prove that A” = ab an
So. for given equation,
abc + 2fgh — af” - bg” — ch’ =0.
6 ~ (7) (4)(3) - 2079 - 304)? -4 (3) =0 Sol. Let the given equation represent pair of parallel stra
or 6 +196 -98-4884-=0 lines x + my +n=0 and Ixt+ mv+n’=0
ax? + 2hxy + by? + 2ex+ 2A +e
or 44 _ 64 = 196 - 146 = 50 = (Ix+my+n\(ix+ mv tn’)
or 2Sh=s0 = (ix+ my)" +i(ntn’)x+m(ntn’)v + nn’ =0
or =P =8 Thus, expression (/x + my)" 1s same as ax + by — lhe
Therefore, ax? + 2hyy + by” must be perfect square of [15
ILLUSTRATION 3.4 expression 1n y and y.
Does equation x° + ay = 23x 4y + 5 = 0 satisfies the So, (2h)’ — dab = 0
h-=ab
condition abc + 2gh — af - bg? ~ch® = 0? Does it represent a
Also, abc + 2hgf — af” — bg? ~ch" =0,
pair of straight lines?
GONCEPT APPLIGATION ExerRcISE 3-!
Sol. Given equation Is r+ 2y -2V3x-4y+5=0
Here. o=1,b=2,4=0,g=-V35f =-2,¢ =5 1. Find the combined equation of the pair of lines through
the point (1, 0) and parallel to the lines represented by
But. abc + 2gh - af? — bg” ~ ch? = 10+ 0-4-6=0
The given equation can be written as 2x°- w-1 =0
(x- J3)? + 2ty- 1 =0 | 2. Prove that the equation 2x7 + Sav t+ 397 + Ox + Tet 4 = :
represents a pair of straight lines. Find the coordinates
Hence, it denotes only a posnt POD, 1) but not a pair of straight
lines.
of then point of intersection and also the angle between
them.
ILLUSTRATION 3.5 3. If one of the lines of the pair ax* + 2Axy + by? = 9
i} 2fv te Oantersect
If the pair of lines ax + hey + by? 4 2vx bisects the angle between the positive direction of the
+ ch’.
on the y-axis, then prove that 2/gh = bg? axes, then find the relation for a, b, and h.
4. If the pair of lnes ¥3x? — 4xy + V3y" = 0 is rotated abou!
Sol. Let the line intersect on y-axis at P(0, y) the on gin by 27/6 in the anticlockwise sense, then find the
Putting this point in the equation of pair of straight lines, we get equation of the pair of lines in the new position
by? + 2fy, += 0
Pe ——
oan
: 2 6x? + Sxy - 4y° =0 (2)
4, Ifthe equation 2x" + ky + 2y? = 0 represents a pair of real
_ and distinct lines, then find the values of k or (3x + 4y)(2x ~ y) = 0
| 6. Find the point of intersection of the pair of straight This represents equations of pair of straight lines parallel to the
| Imes represented by
component lines of given equation.
the equation 6x7 + 5xy = 21y"
+ [3x + 38v-—5=0 Therefore, given equation of pair of straight lines can be put as
(3x + y+ A)(2x-y + B)=0 (3)
ANSWERS
Comparing coefficients of (1) and (3), we get
=-landB=3
1. 2? -ay-y?-4v40t2=0 2. ,-2).tan '1/5
3. at+b=-2h
Hence, the required component lines are 2x — y + 3 = 0,
4, V3? =—Asp=0
3x+4yp-1=0.
(5 ke (4) U (4) 6. (-32/23, 17/32)
ILLUSTRATION 3.9
SECOND-DEGREE HOMOGENEOUS If the component lines whose combined equation is

EQUATION px — qxy — y’ = O make the angles @ and B with x-axis, then
find the value of tan (a + 3).
The homogenous equation 1s that equation in which each term
has same degree. General second-degree homogenous equation Sol. Given equation of pair of straight lines ts
is given by
px’- qxy- ¥ =0 (1)
av" + by" + 2hxy = 0 (1) Let the component lines be y = m,x and y = mx.
This equation represents pair of straight lines passing through ’3 m, = tan a@and m, = tan B (Given)
ongin Also, m,+m,=— gq and mm, =~ p
Consider one such equation of pair of straight lines, tan of + tan B
Cnr pS
(2x —3)(3x + 2y) =0 (a+) ]-tana@ tan B
or 6x - 2y" + xv=0 (2) _ m, +m, _ 74
Now. consider anotherequation of pair of straight lines l-mm, l+p
(2x —y' + 3)(3x + 27-4) = 0
or 6x" 2° +aytx+ 1l0y-12=0 (3) ILLUSTRATION 3.10
The component lines of above equation are parallel to the
Find the joint equation of pair of lines which passes through
component lines of equation (2)
origin and are perpendicular to the lines represented by the
We observe that second degree terms 1n both the equations (2)
equation y + 3xy -6x+5y- 14=0.
and (3) are same or ratio of coefficients of second-degree terms
1S same Sol. Homogeneous part of the given equation 1s 31> ~ 3x = 0
Now, general equation of pair of straight line ts So, component lines are 1 = O and: + 3x =0
ax + 2hxy + by* + 2gx + fvtc=0 (4) Lines perpendicular to these lines are x = 0 and y— 31 = 0
Then corresponding equation of pair of straight lines parallel So, combined equation of above lines 1s ¢ — 3 = 0.
to component lines of above equation and passing through origin
is given by ILLUSTRATION 3.11
ax’ + by’ + 2hxy =0 (5) If the sum of the slopes of the lines given by x° — Jer - 7" =0
Let the component lines of equation (5) be y ~ ma = 0 and is four times their product, then find the value of c.
y-mx=0
by* + 2hxy + ax’ = b(y — mx)(y - mx) Sol. Given equation of pair of lines is V — 2em — 717 =0
= by? — b(m, + m,)xy + bmymyx° Let the slopes of the component lines be m, and mm,
Comparing coefficients of both sides, we get It is given that
2h = —b(m, + m,) and a = bmym, my + ty = 4mm
= a
m, +m, = and mm, as
ILLUSTRATION 3.8
Find the equations of component lines whose combined ILLUSTRATION 3.12
equation is 6x2 + Sxy - 4) + 7x + 13y -3 = 0 without solving
If the pair of straight lines ax? + 2hxy + by? = 0 is rotated
for x or y about the origin through 90°, then find its equation m the new
position,
‘Sol. Given equation of pair of straight lines 3s:
6x2 + Sxy — 47 + 7x + 13y-3=0 (1) Sol. Given equation of pair of straight lines 1s
Homogenous part of given equation 1s ax? + 2hxy + by? =0.
Coordinate Geometry 7 spot meee om a ES;
3.4 ted was
Special cases:
oo
Let the component lines be y = 77,4 and y= Mv @=0 So, h* =ab,

If lines are parallel or coincident, then
+b=0
-2h an If les are perpendicular, then @= 90°. So,a
m, + my =—— and mm = 7
to above component lines are 3.1 3
Now, equations of lines perpendicular ILLUSTRATION
1 ] X Find acute and obtuse angle between component lines whos,
4=0.
combined equation is 2x? + Sxy + 3y? + Ox +7 +
y=—-—\ and y=-
mmy
my t= Oand my t= 0
or
Sol. For the given equation of pair of straight lines, we have
Combined equation of above lines 1s a=2,b=3,h= 5/2
(ary +) (gy + \)=0 Thus, acute angle between lines 1s given by
2
or mymyy + vv, ty) +=2 0
a —2h 2
or = +0 ah) +x =0
b b jat+b|
a +
or bx" = Dhxv t+ ay = 0
;|
Alternative method: Obtuse angle between lines = [x - tan
We can write the given equation of pair of straight lines as:
‘
v Vv ILLUSTRATION 3.14
o( =] + 2u( =| +a=0
v x Find the value of a for which the lines represented by
The roots of this equation are m, and m, which are slopes of ax’ + Sxy + ay" = 0 are mutually perpendicular.
component lines
Sol. The lines given by ar + 5 + 2 = 0 are mutually
|
Now. we require equation whose roots are — — and — “ perpendicular if a + 2 =0,1¢.,a = -2
m1, f Ns 2
Xx
So, in above equation, replacing ze by -—— , we get
x v EQUATION GE PAIR OF ANGLE BISECTORS OF GIVEN
PAIK OF STRAIGHT LINES
Let the given equation of pair of straight lines 1s
an’ + by + 2hxy = 0 (1)
or bx? — 2hxy + av =
Let the component lines be » = m,x and » = mx.
which 1s the required equation of pair of straight lines.
-2h a
my, + m,= ee" mm, = —
ANGLE BETWEEN PAIR OF STRAIGHT LINES Equations of angle bisectors of component lines are
Consider general equation of pair of straight lines yrmx _, Yam

ax + 2hxy + by + 2gx + 2fv +c =0 () 1 +m,
3 ~~
1+ m,-
>
The corresponding equation of pair of straight lines parallel to

Combined equation of bisector lines 1s
component lines of above equation and passing through origin 1s
ax + by’ + 2hxy =0 (2) Yo mx vom || yom | 3} mt) Lo
Clearly, angle between component lines of (1) and (2) 1s same V! +m
5
Vi + ms
>
Vl +m,
Ba
Jl ts
*
Let the component lines of equation (2) be y - myx = 0 and

ym x =0 (- mx) _ (y - myx)
—2h 2 =0
and mm, =
>
my + m= — 1+ om) T+ m3
SIs
or (my Fang) (X= 7) + 2g = 1) vv = 0

*- hI
If angle between lines 1s @, then

—-2h 4
m, — mM Jim + my y- 4mm OF ot = 42(2-1}w=0
tan @= = b b
l+ mm, |. [1 + my |
aro an
or eS
4h” 44 a-b hh
hb ~ " p _ 2yh° — ab
~ be a ja+bh| ILLUSTRATION 3.15
b If the pair of straight lines x7 — 2pxy — y? = 0 and x° - 24x -"

en component = 0 are such that each pair bisects the angle between the other
This 1s the formula for finding the acute angle betwe pair, then prove that pg = ~1.
lines of equation (1) or (2).
| Parr of Straight Lines 3.5
| the
Sol Combined equatioy? n = of045 bisectors of the angles between ILLUSTRATION 3.16
pait of hnes x° — 2pxy —
Prove that the straight lines joining the origin to the points of
v -y _ x¥
1-(-1)-p intersection of the straight line hx + ky = 2hk and the curve
(x ~k)? + (y—h)’ =? are at right angle if h? + ? =’,
di px? + 2xy — py? =0
Sol. From the equation of line, we have
This 3
must be same
29 as the given e quation of pair of bisect
ors _ Ax + hy
re. ~4QXY- VSM, Thk (1)
Comparing ratios of coefficients, we get Equation of the curve 1s
re x+y" — key t+ +e-2=0
1 -q 1 Making above equation homogeneous with the help of (1), we get
pq=-l x+ hx + ky
—_—_— x + y"— * 2¢ke
2( + i
y) hk
HOMOGENIZATION + (he 2 + B02)2, [aoe

faxthy _
0
OF SECOND
DEGREE EQUATION This 1s combined equation of the pair of lines joining the origin
to the points of intersection of the given line and the curve The
Consider general second degree equation
component lines are perpendicular if sum of coefficient of ¢ and
Ssar+ 2hxy + by? + 2ext+ 2frt+c=0
(1) coefficient of y* 1s zero
This equation represents pair of Straight lines,
circle, parabola, (+) (+ P-c?) =0
ellipse or hyperbola
Clearly, this 1s not homogenous equation
is R+eae (as h”~k- #0)
Now, let the ine L = A+nn4+4n=0 intersect ILLUSTRATION 3.17
the curve (1)
in two points 4 and B.
Find the angle between the lines joining the ongin to the
points of intersection of the straight line y = 3x — 2 with the
curve x° + Ixy + 3y? + 4x + 8y— 11=0.
Sol. The equation of straight line 1s

y —3x
2
ox Making given equation of curve homogeneous, we get
x? + Axyt 3y?+ (4x4 (4 =3s) - u| V—3x) =0

The combined equation of pair of straight lines OA and OB or 7x?— Ixy -y? =0 i (1)
must be homogenous and must contain only second-degree terms. This 1s the equation of the pair of lines joining origin
to the point
From the equation of line, we have of intersection of the given line and curve.
_ lxe+my Comparing this equation with the equation a> +
avy — byt
cal 4 §
..(2) we get
Now, equation of curve 1s a=7,b=-landh=-|
If @ is the acute angle between component lines
(ax? + 2hxy + by*) + (2gx + 2fy) of (1), then
1+e =0
Putting the value of ‘1° from (2) in above equation, we have Ts 2h? -ab _|2yt+7 vO
2/8 ens
ax? + 2hxy + by? at+b
"
2
Hem), M2) i 6= tan! 2V2
+(2gx+2 pn —
=H 3
This is homogenous equation of second degree. CONCERT APPLICATION EXERCISE 3.2
Since points A and B satisfy above equation, it represents
1. If the slope of one line is double
the pair of straight lines OA and OB. This process of making a the slope of another
second-degree equation homogeneous 1s called homogenization line and the combined equation of
the pair of lines 1s
(x"/a) + (2ay/h) + (y/b) = 0, then find the ratio
through which we get equation of pair of straight lines joining the ab « h?,
Points of intersection of the given line and curve with the origin. 2. Find the angle between the lines repr
esented by x?
+ 2xy secO
y? +=0,
3.6 Coordinate Geometry |
EXAMPLE 3.2
the origin of the perpendiculars from (q, 4
ween the strai ght lines yoining
3. Find the angle bet
0 Prove that the product
to the points of intersection of 3x" + Sxp-3y + 2x +3)
2 an 2 ‘a =
. .
to the pair of lines ax? + 2hxy + by’ = Ois

and 3x- 2y= 1.
ao’ + 2haB + bp?
lines given by the equation |
4. If is the angle between the
6x2 + Sxy — 4y* + Ix t+ 13v-3
= 9, then find the equation \(a-by? +41?
point of intersection of
| of the line passing through the Let the lines be y = m,x and y = mx
e @ with the positive Sol.
these lines and making an angl ==0
or 0 and mx-y
mx—y
Y-AXIS
of lines bisecting the
5. Show that the equation of the pair
a
where m, +m =F mm, =~
angles between
| angles between the pair of bisectors of the
- 5) (x? - y’)
the pair of Imes ax’ + 2hxy + by? = 018 (a Now, if the lengths of perpendicular from (0, 0) on these lines are
+ 4hxy = 0 d, and d,, respectively, then
angles
6. Find the equation of the bisectors of the
between the lines jommng the orig in to the poin t of id, = Ul Le 8
intersection of the straight line x — y = 2 with the curve m? +1 ym +1
5x7 + Ilxy - 8y* + 8x —-4y+12=0 2 2
+m, )oB + B° |
| mma —(m,
7. Show that the pairs of straight lines 2x? + 6xy + y= 0 and 2.2
. (2m; +m, +m,’ +1
4x7 + 18x + y = 0 have the same set of angular bisector
ANSWERS mma —(m +m yop + B° |

? 3
ym? my? +(m, +m,)° — 2mm, +1
1.9°8 2. @ 3. m2
4. llx—2y+13=0 6. x7 + 30xy-1" =0
Solved Examples
EXAMPLE 3.1 |? + 2hoB + bB°|

Show that straight lines (A 2_ 3B)? + BABxy + (B’- 34’) "= 0 - va? +4h? -2ab+b?
form with the line Ax + By + C = 0 an equilateral triangle of
2 |ac? + 2haB + bB*|
V3 (A? +B?) \(a—b)? +4h?
Sol. Let the line through ongin making an angle of 60° with EXAMPLE 3.3
the line Ax + By + C= 0 be y= mx.
The distance of a point (x,,y,) from each of the two straight
m— (- 4/B) lines which pass through the origin of coordinates 1s p. Find the
tan 60° =
1+ m(-A/B) combined equation of these straight lines.
or 3(B— Am)? = (mB + AY Sol. Let the line through the ongin be y = mx ory — 7 = 0
Putting m = y/x in above, we get Distance of line mx — y = 0 from (x,, )) is
(A? — 3B’)? + 8ABxy + (B’- 3A’)? =0 mx, — ay
each
Jism? = P (given)
1s pair of straight lines through origin in which 1+m
This
component line makes 60° with line Ax + By +C=0. or m 2 ee +y? _ 2mx\y =p 2 +p she nr |
By + C=O01s
Also, length of perpendicular from origin to line Ax + or Gi; — p*)m? = 2mx Vy, +y; -p =0 qd)
IC] Equation (1) has two roots m, and mm.

yA? +B Now, the pair of lines 1s
ength
Length ofof side side ofof tnangle Ee =
triangle = ————= (y — 1, x)(v — myx) = 0
2 J3(4? + B’) or y- (m, + my)xy + mpm? = 0 @)
2
Now, from (1),
Area of triangl ve = e. 2x);—

+ 8?)
e=—
ca ormanee 4 | f(a? +B?) ) — V3(4? m, +m, = ——_

} 2 2 2
(xy - Pp”)
—
Therefore, from (1) and (2), we get
Oi -P’)
and = ™mmy= 2Vh? — ab 2d
(x7 - p?)
ath a? +B? - 4a?
putting these values in (2), we get
y= [2xy/&? - p*)hey + (0? - p’Va,? — py? = 0 Therefore, the locus of P(ar, B) 1s
by + 4h}
(x2 + y?) (2 — ab) = P{(a-
EXAMPLE 3.4
EXAMPLE 3.5
A point moves so that the distance between the foot of - 2x + 4y = 0, which
perpendiculars from it on the lines ax” + 2h xy + by’ = Osa Show that all chords of the curve 3x7 -
the equation to its locus is subtend a right angle at the origin, pass through a fixed point
constant 2d Show that
(x2 +") (ab) = d?{(a—
by + 4h}. Find the coordinates of the point.
yy B Sol. The given curve 18

Sol. From point P(a, B), (1)
perpendiculars are dropped on the "eas P(a, B) 3x°- y -2x + 4y=0
angle
given pair of lines. a SR “ Let y = mx + c be the chord of curve (1) which subtends an
of 90° at the origin. Then the combined equations of lines joining
o. 4
According to the question, AB = 2d. the points of intersection of curve (1) and chord y = mx
+ c to
\9 curve
Clearly. OAPB is a cyclic the origin can be obtained by making the equation of
quadniateral and OP will be the iS ee homogeneous with the help of the equation of chord as
diameter of the circumcircle of
this quadrilateral.
3x? — y? 22) + (2) = 0
or 3cx2 — cy? — Ixy + 2mx* + 4 - 4mxy = 0
op= Ja? +B? or xy + (4 ~¢)y'=0
(3c + 2m)x? — 2(1 + 2m)
each
Let Q be the center of the circle. As the lines represented by this pair are perpendicular to
Therefore, in AORB, other, we must have
Coefficient of x* + Coefficient of vy =0
OB le a B Hence, 3c +2m+4-c=0
or —2=mtec
Also, angle between the lines 1s
Comparing this result with y = mx + c, we can see that y = mx+c
_ 2Vh* —ab passes though (1, -2).
cal at+b
3.8 Coordinate Geometry,
Exercises
Secomitacee
= 0 represents
The equation xy? on 9y + 6x’y + 54y
and a circle
(1) a pair of straight lines
a parabola
(2) a parr of straight lines and
of lines whose equation 1S ing a square
(3) aset of four straight lines form
I. The angle between the pair
4x" + 100 + mye + $v + LOv= Os (4) none of these
= 0 and ax? + hry
(1) tan '(3/8) The equations ax? + 2h(a+ b)xy + b’y*
(2) tan '(3/4) + by’ = 0 represent
5(m + AY}. € R
— 4in/
(3) tan’ {2V2 (1) two pairs of perpendicular straight
lines
(4) none of these (2) two pairs of parallel straight lines
+ (a? - 2)" =0
The two lines represented by Bax? + Sav (3) two pairs of straight lines which are equally inclined to
are perpendicular to each other for each other
(1) two values of a (2) a
(4) none of these
(4) for no value of a
(3) for one value of a gh
12. If the equation of the pair of straight lines passing throu
by the
_ The distance between the two lines represented the point (1, 1), one making an angle 6 with
the
equation 9x" — 24ar + 16y" — 12a + 16v - 12 = O18 positive direction of the x-axis and the other makin
g the
(2) 6/5 y-axis, is
(1) 8/5 same angle with the positive direction of the
(3) 11S (4) none of these ve - (at Ixy ty? + alx+y— 1)= 0,4 # 2, then the
. The equations x — v = 4 and r+ 4nr +1" = 0 represent
the value of sin 201s
sides of (1) a-2 (2) a+2
(1) an equilateral tnangle (2) aright-angled triangle (3) 2/a+ 2) (4) 2/a
anisosceles tnangle (4)_ none of these +7 =0
If two lines represented by rere ery = oy
(3)
13.
. The straight lines represented by (1 ~ mx) = a"(1 +m’) and bisect the angle between the other two, then the value
of ¢
- nx) = a(i+ 1’) form a 1S
(1) rectangle (2) rhombus (1) 0 (2) -1 (3) 1 (4) -6
(3) trapezium (4) none of these
14. Through a point A on the x-axis, a straight line 1s drawn
. If the pairs of lines x + 2xy + ay” = 0 and ax? + 2xyp parallel to the y-axis so as to meet the pair of straight Imes
+ 4° = 0 have exactly one line in common, then the joint ax’ + 2hxy + by’ = 0 at B and C. If 4B = BC, then
equation of the other two lines is given by
(1) A’ =4ab (2) $h* =9ab
337 =
(1) 3x7 + 8xy- + 33° =0
(2) 3x7 + 10xy
(3) 9h? = 8ab (4) 4° =ab
(3) +25 -30=0 (4) 7 + 2x—y-3y'=0
15. The image of the pair of lines represented by ar - 2An-
. The condition that one of the straight lines given by the
by" = 0 by the line mirror + = 0 1s
equation ax’ + 2hxy + by” = 0 may coincide with one of
(1) a?—2hxy-by?=0 © (2) bY - 2h av =0
those given by the equation a’x’ + 2h'xy + by’ = Ois
(1) (ab! —a'b)? = 4(ha' — ha) (bh' ~ bh) (3) bx? + 2h +ay?=0 (4) ax — 2h + by =
[380 -
(2) (ab! — a'b)? = (ha' — h'a) (bh' ~ bh) 16. The straight lines represented by the equation
136xy + 33)" = 0 are equally inclined to the line
(3) (ha' ~ h'ay = 4(ab’ — a'b) (bh' ~ bh)
(4) (bh’ - b’hy’ = 4(ab‘ — a'b) (ha' ~ h'a)
(1) x -2p= (2) y.+2r=7
2 (4) 3. +2v=4
. Ifthe lines represented by the equation 3 - x7 +2v3x-3=0
are rotated about the point (V3, 0) through an angle of 15°,
17. If the slope of one of the lines represented by av + thn *
one in clockwise direction and the other in anticlockwise
direction, so that they become perpendicular, then the +b Sir
by" F=(0= 01s 4s the square of : the other, then ae fa =
equation of the pair of lines in the new position 15 (ly 4 1 ab
+ 23x + 3=0 (2) ~~
(1) 2-22 + 2N3x-3=0 (2) 6
(3) Y-2 x4+3=0
23 - (4) ¥ 43-0 (3) 8 (4) none of these
The equation of a line which 1s parallel to the line common
xy 12y’ 0 and » V4 y= Tand ay? + 2nay + ay? = 0, (a #0), are three real
to the pair of lines given by 6x” distinct lines forming a triangle. Then the triangle 1s
15x?+ 14xy - 8" = () and at a distance of 7 units from itis
(2) 5x7 2yp=7 (1) isosceles (2) scalene
(1) 3x -4y=-35
(3) 3x+4y=35 (4) 2x-3y=7 (3) equilateral (4) right-angled
‘a
| “{9,—19. —TT a
Statement 1: If -2h = 94 by itis n one hne

Pave of Straight Lines 3.9
les ax” + 2hxy + by?

= 9 bisects the angle
| of the pair of (1) sec 2a=h 2) cos «= \(l + Aah)
between the
coordinate axes in the positive quadra
nt,
(3) 2sna=V +hyh (4) cot a= V(ht+ 1)(h-1)
Statement 2: If ax + (2m + a) = 015 a factor of The combined cquation of three sides of a triangle is
an
ax" 2+ Qhxv + by? =0, then b+ 2h+q@ (x? = 1°)(2¥ 43-6) 0 If (—2, a) 18 an interior point and
-= 0.
(1) Both the statements are true (+, 1) is an exterior point of the triangle, then
but Statement2 ts the correct
explanation of statement 1 (l) 2<a< 10/3 (2) -2-a~ 10/3
Both the statements are true (3) -1<b=9/2 (4) -l<h vi |
but statement 2 1s not the
corr
ect explanation of statement
1. If one of the hnes given by the equation 2x” + pxy + 3)” =0
Statement | 1s true and Statemen coincide with one of those given by 2x? + gxy — 37 = 0 and
t 2 is false
(4) Statement 1 1s false and statement 2 1s true. the other lies represented by them are perpendicular, then
value of p+ gts
20. The orthocenter of the triangle formed by the lines xy
= 0
andv+v= lis (1) 6 (2) -6 (3) -7 (4) 7
ql) (1/2, 1/2) (2) (1/3, 1/3) . The lines joining the origin to the point of intersection of
(3) (0. 0) (4) (1/4, 1/4) 3x? + mxy — 4x + 1 =O and 2x +y—1|=Oare at right angles.
Then which of the following is a possible value of m?
21. Let POR be a nght-angled isosceles triangle, nght angled
at P(2, 1). If the equation of the line OR 1s (I) -4 (2) 4 (3) 7 (4) 3
2x + y = 3, then
the equation eprescatinlg the pair of lines . If the equation ax* — 6xy + y? + bx + cy + d=O represents a
PQ and PR is
(ij. 3e-37 + &y + 20x + 10v + 25 =0 pair of lines whose slopes are m and m’, then the value(s)
2) 3x7 - 3)" + 8xy — 20x - 10
of a is/are
+ 25=0
(3) 3x" - 33? + 8xy + 10x + 15y + 20-0 (1) a=-8 (2) a=8 (3) a=27
(4) 3x7 — 3)" - 8xy~ 15y- 20=0 - Two pairs of atraignt lines have the equations > - 1 —
12x? = 0 and ax* + 2hxy + by = 0. One line will be common
22. Area of the triangle formed by the line x + y=3 and the among them 1f
angle bisectors of the pairs of straight lines x7 — y? +
2y (1) a+ 8h-16b=0 (2) a-8h- 16b=0
= lis
(1) 2 sq. units (3) a-6h+9b=0 (4) a-6h-9b=0
(2) 4sq units
(3) 6sq units
li
(4) 8 sq unit
. The orthocentre of the triangle formed by the lines
2x*+ 3xy - 2y°- 9x + 7y-5=0 with 4x + Sy -3 =Ois
For Problems 1-3
(1) (3/5, 11/5) (2) (6/5, 11/5) Consider the equation of a pair of straight hnes as Ar — 10m: —
(3) (5/6, 11/5) (4) (3/5 ,6/5) 12)° + 5x - 16-3 =0.
nate coe now pe 2s

1. The value of A 1s
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 32
The point of intersection of lines 1s (a, B). Then the value
(4) 3
1. The equationx* + x*y — xy” = y’ represents

of aB is
(1) three real straight lines
(1) 35 (2) 45 (3) 20 (4) 15
(2) lines in which two of them are perpendicular to each
other 3. The angle between the lines is 6. Then the value of tan
@ 1S
(3) lines in which two of them are coincident (1) 1/5 (2) 2/9 (3) 7 (4) 34
(4) none of these For Problems 4-6
The straight lines represented by x? + mxy - 2y* + 3y-1=0 Consider a pair of perpendicular straight lines ax? + yy = pars
meet at 5x + Sy+c=0
(1) (-1/3, 2/3) (2) (-1/3, -2/3) 4. The value of ais
(3) (1/3, 2/3) (4) none of these (1) 1 (2) 3 (3) 2 (4) -2
- Ifone of the lines of my? + (1 — m )xy — mx? = 0 is a bisector 5. The value of ¢ ts
of the angle between the lines xy = 0, then m is
(1) 3 (2) 3
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) -1/2 (4) -1 (3) -1 (4) 1
6. Distance between the orthocenter and the circumc
If x7 + 2hxy + y = 0(h > 1) represents the equation of the enter of
(rangle ABC ts
Straight lines through the origin which make an angle a
with the straight line y + x = 0, then (1) 4 (2) 9/2 (3) 8/3 (4) 7/4
3.10 Coordinate Geometry ~s—
tII 4. If the gradient of one of

t he lines x* + xy ” ye
twice that of e
the other, the n sum of possible Values
1. The distance betw at :
cen the lines (. + 7)? + 4V2 (v+
= 01s 7y)- 42
. 8
2. Area of the triangle for , 5. One of the bisectors
med by the lines y — Oxy of the angle between the
0 and + = 6 15 + 18x? = + 2h(x - I)(y ~ 2) lines a(x _ r
. + h(y-2P=0 Isx+2y
3. The value A for which 4y? -5=Q Then th
+ &yp + ky? = 9 is the equ | pPaa
of a pair of straight lines is ation eis ;
BE rec
=a ee
ea Answfeelere
s Key
EXERCISES C ,
5. (1), (4)
Single Correct Answer 6. (1), (2)
Type - (1), (2), (3), (4
I. (Q) 2. (1) 7. (1), 2), ( can » (2),
3. (1) 4 ~ (J) 9. (2), (4)
8 7
6. ; (2) 5. (2) & Qa)

7. (1) 8. 2 (2)
ll. (3) 9. (3) 10. (3) Linked Comprehension
12. (3) Type
16. (2) 13. (4) 14. (2) 15, (4)
17) ag. (1) if) 2. (1) 3. (3)
21. 19. (2) 20, (3) 4, (3) 5 tis
(2)(2 22.:
Q)(1 23. ‘ (1) 6. (4)
Multiple Correct Numerical Value Type
Answers Type
I. (1). (2). 3) 1. (2) 2:<:(3)
3. (1). (4) 2. (1), (3) 3. (2) 4. (0) 5. (15)
4. (1), (2), (4)
DEFINITI
D
chal
A circle is
: the loc
that its dis s Pomt
ae ™ hich Mo
constant
The a fixed Pomnt ves ny
@ Plane LUSTR
ATION
distance 1s fixed in the same Such
Called the ONt IsCalled ¢ 'S always If the line 4.2
Tadius Of © centre s x + Y=
the circle 4nd the Whic 6and x
ATION o; Constant h passes
Eau C i r e through th 4 ¥ = 4 are diamet
F R C ;
E E ip CE e Point (2, er
If the centre
Of the Ci:rc NTRY Sol, Here ente 6), then find s Of the Circle
and radius le ; Ranigy its equation
is >. hen Qy.34) iii . Ors r will be
the point ,
point PQ, fo r Variable we Ria a F in tersection
3) lving 6 Also, Of the diam
cPay he circle CP = 19the Circle passes
through th
et
Q i+, 5 , P(x, v) e posnt P(
2, 6) Then
This 1s the vs, r Hence, the radius ,
€quation required €q
of Ci rc CO, v,) uation ts
If the ce
ongin, th
ntre of
le
the Circle
O-8P + G4 992
en its €quati
on js js
+
10?
x jt or wT ye Pap
,A ~ 16x 3oc%
Circles LUSTR 4y ~ 32
having aTION p
Same
centre and 4.3
differ
cucles ent radiy are called Find the ©
quation of
concentric the liney Circle havi
Here. the + =] ng Centre
circles 1s Cx
Common
Centre of at (2, 3) an
two r d touching
. ’) and Sol. The Centre
”) and r, ther Tadui Cc.
are of the Circ
le ts C(2,
The equation Gy), 3)
s Of circles
(x~x, 3 are
)? +p V 7
and O~2nyY+q y )r = rr >
Expanding My)? = 2 ,
circles differ the €quations, We fi "€(2. 3)
by constant nd that €q
uations of
Any line Pa Only Concentric
Of the Circ
ssing thro
ug b centre of 3 Ye | exy
le, A Ci the Circle
rcle has 1s Called Also, line
j diameter
ers *ty~t=
LUSTR 9 'S fan
aTION Hence, th gent to th
4.1 e Tadius e circle.
Centre fr Of th € circ
Find the om the ta le is the P
ngent. e t pendicula
r distance
Theref Of the
ore. radn
usy= Cp _ S24354
ect
Hence, th Vi rented
e equatio v +7
n Of circle
IS (1 ~ 9/
74 Q-3)
a8
ha 4, then
f= _9 O and Ay ~5
~~4, then h “HeUMscrib Bye J=0.
= 6. ing the Find
Tore, the ©q Wadrilateray dn
the Wadnla
uation of ci terg] and
25 rcje IS (x + ; Sol,
2)? + Y= 25 IIStance
Or (x ~ 6) 3x + 4p between
P2 004 | 2= (is Parallel
2 Lines oY
tae Distance dy
4g between
Parallel Li
Ree 0 and
O1s 2. nes tt PS =Oand te 3-4 5
ILLUSTRATION. 46
Find the equations of circles each having radius 5 and tOuching
Z
the line 3x + 4y— 11 = 0 at point (1, 2).
Sy ‘
rs Sol, As shown tn the figure, the two circles touch the ti

v2 \ \ 4 t 2).
3x + 4p - 11 = Oat poinP(1,
Centre lies on the line perpendicular to the tangent at Py
se oe Sees |
distance 5 from it on either side.
PC, 2) 7
Clearly, lines form a square of side length 2. 5
Inscribed circle has radius 1. 3x+4y-—I1] =
Circumsenbed circle has radius J2.

Also, centre of the square 1s (0, 0)
So. centre of both the circles 1s (0, 0).
Slope of given tangent line 1s — 4
Theretore. the equation of the circle inscribed in the quadrilatera
l 4
Isyty=] Thus, the slope of CP 1s 5
And the equation of the circle circumscribing the quadrilateral 1s
yagi=ad tan @= 3
Centre. C= (ltS5cos@, 2+5sin@)

ILLUSTRATION 4.5
Two vertices of an equilateral tnangle are (-1, 0) and (1, 0), 3 4

ae | 125—,2t5—
and its third vertex lies above the x-axis Find the equation of c ( 5 5]
circumcircle of tnangle C = (4, 6) or (2, -2)
Sol. We have equilateral tnangle 4BC. Therefore, equations of circles are
{? (x- 4) + (y- 6) = 25
\A(0, V3) or (x +2) + (y+ 27 =25
ILLUSTRATION 4.7
Prove that for all values of @, the locus of the pomt of

intersection of the lines x cos 9+ y sin @= a and x sin 8-¥
cos 6= bisa circle.
(-1. 0)B 0}
Sol. Since the point of intersection satisfies both the given lines.
we can find the locus by eliminating 6 from the given equation.
Therefore, by squaring and adding, we get equation
LetB = (-1, 0), C= (1, 0).
Then A lies on y-axis. PtPaagte
OA = AB sin 60° = V3 which is the equation of circle.
Az (0, V3) ILLUSTRATION 4.8

In an equilateral triangle, circumcentre coincides with centroid.
Prove that the maximum number of points with rational
-1+1+0 3+0+0 coordinates on a circle whose center is (V3, 0) is two. #
Thus, circumcentreof triangle ABCis G = 3 0 3
| Sol. There cannot be three points on the circle with
(3)
= | 0,—~ |.
a rational coordinates as for then the center of the circle, bets
the circumcenter of a triangle whose vertices have ration@
Circumradius =AG= -—===$=
B B
coordinates, must have rational coordinates (since the coordinates
vara)3)
Therefore, equation of circumeircle of triangle ABC is will be obtained by solving two linear equations in x, Y having
rational coefficients). But the point (V3, 0) does not have rations!
coordinates.
Circle 4.3
-$0. ‘thefisequation of the cirele is
Al Vip oy 2
+yrsp ILLUSTRATION 4.11
y ay
1= V3 pb Vera Find the equation of the circle which ts touched by y =x, has
or .
table 7 and \, where vas ration al,» may have two Ms centre on the positive direction of the x-axis and cuts offa
for sul
tational
yalues chord of length 2 units along the line x — V3y =0.
=degeng ares cap ihuid
,ovample, r= ovr Qr=t,-] Satisly \
7 5
V3 Vi?
eq) " Sol. M
: we Wgel
so, ES two pomts (QO. 1) and (O. -1) which h ave rational
coordinates yoy
Viv= x
B
kind the |locus of the midpomt of the chords Pos & Sf
24° = a7 having fixed length /. of circle fe w
V
— a
44
sol.
|
As shown in the figure. 4B is one

— x:
) €(a,0)
of the variable chords having length /.
Let the midpoint of 4B is M(h, k),
The foot of perpendicular from centre C (0, 0) Centre C lies on x-axis
on 4B 1s AL. C= (a, 0)
,
Innight angled tangle CA44, we have Line y = x touches the circle at point P
tu[™
AC = CM + AM 4
7
M(h,k)
‘
B So, radius of circle is the length of perpendicular
(CP) from the
>
centre C on the liney = x.
@ =(h" +aya(2)
Also, length of chord (AB) of circle on line x —
< v3y = 015 2 units
P
Hence. equation Dp
of required locus 1s
2 ? 2 MB = 1 (where ms the midpoint of AB).
¥" ty sq
4 Now, CP=CB
(radu of circle)
ILLUSTRATION 4.10 a CP? = CB?
=> CP? = CM? + MB?
Find the locus of midpoint of the chords
of the circle
,
2
x +1" =a” which subtends a right angle at
|a-0
a
the point (c, 0). }a~V30)| | |
Sol. Let P(h, k) be the midpoint of
a chord AB of the circle VP +(~1) y(v3y¥ +a
which subtends a nght angle at C (c. 0)
a = wy
~ 2° 4
a
—=|
~ 4
=> a= 2 (as centre hes in first quadrant
)
Also, radius CP = 5 = v2
-
Therefore, equation of the circle 1s

(x - 2) + (yp 0) =?
4 ;
or V+ ~4y+2=0
ILLUSTRATION
Innght angled triangle ACB, we have 4, ra
PA = PC= PB Find the equations of the circles passing throu

gh the point
PC= Vh-cr+ 2 (~4, 3) and touching the lines x += 2 andx—- v= 2.
Sol. Since circles touch
PB
= P4 = \OA?
- OP” the lines x + AV
y=2 andy —p
= 2, centre lies on-axis or
y-axis, = oy X-yp=2
Now, PC= py RG .
But circle passes through js cs O-|ck a
Vd-cr+? = fa (P+) the point Q(-4, 3). So, \ CU oF
.
;
centre lies on negative
> (h+P- =ac-(P
P+R) Sous ane
Therefore, the equation of required locus 1s 2(x° > 3 X-axis. rty=2
+ y*) — 2ex :
to-go, Let the centre be C(A, 0)
a —--————.__ y
Also, radrus, CP = distance of centre from the line a — y — 2=0 EQUATION OF CIRCLE TOUCHING ONE OR Boty tie t
(orx+y—2=0) COORDINATE AXES
|h-O-2| _ |h-2| ¥.
S2
"Peep v2
\ Also, radius, CQ = (h+ 4)? +(k et)
CO=CP S,
+
(ha 2Y" =n 44 + (0-3
-2 - >
S;
f Ca. B)
=> i+ 20h + 46=0 |
a | p
rl weLne)
~20+ J 207 - 4(46)
=> h=— 4
1 ___ eggs ay
OR P a
h=-1043V6
2 2 h-2
Thus. equation of the circle is QQ = 4)" + = f 5 ) , where
e Circle S, touches x-axis.
1s C,P = ip
h=~10+3V6 . Centre of the circle 1s C\(@, B). Clearly, radius
Therefore, equation of circle 1s
ILLUSTRATION 4.13 (x- a) + (v- BY = B
A circle touches the line y = x at a point P such that OP = 4v2, e Circle S, touches y-axis
is C,0= &
Centre of the circle is C,(@, B). Clearly, radius
where Q is the origin. The circle contains the point (-10, 2) in 1S
Therefore, equation of circle
its interior and the length of its chord on the line x + y = 0 is
6V2. Determine the equation of the circle. (x - a + (y- BP = oF
® Circle S; touches both the axes
Clearly, radius 15
Sol. Let 4B be the length of chord intercepted by the circle Centre of the circle 1s C3(@, @).
oni +x=0. C,R = C;T= |a4
Therefore, equation of circle 1s ,
Let CM be perpendicular to BA from center C(h, &).
wy (x- a)? +(y-ay = or
x+v=0 x-y=0
ILLUSTRATION 4.14
_B
point (0,4)
ML Find the equations of circles touching y-axis at the
and cutting the x-axis in a chord of length 6 units
AWC x
ny Sol. Circles touch the y-axis at point P(0. 4)
P ay
to each other
Also. y— x = 0 and y + x = Oare perpendicular (0, 4)P, —ae
Therefore, OPCM is a rectangle. So,
CM = OP = 4N2
Let r be the radius of the circle.
Also, AM = 3V2.
Therefore, in ACAM,
AC = AM + MC? Intercept OR of circle on x-axis is 6 units.
or = = (3V2)* + (4N2) OM =3
or r= (5N2)° Also, C 1s centre of one of the circles.
or r= 5N2 CM=4
Also, the coordinates of P are In triangle CMQ, we have
(0 - 4V2 cos 45°, 0 — 4V2 sin 45°) or (-4, -4) CQ? = OM + CM =3° +4
The slope of PC 1s —] and CP = 5V2. CQ =5= CP = radius
Therefore, the coordinates of C are Therefore, centre of the circle lying in first qua drant
1s C(5, 4)
(-4 + 5v2 cos 135°, -4 + 5V2 sin 135°) or (-9, 1) Thus, equation of circle is (x — 5)° + (vy — 4)? =25.
Hence, equation of the circle 1s Equation of circle having centre C(-5, 4) in secon
d quadrant
(x +9) +(y- 1)?
= 50
(x +5)? +(y— 4)? = 25.
or x + yy + 18x-2y
+ 32=0
_
ee
=“
ULUSTRATION 4.15 :
=> (pt+q-rer=50
Cirle 4.5
rind the possible equation of circle whi ch touche Since (p, q) lies on the circle, we have
s both the
axes and the straight line 4x + 3y = 6,
p’+q? ~2rp-2rg+P=0
| sol. since the circle touche
s both the axes, its eq => (p+q-r) —2pq=0
uation takes
=> 50 — 2pq =0
the form
(x-ay + (v-a) =a" => pq =25
y Therefore, area of rectangle = 25 sq. units.
ILLUSTRATION 4.17
A variable circle passes through the point A(a, ) and touches

the x-axis. Show that the locus of the other end of the diameter
through A 1s (x - a)” = 4by.
Sol. As shown in the figure, the variable circle passes through
Oo x the point A(a, 6) and touches the x-axis at point P
4x + 3p =6
ay
Also, circle touches the line 4x + 3y - 6 =0
So, the distance of centre of the circle from the line is equal to
its radius. (a, b \A/
|4a+3a-6| _
=k o>)
Vi6+9
= Ta—6=+5a
> a=3or1/2 O P *
Therefore, possible equations of circle are
(x- 1/2" + (y- 12) = 1/4 Let the other end of diameter of the circle through 4 be B(h. k)
and (x-3)?+(p-3)=9 hta k+b
So, centre of the circle 1s C ze .
>
~
ILLUSTRATION 4.16
AB
A circle passing through the vertex C of a rectangle ABCD Radius of the circle, CP = 7
and touching its sides AB and AD at M and N, respectively. If
the distance from C to the line segment MN is equal to 5 units, k+b|_ \(h—a)? +(k-by°
then find the area of the rectangle ABCD.
2 | 2
Sol. Let us take AB and AD as coordinate axes. Squaring and simplifying, we get (A — a)" = 4bk.
ay
Therefore, required equation of the locus is (x — a)- = 4by
GENERAL FORM OF EQUATION OF CIRCLE

dD C(p, 9)
P(r,r) The general equation of circle is taken as
(0, r)Nj }
e+ y? + gx + 2Art+c=0 (1)
where g, fand c are constants.
Al wow -B” This equation can be put in centre-radius form as
Ifr is the radius of circle, then equation of circle touching both

the axes is
(xtgy +(y+ fF = (Veer)
Thus, centre of the circle is
Cs eal a ae a be 7 ( coefficient of x coefficient of}
© x+y x - Irv +7 =0 “SSF | =
2 , 2
Let point C be (p, q). However, for this formula of centre, coefficients of x”
2
and 3
2
Equation of line MN is x + y—r=0. must be unity
Distance of MN from C 1s 5 units.
Also, radius is yg? + f?—c .
[p+q-rl|
73
_ 5
If g” +f —~c> 0, then we have real circle.
C(\, -2) and radius is
For given circle, centre Is
If g’ + f° - c= 0, then radius of circle ts zcr0. Hence, equation
b) 2 « 'p ]
of circle becomes (\ + ey +(") 4P — 0, which represents the Jie? +2 (4) =3

radius 0 be C\(A. &)-
point (~g, —f) or pot eirele having Let image of Cin the line
no real circle —2(2(1) — 3(-2) +5) =~?
Ifert+ fe -—o <0, then we have
i ml
h-V_ k+2_
tion m variables \ and
Now. recall general second-degree equa 2 -3 (2)? +(-3)7
v,. Whieh ts
Qgrt fete 0 h-—vandk=4
art bv 4d av ge circle 1s C\(-3, 4).
circle fa = 6 and h Z 0. Thus, centre of the ima
This equation represents bg ch #0. 4y=9
Met af e circle 15 (x + 3° +-
Also. we must have A =
he 4 Hence, equation of the imag
0 and
cirele (hay ing radius 0), a = h, =
However, for pomt 4.22
ILLUSTRATION
A=0 s of
uch a way that sum of the square
A point is moving ins
om it to the sides of an equilatera}
ILLUSTRATION 4.18 perpendiculars drawn fr
+ 69 = 0 that its Jocus 1s 4 circle
gh + 37 = bgy + 30v triangle 1s constant Prove
If the equation pv +4 (2 - g.
tl ne values of p and
represents a circle, then find Sol. ¥
and 1400, Ye
the vv term docs not occur
Sol. In the equation of cirele,
the coefticients of and +> are equal Th erefore.
2 qg = Qo g = 2 NO |
>
and p= . | uM
Also. for these values of p and q, the

circle 1s real
| (h,k)
ILLUSTRATION 4.19 |
with tan OL Caw ‘
If v4 —21 + 2m +a +3 =0 represents the real circle
nonzero radius. then find the values ofa ral triangle be (-a, 0) and (a.
0)
Let vertices B and C of equilate
al
For circle 17 +37 - 2a t+2m
4
+a+3 = (0, we have
Sol. OA = OB tan 60° = av3
g=-l.f=aandc=a+3
A= (0, aV3)
For real circle with nonzero radius,
gt
5
~e>0
Let point P be (A, &) fm s.
and BC aretv3+1-av3=9 and
Equations of AC
or }+a°-(at+3)70
aa 220 x3 - yt av3 = 0, respectively
or
or (a-2Xat+1)>0 According to the question,
1e a<-l or a>2 PI? + PM + PN® = constant (sa¥ A) +
. [B erke | ( v3a= b+ ¥3e | =

ILLUSTRATION 4.20 kK + |-=sa +|—-
f >
9 \ -
the ratio of its distance
“
A point P moves In such a way that

a fixed number (#1). 6h + 6-4 Rak + 6a ~ 4A =0
from two coplanar points 1s always i 23 —
Then. identify the locus of the point.
See61" ~ 4V3av- 6a" - 44 =¢
Hence, the required locus 1s 6x7 ~
Let P(x,¥)
Sol Let two coplanar points be A(0, 0) and B(a, 0) which 1s a circle
be the variable point 4.23
ILLUSTRATION
AP
According to question, — = A are four distinct points ona
siewy EP If (m,, V/m,),m,>0,4= 1,2, 3, 4,
wae _ = 4: (where Ais any fixed number and A # 1) circle, then show that manny = t.
TY
4. are four distinct
=
3,
fx ayry Sol. Given that (mm, L/m,),m, > O.1= L2.
points ona
-7
circle
or dl oe _ ta? - 2ax) = 0
Prong tec =0
Let the equation of circle be w+ 17 + 280%
‘’ >
|
~
which 1s the equation of a circle As the point (a, 1/m) les on il, we have
’
ILLUSTRATION 4.21 mr + Jt, + 29m pena =0

ue mS
Find the image of the circle + ye o2e i 4y 4 Ointhe line or m+
44
Jem)
i) Peg
bone + tm
tny
+ 1-0
2e-37- 5-0 Since my, mo, my, and my are the roots of this equation, the produc!
Sol. The image of the circle on the dine will be carcle having of roots ts lie,
same radius mynimiym, |
€
Circle 4.7
-ohatel : we ¢ g get
rercePt aia Putting x = 0 in the equation of circle,
q ~ . . ?
~ of the methods to find the intercepts of circle on axes 1S

une equation with the axes, BE wY oe 9-0
3y'-0
ote method uses the standard formula for Intercepts Thus, circle touches the y-axis ;
consider the following circle. So, length of intercept on y-axis 15 0,
Be Dig 2 Vel Vhs =
yt teevt At c=0
rt) () ILLUSTRATION 4.25
| If the intercepts of the variable circle on the x = a y -axes
‘ — are
2 units and 4 units, respectively, then find the Jocu
: t centre of the variable circle.
| | 2 2. © 2gDor + 2fv ,
k Sol. Let the equation of variable circle be « + 3°
a +¢=0.
{ We have to find the locus of the centre C(-g, -/)

CT te Wee wy According to the question, we have
Hr
) sa ——— ; 7
| 4 z 2jg?-«
=2 and 2 f?-c =4
o -6= land f?-c=4

To. solve this circle with y-axis, we puty=0. Eliminating c, we get
ere f-g?=3or
(SP -(-g"=3 3
-2¢+ 4g" -4¢ - Therefore, required locus 1s y* - x? = 3.
\= ~ 5 = 42 + g -c
Thus. circle intersects y-axis at 4[-2-g*=e. 9] and FQUATION OF CIRCLE PASSING ~H2acuGe Types
t-g=yg" ~c. 0}. POINTS
Intercept on x-axis, 4B = (-2 4: |g? ~c}-(-2 - Ig? -c| The general equation of circle, 1. x- see ert 2h mes U
contains three independent constants g. fand ¢
= |g = Hence, for determining the equation of a circle. three points or
three conditions are required to form three equations in g. fandc
Similarly. points of intersection of circle with y-axis are If circle passes through three points (v1), i= 1.2. 3. then we
C0-f-Vf- ~c] and Dio. —felf? ~c| and intercept on have three equations
apty? + 2¢x, + 2A, +¢= 0. r= 1k a 3
uss CD= 2) f?2 ~c.
olving ng
Solvi these three equati
these three a ons Ss.Wee get value
get values ofsg.g. fandc
of
F the circle x? + y" + 10x

- 6y Find the equation of the circle which passes through the points
scien lengthof yntereept which the cusle.s ty:
~9=0 makes on the axes. . (1, -2), (4, -3) and whose center lies on the line 3x +
4y = 7.
Sol. Comparing the given equation with x+y + ex + Ifyte Sol. Let the equation of the circle be
=O. we get
$=3,f=-Bando=8 V+ lent nde =o (1)
If(1) passes through the points (1,
-2) and (4, —3). then
;
Length of intercept on x-axis = 2° 5+ 2g-4f+c=0
— ¢ (2)
and 25 4 8g -6/+¢ =0
2.15a 9 = g
(3)
Since the center wd
(-g..-/
’ ) hes on the line .3) edy=
2 » Weh
We have
Length of intercept on y-axis = 2 V f=

:
% +(? i RY 4168
Solving (2), “ and OY wy a
-
— “= 15> {= 5: dnd ¢ = 3
. = ay(-3
—3)°
? -9
-9 =( 4 Bs
4S, circle touches the y-axis
Substituting in . (1), :
the equation :of the circle 1s
Altematively, putting y = 0 in the equation IS} 1S? Ody + Sy + 55 =0
of circle, we get
2 +10x+9=0
ILLUSTRATION 4.27
7 4 I(x+9)=0
Show that a cyclic quadrilateral is formed
4S, points of intersection with x-axis are A(-1, 0) and B(-9, by the lines
0). Sx+ 3y=9, x= 3y, x=y,andx+4y+2=9 taken in order
Us, AB=g.
Find the equation of the circumcircle.
4.8 Coordinate Geometry _ re
ne
triangle wh, |
ing i
the given equation In pairs s taken in order, t he 13. Prove that the locus of the centroid of the
sin f, —b cos ft), and (1, 0,
of the ve rtices of the quadrilateral
ABCD are vertices are (a cos f, a sin f), (b
SoRin
coor tes ttl
dinaisena
where / 1s a parameter, is circle.
- 13)
43.4). 80.0. {-§-§): 24 p(42, 14. Find the locus of center of circle of radius
ept
2 units, 7
cut on the
intercept cut on the x-axis is twice of interc
First, we will find the equation of the circle passing through 4, B,
and C. Let the equation of this circle be y-axis by the circle. |
ty? + 2px t rt c=0 OD ANSWERS _ _
The coordinates of the pomts 4. B. and C must satisfy (1). So,

| 8 2. x +P 2x-dyt1 a4
substituting in (1), we have
| 3. (x 1% +t 1 =!
3e4 7 t+e+S=0 (2)
4. Radius = 4 units; Centre C(I, -2)
c=0 (3) 5. (x-+ 3)? (y+ 1)? = 38 6. 2x+2v-5=0
and 4g +87 -9¢=%0 (4)
%
4.. (2;-2yor (2,2) 8. b=5

Solving (2), (3). and (4), we get ¢ = —10/9,f= 5/6, and c = 0. 9. 8 10. (--1,2)
Substituting in (1), the equation of the circle through the vertices | 12. 10 values 14. 4x°-= 12
4, B. and C is
D7 +H — 20a + 15y=0 (5)
Since the coordinates of the vertex D(42/17,—19/17) also satisfy
SOME MORE FORMS OF EQUATION
(5).
a cycle quadnlateral ABCD 1s formed by the given lines, and (5) OF CIRCLE
is the equation of the circumcircle of the quadrilateral
EQUATION OF CIRCLE HAVING GIVEN END Points
CONCEPT
OF CHORD WHICH SUBTENDS GIVEN ANGLE AT THe
APPLIGATION EXERGSISE 4.1
CIRCUMFERENCE
1. If a circle whose center 1s (1, -3) touches the line — Let the end points of given chord of Pix, y)
3a ~ 4v — 5 = 0, then find its radius.
circle be A(x,, y;) and B(x», v3). Let 7%
2. Find the equation of the circle which touches the x-axis AB subtends an angle @ at variable
and whose center is (1, 2).
point P on the circumference. __
3. Find the equation of circle which touches both the axes The equation of circle is the (x,,\,)4: Bix, ¥-}
and the line x = 2. equation of the locus of point P such ae
4. If 2x + y= 0 is the equation ofa diameter of the circle that ZAPB = @. 9
which touches the lines 4x ~ 3y + 10 = 0 and 4x — 3y - 30
= 0, then find the centre and radius of the circle. Slope of AP, m, ==o
a —
PD)
5. Find the equation of the circle with centre at (3, -1) and |
which cuts off an intercept of length 6 units from the line |
2x — Sy + 18=0. Slope of BP, m, = ~—2
| = x4
6. If one end of the diameter ts (1, 1) and the other end lies |
on the line x + y = 3, then find the locus of the centre of | vo yp MS Vy
the circle.
tan @= at os
7. Tangent drawn from the point P(4, 0) to the circle
x? + y° = 8 touches it at the point 4 in the first quadrant. ee OR Le
X-x, Ji x-x,
Find the coordinates of another point B on the circle such
that AB = 4.
(v= )(a—)-(x-4)(y- Vy
8. If the line x + 2by + 7 = 01s a diameter of the circle (x-2,)(x-1,)+(r=(y-y)(
at UE)
y- ¥x)
urd
x? +3? — 6x + 2y = 0, then find the value of b.
Hence, equations of required circ
9. Find the length of the intercept that the circle x? + y? + 10x les are
— 6y + 9 = 0 makes on the x-axis. (x-x,)(x- xy) +(v=4, \(v-y3)
| 10. If one end of a diameter of the circle 2x” + 2y? ~ 4x - 8y = tot O[(» — », )(x- x)= (x-x,)
+2 =0 is (3, 2), then find the other end of the diameter. (»-»,)]
11. Prove that the locus of the point that moves such that the ILLUSTRATION 4.28
sum of the squares of its distances from the three vertices Find the equation of the circle
if the chor
of a triangle is constant is a circle. (1, 2) and (3, 1) subtends 90° at the d of the circle joining
12. Find the number of integral values of A for which
center of the circle.
x+y t+dAxt (1 —Ay +5 = 01s the equation of a circle Sol. The chord joining points A(1, 2) and B(-3, 1) subten
ds ”
whace at the center of the circle. Then AB
rading cannot exceed 5. subtends an anol
| _ es a oe __ Circle 4-9
Crele_ 4.9
pert
)# (= 2-1)
| | = tcot4s[(r ~2OQ4+3)-CQ-DOr Sol. Ao aya’
=))
y+ y+2-3r-1= t[4r—y-~ 7) :
uf vti t+ av—7v4+6=Oand 3
24 Wri ‘OO, OF
—
or — R- 0
ee ee,
B
,
LQuatioN OF CIRCLE HAVING GIVIN END POINTS
From the figure, clearly the points O, 4, P and B are concyclic and
OF DIAMETER
if chord 4B joming 4(.,, 14) Pa.y) OP 1s diameter of the circle
nd BOs.a Vz) is diameter of v Thus, equation of circumcircle of triangle PAB 1s
a
eirele. then for any point (acavja Mx— x) F Wy- yy 0
mt) on the circumference, 2,02. : ey
©" | . CF TY hy Wy
JAPB= 3° \ B(x. 04)
In that case, equation of ILLUSTRATION 4.32
rele Is
: The point on a circle nearest to the point P(2, 1) 13 at
Vix=arg) a (proay hy distance
Q—aQ—y)+Qr 4 units and the farthest point 1s (6,5) Find the
1)(¥~y) equation of the
= +(cot 90°)[(1 = 4, \e~ circle
QI {xX
— xy )( vy
) ( iN . 2) Sol.
oa (\-y \v-az)+(y-3,)(v- v,)=0
This 1s the equation of the smallest circle
which goes through
points 4 and B P21) (hk _ BIG. 5)
ILLUSTRATION 4.29
In the figure, point nearest to P(2, 1) on
the circle 1s A(h. &) such
Find the
(0.1) and equat ioncachi
of csad
the circl that AP = 4 units.
baw es gituaye l whic h passe
ve pee ble s through (1, 0) and
Also, point B(6, 5) 1s on the circl
e which 1s farthest pomt from
; P.
Sol The radius will be minimum if the Clearly, 4B is diameter of the circle
g!ven points are the
endpoints of a diameter = \(6-2"
— ES +(5—1> [>
Now, PB (6~2y"+6-1)
_— = = 4
~
i—
Then, the equation of the circle 15
os AB = PB - PA = 4 2 = hy
({x-1)(x-0)+(¥-0)0 -1 =0
>, 2
ro xty-x-y=0 . at )
Thus,
=
AB = v2-1
AP 1
HLUSTRATION 4.360
. Aa= 6+2(/2 ~1) $+
If the abscissa and ordinates of two ar a -1))
points P and Q are the
Toot of sthe equationsx7 + 2ax — b? = Oa 1+(V2- Leie= 1)
ndx7 + 2px - gq? = 0,
Tespectively, then find the equ = (2+2/2. 1423)
ation of the circle with PQ
as Hence, equation of circle hav
ing 4B as diameter 1s
Sol, RnB Sid eRe
Let x), x, and y,, y) be the roots of
x? + 2ax — 2 = 0 and nt P eg
v= Dpx - g =0, respectively. Then,
ILLUSTRATION 4.3 a
4 +X) = ~2a, x,x, = —b?
and ay ae _ Let P, O, R and S be the feet of Perpendi
Th i the point (1, 1) upon the lines ¥ =3n44 culars drawn from
ang y= -3x+6
© equat
; ion of the circle with P(x), ’ ¥)) and Q(x, y5) as and their angle bisectors Tespecttve
Endpoints of diameter 15 +2 the the circle extremitlities ly. Find the ‘equanon of
i of GSE f whos “a
One OF Ars
x(x — 25) +
Whose diameters are R and S.
yyy - yy) = 0 Sol. Busee t r
Secto
wT oxty ~ #00) + 2) — WY) + Yn) + xX) 4 Yip - 0
" 2+ P+ 2ax + py - Bg
ae BAN :
=o
yo
LUSTRaTION 4.31 c
| i
Tangents drawn from the point P(x, y;) to
the circle x? + y
‘i touches the circle at A and
B. Find the equation of the
“umcircle of triangle PAB.
1ON4-35
Coordinate Geomet'y ILLUSTRAT rcle whose parametr;,
4.10
.5) and f adius of the ci
Given lines intersect
at point 4 13 Find the centre 3+2sin 8.
ar 1 +2cos Ay =
perpe! ydicul equation is <>
Angle biseetors are abvays ameter »—3
then {Bisa Iso a
di ‘
vt+l “=cos9 an pea =simn 0
So, if RS is diameter. d
hose diametet tS RS We have 5 2
Equation of the circle
Sol.
whose diameter ts {B ding. We gcl
= Equation of errele Squaring and ad
1)- 0
(a )
9
SO
Es }
e(. Da Ld
tid Wd 1o=0
sty
ra PGT
ee
or 3) and radius
15 2
IN PARAMETRIC FORM circle 1s (|.
EQUATION cr CIRCLE Centre of the
its parametric equ ation h as sine and 4.36
Since eirele is bounded curve. ILLUSTRATION of the tangents to
cosine functions hich are bonded functions of the point of intersection
Find the loc us
ose parametric angles differ
the circle x? + y= a7 at points wh
by 60°.
|
PON Sol. +
| |
|
| ‘S Rth k)
| +
i oT tte 2
I ee
O
se et ey
circl e whose parametric

angles diifer 7
Let the poi nts on the
n (@- 69°
and O(a cos (@- 60°). asi
60° be P(a cos 6. asin 8)
Q intersect at Rt.)
ametnc equation 1S \ = @ COS
8, Tangents at points P and
For the circle x7 — 3” = a”. par and POR = 30°
In the figure, ZPOQ = 60°
1 =asin @. Ge (0.27)
is the angle of line joining point In trangle OPR,
Here. @1s called parameter. which
with the horizontal axis OP = OR cos 30°
Pia cos 6. asin 8) and centre
‘0° 1s
also expressed as P(9). Here.
Point Pla cos 8 asin 4) 1s genie ie 8
angle of point P
called parameter or parametne
\ = ha
= a", parametric equation 15 Hence, locus of R 1s 30 + rjy=4
For circle (x - hy 7 (y- ky
€ [0, 27)
cos 6.3 =A 7 asin 6. 6 ILLUSTRATION 4.37
4(-a, 0) and Bia, 0}

4.34 A circle yo ey =a? meets the \-axis at
{LLUSTRATION
se that a- B=2%
form of the equation of the circle P(@) and Q(B) are two pornts on the circle
Find the parametric of intersecto2
fl where yis a constant. Find the locus of the point
pre py=9
++ of AP and BOQ.
be rewritten In the form
Sol. The equation of the circle can Sol. Let
(a Bh oly -SF 8
'
t R
; Oe
given circle ts
form of the equation of the
Therefore, the paramctnc | oy eM cos 8 asinp)
eema ee
Kee a5 cos @ i t
(a, 01 a Aaa) 78
=F (1 + ¥2 cos 8)
y= G+ Gs
and P are (a cos 0% asib
Ihe coordinates of are (-a, 0) and that of
=F(-] + V2 sin 8) Therefore, the equation of 4P ts
asin a@ +
a)
= ——_—_.
where 0 < 6< 20. a (cos @+ 1

<
Circle 4.11
aa a
ction
or y = tan 2 (x + a)
a Second-degree equation satisfying the points of interse
(1) of above two equations 1s given by
Similarly, the equation of BQ is
S, + AS, = 0
,= —asinP
Y= G(cosB- 1 9) If this equation represents equation of a circle, then the value
of A obtained by making coefficients of x’ and y equal and that
or r=-cot ait 9) (2)
by comparing coefficient of xy to zero must be equal.
We now eliminate @ and B from (1) and (2) Therefore. Equation of circle circumscribing the quadrilateral formed by
tan — = tan = =
ho)
lines L, = 0, L, = 0, Ly = 0 and L, ~ 015 given by
PsS
=
2 aty 2 \
Ely Fi Abylg 0
a
Now, a- B= -Yo yr -- B
2 2
a 5
tan oo tan P ) a-\ bs
< 2 + 7
tan y= y= fe ze 0 B
1+tan —2 tan B"4 ieee

aty at¥
7 4 > A,
; w= (a — x) 9
or an y= a c
. y (at+xjv+(a—xy
5 ) a)
vty-@
1,70 ?
2av
or vo ta° - 2av tan y= a™
Here, LL, = 0 and L,L, = 0 represent pairs of straight lines
ILLUSTRATION 4.38 Equation of circle circumscribing the tnangle formed by lines
P isthe variable point on the circle with centre at C C4 and CB L, = 0, L, = 0 and L; = 01s given by
are perpendiculars form C on x-axis and y-axis, respectively. LL, + AL,L, + pl,L, = 0.
Show that the locus of the centroid of tnangle PAB is a circle The values of A and p can be obtained by solving to equations
with centre at the centroid of tnangle CAB and radius equal to
formed by making coefficients of x and 1- equal and companng
the one-third of the radius of the given circle
coefficient of xy to zero
Sol. .
P(-g+rcos @.-f+rsin@) ILLUSTRATION 4.39
Equations of sides AB, BC, CD and D4. respectively. are

x+y-10,x-7y + 50=0, 22) - 4) — 125 =O and 2x-41 —3
(0.-f)B° ‘ara = 0. Prove that quadrilateral 4BCD 1s evche Also, find the
equation of circumcircle of ABCD
Sol. If ABCD 1s a cycle quadniateral, then the equatien of

circumeircle of ABCD will be
O A(-g, 0) “2
(x + —-10)(22, — dt 12S) + AQ -— 7 = S0K2N 4 - Sh = 0
Let the circle be x7 +)? + 2gx + 2fy+e=0 Since it represents a circle, we have
Let the centroid of triangle PAB be (h, k) Coefficient of \" = Coetticient of 17

3h=-2g+rcos 6 => 22+ 2A=-4+28A
and 3k = -2f+rsin @ ’
=> A=\1
Ss (3h+ 2g + Bkt A=
=> (x + 2¢/3 y r(yt 293) = 7/9 Also, coefficient of was zero
circle
This 1s the required Jocus which 1s a 22-44 A-4 14-0
Centre of the circle 19 (-2/3 . -2/3) which 1s centroid of the
ird of the radius of A=\
tnangle CAB and radius (7/3) which 4s one-th
Thus, value of A from two conditions ts same
the given circle.
a Se Pherefore, ABCD as cyehe quadilateral
EQUATION OF CIRCLE CIRCUMSCHIEING TRIANGII Also, equation of cirele ts
AND QUADRILATERAL | (vty POM22. dye P25) be Tee SOQ - 4-5) =0

Consider two second-degree equations In variables v and y. D4 24" LSUO 0
fic, O (1)
S, = aye + by? + 2hyxy + 2K or Ardy 125
and S$, = ay? + by? + 2haxy + 282 yt VU 2)
| |
Sol. The given circle .
EXERGIBE 4.2 ron 6F0 () | /s
CONCEPT APRUEATION
S(XV yaxtiy
1/2). 7 \
has center at C = (1/2,
Qe
1. Find the radius of the circle (x - Sa - 1) + 7) _A
—
qui redconditions,
(v-4)=0 According to the re
1, a+ 1) mus
2. Find the equations of the circles which pass through
the | the given point P(a-
circle, i-€.,
origin and cut off chords of length @ from each of
the | lie inside the given
lines y = vy and y= —y. S(a- 1, at 1)<90
-~(a—-1)-(at 1)-6<0
3. Find the equation of the circle passing through the origin or (a - 1) + (a+ 1y
and cutting intercepts of lengths 3 units and 4 units from or 0 @ -a-2<0
the positive axes.
ie, (a-2)(at 1)<90 é
4. Find the values of & for which the points (24, 34), (1, 9), or xf OEE?
line
(0, 1), and (0, 0) he ona circle. on the same side of the
Also, P and C must lie "
§. If pomts 4 and B are (1, 0) and (0, 1), respectively, and
point C is on the circle x +37 = 1, then find the locus of
Lx, yyexty-2=0
Le, L(1/2, 1/2) and L(a — 1, o + 1) must have the same Sign
the orthocenter of tnangle 4BC.
Now, since
ANSWERS
1(3.5)=3*2-2*°
+1)-2<0
we have L(a- 1, atlj)=(a-1)+(a
2 4 2 id)
X +17 +y2ax =0 and x+y? tV2ay =0 i Cuz a< 1
bad
Inequalities (2) and (4) together give the possible values of ax

44° 3-47 =0 4. 5/13 -l<a<l.
ie
ILLUSTRATION 4.41
The circle x + y* — 6x — 10y + k= 0 does not touch or intersect

the coordinate axes, and the point (1, 4) is inside the cele
GEOMETRY WITH CIRCLE
Find the range of values of k.
PIS Ss CESS. VERS COR
Let the circle be x° + y° + 2gx + 2fr' +c =0. Sol. The equation of the circle 1s ee
Centre of the circle 1s C(-g, ~/). P+ yP—6x-lOytk=0() |g GD
whose center is C(3, 5) and radius ! ss
r=N34—% ! —
* P(x), ¥y) If the circle does not touch or intersect O} _——
(-g, fC the x-axis, then radius
r<y-coordinate of center C
or V34-k <5
Point P(x,. y;) lies outside, on, or inside the circle accordingly or 34—-k< 25
as CP is greater than, equal to, or less than the radius, respectively. or k>9 -
Mathematically. Also, if the circle does not touch or
; inte tsect the y-axis, then
radius :
log +27? +0, 48) > 3. <¥e? +f? -c
rs x-coordinate of center C
or xP ty+p2gx, t+ fy te-.=,-0 or V384—-k <3
or 5S, >,=,<0; where5; ig? ty; 4 Qgx, or 34-k<~9
+ 2fy, +c.
Thus, inequality x° + y° + 2gx 4 2fy 4 ¢ ~ O represents the
region inside the circle and x" + V¥ + Qgx tb Byte represents If the point (1, 4) is inside
the circle, then
the region outside the circle. Its distance from center C <
»
or (3-1 + (5-4)? < V3GTg
ILLUSTRATION 4.40
or 5<34-—5
Find the values of o for which the point (@- 1, @+ 1) lies in or k<29
the larger segment of the circle x+y’-x-y-6=0 made by Now, a
all the Conditions (2),
the chord whose equation 1s x + y- 2 =0. : (3), and (4 atisfied 1 f
25 <k <29 which is the required ran ‘ar
ge of the values of k.
Circle 4.13
AND MINIMUM DISTANCE OF A POINT

ILLUSTRATION 4.42 MAXIMUM
Find the area of the region in which the points satisfy the FROM THE CIRCLE
+ grt te= 0.
inequali
4 <x"ties
+ 7 < 16 and 3x7 — ? > 0, Consider point P(x,, y,) and circle ety
‘Sok, The pomnts satisfying mequality 4 <.x* + * < 16 lic in the SPO, Y))
ra
region outside the circle x° + v= 4 and inside the circle x? + y =
16 as shown 1n the following figure
A" i ae
7’?
| A8 ’ Sf )
a
The centre of the circle 1s C(-g, -f) and radius (r) 1s
V2" +fr-c.
The maximum and minimum distance from P(x,, y,) to the
circle, respectively are
es
7
PB=CB+PC=r+PC
and PA=|CP-—CA|=|CP -r|
Now, 3x°-1">0
ILLUSTRATION 4.43
(V3x- »\(V3x+ »)>0
Now, draw the lines V3x- y=0Oand V3x+ y=0. Find the greatest and the least distances of point P(10, 7) from
circle x? +.” - 4x — 2y - 20 =0.
Therefore, 3x” — y" > 0 represents the following region:
ay
Sol. Centre of the given circle 1s C(2. 1) and radius ts
| °
>
3
e
é r= \(-2)? +(-17 -(-20) =5.
* +
<* \
2 Ne
Now, PC= /(l0-2)? +(7-1)? =10
oO |
Therefore,
}
60° _
°> SPREE PREIS

ILLUSTRATION 4.44
Find the points on the circle x* + y" - 2x + 4y — 20 = 0 which
are farthest and nearest to the point (—5, 6).
-3 Sol. The given circle 1s ee
ety? —2x+4y-20=0 “ B
Hence, the region of the points satisfying both the inequalities is
shown in the following figure. The center of the circle is C(1, —2) and :
the radius is r= S$. 1
‘ »y ‘
Here, point P(—S, 6) lies outside the PL 4.0 “tau
circle. Now,
6 — ae A
Slope of CP = a = 5 = tan (say)

Points A and B he at distance of 5 units from the center C.
Now, points at distance 5 units from C on the line CP are
« ((apan(3)
(lt Scos@, —2+Ssin@)
or (1 #3, -2+44)
Hence, the required area is or (-2, 2); (4, —6)
Clearly, point A(~2, 2) is nearest to P and B(4, -6) 1s farthest
= [ a4)?
- (2) ] = 8x from P.
4.14 Coordinate Geometry Consider the circle
;
Alternative method:
x+y? + 2gr + fy t= 0 }
CP = 10
and the line
Now, point A divides CP in ratio 0
_ 10-5_, yams a |
AP _ CP-AC
_f) and radius r= V2+P-
AC AC 5 Centre of the circle is C(-2,
we have
Therefore, the coordinates of A are Solving circle and line, 6
2flmx + a+c=0
)s 2) x? + (mx + ay + 2gx +
(AES n x
2 2 This equation 1s quadratic
and a circle i
the coordinates of B are Now, there are three possible cases for a line
Also, C 1s the midpoint of 4B. Hence, a plane
distinct points 4 ang
(4, -6) (1) If the line meets the circle in two
In that cage
B, then equation (3) has two distinct roots
ILLUSTRATION 4.45 Geomet nically
hes discriminant of the equation wil] be positive.
point (a+1, 3a) the line 1s less than
Find the positive values of a such that distance of centre C of the circle from
inside the region bounded by the circle s
the radius, 1.e., CP <r.
just one point P, then we
x+y? - 2x —- 3 =O and x +37 - 2x - 15=0 (11) If the line meets the circle in
P In that case,
(1) say that it 1s tangent to the circle at point
We have circles (x — 1 +y=4 so, discriminantof
Sol.
(2) equation (3) has two identical roots and centre
distance of
and = (v- 1 +3° = 16 the equation will be zero Geometrically,
C(I, 0) and radi 12 and4 from the line is equal to the radius
, 1 e.CP
Circles are concentric having centre at C of the circle
y =>
then equation (3) has
(ni) If the line doesn’t meet the circle,
equation will be
7 Q non-real roots So, discriminant of the
| Pp 5S, =0
negativ ©. Geometrically, distance of centre of the cucle
§,=0 C from the line ts more than the
radius, t.e.. CP>r
60° , ="
oF ca,03 4.46
ILLUSTRATION
Find the range 2of values of m for which the =line . y = mr 5 +2

two distinct or coincident points.
2
cuts the circle x° + y~ = | at
1s I
Sol. Centre of the given circle ts C(O, 0) and radius
Distance of centre of the circle from the given line is
line y= V3(x-1), which
Variable point (a +1, J3a) les on the jm(0)-O+2] _ 2
circ les havin g inclination 60°
passes through centre of the
s circles at P(] + 2 cos 60° 2
sin 60°) and O(1 +4 cos 60°, Vi+ m l+m
Line meet
If the line cuts the circle at two distinct or coincident points. thet
4 sin 60°).
Thus, P= (2, V3) and Q= G3, 2V3)

CREA
2
a € (2,3) <1
J+m?
>
CIRCLE => l+m->4

INTERSECTION OF LINE AND 5
m- >3
or
at all or meet the circle in one
y
A line may not meet the circle => me (-=, - v3 Ju[ v3, )
two points.
ILLUSTRATION 4.4'7
Find the range of param eter a for which the variable |i”!
— 2x -—2y +17
oes a ie between the circles x° +p? . ping
,-2v+6l=O0w
AY vos
: rithout int ersecting 0! r touc
either cirele.
Sol. The given circles are

C. &-1P +Q- IP = 17,51
and Cy (¢- 8)? +(y- 1)? =4, 7, =2
4
cucle 4-15
penne ax -a=O0willlie between these circles if the circle, w e have
centers 7 Since this line touches the given
| rthe circles lie on opposite sides of the line, i.e,
0
(1-2-4)(1 - 16-a)<0 i 2
|
2h 2k -2
— ae ls, -1)
0 1 gt
|
rhe line will not touch or intersect the circles if
4h? 4k? [24g ty yea=0.
fiqBatt..,
¢ Unl Gad) On simplifying, we get locus of point
Pas x + y ~ xy + x
gp Ww >?
| + al> V5 ,|15 +a] > 2V5
of
a>v5-lora<v5 -] OF TANGENT TO CIRCLF
ies LENGTH
P(x, ¥ ) touch the
Let the tangents drawn to circle from point
and a> 2v5-15 or a<~2V§5 - 15
and B.
Hence, the common values of a are (2V5 — 15, -V5 — 1), circle x? + y? + 2gx + 2/y + c = 0 at points A
LLUSTRATION 4.48 A-
nw
tet A = (-l, 0), B = (3, 0), and PQ be any line passing

through (4. 1) having slope m. Find the range of m for C(-g, -f)
which there exist two points on PQ at which AB subtends a
nght angle. (x), ¥,)P
B
Sol. The equation of line PQ is
(v- 1) = m(x ~ 4) We know that lengths of tangent PA and PB are equal.
Centre of the circle is C(—g, -/).
or y—-mx+4m-1=0
Now, PA = CP? - CA?
For the required 7, we have to make sure that the line PQ meets
=(x, +27 +64 +f -(¢ +f -)
the circle, with diameter AB, at real and distinct points
= eft yi + 2en + 2h ve
The equation of the circle having 4B as diameter 1s Therefore, length of tangent to circle from point P(x,. ¥;) 1s
x ty 2 3=0 api +y) + 29x, +2fy, +¢ = JS,
\(0-—m
+ 4m - 1| e
2 where 5, =x +y7 +2gx, + 26, 7
Vl +m
a «Sm -6m-3<0 ILLUSTRATION 4.50
« (2-286 3 +246) The lengths of the tangents from P(1, —1) and Q(3, 3) to a
or
circle are /2 and V6, respectively. Then, find the length of
the tangent from R(—1, —5) to the same circle.
ILLUSTRATION 4.49
Sol. Let the circle be x* +y +2ov+2 fr+c=0
The circle x7 + 3? — 4x — 4y + 4 = O18 inscribed in a variable
axes Let the tangents from points P, Q, RX touch the circle at 4, B.C.
tnangle OAB Sides OA and OB lie along the x- and y-
O 1s the origin. Find the locus of the respectively. According to question,
respectively, where
midpoint of side AB. PA?= 2
or I+l+2g-2f+c=2
Sol. Given equation of circle 1s (x - 2)’ + ayr= 2, a)
or 2g-2f+c=0
Ittouches both the axes
and PB’ =5
or 9+9+6e+6f+c=6
(0, 2k)B or 6g + 6f+c¢=-12
(2)
M From
(1) and (2),
5 Pith.) a ¢
S PE fem he
C(2, 2) 3 f 6
tr Now, RC = 1+25-2¢-10/ +c
oh oa
= 564 8H ej oy
Let the midpoint of AB be P(A, &). 3 3
‘A= (2h, 0) and B = (0, 2k) m8
So, th © RC = V38
equation of AB 1s ~oh 42s).
ul
2k
—j
ae
Find the area of the triangle formed by the tangents from the If from any point P on the circle x7 + y? + 2gx + 2f) + ¢ #9
point (4, 3) to the circle x* + y? = 9 and the line joining their tangents are drawn to the circle ,
points of contact x+y’ + 2ex + 2fy +c sin? at (g* +f) cos” = 0, then fing
the angle between the tangents (0 < a< 7/2)
Sol. Q
(4.3)P ig va Sol. Given circles are x? + y? + 2ex + 2fyt+c=0
; (I)
and x? + y* + 2ex + 2fvt+c sin’ a+ (g* + f°) cos? @=0
(2)
Q
sf
f gf 61 P(X.)
Chg. -f) .
JR
In the figure, OP = 5
PQ=4
3 Let P(x,,y,) be a point on the circle (1)
In tnangle OQP. tan @= Pi
xp + yf + 2gx, + 2fr,+c=0 (3)
1 The length of the tangent drawn from P(x,, y;) to the circle (2) js
Area of tnangle POR = 5 PQx PRsin 26
ere 2tan @ PQ= xi + y} +2ex, +2fy +esin?
a+ (g? + fF Jeos?a
2 1+ tan?@ f 2
= /-¢ +csin? a@+(g? + f*)cos’ a (Using (1))
2 3)4
= 8———> = —
192
sq. unt
= (ve? pyt ~c} cosa
The radius of the circle (2) 1s
CO= Ve+f? ~csin* a—(g* + f7)cos?@

ILLUSTRATION 4.52
= (ve? +f? =c)sinc
C, and C; are two concentne circles, the radius of C, being In ACPQ,
twice that of C; From a point P on C,, tangents PA and PB
are drawn to C). Prove that the centroid of triangle PAB lies tan @= CO | Ve? +f? -csma
=tan @
on C). FQ Vg? +f? —ccosa
0=a
Sol Let, be the radius of C, and 2r be the radius of C,. Then,
Therefore, angle between tangents 1s 2a.
OA =OB=r
and OP#=2r
Since PA and PB are tangents to C), 4 SECANT OF CIRCLE
ZOAP = ZOBP = 90° je eGo’ 4 Secants AB and CD intersect inside the circle
in Fig (a) and
Let OP meets C, at G. O°: outside the circle in Fig (b).
Let ZOPA = @. Then, a | A
OA_r_1| €, ~—“B /
sin @= OP 272
or 6=30° Cy
or ZAOP = 60°
In AOAC,
cos 60° = OA D oe
or xy =
er
OrOC=5
(a) (b)
From the figure, we have
<DCB = ZDAB and ZADC = ZABC
Hence, AADP ~ ACBP
AP _ DP
Also, CG=r-OC=
1
Clearly, CG = 3 PC CP BP
Therefore, G 1s the centroid of AABP or AP x BP=CPxDP
————
Circle 4.17
Now, CM= —=—

7)
Length of chord, AB = 2AM

l
= 2VCA-CM? = 2/4-> = vi4
P ee
Also, sing 22
=>
7
or a=sn
avi
/2
—-—
| In the above figure, secant through P cuts the circle at 4 and
B.
Tangent through P touches the circle at C.
Now, APCB aa APAC ILLUSTRATION 4.55
If the lines a,x + by + c, = 0 and anx + by + cz = 0 cut

the coordinate axes in concyclic points, then prove that
or PC’ = PA PB |a,a9| = |b,45|
Alternative method:
Let the slope of variable line through P (x), y;) be tan 6. c
Sol. Line a,x + b,y +c, = 0 mects the axes at points of - 7 : 0
Also, let the line cut the circle at 4 and B.
Equation of line 1s
SA oe p Cc
cos@-sin@ Line a,x + b,y + c, = 0 meets the axes at points a -2. 0 and
a)
x=x,+rcos 6 y=y,+rsin @ $16.2
Here, 7 is algebraic distance of the point (x, y) from the point
9 by
Play,y,) on the line.

Since points P, O, R and S are concyclic, we have
Solving line with the circle, we have
OP x OR = OQ x OS, where O 1s orgin.
(a, +r cos 6y + (y, + rsin 6)? + 2g(x, + rcos 6)
>
+ 2f(y,+rsin 0)+c=0
rt ar(x, cos 8+ y, sin 8+ g cos 6+ fsin 6)
+ (xp ty] + 2gx, + fy, +e)=0 (1)
Greases
This 1s quadratic equation in r The roots of the equation are
lengths PA and PB ILLUSTRATION 4.56
.. Product of roots,
Ifa line is drawn through a fixed point P(a@, B) to cut the circle
PAx PB=x; +y; + 2gx, + 2f, + c= constant
x’ + = @ at A and B, then find the value of P4- PB.
Also,x? + y? + 2gx, + 2fr, + c= PC’, where C 1s the point of
contact in above figure. Sol. From the figure,
PA x PB= PC P4 PB = Constant &
ILLUSTRATION 4.54
Also, P4-PB= PC ‘
3 - ne]
But PC’=O0P?-~oC
Find the length of the chord x+y? — 4y=0 along the line ? > ?
Also find the angle that the chord subtends at the

= OX. + -;”
x+y=1 pa Pla,p) 4 _ B
circumference of the larger segment. Hence, PA PB= 0 + Ba
Sol. Given circle 1s x* + 7 - 4y = 0 (1) ILLUSTRATION 4.57
Given chord 1s x +y=1 (2)
p Two circles C, and C, intersect at two distinct points
P and O
ina plane Let a line passing through P meets
circles C and
eb C, at A and B, respectively Let Y be the midpo
int of 48, and
QY meets circles C, and C, at X and Z, Tespec
tively. Then
prove that Y is the midpoint of XZ
2 a 2 :
A M B
Sol. From the figure, YP YB=¥Z 19
and YA YP=¥N yO = #
Centre of the circle is C(O, 2) and radius 1s CA = 2 But Y4=YB i.
AB 1s chord of the circle Hence, XY = YZ
AB
Mis foot of perpendicular from centre on the chord So, Y is midpoint of \VZ,
Clearly, A415 midpoint of AB
4.18 nate
ietry
CoordGeom 168 eon tO + f(y - 1) =9
OF CIRCLE BISECTED AT tert fr-ex —f 91 IN 0, which 1s equation
EQUATION OF CHORD or ty
GIVEN POINT of required locus
¥ 2+2gxt 2fvtec=
0 1s bisected
Let chord AB of the circle
v? + RCISE 4.3
—
at M(,.¥))
from tangents from the origin |
Also, foot of perpendicular Find the angl e between the two ?
ts M the circle (x ~ 7)
24 (y+ 1)= 25.
centre on the chord AB to
wtf \
If the join of (xX). ¥ ,) and
(x), ¥2) makes an obtuse angle
Slope of CAf = —— -C(-x. -f) |
(x; — x))0%3 — ¥2) + 03 ~ 4)
y + asd
ft at (xq. V3), then prove that
< ,vtg 5
Slope of chord 4B = ee M (03 - ¥2) <9
Wyt \ din the circle x + = 25. 1f 0
4B 1s (eM) B Triangle PQR 1s inscribe
Therefore. equation of chord (3, 4) and (-4, 3), respectively,
and R have coordinates .
Np
then find ZOPR
V-ye- y+ S (y- 4) le which passes through
Find the locus of centre of a circ
4 units on the line x =3
the origin and cuts offa length of
A = ty FA BB
or vy ty
+yy7 tax, thy line 8x — 4y + 73 = 9 from
2s wy thangerge tansy Find the least distance of the
Artery te - 8y — 43 =0.
=> waypt, tea trydt
the circle 16x2 + 16)" + 48x
the point (5, 3) to the
ad *
Sap typ t2gy, +2 te

+ ¢ on both sides) If the length of tangent drawn from value of k
(Adding gv, +f, 7, then find the
+x) tfyty) re arclex?+ y+ 2x thy t 17= 01s
= T=S,; where T= xx, +y), + 8 If the length of the tangent fr om any point on the circle
2fi, +e (x — ay +(e yy =r
and S,= i; +yit2gr, + (x 3y +(v + 2) = 57 to the circl e
the centre of the circle the circles
This chord 1s the farthest chord from 1s 4 units, then find the area betw een
the point A(x, 9)
among all the chords passing through Find the locus of a point which move
s so that the ratio of
is maximum, AM 1s
Since AM = AC — CM* (when CM the length of the tangents to the circl
es x7 + +4r+3=0
length among all the chords
minimum), this chord 1s of minimum and vty? 6x +5=0152 3
passing through the point AZ. drawn from any point
\2
Find the lengt h of the tang ent

on the circle x* + pe dee 20 te) = 0 to the circle
ILLUSTRATION 4.58
xi ty? t Qgx + Byte, =0
x? + y* — 2x -4y—-4
Find the equation of chord of the circle 10. A tangent 1s drawn to each of the circles
7 ~ 7 =a" and
3) which has shortest length. are mutually
x? + y? = b’ Show that if the two tangents
= 0 passing through the point (2,
r, the locus of their point of inter section Is 4
1s that one which 1s perpendicula
Sol. Clearly required chord of the circle
circle concentric with the given circles.
bisected at point (2. 3) le x = = r
So. using T= S,, equation of chor
d 1s Find the equation of chord 1B of the circPB +r
- 4(3) -4
2x + 3y—(x+2)- 2+ 3) -4=27 + 3? - 2(2) —
passing through the point P(t, 1)such that PH
= =
J2-7r
A
or xry-5=0 (O.r< JZ. ).
4.59 12. If a circle passes through points of intersection of the

ILLUSTRATION 2 bed
coordinate axes with the lines Av — 1 + 1 = O and ¥-
A vaniabl e chord of circle x? +? + 2gx + 2fy
+ c = O passes 3 = 0, then find the value of A.
d the locus of the midpoint of
through the point P(x;, ¥)) Fin 13. Two variable chords 4B and BC of a circle ere
=r
the chord. are such that 4B = BC =r. Find the locus of the point of
of the variable chord AB intersection of tangents at 4 and C. |
Sol. Let M(h, k) be the midpoint the line
. If the circle av + wo — 4v - 81 — 5 = O intersects
:. Equation of the chord AB 1s
he + ky t glx t hy t fly thy t c= +k + gh + fk tc 3x - 4y = m at two distinct points, then find the values ©
(Using 7 = S,) of m |
of which the biggest isa’ +
wel |
P(x, y;), we have . Three concentric circles,
Since chord AB passes through have their radu in AP If the Ine vy =x + 1 cuts all the |
+2gh+kre
7 ky + glx, thy My +hyte =hW+kh |
hx,
KP + gh + fk circles at real and distinet points, then find the interval 1?
hx, + ky > 8% * hy I? +
or which the common difference of AP will le |
M15
Equation of locus of point 16. Find the middle point of the chord of the circle Daas
2225
|
vigxd ly
xx, + YN) + BX + fy, xk intercepted on the line v— 29 = 2 |
Alternative method: I
17. locus of the the midpoint of the chord of the circle
i d the > tecus
Fin |
CM Slope of AB v4 y= 2y ~ 2y— 2 = 0, which makes an angle of 120 at
Since CM L AB, slope of
keg. Uo --} the centre |
k+f k= 3;
y *
Ccle 4.19
18. Through a fixed point (A,
4), secants ar. € drawn Equation of tangent to circle (x — hy + (y- ky =P at point
circle ¥ +)" = 7° to the
Show that the locus of P(x), ¥,) on it ts given by (x -—A)(x, — hk) + ( - &) (Y, — A) = r.
t he midpoints of
the secants by the circle 1s Equation of tangent to circle x’ +3" =a’ at point P(A) ie,
x? + v=hy+ ky
P(a cos @, a sin 6) 1s (a cos @)x + (a sin A)y = a’ or (cos @)x +
—— ANSWERS (sm Ov =a
. 90° 3. 3
m 4. +6. =13 ILLUSTRATION 4.60
25
5. 7 . & =4 7. 6x Tangent to circle x7 + y° = 5 at (1, -2) also touches the
g, 5x7 + Sy + 601 +7=0 9% Yor-c, circle x* + y* — 8x + 6y + 20 = 0 Find the coordinate of the
corresponding point of contact
Hy ¥>'s 12, A=2 13. +4 = 4)2
Sol. Equation of tangent to x? +" =Sat(1,-2)isx-2y-5=0
14. -35<m<15 15. se(ot{it)
Solving thts with the second circle, we get
2 V2
16. (2/5, 4/5) 17. (v— 1y +(- 1° any (2v +5)’ + y*- 8(2v +5) + 6y + 20=0
517 + 10v+5=0
(v+1y¥=0
Yuyry
y=~]
TANGENT AND NORMAL TO CIRCLE x=-2+5=3
FQUATION OF TANGENT TO CIRCLE AT A GIVEN Thus, point of contact on second circle is (3, -1)
POINT ON THE CIRCLE
ILLUSTRATION 4.61
Consider circle having equation eta 4+ 2e. +2 +c =0 (1)
We want to find the equation Find the equation of tangent at the end pomnts of diameter of
of tangent at point P(a,, 1,) on the circle (x ~ a)? + (y - by’ = °° which 1s inclined at an angle
P(x), 44)
curcle ” 8 with positive v-axis
Centre of the circle is C(—g. -/) Sol. Diameter makes an angle @ with v-axis
CP 1s perpendicular to tangent at -,
So, the slope of diameter 1s tan 8
point P O-g-A
ytf
Slope of CP = —
x,+g
R P .S] +z
. Slope
pe of
o ang tangent al at p point’ = ~ 1 +f
Slope of tangent can also be obtained using differentiation

Differentiating equation (J), wrt x, We get
a _ dy
2x+21Dy ge +2g+2/
9 2
he
——=0
Let this diameter meet the circle at points 4 and B

Thus, the coordinates of -( and B are given by (a + r cos @
dy
eee
ay +f btrsin 8)
This is the slope of tangent at point (x, y) on the circle1s Therefore, equations of tangents at pomts 4 and B are given by
point P(X), y,) on the circle
So, the slope of tangent at (a—aYat+ cos @—a)+ — b\b+? sin A= b)= r
ote or t(v -a) cos 8+ ry — b) sin @=7
y +f: or (v-a) cos 6+ (\— 6) sin @= +7
at point P 1s
Then equation of tangent ILLUSTRATION 4.62
+
py)
A chord of the circle «° + 97 — 4y — 6v = 0 passing through
spc EE
B Ses 1
+
an9x, +f Ere ia
xx, tyy, .
text far 2 7M 24 the origin subtends an angle tan (7) at the point where the
or yi *é
$a(xtx) tft
or XX, + yy,
2 a) circle meets positive y-axes, Find the equation of the chord

es
He ind (ee, ty Foren both sides]
ar as
Or xx, t+ yy, + 8 + x1) Pai esi) hes on the circle}
+y,te=O Sol. Chord OA subtends an angle @ = tan (7) at point B
ON V-aXts
(+y)te
From the geometrical properties of the circle, we know that
vy) c
Se rome
or Pad, where
gx? by xx," by Wy» 2x ZAOB = ZAOT, where OT1s tangent at ongin
B Xpression T 1s obtained DEE eplacin
by heP equatio n of circle
Y(x+x,) and 2y by (yt y)) nt
>
4.20 Coordinate Geometry ge = = _ ae Se
cos@ . cos@ ) a cos” 8
wv
1 = mx™.~ 7 sing \ I+sin@) 1—sin?@

: re ° Thus, QR subtends right angle at centre.
5 \
4
| 3 EQUATION OF TANGENT TO CIRCLE HAVING Given
'A
, 2 SLOPE
\1 Consider a circle having the equation

vty? +2gxt 2fy+c=0 (1)
= + ax
4 y “A 2 Be Centre of the circle 1s C(—g, —/).
7 Let line y = mx + a touches the circle at point P.
3 CP = radius
Equation of tangent at (0. 0) 1s
ma |m(-g)+
= — = for
ft+al_ g
p2_
t+fio-c
—2(x + 0) - 3(v + 0) = 0
m +1
or 2x + 31 =0
Let the slope of OA be m ~% _mg+f+a=tVm’ +1 Ig? +f? -¢
’
7 mes = axme~¥f tle file" f? -¢
47 a Putting the value of ain y = mx + a, we get

yeumeeng—fRNie +1 Vg? + fre
7 |3m+2 - : 5
@ 4 |3-2m or y+ famaxtgtvm tye? +f -—c,meR

> 21-14m=12m+8 (Taking positive sign) These are equations of tangents to circle (1) having slope m.
> 26m = 13 Clearly, these two tangents are parallel at the end points of
> m=1/2 some diameter
The value of @1n y = mx + @can also be obtained by solving
Therefore. the equation of chord OA 1s x — 2y = 0.
line and circle and comparing the discriminant of the resulting
quadratic equation to zero.
ILLUSTRATION 4.63
For circle x° + y* = a’, equation of tangent having slope mis
Two parallel tangents to a given circle are cut by a third
tangent in the points R and Q. Show that the lines from R and y=mxtavm +1
Q to the centre of the circle are mutually perpendicular. Thus, if line y = mx + a@ touches the circle x +37" = a’. then
a ia am + a’.
SoL t5 R _— :
To find the point of contact, we solve the line and circle.
-
- x? + (mx + @P =a
eP(a cos 8, a sin 8) => (1 + m?)x? + 2ammx + OF - a? = 0
ah sp Since discriminant of the above quadratic 1s zero, we have
—-am
‘ yea nem+ +1
| Q
; pe eT
bd
Consider the circle x7 +? =a 7 “om +1 me +l

Let the two parallel tangents be y= a and y = -a.
. -—am a
Third tangent at point P(a cos 6, a sin @) 1s cos @x + sin Oy =a So, point of contact 1s ( ~ —; ).
m-+lom- +)
a i ” :
Solving these with y = ta, we get x = aFasind Putting the value of @, we get the points of contact as
cosO -
ut+asin@ fet +1 a Fam’ +1
_ (a-asin6 ; ml ae
R= oo | and Qs Teg a]
Psin ee
a cos@
: on |
Slope of OR, m,= — aa
ae ee
a asus l-sin@
cos6é
For tangent v=mx+avnr +1 , the point of contact 1S
_ -a = cos@
S]
ope offo OQ, m= a+asn@ ~~ 1+sin@ f _— P
nos Vm? +1 Vm? +1

y
For tangent y = mx — av? +1 » the point Sol. Diameter makes an angle 6 with x-axis.
of contact is
So, slope of diameter is tan @.
am a Therefore, slope of tangent 1s —cot 8.
Jeet Vm’ +1 |
Hence, equations of tangents having slope ‘—cot @’ are given by
pLUSTRATION 4.64 yr =-—cot Ax-a)tr
/ 2
1+cot’@
find the equations of tangents to the circle x+y or cos 9(x-—a)+sin O(y—hb)=+tr
_ 6x4 4y
2 {2 which are parallel to the straight line 4x + 3) +5 = 9.
ILLUSTRATION 4.67
5). Given circle is x? + i -6x+4y~12=9,.
| centre of the circle 1s (3, —2) and radius
If a > 26 > 0, then find the positive value of m for which
1s
y = mx — bV1 + m’ 1s a. common tangent tor+y= b and
| (3)? +(2) -(-12) =5 (xa
+7 = 08.
given that tangents are parallel to the line 4x + 3y+5=0 se 5
| Therefore, the equations of tangents take the form 4x + 3y+c=0 Sol. y=mx-bV1 +m? isa tangent to the circle x* + y=b
pistance of centre of the circle from the tangent line is radius. for all values of m.
Bn 2D
If it also touches the circle (x — a) + y° = b*, then the
4(3)+3(-2)+k
as length of the perpendicular from its center (a, 0) on this
16+9 line is equal to the radius 6 of the circle, which gives
3 6+k=+25 ma — bV1+ m? _
+b
= k=19and-31 V1 +m?
Therefore, the equations of required tangents are 4x + 3y+19=0 Taking the negative value of the RHS, we get m= 0 So, we
and 4x + 3y;- 31 = 0. neglect it.
Alternative method: Taking the positive value of the RHS, we get
Given circle in center—radius form is (x — 3)? + (1 + 2) = 5?
ma= 2b Vl +m?
Tangents are parallel to the line 4x + 3y + 5=0,
4 or om (a* — 4b?) = 407
Slope of tangents = — 3 2b
or n=
Hence, using the equation of tangents Va? — 4b?
J +f=m(x+g)tvm $e" +f? -c,

EQUATION OF TANGENTS To CIRCLE DRAWN FROM
required equations of tangents are obtained as
>
EXTERNAL POINT
We know that from external point, two tangents can be drawn
PS 2 BYRS [ $) 41
oe) 3 to circle.
or 4x+3y+ 19 =O and 4x + 3y— 31 =0 Let tangents be drawn to circlex° + 7 + 2gv + 2f-+c=0 from
external point P(x,, »,). To find the value of slope of the tangents,
ILLUSTRATION 4.65 we take the equation of tangent as y — Vv, = m(x —x,). The distance
from the centre of the circle to this tangent line will be radius of
Prove that the line y = m(x-1)+3 1+m? —2 touches the the circle
Circlex7 + ? _ 2x + 4y — 4 = 0 for all real values of m.
|m(—z) +f — mx, ey 5 >
"Soi . 2@ 32 So, we get = = Je +f --c
Sol” The equation of given circle is (x — IY hor {y= 3",
\m? +] |
are
Therefore, equations of tangents to the circle having slope m Solving the resulting quadratic equation mn mi, we get two
yt+2=m(x-1)+ 3V 14m? values of slopes of tangents.
Alternatively, For circle x* 2 + y* = of, Equation of z one of : the tangents
having
fm?
AS any tangent tox? +? = 3? is given by y= mx + 3V1+m" , any slope mis y =mx+avl+m-* .
Bent to the given circle will be If this tangent passes through the external point P(x,, y,), then
we have °
y+2=m(x-1)+ 3V1+ m?
la en a yy = mx, +ayvil +n?
LUstRATION 4.66
Find the or (y, —mx,)?
uation of tangent at the end d pol
points of diameter of = 07 (14m?)
Circle (x a ay +(y- ea Y which is inclined at an angle @ Solving this quadratic equation in m,
we get two values of
slopes of tangents drawn from the point P
Ith positive x-axis using slope method.
4.22 — Coordinate Geometry
ILLUSTRATION 4,68 => 4h’k? — 4 — 16)(h - 16) =c*(h? - 16)"

=> = 4x*y? — 407 — 16)(x? — 16) = (x? - 16)
Find the equation of tangents to circle x7 +? — 2x + 4y-4=0
drawn from point P(2, 3) This is the required locus,
————__
Sol. Equation of the circle 1s x” +_y7 - 2x + 4v-4=0
EQUATION OF PAIR OF TANGENTS
Centre of the circle is C(1,-2)
and radius is (1) +2? -(-4) =3. Let the circle be x7 +)” = a”
Tangents are drawn to the circle from point P(2, 3). Its center and radius are C(0, 0) io
Equation of the line through point P having slope 77 1s and a, respectively. Let the given
external point be P(x,, y;). Oa, f) »C(0, 0)
y~-3=m(x- 2)
From point P(x), ¥,), two tangents a
or ma —y-2m+3=0 PT and PR can be drawn to the wd
If the line touches the circle, then the distance from the centre of circle, touching the circle at T and P/x,, y,) Rk
the circle to this line will be radius of the circle. R, respectively
m(1)
+ 2-243] _ Let Q(a, B) be on PT Then the equation of PQ 1s
rd
B-y,
yn? +1 7 yy P= (x — x))
a _ x;
(S—my = 9(m* + 1)
U
or w(a~ x,) — (B— y,)x — ay, + Bx, =0

=> Sn + 10m —16 =0
Length of 1 from C(0, 0) on PT = a (radius)
47 + $m — 8 =0
U
|Bx, — an|
—$+ 153 or —= == =a
=> m=
8 \(a— yy + (B-y,)°
Therefore. required equations of tangents are
or (Br, ~ ay.) = a? {(a- x) + (B-y,)?}
1-3-[ SES)
a= ar 1-2) Therefore, the locus of O(a, B) 1s
Or, - 29) =a’ (x—4P + -y,7}
ILLUSTRATION 4.69 or yx +2°y' — Dom, = @ he + x — 2a t+ +4 - yy}
Tangents drawn from point P to the circle x7 + y= 16 make or (xi + yy? = a2) + Pal ty-@)-aeisy- a)
the angles 6, and @, with positive x-axis. Find the locus = (xx, + yy, ~ a’)?
of
point P such that (tan 0, — tan 0) =c (constant). or (x +y’- 4a’) (x) + y—a)= (xx, +, - a’)
Sol. Let point P be (h, k) o SS, <7?
Equation of tangent to circle x° + j°=16 having slope m 1s This 1s the required equation of the pair of tangents drawn
from
(x, ¥;) to the circle
3 =mxt+4Vl4nr
Cry mg?
If tangent 1s passing through P, then
where § = x7 + fa
k = mh+4vV14m? Sj=x+y-a@
and T=xx,+yy,-a@
=> (k—mh)* =16+16m? Similarly, for circle x? + y+ 2gx + 2A + c = 0, equatio
n of
= (h’ -16)m? -2him + k? -16 = 0 pair of tangents drawn from external
point P(x, 1) is
Roots of this equation are m, and m,, where m, = tan @, and T= SS\, where S= x" + y° + 2ex + fr +e, Sy = it yp 7 gm
ms, = tan 05.
+ 2fr, +c and T= FW, tax txytfytrnjte
2hk ILLUSTRATION
Sum of roots, m, +m, = Sore 7.70
h* -16
Find the equation of pair of tangents drawn to circle x7 +"
k? -16
Product of roots, mm,
“
= —>——
h* -16
~ 2x + 4y — 4 = 0 from point P(-2, 3), Also, find the angle
between tangents.
Given that (tan 6; — tan @,)=¢
Sol. We have circle y? + y? — 2y
> m,-m,=c 4 4y-4=0o0rS=0
Tangents are drawn from point P(—2,
=> (m, + m3) — 4mm, = ¢? 3) to the circle.
Equation of pair of tangents is
2 2
[ 2hk 44 16 2 fe TP =SS,
h? -16 h* -16 or (2x + 3y — (x ~ 2) + (+3) —4y?
= (x7 + y!— 2x + dy ~ 4)((-2)? + 3? 2(-2) + 43) -4)
eeea
ea es
2 xt Sy+ 4 = 2542 4,2 Rielle= ne a
16x" + 30xy — 26x + 60) — 116
a Circle\_4.23
2 5 =) -b?
,
=0 or word ek [Using (1)]
8x" + 15xy - 13x + 30y ~ 58 = 9
Va?
Here, a=8, 6=Oandh = 15/2 orb? =ae
ifangle between tangents 1s 6, then
Therefore, a, b, and c are in GP
pet =) ay ILLUSTRATION 4.72
tan @ = |a+b| = 4
[8+0] If the straight line x - 2y + 1 = 0 intersects the circle
x+y? =25 at points P and Q, then find the coordinates of the
ne IS point of intersection of the tangents drawn at P and Q to the
8
circle x* +)" = 25,
_ae
Sol. Let R(h, k) be the point of intersection of the tangents
CHORD OF CONTACT drawn at P and Q to the given circle. Then PQ 1s the chord of the
if tangents drawn from point P(x; y 1) to the cir contact of tangents drawn from R tox + y* = 25
cle touch the
arcle at points O(x>, v,) and R(x,, ¥3), then line So, its equation 1s
OR 1s called x 2yri=0
chord of contact. hx + ky - 25=0 (1) P R
Consider the circle x? + y? + 2ex + 2fvt+e=0 It 1s given that the equation of PQ 1s a
x-2y+1=0 (2)
(%, v)Q Since (1) and (2) represent the same line, QO
we have
h_k
1 -2
_~25l
(x). ¥,)P or h=-25.k =50
Hence, the required pomt 1s (—25, 50)
(x3. ¥)R-
ILLUSTRATION 4.73
Equation of the tangent PQ 1s
XX, + Wyn + g(x + X>) f(y: oe \>) +c=0 (1)
Tangents are drawn to x’ + y’ = | from any arbitrary point
P on the line 2x + y—4=0 Prove that corresponding chords
and equation of the tangent PR is of contact pass through a fixed point and find that point.
1X3 + Yy3 + B(x + x3) + fly +93) += 0 (2)
Since (1) and (2) pass through P(x,, );), a 2x+1-4=0
XyXq + Vy + Q(X, + Xz) + LO) +2) += 0 (3) (4,4 —2n)P
X4X3 + Yyy3 + V(x, + x3) + f(y, + y3) te =0 (4)
Thus, points Q and R he on the line

xx tyy, te(xtx)t+fyty)t+e=0 (5)
or T=0, where T=xx,+ yy, ta(xtx)t/oyty)re
Equation (5) is the equation of chord of contact w.rt point P.
If point P lies on the curve, then equation (5) represents the
‘angent at point P. In that case, points P, 0 and R merge Variable point on the line 2x + y-4= 01s PU, 4—20,1eER
Equation of chord of contact of the circle x7 +)" = Lwert point Pts
ILLustTRATION 4.71 ix +(4-2)y=1
If the chord of contact of the tangents drawn rom aout - or (4y— 1) + (x - 2y)=0
ME This ts the equation of family of straight lines which are concurrent
the curcle x* + y? = a” to the circlex + = ee
crcle x +47 = <7, then prove that a, 5, and c are in GP. at point of intersection of lines 4y — 1 = 0 and \ — 2 =0
Therefore, lines are concurrent at Q(1/2, 1/4)
2 Then,
Sol. Let (h, k) be a point on xe+y=a’
, ; (1)
Reeoe DIRECTOR CIRCLE
of tangents drawn from
The equation of the chord of contact Locus of the point of intersection of perpendicular tangents to
(h, k) to x? + b? is
given circle 1s circle which ts called director circle.
(2) Consider the circle y? + 9" =a"
hx + ky = b?
This touches the circle x + y” = ¢”. Therefore, One of the equations of tangent to the circle having slope m
is given by
?
y=mxtavm'+l,meR
from the origin to the circle are
4.24 Coordinate Geometry = SS ee eel
Given that tangent s drawn
If it passes through the point P(h, k), then orthogonal. It implies that the director circle
of the circle Mus,
k=mht+avm +1 pass through the origin, 1.€., D
2p P ccnp Bsc P2n )
ath? =2at+b
=> [k — mh} = a*(m? +1)
or at+bh'=4
circle is v+y=4
=> (h? _ ayn ~ 2hkm + ik? - a=0 Thus, the locus of the center of the given
gives two values of slope (77, and my) of
This equation
tangents drawn from point P(A, k).
If tangents are perpendicular, then NORMAL TO CIRCLE
ent to circle at the pomt
mym,=—1 Since the line perpendicular to the tang
circle, normal to the
1e., product of roots 1s —1 of contact passes through the centre of the
circle. In fact,
Paint circle 1s the line passing through the centre of the
to the circl e.
h? -a*
=-1
all the diameters of the circle are normal
+c=0 .
= K-d=a'-ir Consider the circle x7 + + 2gx + 2fyt
P(x,, y,) On it is the
=> W+k=2d Equation of normal to the circle at point
centre C(—g, —/f) of the
line passing through the point P and
Therefore. required equation of locus 1s xt y = 9a"
director circle.
This equation represents a circle which 1s called
Thus, equation of normal 1s
circle
We observe that director circle 1s concentric with the given ntf
- (x-x,)
y--v=
. x +8
circle and has radius V2 times the radius of the given circle is
Thus, director circle of the circle xty' + 2grt 2fvt+ c=O0i s Equation of normal to the circle having slope m
(+e tot = 20 +f -0) yr yy = m(x— x)
~_/
Find the equations of the normals to the circle x+y -8x-

Find the length of the chord of contact with respect to the point
on the director circle of circlex7 +7 + 2ax — 2by + a” - b°=0 + 12 = 0 at the points whose ordinate 1s ~1.
by? = 27.
Sol. We have circle S, = (x + a)’ + (y- Sol. We have circle x? + y? — 8x - 2) + 12=0.
by = 4b".
Equation of director circle S, = (x + ay +(y— Centre of the circle 1s C(4, 1)
se Putting y = —1 in the equation of circle, we get

Oo 7 8x15 =0
~~~ R 5-0
=> (x -3)(x-5)=0
=> x=S5or3
Thus, the points on the circle are P(5, ~ 1) and Q(3, — 1).
Ye
Equation of normal at P is
yrl=
oe
Sas (x-5)
or 2x+y-9=0
Tangents PQ and PR are drawn to circle S, = 0 from a point P on
the director circle S, = 0. Equation of normal at Q 1s
So, OR 1s the chord of contact. -1-]
ytl=
3-4
(x-5)
In the figure, POCR 1s a square
OR = CP = Raduus of director circle = 26 or 2x-y-7=0
1 edn abies aE? 3 oti :
ILLUSTRATION 4.75 ILLUSTRATION 4277
Find the equation of the normal to the circle x +)? =3,=0
Find the locus of the centers of the circles x” + —2ax - 2by
+2=0, where a and / are parameters, sf the tangents from the parallel to the line x + 2) = 3,
origin to each of the circles are orthogonal.
4 . l
Soli; Slope of given line ts a
Sol. The given circle 1s
e+ —2ax- 2by+2=0
-2
So, slope of normal is -;
or (xa + (y- bP =a +b
Its director circle 1s Normal passes through the centre of the circle.
(x — a)? + (y — bY = 2(@ + B’ - 2) Here, centre 1s (1, 0).
a a ae
rerefOre, equation of normal is _
7, x-3y=0 8. 75 sq units
1
) »=0=-—(x-1
5% )
9. 5 10. 3(3+vi0) |
x+2y-1=0 a l
» 2 .@ le “Sr c|
11. xo tyes 12. 5 ;
CONGEPT APPLICATION EXERCISE 4.4 2 2Ve° +f
13. (3,-1) 14. x—y=0 _
j, Find the equation of the tangent to the circle
2447 - = :
xty* ax = Ay + 4 = 0 which makes equal intercepts on
the positive coordinates axes,
DIFFERENT CASES OF TWO CIRCLES
2, Find the equations of tangents to the circle x7 + y?— 22x — |
4y + 25 = 0 which are perpendicular to the line
Sx + 12y RADICAL AXIS OF TWO CIRCLES
a point which
+8=0. The radical axis of two circles 1s the locus of
nts drawn from it to the
If the line x + my + n= 015 tangent to the circle x? + y moves such that the lengths of the tange
od
= q’, then find the condition two circles are equal.

Find the equation of pair of tangents drawn from the Consider two circles,
(1)
Spex ty + 2gixt fy +e, =0
>
origin to the circle x” + y* + 20(x + y) + 20 =0

s, Find the area of the triangle formed by the positive x-axis and Spex’ t+ y+ 2gyxt Byte, =0 (2)
and the normal and the tangent to the circle x? + y* = 4 at \p
a, v3).
6. If the tangent at (3, —4) to the circle x* + py” — 4x + 2y—5 Az 4 ee
= (0 cuts the circle x? +)" + 16x + 2y+10=01in4 and B, 5, =0 f ewe
then find the midpoint of 4B. C; C, 92> 0
If 3x +)’ = 015 a tangent to a circle whose center is (2, -1),
a, - FF
Pee!
then find the equation of the other tangent to the circle

from the origin.
Let A be the center of the circle x” 4? — 2a - 4y — 20=0
Let the tangents drawn to above two circles from vanable
pe
Suppose that the tangents at the points B(I, 7) and

Find the area point P(A, k) touch the circles at A and B
D(4, -2) on the circle meet at the point C.
of quadrilateral ABCD If PA = PB, then
9. An infinite number of tangents can be drawn from (1, 2) to = Sh 4k? + 2g h42 fk +e, = Yh? +k? +2g,h4 2fik ter
the circlex7 + y° — 2x — 4) +A =0 Then find the value of A. => W+h + 2g htBkte,=h +k + 2g.h + Wk > co
|
10. Let 2x7 + \7 — 3xy = 0 be the equation of a pair of tangents
3, with center
drawn from the origin Oto acircle of radius Therefore, locus of point P 1s
of contact,
in the first quadrant. If 4 1s one of the points 2(g1 - S2)x + 2F, fy +e, -— ¢2 = 0.
find the length of OA This is equation of straight line which is called radical axis of
ll. From the vanable point 4 on a circle x? +? = 2a’, two two circles.
xt y = a which meet We observe that equation of radical axis is S$, — S, = 0.
tangents are drawn to the circle
of the circumcenter
the curve at B and C. Find the locus Notes:
| of AABC.
the chords of contact of the e Slope of radical axis 1s — si 8: and slope of line joining
12. Find the distance between yr J2
from the
| tangents to the circle et y + 2gx + 2fy+c=0
centres C, and C; of the circles ts Anh ‘
| origin and the point (g, /)- §& — $2
= 01s the
| 13. Find the point P for which the line ox + y—28 Thus, radical axis 1s perpendicular to the line joining the
|
chord of contact of the circle 27 + 2y?-3x t+ Sy-7=0 centres of the circles.
wrt. point P. e Radical axis bisects the length of common tangents between
the normal to the circle erty
| 14. Find the equation of the points ofcontact, 1.e., points P’ and P” bisect the length
| =9 at the point (3/V2, 3/2)
ANSWERS : ILLUSTRATION
of common tangents 4’B’ and A”B”, respectively
4.78 /
|
Find the equation of radical axis of the circles x* + y* — 3x }
| © xt y=+2V2
+ S5y—7 =O and 2x? + 2y" — 4x + 8p - 13 =0.
12x — Sy + 8 = O and 12x — Sy = 252 Sol. We have circles |
a(P +m?)=n? 4. 2x? + 2y’ + Sxy=0
a
x? + y?- 3x4 5y-7=0 (1) |

2V3 sq.unit
6. (-6, ~-7) and 2x? + 2y?- 4x + 8y- 13 =0 (2) |
| r
(1
a
ry ate
metn
4.26CoordGeoi as x-2=0
rd circle 18
be obtained b of the second and thi
l axi s of the tw circles can and the radical axis
+ 7 + 10y + 24) = 0
Equati on of rad ica the other in
circle from that of
subtracting the equ ati on of one
out . (x2 +? - 8x + 15)~ (x2 . (
y tha t ter ms andy’ gets cancelled ve, 8x t 10 y+ 9=0
ter, 1.¢ , of
suc h a wa
subtracting equation
(2)
the co or di na tes of the radical cen
mul tip lyi ng equ ati on (1) by 2 and then Solving (1) and (2) ,
So, 2).
from it, we get point P, are P(2, -5/
-2x +2y-1=0
or y= 2vt+1=0 Two DISJOINT CIRCLES
region nor touch each
neither have common
Two disjoint circles
O AT A lowing figure
CA L AX ES OF TH RE E CIRCLES TAKEN TW other as shown in the fol
RADI
NTRE
TIME AND RADICAL CE
:
wed
=
Consider three circles, 1 aM v
_
- Dd.
« i 4
S,= 0 é | 7 ae: €;
\ (es ry
(3)
and S; =0 nig N’ o
_$,7 0
so" 5,70 a AN
P
Ss Be Let the two circles be

(1)
ve + gx t 2fiy te = 00
Spexrt (2)
| ° | +02 =
S,= x ty’ + Qgox + Wty
\ i} Pp and radu
C,(-g), —f) and
a a . with centres C\(-g, Sf) and
> 2
andr = Vgr thr —¢2 . respectively
a a
7 2% a
S r= Ver tA 4
7 S 7
centres of the circles 1s
We observe that distance between
Ss wl
S\ *
0
ot #
more than the sum of radii
Thus, C,C)> 1") +12:
can be drawn to two
In this case, four common tangents
circles
sect at point D
Two direct common tangents PQ and P’@’ inter
and MN
Two indirect or transverse common tangents MN
= 9.
Radical axis of circles (1) and (2) 1s Sy ~ S, intersect at point 7.
Radical axis of circles (2) and (3)
1s S)— $3 = 0. Also, points C,, Cj, T and D are collinear.
of intersection Now, triangles C, MT and C,N7 are similar.
Now, equation of family of lines though point
of above two radical axes 1s oF oi i
S, — Sy + MS, -S;)= 0, A€ R. Gr GN 1
1s radical axis of Thus, point 7 divides C,C, internally in the ratio 7, . '>
For 2 = 1, we have line S, - 5, = 9, which
of three circles, taken Similarly, triangles CPD and C,QD are similar.
circles (1) and (3). Thus, three radical axes
two at a time, are concurrent CD _ CP _y
d radical
The point of concurrency of three radical axes is calle GD G0 7
centre Thus, point D divides C,C, externally tn the ratio r, : "2
three circles
Radical centre 1s the only point in the plane of If two circles have same radius, point D does not exist
s 1s same
from which Jength of tangents to three circle Length of Common Tangents between Points of Contact
In the figure, PA = PB = PC
In the figure, line QR is drawn parallel to C,C>.
ILLUSTRATION 4,79 In right angled triangle OPR, :
The equation of three circles are given x +/ =|,7°+-8&x RQ= C\C, and RP=C\P-C\R=rj-17
+15=0,x° + + 10y + 24 =0. Determine the coordinates of PQ? = RQ? — PR? =(C,C,)° -(r, - ny = (POY
the point P such that the tangents drawn from it to the circles This gives length of direct common tangents PQ and P” g
are equal in length. Now, extend C\M to point S such that MS = r,
Thus, CS 1s parallel to A/N :
Sol. We know that the point from which the lengths of tangents
In right angled triangle C\SC),
are equal in length 1s the radical center of the given three circles
15 C,S = MN and C,S = C\M+ MS = C\M+ NC)="i re
Now, the radical axis of the first two circles
(2 + -1)- (2 +¥ — Bx + 15) =O = (C,C,)’
MN* length
Thi is gives -(C\S¥ common - (7, #2) = (MNY
= (C,C,¥tangent
of indirect MN and M N
Circle 4.27
‘a yations of Common Tangents
ae 7--_o__
Therefore, the equation of any line through Q(0, 5/2) is

j the coordinates of point T be (x, yy).
aan 5 ek en al sapien
re 0 (2)
gquation of line passing through point T havin
& slope m is
y— V4 = MX — X3) dicular
If (2) is tangent to the first circle, then the length of perpen
from the center C,(1, 3) on (2) is equal to r, (radius) . Therefo re,
aeto the bylinefirst
aeof theiecircle circle, then distance from the
is radius.
‘ antre |m,—3 + 5/2|
From this condition, we will get two values of slope m for
two
indirect common tangents,
With the similar algorithm, we can get two value or (2m,- 1) =4(m' + 1)
s of slope of
ject commion tangents using point D. or 4m, -3=0
My = -j and © (As coefficient of m) 1s zero)
JLLUSTRATION 4.80
Substituting m, = —3/4 and ~ in (2), the equations of transverse
Find all the common tangents to the circles x* + y* — 2x — 6y common tangents are
+9=Qandx" +y" + 6 ~ 21+ 1 =0. Also find the lengths of 3x+4y- 10=Oand
x= 0
the direct and indirect common tangents. AB = CCP -(r)=ny
=90~0-—1y
= 16
Sol. Here. for the first circle, the center 1s C,(1, 3) and radius
rs 1
AB=4
CDP = CCP =(r ty
For the second circle, the center 1s C,(—3, 1) and radius r;, is 3. =20-(3+
1) =4
Thus. C,C3 = 2V5 and ry 2 ry = 4 or C\C, > ry + Mo, ry # Yr. Thus,
Cp=2
we have four common tangents.
Two CIRCLES TOUCHING EXTERNALLY

Let the two circles be
Saxe ty’ + 2gix+ Yfytc, =0 (1)
and S,=x°+y?
+ 2gox + Iv tc, =0 (2)
with centres C\(—g;, —/,) and C,(-g>. —;) and radu
- r= arth 4 andr, = gy +f ~c . respectvels

Let two circles touch externally as shown in the following
To find direct common tangents: figure
The coordinates of the point P dividing line C\C; 1n the ratio 7; Radical axis
rs. Le. 1.3, externally, are > SP.

a
oe R
are
.
i?
re.
1-3 1-3 )
. . Ba
C ry, fF ry Cy ~
Therefore, the equation of any line through point P(3,4) 1s
= 0.
y-4=m,(x-3)
© omx-yr4-3m,=0 (1) ses p
IF(1) 1s tangent to the first circle, then the length of perpendicular We observe that distance between
from the center C,, 3) of (1) is equal to r; (radius) Therefore, centres of the ctreles is
equal to the sum of radu
\m,-3 +4 —3m,| <f-or(i 2m jPent+] Thus, CC, = C\T+ C.T = r" + rs
(m,+1) In this case, three common tangents can be drawn to two

3m: ~ 4m,= 0 circles.
Two direct common tangents PO and ?°Y’ intersect at point D
or m,=0, 4 Point D divides C\C externally i the ratio ry 7,
If two circles have same radius, point D does not exist
Substituting m, =Qand 4/3 in (1), the equations of direct common One common tangent ts at pomt of contact 7, which ts radical
langents are y = 4 and 4x — 3y = 0. axis of two circles Whose equation ts given by S,- 5S, =0
To find transverse common tangents: Point 7 divides CC) intemally in the ratio 7; rs,
The coordinates of the point Q dividing the line C,C,1n the ratio Length of direct common tangent is given by
"\',.1e, 1.3, internally, are (0, 5/2).

PP? =(C,C,F - (7, -F = PO?
¢5 -8
_ Se tw o ci rc le s touch intemmally
n at
etryry
iommet
Ge
rtedGeo _
_e Let the
4.28Co
4.28 odina
Coor
Radical axis
figure.
ILLUSTRATIO
N 4-81 24,2
—1 0x + 4y - 20 =0 and x° + y
les vty
Show that the circ h ea ch other. Find the co
ordinates of
to uc ent
+ 14x —6y + 22
=0
the eq ua ti on of the common tang
t and
the point of contac fre
t.
at the point of contac
ea
ater fe eT
C C, !
Sol. Two circles are (1)
0
spe vty - lr tay 20 (2)
- Ort 22=0
and = S,= Y tyr t 14, 2) and radius,
centre 1s CAS;
the circle (1).
For
= 7,
r= (sy +2° -(-20) C2(-7. 3) and radius, centres of the circle
s 1s
(2). centre 1s tance between
For the circle We observe that dis
e of radi.
equal to the differenc r,|
___ Thus, C,C2 = CiT - CT=|Ai-
2 +(-2-37 2 =13=4 7% at point of contact T
one common tangent
Now. €,C2= (S477 There 1s only whose equation Is S,-
5,
ching each other extern
ally.
This common tangent Is radical axis
Thus. two circles are tou ration, r= 7°6
s C,C; internally n the = 0. y in the ration, 7.
Point of contact T divide divides CC, externall
Also, point T
18)
aa
= 19/13, 9/13)
Ts (epee
a 5
4.83
7+6 74+6 ILLUSTRATION touching the
se equation
tan gen t at poi nt of contact 1s radical axis, who
d the equ ati on of a circle with center (4. 3)
Comm on Fin
is given by S, ~ 5) = 0. circle x? ty = 1.
v4 ?
10v - 42 =0
equ ati on of co mm on tangent 1s —24x + ng the
Theref ore . - 8x - Ot k = 0 touchi
or }2y - Sy +21 =0. Sol. Let the circle be tye mmon tangent
x + y =} The n the equation of the co
circle =0
ILLUSTRATION
4.82
point of contact is S, — S, = 0 or 8x — 6 -1-k
x and x + y +c? —2by =
0 touch y+ = 1. Therefore.
If two circles x” + +c’ =2a This is a tangent to the circle
n prove that a 4s i = 1.
each other externally, the a b c +]=
= : 5
\g? +6
2by
-2ax+ 2 =Oandx’ +" — or k+1=+10
Sol The two circles are x+y? :
ne, k= -llor9
-_ Ce =
- Sr - 6 -9 =9 0 an d. 7 ¥ se
, 0) and C,(0, 5). Hence, the circles are ety
Respective centres are C\(a
daa -c” 2 andr,=
Ih?
bh’ -c
—¢? -~6y- 11 =0.
7) ~
Respective radu are have Alternative method:
each other externally, we radi
Since the two circles touch which has center C,(0. 0) and
The given circle ts ie +." = |,
center C4. 3) and radius ">.
r, = 1. The required circle has
y, then
If the circles are touching externall
ry try = CC;
or h=5- 1=4
If the circles are touching internally, then

vt vel
ry = OC; (4,3) hes outside eircle
ry (ce
or re=6
Thus, the required circles are

(x 4° +Q-
37 = lo
\\
oO ay EG OF - %O
Inthe ALL?
Two Ciecifs Tauenine ILLUSTRATION 4.84
Let the two circles

be
0
(I) oe ue equation of the smaller circle that touches the curcle
ah
Spe tye ya
(2) ty? — Land passes through the point (4, 3).
Aytc, 0
and Rime ey t dee 3) touches the crcl?
fy and Of £5 f.) and radi ry Sol. Required eirele through point 4(4,
with centres Cy(-£1:
SS, vay
Jer é th ‘ o- respectively
f
lg, 2 +f 2 -q and ry=

eee
‘
Circle 4.29
ee y aS = ee fs
From (1), we have

5, =0
2% 7 Vie 4k? =2-J(h-1P +h?
Sr \
*4(4, 3) (point (1, 0) les inside the given circl
| y
Jin? +2 = 2-4?
ey
2% i
Sy \B
+t b=4e we ava ek?
342h =4Vhe +k?
C
9 + 4h? + 12h = 16h? + 16K
Yuu
12x? + 16y? - 12x =9
This ts the required locus
This circle is smallest if 1t touches the given circle extern
ally and ILLUSTRATION 4.86
point of contact B hes on the common normal
Find the locus of the centre of a circle touching the circle
Equation of line OA ts y = or (1) x? + y? — 2x — 4y = 4 internally and tangents on which from
(1, 2) are making an angle of 60° with each other.
putnng this value of y from (1) in.x? + y= 1, we get
Sol.
Therefore, equation of circle with AB as diameter 1s

Given circle 1s x* + y* — 4p — 2x -4=0
4 3
S,oa [x ——ae |(x-4)+0-3
Q (5 5
-2) =0 Centre 1s C,(1, 2) and radius 1s r, = f(-2 +(-1)° —(-4) =3
Let the centre of the vanable circles touching given circle be
or x Bay er re Cy(A, k)
5 5 Angle between tangents drawn from C,(1. 2) to vanable circle
Required circle 1s the largest 1f given circle touches given circle 1s 60°
internally and point of contact C lies on the common normal. In triangle C,MC,,
Therefore, equation of circle with AC as diameter 1s
sin 30° = OM
3 CC;
S;= [x+Z}a-9+[y+J]o-9 =0
=> sin 30° = CoA
or P+ yt Ra Zy-5=0 1 _CA-CC, 3-CC,

=> _-= ———
2 CC, CC,
ILLUSTRATION 4,85 => CC, =2
Find the locus of centre of variable circle C, that touches the

=> (h-1) +(k-2)? =2
Cuclex + y? = 4 internally and passes through the point (1, 0). Therefore, required locus ts (4 - 1)? + (= 2)7 = 4
Sol” Given circle is x7 +y¥ = 4,
Centre of the circle 1s C,(0, 0) and radiu
s 7; = 2. TWO INTERSECTING CIRCLES
Let the centre of the variable circle touching the given circle be
Let the two circles be
Cy(h, k) and radius be ry.
We have Spex ty + ent Yi te, =0
(1)
and Spear bye 2gux + 2+, =O
CC, =r, -1, (2)
Since vanable circle passes through point P(1, 0), its radiuoDs with centres Cy(-g,, —f) and C(-g>, ~fs) and
2=CP= J(h-1? +k? radu, = V2" + ie —¢, and

r,= Vgr + fee
2 . Tespectively.
eS is

Clearly, here tangent to one A Syay
of “! ~
Common chord
circle goes through the centre te
radical axis / I>
the other circle.
ee
In this case, (COy =r + | | C,
Cc
For above equations of circles, J
we have
(g,- 2) +(f —fyy
agit fi-cterth-%
2g182 + Ah =c1 + ©
en by equations (1) ang
This is the condition for two circles giv
n centres of the circles is less (2) to intersect orthogonally.
We observe that distance betwee
ersection of Circles
than the sum of radii. Radical Axis and Orthogonal Int
C,C, <7 +h ally, then the radical axis
otherwise one circle may If two circles cut a third circle orthogon
Also. we must have CC) >|") - "2h of the two circles will pass through the cent
re of the third circle
he inside the other. OR
[rg < QQ <i th two given circles
mon tangents can be drawn. The centre of the variable circle cutting
In this case, only two direct com of the give n two circles
tangents intersect at point D, which divides C,C, orthogonally lies on the radical axis
These
extemnally in the ratio r) . ">
not exist.
If two circles have same radius, point D does
distinct points A
In the above figure, circles intersect at two
}
and B.
ch 1s radical axis whose
4B is common chord of the circle, whi
equation 1s S,; — S, = 0
n by
Length of direct common tangent Is give
PO?=(C\Cx¥ - (4-2) = PO?
Length of Common
Points of Intersection of Circles and
Chord
of circles A and B, we solve ts the circles S, = 0 and
To find the points of intersection In the figure, circle S, = 0 intersec
chord 1.e., radical axis. Using
one of the circles and the common d S;=0 orthogonally.
h of common chor
distance formula, we can find the lengt C,\P LC,P and C,Q 1 CQ.
= AC? - CM;
Also, in nght angled tnangle AMC), AM: of the first circle But C,P = C;Q = Radius of the circle S; =
0.
r, and C,M is distance of centr e les S, = 0 and S; =".
where AC, = Hence, C; lies on the radical axis of the circ
to the giver
from the common chord. as C;P and CQ are also lengths of tangents from C;
2AM= \ AC) - CM? . circles.
So, length of common chord is nd that radical cent
From the above discussion, we understa
Angle between Two Circles ts the given three eurcles
is the centre of the circle which intersec
is angle between the length of tangest
We know that angle betwee
n two curves orthogonally. The radius of this circle 1s
tion. from radical centre to any of the three circl
es.
tangents at their point of intersec
S, at 4 is line T and C\A 1s
In the figure, tangent to circle
perpendicular to this tangent. ILLUSTRATION 4.87
7’ and C,A 1s perpendicular to
Tangent to circle S, at A 1s line Cong? = Beets
If two circles (x - 1)° + (v- 3)" =r° and
values of.
= 0 intersect in two distinct points, then find the
this tangent. radius
If the angle between tangents 1s 6, then angle between
C,A and tangent 7” is = 90° - 8. C,A and tangent T is centre Ci 1,3)
Sol. We have circle (x- lL)" + Q'- 3° =P havin=g 0 having cenue
Similarly, angle between radius Sat vt 8
and radius 7, = rand circle ty?
B= 90° - 6.
Thus, ZC,AC, = 90° - 6+ 6+ 90°
— 8= 180° - 8.
C,(4, -1) and radius r= (4 +(-1P -8 3.
rule, we have
In triangle C,AC,, using cosine Circles intersect in two distinct points if
CAP + CyA? (Cy)?
6) =
cos(18- 0° 2C\A CA Jry-Q]< Cia <r tre
\lr-3]<Sart3
(Gy <i = ry |r -3|<Sandr>2
cos 6 =
uusyd
2n
-§<r-3<Sandr>2
ion of Two Circles
Orthogonal Intersect les are
2<r<8andr>2
t angle, then we say that circ
If two circles intersect at righ 2p S
.
intersecting orthogonally
Cirle 4.31
rind the angle at which the circle ILLUSTRATION 4.91
pt (y-27 =5 intersect,
Ss
( x — ]
yy
2 + 2 =
10 and Find the equation of the smallest circle which cuts circles
x+y? =1 and x’ +7 + 8x + 8y — 33 = 0 orthogonally
gol. Here, C,= (1,0) andr, = J10 |
Sol. Let the equation of the required circle be x? + y* + 2gx +
And C,= (0, 2) and r= 5.
2fvtc=0.
This circle cuts the given two circles orthogonally.
ago, CC)= VE +2? = 5, 2g(0) + 20) = -I +e,
| ifesrcles intersect at an
angle @, then
c=l
a = S2 10-5V2 and = 2(g)(4) + 2(f)(4) = -33 + c= -32
25K 2-J10-J5 gry
in4 Radius of the circle = Vg’ +fi-c
= Vg’? +(g+4)-1
ILLUSTRATION 4.89
= 2g? +8¢ +15
Ifthe two circles 2x? + 2y? — 3x + 6) +k=Ox?an
+? d
- 4x4
l0v+ 16=0 cut orthogonally, then find Ag +2) +7
the value of k.
Radius is minimum if g + 2 = 0 or g=~-2
Sol. The given circles are
x +2" - 3x + 6y+k=0 f=-2
Hence, equation of the circle is x* + y —4x-—4y+1=0
ar ¥+y—5r4+3y+ kag (1)
ILLUSTRATION 4.92
and r+ - 4x +10 +16=0 (2)
If the tangents are drawn to the circle x7 +y'=12atthe points
Smee circles cut orthogonally, then
where it meets the circle x? + 7 — 5x + 3y —2 =0, then find
the
28182 + Af =c, +c, point of intersection of these tangents. Also, find the
length of
or 2-3 )(-2) + o(3)s=4+16 common chord
t 3~15=54 l6ork=4 Sol. We have circles

Sex+y-12=0
ILLUSTRATION 4.90 and S)=x°+y?-5x+3y-2=0
Two circles passing through A(1, 2), B(2, 1) touch the line
4x+ 8y~7=0 at C and D such that ACED is a parallelogram. S=0-——- 4 S.=0
Then, find the coordinates of E
/ &
Sol The midpoint of AE must be the point of intersection of
tagonals of parallelogram
1 oc} TM Ptr, k)
WE= (h, ky
B
poll
Circles are intersecting at poin
ts 4 and B
B Tangents are drawn to circl
eS; = 0 at 4 and B. which
point P(A, k) meet at
= D AB is common chord of the
circles, Wh Ose equation ts
or Sx -3y-10=0 S; - $, = 0,
Also, line AB 1s chord of cont (3)
a ctotthe cele S, =O, wort port P.
E
Equation of 4B 1s
eke?)
So, [Att k + 2.\ must he on common tangent4x +8y A+ ky -12=0
7=0,
Equations (3) and (4) repr
esent the same straight line
, “
Ak -12
(1) S
Also, (h,Ck)omhem ae whose equation is, x + y = 3
s on AB >
<t 10
hik= 3 ho OA -18/5
5
lving (1) and (2), we get Hence, the required poin
t ts P(6, -18/5)
ao 2” ee 2 In the figure, C\M= EO =X0)=10| a0

5? +(-3) 34
oh.
e
ae _ ee
1
p s ? a ) AM xC,C, 1
A C . = z a
- le C
Coordinate | Geometry
_ Area of triang
4.32
100 154
,
AM = Cae CAE = Gap e
absin®@
In triangle CMA
= ee
@
a+b _—2abcos
AM
2absin@
154
7 = T e r a e t -2abeasd
chord. 4B =
2AM= 2 AB = 2AM cosé
mmon chord, a’ + b* —2ab
Length of common Length of co
.
ER CIRCLE
a&o3 T A I N E D IN THE OTH
ION nce CON
LLU STRAT
t = O bi se cts the circumfere that ONE CIRCLE
t dent 2A then prove TOUCHING
Ifthe circle v + vi yt wytc = 0, WITHOUT
of the circle
glee circles be (1)
Let the two = E
f fyee= c. yet Dae aA (2)
2g’'(g- 2) an ett By ="
Gren circles
are (1) and spat t yt + ext
Sol. Radical
nest ee? Radical
satin (2) axis axis
tage afrte=9 =0
gave e of the circle
0 bi se ct s the circumferenc
ugh the centre
S, = wn
circle §,=90
Iris given that ch or d of ci rcles passes thro a“
| 51 0
mmon
§.=0 So. the co S= 0
= 0. 2f-S) a
of the circle S: = -
s is 2x(g — g)yt
G£
=
d of th e ci rc le a
on chor | C C,
Equation of comm
of second circle.
ye
centre (2. Sf)
ak oS
ss es th ro ug h the
This chord pa
5,=0___ A lymg inside
ci rc le S, = 915 completely
ie a As shown in the
fi gu re ,
= 0 wi th ou t touching it.
circle S,
Cs Cele ry |
Clearly, circles have 5¢
4
i-g’.f) the circles and

meet
Radical axis doesn’t
common tangent.
.
ION aS.completely
LeusTRcleATvy contained in the cu
cle
te- 8 =
™ sp(g-2)- FI-N If the cir +y=lis
0, then find the values
of f.
ogg - Gt FU -SIre- ery txt 3ytk=
> .
s are
Solx, Given circle
(it
4.94
ILLUSTRATION to each circle) aul >?
1 iS
the two radii (one
Sci 2 aa
le be tw ee n s k= 0
1f @ 15 the ang ion of two circle Cay taut y+
om one of the pomts of intersect gth of and
drawn fr n prove that the
len
= h’, the C,(0,0), 7) = !-
>
and (x-—¢y + y
nm
yo-vre f ‘
1s SE = 23,
of two circles -3/2),. 72 =
lege elk
common chord Ja +b? ~2abcos@ CA-2,
\ 4 \ 4
(2)
y contained by circle
Circle (1) ts completel
5 -%
Sol. => C\Cer tects
ao W ob
f , {)) Af
From the figure. , oy

-c 4
ath
of k, 2 -k>0O.
.
“Kotb 2a Also, for these values
tae ub cos@ i CC
c=. a +b
— a ee
coNcEPT APPLICATION EXERCISE 4.5 FAMILY OF CIRCLES
points are required for a fixed
ow the following pair of circles are situated in the We know that three non-collinear innumerable
circle. If two points are given, then we can draw
Jane? Also, find the number of common tangents is that for which given two
= 25 circles of which the smallest circle called
(i) oa G- Ay, =? arid C= Ly’ + y? points are end points of diameter. The set
of these circles 1s
0 and x? +5? + 6x + 6y=0
12y'= radius |
s Of~ same
», If(1)the weYosingle12x having centres at (2, 3) | family of circles.
Now, two points may be given points or points of intersection
and £ , 6) cut orthogonally, then find the radius of the of intersection of two fixed
of fixed circle and fixed line or points
ae‘clei
1 circ of radius
rie Oy = §
Os —i intersects the i
circle circles. Let us find the general equation of family of circles We
(x uch a way that the length of have following possibilities:
the common chord is of maximum length. If the sl of fixed
. slope.ot 1. Family of circles through points of intersection
3
common chord 1s a . then find the centre of the circle. | circle and fixed line.
y= 1. Let given circle S = 0 and line £ = 0 intersect at two points
4, The equation of common chord of two circles 1s.x + A(x,,¥) and B(x, ¥2)- General equation of circles through
One of the circles has the end points of diameter as (1, -3) |
and (4, 1) while the other passes through the point (1, 2) | points 4 and B is given by
Then find the equation of these circles. S+ AL =0, where A € R.
s, Let two parallel lines ZL, and L, with positive slopes be
If
Here, A is a parameter.
tangent to the circle S = x +4" - 2,1 ~ 16y + 64=0
L, is also tangent to the circle S, = vty? —2x+2y-2

= (0 such that S, and S, lie on different sides of Bes then
find the equation of L,
6, Find the coordinates of the point at which the circles
x +)" - 4x — 2) = —4 and xt y — 12x — 8y = —36 touch
each other. Also find the equations of common tangents |
touching the circles at distinct points
of
1. The equation of a circle 1s x +)*=4 Find the center
line x + y =
the smallest circle touching the circle and the
52 |
= 1. Find the
8. Consider four circles (x + I~ +Qe 1)° A and B he on given circle and line. these
circles. Since points
equation of the smaller circle touching these four points also satisfy equation S+ AL =0 for any real value
equation of the circle whose radius 1s 3 and
9, Find the
-6y— 12 | of A.
which touches internally the circle ety? -4x—
2. Family of circles through points of intersection of two
= (at the point (—1, —1).- circles.
each other externally |
10. Two circles with radii a and 6 touch
Let given circles S, = 0 and S, = 0 intersect at two points
such that @ 1s the angle between the direct am circles through
2 sin’'(4 ct ). A(x,,y;) and B(x, 3). General equation of
tangents, (a > b > 2). Then prove that 6 = aang a A Sa ve ny
1 and (x - 7) |
s (x — 1~+Q- 2)’ = > = 0,
ll. Ifthe radi: of the circle wr.t. time as
1
increasing uniformly
+(y - 10)’ = 4 are at what value
respectively, then
03 unit/s and 0.4 unit/s, |
er?
of t will they touch each oth
(—2, 0) onto the
tangents drawn from
2 Let T, and T, be two the circles touching C and
ine
circle C: x2 + 7 = 1. Determ
ir pair of tangents. Furthe
r, find
having 7, and 7> as the to these
sib le common tangents
the equations of all pos
circles, when taken two at 4 time. 5
ANSWERS a terms x” and y~ get
2
for which
» .
value
» te
the
4 .
take
ere .
Here, A cannot
F} ~
—_
a 1) (i)Gnec nclé com b inside other. No comm on

- One circle completely lying cancelled out, otherwise above equation reduces to radical
tancent P axis of two circles.
i gent Th mmon tangents7
i) Touching externally Three co
(#6 26 3. Family of circles through given two points
2 — 3. (2.3) and | 95 Let given points be -l(Qa,,.)) and B(x, 3).
a Equation of circle for which AB 1s diameter is
x+y arcana ae 7 7 Al Ss(v ~x)K 49) + Y- YY - y2) = 0
so, equation of line through points A and B1
5. W2x- y411-2V2=0 a ard ya- ,
& 24,2y =3-2V2 Le y-y-2—(x-)=0
— 10, 90 ;
—X2 —X
%. Sx? 45y? gx-14y—32=0
Bis furtisTRATION 4.98)
circles through A and
Therefore, aqtiation oF family of
given by Find the equation of the smallest circle passing through
(Qa —a)Q-12) + @- HO V2) the point of intersection of the line x + y = 1 and the circle
r+y=9.
+Alv-vy 22 "Ny w=
X27 % ;
Sol. Let the given circle and line intersect at points 4 and B
line ata point is
4. Family of circles touching given
by+e = 0.
Equation of family of circles through 4 and B
Let Pr ).¥y) 18. a pomnt on the hine ax + ety -94Mxty- 1=0.AER
n touching the line
Now. mnnumerable circles can be draw
at point P as shown mm the following figure. Variable centre of the circle is ( ;
2)
;
The smallest circle of this family 1s that for which A and B ar

end points of diameter
Se | So, centre _A -4) 1 =0

x + y—d
lieson the chor
Say On vi 2" @
Sha P y art by+c=0
A A
-—-=- 1=0
~ 2 2
=> A=-
Using this value for A, the equation of the smallest circle 1s
Equation of above family of circles 1s given by ty -9-(xty- 1)=0
S+AL=0, where Ac R. wi 5
or xr ty—x-y—-8=0
Here, S = 01s the pomt circle at point P whose equation 1s
(a - Peay +("-3, "= 0 and L = 01s given line ILLUSTRATION 4.99
ILLUSTRATION 4.96 Find the equation of the circle which passes through the pomt
(1, 1) and which touches the circle x +47 ~ 4x -6y-3=0at
Prove that the equation x +j)? -2x-2ay-8=0,aER
the point (2, 3).
represents the family of circles passing through two fixed
points on x-axis Sol. Given circle 1s
Sok We have x +)" — 2x —2ay-8=0 vr +y't+4x- 6-3 =0

(x? +? - 2x - 8) -2a(y) =O,a ER Required circle touches above circle at point P(2. 3)
This equation 1s of the form § + AL = 0, which represents So, it also touches the tangent at point P to the given circle
family of circles passing through points of intersection of circle Equation of tangent at point P(2, 3) to the given circle 1s
x ~)7 —2x —8 = O and Ine y = 0 (x-axis)
2x + 3y 4+ 20¢ + 2)- 30 +3)-3 =0
Solving circle and line, we have
or x-2=0
x -2r-8=0
=> (x — 4)(x + 2)=0 Equation of family of circles touching line y ~ 2 = 0 at (2. 3)'5
=> x=4,x=-2 given by
So . circles pass through two fixed points (4, 0) and (—2 , 0) on (w-
27 +0 -37]+AQ-D=O.AER (2)
X-axis If it passes through (1, 1), then
1+4+A(-1)=Oo0rds5
ILLUSTRATION 4.97
Putting the value of A in equation (2), we get
Find the equation of the circle passing through (1, 1) and the
points of intersection of the circles x* + y* + 13x - 3y = 0 and (a - 2)? + 3)? +50 -2)=0
2x? + 2 + 4x-Ty-25 =0, or vty ty6y43 =0
This ts the required circle.
Sol. Equation of the circle passing through the points of
intersecuon of the given circles 1s ILLUSTRATION 4.100
(x2 +? + 13x - 3yy 4 MQ? 4 2? 4 4x Ty- 25)=0
Consider a family of cireles passing through two fixed pow
(1)
If this circle passes through the puint (J, 1), then AUS 7) and B(6, 5) Show that the chords in which the curcl¢
vob ~ 4y — 61 — 3 = 0 cuts the members of the family are
(1+1+13-3)+A2+2+4 7 25)=0
concurrent ata point Find the coordinates of this point
=> A= 1/2
Substituting A = 1/2 in (1), we get the equation of the required Sol. The equation of the line passing through the
circle as 4x° + 4y* + 30x — 13-25 =0 rau
A(3, 7) and B(6, 5) 1s.
———
2 ca
y-7=- 3 (x - 3)
Find the equation of the circle touching the line ||
ax + 3v-27=0
0 | 2x + 37 + 1 = 0 at (1, -1) and cutting orthogonally the |
| circle having line segment joinmg (0, 3) and (~2, —1) as ©
| so, the equation of the circle with 4 and B as the endpoints of |
diameter
(x - 3). - 6) + V7) 5) = 9 5. Avartable circle which always touches the line x +) — 2=0
|| vow, ;
the equation : at (1, 1) cuts the circle x+y? +4c+5y-6=0. Prove that
of the family of circles through 4 and B 1s
| all the common chords of intersection pass through a fixed
| 38-6) + M5) + AQ2 + By 27) =0 (1) pomt. Find that point.
| The equation of the common chord of (1) and \2 4 Wede Oy — _ ANSWERS
_qis the radical axis, which ts my =3
| I. 20° +2)? 4+ 2r+6v+1=0 2. 1 Sunit
. | [es 3)(a —~ 6) + (v - 7)
- 5) + A(Qa + 3y - 27)
| + fk adi 6 = 3) =0 3B. ve yt Qv— Sy +24 V7(e+21-2) - 0
| 4. 27+ 2y"- 10x-5y + 1-0 5. (6, 4)
of (2A-S)a + (3A — 6) + (-272 + 56) = 0
ar (-5: -6v + 56) + A(2v + 3y— 27) =0
This 1s the family of Imes which passes through the point of Solved Examples
mmersection of —5\ - 6y' + 56 =O and 2a + 31— 27=0,1¢ , (2, 23/3). i __&|
EXAMPLE 4.1
LLUSTRATION 4.101
The line Ax + By + C= 0 cuts the circle vr-vt+arth+c=0
IfC,. C, and C, belong to a family of circles through the points
(4j.})) and (\>. V3). then prove that the ratio of the lengths of at Pand QO. The line A'x + BY. + C’ = 0 cuts the circle vey
ta'x+b'y+ec'=OatRandS If P.O. R. and S are concvelic.
the tangents from any point on C; te the circles C, and C; 1s
constant. then show that
a-a’ b-bd’ c-c’
Sol. Equations of circles C,. C, and C,; through 4(.,, 1) and A B Cc =0
A’ B’ a
Bix, 1) are given by
(x=, (X= X24 (V3) = 12) Sol. P and Q are the points of intersection of the line
fir vb
L, =Ax+ By +C=0 (1)
1s) =Ay and the circle
v2,[ -y-+ (xa) J=0:r= 1.2,3
¥.— % S,exr+yt+ar+by+c=0 (2)
g(x.) Rand S are the points of intersection of the line
© f(x,y) + Ag(x,y) = 0, r= 1, 2,3 L,=A'x + By +C =0 (3)
Consider point P(A, k) on the circle C, and the circle
Sih, k) + A,g(h, k) = 0 (1) 5, = Vtirtayt+byte'=0 (4)
lt T; and T; be the lengths of the tangents from P to C, and C3, SiR,
‘espectively I, ,
Tf th, k)+Aggth, &) |
x
Th Sp (hk) + Agath, k) ~\
= L, |
J-Aglh, k) +A, g(h, k) _ A, A
_ S\ h og
7 J-Aygth, k) + Age, kK) A,-A
Clearly, this ratio 15 independent of the choice of (h, k) and hence,

“Constant, - ay
APPLIGATION EXERCISE 4.6

CONCEPT The radical axis of the cireles 8; 0 and Sy = 01s
I. If the circle x° + y? + 2x + 3y + }- 0
cuts ae uy 1 4x +t Sj Seen)
of the circle
3y+2=0atA and B, then find the cquation iG, bya(a-a th by ta -c'y=O (5)
on AB as diameter. WP, Q, RK, and S are concyelie and S, = 01s the
touches the equation of this
2. Find the radius of the smallest circle which es the line circle through P,Q, R, and S, line (1) 1s the
Straight line 3x - y= 6 at (1, —3) and also touch radical axis of the
of decimal only circles S;~ Oand S, = 0 and
‘ line (2)2 1s the radical axis
¥=x. Compute up to one place 5, = 0 and S, = 0.
axi of the i
circle
gh A(0, 1) and B(—2, 2)
» Let S, be a circle passing throu units such that 4B 1s the Thus, the straight lines given by (5),
and S, be a circle of radius VIO (1), and (3) are the radical
equation of 5).
Common chord of S, and 53. Find the axes of the circles S, = 0, S, = 0, and
S; = 0 taken in pairs
-36 Coordinate Geometry _ see a
in pairs are “Centre of the circles lies on one of the angle bisectors of the giy,
Since the radical axes of the three cir cles taken lines.
concurrent or parallel, we have
Silty 10 toler
a-a’ b-b’ c-c
,
13 13
A B C =0
wf | or 24y = -30 and 10x = 50

But centre lics in first quadrant.
EXAMPLE 4.2
dls So, for centre, x = 5
Tangents are drawn to the circle x? +)" =a’ from two points on Distance of centre C(5, y) from the line 5x + 12y - 10 =0 45 5
the x-axis, equidistant from the point (k, 0). Show that the locus
of their point of intersection is Av" = a® (kK — ¥). 5(5)+12y —10
= +3
13
Sol. t y=2 (As centre lies in first quadrant)
So, centre 1s (5, 2)
Also, in right angled triangle CMR, CR = 5 (as RM = 4)
| \\ (k-4.0) Hence, equation of circle 1s (x — 5° + (y- ay = §2
~ ra)
| \f go .
$—_—___»
Bi+A,0) EXAMPLE 4.4
| P
| (a, B) If eight distinct points can be found on the curve !xj + [yj = |
such that from each point, two mutualby perpendicular tangents
| can be drawn to the circle x“ + y° = a”, then find the range of a
? > yA
As shown in the figure, points 4 and B are equidistant from point

Sol. |x| + || = 1 forms a square having vertices at A(1, 0),
(A. 0)
BO. 1), C(-1, 0) and D(O, -1).
Tangents drawn from points 4 and B intersect at point P(a@,
B) rf
Equation of pair of tangents from point P 1s
|
(41? a") (oP + Ba) = (ax + By ay?
i 7
(Using 7 = S$,)
This equation is satisfied by points 4 and B 1
(k~ AY" — a) (+ B - a) = (afk - 4) a2? } : so
(1) (hoe a) & (1. 0) *
and ((k + AY’ — a) (oF + PP - a) = (afk + A)— ay?
Subtracting (1) from (2), we get
(2) |
(a~ f= a’\(4kA) =((k+ A)a--a +ik= oy
Aja - a’]
150 Say
(A + Aja -(k- Aja]
a = (2 (kor~ a°))[2A@] = 4Aa{ka- a’) | ,
= Ka-P-a@)=ke-va Mutually perpendicular tangents
meet on the director circle whose
= kB =a(k-a@ Cquation 1s x” + yo = 2¢°,
: > > +
Hence. the locus 1s ky? = atk —x)

Equation of circle passin 8 thr
EXAMPLE 4.3 ough vertices of square !s
vty? = 1 and its radius ts |
Lines 5x ~ 12y - 10 = O and Sx - 12y
~ 40 = 0 touc ha circle C, . inscribed
Equation of circle
of diameter 6 If the centre of C, in the circle is yo + =
ltes in the first quadrant, find Z and 1s
the equation of the circle C, whi l =
ch 1s concentric with C, and radius 1s —=
Cuts intercepts of length & unit
| s on these lines rs
For eight pomts on
Sol. According to the th are, : radius of the direIrector circle
question, circles are dra ctor circle Mm mus!
the figure wn as shown m ]
le between Pb and _
|,
G; , |
C . hus,
- Ve ~ fy ~ |
>
1) I
C \Ly ” Henee, = sae
3 Sk 2 2>
5 ° Jd
. a) t EXAMPLE 4.5
Ro [_— S$x+12v-jo29 Let 48 be the chord of
Point (5, -5) The contact of circle y2 + = Sweet the
( rangle PAB,
» en find the locus of the orthocenter of the
where P; S variable poi
nt on the circle
:
GSR Mcee
ee Se
wr pquation of chord of contact _ Circle 4.37
AB of circle x2 2 =Swrt.
it (5, -$)is “S01 4B subtends the greatest angle at C. So, the line x —y+ 1
5x-Sy= 5 orx—y=], = 0 touches the circle at C and, hence, AB is the diameter.
with the circle we get The family of circles touching the line Ae
soe a (e I=5
x~y+1=Oat pont (1, 2) is (x — 1)?
pax-2=0 t(y- 2 KA(x-y + 1)=0
5 @-DEtHD=0
Wah e(AY eran
Its radius ts : “ a
S reel2
5 ve-2 I
go, chord of contact meets the circle at A(-1, ~2) or A= 42 ih 'B
and B(2, 1)
iatpomnt P on the circle be (VS cos @, JS sin 6). Therefore, the equations of the
yaw, a8 circumcentre of the triangle P4B is circles are
or 1gin
for orthocentre (, k), we have vt+y-6y+7=0
=-l+2+ VScos @and and x +y°— 4x -2p +3 =0

k=-2414 V5 sin @
a a-l= VScos 0 andk+1= EXAMPLE 4.8
/Ssin@
squaring and adding, we get (h ~ 1)? + (& + l= 5 Let a given line L, intersects the x- and y-axes at P and Q.
Hence. required locus 1s (x — 1)* ++1P respectively. Let another line L,, perpendicular to L,, cuts the
=5
x- and the y-axis at R and S, respectively Show that the locus
EXAMPLE 4.6 of the point of intersection of the lines PS and OR is a circle
Let
P be a variable point on the circle x7 + y’~2x=1 passing through the origin.
and AB be
the chord of contact of the circle x” +5" -2x=Ow.srt.
point P Sol. From the figure in APQS,
Find the locus of the circumcentre of the tnangle CAB, C being
centre of the given circle PQ 1 SR, PROS
a
Then we have OT 1 PS (as O
Sr \ the altitudes of a triangle are |
| P concurrent) |
Therefore, points O, R, T, and S~ 6
| 2 * it A
are concyclic. ~The k) i
Aa Hence, the locus of T 1s a circle |
O Ci, 0) ~e which passes through the origin
EXAMPLE 4.9 pa
| :
| Let Sexr+y+ 2g, + 2f + c = 0 be a given circle. Find the
The two circles are locus of the foot of the perpendicular drawn from the ongin
(x-1y+y=1 (1) upon any chord of S which subtends a nght angle at the origin.
(x-1)° + =2 (2)
Sol. The equation of the given circle 1s
Clearly, the second circle is the director circle of the first circle
rt y +2grt+2fete=0 (1) ‘i
ZAPB = 90° ae
So, APBC 1s square. Let P(A, k) be the foot of perpendicular >
‘ drawn from the origin to the chord LM
Now, circumcentre of the right-angled triangle CAB will be
midpoint of hypotenuse. of circle §
PAL &Y
Let midpoint of AB be M(h, k). Slope of OP = f
Now, CM= CB sin 457 = a *, Slope of LM =— ‘4

V2 Therefore, the equation of LAL ts OW, 0) l
So, h-iree= 5 y-k=-A(Q-h)

or ky —k = ke +?
Ni[-
Hence, locus of Mis (x - 1)? +)” = orhxd ky = be (2)

Now, the combined equations of lines Joming the points
of
Ehiece 4.7 r 3 intersection of (1) and (2) to the ortgin can be obtained
by making
A and B are two points in the xy-plane, which are 2v2, unit (1) homogeneous with the help of (2) as follows,
distance apart and subtend an angle of 90° at the point C(1,2)on eee: hy + =") (4 +khy }
the line x— y + 1 = 0, which is larger than any angle subtended
by the line segment AB at any other point on the line. ind the
=by
ae
+ (levt
| reel”
All. =] +e ——S] =
“Vigve] ~9
or (H+ kA? + y*) + + kK’ )\(2gx + 2fv)\(hx + ky)
*quation(s) of the circle through the points A, B, and C. + c(hx + ky? =0 (3)
Coordinate Geometry — a
4.38 YN
yey
equation of OL and OM
Equation (3) represents the combined cos ~ sind ~"
But ZLOM = 90° or x=rcos @+x,andy=rsin 8+ y,
on curve (1) So,
Therefore, from (3), we must have For point Q or R, the above point must he
;
Coeff of x2 + Coeff of v =0 a[x, + r cos 6}" + 2A[x, +r cos @}[y, +r sin 6]
+i)
or UP + PY + 2gh(h? +R) + ch? + (2 + ey? + Of? + b[y, +r sin Of =|
+ck =0 cos 0+ hy,
or (a cos’@ + 2/ sin @cos 0+ b sin’@)r? + 2(ax,
)
or +R + ght+hk+5
=0 sin 9+ hv, cos 6+ by, sin 8) r+ (ax; + 2heyy, + by’ -
2 2 Cc
Therefore, the locus of (A. Kis ty" text fi +5 = 0. =0
It is a quadratic in r giving two values of r for PQ and PR
EXAMPLE 4.10 Therefore,
Let a circle be given by 2x(x ~ a) + W2y ~ b) = 0. (a # 0, b#0). Product of roots = PQ PR
Find the condition on a and h if two chords, each bisected by the ax, + 2hvyy, + by -1
x-axis, can be drawn to the circle from (a. 6/2)
7 acos? 9+ 2h sin @ cos 6+ bsin* 6
Sol. Here, ax’ + 2hx,y, + bv, — 1 #0 as (x), .¥;) does not Ite on curve
X-aXxXIS (1). Also,
Denominator = a cos"@ + 2h sin @cos 0+ b sin?
=a+2hsin @cos 6+ (b- a) sin’
( b-a) (1 - cos 28)
=athsin20+—>5
Bh.) Aca, b/2)
=(452)+4 sip 20+ (452) cos 20
The given circle 1s A = 0, and (a - b)/2 =0,ie,h=0
which 1s independent of @1f
2x(x ~ a) + v(2y' -— b) = 0 (a, b #0) anda=6
or a ty ar
b5020 (1) Hence, the given equation 1s a circle
Its center 1s C(a/2, b/4) EXAMPLE 4.12

Also, point A(a, 5/2) les on the circle For the circle x7 + y” =, find the value of r for which the area
Since chord 1s bisected at point B(A, 0) on the x-axis, enclosed by the tangents drawn from the point P(6, 8) to the
circle and the chord of contact 1s maximum.
we have
(Slope of BC) = (Slope of AB) = —1 Sol. The given circle is x* +_y’ = 7. From point (6, 8), tangents
are drawn to this circle.
(b/4)~0| {(62)-0)
ne (ai2)-h{] a-h | | L/ :
/| NN #0, 0)
Fes : S \
2°38
Since two such chords exist, the above equation must have two / \ . Sf
distinct real roots, for which its discriminant must be positive, L.e.,
7 ="
oe 8F-a[G+G)>0
2 2
or a> 20 P(6, 8)
EXAMPLE 4.11 Then, the length of tangent 1s
Consider a curve ax’ + 2hxy + by = | and a point P not on the PL=V6'+8?-/ =V100-r
curve. A line from point P intersects the curve at points Q and Also, the equation of chord of contact LA/ is 6x + 8y - 220
R. Ifthe product PO PR is independent of the slope of the line,
PN = Length of L from P to LM
then show that the curve 1s a circle.
Sol. The given curve ts _36+64-/ _ 100-7

(1) — ¥36+64 ~— 10
ax’ + 2hxy + by’ =!
Now, in nght-angled APLN,
Let the point P not lying on curve (1) be (x), )).
Let @ be the inclination of line through P which intersects the LN’ = PL? — PN°
given curve at Q and R (100-r*)? (100 — 7)r?
The equation of line through P is
= (100
~ 7) ~ —T99-— = —F00
sane _ _ 4-39
Circle
__ rN100-17
of an nM ;
M= rV100 — 77
L 5 ( LM=2LN)
Area of APLM = A= x LM x PN
-1, Vl00=7 , 100 — 7° (0, 1A) Lt)
' : 10
= T00 [r(100 - ra a | ‘ /
gor the maximum value of A, we should have — Ma? gf _ >t

ds -0 O A(1, 0)
i
| l ni, 3
? |= 0
+ r5 (100 ~1)'(27)
aes
aio. cp= UMD=t 2 mal
a dp [90-") so, = el
i +m?
a ~ 377} =0
[100 = 7° )!
(10*0-7 Jl +m?
2 5
re. r= loorr=5
. DE=2PE=2NCE? -CP* = zit |} M2 i
gut r= 10 gives the length of tangent PL. Therefore, r + 10 +m* L+m
Hence. r= 5
ew eqaarynmr E,
‘ g DEB,
Area of triangle
EXAMPLE’ 4.13" 1
4 circle of radrus | unit touches positive x-axis and positive a= 5 BM x DE
j-axis at 4 and B, respectively A variable line passing through
2 oe ee ec y2m
ongin intersects the circle in two points D and E The area of
the mangle DEB 1s maximum when the slope of the line is m “3 | 2 l+m? 1l+m
Lom
Find the value of #7.
Differentiating A w.r.t m, we get
Sol The equation of the circle 1s ,
Q-1¥=1 14m?) —2mVm >
y-1¥ +
yy. ~ — 7 4
J2Jm(1+ my
~
OY
Y-4x~-
c— Pre
2) ’ =
(1) dm (l+my
Let the equation of the variable straight line through origin be
y= mx (2)
Ths line intersects the circle at two points D and E. If 2. 0, then m= _ . which 1s point of maxima
dm 3
Distance of line from point B(0, 1) 1s l
Therefore, area is maximum tf 7” =
jm(O)-1|_ 1]
oH
BM= “hem?
— ham?
amt
—_—_—_
2 4 Dax + Zby +c = O represents a circle, If

a
9. fx) = vty ing 2, and I./(0. y) = 0 has
ual roots, each be
Single Correct Answer
Type f{(x,0)=Oh as eq the cir cle is
then the center of
led 2 and 3 as its roots,
point (a, )) is cal (2) Data are not sufficient
1. The number of r
ational point(s) [a s] on the (1) (2, 5/2)
mber Data are meconsistent,
both are r ationa } nu (4)
rational, if a and b e) Is (3) (-2 5/2)
cle having center (7, ral triangle
circumference of a cir crcumcircle of an equilate triangle 1s
(2) at least two 10. The equation of the ~ (and one vert ex of the
(1) at most one is 2gxt afytc=
4 + gle ts
of the incirc le of the trian
(3) exactly two
(4) infinite (1, 1). The equation
circle which has norm
als (x — 1)
() e+e +h
2. The equation of the
+ 4y = 618 40 2 +37 ) + 8g x + B = (1 — gl + 3g)+ (1-1 + 3)
— 2) = (and a tangent 3y (2)
(3) 4(a2 +92) + Bex + BREF
SW
(1) pey- 24+ 420

(4) none of these
vty od -4+5=0
le which circumscribes the
ves 11. If itis possible to draw a triang and ts inscribed
ayer
circle (x — (@— 2p)? + - (at By)’ = |
a) a-ar te 4P=5 by x? +y _2x— 4y +
J = 0, then
on of side BC 1s x v= 9 The
3. In mangle ABC, the equati ]
Why
of the triangle are (2, 3) and (2) B=
circumcenter and orthocenter (I) B= -3
on of the circumeircle of the
(5. 8). respectively The equati 5
tnangle 1s @) a=2 (4) a= -5 pA
2 4+37-4x-6 - 27=0
3
(I) circle (x cos @+ y SIN @ ~ ay -
12. The locus of centre of the
=! Q) Fr +1 — 4-6 — 36= 0 COS &— by = Ie if a vanes, tS
(x sin @&— y
3) Yrv-4r-6 - 24=0 aah
” (2) euy
(1) e-ypaeth
(4) x ty? - 4-6 - 15 =0 (3) P+Ppaath (4) r+y= ab
region common to the two ered at the origin. Two
4. A rhombus 1s inscribed in the 13. A circle of radius unity 1s cent
+ 4x-12=0 with two the point(1. 9)
24.2
circles x + 3" — 4x-12 =Oandx° + particles start moving at the same ume from
ction. One of
of its vertices on the lune joining the centers of t he circles and move around the circle in opposit e dire
the particle moves anticlockwise wit h constant speed
The area of the rhombus 1s
(2) 4V3 sq. units v and the other moves clockwise wit h constant speed
(1) 8N3_ sq. units fi rst ata
(4) none of these 3y After leaving (1, 0), the two particles meet
(3) 6V3. sq. units The
point P, and continue until they meet next at point 0
5. The locus of the center of the circles such that the point
coordinates of the point Q are
(2. 3) 1s the midpoint of the chord 5x +2y = 161s (4) (-1.0)
qd) (0) (0(2) (3) (0,=1)
(1) 2x-5 11=0
+ y) (2) 2x+5y-11=0 angent fo Qo
14. ABCD 1s a square of unit area. A circle 1s t
(3) 2x7 S5y+11=0 (4) none of these
sides of ABCD and passes through exactly one of 15
passing through
6. Consider a family of circles which are vertices. The radius of the circle ts
s If (A, k) are
the point (—1, |) and are tangent to the x-axi (1) 2- v2 (2) v2-1
set of
the coordinates of the center of the circles, then the
values of k 1s given by the interval (3) 1/2 (4) uv?
15. A circle of constant radius a passes through the ongin
O and cuts the axes of coordinates at points P and QO: Then
the equation of the locus of the foot of perpendicular from
Oto PQ is
4. The line 2x y + J = O15 tangent to the circle at
les on x 2"
the post
— 4 The
: I mate
(7 eve) as
(2. 5) and the center of the circle
radius of the circle 1s (2) "5 | Aeti +i)2 “at
(1) 3V5 (2) 53 (3) 245 (4) 5V2
(" et "(ih + ) = dar
cucle (3)
8. Anght-angled 1sosceles tnangle is inseribed in the aw
x+y - 4x—-2y—4= 0 then length of its side 1s

(4) 4v2 (4) ¢° Wwe Toe # Fa) =a
(1) 3N2— (2): 2N2 (3) v2
a—___—_—_—_——— a,
Circle 4-41
— — —
point on the
‘g, and
Thecirclex° Let P be a point on the circle x? +y* =9, Qa
B(3, 4) at+ "= 4 cuts the line joining the points A(1 0) 24,
tor of PQ
two points,P and Q. Let BP/PA = & ai line 7x + y + 3 = 0, and the perpendicular bisec
s of P are
BOIQA = B. Then @ and B are the roots of the quadratic be the line x — y + 1 = 0, Then the coordinate
equation
(1) (0,-3) (2) (0, 3)
(1) 3x? 16x + 21 =0 (2). xr -sye7=0 (4) (-72/25, 21/25)
(3) (72/25, 21/25)
| 3) o-9e+8=0 (4) none of these 25. The locus of the center of the circle touch
ing the line
| 17, Ifa circle of constant radius 3k passes through the ongin

Q and meets the coordinate axes at 4 and B, then the locus
2x-y=tat(l,
(1) x+3y=2
1) is
(2) et 2p=3
of the centroid of triangle OAB 1s (G3) x+v=2 (4) none of these
(ly +07 = (2k? (2) + jp= (RY
26. A triangle 1s inscribed in a circle of radius | The
distance
(a) Pty" = 4K? (4) a7 +? = (6k)? between the orthocenter and the circumcenter of the
triangle cannot be
18. (~6. 0). (0, 6), and (—7, 7) are the vertices of a AABC. The (1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3/2 (4) 4
incircle of the triangle has equation
27. The equation of the chord of the circle x+y -3x-4y-4
(1) +i" — 9x - 9 + 36=0 = 0, which passes through the origin such that the origin
Q) x +1" + 9x — 9p + 36 =0 divides it in the ratio 4 I, ts
(1) x=0 (2) 24x+
Ty =0
(3) +17 + 9x + 91 - 36 =0 (4) 7x-24y=0
(3) 7x +24y =0
(4) x+y" + 18x - 18y + 36=0 28. If OA and OB are equal perpendicular chords of the circles
19. If O is the ongin and OP and O@ are the tangents from x? +" —2x + 4y = 0, then the equations of OA and OB are,
the origin to the circle x’ + y" ~ 6x + 4) + 8 = 0, then the where O ts the origin,
circumcenter of triangle OPQ 1s (1) 3x+y=Oand 3x-y=0
(1) (3, -2) (2) (3/2,-1) (2) 3xt+y=Oor3y—x=0

(3) (3/4, -1/2) (4) (-3/2, 1) (3) x+3y=Oandy-3x=0
(4) xt+y=Oorx-y=0
20. The difference between the radu of the largest and
29. A region in the x-y plane is bounded by the curve
the smallest circles which have their center on the
circumference of the circle x° + 3” + 2x + 4y - 4= 0 and p= V25—- x” and the line y=0. Ifthe point (a, a ~ 1) hes
pass through the point (a. 5) lying outside the given circle in the interior of the region, then
1s (1) ae (-4,3) (2) ae (-«,-1)
€ (3. x)
(3) ae (-1, 3) (4) none of these
(1) 6 (2) \(a+ 1) + (b+2)° 30. A circle 1s inscribed in a rhombous ABCD with one angle
(3) 3 (4) \(at 1)? +(b+2) -3 60° The distance from the center of the circle to the nearest
vertex 1s equal to 1. IfP is any point on the circle. then
21. If the conics whose equations are S = sin?@ x? + 2hxy IPA +|PBI +\PCl +\PDI is equal to
+ cos’@ 7 + 32x + l6y + 19 = 0, S' = cos’ x? + 2h'xy (1) 12 (2) 11
concyclic
+ sin?@y? + 16x + 32y + 19 = 0 intersect at four (3) 9 (4) none of these
points, then, (where @ € R) 31. The equation of a line inclined at an angle of 7/4 to the
(1) h+h'=0 (2) heh X-axis, such that the two circles x7 + 3° = 4 and x +"
— 10x — 14y + 65 = 0 intercept equal lengths on it, 1s
(3) At+h'=] (4) none of these
(1) 2x-2y-3=0 (2) 22-21 +3=0
RQ are drawn to
22. Froma point R(5, 8), two tangents RP and (3) x-yt+6=0 (4) 1-1-6=0
circumcenter
a given circle S = 0 whose radius is 5. If the 32. If the chord y = ma + | of the circles a> + 17 = 1 subtends
of the circle
of triangle POR 1s (2, 3), then the equation an angle of 45° at the major segment of the circle, then the
S=0Ois value of #19
(1) vey 42x + 4y- 20=0 (1) 2 (2) -2
(3) -1 (4) none of these
(2) xP +y?+x+2y-10=0
(3) x? +y-x-2y-20=0 33. A straight line /; with equation x — 2y + 10 = 0 meets the
circle with equation x” + y” = 100 at Bin the first quadrant
(4) x +5? —4x~- 6y- 12 =0
A line through B perpendicular to /, cuts the y-axis at
the coordinates
23. The ends of a quadrant of a circle have P(O, t). The value of f is
circle is
(1, 3) and (3, 1) Then the center of such a
6) 449 (4) (2, 6) (I) 12 @) 1S) 20 (4) 25
(1) 2,2) Qan
.
—_——— ooo
to pass through (1, 0) and

——
ee a
4.42 Coordinate Geometry 44, Thec ircles which can be drawn
is drawn from an angle 6. They
(3, 0) and to touch the y-axis intersect at
circle yey =4
34, A variable chord of the B.
the circle at the points A and
the point P(3. 5) meeting PB.
cos @is equal to
chord such that 2PO = PA+ 1/3 (3) 1/4 (4) -1/4
A point Q is taken on this (1) 1/2 (2)
The locus of Q 1s _ The locus of the midpoints of the chords of contact of
1018 a citole
() Vtrtantar=0 (2) vi ti" = 36 2 + =2 from the points on the line 3x + 4y=
-31- Sv =0 l to
(3) ver =16 (4) vty with center ?. If O 1s the origin, then OP 1s equa
r for which the point (3) 1/2 (4) 13
35 . The range of values of (1) 2 (2) 3
s x —Axyt a4
Ifa circle of radius r ts touching the line
the major
(-5 + Be -3+ 5] is an interior point of 46.
the area of
in the first quadrant at pornts A and B, then
segment of the circle 47 = 16, cut-off by the line 1s
triangle OAB (O being the origin)
yty=2.is
(1) 3v3 7/4 (2) V¥3r7/4
(1) (7. $v2)
(2) (av2 = v14, 52) (3) 3r°/4 (4) °
(3) (4N2 - 14, v2 + VI4)
47, The locus of the midpoints of the chords of the circle
(4) none of these + y- ax - by = 0 which subtend a right angle at
=0
36, A square is inscribed tn the circle vty -2vt+4y-93 (a/2, b/2) 1s
with its sides parallel to the coordinate axes The coordinates (1) ax+by=0
of its vertices are
(2) axtby= a+b?
(1) (6, -9). (6. 5). (8. -9), (8, 5)
(2) (-6. 9), (6, -5), (8. -9), (8, 5) Qa) Pty?-av-by+ 2% =0
oe L b
(3) (6, -9). (6, 5), (8. 9), (8, 5) by- a =U
(4) x°+3"-ax-
(4) (-6. -9), (6. 5). (8, -9), (8. —5)
48. A circle through the point of intersection R of the lines
37. If a line passes through the point P(1, -2) and cuts the lines at powts
2x-—v=! and 3x+y=2 intersects these
circle x7 + 1° —a —1' = 0 at 4 and B, then the maximum an acute angle
P and Q, respectively, such that ZPRQ is
value of PA + PB 1s its centre ts
Then the angle subtended by the arc PQ at
a) V2 (2) 8 (3) V8 (4) 2v8 (1) 180°
38. The area of the tnangle formed by joining the origin to the (2) 90°
points of intersection of the line xV5 + 2y = 3V5 and the (3) 120°
circle * +17 = 101s
(4) Depends on centre and radius
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 5 (4) 6
49, If the pair of straight lines vvy3 — x7 = 0 1s tangent to the
39. If (a. B) 1s a point on the circle whose center 1s on the circle at P and Q from the ongin O such that the area of the
x-axis and which touches the line x + y = 0 at (2, —2), then smaller sector formed by CP and CQ 1s 32sq_ unit, where
the greatest value of 1s C is the center of the circle, then OP equals
(1) 4-~2 (2)6 (3) 4+2V2 (4) 4+V2 (1) (3V3)/2 (2) 3\3.
40. The area bounded by the circles x° + y= la? + y= 4,
(3) 3 (4) v3
and the pair of lines V3 (x? + y’) = 4xy in first quadrant 1s
. The condition that the chord x cos @ rv sin@~ P= Oe
equal to
+ Rig We y= a" gettin= 0 may subtend a night angle at the cent of
(1) wW2 (2) 52/2 (3) 32 (4) 7/4 the circle is
41. The number of integra) values of » for which the chord of (1)
. .
av =2p- 2) g = ar
the circle x7 ~ 5° = 125 passing through the point P(8,y) gets
(3) a=2p (4) p=2a
bisected at the point (8, y) and has integral slope 1s
(2) 6 (3) 4 (4) 2 51. The centers of'a set of circles, each of radius 3, he on the
(1) &
circle \~ ty" = 25, The locus of any point in the set ls
42. The straight line x cos @ + y sin G= 2 will touch the circle
ety -2e=On (I) 4<Vavsod
(1) @=na,ne/ (2) A (Qn ' Iyamnes (3) yt > 2s
(3) G@=2natnel (4) none of these §2; The equation of the locus of the middle point of
a chord
43. The range of valucs of A, A ~ 0, such that the angle 0 of the cirele wf 4° = 2(\ + ») such that the pair
of lines
between the pair of tangents drawn from (A, 0) to the circle Jomming the origin to the point of intersection of the chor
x+y? =4 hes in (7/2, 27/3) 1s and the circle are equally inclined to the x-axis 1S
(1) (43,22) (2) (0,V2) (lI) x+y=2 (2) r-y=2
(3) (1,2) (4) none of these (3)3 2
2v-ys]
-y=
(4) none of these
«3, The angle between the pair of tangents drawn from a point 2d +d, d, + 2d,
*" pio the circle x° + v" + 4x ~ 6y +9 sin? + 13 costa =0 (1) 5 (2) 2

1s 2a@ Then the equation of the locus of the point P 1s did;
4=0 (3) d, +d, 4) Fa,
(1) vid 4v-6v4 1S
h the line 2y = gv +
(2) vr ka -6y-9=0 62. The range of values of a for whic
2g + 2gy-2= 0 for all
(3) tied 4 b6r~4=
0 a normal to the circle x + y +
values of g is
(4) C4 vd 4r-6r49=0
(2) [Fle @) (0,1) (4) (-», 1)
gg. If two distinct chords drawn from the point (p, g) on the (1) {I%) 2-2
x? + y° = a’, which
circle v +." ~ py ~ qv ~ 0 (where pq # 0) are bisected by 63. The equation of the tangent to the circle
axes, 1S
the x-axis, then makes a triangle of arca a’ with the coordinate
(I) pag (2) p?=8¢" (1) xty=+a (2) xt y= +av2
(3) p< 84° (4) p? > 8¢ (3) x+y =3a (4) xt y= 42a
+ y = 9,
ss, Ifone of the diameters of the circle ety -Ir=6y+6=0 64. From an arbitrary pot P on the circle x?
x° + = 1, which meet
is acchord to the circle with center (2, 1), then the radius tangents are drawn to the circle
of intersection
of the circle ts x+y? =9atA and B The locus of the point
(1) v3 (2) v2 (3) 3 (4) 2 of tangents at A and B to the circle x° + 3° = 918
(1) ety? =(27/7P (2) x -y? =(27/7/
56. Through the point P(3, 4) a pair of perpendicular lines are
drawn which meet 1-axis at the points 4 and B The locus 3) Y= =Q7TY (4) none of these
PQ
of incentre of triangle PAB is _ Ifthe radius of the circumeircle of triangle TPQ, where
point T with
(1) y-1" — 6x - 8 +25 =0 ts the chord of contact corresponding to the
respect to the circle vty? -2e+4) - 11 =0, 1s 12 units,
Q) ti - 61-81 +25 =0
then the mmimum distance of 7 from the director circle of
(3) P-1' +6. + Bvt 25=0 the given circle 1s
(4) vty + 6+ 8y + 25=0 (2) 12 (3) 6v2 (4) 12-4N2
(1) 6
87, Acircle with center (a. ) passes through the ongin The
66. A straight line moves such that the algebraic sum of the
equation of the tangent to the circle at the origin 1s perpendiculars drawn to it from two fixed points 1s equal
(1) ax- by =0 by =0
(2) ax+ to 2k. Then, the straight line always touches a fixed circle
of radius
(3) bx-ayv=0 (4) bx +ayv=0
(1) 2k (2) ki2
§8. A straight line with slope 2 and y-intercept 5 touches the (3) k (4) none of these
the
circle x7 +3" + 16x + 121+ ¢ = 0 ata point Q Then 67. If the line ax + by = 2 1s a normal to the circle xr + —4r
1
coordinates of O are - 4y = 0 and a tangent to the circle vit av = 1, then
(1) (6, 11) (2) (9, -13)
(3) (-10,-15) (4) (-6,-7)
(1) a=3,6-3 Q) a= SE pew
59. The locus of the point from which the lengths
of the (3) a=1,5=3 (4) a=1,b=%3
— 10x +3y
tangents to the circles vt y = 4 and 2(x° + y) 68. A light ray gets reflected from vy = —2. If the reflected ray
~2=0 are equal is touches the circle x* + 17 = 4 and the point of incident 1s
the line joining the
(1) a straight line inclined at 7/4 with (-2, -4), then the equation of the incident ray 1s
centers of the circles (1) 4y+3x+22=0 (2) 3yt+4i+20=0
(2) acircle (3) 4y+2x+20=0 (4) v+1+6=0
(3) an ellipse 69, A tangent at a point on the circle x° + 17 = a" intersects a
line joining the
(4) a straight Ime perpendicular to the concentric circle C at two points P and Q The tangents to
centers of the circles the circle C at P and Q meet at a point on the cirele a7 + 1°
circle + y + 6x + 6y
60. Ifthe tangent at the point P on the = 6 Then the equation of the circle C 1s
on the
=2 meets a straight line 5x ~ 2y + 6 = 0 at a point Q (1) x+y =ab (2) rt =(a—bP
y-axis, then the length of PQ Is (3) er +y=(a+ by @) rte arth
() 4 2) 25 (3) S (4) 3V5 70. The greatest integral value of a such that
at A and B. A circle 1s
61. A line meets the coordinate axes 2
/9 -qa’+2x-y 2 2 | 16—\" > for
fj at least one positive
|f d, and dy, are the
circumscribed about the triangle OAB. value of +
at the origin O from
distances of the tangents to the circle
of the (1) 8 (2) 7
the points 4 and B, respectively, then the diameter
Circle 1s (3) 6 (4) 4
3) and (5, ,
co ng ru en t ci rc le s with centered at (2,
71. The chords of contact of tangents from three po ints A, B, 79. Two , have radius equal to
A, B, which intersect at right angles
and C to the circle x? + y* = a” are concurrent. Then (2) 3
and C will
(1) 22
(4) none of these
(3) 4
y= i
(1) be concyclic center of the aisle Pome
80. The distance from the 5x- By +] a9
clesx + y’ +
the common chord of the cir
(2) be collinear
(3) form the vertices of a triangle
andxt tye sx ty 25 =0is
(4) none of these (2) 4 (3) 34/13 (4) 26/17
circle (1) 2
72. The chord of contact of tangents from a point ? toa 81. C, 1s. a circle of radius 1 unit
touching x-axis and y-axss
tangents
passes through Q. If/, and /, are the lengths of the C, is another circle of radius > | and
touching the axes as
from P and Q to the circle, then PQ is equal to radi us of C, 1s
well as the circle C,. Then the
I,-1,
Ith
(2) (iy 3-22 (2) 3+2V2
() 5
(3) 3+2v3 (4) 6+v3
GQ) W+. (4) E+ are in AP be
82. Suppose ax + by + ¢ = 0, where a, 5, and ¢
73. If the circle x" +)" + 2gx + 2fr + c = 0 is touched by v= x normal to a family of circles. The equation of the circle of
at P such that OP = 6V2, then the value of c is +y - 4x-4y-[=9
the family intersecting the circle x
(1) 36 (2) 144
orthogonally is
(4) none of these
(3) 72 (1) x ty’ -2xt+4y-3=0
74, Tangents P4 and PB are drawn to x+y? = 9 from any 2) ety +2x-4y-3=0
arbitrary point P on the line x + v = 25. The locus of the (3) x +y-2x+4y-5=0
midpoint of chord AB 1s
(2) 25(x7 + 97) = 3(x +9) (4) x +y?-2x-4y+3=0
(1) 2507 +37) = 9(x +5)
(3) SQ +9°)=3(x +) (4) none of these 83. Two circles of radii a and 6 touching each other externally.
are inscribed in the area bounded by y = V1—x and the
75. Acarcle with raduus ja/ and center on the y-axis slides along
x-axis. If b =1/2, then a 1s equal to
it and a variable line through (a, 0) cuts the circle at points P
and Q. The region in which the point of intersection of the (1) 1/4 (2) 1/8 (3) 1/2 (4) uv2
tangents to the circle at points P and Q lies is represented by
84. If the length of the common chord of two circles r -¥ =
(1) 7 >4(axr-@) (2) y <4(ax- a’) 8x +1=Oandx?+y? +2uv-1=01s 2Y6, then the values
(3) y>4(ax- a) (4) y <4(ax - a’) of u are
76. Consider a circle x +4” + ax + by + c = 0 lying completely (1) +2 (2) +3
in the first quadrant. If m, and m, are the maximum and (3) +4 (4) none of these
minimum values of /x for all ordered pairs (x, y) on the 85. If r, and r, are the radii of the smallest and the largest
circumference of the circle, then the value of (2, +m) 1s
2ab circles, respectively, which pass through (5, 6) and touch
a —4c the circle (x — 2)" + yw = 4, then 7,7; is
fl) b? - 4c (2) bh? -~4¢
(1) 31/4) (2) 414 3) 413 (4) 17
2ab 2ab
4) —-22—
5 86. If C,.x° +)" = (3 + 2V2) is a circle and PA and PB are 3
(3) 4c—b° (9) b* — 4ac
pair of tangents on C,, where P is any point on the director
77. The squared length of the intercept made by the line x = A
circle of C,, then the radius of the smallest circle which
on the pair of tangents drawn from the origin to the circle
touches C, externally and also the two tangents Pa and PBs
x+y +2gx+ Yyt+e=Ois
(1) 2V3 -3 (2) 2V2-1
ach’
(J
}
lg
(g?-cy
+f?-0) 87.
(3) 2V2-1 (4) 1
P is a point (a, 5) in the first quadrant. If the 0vo cureles
spe
4ch ( 24? ?
which pass through P and touch both the coordinates aX°
(2) “* Cc) cut at right angles, then
(f? -cy (1) a= 6ub+b?=0 (2) a2 +2ab-6°=0
4ch? i)
(3) «a —4ab+ Bb =0 (4) a? - 8ab+ b=0
(3) = — a ie ee 88. The number of common tangent(s) to the circles
(g?-f’y v ° a? hy? 4 2a + 8p 23 = 0 and x2 +y? — 4x — 1Oyt 19 798
(4) none of these
(1) | (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
78. Let AB be the chord of contact of the point (3, 3) wort the 89. cut the circles
circle x° + y = 9. Then the locus of the orthocentre of the The locus of the centers of the circles which
x" + y' + 4x — 6y + 9 = 0 and x2 +y? - 5xt+4y-2 *
APAB, where P 1s any point moving on the circle is orthogonally is
(1) (e-3)"? +432 =9 (2) (-37 +043) =9/2 (1) 9x+10y-7=0 (2) x-y+2=0
(3) (x+3P +(—y-3% =9 (4) (+3) +(y-3P =9/2 (3) 9x-10y+11=0 (4) 9x+10y+7=0
a
—_——_
“0. Jangents are drawn to the Circle 4.45
se: . y2 = | nea he points
circle ex x2 + +p=1a
where it is met by the circles x2 4 yr -( (t 99. If the circumference of the circle x° + y? + 8x + 8y-—b=0
- 3 = 0,4 being the var —(A+6)x+ (8-
2A)y 1s bisected by the circle x? + y? -2x+4y+a=0, thena+b
iable. The locus of
inters ection of these tangen the point of equals
ts 15
(1) 2x- y+10=0 (1) 50 (2) 56 (3) -56 (4) —34
(2) x+2p- 19=9
(3) x- 2y+10=0 100.
(4) 2x+y- Equation of circle which cuts the circle x’ + y? + 2x+ 4y—4
10=9
= (and the lines yy 2x~ 5 + 2 = 0 orthogonally, 1s
91. If the line x cos @ + Ysmn@=2 is the equation of a
transverse common tangent to the ci (lI) x+y? -2x-4y 6=0
rcle s x? + v= 4 and
2 + y = 6V3x = 6) + 20 = 0. then the value of 6 (2) x? +y?-2- 4p + 6=0
is (3) x? +y’-2v-4y-12=0
(1) 57/6 (2) 27/3 (3) 2/3 (4) m6 (4) not possible to determine
92. If Cy.x7 +)" - 200 + 64 = 0) and Cy: x7 + 4? 101. The minimum radius of the circle which contains the three
+ 30x + 144
= 0, then the length of the shortest line circles, x* +4" ~4y—-5=0,x7 +)? © 12x +4y+ 31 =O and
segment PQ which
touches C, at P and C, at Q is vty tort 12y + 36 = 0,15
(1) 20 (2) 15 (3) 22 (4) 27 (1)1)
7 845
se— 900+3 (2) ——+4
9
93. The circles having radii r, and ry ilersect ortho
gonally
The length of their common chord 1s (3) =. 949 +3 (4) none of these
1) 2rriQ ™ i Camas
( > 3 102. A circle C, of radius 4 touches the circle x - 37 =a
ies) 8 (2) er
wae externally and has its center on the positive x-axis. another
Mrs
2 circle C; of radius c touches the circle C, externally and has
©3) ==
Fer
Vr ae ae
OF +
94. The two circles which pass through (0, a) and (0, —a) and
its center on the positive x-axis. Given a < 4 < c. the three
circles have a common tangent if a. b, and c are in
touch the line y = mx + ¢ will intersect each other at right (1) AP (2) GP
angle if (3) HP (4) none of these
(1) @=c'Qm +1) (2) a =c7(2 + m’) 103. Ifa circle passes through the point (a. 5) and cuts the circle
vrty=h orthogonally. then the equation of the locus of
(3) ch =a°(2 +m) (4) c?=a°(2m +1)
its center 1s
95. The locus of the center of the circle which touches the
(1) 2ax+ 2by- (a? + 6° +h) =0
circle x” +y"-6x- 6+ 14 = 0 externally and also touches
(2) 2ax+2by-(a@- b+) =0
the y-axis 1s given by equation
(3) x°+ 1 -3ar- 4by + (a+b - i) =0
(1) °-6x-10y-14=0 (4) x° + y? - 2ax - 3by + (a2 -B -F)=0
(2) x - 10x -6v~-14=0 104. The centre of the smallest circle touching the circles
(3) 1° — 6x — 10 + 14=0 x+y —2y-3 =O and v +3"- 8. - 18 - 93 =015
(4) 3° - 10x - 6 + 14=0 (1) (3,2) (2) (4,4) (3) (2.5) (4) (2.7)
- Ifthe chord of contact of tangents from a point P to a given 105. Two circles with radu @ and & (a > b) touch each other
circle passes through Q, then the circle on PQ as diameter externally. Let c be the radius of a circle that touches these
(1) cuts the given circle orthogonally two circles as well as a direct common tangent to these
nvo
(2) touches the given circle externally circles. Then
(3) touches the given circle internally (1)
lo. Dub
—-—-=—>
(4) none of these je ee oF
Om
3 If the angle of intersection of the circles x” + txty=0 Ce ee ee ee
and x7 + 47 + x — y = 0 is 6, then the equation of the line va vb Vaya
Passing through (1, 2) and making an angle @ with the y-axis 106. Consider points 4(V13,0) and Bi2vt3.0) lying on
is y-axis These points are rotated w anticlockwise
direction
(1) x=] (2) y=2 3
about the origin through an angle of tan | (=}
(3) xty=3 (4) x-y=3 Let the new
3
98, The coordinates of two pomts P and Q are (1 yy) and position of and B be Uo and BY, respectively With 4! as
are described on
(x), y,) and O 1s the origin. If the circles es 2VI3
centre and radius ee .
OP and OQ as diameters, then the Jength of their common weirele Cy is drawn and with B’
chord is
lxyy2 ~ a*2Vilie as centre and radius »veircle C, is drawn. The radical
Ce ao
+
2) “pO axis of C) and Cy Is

(1) 3x+2y=20 (2) 3x+3y=10
(3) Mat Yival
|x 2 + yo
PQ
(4) —po (3) 9: + 6y = 65 (4) none of these
TE
ae
If the circle vty= @ intersects the hyperbola xy = ee
4.46 Coordinate Geometry _ ame
6.
6x + 8y-7=0
, and S(x,, y,), the
’ 2,
e common chord of the circle x” + ¥ four points P(x,,.¥1)> Q%2» ¥2)s R(x3,¥3)
~ +
107.
n an d touching the
and a circle passing through the origi
Ls (1) x, +x2+%3 +x,=0 (2) 1 + ¥2 +3 +4 =0
point
line y = x always passes through the (4) ye = c4
(3) xpX2%3%4 = c
(1) (1/2, 1/2) (2) (1.1)
i les satisfying x° 2 + y? + Br
iab
(1/2, 1/2) (4) none of these Let x and y be real var
(3)
through the point of (x + 2)? +(y- 3) -
108. The equation of the circle passing 10v — 40 = 0, Let a = max{
the line 21 += l
intersection of the circle x+y? =4 and
and having minimum possible radius is b= ming yx +2) +(y-3) \ Then,
(1) 5x7 + Sy + 18v + 6y-5=0 (1) a+ b=18 (2) at b= V2
(2) 5x? + 597+ 91 + 81- 15=0 (3) a-b=4N2 (4) a-b=73
(3) 5x7 + Sy? + 4¥4+ 9-5 =0 x? + y? + 2hxy + 2gx + 2fy + c= 0 represents
If the equation
(4) 5x7 + $17 -— dy — 2y- 18 =0 a circle, then the condition for that circle to pass through
three quadrants only but not passing through the origin 1s
109. The equation of the circle passing through the point
(l) f2>c gre (3) ¢70 (4) h=0
of intersection of the circles x + y - 4x - 2y = 8 and
vi +1 - 2a - 41 = 8 and the point (-1, 4) 1s The points on the line x = 2 from which the tangents drawn
(1) x1 +37 +4x4+4v-8=0 to the circle x? + )” = 16 are at right angles 1s (are)
(2) +)" -3x+4y+8=0 (1) (2, 2N7) (2) (2, 2V5)
(3) (2,-2V7) (4) (2,-2V5)
(3) ty +x+7-8=0
(4) x + 7°- 3x-3v-8=0 10. The coordinates of the center of a circle, whose radius 1s
‘. 9 fa
2 unit and which touches the line pair x” — yv - 2x + 1=0

are
Multiple Correct Answers Type... or
(1) (4,9) (2) (1 + 2V2, 0)
1. The circle x” + yy + 2a,x + c= 0 lies completely inside the 3) (4,1) (4) (1, 2V2)
circle x” + y’ + 2a,x + c= 0. Then, Il. If the circles x7 + y? - 9 =O and x° +" + 2a 2y-1=0
(1) aja,>0 (2) aja,< 90 (3) c>0 (4) c<0 touch each other, then @ 1s
Consider the circle x* + y° — 10x - 6 + 30 =0 Let O (1) 4/3 (2) 0 (3) 1 (4) 43
be the center of the circle and tangents at 4(7, 3) and 12. Point M moved on the circle (x — 4)” + (v- 8)" = 20. Then
B(5, 1) meet at C. Let S= 0 represents the family of circles it broke away from it and moving along a tangent to the
passing through A and B. Then, circle cut the x-axis at point (—2, 0). The coordinates of the
(1) the area of quadrilateral OACB 1s 4 point on the circle at which the moving point broke away 's
(2) the radical axis for the family of circles S = 0 1s (1) (42/5, 36/5) (2) (-2/5, 44/5)
x+y=10
(3) (6,4) (4) (2, 4)
(3) the smallest possible circle of the family S = 0 is eas
13. The equation of the tangent to the circle x + 3” = 25
x+y -12x-4y+ 38=0
passing through (—2, 11) is
(4) the coordinates of point C are (7, 1)
(1) 4x + 3y=25 (2) 3x +4) =38
Tangents drawn from the point (a, 3) to the circle 2x" + 2"
= 25 will be perpendicular to each other if a equals
(3) 24x-7y+ 125 =0 (4) 7x + 24=y250
14.
(1) $5 (2) -4 (3) 4 (4) -S If the area of the quadrilateral formed by the tangents from
the origin to the circle x7 + 7 + 6x — 10y + ¢ = 0 and the
ABC is any triangle inscribed in the circle x? + y* = 77 such
that A 1s fixed point. If the external and internal bisectors of radu corresponding to the points of contact is 15, the? 4
value of c is
ZA intersect the circle at D and £, respectively, then which
of the following statements is true about AADE? ka ? (2) 4 (3) 5 (4) 25
(1) Its centroid is a fixed point. 15. The equation of the circle which touches the axes of
(2) Its circumcentre 1s a fixed point. oxy
coordini ates and the line ;
3 + 7 = | and whose center lies"
(3) Its orthocentre is a fixed point. the first quadrant is x* + y? ~ 2ex — 2ey + c? = 0, where ¢®
(4) none of these
(1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 6
. The equations of the tangents drawn from the origin to the 16. Which of the following lines have the intercepts of equi!
circlex7 + y* — 2rx — 2hy + h? = 0 are lengths on the circle x? + yr -2x+ 4y =0?
(1) x=0 (2) y=0
(1) 3x-y=0 (2) x+3y=0
(3) (h -P)x-2rhy=0 (4) (WP = 7 )x + 2rhy =0
(3) x+3y+10=0 (4) 3x-y-10=0
. The epustlon of the Circle 4.47
B comprehension
ivked ype
Iine(s) ‘Bétallel to
_— - Lewhien
touch(es) the circle y? + 42 Oy nO sscarey
7
(1) vay +2=0
(2) x-2y- 10 =9 For Problems 1-3
(a) X= 2y- 5 = 0
(4) \-2y410- 0 Each side of a square has length 4 units and tts center 1s at (3, 4)
18. The circles vitae
— 3
A -4y+1=0 and \? tyi+ dy 4 If one of the diagonals 1s parallel to the line y = x, then answer
4y-1=0 the following questions,
(J) touch internally
1. Which of the following 1s not the vertex of the square?
(2) touch externally
(1) (1,6) (2) (5,2) (3) (1, 2) (4) (4, 6)
(3) have 3x + 4-1 =QOas the Common
tangent at the point
of contact 2. The radtus of the circle inscribed tn the triangle formed by
(4) have 3. +4 +1=0 as the common any three vertices is
tangent at the point
of contact (1) 2V2(V2+ 1) (2) 2V2(V2 1)
circles vw" +4" + 2y 4 4y -— 20=0
a >
. The (3) 2(V2 + 1) (4) none of these
some anda? y +124 6y—
¥-8y
3. The radius of the circle inscribed in the triangle formed by
(1) are such that the number of common tange any two vertices of the square and the center 1s
nts on them
is 2 (1) 202 - 1) (2) 2(V¥2 +1)
(2) are orthogonal
(3) V2(v2 - 1) (4) none of these
(3) are such that the len gth of their common
tangent 1s
5(12/5)' 4 For Problems 4-6
(4) are such that the length of their common chord Tangents PA and PB are drawn to the circle (x ~ 4y + - 5° =4
1s 5.3/2 from the point P on the curve y = sin x, where 4 and B lie on the
20. A point P(V3, 1) moves on the circle \2 + y” = 4 and circle Consider the function y = /(x) represented by the locus of
after the center of the circumcircle of tnangle P4B Then answer the
covering a quarter of the circle leaves 1t tangentially
The following questions
equation of the line along which the point moves
after
leaving the circle 1s 4. The range of y = f(x) 1s
Q) v=V3x+4 (2) VBvea+4 (1) [-2,1] () [-1,4] (3) [0,2] (4) [2.3]
(3) 1 =V3x-4 (4) V3) =x-4 5. The period of v = f(x) 1s
21. The equation of a circle of radius (1) 2x (2) 3x
| touching the circles
as 2}x| = 01s (3) x (4) not defined
(I) x? +97 + 2V2 x4+1=0 (2) + y?-2v3p+ 2=0 6. Which of the following 1s true?
(3) x +37 + 2V3 y+2=0 (4) 4+ -2V2+1=0 (1) f(x) = 4 has real roots
22, The center(s) of the circle(s) passing through the points (2) f(x) = 1 has real roots
(3) The range of» = f7'(\) is [-7- ig in 2
(0, 0) and (1, 0) and touching the circle x* + y?=9 1s (are)
(4) None of these
(1) (3/2, 1/2) (2) (1/2, 3/2)
(3) (1/2,2'*) (4) (1/2, -2") For Problems 7-9
23, The equation(s) of straight lines which pass through the Consider a family of circles passing through the points (3,
7) and
Intersection of the lines x — 2y—5 = 0 and 7x + y= S50 and (6, 5) Answer the following questions
7. The number of circles which belong to the family
divide the circumference of the circle x? +? = 100 into two and also
touch the .-axis are
arcs whose lengths are in the ratio 2 . J 1s/are
(1) 0 (2) 1
(1) 3x+4y-25=0 (2) 4x-3y-25=0
(3) 2 (4) infinite
(3) 3x+2y-23=0 (4) 2x-3y-11=0
8. Ifeach circle in the family cuts the circle + aad
24, Two lines through (2, 3) from which the circlex7 + y= 25 -3 = 0, then all the common chords pass through the tired
intercepts chords of length 8 units have equations point which is
Q) y=3 + 5y= 39
(2) 12x (1) (1, 23) (2) (2328 2)
G3) x=2 Ny =5)
(4) 9x- (3) (-3, 3/2) (4) none of these
25, Normal to the circle x2 + »” = 4 divides the circle having 9. If the circle Ww hich belongs to the
of ratio (7 ~ 2) given family cuts the
centre at (2, 4) and radius 2 in the areas circle Pon ye 29 orthogonally, then the center of that
(3%+2) Then the normal can be circle ts
O) y=x (2) y=3x (1) (1/2, 3/2) (2) (9/2, 7/2)

(3) y= 5x (4) y=7x (3) (7/2, 9/2) (4) (3, -7/9)
—. —§ see _
4.48 Coordinate Geometry = a
For Problems 10-12 , 19. The circumcenter of triangle P7,7) 1s at

Consider the relation 47° — 5m” + 6/ + 1 = 0. where /,m eR (1) (-2, 0) (2) (2, 0)
10. Then the line /x + mv + 1 = 0 touches a fixed circle whose (3) (V3/2,0) (4) none of these
center and radius are, respectively, 20. The ratio of the area of triangle P7\P" to that of traingy
(1) (2,0).3 (2) (-3, 0), V3 PT, Ty Is
e
(3) (3.0). V5 (4) none of these (2) 1.2

(1) 2:1
11. Tangents P4 and PB are drawn to the above fixed circle (3) V3:2 (4) none of these
from the pots P on the line x + y— 1 = 0 Then the chord
21. If P is taken to be at (A, 0) such that P’ lies on the citcle
of contact 4B passes though the fixed point
the area of the rhombus is ;
(1) (1/2, -8/2) (2) (1/3, 4/3)
(3) (-1 2.3/2) (4) none of these (1) 6V3 (2) 2v3
12. The number of tangents which can be drawn from the point
(3) 3V3 (4) none of these
(2, -3) to the above fixed circle are For Problems 22-24
(1) 0 (2) 1 (3}.2 (4) lor2 Let @ chord of a circle be that chord of the circle which subtends
For Problems 13-15 an angle @ at the center.
A cirele C whose radius is ] unit touches the y-axis at point 4 22. Ifx+y=1 isachord of ° +) = I, then ais equal to
The center QO of C lies in the first quadrant The tangent from (1) 74 (2) m2
the ongin OQ to the circle touches it at 7 and a point P hes on it
(3) 7/6 (4) x += 1 1s nota chord
such that AOAP 1s a mght-angled triangle at 4 and its perimeter
1s § units 23. If the slope of a 2/3 chord of < + 37 = 415 1, then qs
13. The length of PO 1s
equation 1s
(1) 1/2 (2) 4/3 (1) x-y+ V6 =0 (2) a-1 =2v3
(3) 5/3 (4) none of these (3) x-y=v3 (4) «<3 -~3 =0
14. The equation of circle C 1s 24. The distance of 27/3 chord of x* 17 + 2x +4) — 1 =0 Som
(1) @-2+(@-1P=1 the center 1s
(2) {x - (v3 -— V2)}7+(y- 1)? =1 (yt (2) 2 (3) x2 (4) Ls2
(3) (x~ V3) + (- ij =4
For Problems 25-27
(4) none of these
Two variable chords 4B and BC of a curcle x° — 37 = @ are suc
15. The equation of tangent OT 1s that AB = BC = a. M and N are the midpomnts of 4B and 3C.
(1) 3v= 4x (2) x-V2y=0 respectively, such that the Ine joining AN intersects the circles
(3) y-V3x=0 (4) none of these P and Q, where P 1s closer to 4B and O is the center of the cutie
For Problems 16—18 25. ZOAB is
Pisa \anable point on the line L = 0 Tangents are drawn to the (1) 30° (2) 60° (3) 45° (4) 18
circles x* + 37 = 4 from P to touch it at Q and R. The parallelogram 26. The angle between the tangents at 4 and Cis
POSR 1s completed
(1) 90° (2) 120° (3) 608 (4) 150°
16. If £=2x + y—6=0, then the locus of the circumcenter of
27, bi locus of the point of intersection of tangents at 4 an
APQOR 1s
1s
(1) 2x-y=4 (2) xt+yp=3
(1) type (2) verre
(3) x-2y=4 (4) x+2y=3 (3) x +\" = 4° (4) Y rs \" ws 8a"
17. If P= (6, 8), then the area of AORS 1s
For Problems 28-30
3 {24
Given two circles intersecting orthogonally having the length °!
(1)1) ——
25 sq qu units (2) ) —35 sq units
common chord 24/5 units. The radius of one of the circles ts 3 uns
6 28. The radius of other circle ts
(3) 46 sq. units (4) Wee sq units
(1) 6unts (2) 4 units (3) 2 units (4) 4 units
18. If P = (3, 4), then the coordinates of S are 29. The angle between direct common
tangents 1S
(1) (46/25, 63/25) (2) ( 51/25, 68/25) sae 1th
(1) sin 55 (2) aura
(3) (46/25, 68/25) (4) (68/25, 51/25)
For Problems 19-21 G3) sin'4
an i4
(4) sin!52
To the circle x° + y = 4, two tangents are drawn from
P(-4, 0), which touch the circle at 7; and 7, A rhombus PT,P'T> 30. The length of direct common tang
ent 1s
is completed (1) VIZ (2) 4v3 (3) 2V6 (4) 3N6
——$___
Circle 4.49
ror Problems 31~33
In the given figure, A there are two _ op x-3 y-4 |
circles with centers and B. The | \ = x, VY == =P
A {o Dee sing {
common tangent to the circles touches ( \
them. respectively, at P and Q. 4Rys \ 4 | B C= {Cy v9] (r-3)? +(y-4)? s RPI
ze
4ocm and AB 1s divided by the Point of
contact of the circles in the ratio 5 : 3, 39, If 4A C—A, then minimum value of R 1s
31. What 1s ratio of the length (1) 5 (2) 6
of48 to that of BR?
(1) 1:4 (2) 2:3
(3) 10 (4) I
(3) 2.5 (4) 7.4 40. If @ is fixed and r varies and n(A Mm B) = |, then sec ¢ is
32. The radius of the circle with center B Is equal to
(1) 10cm (2) 3em (3) 6cm (4) Sem
pais
5 et
-5 5
=e (4)
-5
—
33. The length of OR 1s (1) 4 (2) 4 (3) 3 ) 3
(1) 10V15 em For Problems 41-43

(2) SVI5 em
Consider the family of circles x7+ y? — 2x — 2ay — 8 = 0 passing
(3) 4J15 cm (4) 6V15 om through two fixed points A and B. Also, S = 0 1s a circle of this
family, the tangent to which at A and B intersect on the line
For Problems 34—36
xt+2y+5=0.
Let each of the circles
5, =r +1" +41-1=0 41. The distance between the points 4 and B, 1s
Ss ev'4s° +6v+3+4+8=0 (1) 4 (2) 4/2 (3) 6 (4) 8

S.2x" +" -4x-4y-37=0 42. The radius of circle § 1s
touch the other two Also, let P), P, and P; be the points
of
(1) 3 (2) 6 (3) 2V3 (4) 3J2
contact of S, and S,; S, and S,, and S; and S), respectively 43. Ifthe circle x? + y° - 10x + 2y + c= 01s orthogonal to S=0,
C,,
C;and C; are the centres of S,. S, and S,, respectively then the value of ¢ 1s
34. The coordinates of P, are (1) 8 (2) 9 (3) 10 (4) 12
(i) 2-1) (2) (-2,-1) (GB) 2.1) For Problems 44—46
(4) (2,1)
A circle S of radius | is inscnbed in an equilateral tnangle POR.
35. The ratio Se OnEE! 1s equal to The points of contact of S$ with the sides PQ, OR, and
area (AC\C,C;) RP are
D, E, and F, respectively. The line PQ \s given by
(ly 33.22 the equation
(2) 2 3 (3): 53 (4) 2:5 V3x + y-6=0 and the point D 1s (3.V3/2, 3/2) Further, it is given
36. P, and P, are images of each other with respect to the line
that the origin and the center of S are on the
same side of the line
(1) y=x (2) py=-x PQ.
(3) y=x+] (4) y=-t2 44. The equation of circle Sts
For Problems 37 and 38
The line x + 2y + a = 0 intersects the circle x* + y ~4=0 at two
(1) @-2V3 + (r-1P=1
distinct points Aand B Another line 12x — 6y — 41 = 0 intersects 2) 0 -2VFy+
(ve 5df=
the circle x +? — 4x ~2y + 1 = 0 at two distinct points C and D (3) Q-V3y +41 =1
37. The value of a for which the four points 4, B, C, and D are
(4) (v- V3 +(¥— 1% =
concyclic is
45. Poimts E and F are given by
Q) 1 (2) 3 (3) 4 (4) 2
38. The equation of the circle passing through the points A, B, ) (2,3), @3,0)
C,and Dis
(1) 5x? + 5)? — 8x - l6y - 36 =0
(2) 5x7 + 5)7 + 8x - l6y-36=90
MO (PhO) ow A S.O8Y
46. The equations of the sides OR and
RP are, respectively,
(3) Sx? + 5)? + 8x + 16-36= 0 (lI)
9°
v- rF7 \ I th N
3)
Ra |
(4) 5x7 + 557 — 8x - 16y + 36 = 0
2) I
(2) 1 v- 3 )
For Problems 39 and 40 ee
‘4, Band
A= \(x
C be three sets such that
X___Y_=5, where '@' is parameter}
O- Bye
V3
Wy
| er sin@ (4) v= V3,»=0
}
Matrix Match Type c. If the straight line a,x — by + b? = 0 touches

¥" II the circle v7 +7 =a, + by, then the triplet
1. Match the following lists. (a, a, ) can be
List I List II d. If the line 3x + 4v — 4 = 0 touches the circle

(x - a) + (v- a) = 6", then the tnplet $(1, 1, 3
a. The number of circles touching the given | p. |
three non-concurrent lines
(ay, a), b) can
.
be
__
b. The Match the following lists and then choose the correct Code
Wasa:
number touching | q.
of — circles
te
3 = vat (2, 2) and also touching the line
vt 2y-4=0 List I
¢. The number of circles touching the linesa + | on 4 a. The length of the common chord of two p. |
| = 2 and passing thorough the point (4, 3) circles of radi 3 units and 4 units which
| d. The number of circles intersecting the given | s. infinite intersect orthogonally 1s 4/5. Then & 1s equal .
ag,
to
three circles orthogonally
b. The circumference of the circle + 47 | q. 24
3 >
2. Letat +47 + 2gx + 2f + c = 0 be an equation of circle.

+ 4x + 12y + p = 0 1s bisected by the
Match the following lists:
! circle x7 + y? - 2x + 8 — g = 0 Then |
| List I List II p+ qs equal to
—
| a. Tf the circle hes in the first quadrant, then p.g<0 ¢. The number
of distinct chordsof the circle 2x(x— | r. 32
|». If the circle hes above the x-axis, then q.g>0
V2) + (2) — 1) =0, where the chords are passing
through the pont (/2..1/2) and are bisected on
| ¢. If the circle hes on the left of the y-axis, d the v-axis, 1s
| then Bere 0
d.One of the diameters of the circle 5. 36
| d. If the circle touches the positive x-axis and >0 circumscribing the rectangle 4BCD
L does not intersect the 1-axis, then = is 4y = x + 7 If A and B are the pomts .
3. Match the following lists: (3, 4) and (5, 4). respectively. then the area
| List 1 | List 11
of the rectangle ts
‘alf ax + by - § = 015 the equation of the | p. 6 Codes:

chord of the circle (x — 3y + (yp - 4y a boc d
= 4, which passes through (2, 3) and at
Q) ros p gq
the greatest distance from the center of the
| circle, then |a + bj 1s equal to (2) s p r q
(3) GQ S p rr
| b. Let O be the orgin and P be a vanable q. 3
point on the cucle x° + y° + 2x + 2y (4) p ros gq
= If the locus of midpoint of OP 1s x° + 7 +
Let C, and C, be tw 0 circles whose equation
2gx
+ 2ff +¢ =0, then (g + f) 1s equal to s are >! ~
2x = Oand x7 +47 +2. =0. P(A, A) is a variab
¢c. The x-coordinates of the center of the | r. 2
le pout. The?
match the following lists and choose the correct code.
smallest circle which cuts the circles
2 2 2
e+ —2x- dy— 4 =O and x7 +57 - 10x +
12y + 52 = 0 orthogonally 1s List |
a. P hes inside C, but outside
d.Jf @ be the angle between
which are drawn to the circles x2 + y
two tangents | s. | | + Cy peoe AE
See
(He,
SR
-DE
ne
WS)eel |
b. P hes inside C} but outside
~ 6N3x - 6y + 27 = 0 from the origin Then Cc qe Ag (ee. DUE)
eee
2V3 tan @ equals | ce. P hes outside C, and outsid
ia e Cy r Ae (-1,0) |
4. Match the following lists
— d. P does not he insule C,
List I
te js Ae@n
ir iT
—— ——
a. If two circles x7 + y? + 2ayx +b = Oand 2 4 p- (2, 2, 2) Codes:
3 + 2ayx + b =0 touch each other, then the
a boc qd
triplet (a), a>, b) can be
(1) ros P oq
b. Iftwocurclesx?+y7+2ajx+b=Oande+| (2) p s q or
y’ + ayy + b= 0 touch each other, then the | 4% (> 1, 3) q p os
triplet (a, a>, b) can be (4) s er q p
—_— $$$ a
Circle 4,51
numerical Value Type
M1. As shown 1n the figure, three circles which have the same
radius r have centers at (0,0), (1,1), and (2,1) If they have
fet the: Test — 2] = mx — S) and (vy + 4) = a common tangent line, as shown, then the value of 10V5r
ma — 3) intersect at right angles at P (where ts
are parameters) If the locus of p he eee aem, andete
m
0, then the value of |f+ gj 15 = ~
, Consider the family of circles \2
0 passing PAPI
through two fixed points 4
eee
and B. Then the
We,
distance between the points 4 and B is r
The number of points P(,, 1 ) lyi r

ng inside or on the circ
le
tv =9 and satisfying th € equ
ation tan’ x + cott Ye je
y + 2
=4s1n71 18
. Ifreal numbers \ and 1 satisfy (, + $)? + a 12. The acute angle between the line 3x — 4y = 5 and the circle
12)? =(14y, x’ +9? = 4) + 2v—4=0 is @ Then 9 cos 0 =
then the nunimum value of /4? + 1? 45
13. If two perpendicular tangents can be drawn from the origin
The line 3. + 6) =A intersects the the Curve to the circle x* — 6x +? - 2p, + 17 = 0, then the value of
2x7 + 2aqy'+ 3° =1
at points 4 and B The circle on 4B |p| 1s
as diameter passes
through the origin Then the value of 4? 1s
14. Let A = (-4, 0) and B = (4,0) The number of points on the
. The sum of the slopes of the hnes tangent to both the circle x” + 4° = 16 such that the area of the triangle whose
circles
Vtr=land(.—- 6 4+1°=445 vertices are 4, B, and C 1s positive 1s
Acircle a7 + A 74+ 4y— 2V2 4+. =0 1s the director circle 1S, If the circles 47 + y= + (3 + sin B)x + (2 cos @) = 0 and
of the circle S,, and S, is the director circle of cirele S;, and vo + y+ (2 cos @)x + 2cy = 0 touch each other, then the
soon Ifthe sum of radii of all these circles 1s 2. then the maximum value ofc is
value of c 1s kV2, where the value of A is 16. Two circles C, and C, both pass through the points 4(1. 2)
. Two circles are externally tangent Lines P4B and P4 ‘B’are and £(2, 1) and touch the line 4x — 2. = 9 at B and D,
common tangents with 4 and 4’on the smaller circle and respectively. The possible coordinates of a point C. such
8 and B’ the on the larger circle If P4 = AB = 4, then the that the quadrilateral ABCD 1s a parallelogram, are (a. ),
Then the value of |ad| 1s
square of the radius of the smaller circle 1s
17. Difference in values of the radius of a circle whose center
- The length of a common internal tangent to two circles 1s
is at the origin and which touches the circle > +17 — 6. — Sy
7 and that of a common external tangent 1s 11. Then the
+21=015s
product of the radii of the two circles 1s
10. Line segments AC
18. If the length of a common internal tangent to two circles
and BD are diameters of the circle of
is 7, and that of a common external tangent is 11, then the
radius one If ZBDC = 60°, the length of line segment AB is
product of the radu of the two circles is
ee _—
Archives
2. Three distinct points 4, B and C are given in the two
JEE Main
dimensional coordinate plane such that the ratio of the
Single Correct Answer Type distance of any one of them trom the point (1, 0) to the
of the circles x?
If P and Q are the points of intersection
i
and x+y + 2x + dy -
+P 4 3r4 Ty + 2p—-5 =O pass
distance from the point (-1, 0) 1s equal to 7 Then the
ing through P, Q, and circumcentre of the triangle ABC 1s at the point
p= 0, then there is a circle
(1,1) for
5
(1) all values of p
(2) all except one value of p.
(1) (0,0)
@ (5.0)
[25
(3) all except two values of p
AIEEE 2009)
@)a; (3.0) (4) (2. 0| (AIEEE 2009)
(4) exactly one value of p. (
4.52 Coordinate Geometry =
3x — 4v
(3) x2 +" —2x + by - 20
The circle x? +" = 4x + 8y + 5 intersects the line (4) Pe +) _~6x- 4y +19= 0 (IIT-JEE 2095
= m at two distinct points if
(1) 35<m<85 (2) -85<m<-35 The circle passing through the point (-1, 0) and touchy,
(4) 15<m<65 the y-axis at (0, 2) also passes through the point
(3) -35<m<15
(AIEEE 2010)
(1) (-3/2, 0)
(2) (5/2, 2)
The two circles x7 + =
a
axanda* +9" =c* ae (ce > 0) touch (3) (-3/2, 5/2) (4) (4,0) (UTSEE 29)
F
each other, if The locus of the midpoint of the chord of contac
a=2c ing
tangents drawn from the points lying on the straight
(1) Jal=2c¢ (2) 2I|al=e (3) |al=e (4)
(AIEEE 2011) 4x — 5y = 20 to the circle x° + y= 9 is
The length of the diameter of the circle which touches (1) 20(x? + y*) -— 36x + 45y = 0
mn
the \-axis at the point (1, 0) and passes through the point (2) 20(x? + 9°) + 36x — 45y = 0
(2, 3) 1s
(3) 36(x? + y* )— 20x + 45y = 0
10
zo ay =53 ay co65 4)
(4) =35 (4) 36(x° + y*) + 20x - 45y = 0 (ITT-JEE 20}2,
(1) 5 (2) (3)
(AIEEE 2012) Multiple Correct Answers Type
The circle passing through (1, —2) and touchin g the axis of
1s Circle(s) touching the x-axis at a distance of 3 units from
v at (3, 0) also passes through the point
the origin and having an intercept of length 2 V7 on the
1) 5.2) (2) (2-9) praxis Is (are)
(3) (5. 2) (4) (-2, 5)(JEE Main 2013) (1) x +yr- 6x + 8y+9=0
. Let C be the circle with centre at (1, 1) and radius = |. If (2) v+y?-6x+7v+9=0
T 1s the circle centred at (0,1). passing through origin and (3) arta - 6. - 87 +9=0
touching the circle C externally, then the radius of 7 1s
(4) P+y- 6x-77+9=0 (JEE Advanced 2013)
equal to
A circle S passes through the point (0, 1) and 1s orthogona
V3
Buizd 3 =,i
(1) La (2)Dy) 5 (3) (4) A7 to the circles (x — 1)" + \7 = 16 and x7 - 17 = 1 Then
(1) radius of Sis 8
(JEE Main 2014)
> ee (2) radius of S is 7
. The number of common tangents to the circles x°+ y— 4x
(3) centre of Sis (—7. 1)
~ 6-12 =0 and
x°+ "+ 6x + 18) + 26 = O15
(4) centre of S 1s (-8, 1) (JEE Advanced 2014)
q) 1 (2) 2 (3) 3 (4) 4
(JEE Main 2015) Let RS be the diameter of the circle x — 17 = 1. whereSs
. The centres of those circles which touch the circle, the point (1, 0). Let P be a variable pornt (other than & ane
x? ~ 37 - 8x 8y—4 = 0, externally and also touch the x-axis, S) on the circle and tangents to the circle at Sand P meet #
he on the point Q The normal to the circle at P intersects 3 Ute
(1) an ellipse which 1s not a circle drawn through Q parallel to RS at point £. Then the lec
of E passes through the point(s)
(2) a hyperbola
(3) a parabola
(4) acircle (JEE Main 2016)
10. If one of the diameters of the circle, given by the equatton,
x+y - 4x + 6y- 12 = 0,18 a chord of a circle S, whose
centre 1s at (- 3, 2), then the radius ofS 1s
(4) 5V2 2010)

(1) 53 (2) 5 (3) 10
(JEE Advanced
(JEE Main 2016) Let T be the line passing through the points P(- >, 7) and
$1
Q(2, -5). Let F, be the set of all pairs of circles (Si
JEE ADVANCED
such that 71s tangent to 5, at P and tangent to 5, at ¢:
Single Correct Answer Type and also such that S, and S, touch each other at 4 pout
say, M. Let E, be the set representing the locus of M®
1. Tangents drawn from the point P(1, &) to the circle
x+y’ —6x-4y- 11 =O touch the circle at pots A and B the pair (5), $3) varies in F,. Let the set of all straight i
The equation of the circumcircle of triangle P4B 1s
segments joining a pair of distinct points of £, and passif
through the point R(1, 1) be Fy. Let E, be the set of te
(1) x+y? + 4x-6y + 19=0
mid-points of the line segments in the set F,, Then. ©
(2) x° +)?
- 4x- 10y+19=0 of the following statement(s) is (are) TRUE?
i Circle 4-53
eee a ee ———
AE See Soe
ee
~ 4) The point (-2, 7) hes in E ES
ee
.
oint (4/5, 7/5) d . Matrix Match Type
(2) DEP . . bes: NOT liein E, 1. Match the conics in List I with the statements/expressions
ae al in List I. a eT
(4) The point (0, 3/2) does NOT lie in E, Tt ~~ _ Li tH
(JEE Advanced 2018) a. Cine a p. The locus of the point (4, k) for which
the line Av + ky = ! touches the circle
Type
‘
yinke
¢ comprehension ere
ooueecil; eamecees= oe ne ge eed
gor Proble ms 1 and 2 b. Parabola q. Ponts 2 in the complex plane satisfying
5
tangent PT 1s drawn to the circle x? + y = 4 at the point st2| {2 2p=#3
awl) A straight line L, perpendicular to PT, 1s a tangent to the oe _ _peccaitpe oarge ee
c. Etipee r. Points of the conic have parametric
(¥- 3 4" = F-
ale P4yrs (IIT-JEE 2012) yt
j. Apossible equation of L is representation 3 i }
2t
(i) x- VB y=] (2) v+ V3 y=] tg
(3) r- V3 y=-1 (4) x+ V3 y=5 _ - a somes somal =
d.Hyperbola —_|s. The Secentrisiy of the : conic hes S 1 €| |
2. Acommon tangent of the two circles is
(dpa=4 (2) y=2 —t interval | il oo 7 |
(3) x By =4 (4) «+2 2) =6 t. Points z in the complex plane satisfying
For Problems 3 and 4 | Re(e+ PeteP +]

let S be the circle in the vy-plane defined by the equation (IIT-JEE 2009)
ytyr=4 (JEE Advanced 2018) Numerical Value Type
3, Let E\E, and FF, be the chords ofS passing through the 1. The centers of two circles C,; and C, each of unit radius
point Po(1, 1) and parallel to the \-axis and the p-axis, are at a distance of 6 units from each other. Let P be the
midpoint of the line segment joining the centers of C, and
respectively. Let G,G, be the chord of S passing through
C; and C be a circle touching circles C, and C, externally.
P, and having slope —1. Let the tangents to S at E, and E,
Ifa common tangent to C, and C passing through P 1s also
meet at E,, the tangents to S at F, and F, meet at F,, and a common tangent to C, and C, then find the radius of
the tangents to S at G, and G, meet at G, Then, the points circle C. (IIT-JEE 2009)
E;, F;, and G; lie on the curve
2. The straight line 2x — 3y = 1 divides the circular region
(I)xty=4 4) = 16
(2) (x- 4) +(p- +1 < 6 nto two parts
(3) (x- 4) (y-4)=4 (4) xv=4 P
;
§ with both coordinates being
4. Let P be a point on the circle
3 ) (5
IfsS= (2. a} (5. 3}{4. “hE i}
Positive. Let the tangent to S at P intersect the coordinate
axes at the points M and N. Then, the mid-point of the line men the number of point(s) in S lying inside the smaller
MN must lie on the curve
segment ; : .. —__—: | (EESEE 2011)
2_ 34 28 2 943 » For how many values of p, the circlex- +" + 2x + dy -—p
(1) (x+y)? = 3xy (2) 7 » - = 0 and the coordinate axes have exactly three common
(3) 2+ = Ixy (4) x ty =xy points? (JEE Advanced 2017)
| eS
Answers Key
E
“ERCISES 31. (1) 32. (3) 33.3) 34. 4) 35. QQ)
‘ingle Correct Answer Type 36. (1) 37. (I) 38. (3) 39. (3) 40. (4
LQ) 2) 3. (2) 4. (1) 5. (1) 41. (2) 42, (3) 43. (1) ade Lt) gs, (3)
6. (1) 7. (1) 8. (1) 9. (4) 10. (2) 46. (1) 47, (3) 48. (2) 49. 2) 550, (1)
1.3) 49, 3) 13. (4) 14.0) 15. GB) SI. (1) $2. (1) 53. (4) 54. (4) 8g, (3)
: (1) andy 18. (2) 19. (2) — 20. (I) 56. (1) 57. (2) 58. (4) «59. (4) 460, (3)
, Q) 22,4) 23. (2) 4. (4) 25>. (2) 61. (3) 62. (2) «63. (2)_—s 6, (1) 65. (4)
L ® (4) 27, (2) 28. 3) 29 3) 30. (2) 66. (3) 67. (2), 68. (1) 69. (1) 70. (2)
4.54 Coordinate Geometry __ “4. 3) 42. 4 “43. (4) 44 (4) 45. (1)
. 3) qd) 75 @)
71. (2) 72. (3) 46. (4)
.() (2) +80. ()
76. (3) 77. (2) (2) Matrix Match Type
. (2) 85. aa ek
81. (2) 82. (1) . () 1. gop ba Ge
. B) (3) 90. (1)
a—>p,£s,b718:¢ 74 s,dp,s
86. (4) 87. (3)
oeoe be
. (1) (3) 95. (4) a>nbo7sce7gd>4
91. (4) 92. (1)
96. (1) 97. (2) 98. (2) (3) 100. (1) aor bIPge7and>Ps
103. (1) G3) 105. (3) (3)
101. (3) 102. (2)
108. (4) . (4) (4)
106. (3) 107. (3)
Multiple Correct Answers Type (6) 3. (8) 4. (1) 5.. (9)
1. (6) 2.
(1), (3), (4) (4) 8. (2) 9. (18) 10. (1)
» (1). Q) 6. (0) 7.
(1), (2), (3) (3) 13: (5) 14. (62) 15. (1)
(2), (3) 11. (5) 12.
(1), (2), (3), (4) (4) 17. (4) 18. (18)
. (1), GB) 16.
(1), (3), (4) (1), (2), (3), 4)
ARCHIVES
(2), (4)
~ (1), (3)
. (2), (3) JEE MAIN
- (1), (4)
» (1), G3) . (1), (4) Single Correct Answer Type
. (1), (4) » (1), (2), (3). (4) 1. (2) 2. (2) 3. (3) 4. (3) 5. (1)
» (2), 3) 7. (4) 8. (3) 9. (3) 10. (1)
- (2), (4) 6. (3)
» (1), (2), 3), (4) (2). (4) IEE ADVANCED
- (2), 3) » (3). (4) Single Correct Answer Type

» (1). (Q2) 2. (4) 3. (1)
» (1), (2) 1. (2)
25. (1), (4) Multiple Correct Answers Type
Linked Comprehension Type 1. (1), G) 2. (242)
. (4) » (2) 3. (1) (4) 5. (3) 3 €1).A3) 4. (2), (4)
- (3) - GB) 8. (4) (3) 10. (3) Linked Comprehension Type
. (1) . (3) 13. (3) (1) 15. (1)
is (1 2. (4) 3. Ci) 4. (4)
- (2) « (4) 18. (2) (1) 20. (4)
(1) 25. (2) Matrix Match Type
- (I) - (2) 23. (1)
28. (2) (2) 30. (3) l. ap
. (3) - 3)
- (2) - (3) 33. (4) 22) 35. (4) Numerical Value Type
» () » (4) 38. (1) . (3) 40. (2) 1. (8) 2. (2) 3. (2)
= aia li ETI PA ore 7 res We. ©aa
pes hale re ‘
Ro OCR Me A: ‘eye 3)
os aye f A “i ‘ a
ye y
©) i aT
} €
Pa rabola _..
“—~
«4
t
Parabola (f = a) Hyperbola (0 = B < @)

CONIC SECTION: INTRODUCTION 4 s
The four curves — circle. parabola, ellipse and hyperbola are

called conic sections because they can be formed by interesting
q double night circular cone with a plane Let us first see how
double right circular cone 1s created.
Let / be a fixed vertical line and 7 be another line intersecting
at a fixed point I’ and inclined to it at an angle @ If we rotate
the hne around the line /1n such a way that the angle @ remains
constant, then the surface generated 1s a double-napped right
circular hollow cone herein after referred as cone and extending CONIC SECTION AS LOCUS OF A POINT
indefinitely far in both directions The point 1s called the vertex. The locus of a pomt which moves in a plane such that the ratio
of
the lime / 1s the axis of the cone The rotating line m 1s called a tts distance from a fixed point to its perpendicular distanc e from
generator of the cone The vertex separates the cone into two a fixed straight line 1s constant, = >
parts called nappes 1s called conic section or conic Sx |
This fixed point is calledthe = = 3: Hyperbola
a se ‘ p Parabola
Sf Sa focus of the conic and the fixed + fat
ts £ ae i
: p line 1s called the directrx of = Ve

"
Uppes
a
—_ “G enerator PI ane
~
a
nappe prajet & the conic
Vis
P
—.. Ellipse
av: a: In the figure, focus is S(a. 5) P .
ry ‘ Me AXIS
Lower
. and directrix 1s Ix + my +n =0 = Nig by —
| «Cone in | Focus
nappe @ Point P(x. y) 18 Moving
San eet .
, ? SP
t '
the plane such that ratio ——
is constant PM a
If we take the intersection of a plane with a cone, the section
s0 obtained 1s called a conic section. Thus, conic sections are This constant ratio 1s called
the curves obtained by intersecting a right circular cone by a eccentricity e of the conic
on
plane We obtain different kinds of conic sections depending me or SP-¢ PM
and
the position of the intersecting plane with respect to the cone
PM or e
the cone When

by the angle B made by st with the vertical axis of Now, depending upon the values of e we have different
of the cone, we
the plane cuts the nappe (other than the vertex) characteristic curves
have the following conic sections
Value of e Curve or
Ellipse (a < B < 90°) Locus of point P
Circle (8 = 90°) = =
See a ee
|’ y
e=1,1e,SP=PM
ee
Parabola
0<e< lie,
SP < PAM Ellipse
paye
e> lic,
SP > PM Hyperbola
Equation of Conic
/ /
For any point P on the conic, we have
a — '
—T SP=e PM
5.2 Coordinate Geometry ss sepeneasapie f parabola is lo ore
So, from the definition, equation oF P “e OF Porn
Jix tony t+n| = PM.
V(x-ay? +(v-by =e P(x, y) such that SP
2]
Vir +m
>
SP = PN+NM
(atv +ny > (x—ay? +(y-0)" =e

=> (-alt(V—-by=e"
Pm > (x-aptye(atay
This equation takes the form =>
Avi + Br" + 2H + 2Gy + 2Fy + C= 0, which ts general >
x 2 0 (asa>0).
second-degree equation in variables . and Since v2 0, 4ax 2 0. So,
rth quadrants.
Elements of Conic Therefore, curve lies in first and fou
.
We have following elements of the conic Also, curve opens to the right.
of the curve above x-axis represents function
Axis of conic: The strarht Ime passmg through the focus The part
and perpendicular to the directria is called the axis of the conic y= J4ax and the part of the curve below x-axis represents the
section, function ¥ = —J4ax ,
Each conie is symmetrical about its axis. From the figure,
Vertex: The points of intersection of the conic section and the Vertex: O(0, 0)
ans 1s (are) called vertex (vertices) of the conic section. Axis of the parabola: x-axis or y ~ 0
Focal Chord: Any chord passing through the focus 1s called Tangent at vertex: y-axis OF x = 0
focal chord of the conic section. End points of Latus Rectum: A(a, 2a) and Bla. -2a)
Double Ordinate: A straight line drawn perpendicular to the Length of Latus Rectum (L.R.): 4a
axis and terminated at both end of the curve 1s a double ordinate Distance of point P from focus S (focal distance or focaj
of the conic section. radius): SP = PM= PN+ NM=x+a
Latus Rectum: The double ordinate passing through the
Other Standard Forms of Parabola
focus is called the latus rectum of the conic section
I. Parabola with focus S at (—a, 0) and directx x = a.
Length of the latus rectum: If double ordinate through focus
S is terminated by conic at points P and /” on the curve, then PP’ Equation of parabola 1s }~ = —4ax, a> 0
called length of latus rectum or simply latus rectum. e | m = a
Now PP =2 x SP
=2xexPM — (from the definition of the conic)
= 2 x e = (distance of focus from directrix)
Centre: The point which bisects every chord of the conic *
™ ~(-a. 2a} E=
passing through it, 1s called the centre of the conics section 2
Parabola does not have centre, but circle, ellipse, hyperbola «| =
have centres. ri |
(-2.0)S |O L(a.0)
STANDARD EQUATION OF
PARABOLA B
(-a, ~24)
1
Standard equation of parabola 1s the simplest form of equation

of parabola The study of properties of parabola becomes easier
with this form of equation |
The part of the curve above a-axis represents functe?
For this parabola we consider focus ‘S’ to be at (a, 0) and
directrix to be x = -a v= V-4av and the part of the curve below rXh
£L=-a M4 represents the function v =-—/—tan .
“y= 4ax Il. Parabola with focus S at (0, a) and directrix ¥
= -«
M |
N
Sp
<
3
Equation of parabola 1s x7 = dan,a> 0
ajay PO) ‘4
fs
4 Axis of Parabola
(-a, OL, O| ‘Sta, 0) : \
x“
E
vu t
é (a, | 2a)B ( 2a, a)B* LR pit *A(2a, a)

Co ‘ = a3
y=-a
Directrix
“parabola with focus S at (0, —a) and Parabola 5.3
direstiix ye
Equation of parabola is x* = ~day,a>0 @. Oo _ oy
| 4x? = 3y
-
Directrix _ | He _v As,12)
|
\ | /3
Oo Sk
(-2a, -a)B. LR
moi \
| }
4 i
an re --——— PX
oO
3
Inall above parabolas vertex 1s O(0, 0) and length of latus Therefore, cquation of parabola 1s x? = re
rectum 1s “4a°.
9
Note: Two parabolas are called equa When 1'=6, ee =3:
l parabolas if they have
same length of latus rectum 3
. Width = 2x—==3/2m
1 v2
|LLUSTRATION 5.1
Find the equation of parabola

ILLUSTRATION:
5.3.
(i) having focus at (0. ~3) and its directrix 1s = 3. A beam ts supported at its ends by two supports which are
(ii) having end points of latus rectum (5, 10) and (5, 10) and 12 m apart. Since the load 1s concentrated at its center. there
which opens towards right. is a deflection of 3 cm at the center and the deflected beam
(iii) having vertex at origin and focus at (0, 2) is in the shape of a parabola. How far from the center 1s the
deflection | cm?
Sol.
(i) Here. focus S(0, —3) and directrix = 3 are at same distance Sol. yf
from ongin.
So. ongin is vertex of the parabola and parabola opens
downwards.
So. we consider equation x” = —4ay
Here focus 1s (0, —3) = (0, -a)
a=3
So. equation of parabola 1s \~ = —12x. Let the vertex be at the lowest point and the axis vertical. Let the
(ii) End points of latus rectum are A4(5, 10) and B(5, —10). coordinate axes be chosen as shown in figure
Now. focus Sis midpoint of AB The equation of the parabola takes the form x* = dav Since it
S= (5,0) passes through (6, 3/100), we have
Also, parabola opens towards right.
So, we consider equation y’ = 4ax. 62 =4a x3.
100
Vertex is (0, 0) and a= 5. le, a=300
__ So. equation of parabola is y” = 20x. Let AB be the deflection of the beam which 1s i ID m. The
fil) Vertex 1s (0, 0) focus S(0, 2). coordinates of B are (v, 2/100). Therefore,
So, directrix is y = —2 io |
So, we consider equation x° = 4ay, where a = 2. x? = 4 x 300 x 100 7 24

Equation of parabola 1s x” = 8y or x=2V6m
LLUSTRATION 5.2 ILLUSTRATION 5.4

An arch is in the form of a parabola with its axis vertical. The Find the coordinates of a point on the parabola v" = 8. whose
“his 12 m high and 6 m wide at the base. How wide is it 6m distance from the focus is 10
*m the vertex of the parabola?
Soli. Distance of point P(x, v) from the focus S(a,
0) of the
tie From the figure, AB is base and height 1s 12m. parabola y" = 4ax is SP= a+
"sider parabola x2 = day. For parabolay" = 8a, a = 2,
_ “the figure, point (3, 12) lies on the parabola Also, given that SP = 10,
9=4x gx 12
10=2+x
4q= 3
x=8
4
=
5.4 Coordinate Geometry oe
i
So, from 17 = &1.
= 64
r=+8 P lies on parabola.
(4) ato)
So. coordinates of point P are (8, 8) 01 (R, &) 2
2 2
ILLUSTRATION 5.5
If Afis the footofthe perpendiculan froma point ? ona

pal abola 1=8/3a = OP = 8V3a
y= daa to us direet rn and triangl e $77 ts equilat eral, where
Say the focus, hen tnd SP
| QUATION OF C HORT) OF PARABOLA BISECTED AT
Sol. \
Wo Beak
“
LIVEN POINE
Vf i °
Consider parabola y - 4ax
Let OR be the chord yorning two points Q(x»,yo) and R(x, ¥
Let midpoint of OR be P(x,.¥;)
4
Since Q and R lic on parabola,

y= 4ax, and y? = 4ax,
3 2
=> vy — Vy 7 4a x3)
Vy 7 V2 4a 4a
=> Slope of OR~ — = -—
¥; — Xo 33 7 b2 oh
(*" PCx,. ¥,) 1s midpoint of 08

Therefore, equation of OR 1s
2a
From the definition of the parabola, we have wok —(\ ~ x)
Ad
SP = PM => yVi— 4; > Jay - 2ar,
12
Now mangle SPM is equilateral Subtracting 2ax, from both sides. we have
Therefore. SP = PM=SM ¥y,- 2a(x +x,) = yi tax.
From the figure. in tnangle SLAZ, or T=), where T= 14 —2ate— ¢,) and S, =1j=4ar
S\f= SL cosec 30° = 2a x 2=4a This 1s the equation of chord of parabola 1~ = 4ax which s
d SP = 4a
ILLUSTRATION 5.6
bisected at pomt P(x), ¥))
Similarly, for parabola x = 4ay. equation of chord wht >
bisected at point P(v,,4,) 1s
5
An equilateral triangle is mscribed in the parabola y” ~ 4an, XX, —2aQ +1). = v7 -4en,
such that one vertex of this triangle comcides with the vertex
ILLUSTRATION 5.7
of the paiabola. Theii find the side length of this uiangle
Find the equation of the chord of the parabola 17 = sx hav1g
Sol As shown in the figure, equilatera) triangle OPQ 1s slope 2 1f midpoint of the chord ltes on the line 1 = 4
symmetnca] about x-axis
Sol. Let M44, ,) be midpoint of the chord
So, equation of chord using equation T= S) 1s
P my Antsy) ae 804
cs no “
or wy dy a lo
—— f spy Slope = —~ = 2 (Gen!

(on any M i)
v,=2
So, equation of the chord ts
21 2
(
Ol i) 2. 6
Let OP=/
ILLUSTRATION 5.8
In triangle OMP, Vind thy locus of undpomtot tamil ofchords Av
+3 = 3A
parameter)of the parabola vw 20)
3/
OM = OP cos 30° = ws
Sol. t-quation of family of chord 1s
/ (v— 5) + At — 0) = 0. which are concurrent at (0, 5)
and MP= OPsin30°= 5
lhe given parabola ts y? — 201 = 0
ee ee
Vv
Parabola 5-5
“4 be midpoint of chord.
el iM ;
fore: equation of such chord ts
it het py - 10(v +h)
+ k) =F= f° — 20k 20k (Using T= S,)
chord is passing through the point (0, 5)
Pe p= 1Ok-50
-. jocus of Mh, k) 1s x” = 10( ~ 5). S(4, 0)
wl
~
So.
TION OF A POINT WITH RESPECT

| pos! TOA
PARABOLA
parabola drawn on the plane divides the plane into two regions, Now, double ordinate line through focus 1s x — 4 = 0
ne 1s concave (interior) region where focus lies and other is If (a, 2a) hes to the left of x — 4 = 0 then
conve’ (e\tertor) region a—4<0
consider parabola having equation y” = dar. or a<4 (2)
Let P(\,.¥) be a point in the plane (in first or fourth quadrant). From (1) and (2),0<a<4
From point P, draw perpendicular to y-axis meeting \-axis at
Vand parabola at QO.
Let the coordinates of Q be (x), v2) PARAM! FORNI OF PAL ACS
"to
‘5 = 4a, v Parametric coordinate s (or parametric form) of different standard
R) Now. point P(x,, ¥,) will be py v0 forms of parabolas are listed below.
outside, on or inside the parabola *O(x,. 15)
Equation of Parabola | Parametric form
y= 4ay according as .
=
PM >,=or< QM v=ar.y =2at
|
Sbed
= PM >,=or< QM 6 Mix0) y"
>
= tar
:
x =-ar.1
2 _35
=zat
> yp, =or< yy
rg = day v= 2at.. =ar
> 1; > = or < 4ax, , = z T =
Ifpoint P hes in second or third w= dax x =—day x= 2at.y =-ar
quadrant,7 — 4ax,> 0 (as x,< 0)
Thus,v" — 4ax < 0 represents the concave region and y? - dav Note:
> Orepresents the convex region of the parabola.
Sumilarly, y? + 4ax < 0,x7 - 4ay <Q and x” + dav <0 represent ° Fo1 parabola y* = 4ax, any point P on it has coordinates
the concave (intertor) region of the parabolas Whereas, v + 4ax (ar’, 2at), where ¢ 1s parameter.
>0.° - 4ay > 0 and x* + 4ay > 0 represent the convex(exterior) Sometimes, we use notation P(t) for point P. which
region of the parabolas (a > 0) means that point P has parameter ¢
For example, for parabola 1" = 8x, point P(3) means P=
GST RATION 5.9
(at’, 2at) = (2(3)°, 2(2)(3)) = (8. 12)
Find the position of points P(1. 3) w rt. parabolasy” = 42 and Similarly, for other parabolas also. we can represent
r= &y
point P.
* Slope of line joining pots P(t,) and Q(r,) on the parabola
Sol. We have parabolas )”— 4x = 0 and x’? -3y=0
S, =)? — 4x and S,= x - 3y 2at, ~ 2at, au
Now, S\, 3) = 3% 4(1)>0 w= dav is oe allaa
> cielo
at —aty thy
And $,(1, 3) = 1? -3(3)<0 :
* kor parabola y= 4an, if 7,4, = Constant, then chord jotning
Thus, (1, 3) lies in the exterior region of the parabola y° = 4x and poms P(t,) and Q(¢;) passes through fixed port on x-axis.
ntenor region of the parabola x = 3y. Proof:
I:quation of chord joinmg point P(t) and O(ts) 1s
IGstRaTION 5.70
2)
The pomt (a 2a) is interio: region bounded by the parabola V-2at = ————-(\- an?)
th
Y= 16x and the double ordinate through the focus. Then find
Values of a. (4) 4 ty) = Qn + Jetty
kor (yf, = ¢ (constant), we have
Sol, P(a, 2a) 1s in interior region of the parabola y”— 16x= Oat (4! y= 20 4 Que, which passes through fixed
point
or
(2a) 16a <0 (-ac, 0) on x-axis,
a 4a<0 ® If chord of parabola v = 4ay Jommg
)
points P(r,) and
O<a<4 (1) Or) subtends right angle at vertex, then
hbh=-4
C(t
5.6 Coordinate Geometry ing points A(t,), B(ta), 3) ang
consider qua rilateral jom
ILLUSTRATION 5.11
Sol
D(t,) '8 inscri bed in the par abo la y? = 4ax.
chords of a parabola
Find the locus of the middle points of Equation of line AB is
vertex.
y” = 4ax which subtend night angle at the (x-at,*)
2
yas =
Sol. Let the chord joining points P(at;, 2ar) and Q(at}, 2aty) yo = ash,
subtends right angle at vertex of the parabola v" = 4ax. or 2x = (t +h) yt 2atyt = 0
2 hiz=—-4 (c, 0) on X-axis.
Let AB pass through fixed point
If midpomt of chord PQ 1s R(A, k), then
aly + ats at, + al, iy=-= Y

h
er 2 'A
Similarly, for chord BC,
”~ -
; k
2h th
= (h thY = Hh =(h +1) +8 and 2 =t Bo
a hhy=-— (2)
Eliminating f, + 4. we get ig
i770
and for chord CD,
‘ (0 }t pee
ha== 2a (e,0) |°
2ax =17 + 8a", which ts the required locus. 5
Multiplying (1) and (3), |
ILLUSTRATION 5.12
1£2°3°4 = —
tytytyly
In the following figure, find the locus of centroid of triangle
2
PAB. where AP is perpendicular to PB

x
{ “| ec
=> LG posa |Fa
a”
+ a)
pe:
=> arr
hie ae
1. Find the angle made by a double ordinate of length 8u at

Sol.
2
the vertex of the parabola y" = dar
Slope of AP = 7 2. If focal distance of a point P on the parabola y = 4a
whose abscissa ts 5 1s 10, then find the value of a.
=> Slope of BP =— 5
3. Analyse the following equations if they represent
So, equation of line BP 1s y — 21 = — 5 (x — r). parabola(s) or part of parabola(s)?
Putting y = 0, we get point B as (P + 4, 0) (a) y= x}x (b) .= y-¥

Now, let centroid of APAB be (fh, k). | () x=" (d) x=e', 2r= logy ]
ye LS cae, 4. Find the range of values of 2 for which the pomt
a a 3 (A, ~1) ts exterior to both the parabolas 1" = |x}.
Eliminating ‘f, we get 5, Find the locus of a point on the variable parabola
y” = 4ax whose distance from focus 1s always equal to k.
3h-4= 22 . 6 Find the locus of midpoint of chord of the parabola
2
y’ = 4ax that passes through the point (3a, a).
9y? 7. If chord BC subtends right angle at the vertex A of the |
3x-4= a which 1s the required locus.
| parabola = 4x with 4B = JS, then find the area of
ILLUSTRATION 5.13 triangle ABC.
A quadrilateral is inscribed in a parabola y’ = 4ax and three of | 8. PQisachord of the parabola y? = 4x whose perpendicular
its sides pass through fixed points on the axis. Show that the bisector meets the axis at M and the ordinate of the
fourth side also passes through a fixed point on the axis of the | midpoint PO meets the axis at N. Find length MN.
parabola.
—_— ——_— _-—o = =
a 10l' and MOM are two chords of parabola y? = 4ax with | y Aes
" vertex A passing through a point O on its axis Prove that \ x A=0
the radical axis Of the circles described on LL’ and MM as y
diameters passes though the vertex of the parabola. /
a 2 AN SWERS
Sth. k Ya)
~~ oe 2 5 |
| ARK Dircctrix
es ae S. 4\724,21° 4k - 0 ! ak @
6a* = 0 —
| 6
, Ve Jan - at a
8. 2? | at
| 1 30 sq. units
The general form of the parabola having axis parallel] to y-axis

PA RABOLA OF 1s y== Ax’? Ax’ + 4 Bx+C(A# (0), which represents the quadratic function.
OTHER F ORMS Na SBE E
4{ a a)
| FQUATION OF PARABOLA HAVING AXxts PARALLEL => x
A
_ _—
| 10 x-AXIS
| qhe standard equation of parabola v" = daa (a > 0) can be written _ Al BY - B&B +S]
Lt ¢
eQ -0F = 4a(x- 0)
Here. verten of the parabola 1s (0. 0). 2A 4A
| Now. if the parabola is shifted (translated) with vertex at
| 4.4), thenoe
its equation
ER becomes =A ( x+— 3
2A 4A
1
_—
wo (+)B
‘|1 =
2
B* —4AC }
+] =-—
Directrix “
k)
4 = Comparing it with (x — h)? = 4a(. — &). we have vertex at

z= »-h=0 E 2
|
e
a5 Axis mites nee and length of latus rectum wil.

| 2A 4A 4
+x Curve opens upwards if 4 > 0 and opens downwards if 1 <9

a) an - Similarly, x = Ay” + By + C simplifies to
|
py if aac
The axis of this parabola 1s y — & = 0, which 1s parallel to y+] tg
S-EXRS
The focus 1s (A + a, k) and directnix 1s x = h—a.
Comparing Sg ne ee = SBN SHEL SSSDESE SEMES 6
Parametric form of this parabola 1s x = h + af and y = k + 2at - oe , 4) and length of latus rectum _k
4
The part of the curve above axis y =k represents the function wa. |
ae oA a
‘~k=/4a(x—h) and part of the curve below y = k represents Curve opens to the mghtif 4 > 0 and opens to the leftit.4<0
the function » —k = —J4a(x-h) ILLUSTRATION S,.14
The aie form of the parabola having axis parallel to x-axis Find the equation of parabola
x= Ay’Ay? 2~ By + C(A #0) .
(i) having its verter at A(1, 0) and focus
Eouation Boreas at S(3, 0)
7 we ee ert (it) having its focus at S(2, 5) and one of the extremmes of
latus rectum ts 4(4, 5)
Y-Axis
"Parabola having equationx? = 4ay(a>0) or (x~0)=4a(y-0) She
® shifted
‘see (translated) with vertex at (h, k), then its equation (i) Vertex Is at AC, 0) and focus ts at S(3, 0)
Clearly, the axis of parabola ts the v-axrs
(th) = day ~ k)
So, we consider equation of the parabola as (v = k)*
Jraxy
‘s © axis of this parabola 1s x — h = 0, which ts parallel to
“axis sate).
Here, vertex ts (1, 0) = (A, A)
© focus is (h, k + a) and directrix is y = k - a. and a = distance between vert
ex and focus = 2
“rametnic form of this parabola 1s x = h + 2af
and y=k + af, Therefore, equation of parabola
is y= 8(x - 1).
——
5.8 Coordinate Geometry 7
y. ~
5#] als
ll
Q! Lad om
a es ee
a
O WS ag
am,
as y=
Olt. 0) (2. 0)
tex is x -4 > 0.
Equation of tangent at ver
1) 1s positive.
Also, coefficient of ¥ in(
emitics of latus rectum t
(ii) Focus is at S(2. 5) and one of the extr So, parabola opens to the righ
is 4(4. 4).
Compar ing (2) with (y—
k)? = 4a(—xA), we have 4a= | orga ;
.=2 1s ] unit.
Thus, length of latus rectum
(.-2) =40°-4) a units from the vertex
Focus is on the axis at distance
: (2.5) 43. a’ os 2
I )-( 1]
P (2. 6-7 44 °) Focus, S=
(0. 5 Al " 4
] 15
of directrix 1s ¥ = 4- 4 or x= ri
(2.4) (x2) =-4("- 6) Also, equation
of focus at distance
End points of latus rectum lies on either side
2a untts on the latus rectum line.
= — -~
SS
— [z=
Thus. end points of latus rectum are
and
Clearly. the other extremity of latus rectum 1s B(0, 5)
axis of the parabola 1s x = 2
So, we consider equation of parabolas as ILLUSTRATIONS 5.16
(x - hy’ = 4a(y - &)
or (x- hy = —4a(y — k), where h = The parametric equation of a parabola 1s v= rrly='-k
Length of latus rectum 1s AB = 4a = 4 Find the equation of directrix
a=]
Sol. Wehavex=r+1.v=21-1
Now, we have following two cases
Parabola opens upwards: Eliminating f, we get
In this case, vertex lies on the line x = 2 at distance | unit
below the focus.
So, vertex 1s (2, 5 — 1) or (2, 4)
(5)
Thus, equation of parabola is (x — 2) = 4(y - 4). or oly aa(eel)
Parabola opens downwards: Comparing with (1 — k)° = 4a(x — A), we have vertex (1. 1) and
In this case, vertex lies on the line x = 2 at distance | unit axis parallel to x-axis having equation vy — | = 0
above the focus. Also, 4a=4.So,a= 1
So, vertex is (2, 5 + 1) or (2, 6) Directrix 1s parallel to y-axis and lies to the left of the vertex 2
Thus, equation of parabola 1s (x — 2)? = -4(y - 6) distance a units from it.
So, equation of directrix is 1 = 1 ~ Lor1 =0
ILLUSTRATION 5.15
Equation y + 2y~«+5~0 represents a parabola Find its ILLUSTRATION 5.17

vertex, equation of axis, equation of Jatus rectum, coordinates Find points on the parabola y* 2) 4x = 0 whose focal length
of the focus, equation of the directrix, extremitics of the latus 1s 6.
rectum, and the length of the latus rectum.
?
+ 2y-x+ 5=0
Sol. We have 1" = 2 — 4x = 0
Sol. We have (I)
(1) or (vy 1)? = 4 + 1/4)
or x= y +2y4+5
(+1) =(@-4) (2) Vertex of the parabola 1s (—1/4, 1).
So, focus is S(-1/4 + 1, 1) = S(3/4, 1).
This 1s parabola having vertex at A(4, -1) and axis parallel to x-axis
having equation y + 1 = 0. Let point P(x, y) be on parabola.
___Parabola_5-9
sp= y(x-3/4)? +(y-1? =6 Sol. x°— 8x + 16y=0
(Given)
ic, (x4)? =-16y + 16
5 e Sy
eget 2 tae t= 36
Te Le, (x — 4)? = -16(y - 1) (1)
(Using (1))
Therefore, the focus 1s (4, —3).
Dig 8 pO BE The focal distance of any point on a parabola 1s its distance from
2 2 16
the focus
2
Therefore, the focal distance of point P(x, y) on the parabola 1s
2 (2+3} =e
5 5 ‘
Vx4)? #43? = V-16(y-) +43)?
4 1 i =6 [s vt 7 —6 1s not possible
= fiv+5? = ys)
19
=> a—y ILLUSTRATION 5.21
(Using (1)) If the focus of a parabola is (2, 3) and its latus rectum is 8, then
=» v=1+2V5 find the locus of the vertex of the parabola.
Hence. points on the parabola whose focal distance 1s 6 are Sol. Latus rectum = 4a = 8.
a=2,
(2 1425)
\4 Now, the vertex lies at distance a units from the focus.
Let the vertex be (x, y)
ILLUSTRATION 5.18
(x-2)?+Q@-3y" =4,
Find the value of p such that the vertex of v =x" + 2pa + 13 15 which 1s the equation of locus of the vertex.
4 units above the x-axis.
ILLUSTRATION 5.22
Sol. The given parabola 1s
Prove that the locus of centre of circle which touches the
yas? +2Qpxt 13
given circle externally and given line is parabola.
or yE(Qxt+py+i3—p?
or = y—(13-p*)=(x+py Sol.
So, the vertex is (~p, 13 — p’).
Since the parabola 1s at a distance of 4 units above the X-axI5,
13-p’=4
or p=9
or p=33
ILLUSTRATION 5.19
Find equation of parabola which has axis parallel to y-axis

and which passes through the points (0. 2). (1. 0) and (1. 6).
Sol. General equation of parabola having axis parallel] to y-axis
Is
y=AC+Bx+C
It passes through the points (0, 2), (-1, 0) and (1, 6) Let the given circle be x* + 1" = a" and given line
‘ , | ,
be x = bd.
Then we have, One of the variable circles C having centre
P(A, k) touches the
C=2 given circle at A and line at B
(1)
A-B+C=0 From the figure, radius of circle C 1s
(2) (b-h)
A+B+C=6 Also, OP=OA + AP
(3)
Solving (1), (2) and (3), we get OP = OA + PB
C=2,4=1 and #=3
Therefore, equation of parabola is y = x* = Vie tk? =ut(b—h)
+ 3x +2
ILLUSTRATION 5.20 7 (a+b) at beta +e
Prove that the focal distance of the point (x, y)
> = (a+ bY -2a+ bx,
on the parabola which is required equation
~8x+ l6v=Oisly+5| of locus.
tly, this is equation of parabola.
a ee
(0, +1) on y-axis,
Also, parabola passes through the points
ILLUSTRATION 5.23
Similarly, we have other inequalities as follows
In triangle ABC, base BC is fixed Then prove that the locus of 1
For OT < TQ, we get x <2» +4) .
vertex A such that tan B + tan C = Constant is parabola.
Sol. J 1
).
For OT < TR, we get y <2(x+
A(x, y)
2 1
For OT < TS, we get x" S$ -a(»-3]
2
Common region of all the inequalities is plotted as shown iy the
following figure
iN Pf >X “
(0, 0)B x M a-x Ca,0)
Let base BC lie on x-axis with B at (0, 0) and C at (a, 0). Here, a
1s constant.
Now, according to the question,
tan a+ tan B= c (constant)
y
=> RL Y= c
xX a-x
ay
= Ec
x(a—x)
=> ay= c(ax— x?) , which 1s equation of locus of vertex 4
Clearly, this is equation of parabola
WLiuetRArioNn’s.24 EQUATION OF PARABOLA WITH GIVEN FOCUS AND

DIRECTRIX
Consider a square with vertices at(! 1), (-1,1).(-1, 1) and
(1, --1) Let S be the region consisting of all points inside the Let S(a@, B) be the focus, and /x + my +n = 0 1s the equation of
square which are nearer to the origin than to any edge Sketch the directrix of the parabola.
the region S.
Let P(x, y) be any point on the parabola.
Sol. Let us consider any point 7(x, y) inside the square such Ya
that its distance from origin 1s less than or equal to its distance
from any of the edges.
Sh Gs
M4 Ne P(x, y)
. Sere x
(1, "p LS aay) eo sS™.
po fm
7 es Be :
(a, B) \
! Baw j ey Oo =
a Then using definition of parabola

SP=PM
ie QO. BA,-1) V(x-a? +(y- py =e tmy trl
P +m?
sg (x a)? +(y— B= (ix + my +n)?
OT < TP, TQ, TR, TS
Consider OT < TP P +m?
=> mx? + Py 2Imxy + px + gy +r=0
=> yr+y? <I-x This is second-degree equation in variables x and Jy.
] We observe that second-degree terms form a perfect
square:
= ys-2(x-3) (1)
ie, mx? + Py 2Imxy = (mx — ly?
So, point 7 lies on or inside the parabola y = —2(x — 1/2), having Now, consider general second-degree equation,
vertex at (1/2, 0) and which 1s concave to the left ax’ + by? + 2hxy + 2gx + 2fp +e =0
_Parabola _ 5.11
5 ¢ yation represents parabola, then we must have

yi?” = abe + 2fgh — af ~ bg’ chs 0, a(n?
Jom = A
x ,) J 2
not represent pair of straight lines or point

fof which curve does orx’ + y? — 2xy - 32x —32y— 192 = 0, which 1s required equation
of parabola.
af ggoond-degree terms to form perfect square,
{0 f
ILLUSTRATION 5.28
Find the value of A if the equation (x - I~ t+(y- 27 =

USTRATION 5.25
iad the value of A if the equation 9x? + 4)? + 2axy + 4x — 2p Mx + y + 3)? represents a parabola. Also, find its focus,
4320 represents a parabola. : vertex, the equation of its directrix, the equation of axis, the
equation of latus rectum, the length of the latus rectum, and
; Comparing the given equation with ax? + by? + Qhey + the extremities of the latus rectum.
gt fere= Owe have a = 9h =4,.c=3,h=A, 2=2, and
Sol. We have equation (x — 1)? (y 2)? = A(x + y+ 3)
j--] Ifthe equation 9a°+ 41° + 2Ary + 4x— 2 + 3 =0 represents -——-—; x+y 43
bola, then its second-degree terms must form the perfect or x1)? +(y-2° =e
quate Therefore. VP +0?
2 = 36 (Using h* - ab = 0) This represents parabola 1f J22 =I
wv A = +6
siso, for these values of A, A # 0.

1
“3
JLLUSTRATION 5.26 Focus of the parabola 1s S(1, 2) and directrix 1s x+y +3=0
Axis passes through focus and it 1s perpendicular to directrix.
Does equation (5x — 5)? +(5v4 10)? = (3x+4y45)° So, equation of axis isx-y+1=0
represent a parabola? Axis and directrix meet at B(—2, -1)
Vertex A 1s midpoint of BS
So. We have (Sx-5)° +(5v+10)° =(3v+4y4+5) | l=2 2-1). 1 I
Vertex, A = “> a) = "379
V(x-1)? +(v +2) = ane
7 9 3 4y
Latus rectum line 1s parallel to directrix and passes through focus.
LHS =distance of variable point P(x, v) from fixed point (1, ~2) So, equation of latus rectum is x +) —3 =0.
RH.S. = distance of point P(x,y) from the fixed line 3¥ + 4+ 5=0 Length of latus rectum = 2 x Distance of focus from directrix
9
But point (1, —2) satisfies the line 3x + 4 +5=0
So. equation does not represent a parabola. a 5
=
ss
ILLUSTRATION 5.27 Extremities of latus rectum lie at distance =3\2 from the
focus on the Jatus rectum line whose equation 1s x + + — 3 = 0.
| Find the equation of parabola having focus at (1, 1) and vertex
| at(-3, -3), Therefore, extremities of latus rectum are
Sol Focus is at S(1, 1) and vertex is at A(-3, ~3) (1+3V2 cos135°, 2+3V2 sin135°)
So equation of axis is x -y=0. =. (1$3,2+3)
¥ 4 = (4. —1) and (-2, 5)
ILLUSTRATION 5.29
(x, YIP. a Show that the curve
Directnix whose parametric coordinates are
x=P+t+, y=f—t+
4.
x rs ios 4= 0 4 “y | represents a parabola,
M Sol. From the given relations, we have

X¥+V 3 \-y
= +th—=r
wt
2 su
&*
Eliminating ¢, we get
Art y=(V-1P +4
This 15 second-degree equation in which second-degree terms
site directrix meet the axis at B form perfect square.
D, ©4 is midpoint of BS, coordinates of point B are (-7, ~7). Rewriting the equation, we have
axis and passes through the point
~1,~) 1S perpendicular to the
ge
e bye 2u~2. 2vtd=0
Comparing with aa? + by? + 2hvy + 2ex t+ 2A
Ng, uation of directrix is x+y + 14 = 0. — +e=
abe + 2feh - af? - bg oie. pres
cui, ®quation of parabola is locus of point P(x, y) which is Owe find tha
So, given equation represents a parabola
‘distant from focus and directrix.
ITS PROPERT;,
a
, nas -HOR p AND

5.12 Coordinate Geometry - FOCAL C poli which passes through tts focys ig R
rd in two segments a
3 GONG cat ABRUDATION Exercisepomts5-2(0, The std ‘ Paivides focal cho Propen®
have following
2) fora veerent of focal chord. We ‘
abola are the
1. If the focus and vertex of a par calle
im
its equ Bh
and (0, 4) respectively, then find
ation
call
focal chor
par abo la who se focus 15 (0, 1) and y= 4ax
Find the equation of ex of the
(at’, 2at)
1 + 2 = 0. Also, find the vert
the directrix is
um, | ,
parabola
focus and directrix of the parabola
Find the vertex,
so 2(2y Ek
The verter of a parabola is (2. 2) and
the coordinates of
| |Lesa > |
2.0) and (6,0) Then a
extremities of its latus rectum are (— S(a, 0)
“~O
find the equation of the parabola.
DA”
A parabola passes through the poms (1, De® KIO
N
mn
of parabola
and (4. 3) Find the equation of the axis a ,-24
chord of the parabola
Find the length of the common !
(A t/
.> =4(a + 3) and the circle y+ + 4x = 0.
a parabola is 7 ¥ ~ 8
The equation of the latus rectum of
isxtv= 1? g P(at?, ie
and the equation of the tangent at the vertex y’ = 4ax, chord joinin
I. Ifon the parabola then ¢,f; = —1.
Then find the length of the latus rectum.
parabola whose Qlatz, 2at,) 18 focal chord
Find the length of the latus rectum of the Proo f: Chord PQ passes thr
ough the focus S{a, 0)
x -4y+3=0
focus is at (2. 3) and directrix is the line
through the Slope of PS = Slope of OS
If (2. 6) 1s the midpomt of a chord passing
+ 1), then prove that
vertex of the parabola yy = 4(x => 2 a
Ya-lah at -a a-at,
a choid of |
10. Show that the locus of a point that divides 2K, 215
in the ratio 1 2 => Sar
slope 2 of the parabola \° = 4x internally fp-1 5-1
is a parabola. Also, find the vertex of this parabola 2 2
are nearer
11. Plot the region in first quadrant in which points => fb(-t)+()-4)=0
to the ongin than to the line x = 3
that tts
12. Prove that the locus of a point, which moves so
distance from a fixed line 1s equal to the length of the
1
tangent drawn from it to a given circle, 1s a parabola > h=-—
13. Prove that the locus of the centre of a circle,
which h
ofa
intercepts a chord of given length 2a on the axis of
x and Thus, if parameter of point P is ¢ then parameter
4 ]
passes through a given point on the axis of y distant Ois ==,
from the origin, 1s a parabola t
14. Find the equation of the parabola whose focus 1s
S( 1, 1) :
Hence, » ifIf point
point PP = (ar,(ar 2ar) then point
r
ai O=
and directrix 1s 4x + 3y — 24 = 0 Also find tts axis, the chord.
of focal
vertex, the length, and the equation of the Jatus rectum II. ] ere, P and Q are extremities ring
The axis of a parabola is along the Ie y = x and the ° tad

Segments
parabola,
of focal latus rectum (2a) is harmon
semi chord
15. (SP and SQ).
distance of sts vertex and focus from origin are V2 and roof: This is general result. Rll
Let us prove this ie
2/2. respectively If vertex and focus both hie in the first parabola y" = day
quadrant. then find the equation of the parabola. F tom the figure, SP = P\f = PL
+ LM=ar +4
ANSWERS SQ=ON=QOK+KN=
_
2“2 +a
2. (y 1) -A(x +1), Vertex =( | 1)
. x + 8y = 32
Now, att - l I
4
1 SP = a
3. Vertex = (2, —2), Focus = (2, —3/2), Directrix, v | SQ a+art~ ata/t
|
4, (c- 27 =-8(y-2) 5. x-y = 0 6. 4
=)... ??
Vertex = [es 5 ata? atr+a

1
gJ2 8. +4 10.
14. Ox? + 16)" — 24xy + 242x + 94y — 526 =0 | a

= p= 25P SO
15. (x-pP=8@+y-2)
SP+SO
jist sad gh Ser 4 SS ey
Parabola 5-13
~. 2af) on
a{ret)
parabola "= 4ax 1s is
If Vis the foot of the ainéctiix on the axis of a parabola. PP’
proof: a double ordinate of the curve and PX meets the curve again
tat = ofr!) in Q. Then prove that P’Q passes through the focus of the
pO» SP + SQ= atar’ parabola.
t
The jength of the focal chord of fie p
arabola y= day Som Consider parabola v= 4ar
which makes an angle @ with \ positiy ¢ direction
of \-aNXIs Nz=(a,)
yp fer coseE™
Let point P be (at, Qual)
proof: Length of focal chord PQ = aft + ‘) P= (at, —2al)

f Equation of line PX 1s
dar-0 2
=
xo. slope of PO = ar 2at—-0
4 = tan @
—a _ y= . (x+a)
t at’ +a
1 t
a 2h
Ge tes or (1 + Py = (x +a)
= 1
Solving this line with given parabola, we get
iy iy
2 po=
U alr ; =a [:-* : +4 4r° (x+a)
=4ax
(40? ‘i
= al4cot* 6 +4) P(x + ay =ax(1+P)
= 4a cosec” @ P(x + a+ 2ax) = af’ + 1+ 2r yx
VuUguuds
34 22 4
From this we can conclude that minimum length of focal px tka =xat hax
chord 1s 4a which is length of latus rectum
2 (at at’)x + af =0
\, Inany parabola, circle described on focal length as diameter
x(x - at’) —a(x- at’) =0
touches the tangent at vertex.
Proof: This iis general result. Let us prove this for standard (x- at )(xt - a)=0
4 9
parabola \~ = 4ax x=at alt
From the figure. equation of circle described on SP as Putting x = aif into (1), we get
diameter 1s
(x -ar)\(x - a) + G'- 2ary - 0) = (+Py= 2a + a|
To solve it ith }-axis. We put x = 0 ¥=2alt ‘
os ar)(0 — aye (i — 2ana -0)=0 Thus, point Q hes at (ait, 2a/t).
or -2an +a °F = 0. which has equal roots Clearly, points O and P’ are extremities of the focal chord
Hence circle touches 1-ax1s So, P'Q passes marougr the focus
Also. point of contact 1s (0. af).
‘1. Inany parabola. circle described on focal chord as diameter
touches the directrix.
Pm the length of a ‘focal chord of the parabola 1~ = 4ux which
Proof: This 1s general result Let us prove this for standard
is at a distance b from the vertex.
parabola \~ = 4ax
From the figure, equation of circle described on PQ as Sol,’; In the figure, OM! = > Vg
diameter is = distance of focal chord from
(x - ar \(x a alt’) + (y — 2atyly > 2a/t)=0
To solve this with directrix, we put x = —a.
vertex, | #
Let focal chord PQ make an angle
(-a - af \(-a - alt) + (y ~ 2atyly + 2a/t)=9
2 8 with positive \-axis,
or ye2 dal rt l ya 2
f >| = 0, PO = 4a cosee” 0
1 Now, in right angled triangle
which has equal roots.
OMS,
Hence, circle touches the directrix.
sin @— OM/OS bia
PQ datalby ~ 4ahier
te, ~8) is an end of a focal chord of the parabola y" = 32x,
“find the other end of the chord.
We have parabola y* = 32x. If AB is a focal chord of x° -— 2: x+y — 2 =0 whose focus is §
“tnd of focal chord is P(2, -8) = P(8/, 161). and AS = /,, then find BS.
1=~1/
'S,. Parameter of the other end Q of the focal chord PQ 1s 2. WSO x -2x+y-2=0
or x -2xt1=3-y
"efore, coordinates of QO are (8(2)*, 16(2)) = (32, 32).
or (x- 1) =-(-3)
The length of its latus rectum is | unit
TANGENTTO PARABOLA BOLA
Since AS, 1/2, and BS are in HP, we have
INTERSECTION OF ALINE AND A PARA
A line may meet the parabola in one point or two distinc, Poin,
at all.
or it may not meet parabola
1 _ 24S x BS
2 AS+BS Aa iw 2
or a
i
ESF
j D<0 D=-0" /D>0__
y= dax
ILLUSTRATION 5.34
Circles drawn with diameter as extremities of any focal chord
of the parabola y? - 4x - y - 4 = 0 will always touch a fixed
line. Find the equation of line
‘Bok yo 4y=yr-4=0 »
yvaoyt i =4x+ G
o Hadeol
Gk Consider the standard equation of parabola
y= 4ax t
and the Ine having equation
Circle drawn with diameter as extremities of any focal chord of y=mxtc (3
the parabola always touches the directrix of the parabola Solving line and parabola, we get
Thus, the circle will touch the line (mx +c)? = 4ax (eliminating “
or onrx’ + 2x(mic — 2a) + c’=0 C
Discriminant of this equation 1s
or 16,
+ 33 =0 D = 40nc — 2a)’ - Amc?
or D= 4(4a° ~ 4amc)
Now, this equation has either two distinct real roots or r%
equal roots or has non-real roots.
1. If ¢ and ¢, are the parameters of the ends of the focal If line meets the parabola in two distinct points (4 and B) te
chord »? = 4ax, then prove that roots of the equation equation (3) has two distinct real roots.
fx + ax +t, =O are real D>Oore<a/m
2. If the line passing through the focus S of If line meets the parabola in one point (P), i.e., touches
the parabola
parabola then equation (3) has two equal roots.
y = ax + bx +c meets the parabola at P and Q and if
D=0Oorc=alm
SP = 4 and SQ = 6, then find the values of a
If line doesn’t meet the parabola then equation (3) ©
3. Ifa focal chord of )7 = 4ax makes an angle o € [7/4, n/2} imaginary roots
with the positive direction of the x-axis, then find the
D<Oorce>a/m
maximum length of this focal chord.
4. If the length of focal chord of y* = 4ax 1s /, then find the EQUATION OF TANGENTTo STANDARD PARABOLA
angle between the axis of the parabola and the focal chord. We have already learned that if line vy = mx
+ c meet the para?
§. If the length of focal chord PQ is ‘¢’, and ‘p’ is the v’ Bis= 4aa in one point, i e., touches the para
bola then ¢ ="
perpendicular distance of PQ from the vertex of the In that case, equation of line
parabola, then prove that ¢ o I/p’, is
6. Circle drawn having its diameter equal to the focal v=mx+— a (|

m
distance of any point lying on the parabola x” — 4x which 1s tangent to parabo
+6y+10=0 will touch a fixed line Find the equation of la1° = day.
Equation (1) 1s equation of tangent to parabola 1” = 4a" havi
line slope m. .
7. Accircle is drawn to pass through the extremities of the Here, m can take any real
value except zero
latus rectum of the parabola y* = 8x. It 1s given that this Solving (1) with the parabola
, we get
circle also touches the directrix of the parabola. Find the a
ay
radius of this circle. NY +— ) = dar
m
ANSWERS _— _ 5
ay
or fm -—_— =0
7 +h 3. 8a units mm
or Hie
4 | 4a
4. asin y 6. yt 1=0 7.4 mm
\ So, from (1), yem(S)+2 aid

m m m
OT Parabola 5.15
oF contact on the parabola jis (4es =)

rin pomt of ? =e _ Qat, at 7 el
® (at, 2at) for some 1, mom} Qum. am aj me ware
soe?
m= l 7 2. 4a: Qat. a) fora
t “+ oa + 2
a i el
go, equation of (1) becomes
pevtat (2) Equation of tangent to parabola ( ky = dalx ~ A) having
qhisis the equation of tangent to parabola" — day at (ar’, 2ar) ; a
ai pornt whose parameter ts /, slope mis Vk = (x —h) + ay
a at Q)we have
= tar ae OT ET
Zan ome y ) (Luts tRATION S63 S
Find the equation of the tangent to the parabola y° = 8x having

ie yy = a l 3 : . = j
. 1, - 2a +1) =0 (3)
a =O. where T= vv, = 2aQ + ¥)) slope 2 and also find the point of contact
Here. (a. 241) = (14.14) “Soli The equation of the tangent to i — dace having slope mis
Thus. for parabola e = dax, equation of tangent at point
v=7 mr+ Ad
_ 1,)on itis obtained by replacing1° by yy, and 2x by v + ¥,
ah the similar replacement mechanism, we obtained the Hence, for the given parabola. the equation of the tangent 1s
aquanen of tangent to circle ata point (A)..¥)) on tt. 5.
r= 2x +5 Oy xt
ithe equation of parabola 1s \" = 4ay then equation of tangent meen 2
- point(Xp. 14) OM LAS Aay ~ 2aQ_ + ;)= 0 or T= 0 and the point of contact 1s
Here. x" 18 replaced by an, and 21 1s replaced by y + vu a 2a 2 2(2) 1
(“ mn a) = & a)A = (5. 2)
\ll above forms of equation of tangent can be obtained by
siculus method also in which we differentiate the equation of 7
warabola to get the slope of tangent to parabola at any point on it. ILLUSTRATION 5.36
Differentiating equation )~ = 4ax. wrt a, we get : est
5a =4 a _ 2a A tangent to the parabola )~ = 8x makes an angle of 43° with
a aE ae . the straight lme vy = 3v + 5 Then find one of the pomts of
dy 2a contact.
* Slope of tangent to parabola at (v,.1,) = aA =—_
Vi. y nei . :
55 co ad Soi. The cquation of the tangent to the parabola 1~ = tur at
. equation of tangent to parabola at (A,.1;) 1s 25 ~
a (ar, Zaz) 1s ;
J-y, = —(x-x;) wervtar
: Here, a = 2 So the equation of the tangent at i2r. 4r to he
>
or 33, -3) = 2ax - 2ar, parabola \~ = 81 ts
or 33, - 4ax, = 2ax — 2ax, ‘ wev+or Ls
(as point (x;..},)on the curve, so Vj = 4ax,)
of 43, =2alx +x) The slope of (1) is | cand that of the given line 1p 3. Therefore.
\.
2x, =ar and y, : = 2ur, we get 1.3 3
daty = 2alx + a") 2
—H—-_ = stan 43+ = 2!
l i | or2
oT y=-x+al
t
| ee ee ae .
oo y=mx+— Putting — = = slope Fors 1/2, the tangent ts
. ~ Away ea)
t | | ) ae
m
of 2 4
The equations of tangents to al] standard parabola in terms re, Beene Pee
Parameter of the poi contact and the slope of the tangents are
of nt
‘Z5ul4
eet and the point of contact is (1 2, —2)
ae snow nbclow
Equation of Point on the Equation of tangent 5 7 . ae
orf 2, the tangent is 2 2) 4 t S andthe ‘ PEINCoL contacts (8,8)
_ —_Para bola,
Parabol a ' parabo la ; a ventis
si
(uusTRaATION 5,37
>
= 7
Bovtar
. ——
¥ > 4ac (ar, 2ut)

ad +
7’
1
ie HG & GOS Gl 2 b SIN
~ p touches the parabola
: | a?
pn
a am a" y dun ifp cos act asin? ac~ Oand that the point of contact 1s
ta a, I
(a a tan?
7WS ~ dar a at)
( af, Nn vlat d 2atan a)
roam = Sok. Lhe piven tine is

[- ea. -=4
me m | ii Veos OCF simon =p
or Vv=—x cot @+ pcosec a Now, focal length
m= -— cot aand c = p cosec &

sP=atat® _
SQ? =a + atv=att +i)
Since the given line touches the parabola, we have
jo lt and SV=a
or
C~ ini
cm=a
5g? = SP« SV
are in GP.
or (p cosec &)(-cot @) =a Therefore, SP, SQ. and SV
or Pp cos atasir a@=0
The point of contact 1s
a _2a a) Find the equation of common tangent of y= 4ax and 2 = 4hy
—rT-.-5 = (a tana, 2a tan @)
(cota cot a] = |
To find the equation of common tangent to two cu
we first consider the standard equation of tangent to one OF the
curves and then use the condition of tangency for the other cur,
Parabola »* = 4x and the circle having its centre at (6, 5)
= 4ay
intersect at mght angle. Then find the possible points of
intersection of these curves.
| Sol. Since circle intersects parabola orthogonally, the tangent

to parabola at its point of mtersection with circle must be normal
to the circle
Normal to the circle passes through its centre
Let the pomt of intersection of circle and parabola be P(t”. 21)
2
Equation of tangent at P to the parabola 1s vt = eae f
This 1s normal to circle.
So. it must pass through centre of the circle (6, 5)
r-51+6=0 4 ,
Equation of tangent to v- = 4a. having slope mis
t= 2.3
a
So. possible points on the parabola are (4, 4) and (9, 6). ,=mxt — |
m
Solving this lme with the parabola x~ = 4hv, we have

Find the equations of the tangents of the parabola v° = 12x,
v= sof mx “)
which passes through the point (2, 5). m
GSAB The equation of the given parabola 1s y° = 12x (1) or A ae2 _ die A Pie
Comparing with \* = 4ax, we get a = 3. m
If line (1) touches the parabola x" = 4av, then above equation --
Therefore, the equation of the tangent from (2, 5) 1s
equal 100ts
nes a (2)
Thus, discriminant is zero
Tangent passes through the point (2, 5). Then,
or 166° nr Kp 6
5=2m+ a ml
or 2m? - 5m+3=0
or m=1,5
Therefore, from (2), the equations of the required tangents are
y=x+3 and 2y=3x+4
‘ a)3 = b\ 1
Thus, equation of common tangent is v= -(2) -[ :
The tangents to the parabola y’ = 4ax at the vertex V and any
point P meet at Q. If 51s the focus, then prove that SP, SQ,
and SV are in GP.
Ifa tangent to the parabola y = 4ax meets the x-axis al Te d
| Sol. Let the parabola be yi = dar. intersects the tangent at vertex 4 at P, and rectan
gle TA
Qs the intersection of the line x = 0 and the tangent at point completed, then find the locus of point
QO.
P(at’, at), ty=x+ar.
| Sai) The tangent at any point B(ar?, 2at) to the parabola “0
Solving these, we get O = (0, af). Also, S = (a, 0).
vextar
v Parabola 5.17
ae tangent at vertex A(0, 0) is the y
Let (x), 1,) be the midpoint of chord OR
~aXIS, T and P are
cyace |
as
> qyand (0. af), respectively, Then equation of QR 1s
-
(8 ,
‘4 wv—- 4x + 4) - 5 =47-'8xj 5 (Using 7= a
dy - yyy 4, + yp=0 (2)
CE a or
Clearly, (1) and (2) represent the same line
rot 2
=> y,=4and&= 4x, Fy
pars A). then h=—ar? and k= at. > yy =4andx,=2
glummating 1. we get A" + ah =0

gence. the locus of 0 1s v~ + av = 0, which 1s a parabola.
Find the locus of the foot of the perpendiculars drawn from
the vertex on a variable tangent to the parabola y = 4ax
Two tangents are drawn from the point (~2, -1) to the parabola {Sol Let foot of the perpendicular from vertex on tangent be
vedy. Ifa is the angle between these tangents, then find the M(h. k).
yalue of tan a. k
Slope of OM = a
Soke Here a= 1 Any tangent having slope m7 1s
h
1 =m + 77 Slope of tangent = a
Ir passes through (—2, -1). Therefore, Thus, equation of tangent 1s

5
2m -m-1=0 h
) v—k =-— rasx-h)
; 1+ (1/2) or gee
SO aaa wa | 1)
a
Comparing with 1 = y+ me have
SP pancethy SRT
If two tangents drawn from the point (¢. /) to the parabola h a Wek
n P= i an mn
aaaliens i
"= 4a are such that the slope of one tangent 1s double of the
2 »2
other. then prove that a = 5 Bp. ak W+k
as = ; (eluminating 77)
Sol” Tangent to the parabola 1° = 4y having slope #7 1s 7
:
So, x(x? +") + ay” = 01s the required locus.
.=mx+ .
itpasses through (a, B). Therefore.

l EQUATION OF TANGENT TO ANY PARABOLA
| B= ma+ iy
To find the equation of tangent to standard parabola, we use
* om - Bm+1=0 standard equation of tangent. But if the equation of parabola is not
‘ccording to the question, it has roots m, and 2m, Now, in standard form, we use calculus method to find the equation of
} tangent. In this method, we differentiate the equation of parabola
m, + 2m,= 8 and m, 2m, = @
to find the slope of tangent or point of contact on the parabola
or By
| £ SOF
| I»
, a= 5B Find the equation of the tangent to the parabola y=" - 2x +3
at point (2, 3),
[SBD Since the equation of the parabola ts not in the standa

the tangent at the point P(2, 4) to the parabola y? = 8x meets rd
p R. Parabola :»* = 8x + 5 at Q and R, then find the midpoint of form, we use calculus method to find the equation of
tangent.
2]
vv -24+3
Sr. equation of the tangent to parabola y” = Sxat P(2,4) Is Differentiating wart. \, we have
Or
4y = A(x + 2)
x yt Dix 0 ( ! )
‘chord meets the parabola)? = 8x + 5 at Q and R

—_—_————
——————
line y=x~) The

be the point closest to the
= ————
Wolk” Let Pi.) ) M
t (2, 3). Then,
We want to find the tangent at poin
dy = Slope of given line
(| = 2(2)-2=2 AE lie cia
dx K,2.3) 2N, +3= l
t Is
form, the equation of tangen
Hence, using point-slope
or x, = Landy) = 0
yp-3=2r—-2)orp=2x- | v= ¥ + 3+ 2 1
ILLUSTRATION 5.48
\\ / ypr
:
x-2
to the parabola v =y't3v+2
Find the equation of the tangent , x
having slope 1. , ; / x
y— le er
rs ¢ 4 0
“Sol. yey + 3yt 2 SY
Differentiating both sides wrt x, we have
1=2 ee 3 y
ax aX
lar distance
dy | Hence, point (—1, 0) 1s the closest and its perpendicu
ce. Therefore,
or
2y+3
—=
dy from the line v =x — 2 will be the shortest distan
e, : 3
Now, the slope of the tangent 1s 1. Therefor Shortest distance = We
dy 1
or — =——_ =]
dy 2v+3
ILLUSTRATION 5.51
or yer
of
which 1s the ordinate of the pomt on the curve where the slope If the lines Z, and L, are tangents to 4x” — 4x
— 24y + 49=0
of
the tangent 1s 1. and are normals for x” + y’ = 72, then find the slopes
Putting + =—1 in the equation of parabola, we get \ = 0, Ly and L,
Hence, using point-slope form, we have be ot

y-(-l)=!@-9) Sol. As L,and L, are normals to x +7 = 72, they must
or x-v-1=0 the form y = mx
Solving it with parabola 4x" — 4x — 24y + 49 = 0, we have
fitu STRATION 5.49 4x” ~ 4x — 24mx + 49 =0
Find the equations of tangents drawn to the parabola or 4x" - 4x(1 + 6m) + 49 = 0
y=x° —3a + 2 from the point (1, —1). Since the lines touch the parabola.
D=0
"Sol. Tangents are drawn to the parabola from the point (1, -1).
or 16(6m + 1)? — 16 x 49=0
Now, the equation of line from (1, -1) having slope m 1s
or 6m+1=47
y-(-l) =m - 1) 4
Le, m=lor-—
or y=mx—-m-1
Since this line touches the parabola, when we solve line and
parabola, the resulting quadratic will have equal roots
Solving, we have EQUATION OF PAIR OF TANGENTS
me -m—Va= x3x42 Consider parabola y* = 4ax,
e-B+m)yxt+3+m=0
To get the equation of pair of tangents, we find the equate
or
of locus of point 7(/, : &) on the € pairpai of tange
This equation has equal roots, 1.¢ , from point P(x,, v,) to the parabola
nts PO and PR al ,
(m+ 3) —4(m + 3)=0 : :
ie., m=-30rm=] = dan
Hence, the equations of tangents are
peo
(A, A)Te gor ~

yt] =—3(x- I) andy+1=x-]
or 3x+y-2=Oandx-y-2=0 Q s
(\y.4,)P* (
ILLUSTRATION 5.50
Find the shortest distance between the line y = x — 2 and the

parabola y = x? +3x+2
—_————
Parabola_5-48
a ,
T
EQUATION OF CHORD OF CONTAC
\",) to the parabola mui
equ! h- Vy
-\; 7 \ 7) ) Let tangents drawn from point P(x), is ca
R(x, 3) Then line OR
\ h- |
parabola at points Q(t), V2) and _

(ee — chord of contact. Consider parabola v= 4ax
af
ie h = An h
“ yj ( l ) VA
ql that ifif the the | Ime v= mx + ¢¢ touches

touches the the parabola 12 = day. a) v = 4ax
VT
st a o1a> cm
Y
gp, from (tH). we have 2 2 —_ ——6X
) ; “se O
Hin A ES =a
P
h—-\, (xX), vy)

| h-\
b= ath= “
mY (A-) acy a R
1s (tj, ¥3)
Thus. locus of (7, A)
a 1) (44> VV) = aly - ue Equation of the tangent PQ 1s
We 4an)(vy ~ 40x) = Oy; = 2a a + x (2) WV = 2a(x + x2)
of
and equat ion of the tangent
chs 1s the equation of pair of tangents to parabola Vv = 4a PRs yy, = 2a(x + X3) (2)
eam potnt PQ). ¥)) Since (1) and (2) pass through P(x,, Vj),
This equation can be expressed as V2 = 2a (x, +)
and y,y3 = 2a (x, + *3)
sr Thus, points Q and R lie on the line
where. S = v= 4an, S, =3 i 4aa, and T= y,- 2a (x + ¥)) yy, = 2a(x +24) ;
+ x,)x= 9
yy, —2a( (5)
or
ILLUSTRATION 5.52 or T=0,where 7=1y, — 2a(t-x;)
Here, if point P lies on the curve then equation (5) represents
Tangents are drawn from the point (~1, 2) on the parabola
the tangent at point P In that case. points P. QO and R merge
¢=4y Find the length that these tangents will imtercept on
Similarly, for parabola x” = 4a. chord of contact wr t. pomt
the lme x = 2.
P(x). ¥)) 1S xX, = 2aly + V7)
Sol. ye-ps 1 =
tee
ILLUSTRATION 5.53
Tangents are drawn to vy = 4a, at pomt where the bne

ova)
(-1, 2). ~e Ix + my + n = 0 meets this parabola. Find the point of
intersection of these tangents.
aan) Sains
Sol. Given line ts
A+my+n=0 il)
Let this line intersect parabola V7 = dan at points P and O
Now, tangents drawn to parabola at pomnts P and Q, mterseet at
(2, ¥3) R(h, k)
So, PQ ts chord of contact of parabola w rt pomt RU: A)
“s equation of the pair of tangents from posnt (x, ¥j) 18 So, equation of lne PQ 1s
SS)=7 ky = aly + A)
or Jan — ky + 2ah =0
© WF -4ng ~4x,) = py) = 200 ty? Equations (1) and (2) represent the same straight line
(2)
"= equation of the pair of tangents from (—I, 2) 1s 2u -A ah

OF ~ 4xy14 + 4) = [2y— 2x - WP = 40x FY l m u
if
Nn 2am
Sah 2" — dey = (y+ 1 = h=—-,h=-
l l
"g with the line x = 2, we get
_ R no 2am
Or
292-8)
= (y=? So, required port of intersection ts iF 2
/
ILLUSTRATION 5,54
there . entre
M+ Y= 2 and
y, yy =—-17 If the chord; of contact of langents from a point
Ow, b, ~y,/? =(y, +), y- Ayn =4- 4(-17) = 72 P to the
parabola y" = day touches the parabola x? = 4by,
then find the
locus of P
| by ~y.| = \72 = 6v2 ,
20 Coordinate Geometry a,
Sol. C hord of contact of parabola v= 4ax wrt. pot P(v,, )) 1s 10. Show that the common tangents to the parabolg Vs,
. and the circle x° 24,2
+ ¥° + 2x == 0 form an equilatera| trang}
1) = 2a(v+x,). (1)|
olving this line with parabola \~ = 4/y, we get 11. 7Pand 7Q are tangents to the parabola, y* = day a p
») ay
Vi =dbx
“(1 41)) Q. If the chord PQ passes through the fixed point ; “A, b
y then find the locus of T.
" Wyo - 8ahy — 8ahy, = 0 12. Tangent is drawn to parabolay* — 2v~ 4x + 5 = Oat apo,
Since the line touches the parabola, this equation will have equal P which cuts the directrix at the point 0 A point R js Suc
100ts. that it divides OP externally in the ratio 1/2: | Find th
Discriminant, 2) = 0 locus of point R
> 6davh” + 32aby\v, = 0
2 ees |
13. Ifthe distance of the point (A, 2) from its chord OF Contac
=> VV, = aah wal. parabola 1” = 4x is 4, then find the value of h.
> Ww = lab. whieh is the required locus.
ANSWERS
1. (a/4, a/2) 2. rtv+2a=0 3, tan (3)
From a variable point on the tangent at the vertex of a parabola
v= daa perpendicular is drawn to its chord of contact. 4.x+3v+27=0 5. a= 6, 28x10
Show that these variable perpendicular lines pass through a
fived point on the axis of the parabola. 7. 4v+3y-3=Oandy—-1=0 8. 337 = Iba,
(So Equation of chord of contact to parabola 1° = 4ax wrt 9 v=i-| Il. by =2a(v-a)
point P(0. A) 1s 2 Oth@ 12 +4=0
Ay = 2a
or Jay - A) =0 (1)
Equation of line perpendicular to this Ime ts Ay + 2a = ¢
If it passes through P(0, A) then ¢ = 2ad PROPERTIES OF TANGENT
Therefore, equation of line perpendicular to (1) through We have some interesting properties of tangents of parabola
pomt P is
Ax + av = 2ad These properties are discussed as follows:
or 2a + A(v-2a)=0
I. Let us find the point of intersection of tangents at any mo
This equation represents the equation of family of
straight lines points on the parabola \* = 4ay
concurrent at point of intersection of lines y = 0
and v— 2a =0 Let two points on the parabola
So. lines are concurrent at (2a, 0) be P(at;. 2at,) and
Olar}. 2at)
CONCEPT APPLICATION
Equation of tangent at P 1s
EXERCISE 5.4
ayrat at;
1. Find the point on the curve )" = ax the tangent at which ul
Equation of tangent at O 1s
makes an angle of 45° with the v-axis.
2. Find the equation of the hy=v+t ats
a 7 > 4
straight lines touching both
Solving (1) and (2), we
(
Vo = 2a” and \~ = 8ax get
3. Find the angle at which the parabolas y" = 4x and VE ahh Y= a(t +t)
Fe 321 intersect Thus, abscissa and Ordinate
of point of intersection ©
4. Ifline 1 = 3v-¢ touches the parabolay” tangents at P and Q are, respectively, G.M.
= 12x at point P,
then find the equation of tangent at point abscissas and ordinates
and AM ®
Q, where PQ 1s of P and O.
focal chord
These coordinates are usefu
5. If the line a + y= @ touches the parabola l in problems about
y = x — x then Point of intersection of tangents under locus .
find the value of «a different conditio"™
iI. In any parabola, foo
6. Find the slopes of the tangents to the
parabola y = 8x which t of perpendicul ar
tangent les on the from focus upon a
are normal to the circle x* + y" + 6y + &y 24=0, lange nt at vertex,
F
7. Find the equation of the tangent to Proof: This ts genc
the parabola 9x? 4 12, ral r esull. Let us prove this for stand
+ 18y— 14 = 0 which passes through the point parabola 1? = dey
(0, 1:
8. Find the locus of the point from which the Equation of t Ang
two t angents ent at point P ts
drawn to the parabola )* = 4ax are such w=rxat ar.
that th e slope of It meets p-axts at
one 1s thrice that of the other MO, ar).
9. From an external point P, a pair of tangents 1s drawn Now, slope of
to the sy= “/=9
parabola y” = 4x If 8, and @, are the inclinations of these =f
—a
tangents with the x-axis such that 6, + @,
= 7/4, then find Also, Slope of
the locus of P. tangent PM is i
Hence, SM is t
Perpendicular
to PM.
See eee
Parabola__>+4?
perpendiculas
VI. Tangents at extr emit ies of focal chord are
nt
oes dun and intersect on directrix tat point P
ts/ andslopcoftangen
Proof: Parameter ofpomt ?
|
K 7 Plat’, 2a1) Is —
ie q /
PQ 1s focal chord
rd)
]| (by property of focal cho
g ~
So, parameter of point Qis-

QO:
.. Slope of tangent at pomt
— e\
Q are perpendicular.
Thus, tangents at point P and
to
of inte rsection of tangents
Also, coordinates of point
ters are / and f, are (atyly.
parabola \° = dav whose parame
acl + fy)).
|
ey
|
R are [aticn, af t- ; |
Therefore, coordinates of point
trix.
In other words, locus of feet of perpendicular from focus Thus, tangents mtersect on the direc
ypon any tangent to parabola 1s tangent at vertex. rsection of tangents
In other words, locus of point of inte
In any parabola, image of focus in any tangent lies on the d of the parabola 1s
at the extremities of the focal chor
directrix
directrix.
proof: This 1s general result. Let us prove this for standard Or
parabola y= dar
direcirix of the
Chord of contact w r.t. any point on the
In the figure, coordinates of point N are (—a, 2ar)
parabola 1s focal chord.
2at—at
Slope of MN = =—1= slope of SM Note:
-a-0
Therefore, points S. Mf and N are collinear at T(-ar, 0).
It should be noted that tangent at P meets x-axis
Also, from the definition of the parabola, SP = PN Since SP = PN= a+ ar and ST = a+ af’. quadrilateral TSPN
Thus. triangle PSN 1s isosceles m which SM/ 4 PM and so is rhombus. So, M is midpoint of TP
SN L PM.
SM = MN ILLUSTRATION 5.56
So, image of focus Sin the tangent at point P 1s N
P on it bisects the angle Find the points of contact Q and R of tangents from the point
. Inany parabola, tangent at any point
and the perpendicular P(2, 3) on the parabola yada.
between the focal chord through ?
from P to the directrix
“Sols.Let pomts O and R be (47, 24,) and (43. 24).
Proof: This 1s general result Let us prove this for standard
Point of intersection of tangent at O and R ts (1,09. (4) ~ 2) = (2. 3)
parabola \~ = 4ax.
In the figure, clearly, tangent PM 1s the angle bisector of tty =2 and ¢, + 1, = 3.
ZSPM. Solving, we get, 4, = 1 ands, = 2
of
- In any parabola, length of tangent between the point So, QO is (1, 2) and R 1s (4, 4).
contact on the curve and point where it meets the directrix
subtends right angle at focus ATION) 5.57
Proof: This is general result. Let us prove this for standard
Tangents are drawn from any point on the line 1 + 4a = 0 to
parabolay” = 4ax
the parabola y" = 4ax Then find the angle subtended by their
Equation of tangent at point P is ty = x + at
7
chord of contact at the vertex
at’ -a
It meets directrix x = —a at R} -a, | : Sone Let P(t,) and Q(1,) be the points of contact of tangents
t
drawn from any point on the line y + 4a = 0.
Now, slo fp 2at—O0 _ 21
. 19) Slopeof SPtice
Msp = a
wine fel The point of intersection of these tangents lies on the line.x + da= 0,
att, + 4a=0
at" —a -0 2 or hh=—4
Slope of SR, + meg “SR = t = Ls= This 1s the condition of chord PQ to subtend a right angle at
-a-a t the
vertex, -
Hence, SP is perpendicular to SR. So, required angle is 90°.
fp
5.22 Coordinate Geometry -

ILLUSTRATION 5-62
ILLUSTRATION 5.58
the tangent at the Poiny
Let y = 3x - 8 be the equation of
Two straight lines (y" — ) = m,(\ + a) and (1 ~ h) = mv * a) a whose focus is at (—1, ~]), Fing
(7, 13) lying © n a parabol
are the tangents to y" = day, Prove that 177 =~ l an d the length of the latus rectum, of
the equation of directrix
1s a
Sol. Clearly. both the lines pass through (a, >), which the parabola.
point lying on the directrix of the parabola
Sol.
from any point on the
Thus, mm, = -1, because tangents drawn DS
directrix are always mutually perpendicular.
&
aa
ILLUSTRATION 5.59
Mutually perpendicular tangents 7-4 and 7B are drawn

to Neia R713
LPNS
1" = day. Then find the minimum length of AB.
M 45
Sol. Chord of contact of mutually perpendicular tangents 1s 7 oye Axis
of parabola
always a focal chord
rT eh| SER
Thus. minimum length of 4B 1s latus rectum = 4a. v
Cc
9
ILLUSTRATION 5.60 ou
&, ©
Tangents P4 and PB are drawn from point P on the directrix 2 §
Age
(Sa-—l2v+ 3y°
to the parabola (\- Dre (v- 3y = Find the 5
169
least radius of the circumci rcle of the tnangle PAB
We know that
Sol. We have equation of parabola. Length of latus rectum of parabola
\5x—12v+3| = 2 x Distance of focus from directrix
V(x- 2h += 37° =
J5-
+ (-12)" So, we need to find the equation of directnx.
Now, the image of focus in any tangent lies on the directnx
Focus of the parabola is (2, 3) and directrix 1s Sy — 12y + 3 = 0.
Image of focus S(-1, —1) in the tangent ) = 3x — 8 is the pow
Now, tangents drawn to parabola from point P on the directrix are
(5, —3), which lies on the directrix.
perpendicular and the corresponding chord of contact AB 1s focal
Also, line joming point of contact P(7. 13) and \(3. -3)s
chord which 1s diameter of the circumcircle of the tangle PAB
perpendicular to the directrix
So. least value of diameter 1s latus rectum.
13-—(-3) 8
Here. L.R =2 ” Distance of focus from directrix Slope of NP =
7-5
- yy rset : l
13 13 ‘*. Slope of directrix = ——
C
46 Since directitx passes through point V, its equation ts t~ wil

So. required radius = 3
=i(f
ILLUSTRATION 5.61 |-1+8(-1+19! 20
Tangents are drawn to the parabola (x — 3p + t+ 4p =
So, length of latus rectum = 2x
Jina ee
Ne
(3x-4y-6y9
at the extremities of the chord 2x -3y -18=0
25
Find the angle between the tangents LOCUS OF POINT OF INTERSECTION OF TANGENT
UNDER DiFFERENT CONDITIONS ,
Sol. We have equation of parabola, Jah, )
Equation of tangents to parabola 17 = 4a, at points Plate
yely
and Q(ut, Jats) are fy =v Fate and ny = 0+ at;, respect! A
a(t, + 4)) Ifwe want :
These tangents intersect at point Ratt,
a) “5 3; = J —
V(x-3y +0 +4y° = ee
J3? + (47 find the locus of pomt RU. &) under some conditions, then WS .
)
h ra ath C
Focus of the parabola 1s (3, —4) and directrix is 3) 41 6 OO
and k= a(t, + 45) a
The given chord 2x — 3y -18 = 0 passes through the focus (3, -4) .find thirdz equation between f, and f, using gi re
We can
of the parabola. So, it 1s focal chord conditions.
Since tangents drawn at the extremities of focal chord are By eliminating ¢, and 4, from these equations, we g&t
relatio®
perpendicular, angle between tangents 1s 90°. between / and k and hence, the required locus
a
l
"4 the locus of point of intersect => 5 lat, — af, \(at\t,) =
on of tangents
fis rola y = 4ax {9 the
hich are inclined at an angl => a(t, th 44qn hy = 4c?
e @ to each other
( yhich intercept constant length ¢ on 2 2
the tangent at vert wis a! (4)
( ol that area of AABR
js constant
ex 4h () = 4,7
c, where 4 and B ar a a a
(m oints of intersectio of tangents
ints with wav.
n are 8ents with y-axis: R js point of
intersection of tangents. => (v"- dar)? ~ 4c, which 1s the required equation of locus.
V4 GONCEPT APPLICATION Exercise 5.5

(i) |
1. The tangents at the points P and Q on the parabola |
a ‘Peden y? = 4ax meet at T If S's its focus, then prove that SP. ST
and SQ are in G.P .
| ~~ Plat . 2at,)
4 2. If PO is the focal chord of parabolay ¢ 2x + 3 such
(hk Re od that P = (2, 3), then find the slope of tangent at O
Afi 3. If there exists at least one point on the circle + 7 =a
from which two perpendicular tangents can be drawn to
parabola y” = 2x, then find the values of a
4. Find the angle between the tangents drawn to. =4.
where it 1s intersected by the line y = x — |
5. Find the angle between the tangents drawn trom the
origin to the parabolas »" = 4a(v - a).
Equations of tangents at points P and Q are, respectively, 6. Find the locus of the point of intersection of ine
qy=vtaty and thy = x + aty, perpendicular tangents of the curve y~ + 4 -6c-l2=f
These tangents intersect at R. 7. A tangent 1s drawn to the parabola 1~ = 4ax at P such that it
cuts the y-axis at 0 A line perpendicular to this tangent is
h k
hty= — and’, +1, = — drawn through Q which cuts the axis of the parabola at &. [f
a ~ a
the rectangle PORS 1s completed. then find the locus of ©
The angle between tangents 1s @
8. Let y= x + 1 1s axis of parabola. 1 — « - 4 = 01s tangent
1 1 of same parabola at its vertex and 1 = 2 ~ 3 ts one ut tts
a hots tangents. Then find the focus of the parabola
tan @= | ; . = = ‘i |
ANSWERS
1+ fla
h ty 2. -1/2 3. a> 12 4. 90°
> tan’ O(1 + tt)? = (1)- by 5. 90° 6 21+5=0
> tan’ 6(1 +1b) =, +t) + 4h
3 \ m
7. 2a(v-a)- v =(a-1) a a) | 8 Vr =o
tan”
; 6 f+)
; -(4)
* ao
ih
os
1 , a re)
dl
a a a
tan’ (x + a)? = 3° + 4ax

NORMAL TO PARABOLA
U
(Replacing / by x and k by vy)

_ Thists the required equation of locus. We know that lime perpendicular to the tangent to
the curve at the
i) Tangents at P and QO meet y-axis at A(O, at;) and B(0, at), point of contact 1s normal,
respectively. ; Let us get the equation of normal to the standa
Given that AB = c rd parabola
y= 4a in different torms.
|at\— at,| = At any point Plat, ar) on the patabola i>
7 >
= C7 = dur slope of
3S A@U(t, + 4-4] |
tangents —,
> @ (+) -4" opt t
a * Slope of normalatpomt? 7
So, equation of normal at point P ts
iy ri ¥~ 4ax = c, which 1s the required equation of locus
vo Qat~ ty at")
©a of triangle ABR = ¢ (1)
or oy Nb at bat}
l (2)
Ss > 4B RM =¢ Slope of the normal, 2 = —4
5.24 Coordinate Geometry - Fie
a — all)
Qa) = 2
ts
Therefore, equation of normal m terms ofits slope
1 2am - ane
Q) ol ; @r __2
5
on the curve
This is the equation of normal at pomt (amr. - 2am)
ILLUSTRATION 5.66
If (ar, 2a) = (4,24). then equation (1) becomes Kind the equation of line which i agama to the Parabol,
lin Sr
ui eye
(4)
<= 4y and touches the parabola = 12v.
=¢
,
y Sol, Normal to parabola y 4, having slope 7 is
Here. slope of nermal ts
wil
| ti
We ean get this slope using differentiation also yomyk2t+—,
m
Ditterentiating > = dav. w tty we gel ;
s Its tangent to = 12¥
having slope mts
ah wal .
SE sae Slope of tangent at pot (V4.1) Now, tangent to above parabola
A \;
3 Q,
Slope of normal
rod mn
~ ra ) |
y=nyt—
antl m
The equations of normals to all standard pat abolas in terms of Comparing (1) and (2). we get
parameter of the point on the curve and the slope of the normal
are tabulated as follows os eF= 3
me nt
Equation of Point on the | Equation of Normal | Qn -3m+1=0
=>
Parabola parabola
= — —- — +—_- ————7 => (2m — 1)(m - 1) = 0
e vat (at, 2ut) v=-n + Qattat |
1
ppemes_ OTR
(am.sy—2amt) - _ 5 v | =>
.=nn—2ant-am
== din (-ar ut) 1=n7 late at Therefore, equations of lines are 2) = x - I2ors =«+3
— (-ain . Zan) 1 =n Tuan
+ Dua ~*~ aon
am
ILLUSTRATION 5.67
= ea —F
vn dn (2at, at) Y= n+ date at |
Find the equation of normal to the parabola 5 = ac -x-1
>
— — _-_ -+ —_ _ —- --—-— |
f
1
Ba
—
oa |
1 San car which has equal intercepts on axes Also, find the point where
Smt one! me this normal meets the curve again.
7 3
ee 4 (Dar
a) 5
arr} 7 .=n~ Jatt at_ ; Sol. Here. given equation of parabola 1s not standard.
2
ad au \ a So. we use ditferentiation method to find the equation of nerze
— =| Loan 2a .
Since normal has equal intercepts on axes. tts slope ts -!
Now, differentiating equation 1 =." — 1 — 1 on both sides rt’
ILLUSTRATION 5.64
we get
Find the equations of normals to the parabola 1° = 4ax at the cu) =2\-]
A
enas of the latus rectum
This 1s the slope of tangent to the curve at any point on it
Sol. End points of latus rectum of parabola \> - daa are Pla. 2a) Thus, slope of normal at any pomt on at ts.
and Ola 2a) d\ l
~e =r ~ 1 (given)
Comparing with (ar. 2ar), we get — 1 for pont ? and ¢— —I for
point O
,=1
; ; ;
Nov. cguation of normal at point (alm 2 2athisy= + 2atd at 3 Putting = 1 in the equation of curve. we gets = 1
equation of normal at point isa > V+ 2a+ ory iy —3a
So So, equation of normal at pomt (1. 1) en the curve is
Also. equation of normal alpoml Qisy =.) 2a aory vo 3a ve €( I--la
Ol vty 0
ILLUSTRATION 5.65
Solving this equation of normal wath the equation of parabol
If} =x 4+ 245 normal to the parabola yw den, then find the we have
value of a
Sol. Normal to the parabola. 4an having slope as ol ve |
y= my — 2am - am
4 q
or 1. fl
Hence, normal meets parabola again at point whose abscissa I$ =
The given normal 1s v= 1. + 2 Therefore,
3 Putting \ = —1 in the equation of curve, we get y= 1.
> —
m= 1 and —2um—- an = 2
So, normal meets the parabola again at (—1, 1).
OO LL Ot
Parabola 5.25
a.
v
3
shat the length of the interce 1@, dam — 2am - am’ =0
e or 229
n=HzZ
ue yal) of a parabola ¥ =dax made by the the point
nat -* circle described m= +/2
the ne joining the focus and P as
diameter is avi+? .
. \Normal NORMAL TO PARABOLA FROM A POINT NOT LYING
oh
\(ar’, 2at). 4 ON IT
. a a 1" = day There are different methods to find the equation of normal
/ Be
‘ depending upon the equation of parabola |
If equation of parabola 1s in standard form say, v° = 4ax, then we
consider standard equation of normal
he. =a — 2am —am' (1)
Let this normal pass through the point (x), .¥,) which 1s not lying
on the parabola
vyp=ax, 2am am",
Solving this equation, we get values of m
Since this equation 1s cubic in m, we get at least one real value of m
Hence, from any point on the plane. we can draw at least one
jyuatton of normal at P(af, 2a/) to the parabola
\" = 4ax 1s normal to the parabola
y=-h + 2att ar’ (1)
ILLUSTRATION 5.70
ieithis normal meet the circle described on SP as diameter
in N.
2a ZSNP = 90° (angle in a semicircle), How many normals can be drawn to parabola v= 4 from
PN" = SP*—SN? point (15, 12)? Find their equations Also, find corresponding
\a SP=a+ar
feet of normals on the parabola
a SN= Distance of focus from the normal Sol. Equation of the normal to parabola a7 = dy hay ing slope
MAS
_ |at~2at—ar’ 3
| _ anvler
_—___
} = mx —2m—m'
Vier If it passes through the point (15, 12), then
PN = a1 +Pa P+ P) 12=15m-2m—m'
=@(1+P)(1+F-F]=a(1 +2) or n’— 13m +12=0
Clearly, one root of the equation 1s 1
PN= ay a i (m—1) (ni? + m— 12)=0
> (m— 1) (m—-3)(m
+4) =0
sia at 2 ned => m=1,3,-4
"2 normal chord subtends a nght angle at the vertex of the Thus, three normals can be drawn from
(15, 12)
Parabola y" = 4ax, then find its inclination to the axis The equations of normal and corresponding
ports on the curve
are given by
Si, Equation of normal to the parabola y* = 4ax having slope
Ts
Value of ‘in’ i Equation of normal Point on the parabola
= mx ~2am - am? (1) y=mx-2m- a Qn’, —2m)
irom Meets the parabola at P and Q l are 3 (tl. 2) —_
that PO subtends right angle at vertex. re ae Oo)
a "We can get the equation of pair of straight lines OP and OQ 4 i v=
Mogenization, 4y+72 a (16. 8)
—_—
tom (I) l=
mx— ILLUSTRATION 5.71
H0 ie
2am + am’
Mogenizin 8 the equation 7 = Three normals are drawn from the
4ax, we gel pomt(7, 14) to the parabola
=2 8 — lov = 0. Find the coordinates .
of the feet of the
= dax( mx—y | normals,
Of 2am+am Sol. The equation of the given parabola
The 4am2 a (2am + am’)y" si 4axy = 0 (2) 3]
is
V- 8 l6ov=0
©quation of pair of straight lines OP and OQ.

Differentiating wert... we
Sing v ae gel
| ang,2) OP and OO are perpendicular, sum of coefficients of
Ines
Sof
6 YS zero, 21
- § -
5.26 Coordinate Geometry ; ee
the curve.
Let normal be drawn at point (/1, A) on ferent points on the
Paraby
mal s d raw n at thr ee dif
:
We -8h If nor that h> 2,
¥ = 4ax pass t hrough
the point (h, k), then show
16 r
equ ati on of a nor mal to the parabola )* = 4ax hay
Also, slope of the normal at (i A) = Th US ED The
(2, 4) 1s slope 718
Therefore. equation of the normal at ()
y=my—2am—am parab g)
8 n at thr ec different points
on the
v-A= Feag —h) Since the normal draw equa tion (1) a
oug h ( h, k), it must satisfy the
pass thr
then we have
If the normal passes through (7, 14). k= mh- 2am - an
(2)
hh 8h 8 am’ + (2a- hym + k= 0
= = |—='| aa =>
rent normals pass throu gh (h, k)
-G la ce Now, it is giv en that three diffe d m,
- A) e distinct real roots mm), man
> (4 —h) (224 — A + 8h) = 128(7 Thus, equation (2) has thre
= fr -Idr-64h=0 From equation (2),
m, +m,+m,=0 (3)
= huh — lo) + 4) = 0
and mym, + mym, + mym, ~ 2a —h (4)
= h=0.4.16
Now, (1, + mz + m3)" 2=0
=
For =0,4 =0
+ MyM; +mm;)
m? + m3 + ms = —2(mym,
for = 4.4 =3 and =>
forh=lo.k=8. =. m; + m5 + mi, = 2(h - 2a)

the normals are (0, 0), and real. LH.S > 0
Therefore. the coordinates of the feet of Since mm), mt, and m, are distinct
S may be negate
(4. 3) and (16. 8) (As in case of imaginary roots LH.
h-2a>0
ie ih 3 may
= h>2a
s y = 4x and
Find the minimum distance between the curve Alternative method:
ty 12431 =0. + k=f(m)
Let an? + (2a—h)m
x +) 12x+31=0 distinct real roots. then
“Sol. We have parabola \ > = 4y and circle Since equation (2), i.e, f(m) = 0 has three
common normal equation f’(m) = 0 must have two distinct
real roots.
Shortest distance between two curves occur along
V4
line
. 1 = s(n)
\onmal to circle always passes through its centre
which goes through
So. we have to find the normal to parabola
centre of the circle.
Given circle 1s (x - 6y +57 = 5.
So. centre 1s 7(6, 0) and radius ts J. / \ p
m Is jm 1 a
Equation of normal to parabola having slope
,=mx- 2m - mn
If st passes through (6. 4). then Sy =0
0 =6m-2m- m° ,
3am? + (2a — h) = 0 has two distinct real roots.
m —4m=0
So, 2a—h<Oorh > 2a.
m=, +2
on the parabola
So, equations of normal and corresponding points
Note:
are tabulated below The converse of this is not true, ie., if A > 2a then its no!
7
—— necessary that equation (2) has three distinct real roots:
Value of m | Equation of normal Point on the curve other words, if / > 2a then it is not necessary that three distin
| os :
| 0 | y 0 P(O, 0)
——H4
normals can be drawn from (A, 4).
2 y 2x 12 QA, 4)
|
=, | w--dy 12 K(4,4) If three distinct normals to the parabola y- dy =4x _ 9 meet
at point (A, &), then prove that h > 4.
TQ = TR= V20 SGINY Given parabola is (y— 1)? = 4(x - 2).
TP =6 Equation of normal to parabola having slope m is
So, required shortest distance
= J20 ie Js = lS yv—1=m(x-2)-2m-m'
2
4
— parabola 5.27
esthrough (77, A) It meets the -axis at 7( -at’, 0)
ne y-L=mh~ 2)- 2m - ne Equation of normal at point P(1) 1s
mit (4 hye h -l=0 y= tet 2at+at
af - equation has three distinct real roots It meets x-axis at M(2a + at’. 0)
hl derivative equation must have two distinct real Focus 18 S(a, 0)
roots SP =a + af (focal length)
gt yor + (4- h) = 0 has two distinct real
roots ST= at af and SN= a} ar
g-h<Oorh>4 Thus, SP ~ ST- SN
points
Let us find the point of intersection of normal at two
P(t,) and Q(f) on the parabo la v= dar ;
CONCEPT APPLICATION EXERCISE 5.6 and
Consider two points on the parabola Paty. 2at,)
_ Prove that the chord re Vivd 4agfd =yye 4 BORE O(at3, 2aly)
chord of the parabola 1” = 4ax_ Also, find the point on the Equation of normal at points ? and Q are given by
parabola here the given chord 1s normal to the parabola ye- fx + 2at, + at} (1)
rind the equation of normal to parabola y= v7 = 3) — 4 ype Gxt att aly (2)
Solving these two equations, we get point of intersection
~
(a) at point (3. —4)

(b) having slope 5. as
3 Kreat 31s a tangent to the parabola \" = 24x, then find
{ (2a + alt? + 3 + tity), —atyt(ty + 6)
its distance from the parallel normal.
‘
These coordinates are useful in problems of locus of point
| of intersection of normals under different conditions.
4, Prove that for @ € R, the line vy = (v— 11) cos @— cos 36 IV. Normal at the point Plat’, 2at) to the parabola i = dar
is always normal to the parabola y" =16x.
meets the curve again at point O whose parameter Is given
. Find the locus of the midpoints of the portion of the 2
‘na
normal to the parabola 1~ = 4a, intercepted between the by ( =-t--

curve and the axis | : t
’ ad
6, Ifthe parabolas 1~ = 4a, and1~ = 4c(1 - /) have acommon Proof: Equation of normal at point Plar’. 2at) 1s
normal other than y-axis (a, b, « being distinct positive | y=-txt 2at+ at (1)
>?
It meets the parabola again at point Qlar. 2af).
real numbers). then prove that
3 ee 2ar = -att? + 2at+ at
7. Three normals are drawn from the point (c. 0) to the => 2a(r—1) + at(?*? - F)=0
curve» = x Show that c must be greater than 1/2 One => 2+ H+ t)=0 (at fe 2)
normal is always the v-axis Find ¢ for which the other : 2
two normals are perpendicular to cach other | a
/
_ ANSWERS _ V. In any parabola, normal at any point P on it bisects the
a |
external angle between the focal chord through P and the
l. (2a. -2 ¥2 a) | perpendicular from P to the directrix.
2. (a) 3x -y- 13 =0, (b) 5x-) - 20=0 | Proof:
3, 15 5. Vv
; =a(t—a) Te aor
1 3 | \= a ,v
set >
45
Normal AONE ada
_
. Nt Lr
N Aas allel Incident ray

PROPERTIES OF NORMAL A
Nehave following properties of normal to the parabola Reflected

ray
|. Normal other than axis of parabola never passes through OL S(a,0)
the focus.
Proof: Consider normal to the parabola y = 4ax at point
Plat’, 2at), which has equation y = 4x + 2ar + af
If this normal passes through the focus S(a, 0), then
0=-at + 2at + at’
f + 1 = 0, which 1s not possible.
Thus, normal other than axis never passes through focus = \
Tangents and normal drawn to parabola y° = 4ax at point
P(), 1 0, meet the x-axis at points 7 and N, respectively, In properties of tangent, we learned that tangent at any point
‘uch that SP = ST= SN P on the parabola bisects the angle between the focal chord
roof: Equation of tangent at point P(/) 1s oe, P and and th the perpendicular from P to
through the directrix
=xtar
~~
2-<8
Coordinate Geometry
S a nenicel sts
Since two angle bisect
ors of 2 ven two lines are always (considering point P in first
Perpendicular, another
bise clor (of external angle) is
r= V2 quag
normal at point P,
=» f= -2W2
This also spells out the refl
e ction property of parabola that
“Ifineident ray is par allel to the
axis of parabola, then after
Point P= (2, 2V2) and Q= (8,-4y2)
striking the parabola PO = (8 ~ 2)
» the reflected ray passes through the +(-4V2 — 202)?
focus *
Tis reflection Property of parabola 1s
used in reflectors
Which we use in day to day Itfe. 1...
dish antenna ete,
m toreh, headlight, 63
If the source of the light ts plac
ed at the focus of parabolic
Surface. infinite hght rays emanating from
the light source
get reflected by the parabolic surface and beco Prove that the locus of the point of intersection Of the norma,
me parallel]
to the ants of the parabola creating a light at the ends of a system of parallel chords of a Parabolajg ,
beam.
straight line which 1s a normal to fhe curve
Wilistration 6.95
In the parabola 17 = 4ay. the tangent at P whose BSE Consider chord PQjoining points Plat;, 2at,)and hor
abscissa is 7 ed a
2af,) on parabola y° = 4ax
equal to the latus rectum meets its axis at T, and
normal at P
cuts the curve again at QO. Show that PT: PQ=4.5. J 2a(t, aot hl, _ 2
Slope of f POPQ 1sm= alts? = 12) = i +h
Seb Let P be (ar. 2a) Since af = 4a. = 42 Consider f=2 Point of intersection of normals at pornts P and Q 1s
and Pita. 4a) The tangent at P is 2y = x + 4a which meets the Ra + a(t; + rE * hh), ~ ahhh, ~ 4))2 (h. ky
i-anis at 7(—4a. 0)
If the coordinates of Q are (at. 2ar,), then h—2a= a(t bY —tHhyand k= atyt(t, +4)
2
Putting 4 +4, = rs we get
So. Q 1s (9a. -6a) Therefore. 4a 2a
h—-2a=—>~atty and 4 =-—na1,
(POY = 125a° and (PTY = 80a m m
or PT PQ=4 5 Eliminating /,f,. we get
4a_smk
h-2a=—+——
ae I Se
m 2
Find the length of normal chord which subtends an angle of So, locus of R 1s
90° at the vertex of the parabola )~ = 4x. 4am
v-2a= Soe
m2
We know that norma! at point P(ar’, 2a/) to the parabola
~ = 4a. meets the parabola again at point Q(ar*, 2ar’) such that 4a 8a
or Lo— ‘--——- Sarre
m mo my
2 ,
i or v= mx — 2am’ — am’*, where or’
1
(1) = —
Thus, locus of pomt R 1s norm m
ba al to the parabola
a 4a
Find the locus of midpomt of normal
Phat 2ut) chord of parse
v= day,
2 1” ee WAH Normal to parabola i = jan

re
— —? 5
at point PU) mee?
parabola agai at pomt QO)
such that
,
f=-f-=
2 .
t
Oo Let midpoint of PO be
~. RU, A)
h
ae tat
Also, PO subtends nght angle vertex O10. 0) 2
w=—4 >
Hdl Visgh
t lat
mud A , ater’ ype Bu
2 (Lising 1 ( |'
From
(1). =-r 2
~ t
=> BMeupa 7
l fa
{
> fom Z
A
Parabola 5.29
ILLUBTRATION 5.80
A parabolic mirror is kept along y* = 4x and two light rays,

parallel to its axis, are reflected along one straight line. If one
of the incident light rays is at 3 units distance from the axis,
then find the distance of the other incident ray from axis.
Sol, We have parabolay” = 4x

Let two incident rays AP and BQ, which are parallel to axis of
the parabola, strikes the parabola at points A and B, respectively.
= an’ = 4a’ + (2a? + ary Which ts requi
red locus. After reflection, both the rays pass through the focus S(1, 0)
slternative method:
y
Equation of normal at point P(7) 1s y=4r
y=-t tartar A pod P

(1)
meets the parabola at point Q.
\ndpoint of PQ is R(A, k),
So. equation of chord PQ, whose midpoint is R(A, k). 1s
ky- a(x + h) = 0} “sti,0)
- 4ah (Using T=5,) (2)
Equations (1) and (2) represent the same straight line. 8 Q
rote 2at+ar?
—ta k k?—2ah
Therefore, AB 1s focal chord.

Let point A be (r, 2t)
Distance of ray AP is 3 units from axis.
= -_
2r=3
3
y a v
= any? = 4a‘ + (20° + *)?, which is required locus. or = 3
Coordinates of point B are [=.= (other end of focal chord)
era
ILLUSTRATION 5.79 c
>
t
If the angle between the normal to the parabola y* = 4ax at 2 | &
pointP and the focal chord passing through P is 60°, then find Distance of B from the axis =
we
t
the slope of the tangent at point P.
Sol. va CONORMAL POINT AND ITS PROPERTIES

Equation of normal to the parabola y" = 4a at point Plar, ur)
is
per y=-tt+attar
Ps Let this normal pass through 7(A, 4) on the plane
LFS 60°
k= -th+ 2art+ar
_<50° ‘ : +x or at’ +(2a—h)t—-k=0
(1)
This 1s a cubic equation in 1,
Va
* Tih,&)
By Property, \\p =dan
SP = ST = SN.
Given that ZSPN = 60°
7h - x
" ZSPT = 30° OK >
ens
Stee ST sp /prs = 30° ret _
l
Therefore, Slope of tangent = tan 30° = B :
5.30 Coordinate Geometry - _- SS 2at) is
Also, normal at P(ar’,
So, it has maximum three real roots
Let equation (1) have three distinct real roots, f), f, and 4. y=-ixt+ at + ar
So, it 1s possible to draw three normals to parabola through
It passes through point (A, k) "
point 7. af + (2a—h)t-k=0
identical.
For three normals, there will be three feet of normals on the So, equations (2) and (3) are
parabola, Plat;. 2at,) ((at’, 2at) itself) . Olat. 2aty) and Rati. _ Gat 28. 4f
2at;)
~ Qa-h -k
Points P. Q and R are called conormal points. 2g=-(2a+ h), and 2f=— k/2
1s
From the equation (1). Therefore, the equation of the circle
Sum of roots. #, + 4, +, = 0 (2) k
Sum of product of roots taken two at a time. x ty?- (2a h)x- 4 =0
2a-h
hfs * Ish, ot hh = (3)
a ILLUSTRATION 5.81
We have following properties of the conormal points of the
If two of the three feet of normals drawn from a point to the
parabola.
parabola y” = 4x are (1, 2) and (1, 2), then find the third foce
I. The sum of the ordinates of the feet of conormal points 1s
Sol. The sum of the ordinates of the feet 1s, ~ 3, -3. =
zeTo
or Therefore,
2+(-2) +7; =0
Centroid of the tnangle formed by conormal points he on
\-ax1s or on axis of the parabola in general or y; =0
Proof: From (2). we have So, the third foot 1s (0. 0)
2at, + 2at, + 2at; = 0
ILLUSTRATION 5.82
2at, + 2at, +2at,
=0 If the three normals from any point to the parabola y=4ram
3 the l:ne x = 2 at points whose ordinates are in AP. then prove
Thus, ordinate of the centroid of the triangle formed by that the slopes of tangents at the co-normal pomts are in GP.
conormal points is zero
So. centroid lies on x-axis (axis of the parabola)
Sol. The equation of the normal to the parabola 1~ = +:-
given by
II. Circle through the conormal points passes through ongin
(vertex of the parabola).
yr-mt2zee
Since it intersects x = 2, we gety =r.
Let the equation of circle passing through three conormal
points P(x), ¥;), O(x>. ¥2) and R(x;, v3) be Let the three ordinates f;, r., and r, be in AP. Then.
x -y + 2gex+2Bt+c=0 2n=tre
To solve this circle with the parabola, we eliminate x =(4 +4) - 31, 3(0) + f5) -
> Now, ¢, + 4, + 1, =0
2° e
So. iy ty 42> 42 fytc=0 or th=—t
| 4a 4a
Hence, (2) reduces to
34 + (16a? +8ag)y +320’ fy +16a°c = 0 (1) 2h = (—y)> = 34,4,(-15)

=-1+ 3h tht;
Sum of roots, y; + ¥2 + ¥3 + ¥4= 0
or 3 = 34 hty or k= Hf,
We have already established that y, + y) + y, = 0.
Therefore, t,, tj, and ¢, are in GP
ys = 0 and so, x,=0
Hence, the slopes of tangents 1'7,, 1 1, and |r; are in GP
Thus, fourth point where circle meets the parabola 15 (0, 0),
which 1s vertex of the parabola ILLUSTRATION 5.83
Therefore, c = 0 and from equation (1), we have Find the locus of the point of intersection of
two normals 4
y4 +(l6a? +8ag)y* +320’ fy =0 parabola which are at mght angles to one
another.
ory + (16a? +8ag)y + 320° f = 0 Sol. The equation of the normal to the par
abola1" = 42 i
y= mx — 2am - an}
or Bat + 2a(16a" + 8ag)t + 32a? f = 0
It passes through the point (A,
(Putting y = 2a/) k) if
k= mh - 2am — am’
or ab +(4at2gy+4f=0 (2)
or am? + m(2a—h)+k=0
v
of ———— - 7 __ Parabola 5.31
ae
f the above equa
quation be m1, my, and my.
atA , roots 0 2
=2
\é normals_-]
having slopes ™, and m, be perpendicular itty
m2 ~ => ht+hel
1s one of the roots of
*fr (iets =~ Kia.Ka. So, from (2), we have 4, = -I, which
mymy = —1,my= equation (1).
m,1s.a root of (1 ), we have
q
So, from (1), we have
, Ak) +B2a-h) + k=0 -l+h-2-k=0
or + — y—3 = 0, which ts required locus.
jo +a(2a-h)+ a =0
a
fr =a(h—3a) EXERCISE 5.7
CONGEPT APPLICATION
va the locus of (7, k) 1s
|
at point f, cuts the |
2 =a(v— 3a) | 1. If the normal to the parabola y? = 4ax
h28
parabola again at point /, then prove that
STRATION 5.84 2. Find the angle at which normal at point
P(at’ , 2at) to the
at point 2.
a,)and Q(t) are the points 7, and /, on the parabola y= 4ax parabola jy” = 4ax meets the parabola again
af’, 2at) sntersects
The normals at P and Q meet on the parabola. Show that the | 3. Ifnormal to parabola y’ = 4ax at point P(
of ordinates of the
mddle point of PQ hes on the parabola y = 2a(x + 2a) the parabola again at Q, such that sum
of latu s rectum in
| points P and Q 1s 3, then find the length
‘sol The equation of normal to y" = 4ax is terms of ¢.
,=-nv+2at+ at any point P on the
4. If tangents are drawn to y = 4ax from
normals drawn
[rpasses through the point (/, &). Then parabola)” = a(x + 6), then show that the
at their point for contact meet on a fixed line
= -th + 2at+ at’ at Pand Q,
5. If line x -2y— 1 = 0 intersects parabola \* = 4x
x af +(2a—hyt-k=0 then find the pomt of inter secti on of norma ls at P and Q.
Since normal at Plat;, 2at,) and O( ats, 2at,) passes through the ' 6. Find the locus of the point of intersection of the
normals
dar
roint R(atz, 2at,) on the parabola, at the end of the focal chord of the parabola y~ =
at, If meident ray from point (-2, 4) parall el to the axis of
7.
then find the
hhh -@> a the parabola 2 = 4x strikes the parabola.
tly = 2 equation of the reflected ray
Also, if (x,..;) 18 the midpoint of PQ, then 8. Let L,, L, and L, be the three normals to the parabola
1, 9 2 (2)
| y’ = 4ax from pomt P inchned at the angle 6). 6, and 6,
x)= =(at,” + at,”) andy = 5 (2at, + 2at,) with x-axis, respectively, Then find the locus of point P
2 yy given that 6, + @, + @; = a (constant)
(\P5y = () | ANSWERS
yY oy 2x, || — -
* (2) nits ithe) eA § adr 5. (19,4)
| 2. tan '|5|
% yf =2a(x, + 2a) =— 3a)
| 6. ya(x J. 4y-3y-4=0
Hence, the locus of (x;,);) 18 y? = 2a(x + 2a) ' § yp=tan a(v—a)
ii en
STRATION 5.85
and C on the parabola
Normals are drawn at points A, B, s of the point
Solved Examples
Y= 4x which intersect at P(h, k). Find the locu
the feet of two of them 1s 2.
Pif the slope of the line joining
EXAMPLE 5.1
at (f°, 2f) 18
Say. The equation of normal proye that for a suitable point P on the axis of the parabola
i =-m+2+° y= 4ax, a chord AB through the point P can be drawn such that
passes through P(A, k), then [(1/AP*) + (1/BP*)] ts the same for all positions of the chord.
(1)
P4+12-h)-k=0 are parameters of
'Sequation has three roots 1, f and 43 which Sol. Let the point P be (p, 0) and the equation of the chord
“ feet of normals on the parabola.

through P be
™ equation (1), we have

ae) nl EA) (1)
(2) cos sino
. h+h+1,=0 Therefore; (r cos 8+ p, r sin 8) lies on the parabola y" = 4ax. So,
the feet of two of the nor mals
*n that slope of the line joining r- sin"@— 4ar cos 8— 4ap = 0 (2)
A(t) and B(1,)) is 2.
_ ————— ain.
een in the parabo|, "
Sol. Clearly, trapezium ee
If AP = r, and BP = —ry, then r, and rz are the roots of (2) the following figure.
Therefore,
isosceles as shown In
y
B
a
cos” 6 4 sin’ 6
—al
Since id + aad should be independent of @, we take p = 2a. Then,
> + oP = a (cos’@ + sin’@) = 2
Hence. Ts + - is independent of @ for all the positions of the
chord 1f P = (2a. 0).
EXAMPLE 5.2 Let point A be (f, 20).

A parabola of latus-rectum | touches a fixed equal parabola. AS = 1 + 2 (focal distance)
The axes of two parabolas are parallel Then find the locus of 25 Or
the vertex of the moving parabola CS=AC-AS= = — =
=
eo
(1+7) iat |
4S ane
Sol. Let the fixed parabola be Also semi latus rectum 1s harmonic mean of segments
v= dax (1)
4S CS a
l 1
— + =]
l+¢ 21 2
4
1 4
21-47 +44+4r=21-17r-4¢°
Yo ud J
4f—17°+4=0
(4 - 1) (P-4)=0
Since moving parabola and given parabola are equal, they have P=4,1
same latus rectum length. 4
So. let moving parabola be _ ]
=> pa het
(y — kb)? = a(x -h) (2)
On solving equations (1) and (2), we get Thus,
4 = (1/4, 1), B= (4, 4), C= (4, and
Da (14)
2
AD=2
(yb = tal ss h ,
4a
And BC = 8 and distance between 4D and BC = te
=> y-Uayth=-y+4ah
=> 2 -2ky+kh-4ah=0 . Are:
“. Area of trapezium ABCD = — (2+8)\ | l 8B= + ooa ut
—
Since the two parabolas touch each other, above equation has two a}
> +
equal roots and therefore, discriminant 1s zero.
= 4k? - 8 - 4ah) = 0 EXAMPLE 5.4
= 4k +32ah=0 Find the radius of the largest circle, which passes through
=> y’ = 8ax, which 15 locus of the vertex of the moving
parabola.
focus of the parabola y~ = 4(v + v) and contained in tt
Thus locus is parabola.
Sol, We have parabola
— 4(\ + y) or Q- 2)" = 4(x +1)
EXAMPLE 5.3
Vertex is (~1, 2) and focus is (0, 2).
Find the area of the trapezium whose vertices lic on the parabola tt
y = 4x and its diagonals pass through (1, 0) and having length For the largest circle passing through (0, 2) contained pel:
parabola, circle must be symmetrical about the axis of the para
2 units each
4 So, centre lies on the line y = 2.
[ “~, of the circle be r:
Pa rabola 5.33
f circle is or (th)
2h =3h-!
f*" ‘ _ytQ-2year
: (2) Hence, from (1). ;
3k—2 , (Gk-2"2"-
; Se ana I) see _ s
ae Gh-
Hie 2) = 4(¥ +1)
Hence, the locus 1s
CLAP SN \ \ yen 3y 2+(

3y -2
5 °\'3x- 1)+10=90
Lt, 2)
9 SS EXAMPLE 5.6
B Tangents are drawn to the parabola at three distinct points.
Prove that the orthocentre of the triangle formed by points of
intersection of tangents always lies on the directrix.
we get Sol. Let the three points on the parabola be Plat}, 2at,),
ang (1) and (2), =r
x+ Olat3, 2aty), R(at?, 2at,).
-r)y + 4
+4=0 Points of intersection of tangents drawn at these points are
y+(4-2r)vt
, issa of points 4 and B A(atyty, a(t + t)), Blatytz, a(t, + )) and Clatyty, a(t, * f2))-
wt largsaesmet . circle touches parabola absc
austbe To find the orthocentre of the triangle ABC, we need to find
s.
w.sbove equation has equal root equations of altitudes of the triangle.
* (4-2n?-16=0 Slope of BC = a
a(t, -f,)
t,t) = "
1
= 4-2r=24
2 r=4
Thus, slope of altitude through vertex A 1s —f).
EXAMPLE 5.5
Equation of altitude through A is
The vertices A, B, and C of a variable mght triangle lie on a y-a(ty +) = (x — atyty)
parabola y’ = 4x. If the vertex B containing the nght angle
or v- a(t + 4) =-hx + ahhh, (1)
always remains at the point (1, 2), then find the locus of the
centroid of triangle ABC. Similarly, equation of altitude through B 1s
So Let the pomts4 and C be (7, 2¢,) and (4, 2¢,), respectively. ¥- Ah, +h) = hx + ahhh, (2)
Then. Subtracting (2) from (1), we get
M4gMac=— | a(t, — tz) = (tf, — t))x or x =—a

v 2 5 2 = -] Thus, orthocentre lies on the directnx.
(4 +1) (+1)
o {tht hth=-5 EXAMPLE 5.7
(1)
MM A variable parabola touches the x- and the y-axis at (1, 0) and
ae bh (0, 1), respectively. Then find the locus of the focus of the
aN parabola.
eae Sol. Since the x- and the y-axes are two perpendicular tangent
go
s
to the parabola and both meet at the ongin, the directmx
po passes
through the origin.
ot aa
C(t)
Let the centroid of AABC be (h, k). Then,

yet hr) Fh, A)
and pea 2h +2 +2 Q) 41,0) SS *

va
From (2), we get
Let » = mx be the directrix and
(h, k) be the focus Then,
6+6=3h- Lands, +4, = 3852 (3) FA=AM
— 2 UTR
- =
Tangent and normal at P(/) on the parabola meet the TAKig a

or (h—-1) i+R
\h—) eae =|" (1) and N, respectively.
and FB=BN We know that SP = SN = ST
NPT, TN is diameter and § A
or Vhr + (k- =p
(2) So, for circumeircle of triangle
mm centre.
Squaring and adding (1) and (2), we get between tangeny
SP 1s normal to the circle. If @ 1s the angle
@) 1s the angle betve,
+ (k= 1 = I
(h- Ie t het P to the parabola and circle then (90° —
BY 7
PT and SP
or Ayr = 2a + 2d - 2r+t=0,
which is the required locus Slope of tangent PT = —t
EXAMPLE 5.8 cop = 2at 2t

a tangent to
Tye lines are drawn at right angles, one being Slope oF at —a iP =A
locus of their
= day and the other to v" = 4hv. Then find the
| 2
oink of intersection,
nlf r-1 |_|
Sol. v=mv+4h (1) tan (90° —@) = roe ts
| Poe =
Is a tangent to 1 * = 4an and t -l
(2) ]
v= my +a
> cot =~
is a tangent to." = 4h
—! tan@=t => 6=tan !
Lines (1) and (2) are perpendicular Therefore, -_ ="
m™ a =-] EXAMPLE 5.10
or m,=—m The normals to the parabola ) \* = 4ax at three points P, 0 and?

meet at 4. If S1s the focus, then prove that SP-SQ-SR= aS
Let (4. A) be the point of intersection of (1) and (2) Then.
k=ee mh ~eeejy and h =ay mk eae
~ py, Sol. Let the coordinates of A be (h. &)
Equation of normal at (at’, 2at) 1s
or h=mh-# and h=-mh- 2
ay =—te+ 2att at?
or mh - mk ~ a=OQand mm te -~mh+b=0 If this normal passes through point 4. then
1
or eae # Fra >
Taner? [By cross-multiplication] at +(2a-hyt—k=0
Eliminating m. we have If ,, , and #, are roots of (1), then
~(h? +k?) (kb + ah) = (bh — aky at +(2a—h)jt—k =alt~t)) (¢-&) (te -Fs) :
or (x? = 17) (ax by) + (bx - ayy? = 0 For these roots, points on the parabola are P(r,), O(2) and &
Now, put ¢=7= V-1 in equation (2)
EXAMPLE 5.9
-ai+(Qa-hyi-k se ae- 4) Gb) -)
The tangent and normal at the point Par, 2at) to the parabola
\° = 4ax meet the x-axis in T and N, respectively Find the => \(a — A) a- Aj=ala-4)(@ - 6) (- 4),
angle at which the tangent at P to the parabola ss inclined to the = oe

lam +h? =a flee? ; flee? : flere :
tangent at F to the circle through P, 7 and N.
s } Pa
‘|
{ ped a)
4 fa tan? fatan Yatals
=> Va yla-hy ae
SoL \4
Squaring both sides, we get
Pp 1° =4aa
aSd* ~SP SQ SR
oe ul
EXAMPLE 5.11
Find the shortest distance between the parabolas 257 = a a
Ol s | ma
and 2x7 =2y 1
Sol, We observe that one of the equations of parabola ts obtain
by interchanging \ and y in the other equation of parabola.
So, piven parabolas are symmetrical about the line y =*
For parabola, »" = (v = 1/2), vertex 1s (1/2, 0)
_,.
Parabola 5.35
Point (4, 4) lies on the given parabola x’ = 4y
Any point on the line y = mx 1s O(@, ma).
eo parallel to the line y= x.
Let the chord PR be bisected by Q.
Ng VA
. 2x? = 2y ~-] +
/ vex aes = => x,= 2a-4

2
and ma=
4+y
J => yy = 2ma-4
B :
ay
2y?=2e- 1
Now, Q lies on the curve
2 (2a~ 4)? = 4(2ma- 4)
— eT [7 ee => 40+ 16-16a=8(ma- 2)
ua
=> 4c¢-~8(2+m)at+32=0
Since it 1s possible to draw two chords which get bisected at
point Q, then above equation has two distinct real roots
Discriminant, D > 0
(8(2 + m))’- 4x 4x 32>0
vyudy
dy (2+ my-8>0
va 2+m>2V2 or2+m<-2V2
a —
We) ay mS2N2 —2.0rme= wW2 ~3
(since tangent is parallel
Y
| to y == x)
1 EXAMPLE 5.13 “ = Sh
a IPS
Tangent 1s drawn at point (p, q) on the parabola }* = 4ar.
_ 3 Tangents are drawn from any point on this tangent to the circle
So, x= a x’ + y? =a”, such that the chords of contact pass through a fixed
point (r,s). Prove that rg? = —4ps?.
So, Az=]—,—
31 1 3
(j 7} and 8 =/-,-
(3 z) Sol. Equation of tangent to given parabola at point (p. g) on itis
qy = 2a(x + p)
Let (x;, ¥)) be a ponnt on this tangent. Then
qv, = 2a (x, + p) (1)
Equation of chord of contact to the given circle
w.rt. point (x,. 34)is
xX) + yy, =a? (2)
Given that this passes through point
(r, s)
BiGipce 5.12 rx, + sy, =a
From (1), putting the value of V, In
If two chords drawn from the point A(4, 4) to the parabola (2), we get
_ 4y are bisected by line y = mx, then find the range of values 2
x, ty, t+pae >
Ol m
q
Sol;
=> (qx + 2ay) + (2apy ~ a*g) = 0

This 1s
the variable line which
Passes through the point
intersection of lines gx + of
2ay = 0 and 2apy = aq.
5
=> Pi, pale
Q' /P(4, 4) P 2p
/
if 2
c= -=—= ands= a.
P 2p
(Eliminating a)
aa sage
2
ord AB,
= n i m u m length of ch
Coordinate Geometry | For m i
;g
5.36
EXAMPLE
of
5.14
the shortest normal chord
of the p arabola a(AB?) = 160
dt
2
Fin d the len gth

y = 4ax 32 -2-20°
(at’, 2at) and _ ates |
rd where A=
Sol. Let AB be a normal cho
B= (at;, 2at)) 2 2,2
- 32a U4)? -2)
We have f, = -f- ca t
t
Now, AB2=[a(? -1)F + 4a" - iy 2

AB’ is minimum
=a(r— nF [rt hy +4] For aet =0,1= V2 for which
, 2
, AB ya = O 4 2 ) = 6/ 3 units
a*(r1s2)
f
[4+4)
a Thus
l6ar(l +0°)°
I
gle Correct Answer Type VaV2 — VIO Vp)
(3) z, ly,
(4) none of these
whieh one of the following equations represent parametric be a potnt on the locus
10. Let P be the point (1, 0) and Q
* qquation 10.2 parabolic curve? nt ofPO 1s
y= Rx The locus of the midpoi
a =Jcosihve4sint
(I) wt 4x 2-0 (2) -4e+2=0
ge > D=e2eosnvea4d cos’ f
Q) v7 tan fy Viv = seer (3) 7 -4vt2 0 (4) Pb 4y+2=0
ibed in the parabola
An equilateral triangle SAB 1s inscr
f ra t
a vl-smfiy 7 sing 4 cos 4
AB lies towards the
\? = 4ux having tts focus at.S If chord
> Apomnt PQ.) moves 1n the vv-plane such that. = a cos? @ gle 1s
left of S, then the side length of this trian
andy = 2a sin @ where @ 1s a parameter. The locus of the (2) 4a(2. 3)
port Pisaan (1) 2a(2 - V3)
(3) a(2- V3) (4) %a(2 V3)
iL) circle (2) ellipse
s unity Pts the
(3) unbounded parabola (4) part of the parabola 12. C(0, 1) is the center of the circle with radiu
h they meet
parabolay = ac. The set of values of a for whic
x A line / passing through the focus of the parabola
v =4a - 1) intersects the parabola at two distinct points. at a point other than the origin ts
(1) a>0 (2) a = (0, 1°2)
|f mas the slope of the line Z, then
(3) (1/4, 1/2) (4) (19. *)
dy-lsmst (2) m<—-lorm> |
1> = dur and
GimeR (4) none of these 13. P(x, y) 1s a variable point on the parabola
ble point . where « 1s a
Ox +e, y +c) is another varia
4. The circle 17 + 17 + 2Aa = 0.4 © R, touches the parabola
=4i externally Then. constant The locus of the midpoint of PQ 1s aan
(1) parabola (2) ellipse
i) 2>0 (2) A4<0
(3) hyperbola (4) circle
)4>1 (4) none of these
14. AB 1s a chord of the parabola 5 7 = 4x with vertex 1 BC
= A set of parallel chords of the parabola y° = 4ax have their
is drawn perpendicular to 4B meeting the axis at C The
midpoints on
projection of BC on the axis of the paraboia ts
‘) any straight line through the vertex (4) Sa
(1) a (2) 2a (3) 4a
2) any straight line through the focus
15. Set of values of a for which the point (c& 1) lies imsice the
?) a straight line parallel to the axis
circle x° + y*- 4 = 0 and parabola 1~ = 4v 1s
+) another parabola
& ! the points A(1. 3) and B(S. 5) lying on a parabola are
(1) jaj<v3 (2) @~2
=uidistant from its focus. then the slope of the directrix
(3) esac ii (4) none of these
(4) -2 16. If Xas the foot of the directny on aris of the parabela PP
(2) = (3) 2
wml—
is a double ordinate of the curve and P\ meets the curve

“ne radius of the circle whose centre 1s (-4, 0) and which again in Q Then P’Q passes through Aved pernt which is
common
“st: the parabola y = Sy at A and B such that the (1) vertex
of the parabola
<nordAB subtends a right angle at the vertex (2) focus
“gual to
(3) midpoint of vertex and tocus
(4) 25
(1 653 (y WS) 3N2 (4) none of these
B Tne crcle xf - y’ = 5 meets the parabola y= 4y at P and 17. A water jet from a fountain reaches ts maximum herght ot
2 Then the length PG 15 equal to 4m ata distance 0.5 m trom the vertical passing through
ly 2 (2) 2V2 the point O of water oudlet Lhe height of the yet above the
horizontal OV ata distance ef O73 nn tram the point O ts
") 4 (4) none of these
(1) Sin (2) om (yy dm (4) 7m
. fy, y, and y, are the ordina tes of the vertices ofa triangle
scribed in the parabola 18, Atea of the tangle totmed by the vertex, tocus and one
Aux, then Ws area 1s
cnd of hitustectm of the parabolage 20 Ea = yas
Ajeal
I) 2a 7) — vy ez drs vl (1) 36 (2) 18
] (3) 9 (4) 6
(2) 4a \(vy ey v's ~ Vy) Wy )|
5.38 Coordinate Geometry — : ' ——
19. The locus of the vertex of the batty of parabolas 30. If a line y = 3x + | cuts the parabola x* — 4x — dy +
at A and B, then the tangent of the angle subtended by
32 2
ax”. ax
= 3 + “5° - 2a is
segment AB at the origin is
(1) xv = 105/64 (2) xv = 3/4 (1) 8V¥3/205 (2) 8V3/209
(3) w= 35/16 (4) w= 64/105 (3) 8V3/215 (4) none of these
20. Two parabolas have the same focus. If theit directrices are . If P is a point on the parabola y” = 3(2x — 3) and Ms,
the x- and the 1-axis, respectively, then the slope of their foot perpendicular drawn from P on the directryy
common chord ts Of ty
parabola, then the length of each side of the equi later, 7
(l) +1 (2) 4/3 triangle SMP, where S is the focus of the parabola,i
(3) 34 (4) none of these (1) 2 (2) 4 (3) 6 (4) 8
21. The locus of the point (V3, ¥3k + 2) if it hes on the ine 32. A parabola y = ax? + bx + c crosses the x-axis at (¢, 0
)7
1-y-1=(Ois (B, 0) both to the right of the origin A circle also
(1) a straight line (2) acircle through these two points The length of a tangent from
th
(3) a parabola (4) none of these origin to the circle 1s
22. Acircle touches the x-axis and also touches the circle with
(1) Vbe/a (2) ac? (3) bla (4) -Ielg
center (0, 3) and radius 2 externally. The locus of the center 33. The umber of common chords of the Parabo|,,
of the circle 1s x= f- 6y + 1] andy= x- 6x+ Il is
(1) acircle (2) an ellipse (1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 4 (4) 6
(3) a peratole (4) a hyperbola 34. Two parabola have focus (3, ~2). Their directrices are the
23. If parabolas y * = Ax and 25[(x - 3° + (vy + 2) }= (bx -4y x-axis and the y-axis, respectively. Then the slope of they
- 2 are equal. then the value of A is common chord 1s
(1) 9 (2) 3 (3) 7 (4) 6 (1) -1 {Z) =}2
24. The length of the latus rectum of the parabola whose focus (3) -V3/2 (4) none of these
35. PSQ 1s a focal chord of a parabola whose focus 1s 5 anc
s( 2 sin 2a, — 3 — cos 2a| and directrix 1s y = u7/2gis vertex is A. P4 and QA are produced to meet the direc:
in R and T, respectively Then ZRST =
(1) “A cos*@ (2) os 2a (1) 30° (2) 90°
(3) “e cos 2 (3) 60° (4) 45°
(4) 24 cos a
25. The graph of the curve x* + y- 2xy ~ 8x — 8y + 32 =0
36. If PSQ 1s a focal chord of the parabola 1 > = &x such that5?
falls wholly in the = 6, then the length of SQ 1s
(1) first quadrant (2) second quadrant (1) 6 (2) 4
(3) third quadrant (4) none of these (3) 3 (+) none of these
26. The vertex of the parabola whose parametric equation is 37. The triangle POR of area 4 1s insetbed in the pare
r=P-tr Ly=P ttt lire Ri s > = dax such that the vertex P lies at the vertex of ie
(1) 1) (2) (2,2) parabola and the base OR 1s a foeal chord. The modulus!
(3) (1/2, 3/2) (4) (3,3) the difference of the ordinates of the points Q and &
27. If the liney - 3x + 3 = O cuts the parabolay” =x +2 at P (I) Aa (2) dla (3) 2a (4) tie
and Y, then AP AQ 15 equal to [where 4 = (V3, 0)] 38. if A,B, and 4,B, are two focal chords of
the parate!
(J)
2¢ [3 + 2)
— 4v3 y= 4ax, then the chords Aya, and B,B, intersect on
(2) >
(1) directrix (2) ants
A(2- /2) 4(V3
4 2)
aan a (4) 3 (3) tangent at vertex (4) none of these
28. é line ts drawn form
39, Ifa and care the lengths ot segments of any focal chord
A( 2, 0) to intersect the curve
y? = 4x at ; and Q in the first quadrant thehe 2bx, (b> 0), then the roots of the equate"
such that
tpt oa 4 Then the slope of the line avi byte O are
always
(1) real and distinet (2) real and equal
(1) >V3 (2) —IN3B- (3), / V2 (4) -IN3 (3) imaginary (4) none of these
29. The length of the chord of the parabola yoy which as 40. It'y ~ max + © touches the parabola vy? = da(x + a), the?
bisected at the point (2, 1) 1s
(he = hi (2) c=amt+%
(1) 2V3. (2) 4N3 (3) 3V2 (4) 2V5
(3) c=at+¥ (4) none of these
“ Parabola 5.39
“The area of the triangle formed bythe an
ent (2) —2 tan(1— $)
4). (1) -2 tan @
ormal to the parabola y’ = 4ax, both dion: at the : me (3) 0 (4) 2cot@
end of the latus rectum, and the axis of the parabola ‘i y? = 4ax. Tangents
(0 22a" (2) 2a? . AB 1s.a double ordinate of the parabola
y-axis at A, and
3) Aad’ drawn to the parabola at A and B meet the
(4) none of these AA,B,B 1s equal
B,, respectively If the area of trapezium
subt ende d by 4,B, at the focus of
4}. cyparabo las "= 4a(x ~ ¢,) and x” = 4a(y ~c,),< where c 1 and to 24a”. then the angle
are variable, are such that they touch each other Th the parabola 1s equal to
locus of their point of contact is .
(1) 2tan '(3) (2) tan '(3)
2
(1) v= 2a
a) wee
(2) x= 4a" (3) 2 tan’'(2) (4) tan”'(2)
(4)
none of these ct of tangent
If the locus of the middle of point of conta
Let. = AW) be a parabola. having its endicular
fi. axis parallel to the drawn to the parabola y” = 8x and the foot of perp
, then the
y-ants, Which is touched by the line + = x at. = 1 Then drawn from tts focus to the tangents 1s a conic
(1) 2fOV= 1-70) (2) RO) + £°(0) + 7"(0) = I length of latus rectum of this conic iS
(4) 9/2
ay f=} (4) £(O) =f") (1) 9/4 (2) 9 (3) 18
are the
_ If the bisector of angle APB, where PA and PB
If = 2a — 3 1s a tangent to the parabola y= da{ _ 4) y inclin ed to the
3 tangents to the parabola y” = 4ax, is equall
then a 1s equal to coordinate axes, then the point P lres on the
oF B71 wt 4) 4 (1) tangent at vertex of the parabola
45. The locus of the center of a circle which cuts orthogonally (2) directrix of the parabola
the parabolay~ = 4x at (1, 2) will pass through (3) circle with center at the origin and radius a
1) G.4)) (2) (4.3) (3) (5,3) (4) (2,4) (4) the tine of latus rectum
. If the parabola y = ax” -— 6x +b passes through (0, 2) and 55. From a point A(/) on the parabola y = 4ax. a focal chord
has its tangent at 1 = 3/2 parallel to the \-axis, then and a tangent are drawn. Two circles are drawn in which
(lf @r2,.d5-2 (2) a=2,b=2 one circle 1s drawn taking focal chord AB as diameter and
(3) a=-2,b=2 (4) a=-2,b=-2 other 1s drawn by taking the intercept of tangent between
point 4 and point P on the directrix as diameter. Then the
47. Double ordinate .48 of the parabola 3° = 4ax subtends an common chord of the circles 1s
angle 7/2 at the focus of the parabola Then the tangents
(1) the line yomning focus and P
drawn to the parabola at 4 and B will intersect at
(2) the line joining focus and A
(1) (-4a, 0) (2) (-2a, 0)
(4) none of these
(3) tangent to the parabola at point 4
(3) (-3a, 0)
(4) none of these
48. The tangents to )° = 4ax make angles 6, and @, with the
of
x-axis. If cos 8, cos @, = A, then the locus of their pont 56. The point of intersection of the tangents of the parabola
intersection 1s y* = 4x drawn at the end points of the chord x ~ y= 2 hes on
ly) P=2[e-ayr+4y] 2) P=P [+a ty) (1) x-2y=0 (2) r+2) =0
3) 2=2x-arty] (4) 4° =VUetay ty’) (3) y-x=0 (4) x+v=0
49, A tangent 1s drawn to the parabola y? = 4ax at the point P 57. The angle between the tangents to the parabola} * = 4a at
whose abscissa lies in the mterval (1, 4) The maximum the points where it intersects with the line.xv — 4 — a = 01s
possible area ofthe triangle formed by the tangent at P, the (1) m3 (2) 7/4 (3) 26 (4) m2
ordinates of the point P, and the x-axis 1S equal to 58. yv=x +218 any tangent to the parabola }7 = &y. The point P
(1) 8 (2) 16 (3) 24 (4) 32 on this tangent ts such that the other tangent from it which
50. The straight lines joming any Pp oint P on the parabola is perpendicular to it is
from thefocus
Y = 4ax to the vertex and perpendicular () (2,4) @) (-2,0)) (3) (-L (4) (2,0)
to the tangent at P intersect at R Then the equation of the 59. If y = myx + ¢ and y = mr + ¢ are two tangents to the
locus of R is parabola y" + da(x + a) = 0, then
0
(1) x? + 2y? — ax =0 (2) 2x? + y? - 2ax =
(1) my, +m,=0 (2) t+m,+m.=0
(3) 2x? + 2y? - ay = 0 (4) oe +y" —2ay=0
! rds (3) myn - 1 =0 (4) b+ oy, = 0
31, ab olay" = 4ax, two cho
Through the vertex O of the par OQ as
the circles on OP and 60. The angle between the tangents to the curve y= .x7 — 5x +6
OP and OQ are drawn and 9, and @are the angles made at the points (2, 0) and (3, 0) 1s
diameters intersect at R If 0),
and Q on the parabola
With the axis by the tangents at P (1) (2) 4 (3) 2 (4)
rly
ue of cot @, + cot A; is
and by OR, then the val
————————
2 2 ae
71... 2et y +A =0 is anormal to the parabola y’ = ~gy then
parabola
61. Two mutually perpendicular tangents of thefocus of the Ais
y? = 4ax meet the axis at P, and P). If Sis the (2) -12 (3) 24 (4) 24
(1) 12
l l
parabola, then — SP, 18 equal
SR + —— q to
72.
at 5
If two normals to the parabola y? = ax intersectthrough ,
angles, then the chord joining their feet passes
I 2 hs
(4) - fixed point whose coordinates
are
— 2) = GB) =
(0) 2a @) a a 8
(1) (-2a, 0) (2) (a, 0)
through the origin and (3) (2a, 0) (4) none of these
62. Radius of the circle that passes
2a) Is gh (10, ~1) ang i
touches the parabola y" = 4ay at the point (a, . The equation of the line that passes throu
2
5 5 3 2 1s
(1) wa (2) 2v2 a (3) B a (4) pia perpendicular to y = a
(1) 4x+y=39 (2) 2x+y=19
tangent to
63. The mirror image of the parabola y’ = 4y in the (4) x+2y=8
the parabola at the point (1, 2) 1s (3) xe p=9
(2) @w+ly=4@+) 74. Tangent and normal drawn to a parab
ola y* = 4g,
d) @-1=4@4+) p,
3) (w+1¥=4@-D (4) (v- 1? =40°-1) at A(at’, 2af), ¢ # 0 meet the x-axis at points B and
B respectively. If the rectangle ABCD 1s completed, then the
64. Consider the parabola y? = 4x, Let 4 = (4, 4) and
the parabo la. Let C be locus of C 1s 5
= (9. 6) be two fixed points on
y
a moving point on the parabola between A and B such (1)
= y=2a 2) x=x=2a-—
(2) 2a
that the area of the triangle ABC is maximum Then the
coordinates of C are (3) x =2a (4) none of these
(1) (1/4..1) (2) (4,4) 75. The radius of the circle touching the parabola y7 = x at
(3) (3. 2v3)} (4) (3,-2V3) (1, 1) and having the directrix of y’ = x as its normal 1s
65. A line of slope A (0 < A < 1) touches the parabola (1) 5V5/8 (2) 10V5/3
++ 3x*=O at P. If Sis the focus and Mis the foot of the (3) 5V5/4 (4) none of these
perpe ndicu lar of directrix from P, then tan 7 MPS equals
76. If two different tangents of y? = 4x are the normals to
(1) -
1) & 2)
24
a =z x’ = 4by, then
(3)3) —
=ise 4 none of these
(4) (1) |b] > 1/2V2 (2) |bl< 1/2V2
66. The tangent at any point P on the parabola y? = 4ax (3) |b) > 1N2 (4) [bl < V2
intersects the y-axis at 0 The tangent to the circumcircle 77. The maximum number of common normals ofi" = 4ar and
of tnangle PQS (S 1s the focus) at Q 1s x? = 4by 1s equal to
a line parallel to x-axis
(1)
(1) 3 (2) 4 (3) 6 (4) 5
(2) y-axis 78. If line PQ, whose equation is v = 2x + &, is a normal to the
(3) a line parallel to y-axis parabola whose vertex is (—2, 3) and the axis parallel to the
(4) none of these x-axis with latus rectum equal to 2, then the value of «5
67. If Pir. 21), 1 € [0, 2], is an arbitrary point on the parabola (focus lies to the right of vertex)
vy = 4x, Q is the foot of perpendicular from focus S on the (1) 58/8 (2) 50/8 (3) 1 (4) -!
tangent at P, then the maximum area of APQS 1s
79.
qd) J (2) 2 (3) 5/16 (4) § min aaayt (3 +Yl-x) - (ae) Vixp.xy eRe
68. The minimum area of circle which touches the parabolas (1) 4¥5+1 (2) 3-2V2 3) VS+1 29) V5 -!
yex?t] and y*=x- 1 is 80. If the normalsto the parabola v= 4ar at three pome
on : on (ap", 2ap), (aq*, 2aq), and (ar*, 2ar) are concurrent, the?
(1) 76 84- unit (2) 3 84: unit
the common root of equations px* + gx + r= 0 and a(b- ‘
, 9 x +b(c-a)x+c(a-b)=Ois
(3) = 54. unit (4) OF og unit
(1) p (2) 4 (3) r (4) 1
69. If the tangents and normals at the extremities of a focal Normals AQ, AA,, and 4A, are drawn to the parabol?
chord of a parabola intersect at (x), y,) and (x), Vr), v= 8x from the point 4(A, 0) If triangle 04,42 *
respectively, then equilateral, then the possible value of
h is
(4) x, -yy (1)
; 26 (2) 24
(1) x;=y. (2) x,=y, (3) y= yy 2
70. At what point on the parabola y = 4x the normal makes (3) 28 (4) none of these
equal angle with the axes? 82. i the normals to the parabola y? = 4ax at the ends
of the
atus rectum meet the parabola at Q
(1) 4,4) (2) (9,6) = (3) (4, -4) (4) (1, #2) and Q’, then 0 s
(1) Wa (2) 4a (3) 20a (4) 12a
wi
— a point (sin 8, dvd Seah or ——
Parabola 5.44
cos 4), if three no
i ite parabola y=
92. Tangent andn ormal are drawn at the point P = (16, 16) of
rmals can be draw
4ax, then the valu n
€ of a js
0 (12,1)
(2) [-1/2, 0) the parabola y? = 16x which cut the axis of the parabola at
the points A and B, respectively. If the center of the circle
g) 12.1] (4) (-1/2, 0) (0, 1/2) through P, A, and B 1s C, then the angle between PC and
| if the normals at points P(t,) and
O43) on the parabola the axis of x 18
{ on the same parabola, then
mee (1) tan . (2) tan '2
() oh= QD). Bei ; (3) tan “134 (4) tan“!t3
|
(3) fh = ] (4) Nh =2
. From the point (15, 12), three normals are drawn to the
« Ifthe normal to the parabola y* = 4ay at P meets the curve
at again at Q and if PQ and the
parabolay? = 4x. Then the centroid of triangle formed by
norm
al at O make angle
qand B, respectively, with the y-axi Ss, then three co-normals points 1s
tan a (tan @
+tan B) has the value equal to (1) (16/3, 0) (2) (4,0)
(1) 0 (2) -2 (3) -1/2 (4) -1 (3) (26/3, 0) (4) (6,0)
, PQ is a normal chord of the parabola v= . The line x — = | intersects the parabolay? = 4x at A and B.
day at Pi Normals at A and B intersect at C. If D 1s the point at which
being the vertex of the parabola. Through P, a line is
drawn
parallel to 4Q meeting the x-axis at R. Then the line lengt line CD is normal to the parabola, then the coordinates of
h D are
of AR 1s
(1) equal to the length of the latus rectum (I) (4,4) (2) (4, 4)
(2) equal to the focal distance of the point P (3) (-4, -4) (4) none of these
(3) equal to twice the focal distance of the point P 95. If normals are drawn from a point P(A, k) to the parabola
(4) equal to the distance of the point P from the directrix v’ = 4ax, then the sum of the intercepts which the normals
cut-off from the axis of the parabola is
87. P.Q. and R are the feet of the normals drawn to a parabola
(- 3)'= 8-2) Acurcle cuts the above parabola at points (1) (A+a) (2) 3(h+a)
P,Q, R, and S. Then this circle always passes through the (3) 2(h+ a) (4) none of these
pont
(1) (2.3) (2) (3,2) ~~ (3): (0,3) (4) (2, 0) _ Multiple Correct Answers Type
8. Normals at two points (x,, v,) and (x5, V2) of the parabola
i 1. If the focus of the parabola x? - ky +3 = 01s
\” = 4x meet again on the parabola, where X;+x)=4 (0, 2), then
Then a values of k 1s (are)
3, 7y2] 18 equal to
(1) 4 (2) 6 (3) 3 (4) 2
(1) v2 (2) 2V2 2. If the line x — 1 = 0 1s the directrix of the parabola
(3) 4V2 (4) none of these yk +8 = 0, then value(s) of & 1s/are
¥. The end points of two normal chords of a parabola are (1) -8 (2) 1/8 (3) 14
concyclic. Then the tangents at the feet of the normals
(4) 4
will 3. The extremities of latus rectum of a parabola are
intersect at (1, 1) and
(1, -1) Then the equation of the parabola can
(1) tangent at vertex of the parabola be
(1) 9? =2y—4 QF v= 1 = dy
(2) axis of the parabola
(3) directnx of the parabola
(3) y?=3-2x (4) y?=2e-4
sie(4) none of these
- 4. The value(s) of a for which two curves veartar¢t
hormal
iGAin at Omat point
soch 4 P way
on thetharparabolay° = 4ax, (a > 0), meets it
OO ie of minimum lerigthy where and «cote avg ok 24
a .
34 touch each other is/are
O1s the vertex of parabola, then AOPQ 1s
2 | 3 I
1) a nght-angled triangle
(1) 3 (2) 3 (3) = a) =
(2) an obtuse-an
-angled triangle
(3) an acute-angled triangle 5. . In which of the followi Ng Cases, ¢ - - ;
obtained? B eases. a unique > parabola
Di
will be
(4) none of these
1 (1) Focus and equation
The set of points on the axis of the parabola of tangent at vertex are
(x — 1)° given
(2) Focus and vertex are giv
~ 8() + 2) from where three distinct normals can be drawn en, 2 &
'0 the parabola is the set (h, k) of points satisfying (3) Equation of directrix and
vertex are given
() ps9 (2) h> (4) Equation of directrix
and e quation of tang
(3) ko ent a
(4) none of these are given,
°
a
ven
G
-42 Coordinate Geometry a —
pay the Paraby,
to
Which of the following line can be tangent
a
15.
6. A quadrilateral is inscribed in a parabola. Then,
y= 8x?
(1) the quadrilateral may be cyclic (2) 9x-3y+2=0
(2) diagonals of the quadrilateral may be equal
(1) x-y+2=0
(3) xt+2y+8=0 (4) x+3y+ 12=0
(3) all possible pairs of adjacent sides may be perpendicular
(4) none of these 16. If the line 2(x ~ 1) + ky — 2) + be| = 0 touches the para, Oly
4 —4p + 8 = 0, then k can
The locus of the midpoint of the focal distance of a variable
point moving on the parabola 1? = 4ay is a parabola whose (1) -3 (2) -v5 (4) 1009
(1) latus rectum 1s half the latus rectum of the original
parabola 17. The equation of the line that touches the curves y = xy and
+ (y— 2)? = 4, where x # 0, 15
(2) verte is (a/2. 0)
(2) y=4V3x-12
(4) y=—4F5n—0
(3) directrix is 1-axts (1) p= 4V5x+20
(4) focus has coordinates (a, 0)

A square has one vertex at the vertex of the parabola
@) v=0 tangents to the paraboi,
18. The equations of the common
y = 4ax and the diagonal through the vertex lies along
y= x and yp =—(x - 2y° is/are
the axis of the parabola. If the ends of the other diagonal (2) y=0
of the vertices of the (1) y=4(x- 1)
lie on the parabola, the coordinates
(3) y=—4(x- 1) (4) y=-30x - 50
square are
(1) (4a, 4a) (2) (4a, 4a) 19. The line x + y + 2 = 018 a tangent to a parabola at pomt ;
This line intersects the directrix at B and tangent at vere;
(3) (0.0) (4) (8a, 0)
at C, respectively. If the focus of parabola 1s S(2. 0). then
. If two distinct chords of a parabola )” = 4ax passing
(1) CS1s perpendicular to AB
through (a, 2a) are bisected on the line x + y = 1, then the
length of the latus rectum can be (2) AC BC=CS
(1) 2 (2) 1 (3) 4 (4) 3 (3) AC BC=8
(4) AC=BC
10. Let PQ be a chord of the parabola y’=4y Acircle drawn
with PQ as a diameter passes through the vertex V of the 20. Which of the followmg line can be normal to paratot:
parabola. If ar(APVQ) = 20 unit*, then the coordinates of y= 1282
P are (1) xt y-9=0 (2) 2x—-v-32=0
(1) (16,8) (2) (16, -8) (3) 2x+y-36=0 (4) 3x-1 -99=0
(3) (9.6) (4) (9, -6) 21. A normal drawn to the parabola y~ = 4ax at P meets =
11. The parabola x” = ay makes an intercept of length 2V10 curve again at Q such that the angle subtended by PC +
units on the line » — 2x = 1, if a 1s equal to the vertex is 90°. Then the coordinates of P can be
(1) -1 (2) -2 (3) 1 (4) 2 (1) (8a, 4V2a) (2) (8a. 4a)
12. The equations of the directrix of the parabola with vertex (3) (2a, -2V2a) (4) (2a, 2V2a)
at the origin and having the axis along the x-axis and a
22. A circle 1s drawn having centre at C(O, 2) and pas“
common tangent of slope 2 with the circle x+y’? =5 is through focus S of the parabola)" = 8x. If CS unterseet as
(are)
parabola at point P, then
(1) x=10 (2) x=20 (3) x=-10 (4) x=-20
(1) distance of point P trom directriy is (8 -— 442)
13. Tangent 1s drawn at any point (x,, y,) other than the vertex
on the parabola y* = 4ax If tangents are drawn from any (2) distance of point C from point P is (6,2 - 8)
(3) angle subtended by intercept made by circle on direc
. smh
point on this tangent to the circle x? 4 y? =a" such that all
the chords of contact pass through a fixed point (45, ¥), 14
atits centre is. —=
then
yy
(1) x), 4, x are in GP (2) 9° 4 V2 are in GP (4) point P ts the midpoint of C and §
yy * Gp 4 3 yl!
(3) —-4, Yr Xp are inG (4) Xp 1 yy 23. hrom any poimt P on the parabola3~ = 4ax, perpendic?
. i, :
PN 1s drawn on the axis meeting it at V. Normal at pia
14. The parabola y* = 4x and the circle having its center al (6, 5) Landis «de!
the axis in G For what value/values of ¢, the point ndivid
intersect at nght angle. The possible point of intersection
SG internally in the ratio | : 3, where S is the focus’
of these curves can be
(1) (9, 6) (2) (2, Vk) 3 [s [3 IP
(1)l _5 a)
(2) = fo3 (3) oe Gee; (4) 3
(3) (4,4) (4) (3, 2v3)
a and C> be, respectively,
rt
———_. Parabola 5.43
the parabola x? =
An
AG
he reen
eaa,
8. The length of the smallest focal chord of this curve Cis

y << 1
be a
23
‘
1. Also, be any point on Gi aa
let P 0
14 2 eXx-
1
oint oD C}. If P, and Q, are the reflections (1) 1/4 (2) 1/12
of P and O
respectively, with respect to the line » = x, then (3) 1/8 (4) 1/16
il) Pp, lies on C, and Q, lies on Cj 9; The curve C is symmetric about the line
2) PQ2 min {PP), O04} (1) v=3/2 (2) y=-3/2
3) point P, on C, such that PoQos PQ for (3) v=-3/2 (4) y= 3/2
all pairs of points
(1 10 For Problems 10-12
(PQs (; ry y =x 1s tangent to the parabola y = ax’ +e.
(4) point Qg on C; such that PyQy< PQ for all pairs of pomts 10. If a= 2, then the value of ¢ 18
10 1 1/8
+| (1) | (2) -12 (3) 1/2 (4)
(P,Q) 1s &
||
11. If (1, 1) is the point of contact, then a is
(1) 1/4 (2) 1/3 (3) 1/2 (4) 1/6
§2. If ¢ = 2, then the point of contact 1s
or Problems 1-3 (1) (3,3) (2) (2,2) ~~ (3) (6, 6) (4) (4,4)
angent 1s drawn at any point P(1) on the parabola vy? = 8x and For Problems 13-15 5
sis taken a point Q(a, B) from which a pair of tangents QA If / and m are variable real numbers such that 51° + 6m* — 4/m
0B are drawn to the circle x“ + 1" = 8 Using this information, +3/= 0, then the variable line /x + my = | always touches a fixed
_wer the following questions: parabola, whose axes 1s parallel to the x-axis
|, The locus of the point of concurrency of the chord of 13. The vertex of the parabola 1s
contact 4B of the circle x +1" = 415 (1) (-5/3, 4/3) (2) (—7/4, 3/4)
(dd) r-2®=0 (2) =a?=4 (3) (5/6, -7/6) (4) (1/2, -3/4)
G) +4. =0 (4) w-2=4 14. The focus of the parabola 1s
. The point from which perpendicular tangents can be drawn (1) (1/6, -7/6) (2) (1/3, 4:3)
ss
both to the given circle and the parabola is (3) (3/2, -3/2) (4) (-3/4, 3'4)
dl) (4.413) (2) (-1.V2) 15. The directrix of the parabola is
(3) (2, 2) (4) (-2. +2v3) (1) 6x+7=0 (2) 4x~+ 11=0
. The locus of circumcenter of A4QB if f= 2 1s (3) 3x+11=0 (4) none of these
tor
(1) x-2y+2=0 (2) x+2v-4=0 For Problems 16-18

(3) x2) -4=0 (4) .+2y+4=0 Consider the parabola whose focus 1s at (0. 0) and tangent at
‘tt Problems
4-6 vertex isx-~y+1=0.
=igent to the parabola y = x” + ax + > | at the point of intersection 16. The length of latus rectum 1s
] oe)
the 1-axis also touches the circle x + }* =?. Also, no point of (1) 4V¥2 (2): 2V2 (3) 8&2 (4) 3\2
= parabola is below the x-axis.
17. The length of the chord of parabola on the y-axis 1s
4. The radius of circle when a attams Its maximum value 18 (1) 4V2 (2): 2V2 (3) 8v2 (4) 3x2
(1) ATO (2) INS GB) I (4) v5 18. Tangents drawn to the parabola at the extremities of the
3. The slope of the tangent when the radius of the circle 1s chord 3x + 2y = 0 intersect at an angle
maximum 1s (1) 7/6 (2) 2/3
(1) 1 (2) 1 (3) 0 (4) 2 (3) 7/2 (4) none of these
6. The minimum area bounded by the tangent and the
coordinate axes 18 For Problems 19-21
(1) 1 (2) 13 (3) 1/2 (4) 1/4 Two tangents on a parabola are v — y = O and i © vy = 0
S(2, 3) 1s the focus of the parabola.
bp Problems 7-9
19. The equation of tangent at vertex is
'e locus of the circumcenter of a variable triangle having sides
(1) 4x-6y45=0
y-axis, y=2. and [x + my = 1, where (/, m) lies on the parabola (2) 4. Ov +3 =0
'S4x, 18a curve C. (3) 4x-6y4 1=0 (4) 4. — Oy + 3/2 =0
20. The length of latus rectum of the parabola is
1. The coordinates of the vertex of this curve C's
(1) 6/3 (2) 10N13
(1) (-2, 3/2) (2) (-2, -3/2)
(3) (2, 3/2) (4) (2, -3/2) (3) 213 (4) none of these
ES |
21. IfP “1 Q areeas ends of the focal chord of the parabola,
Matrix Match Type ]
1. Consider the parabola (x — 1)? + (y~ 2)? = Cr 169Say

12x~
(1) 2V13/3 (2) 2V13
and match the following lists:
(3) 2V13/5 (4) none of these
For Problems 22-24
"= 4y and 1" = -~&(\ — a) intersect at pomts 4 and C, Points a. Locus of point of intersection of | p. 12x Sy 92
O(0, 0), A, Bla. 0), and C are coneyclic. perpendicular tangent -———___
22. The length of the common chord of the parabolas is b. Locus of foot of perpendicular from q. Sx+ I2y-29.5
focus upon any tangent
(1) 2V6 (2) 4v3 (3) 6V5 (4) &v2
| eae cs
23. The area of cyclic quadrilateral OABC is c. Line along which minimum length | r. 12x - Sy+3=4
of focal chord occurs
(1) 24V3 (2) 48V2_—s(3)_:«12N6 (4) 18V5
d.Line about which parabola 1s 3. 24x — 10y + l=9
24. Tangents to the parabola 17 = 4x at A and C intersect at symmetrical
point D and tangents to the parabola” = -8(x — a) intersect
at point E. Then the area of quadrilateral DAEC is 2. Consider the parabola y” = 12x and match the following m
(1) 96V2— (2) 48V3 (3) $4V5 (4) 36V6 List I Listff
For Problems 25-27
a. Equation of tangent can be | p. 2x+y-624
PQ 1s the double ordinate of the parabola y* = 4x which passes
b. Equation of normal can be q. 3x-y+1=9
through the focus S. APOA 1s an isosceles right angle triangle,
i}
where -4 1s on the axis of the parabola to the nght of focus. Line ¢. Equation of chord of contact wrt any | r.x—2y-12=9
P4 meets the parabola at C and QA meets the parabola at B. point on the directrix can be
i
25. The area of trapezium PBCQ 1s d. Equation of chord which subtends | 8. 2x -y -36=1
night angle at the vertex can be
(1) 96 sq. units (2) 64 sq units a
(3) 72 sq. units (4) 48 sq units 3. Match the following lists:

26. The circumradius of trapezium PBCOQ 1s
List I List
(1) 6V5— (2) -3V6 (3) 2V10 (4) 5v3
a, Tangents are drawn from point (2, 3) to the p.(9 +
27. The ratio of the mradius of A4BC and that of APAQ 1s parabola » = 4 Then the points of contact
(ly 241 (2) 3.2 (3) 4:3 (4) 3:1 are
For Problems 28-30 b. From a point P on the circle x — y" = 3. the qe (1.2)
equation of chord of contact to the parabola
Consider the inequality 9° - a 3*—a+3 <0, where ais a real P= disy= 2(v- 2) Then the coordinate of
" iM
parameter. “ee P will be
28. The given inequality has at least one negative solution for ¢. is ~4) and Q are points on the parabola. ft (-+
aé = dy such that the area of APOQ 1s 6
sq. units, where O 1s the vertex Then the |
(1) (—%,2) (2) 3,%) (3) (-2,%) (4) (2,3)
coordinates of Q may be
29. The given inequality has at least one positive solution for
d.The common chord of the circle sh?
ae v +1" =5 and the parabola 6v = Sy + Ty will)
(1) (—%,-2)(2) [3,%) (3) (2,%) (4) [-2, ») pass through point(s)
e ae
30. The given inequality has at least one real solution for a € 4. Match the following lists and then choose the corer
() (4,3) 2) 2) 8) B,%) (4) [-2, 2) List 1 [se
~
—a
For Problems 31 and 32 aC ommon normals to the parabola? = dav | Pe a

Consider one side AB of a square ABCD in order on line y |
and Vo day isiare
sayeth SPS — ak
= 2x — 17, and other two vertices C, Pony x. b. the locus of pomt Pvt tangents from qn
P to the parabola v= dan intersect the
31. The minimum intercept of line CY on the y-axis ts
_ coordinate Xes in concyclic points, 1s atte
tb. 3 (2) 4 (3) 2 (4) 6
«.The locus of P, if tangents from it to the nxt?
32. The maximum possible area of square ABCD 1s parabolasy" = 4a (x + a) and y? = 8a (x + 2a)
(1) 1180 (2) 1250 (3) 1280 (4) none are perpendicular, is
ae
Parabola 5.45
The chord of contact of a
a point P wrt the
arabola 1° + 4ax = 0 subten 11. PQ 1s any focal chord of the parabola y* = 8 x. Then the
ds rght angle
at the vertex Then the locus length of PQ can never be less than
of Point of
intersection of tangents at the
end points of 12. The length of focal chord to the parabola y” = 12x drawn
such chords 1s
from the point (3, 6) on it is
des: 13. From the point (- 1, 2), tangent lines are drawn to the parabola
oa boc. Ud
= 4y, Ifthe arca of the triangle formed by the chord of contact
mp ' 4a 4 and the tangents is 4, then the value of A/V21s
ga P Ff s
gos Po af 14. Line y= 2x ~ / cuts the parabola y = x* — 4x at points A and
(4) r S QQ p B. Then the value of / for which ZAOB 1s a right angle 1s
(where O is origin)
Ses
, 2
|||
15. A line through the origin intersects the parabola 5y = 2x
—9x + 10 at two pomts whose x-coordinates add up to 17
1, Ifthe length of the latus rectum of the parabola 169{(x — Then the slope of the line 1s
+ (r= BY} = (Sx - 121 + 1797 ts
ZL, then the value of 16. If the circle (x - 6)? + y? = 7? and the parabola Vv = 4x
13L/4 1s : have maximum number of common chords, then the least
2, Acircle ts drawn through the point of intersection of the integral value of 7 is __
parabola y = x" — 5x + 4 and the y-axis such that origin lies
17. The slope of the line which belongs to the family of lines
outside it The length of a tangent to the circle from the
(1 +Ajya+(A- 1) y+ 2(1 —4) = 0 and makes shortest
origin 1s ‘
intercept on v= 4y—415
3, The focal chord of 1° = 16y¥ 15 tangent to (a ~ 6)" + 4" = 2.
Then the possible value of the square of slope of this chord 18. If 3x + 41+ k =0 represents the equation of tangent at the
1s vertex of the parabola 16x? — 24xy + Qy7+ 14x + 2y+7 =
4, Two tangents are drawn from the point (-2. -1) to the 0, then the value of £ 1s
parabola}~ = 4x If @1s the angle between these tangents, 19. Normals at (a), .¥,), (%2, 2) and (x4, 43) to the parabola
then tan 9 = y= 4a are concurrent at point P Ifa), 45 + V2 .¥3 + Vy) =
3. The equation of the line touching both the paiabolas y° = t)¥2¥;, then locus of point P 1s part of a parabola, length of
4x and x* = -32)'1s ax + by +c =0 Then the value of a+ whose latus rectum is |
b+ cis
20. Foot of perpendicular from point P on the parabola
6. Ifthe point P(4, —2) 1s one end of the focal chord PO of y° y” = dax to the axis is NV A straight line 1s drawn parallel
=x, then the slope of the tangent at Q 1s to the axis which bisects PN and cuts the curve at Q If
7. Ifthe line x +3 = 6 1s a normal to the parabola }* = 8 at NQ meets the tangent at the vertex 4 at a point 7, then
point (a, b), then the value of a+ b1s PN |
8. The locus of the midpomnts of the portion of the normal to AT
the parabola y” = 16x intercepted between the curve and the 21. Points4, B and C lie on the parabola1 = 4ax. The tangents
axis is another parabola whose latus rectum is
to the parabola at A, B and C, taken in pairs, intersect
9. Consider the locus of center of the circle which touches the at points P, O and R Then the ratio of the areas of the
circle x7 + = 4 externally and the line x = 4 The distance
triangles ABC and POR 1s
of the vertex of the locus from the origin 1s
22. Normals are drawn from the point P with slopes
10. If on a given base BC [B(0, 0) and C(2, 0)], a tnangle 1s n,,
descnbed such that the sum of the tangents of the base m, and m, to that parabola »* = 4x If the locus of P with
angles 1s 4, then the equation of the locus of the opposite mm = 01s a part of the parabola itself then the value
of
Vertex 4 1s a parabola whose directx 1s y = k The value of QOS
kis ——__
[ a Ses
Archives
EE Mainy 2. Given: A circle, 2x? + 2\7 = 5 anda parabo
. . 4
a
la, \~ = 4 VS x
Single Correct Answer Statement 1: An equation of a common
Type tangent to these
l. If two tangents drawn from a point P to the parabola Curves is y=x + Js 5
= 4x are at right angles, then the locus of P 1s Statement 2: If the line,

(1) &-1=9 (2) x=1 vy = my + NS.
(im # QO) is their
(4) x=-1 (AIEEE 2010)
m
3) &+1=0 common tangent, then ‘m’ satisfies
m* — 3m? + 2 = 0
r
5.46 Coordinate Geometry : y? =9 7
Saree
thecleciratclethex? poi+ nts

2
.
genchts theto cir

; 7
on 8xtantou
lammy=
Theaboco
2 . par P. Oa!
(1) Statement 1 is true; statement 2 1s true; : statement
e 2 1s a
, :
correct explanation for statement 1. a
rabola at the points R S. Then the area of the quaq
2 ~ ’
(2)> Statement | jis true; . statement 2 isi true; : slatet nent 2 18 PPORS 1s
not a correct explanation for statement I. (1) 3 (2) 6 (3) 9 (4) 15
d
(3) Statement 1 is true; statement 2 15 false. (JEE Advanceq 2014
pe
Multiple Cor rect Answers Ty
(4) Statement | ts false: statement 2 1s true.
(JEE Main 2013)
1. The tangent PT and the normal PN to the Parabo)
3. The slope of the line touching both the parabolas y= 4x y? = 4ax at a point P on it meet Its axis at points 7 ang y
and x” = -32 1s
respectively. The locus of the centroid of triangle PIV ,
cy 12 (2); 3.2 (3) 1/8 (4) 2/3 a parabola whose
(JEE Main 2014)
(1) vertex is (2a/3, 0) (2) directrix isx =)
(3) latus rectum 1s 2al3 focus ts (a, 0)
(4)
4. Let O be the verter and Q be any point on the parabola,
(IIT-JEE 20
.=8y Ifthe point P divides the line segment OQ internally
2. Let A and B be two distinct points on the parab
inthe ratio | 3, then the locus of P 1s
CB) ab=9 (2) af =a y? = 4x. If the axis of the parabola touches a circle 9
QB) rea (4) x° = 2y(JEE Main 2015) radius r having AB as its diameter, then the slope of the
=5. Let P be the point on the parabola, 1° 2 = 8x which ts: at line joining A and B can be (2) Wr
(ly -lh
a minimum distance from the centre C of the circle,
3 "4 (3) 2/r (4) -2/r (LIT-JEE 2919)
1 + + 6) = 1. Then the equation of the circle, passing “
through C and having tts centre at P 1s 3. Let L be a normal to the parabola ~ = 4x. If L passe
Oh gece = through the point (9, 6), then (2)£ 1s y+given by
sar -x4+4-12=0 (yj #-eF FSO 3x—33=0
(I) x
Q) Pa
4
+ 2y- 2420 (3) y+x-15=0 (4) v—2x+12=0
(IIT-JEE 2011
mR, (3) x +37 -4y-9v + 18=0 4. Let Pand Q be distinct points on the parabolay* = 2r suc:
y (4) x +17 4x + 8y + 12=0 (JEE Main 2016) that a circle with PO as diameter passes through the vere:
6. The radius ofa circle, having minimum area, which touches Olof the parabola. If P hes = the first quadrant annem
the Curie =A ae ane the lines p= 18 of the triangle AOPO 1s 3\2, then which of the followz:
1s (are) the coordinates of P?
Q) 4/2 +1) (2) 2(V2 +1) (1) (4, 2v2) (2) (9. 352)
(3) 2¢J2 -1) (4) 4/2 =f} (3) (t+) (4) (1. v2)
(JEE Main 2017) : (JEE Advanced 201°
7. If the tangent at (1. 7) to the curve po y — 6 touches the 5. Let P be the point on the parabola 17 = 4¥ which 1s f=
shortest distance from the center S of the circle ¢ - 1 ~~
circle x° + 5? + 16x + 12y +¢ = 0 then the value of c 1s
~ 16y + 64 = 0 Let Q be the point on the circle dive’:
(1) 95 (2) 195 (3) 185 (4) 85 the line segment SP internally, Then
(SEE Main 2018) (1) SP = 2N5
8. Tangent and normal are drawn at P(16, 16) on the parabola (2) SO. QP= (VS +1):2
y = 16x, which intersect the axis of the parabola at 4 and (3) the v-intercept of the normal to the parabola at pe
B, respectively. If C 1s the centre of the circle through the . ]
(4) the slope of the tangent to the cirele at Q is =
points P, A and B and ZCPB = @, then a value of tan @ 15
(1) 4/3 (2) 1/2 (3) 2 (4) 3 (JEE Advanced 20!"
6. The cirele C, Da" ta" = 3, with centre at O, intersects®
(JEE Main 2018) parabola ~ = 2y at the pomt P in the first
quadrant. ae
tangent to the circle C; at P touches
JEE ADVANCED other two cucles
and Cy at Ry and R,, respectively.
Single Correct Answer Type Suppose C3 and C3 ”
equal radu 2V3- and centres Q,
and Q,, respectively HN
1. Let (x, y) by any point on the parabola y? ~ 4a Let P and Q, lie on the y-axis, then _
be the point that divides the line segment from (0, 0) to (1) Q.O, = 12
(x,y) in the ratio 1 : 3. Then the locus of P 1s (2) RR, = 4V6
(1) x=» (2) y=2x (3) area of the triangle ORR, is
6V2
(3) y=x (4) area of the triangle PQ,Q, is
(4) °=2y (IIT-JEE 2011) 4\2 0
(JEE Advanced 20)
Parabola 5.47
ifa chord, which 1S not a tangent,
* jas the equation 2x + =p, of th € parabola )? = lox 7
and midpoint (h, Matrix Match Type
k), then which
of the following 1s (are) possible value(s) o
fp, hand k? 1. A line L: y = mx + 3 meets the y-axis at £(0, 3) and
(1) p=5,h=4,k=-3 C2): DEAE Jee KE
3 the arc of the parabola y’ = 16x, 0 < y $ 6, at the point
3) p2-2,h=2k=-4 (4) P=2,h=3, k=4 F(\o. Vp). The tangent to the parabola at F(xq, yo) intersects
(JEE Advanced 201 the y-axis at G(0, y;). The slope m of the line L is chosen
7)
id comprehension Type such that the arca of triangle EFG has a local maximum.
ye
problems 1 and 2 Fist List 1
«po bea focal chord of the parabola \° = dav The tan
gents
ams |p
a ae parabola at P and Q meet at a poir Mt lying on the b. Maximum area of DIF G so q.4
line
2 ytaa7. (JEE Advanced 2013) on : _ r.2
1, The length of chord PQ 1s d.J') = al
(1) 7a
3) 2a
(2) Sa (SEE Advanced 2013)
(4) 3a
1, Ifchord PQ subtends an angle @ at the
vertex of y? = 4ax, 1. Consider the parabola y* = 8x Let A, be the area of the
then tan 0 = . triangle formed by the end points of its latus rectum and
() 2V7/3 (2) -2/773 the point P(1/2, 2) on the parabola, and A, be the area of
a) 2vS3 hy 358 the triangle formed by drawing tangents at P and at the end
points of the latus rectum Then A,/A, 1s
for Problems 3 and 4 (IIT-JEE 2011)
ita r,s. ¢ be non-zero real numbers Let Plar, 2uf), 2. Let S be the focus of the parabola yy = 8x and PQ be the
dar. 2ar) and S(as*, 2as) be distinct points on the parabola \" =
‘a Suppose that PO is the focal chord and lines OR and PK are common chord of the circle x* + 37*— 2x - 4; = 0 and the
urallel, where K 1s the point (2a, 0) given parabola The area of triangle POS 1s
(JEE Advanced 2014)
3. The value of ris (IIT-JEE 2012)
2 1 ey . 3. Let the curve C be the mirror image of the parabola
W) - l Q) eel ay J (4) CO! 1” = 4x with respect to the hne v +1 ~4 = 0. If 4 and B are
1
4. Ifst= 1, then the tangent at P and the normal at S to the the points of intersection of C with the line v = —§, then the
parabola meet at a point whose ordinate 1s distance between A and B 1s
(P +1) a(t” +1) (JEE Advanced 2015)

| Soe Se 4. If the normals of the parabola 17 = 4x drawn at the
" 20° ae 2 end points of its latus rectum are tangents to the circle
a(t" 2 +1 a2 a(t” 2 + 2) 2 (x ~ 3)? + (v + 2)° =)" then the value of
a f “> —— r
1s
(JEE Advanced 2015)
Answers Key
LERcIses
EXE 66. (2) 67. (4) 68. (2) 69. (3) 70. (4)
71. (3) 72. (2) 73. (4) 74. (2)
Single Correct Answer Type 73. (3)
76. (2) 77. (4) 78. (3) 79. (2)
LQ) 24) 3 (4) #4) ~~ 5 @) 81. (3) 82. (4) 83. (4) 84. (4)
80. (4)
®(l) ay 8, GB) GB). (2) 86. (3) 87. (1) 88. (3)
85. (2)
a 2) 42. (4) 13.) 14. GB) TS. GB) 91. (3) 92. (4) 93. (3)
89. (2) 90. (1)
v2) 17.3) 183) 19 1) 20.) 94. (2) 95. (3)
8) 22,3) 23. (4) 24, (4) 25. (1)
yD 27. (4) 28 (1) 29. (4) 30. 2) 1. (2), (4) 2. (1). (4)
yO) 32. (4) 33. (4) 34. (I) 35. 2) 3. (1), (3)
4. (1), (3)
4 3) 37.3) 38, (1) 3% (3) 40. (2) 5. (1), (2), (3)
6. (1), (2)
wp) 4% @) 43) 44 4S is 7 (1), (2) (3), (4) 8. (1), (2), (3),
‘1 * 47. (1) 48. (3) ~— 49. (2) a a 9 (1), (2), (4) 10. (1), a
(4
ot?
% : 52. (3) 53. (2) 54. (4) 2 II. (2), (3) 12. (1), (3)
© «87. (4) 58. (2) 59. (4) 60.) 13. (2), (3), (4) 14. (1), (3)
* (2) 62. (1) 63. (3) 64. (1) 65. (2) 15. (1), (2), (3) 16 - (1), (2), (3), (4)
17. CHAZ) 18. (1). (2)

ARCHIVES
19, (P): 2) Q) 20. (1). (3), (4) JEE MAIN
21. (3). (4) 22%: (1).42).63)
23s
swer TYPE
(2), (4) 24 (1), (2) Single Correct An
2: @) 3; Cl)
Linked Comprehension Type 1. (4)
6. (None) 7: (1)
L.. 3) 2. (4) 3. (1) 4, §, (3)
(2)
6. (4) 7. (1) 8. (3) 9, (4) 10. (4) JFE ADVANCED
1. 3¢3) 12. (4) 13. (1) 14. (2) 15. (3) Answer Type
Single Correct
16. (2) 17. (1) 18. (3) 19, (1) 20. (2) 2. (4)
i; @)
21. (3) 22. (4) 23. (2) 24. (1) 25. (2)
26. (3) t Answers Type
27. (4) 28. (4) 29, (3) 30. (2) Multiple Correc
2. (3), (4)
31. (1) 32. (3) 1. (1), (4) 4. (1), (4)
Matrix Match Type 3. (1), (2), (4) 6. (1), (2), (3)
asrbosicopdoq 5. (1), (3), (4)
atqbosicopidor 7. (4)
a> qs.bornrcecop.q;doqgr ion Type
Linked Comprehens
(2) 3. (4) 4. (2)
1. (2) 2. (4)
Matrix Match Type
1. (7) 2. 2) 3. (1) 4. (3) 5. (3)
6. (4) 7. 7 gd—>r
(6) 8. (4) 9. (3) 10. (2.125) l. a>s;b>pc
11. (8) 12. (2) 13. (8)—s4. (7) 15. (5) Numerical Value Type
16. (3) 17. (0) 18 (3) «19. (4) 20. (1.5) 1. (2) 2. (4) 3. (4) 4. (2)
As @y 22: (2)
pEFINITION Because of the symmetry of the ellipse about its axes. it
inthe previous chapter. we have learned that ellipse is one is possible to define ellipse using another focus S’(a’. B’) and
of the which are symmetrical about minor
omc sections directrix /x+my+n'=0.
,
We have also learned that ellipse 1s locus of a point such that axis In that case, —— =e
ano of us distance from a fixed point (focus) and a fixed line PM’
qrectrix) Is constant, the value of which 1s always less than | In the figure, CS = CS’ and CL = CL’
The constant ratio 1s called eccentricity e Thus. for
ellipse. SP and S’P are called focal radii of point P
(0. 1D). Minor axis
Forellipse, let focus be S(a, f) and directrix be Ix + my +n = 0
The locus of vanable point P(x, 1) will be ellipse if SP ag
constant), Where e € (0. 1) P Mp gk -M
SP=e PM
Therefore. equation of ellipse 1s La 7 ar a ch Mayor axis
|Au+mvtn| | *~ A)” | @ B: T
(a-a@)? +(y- py = aCaxX—_=—_—-
ft 2
= segs =
fea? + B =
The above equation takes the form ax” + by” + 2hry + 2gx + :
- 24 - c = 0, which represents an ellipse if h’ - ab <0 and
A= abe + 2hgf - af’ — bg’ — ch’ #0 We have
The graph of the ellipse 1s as shown in the following figure
SP+SP=e PM+e PM
Minor axis
e(PM+ PM)
~e MM
- © eons’
Major axis @€ , , bye
-
- 5 X (LA + AL +L4'+ AL’)

in-O
(4.4 1'S 4s)

—+—+
e e e ce
Ada
l
SX (AS + A'S) + (AS’ + 4S)
We observe that graph of the ellipse 1s a closed curve
<
r l
The line which passes through the focus and 1s perpendicula re 5 (Ad + 4A’) = AA’
of the ellipse
‘0 the directrix 1s called the major axis (focal axis)
ellipse at points A and = major axis
In the figure, mayor axis intersects the 1s the mayor
_ 4 which are two vertices of the ellipse Here, 44’ Thus, sum of two focal radit of variable point on the ellipse 1s
“Is (or length of major axis) It is the longest chord of the ellipse constant which is equal to length of the major axis.
| “ph of elhpse 1s symmetric about major axis . Further, in triangle PSS’, SS’ is fined and sum of two variable
which is
We have another axis of the ellipse called minor axis sides SP and SP 1s constant. Thus, perimeter of triangle PSS’ is
the ellipse 1s symmetrical
ndicular bisector of 4A’. Graph of constant: This leads to another definition of ellipse as follows:
meets the ellipse at points
Ut the minor axis also. Minor axis Ina triangle. if one side (SS’) ts fixed and variable vertex (P)
minor axis). It 1s the
and B’ BB’ 1s the minor axis (or length of moves ina such a way that perimeter of the triangle remains
“ortest chord of the ellipse. constant then locus of variable vertex is ellipse.
hich 1s called the centre
of oth the axes intersect at point C, w passing
This gives the idea to draw the ellipse on the plane of paper.
‘llipse.Centre bisects every chord © f the ellipse Insert two drawing pins into a board and slip the loop of thread
‘trough it,
ws was ae
loop and s-—a
t a pen cil point in the =A
(non-stretchable) over them Inser aro und the
=>
tight. Move t he pencil
s
position it so that the thread 1s pse 1s traced 2s-a Atl
d tight and, th us, elli
pins, always keeping the threa 1-A
> a
out.
+1
(constant)
Latus Rectum of Ellipse => hb+c= uae
conic
through focus termina ted by
We know that double ordinate point A from two given fy MY
is its latus rectum Thus, sum of distance of variable A 1s ellipse
Minor axis , therefore, locus of
points B and C 1s constant
Directrix
Directri\
6.3
| ; » | ILLUSTRATION
x (APeougy g "
M\: : ¥ equation (5x — 1? + (Sy - DP
If the
ipse, then find the values of 1
Ps o ey — Major axis4
(3x + 4y- 1)’ represents an ell
apts
_ —
Given equation 1s
(Af oleae
Sol.
Pp Q' | Pa4
| | 3x+4y-1
ugh foci Sand S’ are PP’ and

In the figure, double ordinate thro
OO’, respectively
Latus rectum = PP” (= QQ’) 7 («-)=e (52)
2
a1) ete
5 5 pea P44
= 2 xSP \
Distance of Pix |
ellipse) 2 ||
> x ex PM (from definition of Distance between P(t } yand S| :
3) from line 3x++ -|=)
=x ex (distance of focu s from directrix)

Thus, we have
6.1 PM, where 0<e< l
{ILLUSTRATION sP=e
one is completely lying inside
Two circles are given such that locus of
O<jA-I}< ]
prove that the
the other without touching 1t Then smaller circle > {1}
A€(0,2)-
centre of the variable circle which touches
nally 1s an ellipse
externally and bigger circle inter ILLUSTRATION 6.4
-—~ .¢ e focus is S(-l. 1). &
SoL Let the circle S, having < Find the equation to the ellipse whos ntely >
centre at C, and radius r, lie
/
corresponding directrix 1s x —} * 3 = 0 and the ecce
nd focus. the equation of te
completely inside the circle 1/2 Also, find its centre, the seco
rectum
S, having centre at C, and second directrix and the length of latus
radius r;.
S, Sol.
Variable circle S touches
internally and S; externally
—
Centre C of circle Sis variable
variable.
point and its radius *r’ 1s also
and CC, =", -'
From the figure. CC) = 1+ 12
Sy, CCpr CO Ah t (constant)
foci are at C, and C)
Thus. locus of C 1s ellipse whose
ILLUSTRATION 6.2
opposite vertex A moves
Base BC of tnangle ABC is fixed and
B oy se and Pf be perpendie™
‘ = constant Prove that locus Let P(x, ”) be any pomt on the ellip
jn such 4 way that tan 4 tan 3
to the directrix, then PS = ¢ . PM gives
of vertex A 15 ellipse
Sol. Given that in tnangle ABC, ‘as
/
7
'
Jot? +r- DF = V2 ()
constant.
=> Wt Tyr t Jay t 100 - 10; +7=0 t
/ 1) an das perpendiculé!
And _ tan 2 tan = = A (constant) / ‘The mayor axis passes through S(-1,
2 2 C (
B a
directrix.
Goens—a) f(s—ans—b) _ 4 So, the equation of the major axis is x +
y= 0
s(s -—}) s(s—c)
“%
a
Ellipse 6.3
——
0) and A,(-a, 0). '
axismeets the directrix 1n Z, then coordinates of Z are (—3/2, 3/2). Let ellipse intersect x-axis at A,(a,
ellipse for any point P(x, Y
divides ZS internally in the ratio] :eorl 1/2 0r2: J. According to the definition of the
Az (-7/6, 7/6) on the ellipse, we have
PF, + PF, = 2a
F divides ZS externally in the ratio 2 : 1,
VA
A's (-1/2, 1/2) 4d
iy “oe
Ce atre is midpoint of 44’ a B(O,b) AM
C = (-5/6, 5/6) G3) ; P(x, yy | M,
a other focus S’ be (A, &). / -
5] 5
i -
H .
me sth -1)=-= and 5(k +1) =~ (as Cis midpoint of SS) ita OAL Fie.) OF FCC. 0)1A,(a. 0) 2
ey
§ = (-2/3, 2/3) (4)

ifmajor axis meets the other directrix at Z’(a, /2), then BO, -h)
l
—(a-3/2)
5 1 5
= (a ) = -=6 and =5 (B + 3/2) aaa-
7 =(-1/6, 1/6)
V(x-o)? +» + let ey +? =2a (1)
The second directrix passes through Z’(—1/6, 1/6) and 1s
(2)
perpendicular to the major axis Now, [(x - cy +y] —[(x+ cy +y"] = —4cx
Thus, the equation of other directrix is Dividing (2) by (1), we get
os
x-y+1/3=0 (5) oy +9?
4
~ J(x+ c)
4
+
4
yo =-—
2cx
(3)
Vix
da
Also. length of L.R.
Adding (1) and (3), we get
=2x ex distance of (—1, 1) from the line x- y+ 3 =0
re ann ¢ cx
_ i [-l-1+3) 1 x —¢ey + yo =a-—
a
2 2 V2 Squaring both sides and simplifying, we get
cn
9 os
CONCEPT APPLICATION E xe
+>
y =]
a a -¢?
1. Find the equation of ellipse having focus at (1, 2), 2 2
corresponding directrix x — y + 2= 0 and eccentricity 0 5 oF “> + fp = Lwhere a’ ~ 7 = b* and a > b.
2. If the locus of the moving point P(x, y) satisfying Ellipse intersects y—axis at B,(0, b) and B,(0. —4)
(GIP ty? +y(x+)? +(y-VI2" =a is an Here, length of major axis 1s 2a and length of minor anis 1s 26.
ellipse, then find the values of a Also, ‘a’ is called semi—mayor axis and °° is semi—minor axis
Now, in triangle F,OB,,
3. Find the eccentricity, one of the foci, the directrix, and
the length of the latus rectum for the comic (3x - 12) F\O° + OB; = F\B;
(3x -—4y + 5) +b =F Be=a
+By+ 15)= 55
For point B,, teal =e
= eee oi ANSWERS 0 vy
1. 7x7 + 757 + 2xy — 20x - 28y + 36 = 0
2. a>4 BM ="
e
3. € = 1/3: focus = (4, 5); directrix: 3x — 4y + 5 = 0, .
So, equation of directrix is a = —
. tok a
LR. = 2/5 e
Hence, equation of another directrix is. y= -—
EQUATION OF ELLIPSE IN DIFFERENT Thus, #')P = e+ PAL = {2

1
- “| =a-er
FORMS
a
STANDARD EQUATION OF ELLIPSE and f',P—¢ + PM, = {¢ +1 =ater
or standard equation of ellipse, we consider coordinate axes as Also, for point 4), ‘
®Xes of the ellipse. So, we have following two cases:
Major Axis is x-axis and Minor Axis is y-axis
*t major axis be x-axis and minor axis be y-axis. So, centre will
_ distance from centre to focus
Origin.
Let foci be F,(c, 0) and F,(—c, 0). distance from centre to vertex
i
Thus, ¢ ts also measure of degree of flatness of the ellipse u! .

Itc approaches to 0, then foci move towards centre and ellipse
gets thicker, tends ta become cirele.
;
Ife approaches to 1. then foct move towards two vertices and Bis m
ellipse gets thinner, tends to become a line segment 9 Pls v)
Also, trom am — = b7, we have / (Oyheahy es
w weah i 7 1
a PSA Oa aint = Ae * AG
or <=l- wae
wv (0, -he)is .
dae AF
Alsoge= = ==
2a 2a BAO, &)‘
_ Distance between foe ‘ b
Major axis z fe “ &
Latus rectum a
Foc of the ellipse are F'(0, be) and F(0, be)
at)
fl]
iv
WeFegy Py ae Cee: 2 «te

+ Equations of directrix 1s given by ¥
Major axis = B,B, = 26
Minor axis = 4,42 = 2a
F4-ae.0)|O F (ae. - For any point P(x, y) on the ellipse. we have
| —_
| Y= PR Se pM, =e[—-1 |=b-e
Go~—_| - Q, | .e
b \
and PF, =e-PM,=e| +1 Jnorey
In the figure. latus rectum = P,Q, (= P3Q>) From PF, = 6 — ey, we have
Equation of line passing through foci 1s given by x = + ae 2 7 hat he
Solving with ellipse. we get x +(y— bey’ =b-e
age \ => ty -2be+ be = b -2be- er
. . >
2 % 2
a a " 4 => vee) =e (le)
* 4 > b 5
w= b(l-ey= & Ze r
2 a BF = oe heel
pet Blimey. Bb
2 > \°
a
So. endpomnts of latus rectum are / ae
b
— |. O,|
b
ae, -—
> ——
oR +——=1,l where ¢ (1 -e), b> a
=h(1-e7),
a , A a a iia
f ho . b Elhpse intersects v-anis at (0, £5), which are vertices of ellip
and F,' —ae. . Q,| -ae, -— :
“ at ; a a sth of
2p? Extremities of latus rectum are | +—,+4e | and leng
Length of latus rectum = P,Q, = P30) = — dy? b
a latus rectum is =—b
Also. length of latus rectum
~2-7e-7 Distance of focus from directrix ‘
ILLUSTRATION 6.5
= 22rer| ~~
= ue a
Find the eccentricity ae
of an ellipse —- +—a = 1 whose Jatus
: rectum is half of its mayor axis gt
= 2a(l-e¢)
5 2 Sol. Let avb
“ be 2b 9
~ aa} 7, Then the latus rectum of ellipse ts 26" ;
. a2 a
Major Axis is y-axis and Minor Axis is x-axis 5 ; Given that a =a
equation of
.
cllipse as
Y
— 4+ —
y
=], e “
In this case also, we consider
where a < b a
~
ob
:
= —==
2
a2
Elbpse 6.5
ILLUSTRATION 6.9
P(x, y) 18 any point on ellipse 16x7 + 25y' = 400. if F, = (3, 0)
and /, = (-3, 0), then prove that P/’, + PF, is constant and
find its value.
LUSTRATION 6.6 Sol. We have, ellipse

lox? +25)" 400
find the standard equation of the ellipse whose foci are (+2, 0)
and eccentricity 1/ oe m —+—=!
’
gol. Let the ellipse be x +

\
ce=a -f?=25 [6-9
a”
ro!
: ue =3
So, foci are (tae, 0) = (+3, 0)
= (+2, 0) Thus, F, and F; are the foci of the ellipse
gjso. foci of ellipse are (tae. 0)
2 aezl = a= 4 Since the sum of the focal distances of a variable point P on an
= b=12 ellipse 1s equal to 1s major axis,
\on. b= a(l -¢)
PF) PF= la W
therefore, equation of ellipse is “4 2_ =]
ILLUSTRATION 6.7 A rod of length / cm moves with sts ends A (on x-axis) and B
(on y-axis) always touching the coordinate axes Prove that
If the focal distance of an end of the minor axis of standard the point P on the rod which divides 48 in the ratio Ait lris
ellipse is k and distance between its foci 1s 2h (k > h), then find ellipse. Also, find the eccentricity of the ellipse.
its equation.
7 ,
Sol. From the figure,
Sol. Equation of standard equation 1s ot
Distance between foci = 2ae = 2h (given)

— i=
* 7 =|
margpcosoe 22-2
n APQB, cos - OR PB
B aa 9 PUx:
= ae=h (1) hAURE in Gt = ~
Also. given that focal distance of the one end of minor axis 1s &. PA PA ee
a R 7
a=k Now AP _A
- Pad=e=r- PB |
_ AP _ PB AP+ PB 1?
So the equation of the ellipse 1s z + = 5 =l A A+] oA+l A]
ke ke =
A i
ILLUSTRATION 6.8 AP = J and PB = =
+1 Arl
Find the equation of the ellipse having minor axis of length | h(A +1) A(A+]
cos @= ] and sin @= =
and foci (0, 1), (0, -1). Also find its latus rectum.
Squaring and adding,
Sol. Since foci are on y-axis, we consider equation of ellipse
2 32
W(A+IP ‘ CPierl? _j
as a a) ,acb
a pt fe rE
Given foci are (0, tbe) = (0, +1)
be=1 a I
a Vr
Length of minor axis 1s 2a
(A+1/7 (A +1)
So
» Qa@=1 = a= This is the equation of required locus
Now, “= (1 ~e)
Clearly, this ty the equation af ellipse
wy
ead
1 as 2
= =b
Cr
4 (A+1ye z
LetaA+ Iothen e? -1- sao Ee l- ar
> P= 5 i
>
i 2 , 2 4y"
(A+IP
So, the equation of ellipse ts gece | Ord > oY |
5/4 5 c= vl a
ILLUSTRATION 6.13
ILLUSTRATION 6.11
the equation |z~ | 4 )
Variable complex number z satisfies of
the earth was Sputnik I. Its complex number , \
The first artificial satellite to orbit and its lowest
+|z+3—i|= 10. Prove that locus
ace was 947 km,
highest point above earth’s surf ellipse Also, find centre, foci and eccentricity of the ellipse
of the earth was at one of the
point was 228 km. The center ]z-(-3 + Dl = 19
foci of the elliptical orbit. Theradius of the earth is 6378 km. Sol. Given equation is |z~ (1 — 2i)| +
z and | — 2: (= 2)
Find the eccentricity of the orbit jz-(1-2f|= distance between
een z and -3 + 1 (= 25)
jz-(-3+ DI = distance betw
+ fix
Sol. from points (1 — 2/) and (-3
t _ Sputnik Thus, sum of distances of z
with foci at z; and z,
= «~~ orbit constant 10. So, locus of z 1s ellipse
i
1s —1—- =”
Centre 1s midpoint of z, and Zp, which
= [I —21-(-3 +] =|4~-37's5
Distance between foct = |z; — 22
\ Earth
= 2ae
Major axis = 10 = 2a
]
Eccentricity = € = 10 5
ling on the
As shown in the figure, Sputnik satellite 1s travel
elliptical orbit having equation
LLELTO
FQUATION OF ELLIPSE IAWING AXES PARA
COORDINATE AXES 5
a > b, 1s shifec
with the center of the earth 4 at the focus. If the ellipse having equation ig— + zal
2
AC = AD = Radius of the earth = 6378 km (translated) such that its centre is at (A, k), then equati
on of ellipse
According the question, the highest point of Sputnik above (x-hy =k),
earth’s surface 1s E and the lowest point 1s B. Therefore, becomes
a
2
b
2 =
BC = 228 km and ED = 947 km Since a > b, major axis 1s along » = k and minor aus
alenz
From the figure, x=h. ,
= te
AB = a- ae = AC + BC = 6378 + 228 = 6606
and AE=a+a e=
ED= + 947 +
6378 AD = 7325
atae _ 7325
a—ae 6606
Lee _ 7325
2 = 2325-6606 __719 = 0.05161 O
7325+ 6606 13931
Eccentnicity is given by relation r=a(l- e)
ILLUSTRATION 6.12 Foci are F(A + ae, k) and Fy(h — ae. 4).
a
If (5, 12) and (24, 7) are the foci of an ellipse passing through Equation of two directrices are \=ht—.
e
the origin, then find the eccentricity of the ellipse

@=AY HW Ly a <b te
If equation of ellipse ts
If two foc are S(5, 12) and $"(24, 7) and the ellipse passes
.
Sol. a=bhi(l ae"); ar b-
through the origin O, then
SO= {254+ 144 = 33 "t 1h paps
S'0=V576449 25
and SS" = ¥386 oF,
y=k
If the conic 1s an ellipse, then
CA, k) !
SO + S'0= 2a *F,
and SS’ = 2ae _ a

ss 38 sim —-—" e
—» x
—
; Ellipse
* poct are F\(hvk + ae) and Fh k—ae) : 6.7
In general, we can say that if perpendicular distances p, and
Equation of two directrices are _y =k + 2 Pz Of a moving point P(x, y) from two mutually perpendicular
e coplanar straight lines L, = a,x + byy + c, = 0 and Ly = byx - ayy
ILLUSTRATION 6.14 2
+ Cy = 0, respectively, satisfy the equation
Find Lae 2 2 a bh?
ae ee ie gs of directrix of
aje Ay +6 eee
yap + be Jap + ap
Sol. The given equation is + =|, then the locus
a bh?
x? — 2x) + 307 - 4y) + 13 =0
of point P is ellipse.
> Ax-1P+3Q@-2P=) axtbyto=0
x-l) (y-2/ P(x, y) hx ayto=0
ea q
2 + “ _ a =
Centre of the ellipse is (1, 2)
fNr> og
: a@ = 1/2 and b? = 1/3
Since a > b, equation of major axis is y = 2 and equation of minor
¥ = 1
ani$ts
Length of major axis = 2a = f2 The centre of the ellipse 1s the point of intersection of the lines
L, and L,
: 2
Length of minor axis = 2b: The mayor axis lies along line L, and the minor axis lies along
line L, ifa> 6.
e £2
and e= oe j-2- ILLUSTRATION 6.15
a 3 3
Find the equation to the ellipse whose axes are of lengths 6
ea 21 and 2/6 having equations as x —3y +3 =0 and3x+y-1
6 = 0, respectively.
]
ae= = So}. Length of major axis is 6 which 1s along the line x — 34
6
+ 3 = 0 and length of minor axis 1s 2V6 which is along the line
3x+y—t=0.
a
Pky (tets Ty
Equations of directrix are poled or x=li-=. + {
Thus, equation of ellipse is v9 +t es | =1
3 V6
or (3x+y
3x+y-l)y & (x—3y43/)
3) + 3) 7
EQUATION OF AN ELLIPSE REFERRED TO TWO 90 60
PERPENDICULAR LINES AS AXES
=> 3xty-1) +3 —3y+ 3) = 180
2 2
Consider the ellipse Be pte => — 21x? — 6xy + 29)” + 6x — 58y— 151 =0
2 2
a b
yA
x=0 AREA OF ELLIPSE
, ,
Ca Nb H P(x, y)
Area of an ellipse having equation — nae =i 1s Tah
bo
a
f 4
{
O M
seth
yy = ) This area can be obtained using integration
/
yy coy
We have — =|-—
b ay
the ellipse Then, PM = y and

Let P (x, y) be any point on
N= x,
a
LT a
we have F\P < e Py

inside the ellipse,
6.8 Coordmate Geomety __ If poi nt P(x ). yi is ‘
axcs,
al about both the
Since ellipse 1s symmetric 1<0.
yy
adrant e
o f ellipse im first qu for which 5S; o
.
b?
Area of ellipse = 4 x Area a
the ellipse, we have F,\
P > e Py
side
If pont P(x,1) #8 out .
Ty tarSh 150
forwhich S| Zo
a
“ y terior region ang
1 4=-1<0 represents .
a
2 a oP
region of ellipse
b having radius a _ | 50 represents exterior
— & x Area of cirele fa.2 ee¥
h
a a
OF FOCA! CHORD
b
= —xfa”
2 =Mab IMPORTANT PROPERTY focal chord
a sing through one 13. called
A chord of ellipse pas
ILLUSTRATION
6.16
x
5
_.¥ =| and lines Consider focal chor
= 1a > b) though
the ellipse carl
Find the area between rd has two een SP and SQ The
one of its foc: S. This cho
a
the
1s equal to semi latus rectum of
jet oA bj harmonic mean of SP and SQ
a b l ] 2a
4 + ellipse Lei F Sa
SP SQ wb
Sol. Given ellipse 1s os + i =|.
a ob Proof:
re is tan 0.
a parallelogram whose diagonal
s Let slope of the focal chord
Given hines lal + ul. | form O_ r
—— FE nck
Thus, the equation of chord 1s cos@
a
minor axes of the given ellipse sin@
are majo r and
\ - y=aetrcos dandy=rsi
n é
p00.) Solving with ellipse, we get
(ae +r COs ey es sin 6)”
- =1
Ala, Oe ae b
(arte O 2
@ «sin? 2 @)
cos? > . 2ecos@ r+e—-1=0
a he +
be a
a
en pomts. this equation bas
D(0, -b) Since chord intersects ellipse at two ldbe
ry = ~SQ. It shou
two roots r, and r such that r, = SP and
are of opposite signs as point s P and Q lie on the
noted that roots
Required region is shaded region in the figure. opposite sides focus ‘
lelogram
Required area= Area of ellipse— Area of paral a fe)
I _
~ 2)ab SP . ee
= mab— 4% ab =(
sy (4 ae r)° ARn
Jr |
POSITION OF & POINT W.R.T ELLIPSE
2 y de> cos" @
Consider standard equation of ellipse S = ~~ + ep a
SO
_ a 8 Herd
cos” ) ; sin? @) FOS) a. sin” 8

One of the foci is F (ae, 0) Outside
directrix . b- ry i b
and corresponding 7 ar
S>0
1S pase Inside SO | = e°
/
€
{ S<0
at cos? @ sin? @
Let M be foot of the aes
.
j—" ar
a 5
b-
.
perpendicular from point

2
P(x), y,) on the direct rix = B, , { cos: <in-@
vane costo , sn
4
~ ce cos” @
Graph of the ellipse
me 2 ad
a ig
divides the plane into two

parts. 2a"
— 2a fee "<b *)cos? 8, b? cos" °6 sin’ @
we have FP ~ ¢- PM, tor
If point P(x;, ¥;) is on the ellipse, a 4 a’ a
2
which s,=7b4+2b-1=0.
a
Ellipse 6.9
|LLUSTRATION 6.17 2 2
if S and S’ are two foci of the ellipse 16x? or a4 aes er cd ee
+ 25)? = 400 and a h? a’ bh?
| psQ1s a focal chord such that SP = 16, then find
SQ and S'O ‘ xX, yy xe. He
2 >
or !
T= ,a— += 2 -1 andS,=
7=S),where 1
1
a4 + bh roe
s x vw
| Sol. ven ellipse
Given el ipse 1sis —
iS ++ —_
ié ==|,
Here. a = Sand b = 4. ILLUSTRATION 6.18 P i

| Now, PSQ is focal chord, where S is focus. Find the length of the chord of the ellipse - + a =1 whose
I 2a
l = a midpoint is (1/2, 2/5).
We know that, SP + 30
Then for given ellipse, we have Sol. Equation of the chord of the ellipse —ry?
+ — =] whose
midpoint ts (1/2, 2/5) 1s 45 16
mers
ee DENG
lo SO 16 (M/2)x | (2/5)y _ | V4 4 f 25 (Using T=S;)
25 16 25 16
Mok, a5 or 4x+Sy=4
= 16 SOQ 8
or Sy = 4(1 — x) (1)
16
= SQ =— Solving with ellipse, we get
g 9
Now. SO+SO=2a=10 16x? + 16(1 ~ x)? = 400
> x =x~ 12=0
16 74
SO=10-
= = & > x=4,-3
g 9 9
For x = 4, y=-12/5;
For x = -3,y = 16/5
EQUATION OF CHORD OF ELLIPSE BISECTED AT So, extremities of the chord are P(4. —12/5) and Of-3, 16.5)
GIVEN POINT
+ ml
Consider ellipse il + J =]. Length of the chord, PO =

a &
Let OR be the chord v
ILLUSTRATION 6.19
joing two points Q(x, 13) z
and R(x;. 33). | OA%2, V2) Find the locus of the midpoints of a focal chord of the
Let midpoint of OR be | ellipse
Il
ea
aget
oR ages di
Pix;. ¥,) and also slope of O Pi, 7 ik
the chord be tan @. : Sol. Let the midpoint of the focal chord of the given ellipse be
Then equation of chord 1s (h, k) Then its equation is
x-X YN | ~ R(X, Ys)
fir OF ot cde
acos@ bsin@ a b a b
Since this passes though (ae, 0), we have

Solving this line with ellipse, we get ’ .
hae
— =_ hr 7 ++
| ke
(x, +rcos 6) + ( +rsin6) =|
Qa a
(1)
a’ b?
4 .
or he — Ay LS
Since Jine cuts the ellipse in two points Q and R, this 1s a a
quadratic mr, whose roots are r, = PQ and r, = -QR ,
Therefore, the locus of . (A, &) isoe& = a v
45 © rs
Also, PO = OR. a aw ih
Sum of roots = r, +r, = 0 CONCEPT APRLIGATION EXERCISE 6.2

Therefore, in equation (1), coefficient of r 1s zero
I. Find the standard equation of ellipse whose eccentricity
2x, al x 2y ang =() 2.
a b Is 4 . latus rectum is 5,
b*x, 2. Ancellipse has O# ay the semt-mumor axis, F and F’ as

=> tan @=-—>— its
loci and © /BE arightangle Then, tind the eccentricity
ay
Hence, equation of chord 1s
of the ellipse.
3. An ellipse ts inseribed ina rectangle and the
7
aX, 1 angle
¥y = JV =_=— 5
(x
- x) between the diagonals of the rectangle is tan (2/2) ;
ay then find the eccentricity of the ellipse
‘a>
Coordinate Geometry ANSWERS -
|
the v- and
ipse whose axes are
| 4 Find the equation of an cll and ecce ntri city 18 4y? ]
us 18 a (4, 0) 4y 4x?
=|. 2o =
y-axis and whose one foc
4x? or
wf f=] 2
4/5. 1. 45 7 8i R145
string which
by using an ¢ ndless
An ellipse 1s described 6 em and 4 em,
H the axes a re
mn
is passed ov er two pins ‘25 9

sting and distan ce bet wee! rthe ts Y2
then find the leng th of the = 6+2V5 , Distance between pins
5. Length of string
pins.
with the major axis = 2/5
An are of a bridge ts semi-elliptical highest
of the base 1s 9 mand the xy?
horizontal Ifthe length prove ef ptose
6, Sa |
from the horizontal, the n
Hy =5
x7+4y°
7, 2020x 8 6
part of the bridge ts 3. the are 2m
n of the height of
that the best approximatio —| 7+3V5
e Is 8/3m
from the center of the bas is of 11. v5 12. vs
(0,+1)a nd the minor axis 10. ul 2 2
If the foci of an ellipse are axes 2
equation 0 f the ellipse. The 15. (-1.2)(-1,+)
unut length, then find the 13. 2 14. 0.05489
e axes
of ellipse are the coordinat 2
2 4
= 6/5, € =
Major axis = 8/5, Minor axis
+ @+2y =|] If
ipse we
A point P lies on the ell 64 49
s 1s 10 unit s, then find its 2 2 2 2
the distance of P from one focu
distance from other focus 16 81 4 9
teral whose sides are
An ellipse circumscribes a quadrila
ance between foct 1s
given by x = +2 and v= +4. If the dist
4/6 and major axis 1s along v-ax1s
then find the equation PARAMETRIC FORM OF ELLIPSE
e having equation r-y
of ellipse We know that parametric form of circl
nce between whose 6, y= asin 8.
10. Find the eccentneity of an ellspse dista =a’ 1s given by x=acos
and corresponding
foc: 1s 10 and that between focus ion (= +| a
directrix 1s 15 Parametric form of ellipse having equat ay b}
x y,
2
Is given by
— + —>
11. Acurcle whose diameter 1s major ax1s of ellipse a
~ =cos @, *—sin@
point P If the b
= ] (a > b > 0) meets minor axis at a
and F,
orthocentre of APF,F; lies on ellipse where F, or x=acos@,y=bsne@
of pom
are foc) of ellipse, then find the eccentricity
of the ellipse Here, @ 1s parameter and called eccentric angle
ellipse. This point 1s also denoted as
12. What 1s the ratio of the greatest and least focal
distances (a cos 6, b sin 6) on the
define
of a point on the ellipse 4x? + 9)? = 36? P(6) To get the eccentric angle of point on the ellipse. we
axes of
13. An ellipse 1s drawn with the major and minor auxiliary circle.
major axis of the
jengths 10 and 8, respectively. Using one focus as center Auxiliary circle 1s the circle descnbed on
that 1s tangent to the ellipse, with no part ellipse as a diameter.
a circle 1s drawn
outside the ellipse Then find the radius > +
of the circle being ' |
— +—; =1, a> 6, equation of auxiliary circle
x
of the circle For ellipse
a
14. The moon travels an elliptical path with Earth as one x 4 y = a
focus The maximum distance from the moon to the earth
va
Va
1s 405.500 km and the minimum distance is 363,300 km s

P
What 1s the eccentricity of the orbit?
= 225 #\
15. Find the focs of the ellipse 25(x + 1)? + y+ 2)"
2
a OT te t
Prove thal the area bounded by the circle r+
ao
16. (anon Yo
(4,09) oO Voor
F mF 2 J
and the ellipse pt Re 1 45 equal to the area of another

5 ta
re
ellipse having semi-axis a hand b,a~ b
17. Find the Jengths of the major and minor axes and the
(3x 4y 429 ' ; From point PQ, v) on the ellipse, we draw a line perpendicul?
ircle
eccentricity of the ellipse , ih yy Oe 7 %) to mayor axis intersecting major axis in N and auxiliary ¢
=1. : in P*. The points P and P’ are called corresponding pom’ o
18. Find the locus of the middle points of all chords of the ellipse and on auxiliary circle, respectively, which lie on tb
x
2
Bis
2 same side of major axis.
X_4-— = } which are at a distance of 2 units from the
From the figure, P’ = (a cos 6, a sin 8).
vertex of parabola 3” = -Bax.
Since PP’ is vertical line, for point P, x = a cos 8.
a
Ellipse 6.21
putting the value >of x in the equation of ellipse, we get ILLUSTRATION 6.22
2 Ss
co Ny 6+ e » =] Find the cquation of the curve whose parametric equations are
x=144cos0,y=2+3sin0,6 eR.
= b's’ @
or
y=bsin @ (considering positive sign, as quadrant Sol. Wehavex-1+4cos#,y=2+3sn4 Therefore,
of the point is decided by 6)
P=(acos @ Asin 8), Oe [0. 27) x_1/ (’ i} -
( 4 HL gop =
PN bsin@ b
sa, we have — = — — = = Constant
Algo: PP’ = asin@-bsin@ a-b or +4
i6 9 J
Thus. if from each point on a circle, a perpendicular 1s drawn

which 1s an ellipse
ona fixed diameter, then the locus of a point P dividing these
perpendiculars in a constant ratio 1s \ ILLUSTRATION 6.23
an ellipse whose auxiliary circle 1s (0, 6)
the orginal circle. A line passing through origin O(0, 0) intersects the two
For ellipse having equation ‘ PP concentric circles of radi a and 6 at P and Q, respectively.
te \0
If lines parallel to x-axis and y-axis through Q and P,
—-+—=l1.
—ihes a < 6, equation of 7 7 respectively, meet at point R, then find the locus of R
of 5 5 5
guulian circle is xX + ¥° = b t
Sol. m
Corresponding points on ellipse \
and circle are P(a cos @, b sin @) and pose) Let R=(h,k)
Pib cos @, b sin @), respectively. From the figure,
QO - P
(x-hy (v-ky h=acos@ -
For ellipse having equation + BE a =,
a 5 and k=bsn@ 9 —+t
nerametne form 1s x=h+acos 6,1 =k+bsin@
ILLUSTRATION 6.2D i x =|
3 <2
Find the eccentric angle of a pornt on the ellipse 2 + a =] a ob

2 ?
whose distance from the centre of the ellipse 1s V5 So, Pp= + re2 = 11s required locus
2
xy 2
So. Let variable point on the ellipse ets. = 1 be ILLUSTRATION 6.24
Pi.
6 cos 6. V2 sin 6) The auxthary circle of a family of ellypses passes through the
“nven that origin and makes intercepts of § units and 6 units on the x- and
y-axis, respectively If the eccentricity of all such ellipses ts
cp=J5 (where C 1s centre)
1/2, then find the locus of the focus
— 6 cos? 6 + 2sin? @ = V5
Sol, The auxthary circle makes intercepts of S untts and o units
= 6(1 - sin? @) + 2 sin? @= 5 on the v- and y-axes, respectively Theretore, the center of the curele
> 4s?= 1 is (4, 3) and the radius ty 10
sin A= me
(4, 3) 1s the center of tnseribed ellipse also
dt
2 Now, the distance of the focus the trom the center of the ellipse
IS ae
ii
2
1
|
|
|
Since the radius of the auxiliary cuele ws >, the length of the semt-
mayor ayn, a will be 5
ILLUSTRATION 6.21
ay Given «
Find the number of rational pomts on the ellipse y 1 40 |
ate
Sol. x gt 2 1
9 4
Therefore, the locus of the tocus is
Let any point on the ellipse be (3 cos 8, 2 sin 0),
Since sin 6 and cos @ can be rational for infinitely many values of Qo 4aPayy aye25=
Ge (0, 27], there exist infinite points
:
6.12 Coordinate Geometry _ s -
A=4PQ-AD .
ILLUSTRATION 6.25
x yoo
3 = PD-AD
If the line /v + my + n = 0 cuts the ellipse an us ee 1am = PD(OA + OD)
m =hsin@(a-acos@)
points whose eccentric angles differ by = then find the value
al
77
+ bm
> 9
= Sah(2 sin@—sin 20),0<@0<2
of ———_———__.
2 ¥.
n
FP)
Sol. Let the line A + mv + = Ocut the ellipse —> + ra =Ilat

a°
Ala, 0)
_ (2 >x
P(a cos @ b sin 8) and of« cos (é + a). b sin & + 0))
= Q(- asin 6.) cos 4)
Since points P and Q he on the line, we have
lacos @+ mb sin @=—n
and = —/a sin @+ mb cos @=—n “a = ah (cos @ — cos 28),
oP tr =r and 4 = ab(-sin 6 + 2 sin 20)
at +b°m"
=> > For maximum or minimum of A,
~w
no
dA _
dQ
ILLUSTRATION 6.26
or cos8 — cos 20 =0
Find the greatest area of the rectangle that can be inscribed in or 2 cos*@
- cos 9-1 =0
4
“
or (2 cos 6 + 1) (cos8-1)=0
the ellipse ie ae
a 2 or cos = -5 (" cos@#
1 as@=?)
Sol. Rectangle can be inscribed in the ellipse with its sides or — 2%3
parallel to axes of the ellipse as shown in the following figure When @= 27/3, we have
ve
PA _
oae- 5(3V3)ab, (ve)
S P(a cos @, b sin 8)
Therefore, the area is maximum when @ = 2:7/3
Xx Therefore, maximum area
A=4 ab }2 sin 2 — sin “
= 4 GN3) ab
Let P={(acos 6, bsin @)
Area of rectangle PORS ILLUSTRATION 6.28
= (2a cos @) (2b sin 8) Prove that the sum of eccentric angles of four concyelic pons
= 2ah sin 26 ; x2 2
on the ellipse = + a = 1 is 2nz, where ne Z.
This 15 maximum when sin 26= |
Hence, maximum area = 2ah(1) = 2ab
Sol. Let the circle x* + "+ 2ev t+ 2A t= 0 cut the ellips?
2
ILLUSTRATION 6.27 A ¥ ———
ae + rr = | in four points P, Q, R and S,
Find the area of the greatest isosceles triangle that can be
inscribed in the ellipse (x7/?) + Q7/b*) - | having its vertex Solving circle and ellipse (\ = a cos 6, = d sin @), we have
coincident with one extremity of the major axis a’ cos? 8+ b? sin? O+ 2ug cos 8+ 2bfsin 8+ ¢c=0
Sol. Let APQ be the isosceles triangle inseribed in the ellipse

(x7/a*) + (y7/b?) = 1 with one vertex A at the extremity (a, 0) of
the major axis. If the coordinates ofP are (a cos 0, b sin 0), then
those of QO will be (a cos 9, —A/ sin 8).
So, the area of AAPQ 1s given by
. aa
sp “Ellipse 6-13
a(l-7y + 46°? + 2ag (1 - A) (1 + ?) + 4bf (1 + P) II. Circle described on focal length
as diameter always touches
2 s(t Py =0 auxiliary circle. ;
4 > >
2
a Ca = 2ag +c)" + 4bft’ + (-2a + 46? + 2c)t" + 4bft Proof: Consider the ellipse having equation —x red
y=
=1,
+(a + 2ag+c)=0 (1) BSI a
Let point ? on the ellipse be (a cos 8, 4 sin 8).

of equation are fans , tan B > ta - and tan é where
Reet : ae i ty 4
ac. yand 6 are eccentric angles of P, O, R and S, respectively, P “ €
a Biy,6)\)__ s-s, Ls M
Now, in{ a5 7 + 3 a 4 en comet
es, / C;. |
a 2 << a ——,
where s, = sum of products of tangents of half angles taken ‘1’
ata time \ ic ey fa- a”
Clearly. from equation (1), /
~4bf
St Pind e
“ ag + ¢ From the definition of the ellipse,
a Bp y 6
= an $45 +245) <9 SP=e pa=e( © ~ a cos 6)
at+B+y+d | Zz = a(l —e cos 8) —
2 “HEE Equation of auxiliary circle 1s x° + 7 = a, having centre
oa at+ B+ y+8=2nmneZ C,(0, 0) and radius r; = a
Circle described on SP as a diameter has centre
of # + a Cos a b sin >| eT ae a(l—ecos @)
SOME IMPORTANT PROPERTIES OF ELLIPSE ° 2 : 2
I. The ratio of area of any triangle POR inscribed in an NBG dl REE (1 + e cos 8)
ellipse to the triangle formed by corresponding points on ee 2
the auxihary circle 1s equal to the ratio of sem minor axis 3 5 3
to sem major axis and C,C,= 2 (e+ cos 6)" | b' sin” 6
2 2 4 4
Proof: Consider the ellipse having equation a ae =1,
a>b a b
e + 2ecos 0+ cos-@ + i
wla
sin? @
Let the three points on the ellipse be P(a cos a, 6 sin a), a~
Oa cos B, b sin f) and R(acos % bsin yp)
e? + 2ecosO + cos? 6 + (1 - e-) sin?@
vlna
i
Then corresponding points on the auxiliary circle are P’(a

i]
cos a, a sin a), O'(a cos f, a sin f) and R'(a cos ¥,a sin y)
Ve" cos? 6 + 2ecos@ + 1
Sw]
acosa@ bsng 1
—lacosB bsinB ] = 5 fe cos 0+ 1)
Now, Areaof APOR __|acosy bsiny =ry-ry
” Area of AP’Q’R’ |acosa asina@ Hence,
; the circle on SP as a diameter touches the auxihary
acosB asinB ] circle internally.
Nil
acosy asmy ] ILLUSTRATION 6.29
cosa sing . ,
The ratio of the area of triangle inscribed in ellipse
—
ab|cosB sin B
25 + ue
—
ar b
= I to that of triangle formed by the
cosy siny corresponding points on
the auxihary circle 1s 0.5. Then,
find the eccentricity of the
=|
com sing ellipse,

a’|cosB sin fs
—
| cory sin’y Sol. an cee ratio is

—-
b
= 7 = constant
a2
Now, e&=1_&
6.14 Coordinate Geometry _
EXERCISE 6,3
APP LIGATION
EQUATION OF CHORD OF ELLIPSE Concert
a «2 are (-), 0)
Consider the ellipse 2, 1, Prov e that any point on the ellipse whose foci
re to]be
ity 1s 1/2 is ( 3+8cos 0, 4V3 sing)
the points P(a cos 4, and (7, 0) and eccentric
Equation of the chord passing through
b sin a) and O(a cos f, b sin f) 1s OER.
extremities of the latys
2. Find the eccentric angles, of the
bsin B-bsna@ (x -— acos @) 2
}—bsina= . x
~3 + 3 = !-
acos B —acos @ recta of the ellipse
p ae
(sin a—sinB)x + a(cos B - cos@) v= ab sin (a@ - B)

=> 3. If the chord joining points P(@) and Q(B) on the ellipse
the vertex
: +
a
a-
# (x2/a”) + (7/6) = 1 subtends a right angle at
tan (8/2) = - big
coe CFE nS
> ¥ 2
a 2 b 2 A(a, 0), then prove that tan (a/2)
) + (y?/b?) =| Is 4x,
4. If the area of the ellipse (x2/a?
the
then find the maximum area of rectangle inscribed in
mities of a focal
If a and f are the eccentric angles of the extre2 ellipse.
2 the first
+ oF =] then prove 5. Find the point (a, 8) on the ellipse 4x? + 3y*=12,in
chord through S(ae, 0) of an ellipse ae
a quadrant, so that the area enclosed by the
lines y= x, y=,
sin @ + sin B x =a, and the x-axis 1s maximum.
that the eccentricity of the ellipse is — ellipse
sin(a + B) 6. Find the maximum length of chord of the
2 2
Equation of chord through points P(a cos a,
b sin @), x — + VY" _1, such that eccentric angles of its extremities
-—
8 4
O(a cos B. b sin B) 1s
+ _ differ by = ;
d OEP. eget B
Bp PAB Vg
a 2 b 2 2
7. If P(@) and of § + @) are two points on the ellipse
If it passes through focus S(ae, 0) then
at a-
ys . ~ |, then find the locus of midpoint of PQ.
2 2
ecos = cos
2 2
9
cos 7 5 Z 8. Let P be any point on ellipse 3x7 + 4y" = 12. If Sand S are
its foci then find the locus of the centroid of triangle PSS.
=> e=
ee B
Z 9. The line x + 2y = | cuts the ellipse x? + 4y7 = 1 at owo
distinct points A and B. Point C 1s on the ellipse such that
2sin( 2*F) cos( 258)
_ 2 2 _ sin@+sin B area of triangle ABC 1s maximum, then find point C
2sin{ 2 + B cos{ % + 2) sin (a@ + B)
ANSWERS eae |
2 2
-1f 5 b
2. tan (2 ent 2) eesanr( 2) ane (=
iRise RATION S37 ey ae ae ae ue
Find the equation of chord of an ellipse 5 + Zz = | joining
4. 8 sq. units 5. (3/2, 1) 6. 4
two points (2) and o( 2}. 7 ;
sy
7, 4x?Se yD Gg Sell
§SHBP Equation of chord PQ 1s
s (-L, -e)
V2" 2V2
TANGENT TO ELLIPSE
> S cos 4 2 in Soe —
= 4 4 4 12 A LINE AND AN ELLIPSE
A line may meet the ellipse in one point or two distinct point $ Of
, ely 284! it may not meet ellipse at all
5/2 42 22
Consider the standard equation of ellipse
x. ¥ V3 +1 2 2
= —+-= (1)
5 4 2 Dg eal]
a Pb
CULIpoe
“anda line having equation tangent y=mx + am +b? , point of contact is

pemre (2) For
Solving line and ellipse, we get -a’m b?

px? + a*(mx +c)? = ab?
P
, 2
(3) farm +h" Ja?m? +h°
or (an +b?) x° + 2a’cmx + (a°c? - ab’) = 0
piscriminant of this equation 1s yemx-ya'm? +b", point of contact is
D= 4abe?m® — 4(a’c? - a b*)\(a°m’* + b°)
For tangent
= 4a°b?(a°m’ + b? - c’) am
_p?
Now, this equation has D=0 p>o am a ee ,
Q Ja +b° am +b
either two distinct real roots D<0 7 —
or two
non-real roots.
equal roots or has ;
’ iUstRaTiGn 6.52 2
the ellip se = acs =1 such that the
If line meets the ellipse | ) Find the points on
7 } with the axes.
in two distinct points (4 and tangents at each of them make equal angles
), then equation (3) has two B
axes, their slope
distinct real roots.
a ‘SOL: Since tangents make equal angles with the
D>Oore<a’m
+b 1e,m should be +1
‘m’ are given by
If ine meets the ellipse in one point P (i ¢., it is tangent to the Points of contact of tangent having slope
ellipse), then equation (3) has two equal roots.
sb’
D=0orc?=a'm’
+b? +a’m
> 2 >?
Ifline doesn’t meet the ellipse, then equation (3) has imaginary farm? +b* a’m + b?
a
roots.
For m = 1, points of contact are : >
z 4 > > >
D<0orc>an’+h 4 Va’ +b" a+b |
- Pe
EQUATION OF TANGENT TO ELLIPSE HAVING GIVEN :|
SLOPE Va? +b? a? + b?

a> >
We have already learned that if line v = mx + c touches the ellipse For m =—1, points of contact are + PI
, > >
x Ja +b Jao+b ,
+
y > >
: =|, then c? =a’m’? +b
>
gf _p?
b
a
Ja ibe a +b?
In that case, equation of line ts
yemt Jam +b* ,meR

l tangent s to
(4)
ellipse
wstekneN
Sas
The equation (4) represents two paralle
x 2 ;2
An ellipse passes through the point (4, —1) and touches the
= re re 1 having slope 7. line x + 4y — 10 = 0. Find its equation ifits axes coincide with
coordinate axes.
vt y
Sol. | Let the equation of the ellipse be
; pan P
ey of
P, a |
a b Ai
ao} Since it passes through the point (4, -1), we have
4 —
oT
| os —= i
7 @ g - a’ + 166? = a°b" (2)

Equation of given tangent 1s
{ x+4y—10=0
From equation (3), if D = 0, then we have l 5

or yer-oxt—
4 2
-a’cm -acem =_ -a'm
x==—, =
c
2 ¢ Comparmng with y = mv +c, We have a= —s c= a
am +b 9 ’ a] 4 4 ny
a ? 2
Now, co =arm + b- ~
-am +c? _ be
y=m
-a’m
+c = =—
c
25 a
c c => 7 = +h
2 2
: go + fF ood, fit
Thus, the line y = mx + ¢ touch es the ellips e — => a°+16b=
100 (3)
a
~a'm B From (2) and (3), we get
2 |.
¢ c ab" = 100 or ab = 10 (4)
-_— = ———
y y
eete Geometr:
Veh Coordina
6.16
09 ' _ a32 =x, and — =).
ad et
ora= 2V5.b= YS ‘ c becomes

a= AVS and b= > So, equation of tangent y = mx +
hex, . p
Hence. the equations of ellipses are xX —
y
y =
, , ,
vl
hy, |
Meo
»
7 vv
=! ay
Ly = 1 and —+— —"
so. S 205
Or beh T=9
; a2 hb 2
ILLUSTRATION 6.34
;
area of the ellipse ipse — +~ =1= which
\- + af or T= 0, where T= — ay + - Dh |
Find the maximum a } 2 g
touches the line y= 3a + 2. a :
o> + < =I at point
2 2 This ts equation of tangent to ellipse
(x), y)) on it. 2
Sol. Area of the ellipse Ss + _ = 11s fab.
The slope of the tangent can also be obtained using
Ge
+ 2 touches the ellipse.
Line v = 3. differentiation.
Differentiating equation of ellipse w.rt x, we get
= sty
Heres n= andc*. = a7
4 or
+ 6°, we have
Using relation, a
4290 +h 2x,
2 2
YD 9
Now. (Ga-6F 20 a p
21h > di bx
Se Sr ziGan te DN en — = Slope of tangent to ellipse at any point on 1
= dx ay
=> 6ab<s 4
2
2 = (2) __?) 4
= nabs dx (ua) ayy
3 on
So. maximum area of the ellipse 1s —— sq. units So, equation of tangent at point (x;. ¥)) on the ellipse
3
x
2 2
1s
ILLUSTRATION 6.35 —
i a 2 =l
Find the locus of the foot of the perpendicular drawn from the ii
2 2 _, - Oy
=1. YO N= a vy; Q-%)
centre upon any tangent to the ellipse il + s
mm
Simplifying, we get the as
equation zt i =0
Sol. Let the foot of perpendicular from O(0, 0) on the tangent pusans e ot Pig bo
be Pth. k) If (x,,.)) = (a cos 6, b sin 6), then equation of tangent becomes
k x(a cos 6) ‘ ¥(b sin @) 10
Thus. the slope of OP 1s —
2 3 7h
Therefore the slope of tangent is — 3 o b
So. equauon of tangent 1s or + cos 8+ ~ sin @-1=0
h a b>
Som k= ia
. ILLUSTRATION 3.36
; , ,
ho Wh tk
oF jet If the line 3x + 4y = V7 touches the ellipse 37 + 4y* = 1. then
find the point of contact.
Lsing c* - dm” - b’ we have
fees, pe ; ( hy ” Sol. Fquation of given tangent ts
J
=a -— +
,
ra
w RET Ww
a)
or a+b ty Let this line touch the given ellipse at point PU), Vy)
This 1s the required locus ‘Thus, equation of tangent to ellipse at point P ts
Bay tev, | (2)

-
EQUATION Gt TANCENT TOFS Fae Gavin Iquation and (2) represent the same straight line.
(1) s
- a ee
POINT ON IT
1 money
We know that the line v = nrx + ¢ touches the ellipse is 4 He | : ea
_@ 2 a be? 1
7 7
Cc Cc
vv
Ellipse 6-17
— ————
It meets the major axis at 7(a sec 8, 0).

peust 2 2
. : y The coordinates of N are (a cos 6, 0)
tide 2 touches the ellipse - + in 1, then find its eccentric
lta ; of point of contact. The equation of the circle with N7 as its diameter 1s
angle (x ~ asec 6) (x-acos 6) + =0
Equation of tangent to ellipse at P(a cos 6, b sin 6) 1s or x’ + y* -ax (sec 9+ cos 0) +a =0
= ysin@ — 1 It cuts the auxiliary circle x? + y — q@ = 0 orthogonally as
cos 8 ,
a 3 —asec@-acos@
Ly i = | 1s the tangent Therefore. Joos 2(0)(0) = a°- a= 0.
A180. 5 2
ILLUSTRATION 6.40
cos@ , sin@ _
ya 12 Prove that in an ellipse, the perpendicular from a focus upon
! sin 8 mek.
cos 8 = rs. = 5) any tangent and the line joining the center of the ellipse to the
of point of contact meet at the corresponding directrix.
at Sol.
x=a/e
LLUSTRATION 3.38
3 Ma
Tangent 1S drawn to ellipse Vo
7+y = ] at
(v3 cos 6,sm 6), 6 € (o *) . Then find the value of @ P

: |
such that sum of intercepts on axes made by this tangent is eae! lates
I O Six
mmmum
Sol. The equation of tangent at a given point on the ellipse is

x 3V3cos @ , vesin 6
] “yt
27 ]
Let the ellipse, be
x v
or + =
l x emi
3V3 sec@ cosec 0 a b
Sum of the intercepts on axes 1s given by and O be the center
The tangent at P(x,, y;) 1s
rt XX, YY - 1=0
S =3V3 sec @ + cosec 0:0¢(0, *) —+— =
a ——
To find the minimum value of S, we differentiate S wrt. @ whose slope 1s — b*x,/a*y,
The focus of the ellipse 1s S(ae , 0)
© = 33sec 6 tan 6 — cose 6 cot é@
The equation of the line through S(ae, 0) perpendicular to the
l tangent at P 1s
tf <0. then tan? @ = or tan @=—= 2
d@ 33 V3 ayy
Som iy (x — ae) (1)
Therefore, g=~ , for which value of S 1s minimum as l
The equation of OP 1s
hm (33 sec @ + cosec 0) 9 © Jy
430, yr ay x
4 (2)
Solving (1) and (2), we get

ILLUSTRATION 6.39 yi ay, ( '
xX, X= (x -ae
The tangent at a point P on an ellipse intersects the major axis | bx,
at T and N is the foot of the perpendicular from P to the same
or x(a’ - b°) = ae
axis. Show that the circle drawn on NT as diameter intersects
the auxihary circle orthogonally. or xae’=are
a
or eS =
Sol. Let the equation of the ellipse be e
ry This 1s the corresponding directrix
zy+-,=1
a b-
ILLUSTRATION 6.41
Let Pla cos@ , b sin@) be a point on the ellipse.
The equation of the tangent at P is Find the point on the ellipse 16x” + lly" = 256
where the
x cos ol sin@ _ comunon tangent to it and the circle x° + y? — 2x
5 1 = 15 touch.
EQUATION OF TANGENT TO ELLIPSr FROM
“Sol The given ellipse ts
EXTERNAL POINT ; ,
vr ee ‘ 1g v
— + —_—_ =| + ra =],
Consider the ellipse having equation 3
16 (256/11
Tangent to it at pomt P(4 cosé. (16/V11)sin@) is Let the tangents be drawn to the ellipse from point Pix, y,)
5 \ lying outside the ellipse
sn@ = 1
—cos @ +——== To get the slope of the tangents, we consider one of the
4 (eit )
Ite 16. Therefore, equations of tangents to ellipse having slope m.
It also touches the cirele (\
os : y=- mr + ja 2 m” ne +b 2 passes
Thus, tangent having cquation
: cos @- )
through PQ), 1), then
a
‘eos"@
pet pion +
LI sin*@ 3
vy) =x, + am +b 2
\ 16 256 2 2
or (yy — xy y =a'm +h
|cos 0 - 4| ' Solving this quadratic equation, we get two values of slopes of
*F T
\ 1ecos*@ +11 sin7@
' . a ~
tangents which pass through point P
or cos"@
— 8 cos 8+ 16 = 11 + 5 cos"? VERGSTRATION 6.43
or 4 cos"@ + 8 cosd - 5 =0
Find the equations of the tangents drawn from the point (2, 3)
or (2 cos 0-1) (2 cos@+5)=0 to the ellipse 9x? + 16y7 = 144.
a
or cosd=+ oro =+ 4 «7 «7
Sol. Given ellipse is oi + = =]

Therefore. points are (2.48V3/V/11 )
+9.
Let the equation of tangent be y = mr + Jl6m?
It passes through the point (2, 3)
5
Consider an ellipse “7 +)" =a (a is parameter > 0) and a 3=2m+ Vl6m" +9

parabola 1” = &x. If a common tangent to the ellipse and the => (3—2m) = 16m? +9
parabola meets the coordinate axes at A and B, respectively,
=> 12m? + 12m =0
then find the locus of the midpoint of AB.
=> m=0,-1
GSGBD The equation of tangent to 3” = &x at (27, 40) 1s Therefore, equations of tangents are
\1-x-2F =0 (1) y-3=-l(v-2)andy-3=0
The equation of tangent to the ellipse
5 or y=-x+Sandy=3
x y
—+-—— =]
4a a
EQUATION OF PAIR OF TANGENTS FROM EXTERNAL
at (2Va. cos @, Jasin @)
POINT
—_——
xcos@-ysin@
sr
|
=] 2
1S
2a Ja 4
Pagag)
Companng (1) and (2), we get
Ja =-f,
Ja = 2 (3)
cos@ sin@
If the tangent meets the coordinate axes at A and B, then
12(2 0) B= lo |
cos@ sing
Equation of pan of tangents trom external point P(x, ¥)) to the
Let the midpoint of AB be (4, k). Then,
h=
Ja ,. va ,k=
ellipse having equation
. vol
——
\
+ pi -1=01s
7
cos@ 2sin8
h=-P,k=torke=—h
or yo-x [From (3)] or 7 - SS,
waa
Ellipse 6.19
Since tangents are perpendicular,

|LLUSTRATION 6.44.
rind the angle between the pair of tangents from the poi
“ k? =p? =-|
(1, 2) to the ellipse 3x? + 2y’ = 5. => —
he -a’
drawn from
d y 27
qua
+ tio n=S
ofis
th e pair of tangents or Wt+kh= wtb’,
ellihips
eson ie
ire 3"
(1.a2) toThthe
So, locus of poimt is P isx2 +7 = ctr
(vt av $9 = Bx? + 27-5) 348-5)[Using 7 = SS,]
ILLUSTRATION 6.45
gy — 24x - 4 +... = 0 minor axes slides

of An ellipse having fixed length of major and
Identify the locus of
[rangle between pair of lines 1s 6, then between two perpendicular straight lines.
centre of the ellipse.
: 2yhr -ab
O= . where a = 9, =-12,b= 4 endicular lines
tan iSO) Ellipse slides between two perp
ents and their point of
IZ So, these lines are perpendicular tang
tan @= = intersection P lies on the director circle
Js the points of intersection
If centre of the ellipse 1s fixed, then all equal to
of perpendicular tangents le at fixed distance which Is
e= tan” de
= Vs radius of the director circle.
So, 1f point of intersection of perpendicular t angents 15 fixed
ellipse also lies at fixed distance
(point P), then centre of variable
DIRECTOR CIRCLE from point P
locus of point of intersection of perpendicular Therefore, locus of centre of the ellipse 1s a circle
In parabola.
t of intersection
tangents 1s directnx But in ellipse. locus of poin
ed director circle.
of perpendicular tangents 1s circle which 1s | call a
the | ine 3x + 4y - 25 =0,
+ ae -1=0. If there exists exactly one point on
Consider the ellipse having equation x cap be drawn to ellipse
a ob from which perpendicular tangents
at point P(h, k). 2 a .
sect
Let perpendicular tangents to ellipse inter x
at y =1 (a> 1), then find the ecce ntri city of the ellipse.
ugh point P ts
So. the equation of pair of tangents thro a
ection of perpendicular tangents
‘Soli’. Locus of point of inters
is director circle
on the hne 3x — 41 ~ 25 = 0.
\ a7
in above eq uation sum of If there exists exactly one such point

Since tangentsa) are perpendicular, circle W hose equation 1s ¥ ~ 13>
> then line must touch the director
coefficients of x and }* 1s zero. =a +l.
from the line ts 5
Distance of centre of the circle
So, we must have
’
=a +1
. a= V24
BF a=24
ab a “ ab
I [23
= R-Raa+h le. Eccentricity = Jl- = = 57
(V4
= ¢ +b’, which 1s circ 24
Thus. locus of point is P is x +
of ellipse.
This 1s called director circle
Alternative method: 2 2
xy -1=0
CHORD OF CONTACT
to ellips e — + = ¥)) to the ellipse touch
One of the equations of tangents a Let the tangents dra wn trom point P(a,,
having slope ‘m’ 15 ve
the ellipse at points Q(\, .V)
. Eset
y=mx+ Jam +b and RQ, 9) Then. the tine OR (i, PIC
ae: ee i
1s called chord of contact ic
k) then
If 1t passes through the point Ph,
XN
ellipse having \
Consider
k=mh+ Jam? +b?
?
ur V M
— + — = l
(em? +b) = (k-mhy-
equation
or > bh
+ - b=
(2 — a2)? - 2hkm
or are slopes of
equ ati on has two roots 77 and m, which
This
two tangents to ellipse drawn from point P
6.20 Coordinate Geometry a pe ye
Equation of chord of contact w.r t point P 1s ILLUSTRATION 6.50

Find the locus of the point which is such that the chord of
wy
a =0 or 7=0 2
«
tt to the ellipse =F + a =|
contact of tange nts drawn from
a
it
This equation can be derived the same way as we derived with the coordinate axes,
for circle and parabola. forms a triangle of c onstant area
The chord of contact of tangents from P(A, k) r

Sol.
ILLUSTRATION 6.47
hx ky
If from a point P, tangents PQ and PR are drawn to the ellipse — +
2 2
5
a b
+ 1° = 1 so that equation of chord of contact OR 1s
x + 3y o| and afo, -|
S It meets the axes at the points {£.Fr
=i then find the coordinates of P Area of the trangle, OAB 1s
2 p2
Sol. Let coordinates ofP be (¥)..)) 1@ Fe (constant)
Then equation of QR 1s 2 hAiok
2p2
ya
bt+iyel
> A
(1) =n hk= (constant)
~
But given equation of OR ts ah?

y+3r=] (2) ee aa 2c
Equation (1) and (2) must be identical This 1s the required equation of locus.
ILLUSTRATION 6.51
> x, =2and1,=3 Prove that the chords oF contact of perpendicular tangents
P=(2,3) to the ellipse Fes = | touch another fixed ellipse

a
ILLUSTRATION 6.48 ye l
Re | Ry
Y
(a? £57)
+
Prove that chord of contact of ellipse— + we =] w.r.t. any

point on the directrix 1s focal chord a
Sol. We know that the locus of the point of intersection of
Sol. Vanable point on the directrix can be taken as P(a/e, 4), perpendicular tangents to the given ellipse 1s cts =a-b
keR. Any point on this circle can be taken as
Equation of chord of contact of the ellipse w.r t. this point 1s
P= (va? +b° cos@,Va> +67 sin 6)
( ale)x | ky
=1
a’ “EP
The equation of the chord of contact of tangents from P 1s
Clearly. focus S(ae, 0) satisfies the above line ame
a+b? * Va"a+b" sm @=1.
Hence, proved
Let this line be a tangent to the fixed ellipse
ILLUSTRATION 6.49
a
Tangents are drawn from the points on the Jine x — y— 5 = 0 to tas |
x? + 4° = 4. Prove that all the chords of contact pass through 2B
a fixed point Y ay
a cos 6 + RB sme=1
Sol. Variable point on the line x — y — 5 = 0 can be taken as
(1,1-5),1ER where 4 = s =,B= B
Chord of contact of the ellipse x7 + 4) =4w.rt this point is Va +b? Vath
2 %
ix+4(t-S)y 4=0
Hence, the ellipse is —+ wera
at ob" (a? +87)
’ a
or (-20y
— 4) + Hx + 4y)-0
This 18 the equation of family of straight lines. ILLUSTRATION. 6.52
Each member of this family passes through the point of intersection
Tangents are drawn from the point (3, 2) to the ellipse
of straight lines —-20y — 4 = 0 and x + 4y = 0 whichis (<. a 5] x? +4y? = 9, Find the equation to their chord of contact and the
5 5) middle point of this chord of contact
. Elhpse 6-21
> > 3
> a
—F* sin’ 8
5)
2a = G2)
2 he +a? sin’ (aera ]
f a’ | ———_——_
of
‘ equation of the chord
lh
ah
- mR
gen ts
-pntact of the pair of tan th.k) bcos A +a° sin’ 8
2
Pig, a) 1S er | ——_aO—
<9 ay 0 a’
fem a wh?
as the
ys must be the same cos’ 8 sin’
re
4 ;
spor whose middle point is
a
by
ea of point of intersection of line given
Therefore, locus
i= S,
(1) and (2) 1s 2+ =a. whichis the auxiliary
equations
hn , Pe circle
9 94 from
9 O94 (2) ( M, and M, 1n the figure)
+ 4k Thus, feet of perpendiculars
jv- 4h = he ont he auxiliary circle
of
the same straight lines. foci upon any tangent le
Fquations ( 1) and (2) represent perpendiculars from foci
upon
the coefficients of (1) and (2). we get Product of the lengths of the mmo r
equal to the square of
= RB
any tangent of ellipse 1s
companng
h tk ak
axis.
«the 3k and 3h= WP + 4K of tangents to the ellipse
: > >
7
Proof: One of the equations
3 - 8
x sh= ir -d>r uw .
ex
pha iat having slope “7 1s
~ Be =3n a
vemxt+ Jam +h
a h=5= and k= 8
_ +6° =0
or ee
m foci upon this tan gent is
PROPERTIES OF TANGENT Product of perpendiculars fro
Let
properties of tangent to ellipse m — 5
There are many interesung of elli pse 1.¢.. mae + jarm +6" —— -mae+y a-
using standard equation
ys study these properties ——
——$—_"
"_
yi-+ m gt — im
2s -=l.a>b Phe SE + 7 7 3
stb +b) - mae”
foci upon any tangent lies on
(a-m>
L Feet of perpendiculars from l+mr
the auxilary circle.
t to ellipse e + a =] at a’m + b - m=(a- a
Proof: The equation of tangen
] + m7
on itis given by
point Pla cos 6. b sin 6) .
5
ss] ,’
b-(l+m)
() = | ————_| = &* = square of minor ants
=x cos 9+ sin =! in }+ mo
a
point of contact and the
=@ Ill. Length of tangent between the
subtends nght angle 3!
point where it meets the directny
R 3S ~e
Y
QO:
~ ¥ Mf, the corresponding focus

2 te -¢ 1, we have to prove
‘ 7 2, Proof: In the figure given in property
90"
that ZPF,Q, = —PF2Q: -
oe &F, ‘
Fo bsn@
Slope of PF, mt, ~ COS OR uk’
d directrin t > 2s
Solving equation of Lingent aC Poan
get
0) and
of perpendicular lines from foci F (ae, aeeob | , cos @ ) )
Equations
ry
F.{-ae 0) to tangent are ; e sin 0 ‘
(2)
xsin@ 3} cos _, aesing bh cos do \
; sin OA m
a b
(}) and (2), we Bel Slope of O,f mt :
Squanng and adding equations v= a’
4 sin? vos G
sin’ @
‘
slcos?@ ee are
x Beb- b a Me — cos @)
a”
> any etl)
7
6.22 Coordinate Geometry lies on the line
VII. Image of onc of the foci in the tangent
.
bsin @ h(e — cos 8) joining other focus and point of contact.
Now, my =
a cos 8 - ae asin O(1- e’) (In the figure, image R of focus F’, in the tangent at Pony
P lies on PF’, )
VIII. If incident ray emanating from one of the foci gets reflecie4
{ b? 7
7 wile e) by the ellipse, then reflected ray passes through the othe,
focus
Thus, < PF,Q, = 90°
= 90° (In the figure, incident ray 1s PF [t strikes the surfac,
Similarly. we can prove that ZPF3Q)
of the ellipse at point ? and reflected ray passes through
through the
Iv. Tangents at the extremifies of latus rectum pass other focus /, This 18 because tangent Is angle bisecto,
axis.
corresponding foot of directrix on major (external) of angle 7, PF, )
rectum
Proof: Equations of tangents at endpoints of latus
ee ILLUSTRATION 6.53
ac. t— | are given by
the focr §,
If F, and F, are the feet of the perpendiculars from
as!
2 at
tangent
and S,, respectively, of an ellipse i + 7 =| on the
(ae)x : + (F}
a + SF, 2%
. 7
at any point P on the ellipse, then prove that S|F,
a” b
Sol. We know that the product of perpendiculars from ~s:
alr
or —t-—=]1 foci of an ellipse upon any tangent Is equal to the square f “he
semi—minor axis
a
Clearly, these equations satisfy point & 0} Then (S,F,) (S,F2) = 16
Now, 4M.2GM.
Similarly. tangents at the other endpoints of latus rectum
Sif ae
422" 2 JSF, x $3F:
| — ae. + - pass through (- S. 0}
\ a e
=> SF, +S,F,28
Chord of contact w.r.t any point on the directrix passes
through the corresponding focus.
ILLUSTRATION 6.54
Proof: Let Pia/e. \,) be a point on the directrix x = a/e.
Equation of chord of contact of ellipse wrt P is An ellipse has the points (1, -!) and (2. -1) as its foci and
x +y-—5=0as one of its tangents Find the pout where this
line touches the ellipse
Sol,
or —+4cot=
ae bh
Clearly, this line satisfies focus (ae, 0)

VI. Tangent at point P on the ellipse bisects the external angle
between two focal radi of point P res -S=0
Proof: In the figure,
Slope RPE oOof PF Fi a

"Ta cos 6 - ae
bnne
si PF bsin@ Image of focus S(2, 1) an the tangent at # lies oa the line YP
ope of PF ,,m,— ~~
pe re os 8 + ue Let image S” s (A, A)
bcos @ h-2 kel 42 Los

Slope of tangent at point 2, a ~ oa en ,
asned
> NO (6, 4)
m, - m Ww, m b
bquation of hne SS” 1
}+ mm 14 mm aveind
44 MY
So, tangent makes same angle with 7’, and 17, Solving tangent and SS”, we vet Ps au)
Thercfore, tangent bisects the angle between PF, and 27 , 9° 9
- _
Tie Re, | 3
_ Ellipse 6.23
If the line
; x cos @ + y sin g ~ P 13. From - Point 4(4, 3), tangents are drawn
iS a tangent to the 5 to the ellipse |
x+ ellipse ex)
7 = 1. then prove that g? cos? g 16 * 9 = | to touch the ellipse
a
+ 72 at B and C. EF isa tangent
|
sin? a= p’. to the ellipse parallel to line
BC and towards point A. Then
find the distance of 4 from EF.
14, Tangents TQ and TR
intersects the major and Minor are drawn at the extremities
axes at Points 4 of a
and B, 2 2
respectively If Cis the center chord OR of the ellipse 2 + a
of the ellipse, then find area =1 Ifthe midpoint of
of triangle ABC. 6
the chord is P(1, 1), then
findt he point of intersection of
. Find tthe slope of a common tangents
tangent to
x? ¥ the ellipse
if =landa concen 15. Let $(3, 4) and S'(9, 12)
be two foc: of an ellipse.
=
a tric circle of ra If
dius r. foot of the Perpendicular from
focus § to a tangent of
. If any tangent to the ellipse Vy the ellipse 1s (1, ~4), then find
Fy + he = | intercept the eccentricity of the
s equal ellipse.
lengths / on the axes,
then find /.
If two points are taken on | 7 ANSWERS
the minor axis of an
2B y Zz ell ips e
X
Pha = | at the same primp
distance from the center as 2. 24 sq. units 3. Por 4. Jai +h?
the foci, then prove that the
s um of the squares of 8. (1/V2,1)
perpendicular distances fro
m t hese points on any tan
the 9. 1/3 10. 26 sq units
to the ellips e is 2g”, gen t I. 3/2 12. -a"/b4 13, (24-8 5
. If the tangent at any poi 14. =)
nt of the ellipse *ey 15. 5/13
makes an angle @ with the
Major axis and an angle 8
ago! 25° 25
the focal radius of the point with
of contact, then show that
eccentnicity of the ellipse 1s the
given by e = cos B/cos a.
NORMAL TO ELLIPSE
. From any poin; t on any directnx xy > 2
of the ellipse x, + Rp
7 l, Go Merry es eS
a Ee
a> b, a pair of tangents is drawn
to the auxihary circle may aN Tape
Show that the chord of contact will pass
through the >
corresponding focus of the ellipse Equation of tangent to ellipse We

—
mE + E 2 =1 at point Pi v0) on
. If the tangent to the ellipse x7 + racy: IY ,
2)? = 1 at point it 1s 14 M jug
P(1/V2, 1/2) meets the auxiliary circl
e at points R and
Q, then find the points of intersection of b-x,
Slope of tangent 1s - Pr
tangents to the 5
circle at O and R. Ls pia
Therefore, slope of normal to
. Ifthe line 2px +y ,/5 -6p* 5 {5
=l,pe Br (3 amar ellipse at poin‘ t P1s =!
ary,
| @)
.
touches the standard ellipse. Then find the eccent 1
ricity of
the ellipse. Hence, equation of normal at
point P is
‘10. If a quadrilateral formed by four tangents to the ellipse
2 2
2 ay
| y- MeSH)
Suds « 1 1s a square, then find the area of the square. | bx,
9 4
“UL. A variable tangent to the circle x2 + y’ = J intersects the a r b*}:
2
>
2 or — Sta-b
a ,
ellipse ~. 4 2 = at points P and Q The locus of the x) M l

4 2 If (x),.,) = (a cos 6 bsin @)
ae
point of intersection of tangents to the ellipse at P and (om then equation of normal is
's another ellipse. Then find its eccentricity aX
cos®
~— by ay? ) pf? ¥
- If the chords of contact of tangents from two points sin@

2)
Clearly, major axis and minor
(x),¥)) and (x2, yz) to the ellipse ° 2 + re = | are at right
| ! axis are (wo normals to elli
pse
Normal other than major axis
, never Passes through
angles, then find the value of X\Xp/V 1) Which can be verified by put focus,
ting x and y values of the
€quation (2) of nor foci in the
mal .
TiN
6.24 Coordinate Geometry ss — - ~ ~ ee
EQUATION OF NORMAL TO ELLIPSE WITH GIVEN 7 3 9

<i GG ; . cre, m= Fae BF
The equation of normal to the ellipse oe +2 =1 at pomt Now, condition for line y = mv + c to be normal to ellipse is
P(acos 6 b sin @) 1s ae (a? —h*)\m
C= + — =
} a
Va? htpee
‘ P h ‘ gens @ ws > _
a sec @— Av cosce a »
or r=($ tan @| us Ce sin @ 3

b b 9 3
a
_
=> 7 4.= 4A
Let —tan @=™m RA 1+4 9 s
b ee hm 16A°
=> sn@=2-->—"7T > 5
vat + bom => 442 49=1617
of the normal becomes 3
Hence, the saan => 4A° =3
yer =
t — . where me Roast
RK. as — tan@eR
tanGe 33
Jae + bn b => A= +>
4
ILLUSTRATION 6.55 ; ; Thus, normals are 2x + ag =-3
xy
Find the normal to the ellipse — ++ =1 at point (3, 2)
Equation of normal to ellipse x + a =| at point P(x,,¥)) If w 1s one of the angles between the normals to the ellipse
Sol. a se 2 <9
2 2, Ste ] at the points whose eccentnc angles are 6 and
is ay by eee ier
“ ss a a
yy; a
An 3 2cot
: =) at point P(3, 2) 1s Cod @, then prove that = =
So, equation of normal to ellipse *
‘gy Ry 18
4
8 2 sm20. 0 Vl-e°
ED a OOS a Gia oe
=<
l atthe
7
aE
x7
Sol.
a]
ag 3a -2y=5
3 -
. 3
points whose eccentric angles are and > — 6 are, respectively.
ILLUSTRATION 6.56
5
ax sec 0 — by cosec 9 = av — >
Find the points on the ellipse 7 of 5 = ], on which the normals
and —ax cosec @ — bi sec 9 = a" — b>
are parallel to the line 2x - y= I.
Since w ts the angle between these two normals. we have
Sol. The normal at P(2 cos 9, 3 sin @) 1s
2x 3y s “ ot 8 |
cos@ sm@O. ~ tan @ =
a i
=
Now. this normal 1s parallel to 2x — y = 1. Then,
2/cos@_ _ >
3/sin 8 _ | ab(tan
@ + cord)
cot@)
or tan 4 = T ~
x b- my
and sin6 = + >=10 - ab

or cos 6 = = He>
Hence the points are (2/¥10, 9/V10), (-2/V10, -9/V10). (sin 20)(b° — a")
ILLUSTRATION 6.57 - ab — alee

isa (a? —b7)sin2@ 0 are" sin 20
Find the values of A for which the Jing 2x - say = -3
2
bd . 2 colo e
normal to the ellipse ee a
sin 26@ Ji- o
Sol. Given normal to ellipse 1s
ILLUSTRATION 6.59
8
2x- 3 Ay =-3 u 3
If the normal at any point P on the ellipse XS + <5 = 1 meets
a bh
3 9
or y= (2). + (= the axes at G and g, respectively, then find the rato PG « Pg.
N
-lupse_ 6.25
Let Pla cos 6, b sin #) be a pomt on the cllipse 2 ?
a: Equation of normal to cllipse oy © - at P(4cos 0,3 510 8) 1s
Apaag=| 4\ yy
16 9
a
the equation of the normal at P ts cos@ sind
yet >
The ayes a-—bveoseceA@=ay pt
Normal passes through RA, k)
yt pools the aves at a

x >
(ae cos 0, 0) and eo, cos 0 sin @
a h i sin 0)
=> ACR WOR 7
Pe es (a cos @ el cos e) +h sin @ => CR=4
5
h
~ 3 (b° cos” 04 a” sin’ 0)
> > > b) ILLUSTRATION 6.62
ne Te Y
ae eS 23 a zt
roy
i Re= ate cas” 8+ a suv @) intersects the mayor and
Normal to the ellipse — + rr =|
minor axes at ? and Q, respectively Find the locus of the

Pau Pe=h al
,LUSTRATION 6.60 point dividing segment PQ in the ratio 2 |
rnd the maximum distance of normal to ellipse Sol. The cquation of normal 1s &x sec 4 - 7y cosec 4=15
It meets the axes at
J a =1(a>b) from the centre
(= c0s6.0] and ofo.= sin@
7 >
a 1
$a Normal to ellipse me + a = 1 at point P(a cos @, sin 6) is Let M(h, k) divides PQ in ratio 2 | Therefore:
bh > e 3h= cos 3k= one

a ‘ ° i]
cos@ sin@ 8h -7k ul
“9
cos _ fa] = —,sIn 6 =
js distance from ongin 1s 5 Sl 10
a =)" | Eliminating @, we get the locus as

d= |>
64x79"
joa 7 a
Via™ sec” @+h-casec” @
lab 25-100
——
' 9 > > a 4 4
ya’ +b +a7 tan” @+hb cot @
lane | IV@IPCRIANT PROPERT’ OF NORMAL

In the properties of ve
- hot@6)"
Ja" +b? +2ab +(atan tangents, we learned
4 4 that tangent bisects
ja"
- Db" |
one of the angles “as
ra,
i am
ya" +b> +2ab between two focal
d,., =a-b lengths of point of ee v* ot
contact P Since N( ue oo | \ Mae OD)
ILLUSTRATION 6.61 .
two angle — bisectors
x vo
Point P is on the ellipse ad tg and Q 1s the of pair of lines are
If perpendicular, normal
ellipse
cormesponding point on the auxihary circle of the at P wall be another
(drawn at point
the line joining centre Cw Q meets the normal bisector of angle between these foe lengths
value of CR.
Pon the given ellypse) at &, then find the Tits can also be proved using angle bisector theorem
Sol. Y o Rth, ky
Por point PO4,,.4,) on the ellipse,
SP ey
YP ate, ’ ,
\ ay hry : ‘1
I quation of normal at pome dts aor
+7 \
i
[Uaicvets major axis at point \
bor pomt, puting sO in the equation of normal, we get
dla hb"
ae
;
6.3 2626 Coordinate Geometry |
=> SN=ae-x,e? =e (a- exh e .SP ah

-—— bk =a -#
and S’N= ae+x,e?= e(a+ ex,)=e SP cos @ sin@
= ai h 5 _ bk =¢—p
(= jan? = 2 tan —
Therefore, from angle bisector theorem m triangle SPS’, it is 2 _ 2
proved that PN bisects ZSPS
1+ tan? e 1 + tan?
Also, this proves that incident ray from focus S after reflection 2
by ellipse at point P passes through another focus S”.
- ( 1+ Ne ¢)ah _f (1+1°) ) bk =o — hb’, where = tan 2
(1-77) 20
ILLUSTRATION 6.63 2
33 2 2 = W1+P)ah— A) bk =20(1(1-+P) (a 4’)
The normal at point v3 on the ellipse le
fa le = bk +[2ah—-2(a -b*)| f+ [2ah - 2 (a ~b*)| 1 bk =9
“2 16 9
meets the major axis of the ellipse at Q. If S and S’ are foc: of This equation ian 2 . tant and
has four roots, tan ®
2
given ellipse. then find the ratio SO: SQ. tan cd , where a, f, yand dare eccentric angles of feet of normals
2
2
on the ellipse.
Sol. Equation of ellipse 1s a + 7 =.
a
Now, %, = dL tan
|S
Hence, foci are S(/7. 0) and sii, 0).

VA a B.¥ re)
5g > tan tan tan tan =-]
Now, ow, tn( 2

tan|
a
—
+ Xx
But | ~S,+5,=0
a £B an é ia
=> a ea ae 2) Qa) = weZz
< <
=> atPpt+yt+b=(2n+ lDaneZ

Normal at P bisects the angle ZSPS
(Bes haApes olan
\ epeeen tes _ = S
Therefore, in triangle SPS’ using angle bisector theorem, we get
1. The line /\ + mv +n=O01s anormal tothe ellipse “5 — t

SQ SP a-ex
ore 4 _8-v7 by
SQ S
"P
a+ex s+ x2 en
8+J/7 b _(@
Then prove thatr;& +5,
. 2
2. Find the equation of the normal to the ellipse a -==1
a
(a > b) at the positive end of the latus rectum.
go eG ‘tl 3. Find the area of the rectangle tormed by the perpendiculars
From any point in the plane, maximum four normals can be a .
ae
drawn to an ellipse from centre of 7 +=—=1, tothe tangent and normal at
Four feet of normals on the ellipse are called conormal the point whose eccentric angle ty — .
points. Jf eccentric angles of four conormal points on the ellipse
2 2 4. Ifthe straight line dan + 34y - 241s anormal to the ellipse
ax J
tar! are a, ff, yand6, thena
+ f+ y+ 6 = (2n+ 1) o,
’
Ve ie : APS ;
a —+ re = 1 (a> 4), then find the coordinates of foct of
a -
neZ.
the ellipse
Proof: Equation of normal at ? (a cos @, / sin @) on the ellipse > >
1s 5. If normal at any point P on the ellipse Fog he I

2 2
1 + b> 0) meets the mayor and minor axes at Q and R, |
ax by >
-— =-a-b
cos@ sin@ respectively, so that 3PQ = 2PR, then find the eccentricity
If it passes through point (A, k), then of ellipse
if the normal at one Ellipse 6.27
end of the latus rectum
2 4 of the | Sol. Let the middle point of the chord
elipse 33 + Bo 1 passes be (1, 24).
through one end of the min It must lic inside the ellipse. Therefor
or e,
quis, then prove that eccentric
ity is constant. f+8P-1<0
he foc! of an ellipse are
S(3, 1) and S(11, 5) Wf the or ? © (0,-4+ VI7)
1 normal at P ts.x+2y~ 15 =, then find the coor, dinates (1)
of Also, the equation of the chord is
pornt P.
g, It the area of a Square r=,
circumscribing an ellips
" square units and maximu e is 10 or rx + 4ty= + 8P
m distance of a normal fro
centre of the m the Let this passes through (a, 0) Then,
ellipse is 1 unit, then find the
eccentricity of
ellipse. at =f + 8P
ANSWERS
or =f + (8-a)r=0
; we, f=Oorr=a-8
pacer-ca=0 3:
30
7 sq units
ie, a=P+8
4. (+V10,0)
So, ae (8,4+VI7)
« ae LA 21) :
& {2
3
2 3
4
EXAMPLE 6.3
Prove that if any tangent to the ellipse is cut by the tangen
ts
at the endpoints of the major axis at T and T’, then
the circle
whose diameter is 77” will pass through the foci of
the ellipse.
Solved Examples
[ i Sol. Let the ellipse be
xy+= >
EXAMPLE 6.1 « B 1, a 5
Let any tangent to the ellipse be

fimd the range of eccentnity . 2 2
of the ellipse “S Se y =I x cos +%5 sinO=1
(a> 6) such that the line segmen a (1)
t joining the foc: does not Tangents at the vertices are x = a and x =
subtend a night angle at any point on the a.
ellipse.
Solving with (1), we get the points T and
7, respectively. as
Sol Let any point P on the ellipse be P(a b(1 ~cos6)\ _,
cos 6, b sin 8) b(1 + cos 6)
~~ PS, = 1/2, then P hes on the circl (a, sin 8 ) r (-a, sin 8
e having SS, as its
le, T{a, b tan a T’(-a, b cot 8)
-berefore. the equation of the circle draw Circle on TT’ as diameter is
n on S,S, as diameter is
r-yed¢¢ (-ayex+a)+(y-bran$)(r~ 4 cor8) =o
=¢-p
or Pods P+ o—bltan$ + cor9], =o
Smce the point P should not le on the ellipse,
there should not be
“; point on the intersection of It will pass through the foci
(+ae, 0).
5 If ae? - @ + p? = 0, then
Po ymd— Band% +% Pa = b= a1 ~ @°)
ag- be b
y which 1s true
oT 2h 2a
P(a cos 6, b sin @) EXAMPLE 6.4
o Let d be the perpendicula
a” 2 r distance from the cen
ellipse to any tangent to ter of the
the ellipse. If F | and
* Fy are the nwo
1-é-4 4 ~~ —_—_——_
S
+
OO
p—————_»-——_
§
r+
foci of the ellipse, then sho
w that (PF, — PF, = 4a"
= e).
weed (-ae, 0) (ae, 0)
Sol. The equation of the
tangent at the Point Pla
3 - cos 8, b sin 6)
On the ellipse *,
~ ,
Or ec (0.55) ats = I] 1s
ab
*a cosiS a4 _ in
rin @=
on ]
EXAMPLE 6.2 (1)
The Perpendicular
Find the values of distance of (1) tr
om the center (0,
a fo t which three distinct chords drawn ellipse is given by 0) of the
(2, 0) to the ellipse x + 2 = | are bisected by the from
we = 4x, parabola d ~ _ | _— ab
eh| cos°@ v+h
e OE
cos?@ men
Vb" ri cos: 7 9+ &° sin°@
6.28 Coordinate Geometry == st—<C~té ee
b? cos a’ sin’
?@+ EXAMPLE 6.7 ts SR
4a'(
a - = 4a")2/, | _ S
1-%) a ae
The tangent at a point P(a cos ¢, 6 sin ) Of the ellipse
= 4(a" ~ b*) cos*@ = 4a°e? cos*@ (2) la + vib? = | meets its auxiliary circle at two points, the
Fing
The foci are Fy = (ae, 0) and F, = (~ae, 0). Therefore, chord joining which subtends a right angle at the center,
PF, = e(1 — e cos 8) the eccentricity of the ellipse .
and = PF, = a(1 + ecos 8) 1s
Sol. The cquation of the auxiliary circle
(PF, ~ PF.) = 4a*e* cos 0 (3) e+ysa’ (1) y
Hence. from (2) and (3), we have Therefore, the equation of tangent
(PF, ~ PF.) = 4ar| : at*) to ellipse ata point P(a cos @, bsing)
Pp)
1s 8
EXAMPLE 6.5
X
—)cospt
J
sing=1 (2) ¢
t
Let P be a point on an ellipse with eccentricity 1/2, such that which meets the auxiliary circle at
ZPS,Sy = a, £PS2S, = B, and ZS,PS,= y, where S, and S, are points A and B.
the foci of the ellipse Then prove that cot(a/2), cot(y/2), and Therefore, the equation of the pair
cot(8/2) are in AP. of lines OA and OB is obtained by
making (1) homogencous with the
Sol. We know that P
help of (2) Then,
a B_l-e an
mig a Ere a | Be) x +y¥ =q (3 cos p + A sin )
—1-d2)_) S But ZAOB = 90° Therefore,
~7+(7)° 3
Coefficient of x* + Coefficient of" =0
In tnangle 4BC, we know that
or ] - cos’ +1 - $5 sin’ = 0
tan $ tan 8 + tan $ tan + tan § tan 4 =1
or sm? g(1-2)+1=0
or cord + cot 8 + cot $ = cot 4 cot F cot §
For APS,S3. or (a? — 67) sin’ = 6?

ora’e” sin’ oa al = e’)
cot ¥ + cot 4 + cot Y=3cot or (1 + sin’) e=
or 2 cot $=cot ¥ weed or e ae ae
vi+ sin’
Therefore. cot a/2. cot y/2, cot 6/2 are in AP
EXAMPLE 6.9
Find the locus of point P such that the tangents drawn from
EXAMPLE 6.6
If a triangle 1s inscribed in an ellipse and two of its sides are axes at

= vy .
paralle] to the given straight lines, then prove that the third side a te re2 = | meet the coordinate
it to the given ellipse xs
touches the fixed ellipse concyclic points
SoL Let the eccentric angles of the vertices P, O, R of A POR Sol. Let P=(h,k) The combined equation of tangents from
be 4,. >. 3. respectively
Then the equations of PQ and PR are, respectively, (34% -1)(2+8-1)-(4+8-1) =o
a
x 4;+@2 ¥ Oi+ @2 6;-62
qos at sma C08 Any conic that can be drawn through the points of intersection of
x Got+6, VY 82+ O3 02-03 these tangents with the coordinate axes 1s
and 7 cos—y—+7 SIN —y— = COS ~~
eV 2k ah, vk ee
If PQ and PR are parallel to the given straight lines, then we have
+ —4 - = — — ia Ran 0
(s b& \( +e 1) (3+ \} me
4, + 4, = Constant = 2a (say) a{ - 4) 2(H. 1 -f) . 2hk oak
and 4, + @, = Constant = 2 oo U (Sp a? (4p ral tav(A a) o
fp) (1)
Hence, 6,- 4, = 2a 2vk hr _ kr - 0
Now, the equation of OR 15 Roa &

x Ox* As , y Ot Os
= cos
Or
47
O4
(2) It should represent a circle. Theretore,
Os “9 pen oa
2hh AeSee LW= l
sacl
x O2+ Oy» OH Oy Se,A
or Zcos x + SIN “4 LOS (a py (3) ahah oa
tthe p-e aa - Ph
a= awh
7 > 4 , 4
line (2), for different values of 0, 4 04, is
which shows that
tangent to the ellipse Hence, the locus ofP 1s
ae + <9ace = cos*2(a ~ B) 3
vay sab
nd 4. 9
X
a ob
-_————————Or’". —————
“Hlupse 6.29
4 4
gent to the ellipse x° 2 4 4)° = 4 meets the elhpse R= (4 cos| 6+ =), b sin( @+ 7)
(a,
aoe sjipse
gy’ = x"6,at* P2\"and~ 6 Q.areProve that the tangents at P and Oto It is given that P, QO, and R are on the same side of the x-axis as
at right angles, A, B, and C,
So, the required normals to the ellipse at P, Q and R are
“ol The given ellipses are \ ax sec @— by cosec O= a® - b (1)
? 2
be 2 ” Snr i
xeo=l (1) Ath, k) ax sec( +47) — by cosec( 0+ 37) = a? — (2)

qc 1 Pic ol |
: ~ 4 4r
hae
2 1 2 1 wot: FP - 4 ax see( 0+ =) - by cosec| 6+ ad (3)
ad = «6 +3 (2) wel are 2 ys
the equation of tangent to ta O | ex : ’
ne point 7(2 cos @, sin 6) is eyes
{ Pp
by
given
F xcos@ ysin@ By) 2a |
a ] : =1 (3) ecb oet 2 31.6 je
| 224 i
tet this tangent meets the ellipse \ 3 y)
at Pand Q. Let the tangents drawn to ellipse (2) at P and Q meet \ Rw ee
zach other at R(h, k).

Then PQ 1s the chord of contact of ellipse (2) with respect to the ee ee €
point R(h, k) and ts given by J
xh , Yk sec 0 cosec 8 |
rrr i (4)
2
Clearly, (3) and (4) represent the same line and, hence, should Now, A= see 04 2 | casee( 0+ 2 | l
be identical.
Therefore, comparing the ratio of coefficients, we get 4
see{ 0+) cosee(o+“t] l
(cos 9/2 _ sin @_ 1
hig = kB
ao h=3cos@.k=3sm 0 . 20 Py DIE
Multiplying 2,, 2, and R; by sin @cos 8, sin( @+ > Jeos| 6+ a )
oo +P =9
Therefore, the locus of (4, &) 1s 4 4X
and sin( 6 + 7 Jeos{ é+ = respectively, we get
r+y=9
which is the HITeClOE circle of the ellipse
F+oel sin @ cos @ sin 26
and we know that the director circle 1s the locus of the point of Higa sn( 0 + =) cos( 0 + =| sin{ 20+ =|
intersection of the tangents which are at right angle. 3 3 3
Thus, tangents at P and Q are perpendicular
sin(o - 2) cosa - = sin( 20 - =
‘EXAMPLE 6.10 where °

Let ABC be an equilateral triangle mscribed in the circle V+ y
k = 2sin @ cos @ sin( 8 + 24) cos{ 6 + 22) sin( @ + a)
=a Suppose perpendiculars from A, 8, and C to the major axis
cos 0+ 2)
of the ellipse x fe a 1, (a> b), meet the ellipse, respectively, Operating R; > R, + Ry
a
at P,Q, and R so that P, Q, and R he on the same side of the
major axis as A, B, and C, respectively. Prove that the normals sin @ cos 8 sin 20
‘0 the ellipse drawn at the points P. OQ. and R are concurrent. 2n . 4n
A=— 2sin8 cos 2cos@ ars 2 sin 20 - cos—
(Soi, Let A, B, and C be the points on the circle whose 3
“Oordinates are
an(o - 2) cos{ 6 - 22) sin( 20 - =}
A(a cos @, a sin 6) 3 3 3
ala cos( 0+), a sin( 0+ 3))

sin @ cos @ sin 20
qa cos{ 6 + 3} a sin( 0+ 3)) a —sin@ —cosé —sin 26
Hence, P=(acos 6, [Given]
b sin 8)
sin(@ = =) cos - 2) sin(20 alee
O= (a cos( 0+ =a b sin( @+ 2)]
Hence, A=0
6.30 Coordinate Geometry 7 _
Exercises |
Cea
and passes through
9. Acircle has the same center as an ellipse
the two curves
the foci F, and F, of the ellipse, such that
of
intersect at four points. Let P be any one of their point
5 \"
ellip se 1s 17 and the
+ ra | and & 1s an intersection If the major axis of the
1. P and Q are the foct of the ellipse area of tnangle PF,F; 1s 30, then the distance
between the
equilateral triangle,
end of the minor axis If PBQ 1s an foci 1s
then the eccentricity of the ellipse 1s (1) 13 (2) 10
(4) V3/2 (4) none of these

(1) V2 (2) 13 (3) 1/2 (3) Il 7
axis of length ; : x
S, and S, are the foci of an ellipse of mayor 10. There are exactly two points on the cllipse
a + 7 =|
that the
10 units, and P 1s any point on the ellipse such are equal
tricity of whose distances from its center are the same and
perimeter of triangle PSS 18 15. Then the eccen
ellipse ts
the ellipse ts to Via + 2h7)/2 - Then the eccentricity of the
(1) 0.5 (2) 025 (3) 028 (4) 0.75

(1) 1/2 (2) W/N2 (3) 13 (4) 1/3v2
a] y -
+ 2, k), where
If the eccentricity of the ellipse = eS =l1s The eccentricity of the locus of point (3h
a *
(h, k) hes on the circlex + = lis
1/N6, then the latus rectum of the cllipse ts (2) V2/3. 3) _-2N273 (4) 13
(1) 13
(1) S/N6 (2) 10/N6 . "
12. Let Sand 8” be two foct of the ellipse G+

z | Ifacircle
(3) 8/N6 (4) none of these
at real and
+ .
§
\ ,
5 7 Tal deseribed on SS" as diameter intersects the ellipse
1 meets the ellipse v
:
If the ellipse i 4)°= e satisfies
a
distinct points, then the eccentricity e of the ellips
four distinct points and a = bh? — Sh + 7, then fh dees not he (lye JiN2 (2) ¢ e (I/N2, 1)
mn (4) none of these
(3) c € (0, I/V2)
(1) [4.5] (2) U (3. *)
(-2)x. point
13. Point ? represents the complex number z = x + zy and
the
(3) (-%, 0) (4) [2.3] Qrepresents the complex number z + 1/z. If P moves on
A point moves so that its distance from the point (2, 0)
1s circle |z| = 2, then the eccentricity of locus of point Q is
I . 5 (2) 4/5
(1) 3/5
always z of its distance from the line \ - 18 = 0 If the
(3) 3/4 (4) 1/2
locus of the point 1s a conic, then length of its latus rectum
1s 14. The locus of the point which divides the double ordinates
2 a
16 32 8 15
Le =
Ws 2
Qs 3) =
G5 a 4): >= of the ellipse 5 + : = 1 inthe ratio | . 2 internally is
cy | 2 or |
. If(—4, 1). (6, 1) are the vertices ofan ellipse and one of the if x — = —
1 +—
am 7 =
cy 2 o. Oe FF 9
foci les on x - 2 = 2, then the eccentricity of ellipse is
9
3 4 2
=5
1 (3) =a-+ ee l (4) none of these
(1)ts 5 2)
(2) =5 (3) (4) 5
15. The equation of the line passing through the center
and bisecting the chord 7x + y — 1 = 0 of the ellipse
. Let P be a point on the ellipse x. + =" =1(a>b)in the ? e4
a
p= lis
first or second quadrants whose foci are S, and S,. Then the
x=2y (4) xt+y=0
least possible value of the circumradius of APS,S, will be (1) x=y (2) 2x=y (3)
dy: Se: 16. A parabola 1s drawn with focus at one of the foci of the
(1) ae (2) be ay = 5
b b ay
ellipse 5 + re = 1, where a > b, and directrix passing
. An equilateral triangle 1s inscribed im an ellipse whose
equation is x° + 4" = 4. If one vertex of the triangle 1s through the other focus and perpendicular to the mayor ax!s
(0, 1), then the length of each side is of the ellipse. If the latus rectum of the ellipse and that of
24/3 the parabola are same, then the eccentricity of the ellipse
h) = 2) 3 is
1
() 1-35 (2) 2V2 -2
483
(3)5 =3 ay
(4) coke
a (3) V2-1 (4) none of these
(1) cos '(3/4) (2) cos '(4/5)
- = (a > bh) (3) cos '(3/5) (4) none of these
aq a
If ZPSS’ = aand 2PS'S = fi, the

n 27. If POR ts an equilateral triangle mseribed in the auxiliary
whose foci are Saand S’ Bp \ 24
ue of tan 2 tan =
1s circle of the ellipse a 5 ! fu) l(a hy. and P’Q'R' 1s the
the val
triangle inscribed within the ellipse, then
| per
=
o
corresponding
1 +c
(2) ~
(1) Toe the centroid of triangle P’Q'R’ lics at
(1) center of ellipse
l-c¢
(4) 1 (2) focus of ellipse
mA l+e
between focus and center on Major aXxts
(3)
and directx, a series
With a given pomt and line as focuss of the extremities of (4) none of these
of ellipses are described The locu lars drawn
28. Let a, and c, be the lengths of the perpendicu
their MmMoT aXis 1S +
y
ae
(1) an ellipse (2) a parabola from the foci S and 5S’ of the cllipse se Fr 3 = | to the
ar h
(3) a hyperbola (4) none of these S'P=
tangent at any point ? on the ellipse Then. SP
The angle subtended by common tangents of two ellipses (3) Gisdy 4) yd, ya
= 4 at the organ 1s (1) did) (2) dd,
ve sy¥ + 25)" = 100 and 4(a + 1)? +1"
of the common tangents of the ellipse
(1) 273 (2) a/4 (3) 7/6 (4) 2/2 29. The slopes
The length of the mayor axis of the ellipse (5. — 10)" + a + 4s | and the circle r+ a — 3 are
were Gs 4+77 | (1) #1 (2) +v2

(SireAsy = =a
(3) +v3 (4) none of these
(1) 10 (2) 20/3 (3) 20/7 (4) 4 ts a tangent to the ellipse c
30. If the line = + ¢
. The foci of an ellipse are S(—1, -1) and S’(0, —2) If the then c cannot take the value
] ‘ey V2
eccentricity 1S >” then the equation of the directrix Gd) -Ji (3) 2 (4) 1
corresponding to the focus S 1s . If (V3 )bv + av = 2ab touches the ellipse S- mo 1. then
a
(WW) x-173=0 (2) 1.-1+7=0 the eccentric angle of the point of contact 1s
Yeo (4) ¥-1+4=0 (1) 2/6 (2) 2/4 (3) 23 (4) 72
(3)
7
“= If the curves a +1" =1and S +)" = 1 fora suitable value 32. Length of the perpendicular trom the cenire of the ellipse
27,7 + 9° = 243 on a tangent drawn to 1 which makes
.
of a cut on four concyclic spins the equation of the circle

passing through these four points 1s equal intercepts on the coordinate axes 1s
dy) c-=2 (2) y=] (1) 3/2 (2) 3V2

G) r+ye=4 (4) none of these (3) 3/V2 (4) 6
. If the maximum distance of any point on the ellipse 33. The pornt of intersection of the tangents at the point P on
x ~2\°- 2x = 1 from its center 1s r, then r 1s equal to
the ellipse ‘s + = 1 and tts corresponding point QC on
(Wy 34.3 (2) 2+ V2
the auxihary circle meet on the line
GB) 23-5 (4) V2- _
(Il) v=ale (2) 1=0
- If Sand S’ are the foci of the ellipse -5° = |,and Ps (3) -0 (4) none of these
any point on it, then the range of values see? is 34. The area of the quadrilateral formed by the tangents at the
(1) 9¢ f(0)216 (2) 9¢ f(0)225 endpoint of the latus rectum to the ellipse . roe sli
(3) 16< (0) < 25 (4) 1< flO)< 16 (1) 27/4 sq. units (2) 9 sq units
25. A man running around a race course notes that the sum of
(3) 27/2 sq untts (4) 27 sq units
the distances of two flagposts from him 1s always 10 mand
the distance between the flay posts 1s Km Shen the area of 35. If tangents are drawn to the ellipse rin 2 then the
locus of the midpomtot the intereept made by the tangents
the path he encloses in square meters 15
between the coordinate axes as
(1) 15% (2) 20x (3) 2% (4) 307
’ rf. (1) ' ! 2
26, The eccentric angle of a pomt on the ellipse 3 ', 4 a h ey a? ae
_ } 2 i"
ata distance of 5/4 units from the focus on the positive Gy |. By]
() ,'y |
X-AXx1$ is
Coordinate Geometry
9 5
6.32 ted x ys
tangent — +=— =I 18 interce Bnet
the tangle formed by the A tangent of the ellipse 25 16
36. The minimum area of 44.
the
axes Is the intercepted portion of
yoo
to=s 2 + re - = | and the coordinate auxiliary circle such that
foci. Length of the
a > > tangent subtends equal angles at the
(2) a ur sq. units tangent 1s
(1) ab sq units (4) 8
6 (2) 3 (3) 4
a “4
.
ae 4p
1h
>
(1)
sq units 2 By
Q) M(a ts by
=~ sq units (4 ig
75 16° | at any point P meets
a
5 A tangent to the ellipse
@ in the
,
-
\ Ly
the ellipse a 5 + iz~ =|,
(a>),
the line v - 0 at a point 0 Let R he the image of
37, Tangents are drawn to whose extremities of a diameter
are
a common lime yp = ¥. Then the circle is
a" al the pomts where fixed point The fixed point
and the eirele VF 45 7 \-ax1s) Then Qand R passes through a
the same side of the (4) (4.0)
ordinate cuts them (on en by (3) (0.9)
ween these tangents is giv (1) B.0) (2) 6.9)
the greatest acute angle bet 2 tangent
i | with vertices 1 and 4’.
yah ) eal 46. For the ellipse 7
toy tan ab first quadrant meets the y-axis
MEY 0a (= drawn at the point ? in the
a) the y-axis at M If Os the
5
(4) tan 2 at Q and the chord A’P meets
GQ) ran'( 2) equal to
“ origin, then OO - MQ"1s
(3) 4 (4) 5
of an ellipse of eccentricity 9 (2) 13
a8. Let Pbeany pointona directrix of the
(1)
focus. and C the center -
c. S be the corresponding angle c
+ 7,_<, 1 1s inscribed tn 2 square
ts the ellipse at 4. The Ifthe ellipse ——~
ellipse The line PC mee 47. -7 a’ 13 -5a
Aisa Thena is equal to
hetween PS and tangent at a is equal to
(2) S72 of side length aNV2 . then
(iy ianie (2) 11 10
(1) 6/5
(4) none of these no such a eusts
3) tan] -e) ? ”“
r!
(3) 13/10
(4)
\
re 3 = ] 1s normal 3 che
ellipse +
a =
of intersection of the tangent
39, I: 2 tangent of slope = of the 48. The locus of the point
imum value 2 aaa
4x + 1 = 0, then the max of the ellipse
ro the circle ei endpoints of the focal chord ce °
of ab is
(b <a) 1s a/an
(2)52 ellipse
4 (2)
(4) none of these (1) circle
ce (4) pair of strrarght lines
a P (3) hyperbola
eS «@
1f the tangents to the ellipse
ee: + re5s = ] make angles PQ and PR are drawn te Be
40. 49. From point P(8, 27), tangents
that tan u + tan B = A, then x ye we
and 9 with the major axis
such the angle subtended by OR
| Then
intersection 3S ellipse ‘ + y
tre locus of thei r poin t of
origin ts
5 40
1 (2) tan 45
(1) tin 6s
j4ANNO
pone (4) tan ass
parabola
y iy"
—+— =|(h>ou) and the (3) tan 4s

4). if tne ellipse
a ho
ts from pond oe at
then eccentricityof the ellipse PO and PR are drawn
fu, hat ngbtangle 50. It tangents
| ' B a ae at
, ! 4 ov — 28 to the ellipse \
2 circle
f . -
(7-?} >
{
’ p
a
m3 that the tourth vertes ¥ ot
paratlelog sy POR les on the
of the pom ol then the cceent eit of the
42. iu con tapl then the locus Crcumercte ot triangle POX
cos a, bos a) and
echon os tangent al Pla ellipse ts
Inter "
hos qs74 4p v3
co [i h mp) try thee 0 Oe ey ;
ie se Gs
(Hu “a ’
‘
in rectangle hears
6!) a raphe bine
It the ellipse ‘yu ) Pax dnscebed
(Jy) a curele ‘i. a '
a parabola Lo thamthe area ot de rectang!s
Hoth to breadth biti ts >
(1)
(3, an cllipse
of mibasec hoo Pe ee
The Jocus Of the pom Ss
43. anples bs
ports ui of whew cccontie ‘ ‘ ie
ellipse al two 4
3
, h
aa OS
sa an iit”
constant, he
r
(2) corel att h (dps ‘ 5
(1) parabola tap F2 <
(4) strayed dine
(3) ellipse
v pe a Elhpse 6.33
gan ellipse has semi-major axis of length 2 and semi-minor 2. The equation 3x* + 4y°- 18x + l6v+ 43 =k
wr xs of length 1. It slides between the coordinate axes in the
(1) represents an empty set, if k < 0
frst quadrant while maintaining contact with both x-axis (2) represents an ellipse, if k > 0
and y-axis. The locus of the centre of the ellipse is
2 4.
(3) represents a point, if k= 0
24+ =8 (2)2 s5 (4) cannot represent a real pair of straight lines for any value
(yr
of k
(3) ven (4) P4a° . If the equation of the ellipse ts 3x7 + 2y? + br - BY +5 =0,
.
+
ae 1
~> then which of the following is/are true?
The number of points on the ellipse a +59 =! from which
$3. (1) e= 13
a pair of perpendicular tangents 1s drawn to the ellipse (2) Center is (—1. 2)
X+—=118 (3) Foci are (-1, 1) and (—1, 3)
| 9
(4) Directrices are y = 2 + V3
(1) 0 (2) 2 (3) 1 (4) 4
« Let P(x, »;) and Ox, V2), Vi = 0, y, ~ 0, be the endpoints
sf. Let P, and P,’ be the feet of the perpendiculars drawn from
of the latus rectum of the ellipse x7 + 4y" = 4 The equations
the foct S and S" on a tangent 7, to an cllipse whose length of parabolas with latus rectum ?Q are
of senu-mayor axis 1s 20. If YS SPS) = 2560, then (1) P+ 2V3p=34+V3 9 (2) x -2V3y = 3+ v3
(3) 24+2V3y=3-V3 9 (4) x - 2N3p =3- 3
the value of eccentricity 1s
BD
ql) 15 (2) .2/5 (3) 3/5 (4) 4/5 _ ABCD 1sarhombus with AC = 2BD Diagonals AC and
intersect at P. E,, E>, E, and E, are four ellipse s passin g
$3, The normal at a variable point P on the ellipse x + s through P and their foci are A and B, B and C, C and D
a ~
= | of eccentricity e meets the axes of the ellipse at Q and D and A, respectively If for 1 = 1. 2. 3. 4. e, are the
eccentricities of £,, then
and R Then the locus of the midpoint of OR 1s a conic with
eccentricity e’ such that (1) e, = 63 (2) e.=@,
(3) e; = 2e, (4) e, =e@>
(1) e' 1s independent of e (2) e' =}
(4) e’ = lle
. The major axis and minor axis ofan ellipse are. respectiv ely.
(3) e=e 10=0. Ifone end of latus rectum
4 v-2y—5=Oand 2x+y+
36. Any ordinate MP of the ellipse a5 + 5 = ] meets the 1s (3, 4), then the foci are
(1) (5, 0) (2) (-7. -6)

auxihary circle at Q. Then locus of the point of intersection
(3) (-I1, -8) (4) (11.3)
of normals at P and Q to the respective curves Is
(1) 417 =8 (2) x7 +3" = 34 . If the chord through the points whose eccentric angles are
(3) C +s =64 (4) x +y=15 6 and @ on the ellipse 4 + 5 = | passes through a focus.
87. The number of distinct normal lines that can be drawn to then the value of tan(@/2) tan(@ 2) 1s
>
the ellipse aca + x = | from the point P(0, 6) 1s (1) 1/9 (2) -9 (3) -19 (4) 9
. Which of the following is/are true about the ellipse
one (2) two (3) three (4) four
(1) x + 4° - 2v- Lov 13 = 0°?
58. The Jine » = mx - (ai bin, is normal to the ellipse (1) The latus rectum of the ellipse ts 1
— Va + bm (2) The distance between the foci of the ellipse 1s 443
for all values ofm belonging to
ghX =|
<- (3) The sum of the focal distances of a point PEA. +) en the
ellipse is 4.
(1) (0.3) (2) (0, %)
(3) R (4) none of these (4) Line y = 3 meets the tangents drawn at the vertices of
a
the ellipse at pomts P and Q. Then PO subtends a right
angle at any of its foci
» Which of the following ts/are true”
2 2 an-cllin
scantres
_ | will rep serlr Wr lies (1) There are infinite positive integtal \ alues ofa for which
1, -
ara J
apes an ent
cllipse lies
-> , y\- ’ Sy + 123 - iy
(Id. tyre (bay 2) ( a? Fepresents an
in the interval ellipse
(1) (—x, -2) (2) (3,%) (2) he nunmamum distance ofa point (1, 2) from the ellipse
(3) (5,%) (4) (1,%) Ay} Ov) By — JOv F4 = 015 1
(ly « 2v 0 (2) 2x-y=0
other than the
(3) If from a point P(O, «) two normals (4) 2x ty— 0
ve hy_ = |, then
(3) r+ 2yp- 0
axes are drawn to the ellipse 25 4 16

lee] < 9/4 . A point on the cllipse x + 3y° — 37 where the normal 15
parallel to the Jinc 6v Sy 7-215
one-third
(4) Ifthe length of the latus rectum of an ellipse 1s
1s equal to 1.v3 (1) (8. 2) (2) 5.2) (3) (-5, 2) (4) ( 5,-2)
of its major axis, then its eccentricity
of the ellipse
7
Ye > . the locus of the image of the focus
F tay tyand
10. Let E, and E,, respectively, be two clhipses ‘
”
2 . git l(a bh). with respect to any of the tangents to

. ‘
+
+ \
— = 1 (where «ts a parameter) Then the locus of the 257° 9
a the ellipse ts
£, 1s a set of
points of intersection of the ellipses E, and (2) (et 2p ay =50
curves comprising
(ly (ebay ty? 100
(2) one straight line (3) (r- 4+ y- 100 (4) (x -2P + ~ 50
(1) two straight lines
(3) one circle (4) one parabola If the tangent drawn at point (f°, 2t) on the parabola
a
.
v
“
- . a = 4y 1s the same as the normal drawn at point
11. Consider the ellipse rie = Hi . 5) + AK* 1) =1 Hf fly)
(V5cos @, 2 sin 9) on the ellipse Ac + 5)7 - 20, then
1s a positive decreasing function, then 9= cos ( *)
(1) @=cos (- e] (2)
(1) the set of values of A for which the major axis ts the
\-anis 18 (—3. 2)
(4) t= ~--
N
(2) the set of values of A for which the major avis Is the =
> “
y-axis 1s (— «. 2) Vo 2 9
; v ~+——=] Ist-3.=7andits
the set of values of A for which the major axis 1s_ the 19. If a normal to the ellipse ae 2
a YI
~
yeaxis 18 (—%.—3) WU (22) . v7

eccentricity Is —* then the value of Z R can be
(4) the set of values of A for which the major axis ts the
1-axis 18 (-3. %)
. Two concentric ellipses are such that the foci of one are
(] )
a
2
9
tae) 5
on the other and their major axes are equal Let ¢ and e’ be
their eccentricities Then, 8/337 1 36/337
19 (4) 8
) the quadniateral formed by joining the foci of the two
ellipses is a parallelogram
the angle 6 between their axes 1s given by
Linked Comprehension Type {|
ae 14
il l
Gos: ta ee
5
\eo eC
For Problems 1-3
(3) if 7 ~ e~ = J then the angle between the axes of the
m0 ellipses 1s 90° e |> 4
An ellipse Fy = ~s + a 1, centered at point O has 42 and CD 4
(4) none of these a ’
its mayor and minor aves, respectively. Let S, be one of the foe!
13. A point moves such that the sum of the square of tts
of the ellipse, the radius of the incircle of tnangle OCS, be | unit
distances from two fixed straight Jines intersecting at
angle 2~ 15 a constant The locus of point ts an ellipse of and OS, — 6 units
eccentricity l. The perimeter of NOCS, ts
—
{COS 20 54 V-cos 2a (1) 20 units (2) 10 units (3) TS units (4) 25 units
(1) —iifuc— (2 er eee
sing 4 LOSE 4
The equation of the director curele ot Eas
Voos2a¢ n V-c0s 2 id
G) —ifu-r— (4) —-- ha>e— (dy) tar 48S GY & sf Sxe7
LOd sng 4
14. The coordinates (2, 3) and (1, 5) are the foci of an ellipse (3) ri 07 (h) 0 17 = 485
which passes through the ongin [hen the equation of the
he area ol ellipse (2) ts
(1) tangent atthe ongmis (4/2 Sdv i (1 242) 0 (1) 6S9/4 0 (2) O47 5 (3) 64.27 (4) 652
(2) tangent at the origin 154342 4 5S)x it (h 1 V2) 0
(3) normal at the origin For Problems 4-6
is (3V¥245)x (2V2 1 Ip 0
(4) normal at the origin ty x(3V2 5) y(t) -2V2) Consider the ellipse whose mayor and minor axes are x-axis and
0
15. Ifa pair of variable straight lines x” + 44° + gy =0) (where y-aXIs, respectively, @ 1s the angle between CP and the normal at
& is a real parameter) cuts the ellipse x? + 45? = 4 at two point P on the ellipse, and the greatest value of tan @ is 3/2 (where
points A and.B, then the locus of the point of 1 nteersection C'1s the center of the ellipse). Also, the length of the semi-majo!
of tangents at 4 and B 1s p axis 1s 10 units,
—— Ro Elupse 6.35
4, The eccentricity of the ellipse is
18. The maximum area of rectangle inscribed in the locus is
(1) 12 (2) 1/3 Qahe’ 5, abe
(3) V3/2 (4) none of these (1) lite (2) | Cc
5, A rectangle ts inscribed (3) ie e (4) none of these

in the ellipse whose sides are
parallel to the coordinates axes Then the Maximu For Problems 16-18
m area
2
of the rectangle is C) ere and, a : a | intersectat four distinct paints
(1) 50 units (2) 100 units 4. Bo Coand 2) Ther common tangents form a parallelogram
(3) 25 units (4) none of these VBC
16. If ABCD) 15 a square, then rts equal to
6, The locus of the point of intersection of perpe ndicular
tangents to the ellipse is
ay 2 v3“ ig V22
(ly tar = 125 (2) V+." =150
(3) +17 = 200 (4) none of these
(3)
~" 5N5
Je. (4) none of these
17. If A'B'C'’D' 1s a square. then + 15 equal to

For Problems 7—9
(1) V¥20 (2) +12
acurve 1s represented by C = 21y" — 6x: + 2917 + 6. — $8y~— 151 (3) VI5 (4) none of these
=0
18. If A’B'C’D' 1s a square. then the ratio of the area of circle
7. The eccentneity of the curve is
C, to the area of circumeircle of MBC" 15
(ly 13 (2) 13 (3) 2/3 (4) 2/N5 (1) 9/16 (2) 34
§. The lengths of axes are (3) 1/2 (4) none of these
(1) 6.2.6 (2) $,2V5 For Problems 19-21
(3) 4.4.5 (4) none of these A coplanar beam of light emerging from a point source Aas “he
9. The center of the conic C 1s equation Ax — y+ 2(1+A)=0.44R The rays of the beam strke
an elliptical surface and get reflected The reflected ravs form
(1) (1.0) (2) (0.0)
another convergent beam having equation wx —1 — Til -u) = 0.
(3) (0.1) (4) none
of these f# &R Further, it 1s found that the foot of the perpendicular from
the point (2, 2) upon any tangent to the ellipse lies on the circ e
For Problems 10—12
fra , x ty'- 4y-5=0
For all real p. the line 2px ~ v1 — p"= | touches a fixed ellipse 19. The eccentricity of the ellipse ts equai to
wnose axes are the coordinate axes (1) 13 (2) 13 (Gu 23 itp 2
10. The eccentricity of the ellipse 1s 20. The area of the largest trrangle that an incident ray and the
(ly 23 (2) V3/2 (3) J/N3 (4) 1/2 corresponding reflected ray can enclose with the axis of be
cllipse is equal to
ll. The foci of the ellipse are
(1) 4v5 (ay 285
{ly (O.=3) (2) (0, 2/3)
(3) V5 (4) none of these
(3) (=.3/2.0) (4) none of these
21, The total distance travelled by an tneident ray starting at
12. The locus of the point of intersection of perpendicular one focus and the corresponding reflected fay term inanps
langents 16 al another focus is
y 7-37 =5/4 (2) a? tw
= 3/2 (1) 9 (2) 8 psy: 2 ity 4
(3) -/f=2 (4) none of these For Problems 22-24
For Problems 13-15 > A7 The tangent atany Yi pomt # ot the circle v \ lo meets the
1 )Y
Let $ and S$" be the foci of the ellipse oC # ge * 1 whose tangent ata fixed pomt fate Pot J is jotmed too the other end
of the diameter, through
Sccentnicity ise 15a variable point on the cllipse Consider the
22. The locus of the interses tromot EF and 8 fois a Conte whose
locus of the incenter of A/S" CECEDULECILY bs
13. The locus of the incenter 15 a/an Uy: ole? i) bv (sy) 13 ity [3
(1) ellipse (2) hyperbola 23. The sui ot focal distances ef any poiton the curve is
(3) parabola (4) circle
Che (2) Lo us) 20 (4) 8
14. The eccentricity of the locus of 7 I» 24, Which of the following dees not change by changing the
wn
(1) 422
l-e 2) V7", Hidius of the cucle?
(1) Coordinates of toet (2) Length of the mayor axis
(4) none of these (3) TL ccentrienty (4) Length of the minor axis
a
3. Match the following lists’
For Problems 25-27
~-> 2 |} List 1 List II
1 as such that if has the least arca but
1
ME igs a
The ellipse = 16] p.0 —
| a. If the tangent to the cllipse e+ 4
=
a bh a |
at the point P(P) 1s a normal to the circle
contains the eirele (v ~ 1)° + = 1
iy &x— 41 ~ 0, then p/2 may be
25. The eccentricity of the ellipse ts of a poit on the
4. cos ' a
(2) WN3 b. The eccentric angle(s)
(ly V2 ellipse x” 332 Gata distance of 2 units | : \ )
G2 (4) none of these from the center of the cllipse is/are

(3)
of the ellipse a -
e of ellipse ts of intersection
26. The equation of the aunihary circl c. Ihe angle
| _!
v2) 4\2 - 4 and the parabola ef 1 = ys
(1) yrtit=65 (2) vrit=s 5a
normal at the point (9) to the |
d. If the
a ytads (4) none of these HOS og
(3) ge
ellipse 14 1.6 = | intersects it again at
pse 1s
27. The length of the latus rectum of the elli the point ((28), then @ ts
(1) 2 units (2) V2? units |
(4) 2.5 units ria Match the following lists.
(3) 3 units
Se
List E List
:
has sts p. 8
a. An ellipse passing through the origin
| foci (3, 4) and (6, 8) Then the length of its
1. Match the following lists
minor axis IS
> 7
| chord of the elhipse =. ~ 16 q- 10-2

List I List Il b. If PQ 1s a focal
p- | = | which passes through S = (3. 0) and

a. The distance between the pomts on the curve |
4° + 9\° = 1. where the tangent 1s parallel PS = 2, then the length of chord PG ts
to the line 8x = 91, 1s less than or. 10
'¢.If the ine y = v + A touches the ellipse
q.4 the differ ence of
b. The sum of the distance between the foc of Ox? + 16)” = 144, then
the curve 25(x + 17° +90 + 2)" = 225 from | values of K 1s
i
(—1. 0) 1s more than 4. The sum of ‘distances of a point on the ellipses.
*
4
re 7
c. The sum of distances from the a-axis of the
x y
” ~ | Dt 167 | from the foct ts
Ke aK
points on the ellipse —9° + 4° where the not
—_w %
code
mal 1s parallel to the line 2x + v = 1. 18 less | 5. Match the following lists and then choose the correct
than List I List I
s.5 _A stick of length 10 m slides on the co-
d. Tangents are drawn from the points on the p- +e
line x —1 ~ 2 = 0 to the ellipse r+2y= | ordinate aves Then locus of the point
Then all the chords of contact pass through | | dividing this stick from the y-axis in the ratte
the point whose distance from (Z, 1/2) 1s | 6 4isacurve whose cecentretly is ¢ Then
more than | 3e 1s equal to
a point P to the ellipse 244% as the mayor axis of the ellipse S20
2. The tangents drawn from
Ox dy — 1 =O and Pts a vanable pome oa
ie:
cr
it Then the greatest area of trangle 4/4 1s
a hryi!
= | make angles @ and # with the major axis
. the distance between the tucr of the cune
Now. match the following lists. represented by the equation «= 1 > 4+ eos 0
4 2+ dss
List I List I y
1
. \
n ‘ d. Tangents are drawn to the ellipse , ae
= |
a fay >
-(o* N), then the locus of | p. Cirele a]
pcan be at the endpotnts ot the Ligis rectum Lhe ares

of the quadiilaceral sa formed ts
b. If tan « tan (5 co fe 6 Ry thon the locus |g. blipse
of F can be Codes:
a oboe d
| c. Tftan a + tan B= c, (where e © KR), then | F Hyperbola (I) por qq 4
the locus of P can be
(2) q vr ps
G. Wcota + wif =¢ (where ce A), then || s. Pan of straight (3) > p qe
| lines
the locus of ? can be (4) ro pos q
‘. Match the following lis tsCand
and then choose
Ellipse 6.37
See the c “ ;
— ‘Listl ~ veel code Positive ordinates lic on the parabola v° > 2(v — 2) 1s
"TF thee vertices s of a ‘Pedal }Listen | — —-— :
ap rectangle
Ngle of of maxin
: 2 2 ms Pp. 2. 3. If the variable line vy Ax + 2/18 tangent to an ellipse
area inscribed m the ellipse * y V5 > "
! ge l | 2x? + 3yr - 6, then the locus of P(A, k) is. a conic C whose
are extremities of latus rectum, then the cecentricity isc : Then the value of 3¢7 2 18
eccentricity of the ellipse a
as . 2
Sa awe se OES IS 4. Tangents drawn from the point ?(2, 3) to the circle
“p. If the extremities of the diametet of the circle vO Re PG LO touch circle at pots 4 and B The
+a? = 16 are the foci of the clliiske.-thon q: a circumeircle of APAB cuts the director circle of ellipse
the eccentricity of the ellipse.Se, if its <9 ‘CIS . | weed ,_1y
UST (+ 5) (v-3
sufficient to contain the ctrele. qs “8 | 5 ' a ) | orthogonally Then the value of
ee
_¢. Ifthe normal at pomt (6, 2) to the dlimpan jeunes )
‘ bh 1s
through Ms nearest tocus (5, 2), having center | 3 pn arg
. 2), th eccentricity : :
— abt dethen atz‘eecentnicity is 5. Points ? and /) are taken on the ellipse A sete) Wen
d, If the extremities of the latus rectum of the I
parabola 17 = 24) are the foe: of ellipse, and) © 2 a ‘ al PADB.
b, cand dare the lengths of the sides of quadrilater
if the ellipse passes through the vertex of the | where A and B are foci of the ellipse, then maximum value
parabola, then its eccentricity 1s of(abcd) is,
Cex OO —_ = 6. If a(x? + y +2v+tp=(e 2+ 3y° 45 an ellipse and
« hk « @ aeé(b,«),) then the value of h his. __
* ea
() q Pos f 7. If the midpomt of a chord of the ellipse - © a = 1 as

() q tr s q (0, 3) then the length of the chord is —__
3) s r
t- P A 8. Let the distance between a focus and the corresponding
( a4 P directrix ofan ellipse be 8 and the eccentricity be | 2 [f the
= ‘ length of the minor axis is k. then 34/2 1s
Numerical Value Type , Pee icy kd Bt . <cer waa
pee SOSA Raa 9. Square of the radius of director circle of auxiliary circle of
(x-47 oy? ellipse (3x +4) —- 1)? + 5(4v—3) +2) =2501s
1. Ifx. 1 € R, satisfies the equation ———— + — =], then
. 10. Suppose \ and y are real numbers and that + — 9\7- 4r
amarthe largest and the smallest value
the difference between
+ 6v + 4 = 0. Then the maximum value of (4x — 9) 2 15
of the expression a at 5 1S
> > 11. Rectangle ABCD has area 200 An ellipse with area 2007
x }
2. The value of a for the ellipse — - + za = 1, (a > b), if passes through 4 and C and has foet at 8 and D. Then the
ae 2
erimeter of the rectangle 1
the extremities of the latus rectum of the ellipse having P Seb
[i —
Archives I
JEE Main 3. Statement 1b: An equanon of a common tangent to
. ari ‘ 2 3 , ae a ee =
Single Correct Answer Type the parabola 4 1634 and the ellipse 21-~ 1 = 4s
1. The ellipse x* + 4)” = 4 is inscribed in a rectangle aligned yp=2r+2V3
with the coordinate axes, which 1s in turn inscribed in ak
another ellipse that Pp passes through the point (4, 0). Then
+.
p Statement 2: If the line y = mn & SS. on =O) wa

the equation of the ellipse 1s | ‘ m7 ;
(1) x7 + 16y7 = 16 (2) x° + 12y" = 16 common tangent lo the parabola y” Loy 3 v and the ellipse
3 DS ae ? : :
(3) 4x° + 48° = 48 (4) 4x7 + 64" = 48 2\7+ y= 4, then am satisties nf © 2a 24
(AIEEE 2009) . :
. (1) Statement [as false, statement 2 1s true
2. Equation of the ellipse whose axes are the axes of . . .
coordinat d which passes through the point ( 3, 1) (2) Statement [as true, statement 2 1s true, statement 2 1 a
mates an P correct explaination for stuement |
and has eccentricity f Is (3) Statement 1 is true, statement 2 as true, statement 2 ts
si hola correct explanation tor statement |
a1) 5x7
He :+ ae
3)° - ‘7-32=0
xb (2) 32452
(4) 3x § 5 32-0
15. 0 .
(4) Stitement Las true, statement 2 ts Lalse
: (AIEEE 2011) (ATEEE 2012)
An cllipse is drawn by taking a diameter of the circle

ep SE
(vy — 1)? #47 = Las its semi-minor axis and a diameter of 3. The ellipse £,. —ge + g4 ES inscribed in a rectangle
the circle v7 4 (v - 2)? = 4 is semi-major axis. If the centre
of the ellipse is at the origin and its axes are the coordinate R whose sides are parallel to the coordinate axes Another
axes, then the equation of the ellipse 1s cllipse £, passing through the point (0, 4) CITCUMSCrihes
(1) 4+? =4 (2) 74 4y=8 the rectangle X The eccentricity of the ellipse £, 1s
Q@) 47+ =8 (4) v4 41° — 16 (1) V22 (2) V3/2
(AIEEE 2012) (3) 1/2 (4) 3/4 (IIT-JEE 2012)
~ The equation of the cirele passing through the foci of the Multiple Correct Answers Type
n
> >
ellipse sz + — = 9, and having centre at (0, 3) 1s° I. Ina triangle ABC with fixed base BC, the vertex A moves
such that cos B + cos C= 4 sin’ 4 Ifa, b, and c denote the
(vt or-7=0 (2) +1" - 6r4+7=0
(3) Vta7-or-5=0 (4) x? +9 >_6y+5=0 lengths of the sides of the triangle opposite to the angles
(JEE Main 2013)
A, B, and C, respectively, then
(1) b+c=4a
The locus of the foot of perpendicular drawn from the
(2) b+c=2a
centre of the ellipse v* + 31° = 6 on any tangent to it 1s
(3) the locus of point A is an ellipse
CV) af -a°F = 6? +2)" 2) 2 = 9°)? = 6x? - 23?
(4) the locus of point 4 1s a pair of straight lines
(3) f+ PP = 67427 (4) 0? +57) = 6x? - 2?
(IIT-JEE 2009)
(JEE Main 2014)
. Let £, and £, be two ellipses whose centers are at the
. The area (in sq units) of the quadrilateral formed by the
tangents at the end pomnts of the lateral recta to the ellipse origin. The major axes of £, and E, lie along the x-axis and
“ 42 the y-axis, respectively Let S be the circle x ~(} — |)" =2
—+—=l],18
9 5 The straight line x + » = 3 touches the curves S. £, and £, at
(1) 27/4 (2) 18 (3) 27/2 (4) 27 135
(JEE Main 2015) P, Qand R, respectively Suppose that PO = PR = — [i
+
. The eccentricity of an ellipse whose center 1s at the origin
e, and e, are the eccentricities of £, and £-., respectrvely.
1s 1/2. If one of its directrices 1s x = —4, then the equation
then the correct expression(s) 1s (are)
of the normal to it at (1, 3/2) 1s
-
(1) x+2;=4 (2) 2y-x=2
G vier
> 4
(3) 4x-2y=1 (4) 4x+2yp=7 (2) ee =——i
~ 40 2V1
(JEE Main 2017)
. Two sets 4 and B are as under. x x = 5
A=(a,b)eR*R la-5|<1
and |b-5| <1};
(3) lef -e31== ) ge.= >
B= {(a,b)e R*R.4a-6Y
+ Wb—5) < 36}. Then (JEE Advanced 2015)
(1) neitherA <BnorBcA . Consider two straight lines, each of which 1s tangent 10
(2) BoA > , 1 *
(3) ACB both the circle + 1 = > and the parabola 1> = tr Let
(4) Arc. B= (an empty set) (JEE Main 2018)
these lines intersect at the point Q. Consider the ellipse
ereper
—
be 2 AEM OBES whose centre is at the origin O(O, 0) and whose semi-major
Single Correct Answer Type axis ts OQ If the length of the minor axts of this ellipse
is J2, then which of the following statement(s) ts (are
The line passing through the extremity 4 of the major
axis and extremity B of the minor axis of the ellipse
TRUE?
x + 9 = Y meets its auxiliary circle at the point Mf
(1) For the ellipse, the eccentricity iy. —— and the length of
Then the area of the triangle with vertices at A, M, and O
the latus rectum ts | v2
(the origin) 1s
. l :
(1) 31/10 (2) 29/10 (2) For the ellipse, the CCCCUUTICLEY I = and the length of
1 -
(3) 21/10 (4) 27/10 (IVE-JEE 2009) the latus rectum is =
. The normal at a point 7 on the ellipse x? | 4y" 16 meets (3) The area of the region bounded by the ellipse betwee?
the x-axis at Y. If Af is the smidposnt of the Line seyment
PQ, then the locus of M intersects the Jatus rectus of the the¢ line
lines v cae diel
i .=1bp
l
(7%
- 2)
2
given ellipse at points 2 4/2
(4) The area of the region bounded by the ellipse betwee
(1) (#(3V5)/2, £2/7) (2) (43V5)/2, + V19/7)
l l
(3) (£2V3, +1/7) (4) (42V3, 44V3/7) the lines«= —= any=d1]is — m-2
v2 16"
(IIT-JEE 2009)
(JEE Advanced 2018)
a inked Comprehension Type
7 — jc. Ellipse r. Pomts of the conic have
parametric
Ellipse 6.39
representation
oblems 1-3 ‘
lai? S ar
or Pr = /3 facdl a
eat
tangent 5 are drawn from the point P(3, 4) to the ellipse . 14+/ |
conic lics In the |
touching the ellipse at points 4 and B. id, Hyperbola s. The eccentricity of the |
vy 7 =]
interval |<. =
(IIT-JEE 2010) = in the complex plane sa
tisfying
a t. Points
y. The coordinates of A and B are. respectively, Re(z+t=teh tl
(1) (3,9) and (0, 2) — 7 (IIT-JEE 2009)
(2) (-8/5, 2V161/15) and (—9/5, 8’5) . Match the following lists’
3) (-8/5, 2V161/15)
and (0, 2)
|
a bist '\).
' List 1!
pl
a.Let 1(¥) = cos(3cos
(4) (3, 0) and (—9/5, 8/5) 3
ae f-l Jett 1
2, The orthocenter of triangle PAB ts

——s—+2
(1) (5, 8/7) (2) (7/5, 25/8) Then =
V(x) dx" dx |
(3) (11/5, 8/5) (4) (8/25, 7/5) q. 2
'b. Let4). 4. A, (n> 2) be the vertices of a regular!
3. The equation of the locus of the point whose distances polygon of n sides with its centre
at the origin Let
from the point 7? and the line AB are equal 1s a, be the position vector of the pomt 4,, 4 = 1.
(1) 9x7 +37 - Oxy — 54x - 625 + 241 = 0 n=l
(2) x7 +9)" + Oxy — 54x + 62y - 241 = 0 2. nit ya x akst)

kel
(3) 9a7 + 9y - Oxy — 54v — 62v ~ 241 = 0
then the minimum value of 77 Is
(4) x° +97 —2xy + 27x + 31) - 120 = 0 ¢. Ifthe normal from the point P(h, 1) on the
ellipse 7.8
a
For Problems 4 and 5 7 + a =] 1s perpendicular to the line xv + — 8,
Let F,(x,. 0) and F(\2, 0), for v;< 0 and \, > 0. be the foc of the
y
then the value of /i 1s

s.9
ellipse —
x i} 4
+ —— =I. Suppose a parabola having vertex at the d. Number of positive solutions satisfying the
8 equation
ongin and focus at F’, intersects the ellipse at pomt Afin the first
quadrant and at point NV in the fourth quadrant
(JEE Advanced 2056)
Codes:
4. The orthocentre of the triangle /) V/V ts a boc d
9 ,
(1) s r q ep
I) | -—.0 2) | =.
”) ( 10 ee ls 0] (2) q S Fr p
%° (3) s r p 4q
(4) q s p fr (JEE Advanced 2014)
ay b= 4) |=
3) (a-°] o [3-56] Numerical Value Type
5. If the tangents to the ellipse at Af and N meet at R and the 1. A vertical line passing through the point (A, 0) intersects
then the
normal to the parabola at M/ meets the x-axis at Q, : x. y?
ratio of area of the triangle MOR to area of the quadrilateral the ellipse 7 + 7 = | at points P and Q. Let the tangents
MF\NF} 1s to the ellipse at P and Q meet at point R. If A(h) = area
(1) 3 4 (2) 4.5 of tangle POR, A, a max A(h),andA,= min A(A),
(3). 528 (4) 2°3 then —=

8 A, - 8A, = '2¢hs1
(JEE Advanced 2013)
W2<hsl
V5
Matrix Match Type 2 y
. Suppose that the foci of the ellipse ore = | are
1. Match the conics in List I with the statements/expressions
5
(f;, 0) and (f;, 0) wheref, > 0 andf, < 0. Let P, and P.
in List II, be two parabolas with a common vertex at (0, 0) and with
Listy | List J | foci at (f, 0) and (2/5, 0), respectively. Let T, be a tangent
a. Circle p. The locus of the point (A, &) for which to P, which passes through (2 f,, 0) and 7; be a tangent to
the line fa + Av = 1 touches the circle P, which passes through (/;, 0). If m, is the slope of 7;
| vt y =4
and my 1s the slope of 7, then the value of (4 + ni]
b. Parabola. ~~ g, Points 2 in the complex plane satisfying | 1S m,
jzt+2|-[z- 21243 (JEE Advanced 2015)
Answers Key
EXERCISES Matrix Match Type
latpgnsbopqrsc7qns,dap
2. a> rs,b5p,qa.rn5,c3rns,d>r,s
1. (3) 2. Cl) 3. (2) (4) §. (2)
3, an piborns,copdvq
6. (1) Fah} 8. (3) (1) 10. (2)
4,.a7q,b>rncordop
il. (3) 12. (2) 13. (2) (1) 15. (1)
16. (3) 17. (3) 18. (2) . (4) 20. (2) §.(3) 6. (4)
21. (1) 22. (2) 23. (3) . (3) 25. (1) Numerical Value Type
26. (1) 27. (1) 28. (1) » (2) 30. (4) 1. (8) 2. (2) 3. (7) 4. (54) 5. (16)
31. (1) 32: 2) 33. (3) (4) 35. (1) 6. (5) 7. (64) 8. (8) 9. (20) 10. (8)
36. (1) 37. (1) 38. (2) (1) 40. (4)
41. (3) 42. (3) 43. (4) 11. (80)
(1) 45, (3)
46. (3) 47. (4) 48. (4) (4) 50. (3)
ARCHIVES
51. (4) 52. (4) 53. (4) . (3) 55. (3)
56. (3) 57. (3) 58. (3) JEE Main
y\
1. (1). (3) (1), (2), (3). (4) 1. (2) 25 (2) 3. (2) 4. (4) (1)
3. (1). (2). (3) (2), (3) 6. (3) 7. (4) 8. (3) 9. (3)
§. (1). (2), (4) (1), (3)
7. (3). (4) (1), (3). (4) JEE ADVANCED
9. (1). (2), (3) (1), (3)
Il. (1). (3) Single Correct Answer Type
)
- (1). (2), (3)
13. (3). (4) » (1). (3) 1. (4) 2. (3) 3. (3)
15. (1). (3) (2), (4) Multiple Correct Answers Type
17. (1), (3) (1), (4)
19, (1). (4) 1. (2). (3) 2. (1), (2)
w
Linked Comprehension Type Linked Comprehension Type
1. (3) 2. (1) 3. (1) (3) 5. (2) 1. (4) 2. (3) 3: C5 4. (1)
nh
6. (1) 7.2) 8. (1) (3) 10. (2) Matrix Match Type
UW. (4) 12. (1) 13. (1) 14. (2) 15. (1)
16. (1) 17. (4) ~—s«18, (3) (3) 20. (2)
lLcmr 2. (1)
21. (4) 22. (2)~—23. (4) . (3) 25. (1) Numerical Value Type
26. (3) = 27. (2) 1. (9) 2. (4)
Hyperbola
tre of the
axe s int ers ect at C, which 1s called the cen
Both the ola passing
ry chord of the hyperb
- nowINI
peF TION
that hyperbola 1s one of the comic sections Hyperbola
hyperbola
through it
Cen tre bis ect s eve
s, |
is
;
its axe
of the hyperbola about
ye ais of 3 pot such that ratio of
its distances from a fixed Because of symmetry S(¢. pf) an
value of ola using another focus
(directtix) 1s constant, the possible to define hyperb about the
ve foes) and a fixed line which are symmetrical
constant ratio 1s called eccentricity
*e”
directnx ix my +n’ =0,
hich 1s MOTE than 1 e The
€ (1, co) SP
hus. for hyperbola, conjugate axis In this cas
e. PM’ =e
be S(a, B) and the directrix
For any hyperbola, let the focus
t= CL = CL’
atu
point P upon directrix. in the figure, CS = CS’ and u of point P
Also let PM be the perpendicular from al distances or focal rad
SP and S’P are called foc
Conjugate axis , we have
For point P on hyperbola
sp-S'P=e PM-e PM
|
> =e (PM- PM)
E
M
' rp OF =e MM
|L
| Transverse
axis
= Sone!
ea : Cc Luts 2
| - Ex (L'A-LA+ LA’ EA
ix+ myp+n=0 h+my+n =0 e (= AS A'S as)

———
a ae
—x
2 e e e e€
SP
hyperbola if PM =e
The locus of variable point P(x, }’) 18 - 5 x(As’- AiSt+0S=AS)
constant). where @ € (1. °)
SP=e PM
Therefore. equation of hyperbola 1s = *(Ad'+ Ad)
‘ix +my
es act+nA|
\ixr-ay +(y-BY =e 2 D2
e>l = AA’
Vii +m = Transverse axis
+ by’ + 2hxy + 2gx Note that point P 1s lying on the right branch of the
hyperbola.
The above equation takes the form ax?
a if }? - ab > 0 and For point P lying on the left branch, we have S’P - SP
= A’.
- 2 + c = 0. which represents hyperbol
Thus. difference of two focal radu of vanab le point on the
s= abc + 2hgf- af? - bg’ — ch’ #0 verse
We observe that graph of the hyperbola 1s open
curve and has hyperbola 1s constant which 1s equal to the length of trans
"0 branches
axis
endicular to the Further in triangle PSS’, SS’ is fixed and difference of two
The line passing through focus S and perp variable sides SP and S’P 1s constant This leads to another
directx 15 called the transverse axis or major ax1s (focal axis)
definition of hyperbola as follows
ofthe hyperbola If ina triangle, one side (SS’) 1s fixed and variable vertex (P
the hyperbola at points moves in such a way that the difference of two vanable side:
In the figure, transverse axis intersects
44’ 1s
4 and 4’ which are two vertices of the hyperbola. Here, of triangle remains the same (constant), then locus of variabl
or simply
hhe length of the transverse axis or length of major axis vertex 1s hyperbola
teasverse axis There 1s another axis of the hyperbola which 1s Latus Rectum of Hyperbola
Called the conjugate axis (or minor axis) and it 1s perpendicular
We know that double ordinate through focus terminated by con
1s symmetrical aboul the
Nector of 4,4’ Graph of the hyperbola is its latus rectum
“Onjugate axis also
Conjugate avis
Directs Directriy
<1)
AC -— AB =a\| — (= consta
oa of an
P M | pt
Thus, difference of two variable sides AC and AB 1s constant
| Transverse
Sey re L| ES! axis Hence, locus of vertex A 15 hyperbola with B and C as foci
| |
OQ |g’
|
ILLUSTRATION 7.2
| Prove that the locus of centre of the circle which touches two
given disjoint circles externally 1s hyperbola
In the above figure, double ordinate through foc: S and S’ are Sol. As shown in the figure, variable circle S with centre C
PQ and P’’.. respectively and radwus r touches two given disjoint circles S, and 5, having
Latus rectum = PO (= P’Q’) centres C, and C, and radii r, and r, respectively
=2x SP
=2xex PM (from definition of hyperbola)
=2xex SL
= 2x e x (distance of focus from directrix)
ILLUSTRATION 7.1
If base of tnangle and ratio of tangents of half of the base

angles are given, then prove that the locus of opposite vertex
1s hyperbola Clearly, CC, =r+r,and CC, =r+75
Sol. In tmangle ABC, base BC 1s given CC, - CC; =r; - rz (= constant)
1e, BC=a (constant) Thus, locus of centre C is hyperbola having foci C, and C,
A
Also, given that
ILLUSTRATION 7.3
tan B te b
The equation of one directnx of a hyperbola 1s 2, + + = 1. the
2 =f (constant) corresponding focus 1s (1, 2) and eccentricity ts V3 Find the
tan — Youu. pS equation of the hyperbola and coordinates of the centre and
2 B a Cc
second focus
B Cc
sin — cos —
eee en Sol. Given focus of hyperbola 2y+1-1=0
Cc B is F\(1, 2) and corresponding
sip — cos —
2 2 directrix is 2x + v—1=0 ‘\ a WL P
BC Cc OB Let P(x, vy) be the point on the
sin cos —sin- cosy
= 2 9 2. 2 #1
= hyperbola.
i L
ein cee ee eRe i Foot of perpendicular from P on Fy ASC 4; Fy. 2)
2 2 2 2 the directrix is M
B-C
sm 5 | eee | So, from the definition of
= — hyperbola, we have &
wee
2
Kad F\P=e-PM
. B-C B+C
V(x-1? +(p-27 = {een
> yy .—_
2sin Ce je |
=>
= V2-+0
Bom hcg Oe k+l Squaring and simplifying, we get equation of hyperbola as follows:
2 2
Tv? + l2xy — 2v? — 20+ 14-22=0 (1)
snB-snC k-]
= = Transverse axis passes through focus Fy and perpendicular to
sm(B+C) k+l) ¢ directrix
sinB-sinC So, equation of transverse axis ts \ - 21+ 3 =0
= ee_ k-| [As im tria
sin (Bng
z
+ C)le
= sin A]
;
Solving transverse axis and directrix, we get L = (-1/5,
7/5).
sas b-c_
—— k-l
ro ( |
using sine rule) Since A, and A, divide FyL in the ratio V3: | internally and
externally, respectively, we have
Hyperbola 7.3
ie S-J3 1047/3
™ (s8 +0 53 +1 CONGEPT APALCAT! IN EXERCISE 7-1
1. Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola
S+v3 we)
ad DE Hae -1)° (V3 =1 J(x+4y +(y +2)? ~ (e-4y +(y-2)? oy
centre C of hyperbola is midpoint of 4 143,

Which is (-4/5, 11/1 0) 2. OA and OB arc fixed straight lines, P 1s any point and PM
crs second focus and C is midpomt of F 1F >. and PN are the perpendiculars from 7? on OA and OB,
ne (-B.2)
13 1 respectively. Prove that the locus of ? 1s hyperbola if the
quadrilateral OMPN 1s of constant area
3. Find the equation of the transverse axis of the hyperbola
ILLUSTRATION 7.4 (x - 3)? +(y + 1)? = (4x + 3y)?.
prove that the equation 2x? + Sxy + 25? — Jy _ Ty-4=0 —— ANSWERS| - - =
represents a hyperbola
ew e= ——
Sol. We have 2x" + Sxyp + 2 - 1x Ty-4=0 2

Comparing this with general second-degree 3. 3x-4y= 13
equation i.e. >
avr + by" + 2hxy + 2gx + 2f +c =0, we get
a=2,b=2,c=4.h= 5/2, g =-11/2, f= -7/2
a hg EQUATION OF HYPERBOLA AND ITS
Now, A=|h b ff PROPERTIES
ey STANDARD EQUATION OF HYPERBOLA
2 3/2 -11/2 For standard equation of hyperbola, we consider coordinate axes
=| 5/2 2 -7/2 == 40 as axes of the hyperbola. So, we have following two cases:
—l1/2 =7/2 +4 Transverse Axis is x-Axis and Conjugate Axis is y-Axis
Here, centre of hyperbola is origin.
Also, h” — ab = (5/2)? - (2)(2) > 0
Let foci be F,(c, 0) and F,(-c, 0).
So, given equation represents a hyperbola.
Also, let hyperbola intersect x-axis at 4,(a. 0) and 4,(-a. 0).
ILLUSTRATION 7.5 According to the definition of the hyperbola. for any point
P(x, y) lying on the hyperbola, we have
If equation V(x - tan@)? + (y — V3 taney PF, — PF, =2a
Here, we have taken point P on the nght branch of the
| 4 esent hyperbola such that PF, > PF,.
| “
Va =
2tan@)° 2
+ y a || <= 2: 6
€ [0, 0, Tt)
z] ~~ 4—
{5| represents
a
hyperbola, then find the values of @.
meses Directnx
Sol. We have
I
V(x = tan6)? + (y - V3 tan 8)" M, M, Parry)
Distance between F, (tan@, V3 tan@) and P(x,y)

(c, OF, 22, OF LS Fyre) x
- (x
— 2tan@)? + y? =3 - 5s
Dilisice ewedi Fs (2 ea O) and PUM. 3) ? =
So, |F\P- F,P|=2,
where P = (x, y), F, = (tan 6, V3 tan 6) and F,= (2 tan 8, 0).
Therefore, given equation represents a hyperbola if
(r+ cyte Vo -eP + =a cl)
FiF,>2
= (tan 6 - 2tan@)?
+ (V3 tan
@- 0)? >2 = V(x +e) +" =2a +/(\ -eF ee
Squaring both sides, we get
\2 tan &>2
dl
(+ Ps b od dar t day(s cask | ‘i + ‘2

5 |tan&>1 t(v- ey +
Hence, @ ¢ (z, | 7 (. vat ee

Cx
ne2 2
4°2 a
(a Coordinate Geometry
7 —
_ = = x=all
7.4
Wwe gel Salers 1
further simplifying,
Squarmg again and Pesy
Py2 M3, Mi,
ee Ly ene e e
F ae.)
e e ee
(ae, OF; - A
pf
v
ym
(Here, c= 4
dare 2=
)
i
wo ool 0
a hr 0;
andard form
of hyperbola 10 st |
This is the equ ation in the figure, we get the
left branch
For the pomts lying on the
same equation, e length of
gth of tra nsv ers e ax is 4A’ 1s 2a Th
Here the len 1s not inter septed on
nu ga te axi s IS 2 bh, however, this length Oe
2
co ae
conjugate ants is called semt- b
m-transv erse axis and b a
Also, a 1s called se bb a2
pp? 1) = b? Ee
7
conjugate aXis ined as
2.
y=be 1)
0 f hyperbola 1s also def
Like ellipse, eccentmicity Be
distance fro m centre to focus y= t—a
&
dist Peance
to vertex
distance from centre
e _-_=
rectum are
So, endpoints of latus
a
b?
| 6CFa b*
nR
9) |, Q| ae, -—
So, foci are F,(ae. 0) and F,(-ae, al a —
a a
dae FF, _ Distan— ce between foci
_ —_— .
Thu s.¢ = =" = 7, —
Transverse axis b? b°
2a 2a -ae,— |, Q,| -ae, - —
and P| a
2
have
2 2 a
Also, from c - a" = b>, we 26°
4
Q, = P2Q2=
be} 71:
b=ae-@ Length of latus rectum ~ P,
or B= a(e -1)
Also,
have
For vertex A;, on hyperbola we Length of latus rectum
from directrix
FA, =e* AL, =2x ex Distance of focus
ge-a=e%*(a-OL,) =2xexFL,
OL, = *e = axex({ ae-2)

é
ding to focus F (ae, 0) 1s

So, equation of directrix correspon e Axis is x-Axis
Transverse Axis is y-Axis and Conjugat
x= 5e
g to focus F,(-ae, 0) In this case, equation of hyperbola is -o#
-),
From symmetry, directrix correspondin a ob
it meets
Clearly, this hyperbola does not meet y-axis, but
a
sxe Si
e
y-axis.
For point P on hyperbola, ¥
=e: PM, = e{-£)=ex-a

PF,
e
(0,6 | Pix. y)
and PF,=e-PM,= {+2]= ext+a } 6

iM
‘po pyA E__ Directny

PF, — PF, = 2a °
a
For point P lying on the left branc h, we find that PF, = exr-a ~\
O
and PF, = ex + a. yeh
Clearly, PF, - PF, = 2a. Bat ML. E— Direetrix
For both the branches of hyperbola, we have |PF, - PF,| = 2a. Fy 7
(0, -bF) \
Latus rectum:
Jn the following figure, latus rectum = P,Q, (= PQ).
Equations of line passing through foc are x = tae.
|
=o 7 1 % a RUSSERT re a
Hyperbola_ 7-5
¢ pots where hyperbola meets J-AXxis are BO, |
_p), which are vertices of hyperbola (0, P) and This hyperbola 1s called rectangular hyperbola or equilateral
AU (0, bE) hyperbola
Te foc! are 14 | F and F4(0, a)
E) and
: two1 directric
: es are Foe1 of this hyperbola are (tV2a. 0) and two directrix are
i where Eis eccentricity of hyperbola
aes ; ,
a
x=t—,
pere, the length of transverse axis (BB) is
2b and that of v2 y x? _ py pe
nN
iygate axis 18 2a
Also, for hyperbola ae =-1, we have & = bE’ - 1),
For any point P(x, ) on the hyperbola, we have
where £ 1s eccentricity
PF,- PF, = 2b
. ; - (PF, > PF) Ifa =), then £ = J? and equation of hyperbola becomes
(vo + (VtdDE) - yx" +(y-beY = rh (1) x? — )? = ~a’, which is rectangular hyperbola.
5 ing, Wwe get equation of h
sumphify Bae \ yperbola as ILLUSTRATION 7.6
eh y
an “eo Find the standard equation of hyperbola ini each of the
b(E -1) following cases’
: Bee : --] [Here, a? = B25? - 1) (i) Distance between the foci of hyperbola is 16 and its
a eccentricity 1s V2.
This hyperbola 1s called conjugate hyperbola of hyperbola (ii) Vertices of hyperbola are (+ 4, 0) and foc: of hyperbola
2 ° are (+6, 0).
rel = (iii) Foci of hyperbola are (0, + J10 ) and it passes through
rb the point (2, 3)
For any point P(x, ) on the hyperbola, we have (iv) Distances of one of the vertices of byperbola from the
PR, = EX PM, = E( v2) = gy-6 foci are 3 and 1.
Sol.
] .
.
and PF, = £ x PM, = (4 +y) =O Ey b

(i) Let the equation of the hyperbola be S cole > =l.
PF,- PF, =2b Foci are (+ae, 0). . a
- Distance between foci = 2ae = 16 (given)
2
The end points of latus rectum are az ot | . Also, e= V2 (given)
, a=4/2
2a” We know that,
Also, length of latus rectum 1s a b? = a? (e?- 1)
Itcan be observed that in all the aspects of conjugate hyperbola, b= (4/2 ((V2 Y- 1) =32
except its equation, a and b are interchanged So, the equation of hyperbola 1s
2 2 2
Now, - = a Me oss J =
EX
at +b 32-32
2 22 1 2 or 7.2. = 32
x°-y"
For hyperbola ~- a =1, >= a where ‘e’ 1s 3 >
ecentnicity, av} e ath If the hyperbola is of the form —> - a =-1. then us
Theretpre, aa equation will bex? 17 =-32. ©
E e (ii) Vertices are (+4, 0) and foci are (+6, 0)
This is the relation between eccentricities of hyperbola a=4andae=6
a
op and d its conjugate hyperbol
hyperbola me 42
1f"R °.3
;
*ectangular Hyperbola (Equilateral Hyperbola) Now, owes b? = a" a? (eT)
(¢? —
2 b° = 16 [2-1] = 20
2
For hyperbola = -2 =1, we have R= a(c — 1), where ¢ 1s 4 ,
“eentricity, 4 So, the equation of hyperbola is ee l
Ifg= b, then . 16 20 ;
ft j= (iii) Since foci (0, + V10 ) are on y-avis, constder the equation
=? of hyperbola as a - us =-|.
a ho
e=V2
No, €quation of hyperbola becomes oi Sa.
bee fio
Also, a® = b*%(¢7 — 1) Sol. Let, and e, be the eccentricities of ellipse and hyperbola,
=a = 10h respectively
v
Equation of the hyperbola becomes
> .
\ 1
10-h B
Since, hyperbola passes through the point (2, 3), we have
4 9
ate Sea
10-b" b
= 4h -9(10-
67) =-67(10 - b’)
= h'~2367+90=0
= (b°- 18) (b°-5)=0
= 6° =5 (b= 18 not possible as a” + b? = 10)
=> @=10-5=5 Since hyperbola passes through the foci of ellipse, we have
So, the equation of hyperbola 1s b= ae, (1)
Also for ellipse, 6? = a (1- e,’) (2)
and for hyperbola, a” = b (e,’ - 1) (3)
From (1) and (2), we get
or y= x =
1
(iv) According to the equation 2e,?= l ore,= Nol
ae-a=1andae+a=3
e+] So, from (1) and (3), we get
=30re=2 2 =e," — lore, = J3
e-1
i a=1
ILLUSTRATION 7.9
So, Bb =a*(e?-1)=3
Find the eccentricity of the hyperbola given by equations
2 32 fi i f /
eae =f
Therefore, equation is x” — “ae = | or it can be ry -y and y = ,tER
=-],
ILLUSTRATION iF er A Sol. Given equations

ete
t -¢t
ef -t
2 xo—-2 + oy——2 =1 and
If ellipse hyperbola
x——2 - y— =
1
— = and y =
2 3
Ps 6 Be nypervola aa 81s
confocal, then find the value of 4”.
or 2x = e' + e' and 3y =e'— e
Squaring and subtracting, we get
“Sol. Given hyperbola 1s 4x? -9y° = 4
x? y? _ 1
2 2
144 81 25 ao kT
x? y? 1 4/9
Now, b? = a*(e* - 1)
Or 744/25 81/25
144 81 @= 44,-8
So, foci ot hyperbola] are [ + F ;,—+—,0]
95 * 95 = ( (43,0 ) 9 9
2 2 or e= V3
These are foc: of ellipse = 42% =) also.
16 b?
ILLUSTRATION '7.10
3= V16-b7
An ellipse and a hyperbola have their principal axes along
the coordinate axes and have common foci separated by a
ILLUSTRATION 7,8 distance 2.3. The difference of their focal semi-axes is equal
¢ ¥ to 4. If the ratio of their eccentnicities is 3/7, find the equation
If hyperbola mae = | passes through the foci of ellipse of these curves.
2
x ee3 | Sol. Let the semi-major axis, semi-minor axis, and eccentricity
¥ ie = 1, then find the eccentricities of ellipse and
of the ellipse be a, b, and e, respectively, and those of hyperbola
be a’, b’, and e’, respectively.
, , .
yy
1- av=4
Hyperbola_ 7.7
that < adh Rvoe ie (1) In the figure, latus rectum PQ subtends ; right angle 4at the centre
ave
gc 2VIS OF des yt3 (2) of the hyperbola
rae’ = 213 or a’e’ = VIR a OS~ SP
(3)
3 h?
Us => ae = —
wo 7 (4) a
zs 13 b? zy=“
pom (2) a r (5) > ea
, Vi3 => e“-e-1=0

rom (3) @ ce (6) 7 (+/5
puting in (1). we get 7 EES
e ; ° , HYPERBOLA HAVING AXES PARALLEL TO

x VB(e'-e)= dee COORDINATE AXES
putting € =3e'/7, we get x 2
3 3 If hyperbola having equation = = > =1 1s shifted (translated)
such that its centre 1s at (A, &), then equation of hyperbola becomes
, NB ande= 3-3 (x=hy _(y-h)
=~ 3 7 7 a b?
x=h
28 VB Vo nd xeh-%
e 13 |
3 13
¢- 23 VBL,
e | t=k
13
F, C(h, k) F,
b= a(1-e’) 1(1-2) ~36 |
(P= (al (ey2 1} = (2-1)

3
=4
The-equation of ellipse:ts Here, transverse axis 1s = & and conjugate axis 1s x =A.
Fog y ” So, centre of hyperbola is C(A, k).
49 36 Eccentricity is given by relation b= = a*(e* — 1).
and the equation of hyperbola 1s Foci are F\(h + ae, k) and F,(h - ae, k).
voy 4 Equation of two directrix are given by \ =h +" :
9 4 : .
‘ -— h)- .-k =
ILLUSTRATION 7.11
: If the equation of hyperbola 1s S a _ = =—Il, then
o
If the latus rectum subtends a right angle at the centre of the transverse axis ts .v = h and conjugate avis y = k
2 2 ‘es ; he
nyperbola = - 5 = 1, then find its eccentricity. Foci are Fy(h, k + be) and Fx(h, k ~ be).
i g b Equation of two directriy are given by v= A + sf ;
L . e
4 bf v=h
/
/ F
/plee, 6
/ a 7 =
veh h°
|
dase |
O M45” | S(ue, 0) *
CUina) tat
ek b
} £ e
! tb
/ ; olve. b
= i)
/ yO Sere nt
<
——— — <

(lUustRA ai4 s two fixed points Mm
opposite
{
WEDS TRATION’ 7.12 cases: Two rods are rot ati ng abo ut
their position of coinci
dence and
in cach of the following directions. If the y star t fro m
Find the equation of hyper bola n prove that
¢ fouble that of the other, the hyperbola, '
s is (6, 0) and transverse
axis 6 one rotates at the rate rod is
s
0), one focu intersection of the two
the locus of point of the
(i) Cen tre is (1, ex 1s (4, 2)
focus is (5, 2) and one vert
(ii) Centre is (3. 2). one the v -axis One rotates
is (-3, 4) and eccentricity rods are coincident on
(iii) Centre is (-3. 2), one vertex | Sole) Suppose two 0)
other about point A(a,
is 5/2 about point O and the
2) and eccentricity is 2
(iv) Foet are (4, 2), (8, y,
> FA
Sol. Ph, k)
focus is (6 0)
(i) Centre ts (1, 0), one
ng v-aX!s.
So, transverse axis is alo
ey? iF =)
erbola 1s i =
Therefore, equation of hyp
at ta, 0)”
Given that 2a = 6
ume /, they
‘ a=3 the que stion, then at some
and focus 18 ‘ae’. If they rotate according to figu re,
Also, distance between centre In the figure From the
ae=6-1=5
are in the position as shown
k
be =are-a° =25- 9=16 7 >
tan g=fand tan 20=
So.
Therefore, equation of hyperbola

ts (ra ~ oy , 2 tan @ ae
16 a-h
or 1 — tan? 9
(5, 2)
(ii Centre 1s (3, 2) and one focus 1s
g line y = 2.
Thus. transverse axis 1s horizontal, alon
—
f 2 ,
(x=3" (v=; =i eek) an
oe
or
Therefore, equation of hyperbola1s ———y-—
————
a
Distance between centre and focus 1s ‘ae’.
ae=5-3=2 oro aMa-h)=h’-K
Also, one vertex 1s (4, 2)
or
a=4-3=]
So, & =e -a =4-153 or 3x* - y° — 2ax = 0
2 ?
2
2 (y -3 2)
Therefore, equation of hyperbola 1s (x — 3)" - Therefore, the locus 1s a hyperbola.
=1.
(iii) Centre 1s (—3, 2) and one vertex 1s (—3, 4). ILLUSTRATION
So, transverse axis 1s vertical, along line x = 3. ty. latus- ¢
Find the coordinates of vertices, foci, eccentrici
+3 (y-2) -] rectum and the equations of directr ices for the hyperbola
Thus, equation of hyperbola 1s 2 ; y_Y Z a
a = 0.
9x7 — 16y? — 72x + 96y - 144
Distance between centre and vertex 1s ‘a’.
a=4-2=2
(SL) We have hyperbola 9° — 16)" ~ 72x + 96v ~ 144 = 0.
Given that, e = 5/2 or (x2 — Bx + 16) - 16(y" — 6 + 9) = 144
=25-4=21
Ba-¢de o VAY 3
2 ol
=f oe
2 _ 92
1s Gy . 4 a
Therefore, equation of hyperbola 4 2!
ae Cleary, centre of the hyperbola 1s C(4, 3).
(iv) Foc are (4, 2) and (8, 2). Transverse axis is y ~ 3 = 0 or y = 3 and conjugate avis is 1-4
So, transverse axis 1s horizontal, along line y = 2. =Oorx=4.,
Also, centre 1s mid-point of foci, which 1s (6, 2) Also, semi transverse axis is a = 4 and semi conjugate anis ts 6 = 3.
_ £2 Bey:
Thus. equation of hyperbola 1s & 2 _W =) =1, From b* = a" (e” — 1), we get eccentricity e = 5/4,
a b
Distance between foci, 2ae = 4. Vertices are at distance ‘a’ units from the centre.
Also, st 1s given that ¢ = 2, So, vertices are (4 — 4, 3) = (0, 3) and (4 + 4, 3) = (8, 7).
so a= |
Foci are at distance ‘ae’ from the centre.
So, be =a¢e-1=4-1=3 Now, ae = 5.
Therefore, equation of hyperbola is (x - 6)? - Fi =| : So, foci are (4 — 5, 3) = (-1, 3) and (4 & 5, 3) = (9, 3).
. a Hyperbola 7.9
jrectriges are at distance ‘ac trom the conjugate axis 84 - 4 12 4

:
[is yu
2 7VIR«-,-- tJI3 7
_ durvetrices are given by “(aru "5" 28 4
hus:
RAE ISVIY -12 F201

\ d- tac
\ _j-tloS
a foe = Oand §\-4=0

[as as
9/4 = 9/2, ad ate AXIS
ath of lagus rectund = Dh a =2 Direetrix lie at distance —
v
from the conjugate ax!
pene
a
cQuaTloN Of HYPERBOLA REFERRED TO TWO sia e Vi3/2 Vi3 4
peRPENDICULAR LINES AS AXES
Thus, distance between conjugate axis and directrix 15 Ts
——
ge ellipse, equation of hyperbola whose transverse axis ts

. bv ayy ey = 0 and conjugate axis 1s L) = aya + by + cy So, equations of directrices are given by 3x — 4, +¢ = 0, where
"pas given by
> +
lc+12| _ 4
ax td) to bX arte, Je+cay v3
la? +); lo, +a;
=], gow [Tho
a b° V13
20
where 6° = a-(e" — 1) n which eis eccentricity of hyperbola. So, equations of directrices are 3x-4y-122 13 =0
The centre of the hyperbola is the point of intersection of the
nes L, and L>.
iLUSTRATION 7.15
ET
ee et te a
DIVISION OF PLANE BY HYPERBOLA
a) >
Find the centre. eccentricity, foci and equations of directrices x i
Consider standard equation of hyperbola — — Qs —l=0.
(3x-4y-12) 2
(4x43y-12) a
the hyperbola - =1
ore DYP 100 225 x y?
Let Sx,
(x, y)y)= S-aol.
ob
Sol. We have
Now, graph of hyperbola divides plane in nwo regions. one
(3x -4) 213)" (4x+ 3y =12}? ' which contains centre (origin) and other which contams foci.
100 225 ”
2
. ~ay-l2 [2x 3y -12 Sa,v) <0
S=0
y3? + (4? V4? +3? S(x,y) >0 SA 0

=]
: 4 - 9 Fy 0) “F,
Transverse axis 1s 4x + 3y - 12 = 0 and conjugate axis is
x-4) - 12 =0.
Caitre 1s intersection of axes of hyperbola, which 1s (=

. .
= al 8 z
dete.a=2 and b = 3
4
a
For origin, S(0, 0) = 0-0-1<0,
Ba eaten d®
a” 4 4 So for all the points lying m the region where
origin hes,
¢r-
vi3 S(x,y) <0.
2 Pherefore, for all the points lying in the regio

n where foci lie
4, fice JB S(x,y) > 0.
| 4
OW, Slope of transverse axis15 ~— = tan , where Gis inclination For hyperbola having — equation ~ = - =-l ‘or
line with X-axis, 3 a a
2 2 ¢
) Cl he on transverse
; axis at distance 3
‘ac’ from the centre. Zr atl=0,Sa,ny-—5-++,
Tn aeodly
erefore, foci are (#84 +13 cos6, =
=
ct: J13 sin 0|
For origin, S(0, 0) 0-041 ~9.
(3) v —v’ <1 represents the exterior region of hyperbola ag

shown 1 the given figure
v
{}—ss
:
As shown in the given figure for points A and & sele

in the region, the midpoint does not necessarily lie in the
same region. ,
So for all the points lying in the region where origin lies,
Sta. v) > 0.
(4) y” <x represents interior region of the parabola y° = x as |
shown in the given figure
Therefore, for all the points lying in the region where foci he,
y a
S(Qx.v) <0
TLLUSTRATION F.16
Each of the four inequalities given below defines a region x
in the xy plane. One of these four regions does not have 4
the following property. For any two points (x,, y,) and a
(x3, V2) n the region, the point ((x, + x3)/2,(v, + y2)/2) is also Ss
y’ ee
in the region. The inequality defining this region is
(1) r+2¥<1 (2) max{ |x|, yl}< 1 Clearly, for any two points A and B in the shaded region,
mid point of AB also lies in the shaded region
aoe
@) x=; <1 (4) y-x<0
“Sol We have given points A(x,, y,) and B(x), 2) and its IMPORTANT PROPERTY OF FOCAL CHORD
midpoint 1s c STE2 EM
: * We know that chord of a hyperbola passing through its focus
1s called focal chord. Consider focal chord PQ of hyperbola
(1) x? + 2) < 1 represents 2 2
interior region of ellipse 5-4 =1 through one of its foci S. This chord has two
a
x? + 2)? = 1 as shown in
segments SP and SQ. The harmonic mean of SP and SO is equal
the given figure. ,
to sem: latus rectum of the hyperbola
Clearly, for any two points
A and B 1n the shaded ] 1 2a
+ =
region, mid point of AB ;
also lies in the shaded This can be proved in the same way as we did in the previous
region. Chapter Ellipse.
(2) Max {}x], bp <1
EQUATION OF CHORD OF HYPERBOLA BISECTED AT
= \|xj<land|y|<1
= -lsxsland-Isy<l
GIVEN POINT
4
This represents the interior region of a square with its sides
Consider hyperbola zk - + =1,
x = +] and y= +] as shown 1m the given figure. ab
J 1,
(-I,1) (I.1)
a
Xx
(1, ; (i, 1)
ve
Clearly, for any two points A and B in the shaded region

mid point of AB also lics in the shaded region
7 Hyperbola 7.11
anon of chord of hyperbola w Nich
is bisected at po ine segment
sie
.) 18 t From poit P(x, y) on the hyperbola, we draw a pa
N
Wy
¥)
> PQ perpendicular to transverse axis. From point 2: ov
a)
Wy tangent to auxiliary circle touching it at /”. If the inclina a
S eWis re M
a ho
qa
a‘b l
radius OP’ with x-axis 1s 0, coordinates of point / are (a cos @
-
_™Wy on asin 6).
x é
ah
= §,, where T=
\ —--=1-]
and sy = 5
y ; Now, in triangle OQ, OG = a sec @, which 15 abscissa 0 :
a 2 -4
a b? als point P.
rate figure, chord QR is
bisected at Point Price, Putting x = a sec @ in the equation of hyperbola, we get y =
Pis midpoint
rshs equ b tan 6
ation can be determined
in the same way a i
2 2
a ous Chapte x10 r Ellipse eer tennin Thus, parametric form of hyperbola 2 ee =I 15
2 2
equation of chord of hyperbola +2
x =asec 6,y=b tan 8,
=-1 which is
psected at point P(x),
¥,) is ap? where @ € [0, 2m) — {7/2, 37/2}.
2 2
mg
2 bh? a’ be
So, variable point on hyperbola — - ro) =1 can be taken as
a
T S P(a sec 6, b tan @). This point is also represented as P(6). Here.
Ingeneral, to get expres Gis called eccentric angle of point P.
sion 7, we replace x? Since hyperbola is unbounded curve, we get unbounded
aby +2) and 2y by (y + y)) by xx,, by yy),
in the equation of conic. functions like sec @ and tan @1n its parametric form
vs: Points P and P’ are called corresponding points on the
N 7. hyperbola and auxiliary circle, respectively.
find the locus of the midpoints Here, we have to be careful about quadrants of points P and P’.
of chord S of hyperbola
3¢ -2)" + 4x - 6y = 0 parallel to y=2 We have following table for quadrants in which point P of
x
auxiliary circle and its corresponding point P on the hyperbola lie.
Sol Using T= S,, the equation of chord
whose midpoint 1s
ih, k) is Quadrant of angle 6 | Quadrant of point Quadrant of point .
3xh~ 2yk + 2(x + h) - 3(y + k) = 3h~?212 P’(a cos 6, a sin 8) P(a sec 0, a tan 6)
+ 4h
— 6K
w =x(3h+2)-y(2k+3)+ | =9 I I I |
II ll ul
Is slope pe 1s oe
343 =
2 as 1
itis1s parallNel
el to y == 2s 2x,
Ml Ill u
> 3h-4k=4
IV IV IN
3 dr-4y = 4. which is required locus
.
xy2
For hyperbola eo =—l, standard parametne form is
a
PARAMETRIC FORM OF HYPERBOLA taken as x = a tan @ and v=bsec
@.
Toget the parametric form of hyperbola, we first defin
e auxiliary
‘ucle of the hyperbola. IMPORTANT PROPERTY OF AUXILIARY CIRCLE
Circle described on focal len
2 wil gth as diameter always touche
s the
Auxihary circle of the hyperbola "a =I 1s the circle auxiliary circle,
a Proof:
‘scribed on transverse axis as a diameter, i.e., circle
for which
‘tices of hyperbola are the end points of diameter. Consider hyperbola having
equation Be mS ae =].
Clearly, equation of this circle is x? + 7 = a’. Qa 7
va
P
ail «Plasee @, btan é
genet Sy Pp
_ 0 C.
a
{ 0 i Qg
(-a, 0)A,! O JA,(a,0)
f }s S(ae, 0)
_ &
\
Auxiliary
circle
P on 1 the hyperbola be (« rsec 0,
Let the coordinates of pomt "
an 30° =
asec 0
b tan 8).
he? ccseipsn'D 8
bola, we have ay aa = cosec’
From the definition of the hyper ad
a
= 3(e",2 —bhy= cosec” 0
SP=c PM= s{aseco-£]€
Now, cosec 2921
=a(c sec O- I) => xe-N2)
a7 +" = a’, having centre
Equation of auaihary circle 1s. 3 4
C,(0. 0) and radius C)Q = 1) = @ C3
=> ey
a di ameter has centre
Circle described on SP as
=> e2
23
. $0 = "= a(esec : 0-1)
(= ‘ + asec 1an8 ) ang radius,
>
- <
a(l+esec @) OF CHORD OF HYPERBOLA

Nowe >= =O” =C,\Q+ C0 EQUATION
“<
x? 2
la? (e+sec0)” + b? tan? @ Consider hyperbola —> - 7 = J

a »b
and C,C, = points P(a sec &, b tan @)
4 4
Equation of the chord passi through the
ng
b
2 and Q(a sec B, b tan B) 1s
a 6+ — tan” @
=— oe +2esecO +sec?
2 a’ —btana = dtan B—btane (a seca)
asec B —aseca
a
= = je + 2esecO+sec’O+(e —1)tan? 6
=> b(tan B — tan @)x — ay(sec B-seca)
a _ ab(tan B seca — tan asec B)
7 5 e? sec’@+ 2esecO+1
=> * sin(B— a) - + (cosar— cos B) = sin B sina
a a
= > (e sec 8+ 1)
x, B-a aB-a = 2»- in B& Bra
a 5 sin ———5
> 2= c
as ag
=C,Q+C0
= 2sin pes
Hence, circle on SP as a diameter touches the auxiliary circle 2 2
externally
> = co a 8 cog UR
a b 2
ILLUSTRATION 7.18
2 2
If PQ is a double ordinate of the hyperbola S _ uae =] ILLUSTRATION 7. 19
a
such that OPQ 1s an equilateral tnangle, O being the centre If (a sec 8, 2 tan 2) and (a sec @, b tan @) are the ends of a focal
of the hyperbola, then find range of the eccentricity (e) of the y é ?_l-e
chord ofof “2-2
*;-=5= |. then prove that tans tans = 774:
hyperbola
Sol. Sol. The equation of the chord joining (a sec @, 5 tan 6) and
7
jond 52) fl)

(a sec @, 6 tan @) is
. Pla sec 0, b tan 6)

|
=a 254
This passes through (ae, 0). Therefore, :
; |
Oo
330° - x
e cos( = 4 = cos ae)
or e=
2 2
Let the hyperbola be “S - a =] and any double ordinate PQ rT etl [a+@
a
cos 5) ) + eos 259)
be such that ? = (a sec @, hb tan 8). i | ars

or et l =-tan 8 tan $
QO = (asec 6, ~ b tan 6)
According to the question, triangle OPQ is equilateral. or tan e tan = + us
hyperbola
Consider the standard equation of
find all the aspects of hyperbola 16,2 — 92
S~ 144, vow ()
I cihe latus rectum of a hyperbo! a forms an equila
teral eP
: rangle with the verter at the center of the hyperbol and the line having equation
jhen find the cecentrteily of the hyperbola. " (2)
The distance between two directives of yam tc
’ rectangular
* pyperbola ts 10 units. Find the distance bet Ween its foes. Solving line and hyperbola, we get
An ellipse and a hyperbola are confocal (} have the same | b?x? — a?(mx + cy = ah’
" fcus) and the conjugate aris of the hyperbola 1s equal - Qacmx - (ac? + ab’y=0 (3)
jo the mmor axis of the clhpse, If e | and e, are the or (b= an’)?
ec- |
centricities of the ellipse and the hyp erbola, respectively Discriminant of this equation 1s
,
then prove that ceZ mt e 2; || D=4asc'm + Marc? + ah\(h? ~d'm’)
If Sand S’ are the foci, C1s the center, and P = 4a*b*(c? + b? - am’)
is a point on | or two
a rectangular hyperbola, show that SP x sip = (CP? | Now, this equation has either two distinct real roots
4, Find the equation of the hyperbola
whose foci are equal roots or has non-real roots.
(8, 3) and (0, 3) and eccentricity is 4/3
) yy D<0
1, Find all the aspects of hyperbola 16x? — 3)? — 32x + 12y |
-44=0.
D=0 / D>0
|
g, Show that the locus represented by x = Sal + i) | / 4 -D>0
y= Lt - 1) 1s a rectangular hyperbola / ; ae
) | a =i ai
<r,
9, Two straight lines pass through the fixed points |
ae ij x
(+a, 0) and have slopes whose product is p>0 Show 4

|
that the locus of the points of intersection of the lines 15 | \ / }
a hyperbola i
f
10. If AOB and COD are two straight lines which bisect one |
another at right angles, show that the locus of a point P If lme meets the hyperbola in two distinct points (4 and B).
which moves so that P4 x PB = PC x PD 1s a hyperbola. | then equation (3) has two distinct real roots.
Find its eccentncity D>0Vore>
am —b*
ll, Find the equation of the chord of the hyperbola 25x° | If line meets the hyperbola in one point (P). 1.¢.. 1f it touches
~ 16)° = 400 which 1s bisected at the point (5, 3) | the hyperbola, then equation (3) has two equal roots
12. Foot of perpendicular from point P on hyperbola 9
a 4
D=0orce=am-b
+7 <> = 1 to its transverse axis 1s N. If A and 4’ | If line doesn’t meet the hyperbola, then equation (3) has
a ob imaginary roots.
are vertices of hyperbola and Q divides AP in the ratio
D<0ore’<am-b
@ : 6’, then prove that NO 1s perpendicular to 4’P.
Vertex A 1s near to point P. |
ILLUSTRATION 7.20
ANSWERS | Find the point on the hyperbola x° — 91" = 9 where the line
l. e = 5/4, Vertices = (0, +4), Foci = (0, +5), L.R. = 9/2, | 5a + 12y = 9 touches it.
Directnx. y = +16/5 Sol. Solving Sx+ 12v=9ory= 2s and + — 917 =9, we have
1+ TF (x-4)? ws (y-3)?_=]
2, Ty 3. 20 6. 5 5 | 7-9 TAY
12 =9
1 e= 19/3, Vertices = (1+ V3, 2), Foc= (1 + V19,2), or r- a0 -5xP =9
Directrix:
x — 1 = +3/V19 or 16x" — (25.7 — 90x + 81) = Lad
10, ¢€= V2
11. 125x
— 48y = 48) or =: 9x" - 90x +225 =0
or yv- 10x +25=0
or x=5
TANGENT TO HYPERBOLA ,-9-25_ 4
A
‘UNE AND A HYPERBOLA . a A a
* line may meets the hyperbola in one point or two distinct So, point of contact is [s, at }
MS or it may not meet the hyperbola at all. 3
EQUATION OF TANGENT TO HYPERBOLA HAVING ILLUSTRATION 7.22

GIVEN SLOPE
Find the equations of tangents to the curve 4x? — 9y* = 1 which ie
We have already learned that if line y = mx + c meets the are parallel to 4y = Sx + 7.
ay
2 ,
2
hyperbola —> ar = lin one point, then c? = a7m? — 6. In that Sol. Let #1 be the slope of the tangent to 4x? - 9y" = 1 Then:
a
case, equation of line 1s m= (Slope of the line 4y = Sv +7) = 3
et og
b b =]
yemvtva'm -b? me | 0, -—|Ul-, ~| (4) We have
174 “19 —
=
a a
These equations are equations of two parallel tangents to where eq=ipype=l 1
a Jb 9
v2 v2 The equations of the tangents are

hyperbola —> -~> =1 having slope m
a »b y= mx + Vem — b?
J J 5, [25
a ie ae 17 -5
or 30x — 24y + V161 =0
6)
Q.' Xx
‘g oO xX
or 24y — 30x = +V161
P XL PN ILLUSTRATION 7.23
If itis possible to draw the tangentto the hyperbola — - —=1

having slope 2, then find its range of eccentricity.
2 2
Solving y = mx + c and hyperbola = os a =1, we get Sol. For the hyperbola
a
For equation (b - a’m)x* ~ 2a*emx - (ac + ab’) =0 voy,
x
=
if D = 0, then we have a be
2
acm _ 2 a*cm_ _ -a™m
2 the tangent having slope m 1s y = mx + yam he
b* —a*m? -c? c The — having slope 2 1s y = 2x +,/4a”—b?, which 1s real if

.y=m -—a?m 4 ve -a?m? +c? ce -b? —~b’20
c c c 2
or Re
xy a
Therefore, line y = mx + c touches hyperbola —--=>Be =] at
aim6 cohUcldSW
a or
or ess
e-l<4
or reeds
For tangent y=mx+Va'm
—b* , point of contact 1s
( 2
-a°m -b? ILLUSTRATION 7.24
( Va? m? — b? ; Ja?m -p | Find the equation of tangents to hyperbola x° — )" — 4x -— 2; =0
having slope 2.
For tangent y = mx—Va'm —b? , point of contact is
Sol. We have hyperbola
(atm b? x? -4y~-2y=
Q or = (x-
2 -(y+ 1)? =3
Va?m? =) Va? m? -
or (a
_2)2
2) _Ot)
2 =] (1)
ILLUSTRATION 7.21
3 3
2 2
Find the value of m for which y = mx + 6 1s a tangent to the Equation of tangents to hyperbola = -> =1 having slope m
iafiebdla tee 1. is given by ab
y=mxtva'm —b?
Sol. Ify=mx+c touches 5 -% = 1, then c? = am’ - b’, So, equation of tangents to hyperbola (1) having slope 2 is given by
Here, c=6, a’ = 100, and 6? = 49. Therefore,
y+1=2(x-2)+V3x4-3
= 100m’ — 49
or ytl=2x-443
or 100m? = 85
Therefore,the equations of tangents to given hyperbola are
or m= it
20 2x —y—2= 0 and 2y-y-8=0.,
Hyperbola 7.15
am -f" ....
jb Lel -— = yy) and 7 FY
pnd the minum value of (2a dsee OF 4 (a tan ay’,
{ €
vie | becomes
So, cquation of tangent y
re .
ace h?
We have KO) = (2a -Asce OY + (a 3 tan OF ilar a
g square of the distance between the points P(2 — a. a) and ayy yj
~@, 3 tan 8)
¥ Phes on the line
wy
end | =
or =a Soa 1=0
i \ +y- a a 0 ( ] ) ab
wv hes on hyperbola XX, VV) |
oT =0;ohee TA 3
a h
‘ vr =
rbola a aR
lo 9 This 1s the equation of tangent to hype
so munimum value of (9) 1s square of the distance between the point (a,, ¥,) on it.
ine (1) and the tangent to hyperbola at pomt P which 1s parallel can also be obtained using
The slope of the tangent
tothe line (1) > 4 differentiation
ei w r.t x, we get
Equations of tangents to 16 ee = 1 having slope—1 are given by Differentiating equation of hyperbola
yer-vt 7
—-s
2 pb? dx
= 0
of rt+ytv7 =0 (2)
and LeyenT = 0 (3) .

dy bx
_. —=— = Slope of tangent to hyperbola at any poin
pistance between lines (1) and (2) 1s onit FY
So, equation of tangent at point (x, ¥,) on the hyperbola

2 2
x
== gp < ES
a
5
eg
yr Vv) = = (r- X)
ILLUSTRATION 7.26 a aa]
Find the locus of the midpoints of the chords of the oer Simplifying, we get cquation as
+)" = 16, which are tangent to the hyperbola 9x — 163° = mM, JV
, ~ a -1=0
a ob
Sol. Equation of hyperbola is —~ -—— =
If (x),¥)) = (asec 8, b tan 6), then equation of tangent becomes
Let (h. k) be the midpomnt of the chord of the circle vty = 16, x(asec@) — y(b tan @) 1=0
So. the equation of the chord will be
bxt+hky=h
+h a’ b
~h WP tk? or
v
—sec@—=~tan@—-|1=0
v
= yr rs
kk
a )
¥ > a)
ae =—l equation of tangent at point

a ~
C=am-b
nN
P(x),3") on is give
Nw
Nw
we
aN
=~
>
=| !
+
——”
ee
nN
k
ec
On
d
1
I
fee
= (+R= 16 - 9K Fquation of tangent at pomt Pla tan @, > see @) on at as

Therefore, required locus 3s Oe 4 yy = 16x’ — Oy". XY ’
—tan0-~ seco +1 =0,
a b
EQUATION OF TANGENT TO HYPERBOLA AT A POINT
ON IT > 2 ILLUSTRATION 7.27
xy 2 at
W € know that liney = mx + c touches hyperbola = = Find the equation of the tangent to the conte a? — we
- Ret 2p
~a 2 _p2 bth Oat(2. 1).
”
=
en,
en ee
_——————<———— 7 Sree Ser

The hne joming points of contact Q and R 1s called chord of
BSOl" The equation of the tangent to view Ryd Qt 11-0
contact
at (2, l) 1s 2 2 .
roy
vy-v-4dat Dette d For hyperbola rari 1, equation of chord of contact
a yr
or Y=
wet pomt P(x), Vy) Is
Ace ee
a by
A tangent to the hyperbola x- 2" = 4 meets x-axis at P and
or T=0
y-axis at Q. Lines PR and QR are drawn such that OPRQ isa
rectangle (where Q is origin). Find the locus of R. Equation of Pair of Tangents from External Point
yy
Sol.” Equation of tangent at point (a sec 4, b tan 6) 1s Equation of pair of tangents to hyperbola — - a
-1=0 from
point P(x;,.¥;) not lying on it 1s given by is
gee 6=— tan @=1
a b
nee ere = 25-35 =
It meets axis at P(a cos 6, 0) and Q(0, - b cot 6) a b? a b? a’ b? }
Now, rectangle OPRQ 1s completed.

or T’=SS,
Let the coordinates of pomt R be (/, &). x
2 }
2
For hyperbola aye 5 two tangents can be drawn

h=acos @andk=-h cot 6 a
é
from a point P(x),¥;) If it hes in the region where points satisty

sec 0= ; and tan @= —
H k
a bt
Squaring and subtracting, we get rvpe
= re =1,
4 2
losiaaan mee
So. required locus is —-—> = 1 Find the equations of the tangents to the hyperbola
ce ae
a 97 = 9 that are drawn from (3, 2).
Sol. The equation of the hyperbola ts

TANGENTS TO HYPERBOLA FROM A POINT NOT y
LYING ON IT AND CHORD OF CONTACT |
2“ 2
9 1
“
The equation of the tangent having slope 7 ts
Consider hyperbola having equation —— if =]
a
yemyt V9m? -1
Two tangents can be drawn to this hyperbola from a point
2 a2 It passes through (3, 2) Therefore,
=~
P(x,,);)1fitlies in the region where points satisfy F - a 2 -1<0
2 =3mtV9m? -]
v4 y
or 4+ 9m?~ 12m = 9m? |
Le@, m=— Or m=oco

12
| ‘Ar
Hence, the equations of the tangents are v— 3 = —(.—-2) andv=3.

—_
to
ILLUSTRATION 7.30
To get the slope of the tangents, we consider one of the Find the equation of pair of tangents drawn from point (4. 3)
4
equations of tangents to hyperbola having slope m v4
- =
to the hyperbola — ~ — = ]. Also, find the angle between

Thus, tangent having equation y = mx + a’m’ -b° passes the tangents 9
through P(x,, y,), then
Sol, Equation of pair of tangents 1s T* = SS;.
or
yy = mx, +Va'm -b?
= (yy ~ mx, y =a'm -b?

Solving this quadratic equation, we get two values of slopes of
fF) Lies
tangents PQ and PR which pass through point ?.
*
Hyperbola__°
2 2 pectoral
ae | We 3
aD
= = «et h /
ah oa
gs § Piers
4
h by which
¢
* >. pp2--d
=
16, = 0, which ts required equation of pair 3
t+ = Moe
yy
x gn- te
of point Ps
a
Therefore, locus
hyperbola.
range on, we have director circle of ;
second-degree equati
. | ay
‘
th sta nda rd od:
cal par
ing wi Alternative meth 4 vo ;=9
god b= Cand h =-2
ola oe ~ re
of tangents to hyperb
between tangents, One of the equations
angle
having slope 71 1S
| Wir —ab [ am 2_ —5 2
b l
e= tan l at
pony
k), then
h the point P(h,
If it passes throug
an” 2(-27 - GX0) k= mh+ vam _b?
7 \3+0|
or (a? _ by =(k- mh
2hkm + +b =0
7
tan” $
3 or | (a ym? - an d >, which are sl
opes of
two roo ts m,
This equation has point Pe
7-31 hy pe rb ola drawn from
+T10N two ta ng en ts to
perpendicular,
(c, d) to the hyperbola Since tangents are
from the point
Tengents drawn mm, = -1
the x-axis.
- = ] make angles @ and B with ke +b?
r
iia
=—l
the value of c? - d°.
a
h-a@
iftana tan = |, then find
ents to the hyperbola having =» R+e=a-b
Sol One of the equations of tang
> 7
sx’ + y =a -D.
So, locus of point Pi
b° It passes through (c, d) So,
slope m 1s v= nex + Va"m" - sts if a > 6.
Clearly, this circle exi
d=mc+ vam? - 6° b
2
az <2ore< 2
-b Fora>b,e@=lt
o © (d- mcy = am a
circle does
a®\m? - 2cdm + d+ 220 7 V2 In this case, director
or (2 5 ie a) For a < b, we have e
poo not exist
or Product of astexonamg= cna
circle as vr r = 0.
which
2 ip 2 For a = b, we have director plane of
55 Fl is the only point on the
or una tan p= ca represents point (0, 0) This
tangents can be drawn.
hyperbola from which perpendicular
o dt+bac-a .
¢-d=at+h = = “s =-lisx
o Director circle for hyperbola
b> a ab
bh? — a’, where
DIRECTOR CIRCLE of ILLUSTRATION se 32

locus of point of intersection tangents drawn to the
Like ellipse in hyperbola also, direct or cir cle On which curve does the perpendicular
circle which 3s called
perpendicular tangents 1S oy
- yr
2 hyperbola a5 a a | intersect?
equ ati on —> ~ iP -1=0
Consider hyperbola having a
of prependicular
hyperbola intersect at
point S01; The locu of the point of intersection
ula r tan gen ts to
‘ Let perpendic a. 2 by
th, k) tangents to ao a = | 1s the director cirele given
gents through point P 1s
So, equation of pair of tan vty
2 2
=a-b
2 2
Hence, the perpendicular tangents drawn to

x” 2 i? 2 7
on, sum of
dicular, 1 above equati Tn
Since tangents arc perpen
Coefficients of x and y” is 0. intersect on the curve
Viy 25 lo 9
7.18 | Coordinate Geometry
ILLUSTRATION 7.33
PROPERTIES OF TANGENT TO HYPERBOLA S10, 1)
many of which Find the equation 0 f hyperbola havi
ng foc! $(2, ly and
We have many properties of tangent to hyperbola
as tts tangent. Also, find the
are similar to the properties of tangent fo ellipse. and a straight line xt+y-9>=0
equation of its director circle
2
\
Consider standard equation of hyperbola ae
| We
Sol. Foci are S(2, 1), S10, 1)
have following properties of tangent has the equation y~ |
Direetny * Directna So transverse axis IS horizontal and
1).
\ ss a y= a Centre is midpoint of SS’, which 1s (6,
e et
So, equation of hyperbola 1s
_ a P
(v-6 (y-IP _,
~ BB -
at
Now, tangent 1s x + y— 9=0.
on the tangent 1s fH?
sree Product of length of perpendicular from foci
(-ae, OF =*+YN oO a
| fsFy(ae, 0)
IN jie Bata, lO + = -( 6
Sys
a a vale
arAM
Q; a b? =6
Distance between foci, 2ae = 8
ae=4
Now, a+b =a’e’
e Feet of perpendiculars from foci upon any tangent lie on
=> a+6=16
the auxiliary circle.
In the figure, tangent is drawn to hyperbola at point P on tt.
=> a@=10
Feet of perpendiculars from foci F, and F, on the tangent Therefore, equation of hyperbola 1s
are M, and M, which he on auxiliary circle. (- 6 (- L,
¢ Product of perpendiculars from foci upon any tangent of 10 6
hyperbola 1s equal to square of the semi-conyugate axis Equation of director circle is
Here, F,M, * FM, = 6°. (x 6 -+(y- 1% =a? -B?
e Length of tangent between the point of contact and the or = (x - 6) +Q- 17 =4
point where it meets the directrix subtends right angle at
the corresponding focus x 7-2
~ GONGEPT, APPLIGATION EXERCISE
In the figure, tangent meets directnx x = is at Q,
1. Find the equation of tangent to the hyperbola 16x — 251
So, PQ, subtends nght angle at corresponding focus F. | = 400 perpendicular to the line x - 31 = 4
. a
Also, tangent meets directnx x =-— at Q, . Tangents are drawn to the hyperbola 3x7 — 2)" = 25 from
eS)
e
the point (0, 5/2) Find their equations
So, PQ, subtends right angle at corresponding focus F,
¢ Tangent at the extremities of latus rectum passes through Find the common tangent to 9° — Lévy" = 144 and
the corresponding foot of directrix on major axis. e+? =9,
e Chord of contact w.r.t. any point on the directrix passes Find the locus of a point P(@, 8B) moving under the |
through the corresponding focus. condition that the line vy = a. + # is a tangent to the
Tangent at point P on the hyperbola bisects the angle
>
e
between two focal radii of point P. hyperbola xi - _ =]
ab
In the figure, tangent at P bisects the angle FPF.
5. A tangent to the hyperbola 4x7 — 91" = 36 meets the aes
e The above property spells out the reflection property of
hyperbola. at points A and B. Find the locus of midpoint of 4B
If incident ray emanating from one of the foci gets reflected 6. A point P moves such that the chord of contact of the
by the hyperbola, then reflected ray passes through the parr of tangents from P on the parabola v7 = 4ax touches
other focus. the rectangular hyperbola x* - v= c? Show that the
In the figure, incident ray from F, strikes the hyperbola at °
py : ve }
point P. Then the reflected ray passes through the focus F}. locus of P is the ellipse Mts.
ce (ay |
Similarly, if incident ray is FP, then reflected ray passes
through F, 7. Iftangents to the parabola” = dav intersect the hyperbola |
5
¢ Image of onc of the foci in the tangent lies on the line x y
2 5 = 1 at and B, then tind the locus of point of |
joining other focus and point of contact. a .
b~
In the figure, image R of focus F in the tangent lies on the intersection of tangents at 4 and B.
line joining focus /*, and point of contact P.
Hyperbola 7-19
a a : 7
¢. If the chords of contact of langents from two points X ad & es bs =0

2 >
The combined equation of asymptotes1s | + hb)\a b
(4, 2) 2) an and (2, (2, 1) 1) t to :
the hyperbola xae ey
J =| arent F
voy?
oo >>>
ae he =
nght angle. then find the eccentricity of the hyperbola,
2 2 Thus, equation of hyperbola and that of combined equation of
9 Iffromany
point P(x ,.1, onthe hyperbola cc,
pair of asymptotes differ by constant (k) only.
ap unique pair of
For given equation of hyperbola, we have
’ x
tangents are drawn to the hyperbola x 2 1 r2
- “ae 1, then asymptotes
rable
prove that corresponding chord of
contact touches the
But for given pair of asymptotes, there exist smume
22 2 hyperbolas having same eccentricity and centre
between
another branch of the hyperbola il ~ —_ = The curves of hyperbola for different values of k lie
b
10. Let p be the perpendicular distance from the these two asymptotes as shown in the figure.
centre C |
2
xy 32
of the hyperbola a ra = | to the tangent drawn
at a
RIS
x
point R on the hyperbola. If S and S’ are the two foci of the
2
hyperbola, then prove that (RS + RS’)? = 4a? [ S 5]
:
e |
ANSWERS
: |
a =-3x+V209
a 2
Dads
=—+-— be
a3 a
2 2
2 15 x y
3. py=s3yaxt mie
We observe that when x and y tend to infinity, the curves of
hyperbola flatten and approach to the asymptotes
5.
9
—s-
5 = 1
1 oh Pals
. 7% Technically, to trace the hyperbola we should first draw
4x° oy" a the asymptotes and then draw the arcs of the hyperbola which
g | approach to asymptotes at infinity.
Also, we observe that axes of hyperbola are angle bisectors of
the pair of asymptotes
3
ASYMPTOTES OF HYPERBOLA We know that for hyperbola ~ - = =k. values of slopes of
(TANGENT AT INFINITY) a
We know that an asymptote is a line that a curve approaches, as

itheads towards infinity. ein
tangents lie in | --,
FE)
-—
a
]U] —, ©
a
|,
In other words, asymptote of a curve is a line such that the b ws

distance between the curve and the line approaches to zero when So, slopes of asymptotes | +— | are limiting values of slopes
one or both of x and y coordinates approach to infinity Thus, of tangents. a
asymptotes are tangents to curve at infinity This fact can be seen in the following figure.
x2 2 y
Let
y= mx + cbe the asymptote of the hyperbola — - o k L, lL, ob
m==
Solving this line with hyperbola, we get a i Q
Ge adm’) 2? —2a’mex — a?(kb? + c*)=0 (1)

Ly
Dipping 2
or (b’ —a’m*)x—2a*mc ~ woe 0 (2)
x 0 ma
If both roots of eq. (1) tends to infinity, then from eq. (2), we
Must have . &
b? - @'m* = 0 and 2a°'mc = 0
m=-=»
b? b a
mm = — or m=+t-— andc=0
a a b
Line L, has slope greater than —b and L,
has slope less than
Therefore, equation of line becomes y = ae or bxtay=0.
a =
b
+
ae Clearly, we find the tangents to

These are equations of asymptotes of hyperbola, which pass hyperbola parallel to these
through the centre of the hyperbola. lines (translate the lines and chec
k).
7.20 _ Coordinate Geometry
ILLUSTRATION 7.34
than -*
Line Z, has slope less than - and L, has slope more Find eccentricity of the
the hyperbola with asymptotes
¢
the hyperbola
Translating these lines, we find that they intersect 3x + 4y =2 and 4x — 3y = 2
in two ports but, never touch the hyperb ola.
ola 1s
point P lying Sol. Since the asymptotes are perpendicular, the hyperb
Further, (wo tangents drawn to hyperbola from 15 V2
im the region between the asymptotes and
the branches of the rectangular and, hence, eccentricity
ola
hyperbola are to the same branch of the hyperb 7.35
ILLUSTRATION
has 3x 4y+7=0
Find the equation of the hyperbola which
and whic h passe s through
and 4x + 3y + 1 =Qas its asymptotes
the origin
ptotes Is
, Sol. The combined equation of the asym
(3x — 4y + 7)(4x + 3y + 1)=0
(ly
12x? - Ixy — 127 + 31x + l7y+7=0
* a ee
or
the combined equation of
Since the equation of hyperbola and
the equation of the hyperbola
its asymptotes differ by a constant,
may be taken as
P lying in the
Two tangents drawn to hyperbola from point 12— 2 Pep — 12+ ? Bix + N7+ y k= 0 (2)
of hyperbola
region between the asymptotes where the branch 0), we have k= 0.
Bay hyperbola. As (2) passes through the origin (0,
does not he are to the different branches of the the requi red hype rbola 1s
\1
Hence, the equation to
4
-
12x? — Ixy — 12y? + 31x + 17y=0

~
ILLUSTRATION 7:36
of the asymptotes of the hyperbola
Find the equations
+ BY + 14x + 22y + 7=0.
3x2 + 10xy
the combined
Sol. Since the equation of hyperbola and
the equations of
equation of its asym ptotes differ by a constant,
the asymptotes should be
(1)
PROPERTIES OF ASYMPTOTES 3x2 + 10xy + By? + 14x + 22v+4=0
hyperbola pair of straight lines.
e Theacute angle @ between the asymptotes of the Now, / ts to be chosen so that (1) represents a
> >
Comparing (1) with
ze de = kis given by
an 2 ax Qhxy + by? + gx + 2fy+c=0
+ ? (2)
>_(-2) we have
a a 2ab | a=3,b=8,h=5,g=7,falle=s
We know that (2) represents a pair of straight lines if
tan 0= ' fy ee
a\ a abc + 2hgef— af? — bg’ - ch* = 0

x 25=0
or 3xBxAt2Zx7X 1 xX5—3x 121-8 x 49-1
7° ran or A= 15
2 + 10xV
Hence, the combined equation of the asymptotes 1s 30°
Also, a_| =tan @=
2 10
+ 8y? + 14x + 22v + 15=0.
}+tan ae
joe
2 2
ILLUSTRATION 7.37
ran) Comoe e -1
2 3a If a hyperbola passing through the origin has 3x — 4y-1=0
and 4x — 3y — 6 = as tts asymptotes, then find the equations
e
~ xe!2 of its transverse and conjugate axes
qa’, equations of
For rectangular hyperbola x= y = Sol. The axes of a hyperbola are the bisectors of the pair of
y= +x which are perpe ndicu lar.
asymptotes are asymptotes
nt inter cepte d between the
e The length of any tange The transverse axis 1s the bisector which contains the origin and
the point of contac t.
asymptotes 1s bisected at is given by
nt and asymptotes
e Area of triangle formed by any tange 3x-4y- 1 qh TS
2 2
= -= =], this area 1s ab 5 5
1s constant For hyperbola
a b or x+y-5=0
sq units
~onjugate
oe
axis: ts Hyperbola_ 7.21
he
gyi EM wapag ;
So, point ? lies in one of the :regions y
four formed. ;
by asymp totes
ae s where branch of hyperbola does not he
,-) eke V
GURPTION 7.36 4y+ ty | 4c Ww
2 ?
The tangent at any point Poona hype H/
rbola x = = 1 with
entre C, meets the asymptotes im QO and a~ hb?
f mnangle COR is constant. Also, R. Prove that area An _ 7 ix

prove that P is midp
v
oint JO
of OR.
/
sole Let point P be (a yf
sec 6, b tan @)
r.
: x ,
rquation of tangent at point P is —secg ~ tan 6=]
a
b
Equations of asymptotes are y = +— y : Equations of asymptotes are
a
solving asymptotes with tangent, we get 4x —3y=0 (2)
( a b
and = 4x+3y=0 (3)
Q= sec@—tan@’ sec@—tan@
eo
If point P lies on the line (2), then 4a@— 3(@ + 1) =O or a@=3
If point P lies on the line (3), then 4a + 3(a@ + 1) = 0 or @ = -3/7
md R= rae sec +tan@’ sec@+tan@ Thus, a € (-3/7, 3)
ILLUSTRATION 7.40
0 0
qa b From a point P(1, 2). pair of tangents are drawn to a hyperbola,
ile6-tang “= Se one tangent to each arm of hyperbola. Equations of asymptotes
. Area of tnangle COR = —||S®C@-tan@ — sec@-tand
2 a - of hyperbola are V3x-y+5=Oand V3x+y- 1 = 0. Find
secO+tan@ the eccentricity of hyperbola.
sec@+tan@
0 0 Sol, We know that if angle between asymptotes 1s @. then
a] a b eccentricity of hyperbola 1s a
6
2} secO-tan@ sec@+tan@
Acute angle between asymptotes V3 x — y+ 5 = 0 and
a 5
| 1
sec@—tan@ sec@+tan@ V3 xt y-1=008 5
= ab, which 1s constant
Let L,(x, y) = V3x-y+ 5 and L,(x, v) = V3xt+y- 1.
Also, midpoint of OR is
L,(0, 0) = 5 and L(0, 0) =-1
a + a 5
secO-tan@
_ b Also, aya, + b\by = (V3 V3.) +(—1) (1) =2>0.
secO+tan@ sec@~-tan@ sec@+tan@
2 Thus, origin lies in acute angle
, 2
Now, L,(1, 2) >0 and L,(1,2)>0
= (asecé, btan@) , which is point P So, (1, 2) lies in obtuse angle formed
by asymptotes.
Since tangents drawn from point (1
, 2) are to different branches
of hyperbola, branches of hyperbol
a lie in acute angles formed
by asymptotes.
x
on different branches of the hyperbola or
2 2 Therefore, eccentricity of hyperbola
is e = sec & Seas
;
a
a =1, then find
the values of a. 6 3
CONCERT APPLICATION
{Sol Point P(a@, o + 1) lies on the line EXERCISE 7.4
L Find the angle between the
y=xt+] (1) asymptotes of the hyperbola
xy
Itis given that from point P two tangents can be drawn to different
x2
branches of hyperbola — — = =]
2
2. Find the asymptotes of the
curve xy — 3¥= 2y=0,
A
3. If asymptotes of hyperbola biscet the angles between ey

Equation of normal to hyperbola a Re at point
the transverse axis and conjugate axis of hyperbola, then
P(a tan O, b sec 0) is
what is the eccentricity of hyperbola? P |
2 4 i by
4. The asymptote of the hyperbola *5 - re =] form with any = ponies =a +h
a 2 tan@ sccO
tangent to the hyperbola a triangle whose area 1s a’ tan A |
in magnitude then find its eccentricity. EQUATION OF NORMAL TO HYPERBOLA HAVING
GIVEN SLOPE B xt
§. Uf the foc of a hyperbola lie on y = \ and one of the |
asymptotes is v = 2a, then find the equation of the The cquation of normal to the given hyperbola a lat
hyperbola. given that it passes through (3, 4). point P (a sec @, b tan 8) 1s
ax cos 9 + by cot @=a + bh?
7 _ ANSWERS
__asind a+h
1. tan”! —
24
2. 1-3 =Oandy-2=0 = 4 b bcotd
_3. V2 4. e=seck $. 2x7 +2y?-Sxy+ 10=0 Let -—sin0=m
b
sing=~—
NORMAL TO HYPERBOLA
aoe,
-b
EQUATION OF NORMAL TO HYPERBOLA AT A POINT cot@=+ a
bm
use
ON IT — Hence, the equation of the normal becomes
Equation of tangent to hyperbola ae
aa = =1 at point P(x,, y,) 4g?
+ a
pci I cneremne |-2.2)
Xx,
on it 1s =i
~)Y
-1=0. a? — bm? b’ b
@ bd
b?x, ILLUSTRATION 7.41

Slope of tangent 1s —
ay, Find the equation of normal to the hyperbola r-W =Tat
M4 point (4, 1)
| Sol. Differentiating the equation of hyperbola r-n=7

w.r.t x, we get
dy
2x — 18y— =
ar
oe 2%
dx 9y
ad or
Now, slope of normal at any point on the curve is -—- =-—.
P} x
Therefore, the slope of normal at point (4, 1) 1s
(-) =?
9
ay
Thus, slope of normal to hyperbola at point P 1s — 2
So, equation of normal at point P 1s *t Yay 4
ay Therefore, the equation of normal at point (4, l)is y-1=—- “ (x-4)
YVrY ra + (xX) or 9x + 4y = 40
x
Alternative method:
2 2
=> Be gh). at yy eee
x a4) For hyperbola — — rey = |, equation of normal at point P(x). ¥)) is
a
If (x),¥,) = (a sec 6, b tan 6), then equation of normal 1s
ax x
OY Pa?
i iy 2 2
xy vy
alles yy =a +b? . xy
sec@ tan@ So, for given hyperbola 7376 =1, equation of nonnal at
point P(4, 1) is
Clearly, transverse axis is normal to hyperbola at tts vertices
Normal other than transverse axis, never passes through focus, Ix
ie IM ’ =74l
which can be verified by putting x and y values of the foci in the 4 I 9
equation of normal. => 9x + dy = 40
. <a
Hyperbola_ 7-23
b tan 0) to the
+RATION 7.42 Sol. Phe equation of the normal at Pla 2 sec 2O,
us given hyperbola 1s av cos 0 + hy cot I~ (ar F b’).
3? - yor |
ind the equation of normal to the hyperbola
havin slope 1/3 This meets the transverse axis, 1¢ , the x-axls at G.
Differentiating the equation of hyperbola 3\° = y? = 1 So, the coordinates of G are ( Ker + bh’ ya} sec 9,9)
, —a, 9),9)
(~a,
arc (a, 0) and
; rv we gel The coordinates of the vertices 4 and A’
A: respectively,
(a - a =0 ha
} : a} (a+
at
a sec a)
ate sec
A'G= -at
AG:
aA 3\
a a oY =(-at ae’ sec 0) (a + ae’ sec 1)
Let the point on the curve where the normal has slope 1/3 be = a(e! sec? - 1)
ae) Therefore,
ILLUSTRATION 7.44
Bie eel ory, =x, (1)
dv 3x, 3 2 y
Normals are drawn to the hyperbola * a 1 at points 4;
also, P lies on the curve. Therefore,
Bxpey el (2) and 6, meeting the conjugate axis at G, and G3, respectively
24 ;
If 0, + 8 = m/2, prove that CG,-CG, = 2 < where C is the
solving (1) and (2), we get
center of the hyperbola and ¢ is its eccentricity
Sol. The normal at point P(a sec @,, b tan 4,) 1s

ax cos 9, + by cot 6, = (a + b’)
Therefore, the points on the curve are (+v2 2 ) It meets the conjugate axis at Go, af O° tan A
Hence, the equations of normal are

The normal at point Q(a sec 65, b tan @3) 1s
Elz]
] ]
ax cos 6, + by cot 6, = (a + b’)
> >
It meets the conjugate axis at G4 0, a+b

“5 tan .| Therefore.
and e-al-s)
a ae eC:
2 ts b 2
or ¥2(x-3y) =4 and V2(x-3y)= 4 (a* + 6°)?
pe (- 0, - 6 ==)
Alternative method:
2\2
2 ,
2 a‘(1 +85]
Equation of normal to hyperbola a a = a
a Be = 1 having slope m 1s bh
= ae"
e-]
ILLUSTRATION 7.45
Let P(6, 3) be a point on the hyperbola
+ - x =1. If the
ar ~
normal at point P interss ects$ the v-avis
AXIS at (9, 0), th Sn fii 4
eccentricity of the hyperbola.
oni
? ay
Sol. Normal at (6,3) to the hyperbola
= ~ i =l1s
ay . .
ILLUSTRATION 7.43 2 3 by _ 2 2
3 a +b
If the
normal at P(#) on the hyperbolae ~~
x : -
=
wR — ie 1 meets the It passes through (9, 0),

|
Wansverse axis at G, then prove thatAG:A'G (ce sec - 1),

where 4 and 4’ are the vertices of the hyperbola 9a" 5 ,
sa +h
6
7:25, Coordinate Geomeyiy) __ ee of Ellipse and Hyperbola
Orthogonal Intersection
and hyperbola, tangent and
We have learned that in ellipse
on
between focal lengths of point
normal are biscctors of angles
the curve
a are confocal, then they
role Hence, if ellipse and hyperbol
if ellipse and hyperbola
intersect orthogonally. Converscly,
confocal
c=
3
5
intersect orthogonally, then they are
V
ILLUSTRATION 7-46 Ly ii
Prove that any hyperbola and its conju
gate hyperbola cannot t,
have common normal Py
2> 2 F, F,
v a
Sol. Consider hyperbola —> — rs =1.
7 a
is
Equation of normal to hyperbola at pomt P(asec@, btan@)
axcos@ + bycot@ =a" +b° (1)
2 y?y As shown in the figure, ellipse and hyperbola
are confocal
- gd =-l at point they are intersecting
Equation of normal to hyperbola having common foc1 at F and F, Therefore,
e and hyperbola at
O(atan 9, bsec) 1s a orthogonally at point P, 1.e, tangents to ellips
L, 1s tangent to.
axcotg@+ bycos@= a+h
(2) point P are perpendicular to each other. Line
Line L, 1s tangent to ellipse and *
hyperbola and normal to ellipse
If Eqs (1) and (2) represent the same straight line, then
normal to hyperbola at point P
cote? _ cos@ =|
cos@ coté
ILLUSTRATION
7-47
=> tan @ = sec @ and sec@ = tan8 A ray emanating from the point (5. 0) is mcident on the
=> sec? @- tan” @ = tan? @-sec* @=-1, which 1s not hyperbola 9x2 — 16)? = 144 at the point P(8, 3V3 ) Find the
possible equation of the reflected ray after first reflection.
Thus, hyperbola and its conjugate hyperbola cannot have common
|Sol. Given hyperbola 1s
normal
x? yi
—-—=]| qd)
16 9
IMPORTANT PROPERTY OF NORMAL Here,
a= 4 and b=3
We know that tangent bisects one of the angles between two
So, foci are (+Va* +b?, 0) = (45, 0).
focal lengths of pomt of contact P.
Since two angle bisectors of pair of lines are perpendicular, Incident ray through F,,(5, 0) strikes the ellipse at point p(s. 33 ) ;
normal at P will be another bisector of angle between these focal Therefore, reflected ray will go through another focus F,(—5. 0).
lengths So, reflected ray 1s line through points F, and P, which is
¥ 33 x - 13y + 15¥3 =0.
ILLUSTRATION 7.48
Normal to a rectangular hyperbola at P meets the transverse
axis at N. If foci of hyperbola are S and S’, then find the value
SF oN
This fact can be proved by showing that S’P S'N
FN‘ FLN=F,\P° FP
SN _S'N - _|SN-S‘N|___ |_ Ss” oe
Also, this proves that incident ray from focus F, after getting pal
SP S’P | SP-S'P| |SP-S’P|
reflected by hyperbola at point P, passes through another focus /*}.
Hyperbola_ 7.25
So, eecentnicity of hyperbola 1s V2

ymptotesy = 0 and
j, ; If any line perpendicular to the transverse axis cuts the | Axes of hyperbola are angle bisectors 0 f as
3 3 < of
’ \ = 0, which are x —y = Oand x Fy = 9.
1s transverse axIs
hyperbola > — 7,2 = 1 and the conjugate hyperbola For the above hyperbola, linc v — ) ~ 0
2 ae hyperbola. So, vertices of hyperbola are (+c, +c)
*5%
\ gr
a tee 1 at points P and Q, respectively, then prove Centre of the hyperbola 1s O(0, 0)
centre Is V2c .
Distance of vertices A(c, c) and A(-c. —c) from
ad
that normals at P and Q meet on the x-axis. |
5 x 2 <
; | So, length of transverse axis 1S 2V2c (= 2a) which
1s same as
2, Anormal to the hyperbola gi pi | meets the axes at |
length of conjugate axis.
Mand N and lines MP and NP are drawn perpendicular from centre 0 n the
Now, foci lie at distance V2ce (= ae) or 2c
1o the axes meeting at P Prove that the locus of P 1s the linex-y=0
= (a? + by? V2, = V2c) i
Therefore, foci are F(V2c, J2c) and F,(-
hyperbola ay? _ by?
3, Prove that the locus of the point of intersection of the 2c

Directrices lie at distance 7 = :“) or c from the centre
tangents at the ends of the normal chords of the hyperbola
529 a)
y- y=a'is a(y-x)= ay"
So, equations of two directrices are X + y= tV2c
253
:
4, Find the value of m, for which the line y = mx + 1S Parametric form of hyperbola is x = cl, }' = i
where
>
2 |
~ _ 2 =] te R- {0}.
anormal to the hyperbola
16 9 If the branches of hyperbola lie in second and fourth quadrants,
then equation of hyperbola will be xy = -c”
5, Normal is drawn at one of: the extremities of the Jatus | yy
aw UY
rectum of the hyperbola 5 — ro = | which meets the
a x+y 0 x=}
axes at points A and B Then find the area of triangle OAB \ /

\ yj
(O being the origin). \ Lf
2 Ve
xwe=-C NY
= A
ANSWERS =
O-
\
ad a
5. Area = sare* 7
So \ \
“\
Transverse axis of this hyperbola 1s x + y = 0 and vertices are

HYPERBOLA HAVING ASYMPTOTES (tc, Fc),
AS COORDINATE AXES Foci are (+V2c, + 2c) and directrices are ¥- = +2.
| The equation of pair of coordinate axes 1s xy = 0. If the asymptotes of rectangular hyperbola are x = @ and y = f,
Now, if this is the pair of asymptotes to hyperbola whose then equation of hyperbola will be
branches are lying in first and third quadrants, then the equation - B)= +e
(x - ay
y
of the hyperbola will be of the form xy = c’.
Va ee
| (v-ayr-By=c
a, B) y=8
O i eX
¥4
2
es ie
Say |
ae ae
_ | 4 (a£) v=8B
H
O —y
Clearly, this is rectangular hyperbola as asymptotes are
Perpendicular
7.26 Coordinate Geometry =e 4
AND NORMAL TO H YPLRBOLA pls

TANGENT )
of t angent at port POM
For hyperbola vw ~ ¢7 = 0, equation
on tt is
wptuyeBoge? 3
So, equation of tangent at (2, 8) 18
2
y-8=-4(r- 2)
or yd yt =2e°=9
. 2 +» 4x+y-16=0
or T= 0, where T= wy ty) = 207
WHT be Wy dM Te 8) is x — 4y + 30=0.
Equation of normal at point PQ. Vy) (vii) Equation of normal at (2,
‘ite d of contact w.rt point (2, 3)
c get the equation of (viii) Equ ation of chor
Replacing 1, by ef and vy by 7. we can T=0
r ‘f.
tangent and normal in terms of paramete 2y+3x 16-0
=>
ILLUSTRATION 7.49 3x+2y-32=0

=
at point (5, 6) 1s
Consider hyperbola vv = 16 to find the
following.
(ix) Equation of chord which gets bisected
(i) Coordinates of vertices T=S,
(ii) Length of transverse axis

(iii) Coordinates of foci
wg ae 6 X _ 16 =(5)(6)-16
(iv) Length of latus rectum 6xt+5y=60
=>
(v) Equations of two directrices nt having slope —2, we
Equation of tangent at point (2, 8)
(x) To find the equation of tange
to —2.
(vi) differentiate the curve and compare derivative
(vii) Equation of normal at point (2, 8)
Then, we get
(viii) Equation of chord of contact w.r.t poimt (2, 3)
Equation of chord which gets bisected at point (5, 6) dW__¥__»
Equation of tangent having slope —2 ax x
Equation of normal having slope 2 y=2x
Solving this with hyperbola, we get points PB. 2V8)
We have hyperbola xy = 16
Clearly. transverse axis 1s x — » = 0 and conjugate axis 1s and Q(-V8, —2V8) on the hyperbola where slope of
atTy=90. tangent 1s —2.
Vertices are points of intersection of transverse axis x — V Equation of tangent at point P Is
= 0 and hyperbola.
So. vertices are A (4, 4) and A’(-4, +4).
yo 9/8 ==2(x= 8)
=> 2kx+y= 4V8
(ii) Length of transverse axis 1s Ad’ = 8/2 (= 2a).
Equation of tangent at point Q 1s
(iii) Foci lie at distance ‘ae’ from centre on line x — y = 0.
Now, ae = 4/2J/2 =8 yt+2V8 =-2(x+ V8)
Therefore, foci are F(4V2, 4/2) and F,(-4V2,-4V2) : > 2xty=-4yv8 .

2p
(iv) Length of latus rectum = aa =2a = 8/2 (xi) We have ay =
a ay \
(as a = b for rectangular hyperbola)
dx ox
(v) Each of the directrices lies at distance o(=4) from
&
centre and 1s parallel! to the conjugate axis x + y = 0. x=2y
So, equation of two directrices are X+ y= +4/2 Solving this with hyperbola, we get points A(2V8, JS)
(vi) Equation of tangent at point (2, 8) 1s and B(-2V8, - V8) on the hyperbola where slope of
T=0 normal ts 2.
2y+8 Equation of normal at point -4 is
=3 2
ioe
= 4r+y~16=0
y~ VB =2(+- 28)
Alternatively, we can differentiate the equation of curve => 2a-ve= 3V8
to gel the slope of tangent Equation of normal at point B 1s
Then, we get
d,
vt V8 =2(++2V8)
pase red)
dx => w-ys =3/8
Hyperbola 7.27
LLUSTRATION 7.50
|
#8 we oec 4 —.€ | and
Let the coordinates of A, B and C be , |. fer. | L
A triangle has its vertices On a rectangular hyperbola. Prove
hat the orthocentre of the angle
also lies on the same ‘
pyperbela [es, ps | . respectively
3
c 7 €
sol. Consider hyperbola yy =
jerthe vertices of tangle 4BC which are lying the hyperbola be Slope of CA = magi
OPE 7 ch —ch hh
Al ch. <} af.) and C} cr, y,£ |

4 ly Slope
of CB = -—-
Joget the orthocentre, we find the equations of two altitudes and Given that CA L CB
wlve.
e ¢
ht 1
Slope of BC = ——+- =-__
ch, — ch, Tat, = cape [== (1)
a hly
Slope of altitude 4D = 1,1,
I
M 4] B Slope of AB = -——
hla
Also, differentiating the equation of curve, we get
dy y_ ce/t_ 1
/
aA Ps.
FE . | A C a ox a fF
<~ H x a 3
5 hE H Slope of tangent to curve at point C = — as
5)
Hence, from Eq (1), normal at C 1s parallel to AB.
e
ILLUSTRATION 7.52
Equation of altitude AD 1s Prove that product of parameters of four concyclic points on

the hyperbola xy = c’ is 1. Also, prove that the mean of these
four concyclic points bisects the distance between the centres
4 of the hyperbola and the circle
8h C=Hhyx- cht, (1) ' Sol. Given equation of hyperbola is wv = c*.
Sumilarly, equation of altitude BE is
Let four concyclic points on the hyperbola be CH S 12k
bY— C= hhhx
— ct, Ft, (2) Let the equation of the circle through points 4. B, C and D be
Solving (1) and (2), we get the orthocentre u- »7 Chhb x+y? +2ex+2fr+d=0 (1)
hb Solving circle and hyperbola, we get
Clearly, orthocentre lies on the same hyperbola, 1.e., on xy = c
5. 6 Cc
xt z +2 gx es +d=0
ILLUSTRATION 7.51 => xt+ 2ex° + de + ferry t ch =0 (2)
If A, B and C are three points on the hyperbola xy = c* such Product of roots, v1.31, = 4
that AB subtends a right angle at C, then prove that AB 1s
Parallel to normal to hyperbola at point C
i
Sol, ys (€f)) (cts) (cy) (ety) = 8

= ibiy=l
4 4
Now, mean of points (+, v,),
Xi: Die
#= 1, 2, 3,4, ts 2
From Eq. (2), 4 4
Ap tx tay bay =~ 2e
(3)
4 4.2 a , 2 , Let the centroid of triangle OAB be (A, k). Then,

Also, Xs — o> eee (-24?) = -2f Wtry
rel wt VVavaly 4
her
Vet vy my ty) 2
Lu f and ok > - or = 4
4+ 2 _ 3k42
or cay )
4 4
La 2% So, 3h = x, + 1 13k #2) 4 3k ae

-
Thus, ):=,
4
=L—
4
-(-£.-4]
2 o
a (8; 2) +2
[Using (1) and (2)]
2 ——
GONCEPT APPLICATION EXERCISE .7.6 OF 6ku3h+4 6ht+3k+2 qr
Simplifying, we get the final locus as 6x? — Oxy — 6)% ~ 3x ~ dy
I, Find the Serinntales and axes of hyperbola having |
equation vy — 31-4. +7 =0. | = 0 which 1s a hyperbola passing through the origin, as een |
2. The chord PQ of the rectangular hyperbola ay = a? meets , and A #0.
the y-axis at.4. Point C is the midpoint of PQ and O is the | See eo oe SE
ongin. Prove that the triangle ACO 1s isosceles.
(EXAMPLEwet Paes 1°
7i2, we, 133
NM 7
74,
Prt Ltt
es
le |
3. If P(x). 4). O (X2, V2), R (xy, Vy) and S (ag, y4) are four Let P be.a point on the hyperbola x — y = a’, where aisa
concychie points on the rectangular hyperbola xy = ce, parameter, such that P is nearest to the Jine y = 2x. Find the
then prove that the orthocentre of triangle POR is locus of P
(=X, —V4)-
4. Prove that four normals can be drawn from a point to ' Sol: | Consider any point P(a sec 0, a tan 9) on v-y=¢
hyperbola vv = c If the sum of the slopes of the normal This point will be nearest to y = 2x if the tangent at this point 1s
from this point to the hyperbola is equal to A (A € R’), parallel to y = 2x.
then find the locus of point P | Differentiating x” — y? = a’ w.rt. x, we get
ANSWERS dy _x
dx ¥
1. Asymptotes 1—3 =0,y-4=0 |
Transverse axis: x-y+1=0 Es (a sec 6, a tan 6) = cosec @
Conjugate axis.x + y—7=0
The slope of y = 2x is 2 Therefore,
4. xP =AC os
cosec
6= 2 or = —
a
e E
Solved Examples 7h
Thus, p=(asec™,atan™]
—_— —— ny ee 6 6
EXAMPLE 7.1 EN - =
EN
wrarn ft
A variable line y — mx — | cuts the lines x = 2y and y = —2x at 1.€&, h=r= \y andk = See aa 7
points A and 8. Prove that the locus of the centroid of triangle
OAB (O being the ongin) is a hyperbola passing through the
origin. bre’ Sieihshes a |
SoL ys + .
Show that midpoints of focal chords of a hyperbola ie = =

y=-2x
% AKA 2) ~ | lie on another hyperbola having same eccentncity.
we Xx PSoly) Let the chord 4B be bisected at point P(A, k).

i yAa<|] ? So, equation of chord AB 1s
ge ~ B(x, y2)
av=mx—]| re = - ra (Using T= S,)
4
Solving the variable line y = mx — 1 with x = 2y, we get

2
1 Im —T © he oh k?
Solving with y = -2x, we get aoa pb
Therefore, locus of point P is
J
2 oe x
2
vex
2 I~ =
Now, y, + yy = mx; + X>) -_ 2 a be a
Hyperbola 7.29
\
~ sec@ —~ tan@ = I
NS
a h
It meets y-axis at A(O, — b cot 9).
“
> a he 4 B
=; REGIS
“s re
a) Gran s Xx
a2 i: OS
from the centre C of the hyperbola a - 7 =] . Perpendicular
cN is drawn on any tangent to it at the point P in the first
quadrant, Find the maximum area of triangle CPN,
Normal at point P is
[sal a ax cos 0+ by cot 0= de’
2 M
ZL
CNS
ye \
‘
——>x
ae2,2
It meets y-axis at B [o, —— tan 6
Now, circle with diameter as AB 1s

, |X 2,2
x +(y+bcot a[y-£2 ino}. 0
&peg}ae
Equation of tangent at P(4 sec @, 3 tan 0) 1s e
=> x+ty?-(a’e*)+ scat e wna|r=0
(3 sec @)x
— (4 tan @)y - 12=0
_ 12 Tlus circle passes through fixed points (+ ae, 0). distance between
CN which is 2ae.
V9 sec? 6+16tan’ @
2ae
= 20 (given)
Equation of normal at P 1s
e=2
4x cos @+ 3) cot = 25
25 ‘EXAMPLE 7.6 ~.
CM =
Vi6cos? 4+9cot? 6 Find the exhaustive set of values of a such that there exists a
tangent to the ellipse x” + 077 = o such that the portion of the
] tangent intercepted by the hyperbola a x7 — 4° = 1 subtends a
-. Area of tnangle CPN = 5 x CMx CN
right angle at the centre of the curves.
] 25x12 "Sol. | Equation of tangent at pot P(a@ cos @, sin @) 1s
=—x =
. 144481 cosec’@
+ 256 sin? +144
x x
—cos@+~sin@=]|
_ 150 a eo (1)
Let it cut the hyperbola at points P and O
\(9cosec@ - 16sin 8)? +576
Homogenising hyperbola a \* —y"=1 wet. line (1),
< __ 150 we get
.
~ 40+576 7 ee
ax —y
v
=(Zcoso+ sino)
A
. 15025 a
Maximum area of triangle CPN = 34 7g 84 waits
This 1s an equation of pair of straight lines OP and
6 rs
ier,
0g.
—
Given that ZPOQ = 90°,
a Pads 4
a 2)
EXAM
4
fy
PLE
a dal
- Ce
y Reg
HERisteomySOW tk
21)
a ARTES
Bye fa
e 2 hat
#5 1 Patty
ie
pets di %
Coefficient of x° + Coefficient of v=o
Semi transverse axis of hyperbola 1s 5. Tangent at point P
and normal to this tangent meet conjugate axis at A and B,
,
> cos’@ :
Tespectively. The circle on AB as diameter passes through = Or ~ =" -1-sin?@=0
a
‘Wo fixed points, the distance between which is 20. Find the
eccentricity of hyperbola. cos” @
= oe - s— - 1-14 cos*@=0
2 2
(Sol, Consider hyperbola a = |;
> cos*@= a? = (2-a")
Tangent to it at any point Pla sec 8, b tan &) is
+. iA
7.30 _ Coordinate Geometry
Adding (2) and (3), we get
Now, 0<cos*@s |
mI
- 3} pak
i)
~ Bg Hed
> 0 Fal aia
(é a 2 Y P2
av=l
2 l 1
Solving. we get => ree ae Lares Sree
Wiens: .
P P P2
wee 5 | Thus, p;, p and p, are in ELP
-
7.8 P|
‘EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE 7.7 ude and
If one axis of varying hyperbola is fixed in its magnit
ola of
Prove that the part of the tangent at any point of the hyperb position, then prove that the locus of the point of contact
on the other axis 1s a
2 2 a tangent drawn to it from a fixed point
a - + =] intercepted between the point of contact and the parabola.
a ob
transverse axis is a harmonic mean between the lengths of the 2 2
perpendicular drawn from the foci on the normal at the same Sol. Consider hyperbola ~~, - a = 1, where ais fixed.
point. a
A)
2 ? Let the coordinate of point P on the hyperbola be (a sec 0, b tan
“Sol... Equation of tangent to hyperbola s - a =1 at point = (h, k).
P(a sec @, 6 tan @) 1s g b Equation of tangent to hyperbola at point P is
xsecO ytan@ _| (1)
xsec@O
rsec@ | yj tan@ =| (1)
2 b
a b
Let this tangent pass through fixed point (0, c) on conjugate axis.
Equation of normal at point P 1s
—c tan @=b (2)
From a sec @=h and b tan 6 = k and using (2), we get
ax by 2
AF =ae
sec@ tan@
k h? 5
Tangent meets x-axis at O(a cos 0, 0) and normal meets x-axis at — =-tan* @ and —> =sec* @
Cc a~
Ge’a sec @, 0).
Adding, we get
3
k he
2p
> oH (6-8)
c
2 a” -
Hence, required locus 1s x° =-—(-c¢). which is a parabola.
c
EXAMPLE 7.9 4
In the figure, PO = p and length of perpendiculars from foci F, If normal at P to a hyperbola of eccentricity 2 intersects its
and F, on the normal are p, and p3, respectively. transverse and conjugate axes at Q and R, respectively. then
prove that the locus of midpoint of QR is a hyperbola. Find the
Now, —Pc BG. eccentricity of this hyperbola.
PR, AG
Sol. Consider hyperbola ~ - 7 =),
e? asec 0 —acos@ a
2 Normal to any point P(a sec @, b tan 6) on the hyperbola is

e asec@-ae
ax by y >
=a +b
_ &-cos?@ _ ¢ +0030 sec@ and
e* —ecos@ e
It meets x-axis at Q ) and y-axis at
Pp cos@
el
P * e
(2) r{o rd e
b
Similarly, we get
Let midpoint of OR be 7(h, &).
Pp _ cos6@
(3)
2 2
—e (a
>
+7 )sec@
’
and k= (a> +>) tan@
P2 ¢ Then =
2a 2b
Hyperbola 7.31
9.
Now, GL 1s perpendicular to the asymptote hx - ay =
SE
soupy > nigh
2h= ae" scc@s and 2kyp = —*_
tee
tang
d So, equation of GL ts
gh? thr ! ant by= ae’ x (1)
i ae oe ay = 0, we get x = x, for
ae i 3 Solving this line with asymptote hr
be point L
Thus, abscissa of ? and L are the same.
_ a ae1.
ae whichich 1s1s required
i locus. Therefore, LP 1s parallel to conjugate axis
oa ae ae
“4 4h- AMPLE 7611 de? a aie
Th ge tk
ual itis hyperbola having eccentricity

*E” piven by Curves (x - 1) (y- 2) = 5 and (x - 1) + (y+ oy
= / intersect
44 AABC lies on line
ae at four points 4, B, C and D. If centroid of
: 27 a2 y = 3x — 4, then find the locus of point D.
E-=1+ 4p" a any
a™e b , Sol. » Given hyperbola ts
4
(x- 1) 2)=5 a)
l and circle is
=l+—
e -l1
(e-1P ++ 2" =7 (2)
These curves intersect at four points A, B, C and D.
(as given that e = 2) We know that mean of these four points is midpoint of centres
of curves.
ig ee ts fae
A dae a Seon | 4 4
2 2
.
A normal is drawn to the hyperbola
x
-— — oa
}
=] at P which d*
=i cL 1+1 ee dy
1=\ - 2-2 =0
~ pb 4 2 4 2 :
meets the transverse axis at G. If perpendicular from G on
the asymptote meets it at ZL, then show that LP is parallel to
conjugate axis.
‘Sol: Equation of normal at point P(x, )4) 1s
ax bY _ 20? xy +X +X; = 4 —X4 and y, +i +43 Fioky
HOS So, centroid of triangle ABC is

Itmeets x-axis at G(e*x,, 0)
tats Yyty2 *H) (2% -¥
eed
-
yb »
-
3 3 3
ty
joy
ws Now, given that centroid lies on the line + = 3v - 4.
gf Fas (Ss )-4

Z : > —~X 3 3
O “—G
Ya = 3X4
Therefore, y = 3x, which is locus of point D.
7.32 Coordinate Geometry | P =
Exercises
[
of hyperbola from its
9, “the distan ces of one focus entricity 1s
‘
the n tts ecc
since are 5 and 3,
mt ‘ ond « 5 he th
Single Correct Answef Type f Pe POL a ae
(2) 2 (3) 4 (4) &
foci and the distance
ay v2 2
1. If the distance between the 2 v2
Mes yy _
v _ - =I
wm oY
2 o Xx
—_: be Confocal
I +=! and
between the two directricies of the hyperbola an a: 10. Let the curves .
ab
are i the ratio 3 2,thend ais Aanda> > bh) bh) having th eThen
(a>sulle foci at S, and S, Also, Ict P be
S,P and S>P are the root;
(ly) t v2 (2) V3-° v2 intersection
their point of
(3) 1*2 (4) 21 of quadratic equation
Fl5 2
2. There 1s a point P on the hyperbola a - a =| such that
(1) x2 + 2ax + (a? - A’) = 0
(2) x2-2Ax + (a? + A”) = 0
its distance from the right directrix 1s the average of its (3) x2-2Ax + (a - A?) = 0
distances from the two foci. Then the x-coordinate of P ts (4) x2 - 2ax + (a” ~A*)=0
(1) -64/5 (2) -32/9 wn from a point on hyperbola xray
11. Two tangents are dra
(3) -64/9 (4) none of these > >
3, The equation 2x? + 317 - Ba - 18) + 35 =k represents = to the ellipse = + = =1.1f they make angles @and 8
(1) no locus if k> 0 (2) anelhipse 1fk <0 with x-axis, then
(4) a hyperbola if k > 0 Nt
(3) apointifk=0
() @-B=45 (2) a+B=>
4. Let a and 4 be nonzero real numbers. Then the equation
(ax? + by? + e\(x? — Sav + 6y") = 0 represents (3) at+B=x (4) a+ B=0
(1) four straight lines, when c = 0 and a, b are of the same 12. Equation of the rectangular hyperbola whose focus 15
sign (1, -1) and the corresponding directrix is x—) + 1 =Ois
(2) two straight lines and a circle, when a = b and c ts of
(1) x-yP=1 (2) xy=1
sign opposite to that of a (4) 2xyt4x—4y—-1=0
(3) 2xy—4x+4yt+1=0
(3) two straight lines and a hyperbola, when a and 4 are of
the same sign and c 1s of sign opposite to that of a 13. If two circles (x + 4y° + y = [| and (x - 4y +1" =9 are
(4) a circle and an ellipse, when a and 4 are of the same touched externally by a variable circle, then locus of centre
sign and ¢ 1s of sign opposite to that of a of variable circle is
2 2 a
x v Bs v
5. Which of the following 1s independent of @ in the 1) —-—=1 2) —--=!l
2 yr (1) 15 l (2) 4 12
hyperbola —— - — =1,(0<a<n/2)? x? y? 2
icine cos;a@ sina So )
(1) Eccentricity (2) Abscissa of foci an
3 —-—=l
i a)4 pee a
(3) Directrix (4) Vertex 14, If the vertex of a hyperbola bisects the distance between
6. Which ofthe following pairs may represent the eccentricities its center and the corresponding focus, then the ratio of the
of two conjugate hyperbolas, for all a € (0, 2/2)? square of its conjugate axis to the square of its transverse
ax1s is
(J) sin @,cos @ (2) tan @, cot 8
(1) 2 (2) 4 (3) 6 (4) 3
(3) sec @, cosec @ (4) 1+sm @,1+cos 6
15. The eccentricity of the hyperbola whose latus rectum 1s 8
7. [fa variable line has its intercepts on the coordinate axes and conjugate axis is equal to half the distance between the
e and e’, where e/2 and e’/2 are the eccentricities of a foci is
hyperbola and its conjugate hyperbola, then the line always (1) 4/3 (2) 4N3
touches the circle x? + y* = 7, where r = (3) 23 (4) none of these
(1) J (2) 2
16. Let LL' be the latus rectum through the focus of the
(3) 3 (4) cannot be decided 2 z
hyperbola a. pb cw
8. A hyperbola having the transverse axis of length | and A’ be the farther vertev. If
2 sin @ is confocal with the ellipse 3x” + 4y? = 12 Then
AA'LL'1s equilateral, then the eccentricity of the hyperbola ts
Its equation is
(1) x* cosec@ - ” sec*@ = | (1) 3 (2) V+
(2) x° sec?@ —y¥ cosec’6 =]
17.
(3) (3 + v2 (4) (3+ WS
(3) x* sin’@ - 7 cos’@ = |
(4) x cos’6 -y' sm’0= |
(I) 2 (2) 2/3 (3) 4 (4) 4/5
Vv Hyperbola 7.33
:
The locus of F the Oa point of Mets
4Scetion Of the limes y the
:
tangents d rawn tot
Is Viv- AV32 = 0 and Van | Nn 25, Ifthe distance befween wo parallel
ANT 0 (whete fisa ’
>
a a)
parameter) Isa hyperbola whose eceentiicity 1s
equal tc
iy
hyperbola , 9 A) | 1S 4 then their slope
() va (2): 2
(ty 18/9 AWS
a) 23 (4) 44
fay ol the
(3) + 7/2 (4) none
a the cecentieny of the hyperbola y2— ,2 see’o - S45 V1
| then
26. i t
av t ?
hy i re t
' Stetangen t oft he th y fp 1% rhe la ; a
, trmes the eceentnenty of the ellipse y° see*ad \" 2$-qhen
gvaluc of Is ah asequal to
(2) ce
?.2
() nro (2) m4
(1) bMare*
Qn m3 (3) hee? (4) none of these
(4) w/2 rt
we a 1a Ae)
sq. The equations of the transverse
and conjugate axes 27. A tangent drawn to the hyperbola Paar
ata hyperbola are,
respectively, 4+ 2) 4 at
coordinate
> -1 +4 = 0. and then — 3 = 9 and forms a tnangle of area 3a° sq units with the
respective lengths are V2
and axes Then the square of its eccentricity 1s
>y3 The equation of the hyperbola (4) a 14
1s (1) 15 (2) 24 (3) 17
WW) zara ~3¥-30) pays] 28. Ifthe values of m for which the line » = me + 275 touches
tas
the hyperbola 16x? - 94° = 144 are the roots of the equation
ay Ha-v+42ayP42) 3721 va (a + b)x — 4 = 0, then the value of (a + A) 15 equal to
tajts
(1) 2 (2) 4
(3) Nae Be eee yey
(3) zero (4) none of these
(4) 2+ 2v-3P -3Qv-yp44yP =] 29. The locus of a point whose chord of contact with respect
y1. Consider a branch of the hyperbola x7 ~ 2)? — 2V3y — to the circle x + y” = 4 15 a tangent to the hyperbola x = |
4y2\ - 6 = 0 with vertex at the point 4. Let B be one of 1s a/an
the endpoints of its latus rectum. If C 1s the focus (1) ellipse (2) circle
of the
hyperbola nearest to the point 4, then the
area of tnangle
(3) hyperbola (4) parabola
ABC 18 30. The sides AC and AB of a AABC touch the conjugate
(1) 1-23 (2) ./3/2-1 hyperbola of the hyperbola 4 =
>
7-4
-
> lL. Ifthe vertex 4

(3) 1+,/23 (4) $3241
5
2 y a ,
les on the ellipse *5 + > = 1, then the side BC must touch
2 a
22. Let two points P and Q he on the hyperbola 75 - *, =
a
a =i, (J) parabola (2) circle
whose center C be such that CP 1s perpendicular to CQ, (3) hyperbola (4) ellipse
a<b Then the value of ae + we 18 31. The number of possible tangents which can be drawn te
the curve 4x° — 9)? = 36, which are perpendicular ta the
b°- a" Lid straight line Sx + 2y - 10 = 0, is
(I) 2ab (2) a Pb
(1) zero (2) 1 (3) 2
2ab Jo (4) 4
3 > >
" ba
(4
a
Eo fa Y
wb 32. The tangent at a point P on the hyperbola “5
— = =
a i
23. The angle
g between the Innes J joining g the origin to the points passes through the point (0, 4) and the norm
of intersection of the line V3x + y = 2 and the curve y? —x° 4 7 al at P passes
through the point (2aV2, 0) Then the eccen
=415
tricity of the
hyperbola 1s
(1) tan“ (23) (2) 2/6 (1) 2 (3) 3 (2) v2
(4) \3
33. The locus of the feet of the perpen
(3) tan7!(J3/2) diculars draw n trom
(4) 2/2 emthet focus onay arable tangent to the
> 5 hy perbola lov? — 942
4. A vanable chord
~
= 115
of the hyperbola = 2 =1.(b> a),
UW) vty" =o
2 (2) v4 Fe = 19
subtends a right angle at the center of the hyperbola if this
(3) V+ =7/ 144
chord touches vt = to
34, Pisa point on the hyperbola +,2 —:
(I) a fixed circle concentric with the hyperbola ¥ > Vand Vis the foot
of the perpendicular
~
.
fiom P on the transvers

. ‘
(2) a fixed ellipse concentric with the hyperbola e arts. The

tangent to the hyperbola at Pn
(3) 4 fixed hyperbola concentric with the hyperbola teels the tra nsy ere Ais at PP
IYO ts the center of the hype
rbola, : then, OT OY We
(4) a fixed parabola having vertex at (0, 0) (ly €
,
Qa
qual &
Q) be
(4) bye
7.34 Coordinate Geometry a = (2) a hyperbola
4 2 (1) a straight line
‘ AO a es (4) acircle
| The coordinates of a point on the hyperbola 34° 18 (3) an cllipse
which 1s nearest to the line 31 + 21+ 1 =
0 are
If x = 9 1s the chord of contact of the hyperbola
44.
(1) (6,3) (2) (-6.-3) -y=9, then the equation of the corresponding pairof
(4) (6,-3) 1 tangents is
(3) (6. 3) re
9 =0
By’ + 18x-
(1) 9x- ?
'-
re = | meets
. The tangent at a pomt P on the hyperbola an
@ at the (2) 9x- ? 9 =0
8)? - 18+ x
one of the directrix at F. If PF subtends an angle
corresponding focus, then 6= (3) 9x7 - 8) - 18x -9=0
(1) a/4 (2) m/2 (4) 9x2 — 8y° + 18x +9=0
at point P(A, k) on the hyperbol,
(3) 32/4 (4) x 45. i the ingen!
the
37. The locus of a point, fom where the tangents to af
y | cuts the circle x” +y =a ? at points O(x,.
yy)
rectangular hyperbola y?v7 -\° = a’ contai n an angle of 45°, a
b 1 1
is - R(x, 2), then the value of Wy + - IS
Ud) +?) tax -y)= 4a° 2
(2) 2x + yy + 4a*(x? - y) =4¢° (1)
2
k (2)a) k
(3) (x ty")? + 4a°(? - 9") = 4a"
(4) 2+ Py + ar -~)=a'
@ & 4) 4 +b
38. If tangents PQ and PR are drawn from a variable point
46. Let P(a sec 0, b tan 6) and O(a sec @, 6 tan 0), where
P to the hyperbola x —*+5 = 1, (a> 6), so that the fourth 7
a
A+ o= e be two points on the hyperbola a ~ - =1 If
vertex S of parallelogram PQSR lies on the circumeircle of
(h, k) 1s the point of intersection of the normals at P and
tnangle POR, then the locus of P 1s
Q, then k is equal to
() rti= (2) rts a
w Ae9e)
2 ay (tt)
ee
3) rty=a-B (4) none of these
y
>
ay
39. The number of points on the hyperbola *,
== ra
— =3 from
a
which mutually perpendicular tangents can be drawn to the y 2

47. A normal to the hyperbola zi cs a 1 has equal intercepts
circle x* + y = a" is/are
on the positive x- and y-axes. If this normal touches the
(1) 0 (2) 2 2
ellipse *; + <3 = 1, then a’ + b’ is equal to
(3) 3 (4) 4 a
40. If a ray of light incident along the line 3x +(5- 4v2)y (1) 5 (2) 25
x 2 (3) 16 (4) none of these |
= 15 gets reflected from the hyperbola 16 5 = |, then its
reflected ray goes along the line 48. The portion of the asymptote of hyperbola =4 ~ 2 2 =1
(1) xv2-y+5=0 (2) V2y-x+5=0 (between the center and the tangent at vertex) in the first
(3) V2 y-x-5=0 (4) none of these quadrant is cut by the line » + A(x - a) = 0 (A 1s a parameter)
The chords of contact of a point P wrt. a hyperbola and its Then,
41.
auxihary circle are at right angle. Then the point P lies on (1) AER (2) Ae (0, 0)
(1) conjugate hyperbola (2) one of the directrix (3) A € (-0, 0) (4) none of these
(3) asymptotes (4) none of these 2 +
49, If the angle between the asymptotes of hyperbola <-
eb re
42. The ellipse 4x” + 9)* = 36 and the hyperbola a’x? - y’
= 4 intersect at right angles Then the equation of the circle
= | is 120° and the product of perpendiculars drawn trom
through the points of intersection of two conics is the foci upon its any tangent is 9, then the locus of the point
of intersection of perpendicular tangents of the hyperbola
(1) P+y=5 can be
(2) V5(02 +7) -3x-4y=0
(1) x + y =6 (2) x? +)" =9
(3) V507 +7) + 3x+4y=0 (3) x7 + y =3 (4) x7 +)° = 18 , 3
(4) x+y =25 » Let any double ordinate PNP’ of the hyperbola a =
43. The locus of the point which is such that the chord of
2 = | be produced on both sides to meet the asymptotes in 0
contact of tangents drawn from it to the cllipse x oe =1 and Q'. Then PQ-P'Q is equal to
a
forms a triangle of constant area with the coordinate axes (1) 25 (2) 16
is (3) 4) (4) none of these
He apeibold Whos
ecentc Hyperbola /s+~
fare
Nd the aSyM
él. Foal to lines 2y +
athe hyperbol are ia oa = ptotes
(1) 6x + 3 - 4c =0 (2) 3x+ Fhe
6y-Se
a Passin g through (2:
» the Cquation
4) 1s (4) nonc of these coves
Cy i. 6r-e- 0
a) Get 3y— Sx + 2 ~ 8) = 49 whose asymp
60. The equation of a rectangular hyperbola
gy (xt 3r~ 8) + 2v— 5) = go are. = 3 and y = 5 and passing through (7, 8) 1s
y, +) zi
. 7 0
3) 2x + 3V~ B+ 2v~ 5) = 39
c
(1) ay-3y+5v+3=0 = (2) xy t3y + 4x +3

(4) none of these (3) xy—3y+5x-3=0 (4) xy~3y—Sx+3=0
asymptotes of the h x 4 61. If tangents OQ and OR arc dawn to variable circles rae
s
a ae 1 radius r and the center lying on the rectangular ane
OQ
xv = 1, then the locus of the circumcenter of triangle
Te =1 are perpendicular to each other. Then, is (O being the origin)
(1) a,/a, = b,/b,
(2) a\a, = byb, (1) xy=4 (2) xy = 1/4
(3) aa, + b,b, =0
(4) a, a .
he (3) xy=1 (4) none of these
g, IfS=0is the equ ation of the h yp 62. Four points are such that the line joining any two points 1s
" 9y+1=0, then the value of k erbolax* + Axy + 3y*— 4x4 If three
for which + K = 0 perpendicular to the line joining other two points.
its asymptotes is represents
points out of these le on a rectangular hyperbola, then the
(1) 20 (2) -16 fourth point will lie on
(3) —22 (4) 18 (1) the same hyperbola
s4, Iftwo distinct tangents can be drawn from the (2) the conjugate hyperbola
point (cr, 2)
on different branches of the hyperbola x (3) one of the directrix
) ~i= 1, then
(1) Jal < 3/2 (4) one of the asymptotes
(2) jaj>2/3
(3) la >3 (4) none of these 63. If S, and S, are the foci of the hyperbola whose length of
the transverse axis is 4 and that of the conjugate axis is 6,
§§, Ahyperbola passes through (2, 3 ) and
has asymptotes 3x — and S, and S, are the foci of the conjugate hyperbola, then
4y+5 =0 and 12x + S5y- 40 =0. Then, the equation of its the area of quadrilateral $,5,S,S, 1s
transverse axis is
(1) 24 (2) 26
(1) 77x-21y - 265 =0 (2) 21x~77 +265 =0
(3) 22 (4) none of these
(3) 2lx-77y— 265 =0 (4) 21x+77y—265=0 64. Suppose the circle having equation x* + y” = 3 intersects the
2 2
$6, From any point on the hyperbola — ~ 7 =1, tangents rectangular hyperbola xy = 1 at points A, B, C. and D. The
are
equation x” + 77-3 + Mxy —1)=0, A € R, represents
drawn to the hyperbola : ~ 2 = 2. The area cut-off by the (1) a pair of lines through the origin for A = —3
chord of contact on the asymptotes is equal to (2) an ellipse through A, B, C, and D for A= —3
(1) a/2 (2) ab (3) a parabola through A, B, C, and D for A=-3
(3) 2ab (4) 4ab (4) acircle foranyA eR
57. The combined equation of the asymptotes of the hyperbola 65. The equation of the chord joining two
points (x). ¥))
ax’ + Sxy + 2y? + Ax + Sy =O is and (x5, y2) on the rectangular hyperbola
xy = c* is
(1) 2x7 + Sxyp +2)? + 4x + Sy +2=0 x y x yp
+ —- = 2 | “ s my
(2) 2x? + Sxy + 2)? + 4x + 5y-2=0 (1) X, +X Yy+yr l (2) X= X35 + yi- —T =]
(3) 2x? + Sxy + 2 =0 TT x +oY = :x 2¥ _

(3) yy + yy xy +X, | (4) Vi-V2 a yo=3;= 1
(4) none of these
66. The locus of the foot of the per
- The asymptotes of the hyperbola xy = hx + ky are pendicular from the center
of the hyperbola xy = 1 on a variab
le tangent is
(1) x-~k=Qandy—h=0
(1) (7 ~ 5)? = dyy (2) (+9?) = Quy
(2) x+h=Oandy+k=0
(3) x-k=Oandy+h=0 (3) (x7 +9") = ayy (4) (+ yy 4xy
(4) x+k=Oandy-h=0 67. The curve xy =¢c, (c > 0),
two points. Then the distan
and the cir cle x? + vst
touch ¢
59, ce between the points of con
The center of a rectangular hyperbola lies on the line is tac}
¥*= 2x. If one of the asymptotes is x + y + c = 0, then the
(1) 1
other asymptote is (2) 2
(3) 2V2 (4) none of these
| 7.36 Coordinate Geometry =e
7. The differential equation dy/dx = 3y/2x represents a family

~ ~
| 68. Let C be a curve which is the locus of the point of

| intersection of lines v= 2 +m and my = 4 —m A circle of hyperbolas (except when it represents a pair of lines,
veQ-2¢ +0 + 1)° = 25 intersects the curve C at four with eccentricity
points P,Q. Rand S If O1s center of the curve C, then
a) V3 (2) 58
OP? + OQ" 4 OR? 4 OS 1s
(1) S50 (2) 100 (33225 (4) 25/2 (3) Jz (4) {5/2
al
Purstiees
. Ifthe cirele »* + 1° = a" intersects the hyperbola vy = cat
If P 1s a pot on a hyperbola, then
(1) the locus of the excenter of the circle described opposite
to ZP for APSS (S, S are foci) is tangent at vertex
|
four points P(.;. 14). Q Qa, V2). R (3, V3), and S (x4, V4), (2) the locus of the excenter of the circle described opposite
then to ZS’ 1s a hyperbola
| (1) yy tant
ag + =9 (3) the locus of the excenter of the circle described opposite
| (2) 1, #33473 4+14=0 to ZP for APSS’ (S, S are foci) is a hyperbola
(3) ¥)¥3¥3X4= rom (4) the locus of the excenter of the circle described opposite
to ZS’ 1s tangent at vertex
(4) V)¥3)'3V4 = cf
If the ellipse x? + 2y* = 4 and the hyperbola S = 0 have same
2. The equation (x — a) +(y— BY = K(x + my + n¥ represents
end points of the latus rectum, then the eccentneity of the
(1) a parabola for k<(P? +m’)! hyperbola can be
(2) anelhpse for 0 < k < (/ +m’) Xu n
(3) ahyperbola for k>(? +m’)! (1) cosec | (2) cosec >
(4) a point circle for k = 0

nt
(3) 2sinZ +sin 7 (4) V2sn 4 +sin
3. If (5, 12) and (24, 7) are the foci of a hyperbola passing
through the origin, then (where e 1s eccentricity and LR is
Latus Rectum)
10. For which of the hyperbolas, can we have more than one
pair of perpendicular tangents?
(1) e= 386/12 (2) e¢= 386/13
(3) LR=121/6 (4) LR=121/3
ay $a Q) F-57271
4. For the hyperbola 9x? — 16)° -18x + 32y -151 =0 @) x-y"™=4 (4) w=44
%)
(1) one of the directrix 1s x = 21/5 Il. The lines parallel to the normal to the curve xy = 1 is/are
(2) the length of latus rectum 1s 9/2 (1) 3x+4y+5=0 (2) 31 -4v+5=0
(3) foci are (6, 1) and (—4, 1) (3) 4x+3y+5=0 (4) 3y-4x+5=0
(4) the eccentricity 1s 5/4 Fro ie point (2, 2), tangents are drawn to the hyperbola
12.
5. Let a hyperbola passes through the focus of the ellipse
i; 2 2
a - 5 = 1. Then the point of contact lies in the
Vv
5 ae a 1. The transverse and conjugate axes of this (1) first quadrant (2) second quadrant
hyperbola coincide with the major and minor axes of the (3) third quadrant (4) fourth quadrant
| given ellipse. Also, the product of the eccentricities of the
given ellipse and hyperbola 1s 1 Then, 13. For the hyperbola : - 5 = |, let 2 be the number of points
x
[ (1) the equation of the hyperbola 1s 5 - on the plane through which perpendicular tangents are
drawn.
< y
(2) the equation of the hyperbola 1s ‘9 - 55 = ] (1) Ifm=1, thene = V2
(3) the focus of the hyperbola 1s (5, ») (2) Ifm> 1, then0<e<
v2,
(4) the vertex of the hyperbola is (5V3, 0) (3) lfm =0, then e > V2
2 2 (4) None of these
6. If the foc) of 5-5 = | coincide with the foci of ae +5
14, If the normal at P to the rectangular hyperbola v" ~ a
i = | and the eccentricity of the hyperbola is 2, then = 4 meets the axes at G and g and C ts the center of the
| (1) a +b = 16 hyperbola, then
(2) there 1s no director circle to the hyperbola (2) Pe =PC
(1) PG=PC
(3) the center of the director circle is (0, 0)
(4) the length of latus rectum of the hyperbola 1s 12 (3) PG= Pg (4) Gg=2PC
yyprr =
es equal to
. _ then €>
auonee™. to thevc hyperbola
hyperbola y — +2
va1 6 Passing through the
3. Way * A) 2!
(2) 3% 2
(1) 2!
| orig! .
(4) 5 2
vi v= ay) v2 3
(2)
(1) esr"
v- y= For Problems 4-6
(4) , a) a + (y ~ 3y
qd) gy -70 x v | and the circle
agents - which are paralle
parallel to the er
Ine 2) 4 v4 8=(Oare Consider the hyperbola 9 a
nto hyperbola" — 1" = 3° The pomts of contact of ss=9 v2 Vo2 =| are
16 7)"
nese gangents Is/are the ellipse
+ ~
. —
gi ve n hy pe rb ola and
Also, the
er.
(0) (2. 1) (2) (2,-1)
orthogonal to each oth tangents betwe
een
common
gy cad (4) (-2.1) 4. Combined equati
on of p air of
cire le 1s given by
the hyperbola and the
‘I the tangents to the hyperbola \7— 9)? = 9 are drawn from ay x +90
I" point (3, 2), then (1) 2)
x- 2 =0
tangent
? =0 (4) No common
(l) equation of one of the tangents 1s \ = 3 (3) 9" - 16x and the ee ate
nts on the hyperbola
Q) equation of one of the tangents 1s 5, — 12y+9=0 5. The number of poi cle and the yp
(3) the area of triangle that these tangents form with their ts drawn to the cir
, which tangen er !s
endicular to each oth
chord of contact 1s 12 sq units respectively, are perp
(3) 4 (4) 6
(4) the area of triangle that these tangents form with their (1) 0 (2) 2
i
the circle at points A and B and it
chord of contact 1s 8 sq. units 6. A variable line cuts |
and D. The locus of midpoin
the hyperbola at points C ec
ig, Cucles are drawn on the chords of the rectangular hyperbola points C and D always inters
AB such that tangents at
y=4 parallel to the line y = x as diameters All such circles the hyperbola, 1s
each other at the directrix of
pass through two fixed points whose coordinates are
(2) 2 +3? + 5x=31=0
(1) ety? + 5x-3y=0
(1) (2, 2) (2) (2, -2) FT +5x Rape e3) ree =0
(3) e- yt2 5x-3y=0 4) ey
(3) (-2, 2) (4) (-2, ~2)
For Problems 7-9

any focus of a
Linked Comprehension Type The locus of the foot of perpendicular from
is the auxiliary
hyperbola upon any tangent to the hyperbola
as
for Problems 1-3
2
circle of the hyperbola. Consider the foci of a hyperbola
(3, -2) and (5, 6) and the foot of perpendicular from the focus
Vv
(oosider an ellipse a
a - z 2 =1l(a>b). A hyperbola has
(5, 6) upon a tangent to the hyperbola as (2, 5).
vertices at the extremities of minor axis of the ellipse and
7. The conjugate axis of the hyperbola 1s
te length of major axis of the ellipse 1s equal to the distance
tetween the foci of hyperbola. Let e, and e, be the eccentricities (1) 4¥11.—s (2) 2V11-—s (3): AN22 (4) 2v22
ellipse and hyperbola, respectively Also, let 4, be the area of 8. The directrix of the hyperbola corresponding to the focus
te quadrilateral formed by joining all the foci and A, be the area (5, 6) 1s
ofthe quadrilateral formed by al] the directries
(1) 2x+2y-1=0 (2) 2+ 2-11 =90
L The relation between e, and e, is grven by (3) 2x+2y-7=0 (4) 2v+2v-9=0
(1) eje,= 1 (2) ey” (1 - e )=1 9. The point of contact of the tangent with the hyperbola 1s
(1) (2/9, 31/3) (2) (7/4, 23/4)
(3) e7(e? -1)=1 (4) ee, (1 -¢")=1
(3) (2/3,9) (4) (7/9, 7)
1 Ifthe tangent drawn at a point P on ellipse passes through
the focus of hyperbola, then the eccentric angle of point P For Problems 10-12
8(P lies in 1" quadrant) Let P(x, y) be a variable point such that
(1) tan! | — (2) tan7! | 2! [ex— 1 + 27 — Vea sheep —_—3

=3
which represents a hyperbola.

10. The eccentricit y ec’ _
of the Corresponding
(3) tan”! : (4) tan) 1 - ¢ hyperbola is conjugate
e,” -1
(1) 5/3
isl2) 4/3
(3) 5/45 (4) 47
Il. The locus of the intersection of two semendietas tangents For Problems 19-21
to the hyperbola ts The vertices of AABC he on a rectangular hyperbola such thay
the orthocenter of the triangle 1s (3, 2) and the asymptotes of the
rectangular hyperbola are parallel to the coordinate axes The
{wo perpendicular tangents of the hyperbola intersect at the point
1 ).
@) @-ar4+(v-Z)=
( ! ,
es 1s
19. The cquation of the pair of asymptot
(4) none of these
CR) ope b=a—y (2) xytlaxty
12. Ifthe ongin is shifted to the pot ( 3, 7/2) and the axes are (3) 2xyaxty (4) none of these
rotated through an angle @ in clockwise sense so that the r a
The equation of the rectangula hyperbol 1s
20.
+5
equation of the given hyperbola changes to the standard
7 =
(1) x=2x+y-
2 (2) 2xy=x+2y
(3) xy=x+ytl (4) none of these
on \
fonn “5 — —5 = 1, then 6 ts
a br
Thenumber of real tangents that can be drawn from the point

4
21. 4.
(1) tan’ 1(4/3) (2) tan’ '(3/4)
(1, 1) to the rectangular hyperbola 1s
(3) tan™'(5/3) (4) tan '(3/5) (4) 2
Cy: 4 (2) 0 (3) 3
For Problems 13-15
In a hyperbola, the portion of the tangent intercepted between the Matrix Match Type (H]
asymptotes 1s bisected at the point of contact.
Consider a hyperbola whose center is at the origin. A line x + y= 1. Let the foci of the hyperbola x“5 Yee = | be the vertices
2 touches this hyperbola at P(1, 1) and intersects the asymptotes 2 2
at A and B such that AB = 6V2 units of the ellipse x
a
+ 3 = |] and the foci of the ellipse be
13. The equation of the pair of asymptotes 1s the vertices of the hyperbola. Let the eccentricities of the
(1) Say + 2x? + Dy" = (2) 3x? + 4y* + 6xy= 0 ellipse and hyperbola be e,; and ey, respectively. Then
match the following lists.
(3) 2x7 +21 - 5xy=0 (4) none of these
14. The angle subtended by AB at the center of the hyperbola List I List n |
1s
(1) sin -143 (2) sin12 rs a. b/B 1s equal to p- | |
(3) sin”! 2 (4) none of these b. e;,+ e¢ can be q.2
15. The equation of the tangent to the hyperbola at (—1, 7/2) is c. If the angle between the asymptotes of the | r. 3
hyperbola 1s 27/3, then 4e, is equal to
(1) Sx+2y=2 (2) 3x+2y=4
(3) 3x+4y=11 (4) none of these d. If e2 = 1/2 and (x,y) 1s the point of intersection | s. 4
of the ellipse and the hyperbola, then 3x7/2)°
For Problems 16-18 1s |
A point P moves such that the sum of the slopes of the normals
drawn from it to the hyperbola xy = 16 1s equal to the sum of 2. Match the following lists.
ordinates of feet of normals The locus of P 1s a curve C List I List II
16. The equation of the curve C is a. The points common to the hyperbola p- (—5,-4)
x? —y" =9 and the circlev° +yr= 41 are
(1) x =4y (2) x7 = l6y
(3) x7 = 12y (4) Y=8x b. Tangentsare drawn from the point
17. If the tangent to the curve C cuts the coordinate axes at A (0, -9/4) to the hyperbolax* — »* = 9. Then the
and B, then the locus of the middle point of AB is point of tangency may have coordinates
(1) 7 =4y (2) x =2y ¢. The point which is diametnically opposite to

point (5, 4) with respect to the hyperbola x*
(3) x°+2y=0 (4) x7+4y=0 -y=9is
18. The area of the equilateral triangle inscribed in the curve C
d. If P and Q lie on the hyperbola\? — y=9
having one vertex as the vertex of curve C 1s
such that the area of the isosceles tnangle
(1) 772N3 sq. units (2) 776V3 sq. units POR, where PR = OR 1s 10 sq. units and R =
(0, ~ 6), then P can have the co-ordinates
(3) 760V3 sq. units (4) 768V3 sq. units
9.0) and B(2, 0) are two § Points :
xed
pol
=_
i ) pomtn
Sa The go¢
. Let: Sbe the siecle, i i= is tangent to the hyperbol: -
; ,atch thatthe i lowl
foli ing lists | ify = pn 4c
integral valuc
ae
i ee having cecentricity 5, then the Ieast positive
Ls
re 2s then the Number
then the number ofap points
Coast of mis .
p : y +3 = x’ + 4y, where
r] aA- PB = 2 and lying on x? 4 se 2 Sausfyng . Consider the graphs o fy=Arand
ve R. The number of p joints
pire 1, then the number of Points satsfyin | A 1s a positive constant and x,
pa- PB= 2 and lying on 3? + ve ne g in which the two graphs intersect ts
2
. If 4(v— V2)? +A(y—- V3)? =45 and (x- V2)? - ay V3)
of A 1s
is
a
= § cut orthogonally, then integral value
g. Forr= /2. then the number of common tangents Ve
by 45° in the
oy h
is . If the hyperbola x? — y = 418 rotated

keeping om axis
ee | anticlockwise direction about its center
= , wher! e@
‘ Match the following lists: intact, then the equation of the hyperbola 1s xy
Lith a
———_______
| List|
a’ 1s equal to
bola
a.If z 1s a complex number such that Im(z*) = . Tangents are drawn from the point (@, B) to the hyper
and ¢ to the
= 3, then the eccentricity of the locus is 3x7 2y? = 6 and are inclined at angles @
is
x-axis. If tan @- tan @ = 2, then the value of 20° — B
——
b. If the latus rectum of a hyperbola through! g.2

one focus subtends an angle of 60° at the
other focus, then its eccentricity 1s
_—_——_—
. The area of triangle formed by the tangents from the point
. IfA = (3, 0) and B = (—3, 0) and Pd - PB
= 4,
then the eccentncity of conjugate hyperbola
rV2 (3, 2) to the hyperbola x? — 9y’ = 9 and the chord of contact
1s
w.r.t. the point (3, 2) 1s
d.If the angle between the asymptotes of a 3
hyperbola is 7/3, then the eccentneity of its | 5 . Number of integral values of b for which tangent parallel
v “> -7
conjugate hyperbola 1s 2 x
to line y = x + 1 can be drawn to hyperbola roa R =]
« Ifthe ellipse x” + Key? =a" 1s confocal with the hyperbola 1S
y-y =a’, then match the following lists and choose the If tangents drawn from the point (a, 2) to the hyperbola
correct code. 2 2 ..
a gras perpendicular, then the value of a is
List I ListI]
a. Square of the ratio of eccentneities of hyperbola | p. 2
x”. 3
and ellipse 1s 10. Radi of director circles of curves —> + in =1 and
2 2 a
b, Ratio of major axis of ellipse and transverse | q. 3
S - a =| are 2r and r, respectively. If e, and e, are
axis of hyperbola 1s a b°
¢ If ellipse and hyperbola cut each other at an}, _| the eccentricities of ellipse and hyperbola, respectively,
angle 6, then the value of 2 cosec @1s then 4e,? - e, =
@ Ratio of length of Jatus rectum of ellipse and | 5 11. If L is the length of the latus rectum of the hyperbola
hyperbola 1s for which x = 3 and y = 2 are the equations of asymptotes
and which passes through the point (4, 6), then the value
Codes:
a abeoce d of L/V2 1s
)qoreos p
Cr pos q 12. If the angle between
a 3
the asymptotes of hyperbola
8) q s por r
(4) S r q Pp
a
—-—=l|
isjs —. then the eccentricity
ich
of conjugate
S|
hyperbola 1s
13. If the chord x cosa +y sn a = p of the hyperbola

2 2
Bs J
|. The eccentricity of the hyperbola
16 1g! Subtends a right angle at the center, and the
Vix~3y? + (y ~ 2)? - (+h + 4l)|=1is diameter of the circle, concentric
with th € hyperbola, to
which the given chord 1s a tangent is d,
then the value of
a dis
TT
a
gee
| ee INE
2,
a
JEE Main
(1) the equation of the
hyperbola 1s eA
ola 1s (2,0)
Single Correct Answer Type (2) a focus of the hyperb 2
hyperbola whose length
of the latus erb ola 1s acy
1. The eccentricity of the ent ric ity of the hyp
ate axis is (3) the ecc
lengt h of its conjug
rectum ts equal to § and the
ce between ts foc 1, is hyperbola Is e-3/=3
equal to half of the distan (4) the equation of the (IST-JEE 2011)
Wn 43 (2) 2/V3
(4) 4/3 (JEE Main 2016) x2 2
oy
G) V3 hyperbola ze a | parallel
has 3. Tangents are drawn to the
h the point P(Y2. V3 ) and
. A hyperbola passes throug |. The points of contact of the
this hyperbola at P also to the straight Ime 2x — y=
foci at (+2, 0) Then the tangent to tangents on the hyperbola are
passes through the point
9 ge-FPi
© (-a’
(ij dsfds WB) (2) V2, 2v3)
0 (Ee
(3) (2v2. 3V3) (4) (v3, V2) (4) (3V3, 2v2)
(3) (V3, -2V2)
“N\*
(JEE Main 2017) (IIT-JEE 2012)

4x? - y = 36 at the
3. Tangents are drawn to the hyperbola =] andacrurcle S with '
If these tangents intersect at the point 4. Consider the hyperbola # : x a9
points P and Q touch each other
7(0. 3) then the area (1n sq units) of APTQ 1s centre M(x, 0). Suppose that H and S
The common %
at a point P(x, y;) with x, > | and y, > 0.
(1) 36/5 (2) 455 s at point M If |
tangent to H and S at P intersects the x-axi
the correct
(4) 60V3 (JEE Main 2018) (i, m) 1s the centroid of the triangle PMN, then
(3) 54V3
expression(s) 1s (are)
JEE ADVANCED dl l
1) —=1-—-= forx, >1
Single Correct Answer Type >
) dx, 3x7
2 o
1. Let P(6, 3) be a point on the hyperbola a - 2 =1 Ifthe
normal at the point P intersects the x-axis at (9, 0), then the
S=—A—
Q) pelle forx,>1
orx
ay 3fx? |
eccentnicity of the hyperbola 1s
a) 52 (2) /32 (3)

dl
A digets forx, > 1
ax, 3x,
(3) V2 (4) V3 (IIT-JEE 2011)
dm
(4) o, “a 1 for x, > 0 (JEE Advanced 2015)
1. An ellipse intersects the hyperbola 2x7 - 2y? = 1

5. If 2x - y + 1 = 01s tangent to the hyperbola =i daily
orthogonally. The eccentricity of the ellipse 1s reciprocal a 16
of that of the hyperbola If the axes of the ellipse are along then which of the following CANNOT be sides of a right
the coordinates axes, then angled triangle? :
(1) the equation of the ellipse 1s r+2y=2 (1) 2a, 4, | (2) 2a, 8,1
(2) the foci of the ellipse are (+1, 0) (3) a,4,1 (4) a, 4,2
(JEE Advanced 2017)
(3) the equation of the ellipse is v+2y=4
(4) the foc) of the ellipse are (V2,0) (IIT-JEE 2009) Linked Comprehension Type
For Problems 1 and 2
2. Let the eccentricity of the hyperbola a So % = 1 be ,
a
The circle x° + 3 y* — 8x = 0 and hyperbola ae ke | intersect at
reciprocal to that of the ellipse x” + 4y’=4, Ifthe hyperbola
P oints A and B (LIT-JEE 2010)
passes through a focus of the ellipse, then
ZZ quation of a common ¢ Hyperbola 7.44
c
I “cle as well as to the h Meent with Positiy
¢ slope to LY:
ine YPerbola js
(List 1) a t 5 1s
(V3. 5]
If the tangent to a suitable conic
(1) a
sr200 (2) See
2 ee i of: the fol lowing
i + 2y = 4, then which
foundound to to be V3v
options 1s the only COR RCT combination
j wear reo (4) W314 429
the equation of the circle with 4B a8 Its diameter 1s (1) (I) Gi) (R) (2) (IV) (av) (S)
(l) yt! os 12
(3) (TV) (in) (S) (4) (1) (av) (R)
a) ety + lav + 24=9 (List I) 15 founto be
i
If a tangent to a suitable conic
2 part 24y—12=0 y =x +8 and its point of contact 1s (8, 16), then bnatton®
the re lkewinig options ts the only CORRECT com
ay vty24 -12=0
wii Match Type (1) (UI) (1) (P) (2) (III) (1) (Q)
1, Match the conic in List I with the (3) (II) (iv) (R) (4) (J) (ii) (Q)
Statements/expressions
in List Il. oars
(IIT-JEE 2009) For a= V2, if a tangent 1s drawn to a suitable ST
fant
|
-
in of contact (-1,
at the point 1), t hen which of the follow
List I
°°» + ==
—— List I] combination for obtaining

onions is the only CORR RECT
a. Circle Pp. The locus of the Point (A, k) for
which the | its equation?
line hx + ky = 1 touches
the circle
Ptyteg (1) (I) (1) (Q) (2) (IID) (4) (P)
b, Parabola q- Point z in the complex

plane satisfying
(3) (1) (i) (P) (4) (1) (1) (Q)
le + 2|-\z—2)=43 2 2
. Leta. lee
a Sen 1, where a> b> 0, be a hyperbolain
« Ellhpse r. Points of the conic have parametnic Be
rep-
resentation x = v3a(l-r \ = 2r the xy-plane whose conjugate axis LM subtends an angle
1+2P? ap of 60° at one of its vertices V. Let the area of the tangle
d. Hyperbola s. The eccentneity of the conic lies in the LMN be 4y3.
interval ] <x <0
List I List 0
t. Ponts = in the complex plane satisfying
Re(z +1)? = [2 +1 P. The length of the I. 8 !
conjugate axis of H 1s |
for problems 2-4 Q. The eccentricity of | |
‘uswer Q.2, Q.3, and Q4 by appropriately matching the Hs <x |
“formation given in the three columns of the following table.
uss I, I] and II contain conics, equation of tangents to the R. The distance between | MI. >
“mcs and points of contact, respectively. the foci of H 1s aa
List I List 1 List 111 S. The lengthofthelatus | IV. 4

Me ty (i) my = mx +a ies (2.24 | rectum of H 1s
mm The correct option 1s:

ie
4M) rt¢@y ; ; (1) PoIV;Q>1,R51ELS5

= (ii) y=mx+aym* +1 Q) | =m |
(2) PoIV;Q>ILLRoOLS on
‘ Vm? +) lia +1
(3) PoIV;.Q>ELROUS oH
(4) PIL Q>IWV;RSILS
(iii) y= mx+Va'm -1 (R) on — | 3]
vam +1 Ja mr’ +1 Numerical Value Type
ie
’) i ;
1, The line 2x + y= 1 ist ang
ent to the hyperbola ae
red (iv) y=mx+Va'm+1 (S) -a'm ] SY Wiss
If this line passes through a bf
| the Point Of intersection
Vat? -] Va'm -1
nearest directrix and the of the
A-aXis, then the eccentricity
(JEE Advanced 2017) hyperbola is of the
(UT-JEE 2010)
Answers Key en rae eee

EXERCISES Matrix Match Type
i ‘dos
Single Correct Answer Type Le a9 ps B ty SS “2-4
1. 1) f (1) 3. (3) 4. (2) 5. (2) 2. a>pans, b>grc>7pd>ps
6. (3) 7 (2) 8. (1) 9. (2) 10. (4) 3. a>p,b—>s,c—>nd>P

We) 12) 13 GB) 14 GB) 8, ) 4: a1 b> pie 8.824
16. (4) 17. (1) 18. (2) 19. (2) 20. (2) 5. (3)
21. (2) 22. (4) 23. (3) 24. (1) 25. (1) Numerical Value Type
26. (1) 27. (3) 28. (3) 29. (3) 30. (4) (5) 2 (5) 3 (4) 5
31. (1) 32. (2) 33. (4) 34. (2) 35. 3)
36. (2)(2 37. (3)3 38. (3) 3%. (1) 40. (4) 6. : (7) 7. . (8)(8
5
8. ; (2)
13. (24)
9. (3) 10. . 6 (6)
$1. (3) 42.1) 43. (2) 48. (2) 45. 2) TG) te
46. (4) 47. (4) 48. (2) 49. (4) 50. (2) ARCHIVES
51. (2) 52. (3) 53. (3) 54. (1) 55. (4) —
56. (4) 57. (1) 58. (1) 59. (4) 60. (4) JEE Main
61. (2) 62. (1) 63. (2) 64. (1) 65 (1) Single Correct Answer Type
66. (4) 67. (2) 68. (2) 45502) 2. (3) 3. (2)
Multiple Correct Answers Type JEE ADVANCED
1. (1), (2). (3), (4) 2. (2), (3), (4) os cen —
3. (1), (3) 4. (1), (2), (3), (4) one es pegenneweeye
5: (1); @) 6. (1), (2), (4) '
7. (2), (4) 8. (1), (2) Multiple Correct Answers Type
9. (1), (4) 10. (2) 1. (1), (2) 2. (2), (4)
Il. (2). (4) 12. (3), (4) 3. (1), (2) 4. (1), (2). (4)
13. (1), (2), G) 14. (1), (2), (3). (4) 5. (2), (3), (4)
15. (1). (2) 16. (2), (4) Linked Comprehension Type
17. (1), (2), (4) 18. (1), (4) 1. (2) 2. (1)
Linked Comprehension Type Matrix Match Type
1. (2) 2. (3) 3. (4) 4, (2) 5. (3) 1 : —,
6. (1) 7. (4) 8&2) 9% @) 10. (3) i 252 @ 30) 44) & 0)
WW. (4) «12. (2) 13. (1)—s«d14. B)— 8. 2) Numerical Value Type
16. (2) 17. (3) 18. (4) 19. (2) 20. (3) 1. (2)
21. (4)

Cengage Coordinate Geometry (1) - Compressed

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cengage Coordinate Geometry (1) - Compressed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents

41 48 Matrix Match Type +50

5.27 Concept Application

Concept Applicati on Exercise

I r of the tangle with

Thuis V¥=. hand Y=, k

cos @ and sin @ me or equivalently

From trigonometric concepts v= Nthands =Y+A

Find the equation referred to the original axes. \ cos @ sino

Given the equation 4x7 + 2v3 xy t 2 = 1. Through what | |

angle should the axes be rotated so that the term xy 15

1. 1/2 sq. units 2. 5 units 3. (-7, 3)

3 = Xsin @~ ¥cos 6. OO,.¥3)

1 (X sin 9+ Ycos @) + b(Xsin 6+ Y cos Oy

Sol. Let point B and C lie on the \ “ants ILLUSTRATION 1.12

O(0, 0) — = +++ A(3, V3)

y ' Let the coordinates of P be (x, y).

gO(x,Vv) (0, 2 V3) 01 (3, -V3)

Taking ins two relations, we get

-(B-T +R] = 02,

which 1s not possible as RM cannot be more than radius ay a2

Area of n-sided Polygon

B= (ap. 9) = (K+ 1,24), and C=

[{Qr2 — AsV) + (Xgpy = xy) + or (4k - 6) —4(k - 1) + (4 + KAR - 2) = 0

C= (x3,3) = (¢ + 3, A) be the vertices of the given triangle Then 1] 3 4

= = |{x,(v2 — 3) + 4203 — 4) F230) - yy} |

Sol. Here, given points are_in cyclic order. Therefore,

Clearly, this vatue will be rational. yi—xva] (1)

7 Q in x-axis 1s O'(4, 2).

Now, from triangular inequality, PR + RO 2 PQ - |-3V2 cos @ + 3V2 sin 6|

0 APPLICATION EXERCISE 1-2

Let us find the coordinates of point P mv, — MD,

aie” Pw) nr fare

e The coordinates of point which trisects 18 are

im the ratio 3° 2, The coordinates of the midpoint of BD are

Alternatively. #P i (From the figure) AC =\{4-(-2))? + 3-(-DP = 2V13

AD-AB 3-1 P, divides P, 4, 1n 1:2

“Let A(x),¥1)s Bp,¥2) and and be s

Note: BE 3 BEXOP _ area of AOBE

JeeUSTRATION 1.28 sR x OE x sin(z — 2B)

De ( 3(-1) - 1G) _3(2)- 2) - ( -3, +]2

3-1 ° 3-1 sin2B+sin2C _ 2sin(B+C)cos(B-C) _ cos(B-—C)

ELUSTRATION 1.29 In AODE, OD = OB cos A = Ros A Also,

¥, sin 24+ y, sin2B+ y, sin c)

x; tan 4+x, tan B+

HAC and H.4B, respectiv

2c+a 2d+b 2c+a 2d+b

Sol. This 1s a mght-angled (at the origin) triangle Theref

The circumcentre and centroid of a triangle are (3, 4) and B D(x)

es of B and C are (-S, y'and (on

and a= BC= \(-5- 99° +(5-3y = 10v2

To find the coordinates

So. from (2). we have

8. The vertices of a triangle are A(x), x; tan 0),

So p E OF LINE JOINING GIVEN Two PoINrTs S » 5-4

tte) (ii) Line 3x-4 + y

0.- 4B" ILLUSTRATION 1.40

ILLUSTRATION 1,38 (0, d)D

Determine the value of x so that the line passing through (3, 4) Sp

From (1) and (2), we

Sol. Let nz, and m, be the slopes of BA and BC, respectively.

ANGLE BETWEEN TWO LINES 3-1 2_1

As shown in the figure, one of the angles between lines /, and 8